. ee
ree pie te"
Titian
3 » iF
en mot be
7 a oig atlied IR Nt EP et I tS ath,
SL EE NE ER Br ont
O3eee ic)
of
spat
a }
CaM lin Cn as , \
Wy | 7 a i, ; i
yt Masa ene LANY liteseaai iy
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2009 with funding from
Ontario Council of University Libraries
http://www.archive.org/details/transactionsmic30ameruoft
a (
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED I8QI
PUBLISHED QUARTERLY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXX ro
e OG = aes
NUMBER ONE ee A BO
LG:
Decatur, ILL.
Review PrintTinG & STATIONERY Co.
1911
NOTICE TO MEMBERS
The Secretary begs to inform the members of the Society that
the membership is having a very satisfactory growth since the last
issue of the Transactions. Without question the policy outlined
there, which has since had the sanction of the annual meeting, is
appealing both to the old members and to others interested in
Biology and in the Microscope,—physicians and teachers.
A membership of 400 will enable the officers to publish regu-
larly a Quarterly the size of the last issue (100 to 125 pages).
If each member will secure and recommend at least one new
name, we can have a membership of 400 in a short time. One
busy member has added 7 to the membership in the last month.
Will the members generally not show some of that interest in
the Society that you rightly expect of your Secretary, and extend
to the Society the benefit of your personal acquaintance and influence
with people who might be, or become, interested.
OFFICERS.
Presidents Au Eu ELERTZEER VMN. 2 be ee Sana ye eranah Ube avaliae Kansas City, Mo.
Vice President: M. J. Evrop......... Aa Ue AMIE A aan aah Missoula, Mont.
ISZGRE LATA HIN LT) WN GALL OWA Wis sclera alerebetee pale ena pstalcbotay al atelier ab atelersya1 a Decatur, Ill.
RC OUSUPLE Ile let EVAINIRSE ISON s/c ce iat Nha cual oiailetay evar clststiet heloteustai ele Charleston, Ill.
GUS 70 HON ANUAGNUS MEELAUIM Maines ceaiclelelcie cia sieike sleelatel Meadville, Pa.
ELECTIVE MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
eT OL COLMA eine Van aume alu ALA cian ie SMPs ERA IL aaa aly AU oe Lincoln, Neb.
TL! TBS NWO 04 Wot pele aint aU Meir Rig es tir ty Sas ex Om RAGE CMR ae RU Gambier, Ohio
TEL TINGS {Coe eh Je eR RNA I ALR) A oY PD ta LH A AH Buffalo, N. Y.
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
ROE VViARD, MoD!) BRIM. S. ofiiroy, Ney. ,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1879.
J. D. Hyatt, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
Apert McCatta, Ph.D., of Chicago, Il.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883.
T. J. Burritt, Ph.D., of Urbana, III.
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gero. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Buffalo, N. Y.,
at Detroit, Mich., 1890.
MarsHALL D. Ewett, M.D., of Chicago, III,
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Simon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1895 and 1906.
A. CiirForp Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1896.
A. M. Brette, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. Ercenmann, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., 1901.
CuHartes E. Bessey, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
E. A. Birce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
Hersert Ossorn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
; at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXX, Number 1
The Address of the President. Some Thoughts Concerning the Scope
and Future Work of the American Microscopical Society, by Herbert
Oshorit (eco sk ied ence ct ot ss sae ee Sent eee Lee ee eee 5
Studies on a Phosphorescent Bermudan Annelid, Odontosyllis Enopla
Verrill, by T. W. Galloway and Paul S. Welch, with Plates I to V... 18
The Etiology of Trachoma, by H. C. Solomon, with Plate VI............. 41
The Theory of Nerve Components and the Fore Brain Vesicle of Verte-
brates iby Le Mvaridacrels ssc ccc oe nie ele soley ee ice ee eRe 57
Notes, Reviews, etc. A Plea for Microscopy; Some of the Needs of the
Society; Micrometric Measurements; The Centrosome in Living
Protoplasm; Life Cycle in Ameba; Diatoms as a Food Supply; A
Peculiar Achlya; Transformation of Species of Vaucheria; Sexual
Periodicity in Dictyota; Quinone Fixation of Algae; Growth of
Nerves in Culture Media; Causes of Conjugation in Paramecium;
Bacillus of Typhus; Device for Transferring Specimens; Charts to
Suit the Course; The Build of a Microscope; The Leitz Double Dem-
Onsthatlonass Eyepiece navi ee ek esis im halen Ree Oe eee 67
Necrology.
William Henry Seaman, LL.B. M.D., with Portrait, by S. L.
Asaiby, > ING AR 9. 2k eae en Se ain basse k pterete eae osetia oa 79
NOTICE
The financial statements of the officers did not reach Minne-
apolis in time for audit and approval by the Society in its annual
meeting. The Auditing Committee appointed to receive these reports
has not found it possible to audit them in time for publication in
the January number.
All the minutes of the meeting, therefore, together with the
reports of the Treasurer and Custodian will appear in the April
number.
The names of the newly elected officers appear on the pre-
ceding page.
TRANSACTIONS
OF
American Microscopical Society
(Published in Quarterly Installments)
Vol. XXX JANUARY 1911 No. 1
THE ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN., DECEMBER 27-28, 1910
SOME THOUGHTS CONCERNING THE SCOPE AND
FUTURE WORK OF THE AMERICAN
MICROSCOPICAL |SOCIETY
By HERBERT OSBORN
It is no doubt sufficiently evident to the members of the So-
ciety that it is at present in a particularly critical period of its
history. It is equally evident that something decisive should be
done in the near future either to provide for the perpetuation
and growth of the society, or its dissolution in some manner that
shall be consistent with the important and dignified position it has
occupied in the past.
To those who have followed the fortunes of the society from
the beginning, there is doubtless a profound sorrow in any thought
that the organization can have outlived its usefulness; but they
are not alone in such feeling for I believe it strictly true to say
that many of the members who have come into the society in later
years, and who have become at all acquainted with its history
and achievement of the third of a century, cherish a deep regard
for it and a hope that it may continue in its honorable career.
That the society should have outlived the particular sphere
of service for which it was founded is but a consequence of
growth and changed conditions, part of which are largely due to
5 HERBERT OSBORN
the activities and success of the society itself. It does not follow,
however, that the society cannot take on new activities or adapt
itself to new forms of service in the interest of the subjects it
was organized to promote. To do this, however, may involve a
candid recognition of the changed conditions and a willingness to
adapt its work accordingly.
It seems, under the circumstances, not only proper but per-
haps a duty that, as President of the Society, | should open up the
question as it appears to me and at least suggest some lines along
which the thought and discussion of the members may be directed.
In doing so, however, I trust I may not be understood as urging
any particular policy in an official capacity but as presenting cer-
tain facts and conditions as they have been forced upon me in
the time during which I have been a member and officer in the
society.
Of the different factors which have conspired to weaken the
society in recent years, two I think should be considered as of
special importance since they are the two which have a contin-
uous effect. First, the specialization of many branches in which
the microscope is used as an instrument and the consequent diver-
sion of members (and the papers resulting from their work) into
other societies and, second, the great multiplication of technical
societies which has made it increasingly difficult and burdensome
for scientific workers to retain membership and to present the
results of their studies in the different societies in which they might
be interested. The American Microscopical Society is not alone
in being affected by these conditions and in fact has suffered less
than some which might easily be compared with it in scope of
activity and length of life.
The microscope, as we will all admit, is an instrument for
service in many varied lines of research and instruction. During
the years of its development it formed in itself a great field for
investigation and experiment and no one can measure the service
to science at large, or to human industries and human welfare in
general, by the societies which stimulated to the utmost the im-
provement and perfection of the instrument. While this improve-
ment is still in progress we have reached such a degree of per-
fection that the new developments are extremely technical and for
THE ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT yf
the most part interest the general microscopist only after becom-
ing available in his work. We are working with a highly per-
fected tool and most of us are much more concerned with the
results of our work than with the instrument with which we work.
In the early days of this society the microscope was a fad
and microscopical clubs flourished in many places. Comparisons
of work and tests of favorite instruments was as great an item
to its votaries as that of airships today for the aviators.
In the same spirit there arose hosts of camera clubs with the
camera as the basis, and these flourished and declined in due time
and now photography is as much a servant of all branches of sci-
ence aS microscopy.
So too, the bicycle had its day of development and exploita-
tion with hosts of clubs and societies the most of which have dis-
appeared with the universal use of the vehicle and the appear-
ance of other attractions for the amateurs. The automobile shows
the same course and doubtless the societies for promotion of aero-
nautics will likewise have their day, serve their purpose and in
time follow the course of mundane things.
It is certainly no discredit to the microscope that its position
has changed from that of a scientific toy or a basis for the excite-
ment of the wonder of the multitude, the gratification of the “Oh
my!” instinct in humanity to that of any every day tool for the
use of the world; that it should have become the necessary basis
for innumerable lines of work and occupy its place in the labora-
tory, the schcol room, the physician’s office, the laboratories of
the experts in geology, chemistry, mining, bacteriology, entomology,
and in fact, almost every branch of study or activity that one can
name.
This general utility is just what its devotees claimed for it
in its period of development, and just what they wished for and
expected from their knowledge of the practical value of the in-
formation to be gained by a proper study of the minute things of
nature that were to be understood only by such enlargement to
vision as was accomplished by the microscope.
The scope of this society, however, was broader than the mere
exploitation of an instrument, in fact has covered the different
8 HERBERT OSBORN
fields of scientific research in which the microscope and microsco-
pical methods have been a factor.
While a large part of its early life may have centered in pop-
ular displays and exhibition of different types of instruments and
in the accomplishment of spectacular feats possible with different
makes, it has also stood for solid progress in microscopical tech-
nique and for results.of scientific value in the special fields of sc1-
ence in which it must be used.
Then if the society has accomplished the purpose for which
it was organized. is there any reason for its continuance? Some
argue that having done so, the best policy is for it to gracefully
admit the logic of events and die and take its burial in the most
dignified manner possible.
But are the objects for which it was organized fully accom-
plished? Is there no more work which it may legitimately and
successfully pursue? Does its membership feel that the time has
come for it to permanently disband and turn its strength and vital
forces into other organizations which just at the present time appear
blessed with greater vitality? These are questions confronting us
and which demand candid and fair consideration not only in justice
to the present organization but for those who in future years might
find in this society the most favorable conditions for their scientific
progress.
Personally I feel that there is advantage in numerous independ-
ent agencies for the encouragement of scientific research, in order
that every earnest, honest, scientific worker may, if possible, find
his opportunity and a medium for his recognition in the world of
science. One reason why a great amount of the scientific product
of the past has come from the universities has been that they have,
throughout their history, represented the greatest freedom of activ-
ity, and that in some one or another of them the ardent seeker for
knowledge has found opportunity and a hearing. So then I would
regret to see any organization which can offer opportunities for
independent action and the encouragement of scientific research
cease its efforts or relinquish its control of its resources.
As a practical means of continuing its activity, there is the
plan of publishing an annual volume, or the papers available in a
quarterly as may be deemed most expedient, which would avoid
THE ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT 9
the suspension of a publication now numbering 29 volumes, and
which includes in these volumes a great number of valuable con-
tributions to science.
Whether a special effort should be made to convene the society
in a regular annual session may be open to discussion. Certain it
is that the history of the last ten years has shown the improbability
of securing any such attendance on these meetings as marked the
earlier gatherings. Nor do I believe that much change in this respect
can be expected. The day for spectacular displays in the line of
microscopy is past. We are working as microscopists on problems
in which the tool is subordinated to the subject and while triumphs
of microscopy are numerous and illuminating, they appear in the
light of triumphs of some special field in which the microscope is an
essential and recognized necessity.
But meetings and the reading of papers in public are by no
means an essential function of a society. In these days of rapid
publication the printed page is more potent than the spoken address,
at least for most of scientific contributions, and a well edited journal
with a varied range of articles, such, for instance, as the admirable
number just from the press, can serve a most useful purpose to
science and at the same time serve to keep our membership in touch
and enthused with the opportunities open to all.
There is further the question as to the Spencer-Tolles Fund
which the Society is in duty bound to preserve and administer in
such a manner as to promote the objects for which it was founded
and toward which so many individuals have contributed. Whether
the fund could be disposed of in any creditable manner so as to
relieve the Society of this responsibility is a legal question which I
do not undertake to discuss, but this much is certain, that it was
given with the expectation that it be administered by this Society
and until it is proven that the Society is unequal to the task it is
safe for it to do this to the best of its ability.
With the income now available from this fund it is certainly
possible with the earnest effort of devoted officers to encourage
research along a number of lines appropriate to the sphere of the
Society.
Among the lines of work particularly open for this Society,
it appears to me there are especial opportunities in Parasitology and
10 HERBERT OSBORN
Aquatic Biology. Neither of these subjects has as yet any official
publication in this country, and both are subjects in which there is
great activity and need of encouragement in the way of avenues
of publication.
In the field of Parasitology there has been a marvelous growth
in knowledge of those organisms which are related to disease, and
investigations in this matter will certainly be greatly multiplied in
the years to come. On account of the minuteness of the forms and
their modes of transmission, the problems connected with them are
essentially microscopic and they involve a great deal of special
technique which can be most appropriately developed by means of
this Society and its publications issued in its journal. Even among
the parasitic forms included in the group of insects, there 1s
wide opportunity for investigation, and while much of this matter
might be issued through the Entomological journals, there is much
investigation in this field, especially that which involves particular
microscopic technique, which might very appropriately be consid-
ered as belonging within the sphere of this Association. Certainly
papers in this line would be most welcome to the Society and reach
a very appropriate audience. Perhaps no better emphasis of this
point could be asked than the excellent summary of Prof. Ward
just issued in the Transactions.
For the development of Aquatic Biology which has already
been a considerable feature in the Society, there is no really special
journal in America, and as has been already suggested, the Society
may very properly give itself particularly to this line of work. The
questions for investigation in this direction are of such varied
character and involve a development of so many different phases of
Biology, that they do not in many cases fall strictly within the
limits of any of the common fields of investigation. While the
organisms themselves may be assigned to particular groups of plants
or animals, the relation they bear to each other, the ecologic condi-
tions of their existence, and the particular technique in their inves-
tigation, furnish a very distinct series of problems, and in these
there seems to be a most attractive and important field for the
members of this Society.
Further, there is a large field still open in the matter of develop-
THE ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT Ey
ment of technique and particularly of the special methods of work
in certain fields of microscopical investigation which will for a
long period yet offer abundant opportunities for investigation. That
such work belongs essentially to this Society I think no one will
question, and the contributions and discussions in such lines, and
especially of reviews of progress in various fields of Biological
research will give ample room for many workers. A special depart-
ment of Technique will I believe still prove a very popular feature.
Perhaps one particularly useful feature of the Society may be
to bring together workers in the more special branches, and furnish
a common basis for the comparison of methods of work and condi-
tions for progress in their separate fields. This is particularly true
of those lines of investigation which for their progress must depend
upon the bringing together of data from quite varied fields of work.
Altogether it appears that there is still abundant room and a distinct
field of endeavor for the Society.
STUDIES ON A PHOSPHORESCENT BERMUDAN ANNE-
LID, ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL.
By T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAut S. WELCH
Contributions from the Biological Department, James Millikin
University, No. 7.
I. INTRODUCTION AND NATURAL HISTORY.
During the summer of 1904 the senior author, while working at
the Bermuda Biological Station, had the opportunity to observe
with some care two appearances of a remarkably interesting phos-
phorescent annelid.* The laboratory was at that time located at
Hotel Frascati on the Flatts Inlet to Harrington Sound. The tide
runs freely into and out of the Sound by way of the Inlet. The
worms appear periodically in the waters of this inlet in considerable
numbers and with striking regularity. It was reported to me that
they also occur in the waters of St. George’s Harbor. In all like-
lihood they are to be found at numerous points about the Islands.
Two appearances were observed by me at Frascati, and a third
was reported to me. The first occurred July 3-7, with a maximum
on the 4th; another July 29-31, with a maximum on the 30th. The
latest appearance was reported to me as occurring on August 23;
but details are lacking as to its duration. There is thus an interval
of about 26 days between these maxima.
The full meaning of this interval is not clear. The lunar month
is, however, at once suggested. This would in all probability come
to be established through the tides, either alone and directly, or in
connection with light variations produced by tidal variation. These
agencies might possibly become operative in two ways: (1) in con-
nection with the formation of the sexual cells, and (2) in their
*The indebtedness of the writers'is hereby acknowledged for courtesies extended by
the Bermuda Biological Station (supported by the Bermuda Natural History Society and
Harvard University) and by Professor Edward L. Mark, its Director. The identifica-
tion of the worm was made by Dr. J. Percy Moore of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia.
14 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
release. How the effects are wrought in this case we are not ina
position to say. The matter should receive more careful local study.
According to the tide tables, the tide was at its lowest for the
day in the Bermudas on July 4 about 6:30 P. M., the moon being in
its last quarter on July 5th. On July 27th was a spring tide; and the
second recorded appearance began July 29th. On July 31 there was
a near-spring tide at its lowest daily phase at 7:30 P. M. While
these two appearances do not show a strict parallelism with the
lunar phases, they do involve a coincidence of low tides and ap-
proaching dark.
If my informant was correct in his dates, the third appearance
would occur at high tide. It is possible that the first appearance of
the season, involving a release of gametes, is stimulated by low
tide or by the coincidence of low tide and approaching dark; that
the time necessary for renewal of reproductive bodies has been
established at approximately the lunar month by a series of circum-
stances, internal and external; and that the release of the sexual
products occurs on the first approach of dark after their maturity
irrespective of the height of the tide at the time.
Parallel instances of periodicity in the formation and release of
sexual bodies are numerous, in which both tide and light appear to
play a part.
In addition to the monthly periodicity, there is a daily period-
icity. On both occasions on which they were carefully observed they
appeared each day, within fifteen minutes of the same time, just as
dusk was becoming pronounced.
The display lasted from twenty to thirty minutes. Only a few
appeared at first, each evening. The numbers gradually increased
to a maximum, when scores might be seen at once. The display
waned somewhat more rapidly than it waxed. An occasional belated
specimen sometimes appeared some minutes afterward.
In a similar way, not so many individuals were seen on the
first evening of each period. On the second or third night they
reached a maximum, and again dwindled in numbers on following
days. :
Of the three appearances, that of early July was the most
numerous, and that of August the least so. This suggests an annual,
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 15
as well as a daily and monthly maximum; but this needs further
observation.
The males and females differ considerably in size—the females
often being twice as long as the males. The larger female speci-
mens attain a length of 35 mm. Both sexes are distinctly phos-
phorescent :—the female with strong and more continuous glow, and
the male with sharper, intermittent flashes.
In mating, the females, which are clearly swimming at the sur-
face of the water before they begin to be phosphorescent, show
first as a dim glow. Quite suddenly she becomes acutely phos-
phorescent, particularly in the posterior three-fourths of the body,
although all the segments seem to be luminous in some degree. At
this phase she swims rapidly through the water in small, luminous
circles two or more inches in diameter. Around this smaller vivid
circle is a halo of phosphorescence, growing dimmer peripherally.
This halo of phosphorescence is possibly caused by the escaping
eggs, together with whatever body fluids accompany them. At any
rate the phosphorescent effect closely accompanies ovulation, and the
eggs continue mildly phosphorescent for a while. The fact that the
luminosity is known at no other time is further suggestive that it
is produced by the material which escapes from the body cavity.
If the phosphorescent glands are external, as the histology of the
epidermis at least suggests, the discharge of the glands is closely
correlated with ovulation.
If the male does not appear, this illumination ceases after 10 to
20 seconds. In the absence of the male the process may apparently
be repeated as often as four or five times by one female, at intervals
of 10 to 30 seconds. The later intervals are longer than the earlier.
Usually, however, the males are sufficiently abundant to make this
repetition unnecessary; and the unmated females are rare, if they
are out in the open water. One can sometimes locate the drifting
femaie between displays by the persistence of the luminosity of the
eggs; but the male is unable to find her in this way.
The male appears first as a delicate glint of light, possibly as
much as 10 or 15 feet from the luminous female. They do not
swim at the surface, as do the females, but come obliquely up from
the deeper water. They dart directly for the center of the luminous ~
16 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
circle and they locate the female with remarkable precision, when
she is in the acute stage of phosphorescence. If, however, she ceases
to be actively phosphorescent before he covers the distance, he is
uncertain and apparently ceases swimming, as he certainly ceases
being luminous, until she becomes phosphorescent again. When her
position becomes defined he quickly approaches her, and they rotate
together in somewhat wider circles, scattering eggs and sperm in
the water. The period is somewhat longer on the average than when
the female is rotating alone; but it, too, is of short duration.
So far as could be observed, the phosphorescent display is
not repeated by either individual after mating. Very shortly the
worms cease to be luminous and are lost. Often they give the
appearance of sinking out of sight; however, this appearance 1s
negatived by the fact that I have caught both sexes at once by
timing the current and dipping down stream, as much as six or eight
feet from the point of latest visible phosphorescence. Sometimes as
many as two or three males seem to take part in one mating.
The females caught and examined immediately on becoming
luminous are full of eggs. Those caught after three or four displays,
or after copulation, are largely empty of eggs; yet the different seg-
ments of one worm will differ widely in this particular. Eggs are
often caught among the sete and at any other points where they can
be held.
Specimens in confinement after copulation may be aroused into
mild phosphorescence for at least an hour.
The group of mating adaptations in this Syllid is peculiarly
large and complex; and the elements entering into the precision with
which the eggs and sperm are brought together are quite worth not-
in. Ina number of counts made of eggs captured in connection with
the copulating worms, I found a range of 45-80 per cent of fertilized
eggs in five batches taken at random. Considering the external
fertilization of the eggs this must be considered very high. It is
quite probable that this is a higher result than would be attained if
the eggs and worms had been left in the sea.
The following correlated adaptations are noteworthy:
1. The concentration of the ripening and production of the
ova and sperm into a few days of each month, in the worms of a
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 17
given locality; and the coincidence of the periodicity of the male
and female.
2. The further concentration of these processes into 30 min-
utes of the twenty-four hours, and at the coming of darkness.
3. The coincidence of the luminosity with the emission of eggs
and, so far as we know, its confinement to this period.
4. The repeated periods of luminosity of the female—serving
as an adequate lure for the male, even though his distance may be
considerable.
5. The sex-dimorphism in the character of the flashes in male
and female, which may serve as recognition marks.
6. The fact that the females swim at the surface of the water
at this time, while the males are beneath the surface until the
former become luminous, enables the males to locate the females with
greater precision. This position of the female may also make the
oxidation more complete, and thus secure the increased luminosity.
7. The eyes of the male are perceptibly larger than those of
the female, in spite of the fact that the females are distinctly larger
than the males.
Hee CLASSIC A DIGN:
The Syllidae, of which Odontosyllis is a genus, are an inter-
esting and widely distributed family of annelids. While nothing is
known of the habits and manner of life of this species of Odonto-
syllis except what is seen in this mating period, there are numerous
striking features of the family recorded. They are mostly free-
swimming forms; but it is believed that they dwell largely amidst
the fixed vegetable and animal growths between the tide-marks, or
at shallow depths, and seek their food there. Some species are
known to be commensal with sponges. Certain species of Autolytus
are reported to be parasitic on nemerteans, and other species of
Polycheta. In such cases the proboscis is said to be incapable of
being retracted.
To the general student the most remarkable facts about the
family relate to the methods of reproduction. As in some of the
naidiform Oligocheta, the non-sexual reproduction by “budding”
is a common occurrence. This budding may be of the nature of
transverse fission, as in the naidiform worms; or it may be lateral,
18 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
sometimes even with rosettes of buds rising from the side of the
body. In one species of Autolytus the budding may continue from
these primary buds in such a way as to produce a complex, much
branched stock very similar to plant growth. As will be recog-
nized, this is an uncommon occurrence among animals as highly
differentiated as the Syllids. In Autolytus and some other genera,
possibly in many of the genera, a non-sexual nurse-stock gives off
numerous sexual buds or zooids, which ultimately escape and mate
as free-swimming worms. The embryos develop into the nurse-
stock and thus a somewhat complicated alternation of generation
comes about.
Malaquin (1893) diagnoses the family Syllidae as follows:
“Cephalic segments provided with 5 appendages: Namely, two palpi;
two lateral and one median antennz; and two pairs of eyes. The peristomial
(post-cephalic) segment usually has two pairs of tentacle-like cirri,—some-
times only one pair. The succeeding segments have feet consisting only of
the setigerous lobe of the ventral division, together with a dorsal and a ven-
tral cirrus. The dorsal division of the foot often develops at the time of
sexual maturity. The proboscis is protrusible, and consists of two regions:
(1) the anterior (pharynx) chitinous and with one or more teeth; (2) the
muscular gizzard, which is a secondary development of the pharynx of the
larva. Reproduction is distinguished by the appearance of secondary sexual
characteristics (such as enlargement of the eyes, elongation of the antennae,
development of swimming bristles and of genital glands, and often of phos-
phorescent organs). The ordinary individual may thus itself become sexual
by these changes (epigamy); or it may give rise to new and special buds
which separate and assume the sexual characteristics (schizogamy).”
The Syllidae are divided into the following sub-families :
Fused ieee Soy cect tols ayant Exogonea.
: Palps present... cabaret ixt: DASExOmy;-1.t- steele Eusyllidae.
Syllidae. Separates cet sik he ore Seis eee nee
Pall psrawanitinion hnrecictoracrcertem bocca eeetat iar tevsie ania eee eee Autolytea.
Malaquin defines the Eusyllidea, to which Odontosyllis belongs,
thus:
“Syllidae with ventral cirrus (McIntosh says that these may be absent;
they are wholly wanting in both sexes of the worm under consideration) ;
palpi fused at the base only. Tentacular cirri filiform and cylindrical, with
surface constrictions. Reproduction epigamous (direct).”
Odontosyllis was established as a genus by Claparede (1863)
and is described as follows:
“Palpi short or moderately elongated; more or less separate or fused at
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 19
the base. Tentacles (3) and the dorsal cirri filamentous, short—becoming
longer in sexually mature zooids. Nuchal organ has a central pit. Tentacular
cirri in two pairs. Ventral cirrus present [not in the sexual zooids of O.
enopla]. Proboscis with a series of horny papilla, the points curved back-
ward. Ventricle (stomach) short and devoid of T-shaped ceca. Bristles
with the terminal piece simple or bifid.”
Verrill (1900) has described Odontosyllis enopla as follows:
“A large species with a dark brown, wide, short esophagus, armed with
a ventral row of six stout, recurved, hook-like teeth anteriorly, besides the
median dorsal tooth.
Head large, broader than long, broadly rounded in front and on the
sides; posteriorly with two rounded lobes, separated by small median emargi-
nation. Eyes black, unequal, the anterior ones much larger, reniform; those
of each side are so close together that they seem to be almost in contact.
Palpi shorter than the head, rather wide, thin, often wrinkled or folded
in contraction, and commonly curved downward.
Tentacle tapered, rather slender, not annulated, its length about 1% times
that of the head. Antennae similar, about % as long. Tentacular cirri sim-
ilar to the tentacle, the upper one rather larger and longer; the lower ones
shorter ; first dorsal cirrus decidedly longer and larger than the upper tentac-
ular cirrus. Succeeding ones mostly shorter, unequal, alternately shorter and
longer, tapered distally; the longer ones are equal to the breadth of the body,
the shorter ones about % as long; those on setigerous segments 3, 4, 6, 9 are
longer than the others.
The sete are all similar, numerous, slender, short, projecting but little
beyond the parapodia, with short, rather wide blades, ratio as 1:2'%4-3; their
tips are strongly incurved and acute, with a small denticle a little distant from
the end. [Fig. 16, V.] Two spiniform yellow acicula usually occur in each
fascicle.
The esophagus is short and occupies about 4 segments; its margin is
incurved and strongly emarginate dorsally. It bears a group of 6 [see Figs.
18, 19, 23] nearly equal, parallel, recurved hooks or teeth, which are large and
strong. The conical dorsal tooth is near the margin.
The stomach is large and occupies 8 segments; it is wide, elliptical, and
about twice as long as the esophagus. Its surface is covered with angular or
alveolar markings, often hexagonal, so as to have a honeycomb-like appear-
ance, but not arranged in definite rows.
Color, in formalin, is nearly white, except when containing eggs.
Length, 25mm; diameter, about 1.5mm.
One of the largest specimens has all the segments back of the gastric
region filled with eggs.”
III. GENERAL AND EXTERNAL MORPHOLOGY.
As in the other_nereidiform worms, the body is elongated and
very mobile. The length varies in the observed specimens from 19
20 fT. W. GALLOWAY ANI) PAUL S. WELCH
to 35 mm. The males are distinctly smaller than the females. Just
back of the head the body is almost cylindrical. The dorsi-ventral
diameter grows continuously shorter from before backward, while
the transverse diameter lengthens for about 40 segments, after which
it too gradually diminishes.
The segments vary in number from about 110 to 130, in the
twelve or fifteen specimens examined. They may be grouped in
the following regions: (1) a head with 3 to 6 supecialized segments
including the first setigerous segment; (2) an anterior body region
of 23 or 24 segments, in which there is a gradual increase in the
right-left diameter, and upon which the dorsal portion of the para-
podium (notopodium) bears no setz, although the ventral process
(neuropodium) does; (3) a mid-region, comprising some 30 to 32
segments, and similar to the last segments of the preceding region
but for the fact that each notopodium bears a cluster of long,
swimming sete in addition to the neuropodial sete; (4) a posterior
region, similar to the second region in that the notopodial sete are
lacking, which includes all the rest of the worm, except—(5) the
specialized anal segment which bears beside the anus, a pair of
elongated cirri. The variation in the number of segments in the
worms is due to differences in the fourth region enumerated above.
The length of the other regions is subject to very little variation.
The Head.
As is usual in the polychetes the head is well differentiated, and
the problem of its segmentation is not an easy one. There is the
usual pre-oral portion known as the prostomium; the mouth itself;
and a region surrounding the mouth and just back of it, the peri-
stomium. See Figs. 2, 5, 12, 13. This specialized head includes
the first setigerous segment and everything in front of it. If the
prostomium, as is held by Malaquin, consists of one segment only,
the head of Odontosyllis contains four segments. If, as Pruvot
thinks, the prostomial lobe represents a modification of three seg-
ments, there are six segments in the head.
If we regard the prostomium and its outgrowths as fully hom-
ologous with the structures in other regions of the body it would
seem that Pruvot’s contention is the sounder of the two. For the
dorsal prostomial lobe bears three types of paired sensory struc-
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 21
tures: foremost of all, two ciliated palps; back of these and sepa-
rated from them by a groove, the pair of lobes bearing the eyes, of
which there are two on each side of the head; and, lying between
these lobes, the three tentacles, one medium and two lateral (Fig.
12). It is not easy to see how this region can be regarded as seg-
mented at all and consider it of less than three segments; but in
the light of the embryonic development of this and similar worms
it is questionable whether it is sound to try to homologize the div-
isions of this prostomial organ or even the whole organ with the
segments of the body. In the larva of Odontosyllis, as in other
Syllids, segmentation is distinctly a secondary state, superimposed
on the posterior part only of trochosphere. The anterior enlarged
portion seems not to share in this embryonic segmentation. In our
opinion the prostomium rather represents a modification of this
unsegmented anterior outgrowth of the trochosphere. It is not even
morphologically a whole segment; but is rather an outgrowth and
specialization of a portion of the first embryonic segment.
The peristome, on the other hand, is clearly of three segments,
each bearing a pair of lateral cirri becoming progressively more
dorsal. Only the third of these segments (posterior) appears, how-
ever, as a complete ring of the body. The dorsal part of this seg-
ment may protrude in the form of a flap covering the base of the
lobes bearing the eyes (Figs. 1, 13, F.). In life this is quite dis-
tensible. A ventral projection of this same segment froms the lower
lip (Fig. 5). The first and second segments show only as partial
rings extending from the side of the mouth to the over-arching
prostomium.
The Eyes.
The four eyes are arranged in pairs, two eyes on either side of
the median line (Figs. 1, 12, 13, Ey.) They are mounted on pro-
truding lobes which are capable of a certain amount of motion. The
anterior eyes are somewhat larger than the posterior ones, though
not markedly so. The eyes of the males are distinctly larger than
those of the females. In measurements of the eyes of two males
and three females, after making allowance for differences in planes
of sectioning, there is a difference of 10-30 per cent in favor of the
males. The opening into the pigment cup (pupil) of the anterior
22 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
eyes in the normal position is directed forward and outward; that
of the posterior ones, dorsally (Fig. 1, E.)
The cuticle which covers the front of the eye is a continuation
of that which covers the exterior of the body. The lens is a spherical
body lying in the cavity formed by the pigment cup (Fig. 7 Le.) It
appears to be connected with the cuticle through the opening in the
pigment cup, by a slender stalk or pedicel. After fixation the lens
shows as a somewhat fibrous substance surrounding at various
places roundish bodies which stain with greater intensity. It gives
the appearance of a semi-fluid substance, that has been coagulated
by reagents, rather than of cells. It stains readily and is rendered
somewhat brittle by the usual methods of fixation and treatment.
The remaining regions of the eye—rods, pigment layer, retinal
cells, and optic nerve, which form the wall of the cup of the eye are
not really four distinct regions, but are continuations and differenti-
ations of one layer of cellular elements. The wall of the cup is
formed of numerous long and narrow elements (ommatidia) all
essentially alike, with the long axes in a radial position. Each om-
matidium is a highly differentiated cell (Fig. 8). The outer end of
each cell narrows into a nerve fibre which enters into the optic nerve.
Near this end the cell has its greatest dimensions and contains a
large,‘ conspicuous nucleus. The middle part of each of these
cells is covered with a dense pigment (Fig. 8, Pg.) The united
effect of these pigmented regions lying side by side is to produce the
pigment layer which is very conspicuous and appears continuous.
The inner part of the cell projects towards the lens as a clear hyaline
rod. These rods form the peripheral part of the refracting mass,
but are morphologically a part of the retina. The pigmented cup is
continuous, except at the dorsal region where it is interrupted by a
small circular aperture, the pupil, through which the pedicel of the
lens passes. ;
Parapodia.
In the regions of the body, described above as anterior (2) and
posterior (4) the dorsal ramus of the parapodium (notopodium) is
specially reduced and rudimentary. It is bilobed, consisting of two
short processes or tubercles. The dorsal of these is larger and bears
a dorsal cirrus (Fig. 21 Ci.) These cirri are chiefly outgrowths of
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 23
the epidermal layer of cells; but fibres from the circular layer of
muscles pass to their bases. The ventral lobe of the notopodium is
a smaller, pointed process, bearing no external structures in this
region. In the mid-region of the body this lobe bears a conspicuous
bunch of about 40 long capiliform, non-branching sete, arranged
in two parallel rows in the sac (Fig. 10, S’”), and is supported by an
aciculum.
The ventral ramous (neuropodium) is well developed through-
out. It consists of the usual larger dorsal and smaller ventral lobes.
The dorsal lobe has at its outer extremity a cleft or sac in which the
setee are imbedded. These sete differ from the dorsal ones in being
jointed, having a long stalk with a small incurved appendage (Fig.
16, V.). This lobe is also supported by internal acicula which reach
the surface (Fig. 21, 4). The setz of both kinds sit on the basement
membrane of the external epithelium and clearly arise from the
modified epithelial cells lining the sac (Fig. 9, C). The ventral lobe
of the neuropodium is small and does not produce the ventral cirrus
usually described as characterizing the Syllide.
IV. INTERNAL ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY.
The Body-wall.
The body-wall is composed of the four usual regions; viz., (1)
the cuticle, (2) the epidermis, (3) the muscular system and (4) the
parietal peritoneum. '
The secreted cuticle is of about the same thickness in all regions,
except in a location just anterior to the peristomial flap where it is
much increased in thickness (Fig. 6, £7). It shows the following
perforations: (1) the pores of the epidermal glands; (2) the points
of emergence of the setz from the body-wall; and (3) the external
openings of the nephridia at the ventral basal region of each para-
podium.
The cuticle takes any of the general stains, showing up pecu-
liarly well when treated with haematoxylin. It possesses a character-
istic luster which is apparent in all preparations, irrespective of the
kind of treatment. Under the highest powers the homogeneous
appearance gives way to a suggestion of very fine intersecting lines.
The striations perpendicular to the surface are more apparent.
24) LW: GALLOWAY AND PAULTS?) WELECE:
The epidermis is a conspicuous layer of cells in most parts of
the body and is easily traceable over the exterior of the body and
into the anal and oral openings. The epidermis is composed of
three kinds of cells: viz., (1) the ordinary undifferentiated epithelial
cells which compose the greater part of the epidermis; (2) the large
regular gland cells; and (3) the “twisted” gland cells.
In all parts of the epidermis, with a few exceptions to be noted,
the cells of the first class are of the usual columnar type, with con-
spicuous nuclei near the bases. The basement membrane is very defi-
nite in all regions, staining readily with haematoxylin. In certain
quite definite regions these cells vary from the common shape. They
become much more elongated near the base of the parapodium on
both dorsal and ventra! sides. The greatest thickening takes place,
however, in the region just in front of the dorsal flap, that extends
forward from the last peristomial segment, and just at the base of
the brain. At this point the epidermal cells are tremendously elon-
gated—the length in the longest being something like fifteen times
the short dimension, and 6 or 8 times as long as is usually the case
(Fig. 6, E’). This patch of cells has all the appearance of a sensory
epithelium. There are several such patches, less striking, about
the various flaps and folds of the head.
The regular glands are rather numerous, and are found in all
regions of the skin. They seem to be a little more numerous on the
sides of the segments above the bases of the parapodia, and on the
ventral surface to the right and left of the median groove. These
cells have a characteristic shape resembling a truncated cone, the
larger diameter being distal. The cell-wall, nucleus, and cytoplasm
are quite distinct, and the latter has a very characteristic reticulated
structure which is shown in Fig. 15.
The third type of epidermal cells—the “twisted” gland cells—
occur in most parts of the epidermis, and are rather numerous.
They occur in the ordinary regions of the body singly or in small
groups separated by one or more epithelial cells; but they are often
in clusters of 4 or 5 or more on the tentacles and cirri. In general
they are more numerous on the exposed parts of the body, and
much less so in the depressions, though they are abundant at the
lips of such grooves. They are somewhat flask-shaped, usually with
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 25
irregular surface depressions that give the appearance of a spiral
twist (Fig. 22). They vary considerably in size. Each cell has a
distinct neck, and opens to the exterior through a pore in the cuticle.
The reticulum is conspicuous throughout the cell. Usually these
cells stain densely, especially at the wall. The internal reticulations
are very much less stained. Often the glands show only a slight,
ghostly staining, suggesting a difference of physiological state. The
distribution, and apparently empty condition of many of the glands
suggest that they may be the phosphorescent organs; though of
this the authors have no final proof. In the dorsal region of a male
specimen these glands show a somewhat different structure, as
appears in Fig. 22a., Sg. Here the structure is of a much divided
tubular sort. Their distribution and general relations, however,
mark them as identical with the twisted cells.
The muscles of the body-wall present no significant departure
from the condition described for other nereidiform worms. The
outer circular layers give rise to acicular muscle fibers and to fan-
shaped oblique fibres concerned in the motions of the parapodia.
The longitudinal muscles are massed in four heavy bands—two
dorsal and two ventral. They too give off tracts of fibres to the
parapodia. The general relations of the muscles are very well shown
in Figs. 20, 21. The muscles are unstriate.
The Alimentary Canal.
The alimentary canal is a nearly straight tube running the
length of the body from the mouth to the anus. It is in no wise
degenerate, as in some of the Syllids ; but is functional throughout its
course. Five regions may be distinguished, the last four of which
are sharply differentiated from each other: (1) buccal cavity; (2)
pharynx; (3) esophagus; (4) gizzard; (5) intestine.
A number of features, both embryonic and histological, seem
to suggest the point of union of gizzard and intestine as the begin-
ning of the mesenteron. There is a cuticular lining with very pro-
nounced developments as far as the anterior end of the gizzard, and
in less degree throughout its extent. It will be seen that the chief
differentiations of the tract are in the stomodaeum and that the
mesenteron is quite uniform in size and structure.
26 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
Mouth and Pharynx.
The first two regions, the buccal cavity and the pharynx, con-
stitute an introvert. When withdrawn the buccal cavity occupies
the peristomium, and the pharynx extends from the first setigerous
segment to the seventh. When fully everted the buccal region is
turned wrong side out, and the terminal opening is directly into the
muscular pharynx, which is pulled forward its full length so that
its posterior end is in the first or second setigerous segment. Com-
pare Figs. 2 and 3.
The oral opening, when the introvert is withdrawn, presents
a lobed margin of which the first setigerous segment furnishes the
posterior ventral portion—a kind of lower lip (Fig. 5). The first
and second peristomial segments form the remainder of the boun-
dary to the mouth. The ventral floor of the buccal cavity is glan-
dular (Fig. 2; 14, g.) while the sides are merely transitional from
the outside to the pharynx. There is also a deep glandular fold
from the dorsal wall of the cavity at the anterior margin of the
pharynx (Figs. I, 2, O).
The anterior part of the pharynx is very thick and muscular,
but the posterior one-third, or thereabouts, is thin and pliable. It
is this latter region that allows the adjustment of the phaynx to the
body space when it is withdrawn into the body. This thin zone is
thrown into a backward directed fold into the coelom, dorsal to the
anterior end of the esophagus (Figs. 2, 3, Ph’.) The anterior end of
the esophagus comes to lie within the lumen of the posterior part of
the pharynx. The wall of the pharynx is composed of (1) the
internal cuticle, (2) the epithelial lining which secretes the cuticle,
(3) a thick muscular coat, and (4) the peritoneum.
The cuticle is continuous with that of the skin and similar to it
in structure, but presents modifications in certain regions. It is
thickened into minute conical denticles over a large portion of the
pharyngeal surface (Figs. 2; 14, dt.). In the dorsal part the dent-
icles begin with the mouth and extend about one-third of the length
of the pharynx. In the ventral floor they begin at the posterior edge
of the glandular region (Fig. 14) and cover perhaps two-thirds of
the floor back of that point. The glands and the denticles do not
occur together.
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 27
The epithelial layer of the pharynx is thrown into a series of
longitudinal folds, somewhat irregular at first, but becoming more
definite posteriorly. One of these in the dorsal part of the pharynx
has almost the definiteness of form of the typhlosole of the intes-
tine of the earthworm (Fig. 18). The epidermal cells of the pos-
terior portion of the thick muscular region of the pharynx are con-
spicuously glandular. In the thin region, that forms the flexure in
introversion, the cells revert more nearly to the ordinary type of
epithelium.
The muscular layer is the most conspicuous one in the wall of
the pharynx. It consists of a complex of circular, longitudinal, and
radial or oblique fibres. In a longitudinal section of the organ the
circular fibres show themselves to be arranged on both sides of
sheets, which radiate from the lumen outward not at right angles
to the lumen, but in positions depending on the degree of inversion.
The circular fibres appear to dominate in this organ, but it is much
less easy to distinguish the various layers here than in any other part
of the body. Indeed it is easy to see that the layers are not as
independent as elsewhere, and intermix to a greater degree.
The Esophagus.
The esophagus when withdrawn occupies segments 8 to II.
At its anterior margin occurs a ring of cuticular teeth which give
the name to the genus. In the ventral floor there is a row of six of
these,” closely appressed, uniform in size, conical in form, and
curved slightly backward. On the lateral walls near the dorsal part,
and arching over so as to engage the ventral teeth, is a somewhat
larger recurved tooth on either side of the lumen. In introversion
the dorsal ridge of the pharynx is pressed in between these lateral
teeth (see Fig. 18, Df.). It is very difficult to get satisfactory
sections in the region of the teeth.
From within outward the layers in the wall of the esophagus
are: The very much thickened cuticle, comprising about one-third
the thickness of the whole wall; the columnar epithelium; the layer
of circular muscles about the thickness of the epithelium; the longi-
tudinal muscles, two-fifths the total thickness of the wall; and the
thin peritoneum.
The cuticular layer is thicker in the esophagus than at any other
28 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
part of the body. It stains densely except at the very outer margin
and shows a clear striate structure, the striations running perpen-
dicular to the surface. While the teeth are to be looked upon as
special thickenings of the cuticle, there is a sharp demarcation
between this layer and them (Fig. 23.)
The arrangement and character of the muscles in the region of
the esophagus shows that they are not so much concerned with the
mere action of the esophagus itself as with the larger problem of
introversion and eversion, and of the manipulation of the teeth at
the anterior end of the esophagus. It is not the purpose of this
paper to trace out the course and value of the various muscular
tracts; but an examination of the various figures will suggest the
role of some of the muscles massed about the anterior end of the
esophagus. They bring the latter organ into proper relation to the
processes being initiated by the action of the pharynx, as well as
furnish a point of attachment for some of the elements engaged in
retraction and protrusion. The thickened cuticle of the esophagus
is undoubtedly for this purpose, and for the added purpose of keep-
ing the esophagus open and functional during the various vigorous
changes of form and position of the introvert.
The Gizzard.
The gizzard or stomach is a highly developed structure imme-
diately following the esophagus and sharply demarcated fromat. It
extends normally from about the 12th setigerous segment to the 21st.
It practically fills the body cavity in these segments. It is of uniform
size except where it tapers off rather abruptly to join the esopha-
gus and the intestine. It is elliptical in cross-section; and the lumen
is in the form of a long narrow slit, the sides of which are nearly
parallel. This slit-like lumen divides the organ into symmetrical
halves, whose walls are very thick except in the part opposite the
edges of the lumen. Here it is not more than 1-5 the usual thick-
ness. Apparently the morphological position of the slit is dorsi-ven-
tral; but the whole organ may be rotated until it has a right left
position. From a surface view, or in excentric longitudinal (tan-
gential) section, the whole wall of the organ is seen to be crossed
by a series of fine parallel lines running transverse to the organ.
The band-like spaces between these lines are divided into numerous
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILI 2Y
angular areas of nearly uniform shape and size. The whole pre-
sents a remarkably regular and interesting pattern (Fig. 25). Has-
well (1886) has shown in his study of various species of Syllids that
the wall of the gizzard is a highly complex muscular organ; and is
not, as has long been supposed, a glandular one, at all. These studies
confirm his conclusion in all essential particulars.
In detail, the wall of the gizzard, from within outward, shows
the following regions: (1) the epithelium with its very thin secretion
of cuticula; (2) a very much reduced muscular layer (Fig. 24, m1.)
which contains internally one thickness of circular fibres and just
without this a similar single thickness of longitudinal fibres; (3)
a thick zone made up of muscular elements which show chiefly as
radiating columns in a transverse section or in longitudinal sections
radial to the organ (Figs. 21; 2, V; 24, Col.); (4) a thin layer of
elements (Fig. 24, mo.) which certainly contains circular muscular
fibres, and according to Haswell contains longitudinal fibres also;
(5) the thin peritoneal layer.
None of these layers call for special comment with the excep-
tion of the thick muscular layer which furnishes the main body of
the wall of the gizzard.
A view when the gizzard is cut longitudinally, in such a way as
to display the radial elements uncut, would be illustrated by Fig. 2,
V, at the left-hand side of the figure. Such a view shows three chief
topographic features: (1) a series of fibrous columns passing from
the thin inner muscular sheet to the outer; and (2) lying between
these, open spaces somewhat shorter than the columns and tapering
toward both ends; and (3) in the outer portion of these open spaces,
tapering objects, thicker at the outer ends, which extend from the
outer wall about one-half the way to the lumen.
Study of these objects in other sections (see Figs. 2; 24) shows
the radiating columns to be muscle fibres extending the whole thick-
ness of the wall of the gizzard. They appear as columns in the
transverse section of the gizzard also (Fig. 21, 3) but do not have
such well-developed spaces between them. The tapering objects
extending inward between the columns present a granular appear-
ance and are in fact annular muscle fibres cut cross-wise. They
form the transverse lines that show in a tangential section, such as is
30 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
seen in Fig. 25,Cb. They are in reality thin, wedge-like bands of
muscle fibres that encircle the gizzard and separate the radial col-
umns into successive circular zones, also shown in Fig. 26, Cb. Only
the outer halves of the columns are thus divided, since the circular
bands extend only part way to the lumen. In the cross-section of
the gizzard these circular bands present their fibres in longitudinal
view. They show dimly (Fig. 21, 2) in such sections outside the
wavy line which appears midway the columns (Figs. 21, 24). These
circular fibres are of the usual unstriate type and coalesce with the
circular sheet of fibres of the inner muscular layer at the two edges
of the lumen of the gizzard (Fig. 21, Ra.), and only there. The
wavy line seen in Fig. 24 about midway on the columns seems to be
the mark of the union of the inner thin edge of the circular band of
fibres with the adjacent radial columns.
The histology of the radial columns has been worked out in
much detail by Haswell for several Syllids. The differences between
the conditions in O. enopla and those described by him are of
minor moment, The individual fibrils run the length of the columns
and are undoubtedly made up of alternate light and dark bands,
such as are seen in typical cross-striate muscles. Haswell remarks
that the striations found in these fibres are more strongly marked
than in any crustacean or insect he had examined.
Considered as a whole, each one of these radiating columns of
cross-striate muscle fibrils is made up longitudinally of two sym-
metrical halves hollowed out on their inner faces in such a way as
almost to surround a cavity. This cavity is small and closely sur-
rounded near the inner end of the column, as seen in cross-section
(Fig. 27, f); but in cross-sections further from the lumen, the
space between the two halves becomes larger, and is less com-
pletely surrounded by the muscle fibres. In the outer half of
its course the halves of a given column fall on different sides
of one of the circular bands of muscles referred to above. See
Fig. 26, which represents a cross section of a group of the col-
umns about two-thirds of the way toward the outer surface,
and shows the circular muscles separating the triangular halves of
the columns and thus throwing them into a band back to back with
the nearby halves of the next row of columns. Figure 25 shows
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 31
the relation of the parts just as close to the outer end of the columns
as a section can be made. In this figure the outer ends of the half-
columns included between two of the bands of circular fibres are
shown almost to run together into a continuous zig-zag sheet. At
this level the space between the circular band of unstriate fibres
(Fig. 25, Cb.) and the adjacent zone of the radial columns (Fig. 25,
col.) is occupied by a mass of granular nucleated protoplasm (Fig.
25, 2). This protoplasm extends only a short distance down the
columns, as appears in Fig. 28, n., which shows a section perpen-
dicular to that in Fig. 25.
In brief summary, then, the gizzard is a complex muscular
organ with an outer and inner sheet of unstriate fibres; a parallel
series of thin bands of annular unstriate muscles, whose outermost
fibres are in close relation to the external muscular layer, and extends
inward as a band from the outer muscular sheet only about one-
half the thickness of the whole wall, except that it reaches entirely
to the inner muscular sheet at the angles of the lumen where the
wall is thinnest and there gives off fibres which unite with it; and a
series of radial columns of striate muscle fibres, each column of
which is made of two trough-like halves whose concave sides are
apposed in such a way as to make a conical cavity with its largest
diameter at the outer end.
From the point of view of histogenesis the most interesting
things about the gizzard are this mixture of striate and unstriate fi-
bres in the single organ, and the evidence that the central cavity of the
radial columns presents at the outer end a remnant of the granular
protoplasm from which the muscular fibrils were differentiated.
Each of these hollow columns is a simple muscular organ, in which
the contractile elements are the product of the single multinucleate
mass of protoplasm occupying its core and it is differentiated pro-
gressively toward the periphery, as is suggested by the last position
of the nucleated protoplasm (Fig’ 28 n.). The embryonic charac-
ter of the mature fibres, and the simplicity of the relation of the
fibres in the organ mark the organism as one that would well repay
study upon the ontogenetic differentiation of the muscles of the
gizzard.
32 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S.. WELCH
The Intestine.
The intestine is a straight tube passing with nearly uniform
character, and with gradually diminishing size, to the anal opening.
It has the usual constrictions between the segments, with saccula-
tions almost amounting to diverticula within the segments. The
epithelial lining has the usual variety of columnar cells. Those in
the posterior part of the tract are heavily ciliated. Both circular
and longitudinal fibres may be found, but they do not form a definite
or continuous sheet of tissue. Fig. 20 illustrates a cross section of
the body, in the intestinal region, which includes a dissepiment.
The intestine is sharply constricted ; the layer of longitudinal muscle
fibres appears clearly just outside the entoderm; and a thick zone
of circular fibres outside this shows a clear anastomosis with the
circular fibres of the body wall in both dorsal and ventral regions.
The distribution of oblique muscle fibres in the dissepiment is also
shown—the origin being in the ventral region on either side the nerve
cord and passing out fan-wise to the muscular layers of the dorso-
lateral walls. At least some of these fibres run into the circular
muscular sheet in being inserted.
The only noteworthy differentiations in its length are the shal-
low proctodeum, and the valvular enlargement of the intestine at its
junction with the gizzard (Fig. 4, v.). At the beginning of the intes-
tine there is a special annular or sphincter group of muscle fibres
Ghigo ,S))).
The Circulatory System.
The blood vessels agree with those described as characterizing
the Syllids generally, and call for little special discussion. The
dorsal vessel is small and thick-walled as compared with the ventral.
The dorsal vessel is imbedded 1n the wall of the intestine in an inter-
esting way thru a part of its course—the peritoneal membrane in-
closing both in one sheath (Figs. 17; 29). Segmental vessels arise
from both the dorsal and ventral longitudinal vessels and run out-
ward on the anterior face of each dissepiment.
The Excretory System.
The nephridia are quite large organs in this worm in comparison
with the size of the body. This is due in the female to the liberal
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 33
glandular portion. The nephridia apparently occur in all the setig-
erous segments of the body beginning with the very first—which
is also the last segment of the peristomium.
In the male the tubular ciliated portion of the nephridium is
much larger than in the female, and the glandular part appears less
massive (Fig. 11, V., G.). In the sections of a female, whose cavity
was filled with eggs in such a way as to indicate that ovulation had
not occurred. the tubular part of the nephridia was so compressed
and displaced as to preclude the possibility that they could be used
for the discharge of eggs, at least at the beginning of ovulation. In
the male on the contrary there is abundant evidence that these organs
are in an hypertrophied condition, and probably they function as
vasa deferentia. They have large lumens, and protrude well into the
middle of the body.
Genital Products.
As in other polychetes the eggs and sperm are produced by pro-
liferation from the coelomic peritoneum. They are found in all the
full-sized segments of the body, beginning about the 19th or 20th
setigerous segment. Ripe eggs were found in sections two or three
segments anterior to the union of gizzard and intestine. Fig. 30
shows a cross-section of a female which has not deposited any of
her eggs. In this case the eggs are so numerous that the segment
is stretched until the body wall is very thin. The eggs occupy every
available cavity. As has been indicated it appears to the writers
that the ova could not use the nephridia in this case, but must escape
by rupture of the body wall.
34 T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
BIBLIOGRAPHY
AwnpreEws, A. E.
1892. The eyes of Polychaetous Annelids. Journal of Morphology,
7 :169.
BenHaM, W. B.
1896. Polychaete Worms. Cambridge Nat. Hist. Vol. 2, Chs. 9-13.
CLAPAREDE, A. R. E.
1863. Beobachtungen tiber Anatomie und Entwicklungsgeschichte wir-
belloser Theire, pp. 38-48.
Euters, E.
1864. Die Borstenwiirmer. Erste Abt. pp. 203-232.
GaLLoway, T. W.
1908. A Case of Phosphorescence as a Mating Adaptation. Sch. Sci.
and Math. May, 1908.
HaswEL., Wm. A.
1886. On the Structure of the So-called Glandular Ventricle (Driisen-
magen) of Syllis. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. 26:471.
1889. A Comparative Study of Striate Muscles. Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sci 20%3i-
LANGERHANS, P.
1879. Die Wurmfauna von Madeira. Zeitschrift fiir wiss. Zoologie. Bd.
32 2554.
MaLaguin, ALPHONSE.
1893. Recherches sur les Syllidiens. Lille.
McIntosH, Ws. C.
1873. A Monograph of British Annelids. Ray Society. Three Vols.
Moore, J. Percy.
1909. Polychaeteous Annelids dredged off the Coast of Southern Cali-
fornia. Proc. Phila. Acad. Nat. Sci. 61 :321-351.
St. Josepu, A. De.
1886. Les Annélides Polychétes des Cotes de France. Ann. d. Sci. Natur.
Zool. Ser. 9:vol. 3; pp. 145-260.
VERRILL, A. E.
1900. Additions to the Turbellaria, Nemertina, and Annelida of the Ber-
mudas. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci. 10:pt. 2:627-8.
SEY
TNL
I
\TE
PL
Fig. 1.
Bigs. 2.
Big: 3:
Fig. 4.
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 35
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
Plate I
A para-sagittal section of the dorsal part_of the head. Diagram-
matic. E, the pupils of the eyes (see also Fig. 7); F, flap of peris-
tomium (see also Fig. 6) ; O, a glandular fold at the dorsal anterior
edge of the pharynx (see also Fig. 2); P, palp; Ph, pharynx.
A sagittal section of the head and anterior segments, with the
introvert withdrawn. 1, the last peristomial (first setigerous) seg-
ment; az, an annular organ in the cardiac opening of the gizzard,
consisting of modified epithelium and circular muscle fibres; Br.
brain; Cu, cuticula of the esophagus (E); F, a flap projecting for-
ward from the 3rd peristomial segment (see also Figs. 1 and 6); G,
gizzard, in which the dorsal (D) and ventral (V) walls are cut in
different relation to the elements composing the wall; M. mouth; O,
a thin-walled glandular pocket at the anterior, dorsal edge of the
pharynx; P, palp; Ph, pharynx, with thick muscular wall; PW’,
thin-walled, flexible portion of pharynx; ¢, cuticular teeth in an-
terior margin of esophagus. X4o.
A frontal section thru head and anterior segments, with the intro-
vert protruded. Lettering as in Fig. 2. X4o.
Longitudinal section at junction of gizzard and intestine. G, giz-
zard; I, intestine; S, sphincter muscle at beginning of intestine; V,
valvular enlargement at anterior end of intestine. X40.
36
Fig. 5.
Fig. 6.
Fig. 7.
Fig. 8.
Fig. 9.
Fig. 10
Fig. 11.
T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
Plate II
Ventral view of the head; 1, lateral tentacle of the prostomium; m,
median tentacle; P, palpus; 1, 2, 3, the peristomial tentacles or cirri.
The lower lip is shown to be an anterior projection of the first seti-
gerous segment. XI5.
Longitudinal section thru dorsal body-wall immediately in front of
3rd peristomial (first setigerous) segment, B, brain; E, epithelium;
E’, the thickened sensory epithelium in front of the peristomial
flap (F). X300.
Eye. A median section of anterior eye thru pupil. Cw, cuticula; E,
epithelium; Le, lens; 0. n., optic nerve; Pe, pedicel of the lens; Pg,
pigment layer of the retina; 7, rods, or layer formed by inner ends
of retinal cells; R, retinal cells, deeper portion containing nuclei.
X 330.
Ommatidium. C, the nucleated part of the cell; F, fibre; Pg, pig-
ment, which collectively makes the pigment cup of the eye; 7, the
rod or inner end of cell. 500.
Setae-sac of dorsal bristles, cut in the long axis of the setae. A,
aciculum; c, bristle cell, from which the bristles arise; m, basement
mebrane; s, seta (see also Fig. 16). 125.
Cross-section of two parapodia showing both the dorsal and ventral
bristle sacs cut across the long axis of the setae. A, acicula (the
smaller light objects are the setae); Ci, dorsal cirrus; n, nephrid-
ium; S’, ventral seta-sac; S”, dorsal sac, with the swimming bristles
in two parallel rows. The darker dots show muscular elements. X50.
Cross-section of a segment in the mid-region of the body of a male.
G, glandular part of nephridium; N, the tubular portion of neph-
ridium, much enlarged and used as sperm-ducts; T, the twisted
gland cells (see Fig. 22) numerous in the dorsal body wall. X50.
if
x be
=|
/
va’
PEATE it
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL RVA
Plate III
Dorsal view of head and anterior body segments. Ey, eyes,
occurring in pairs on flaps; L, lateral tentacles of the prostomium;
M, median tentacle; P, palpus; Ph, introvert protruded; 1, 2, 3, the
tentacles of the three peristomial segments. X15.
Lateral view of the head. Lettering as in Fig. 12. X15.
Sagittal section thru buccal cavity, showing beginning of the
pharynx. JD, dorsal; V, ventral, dt, conical denticles of cuticula in
wall of pharynx; g, a patch of glandular cells in floor of mouth; Ph,
lumen of pharyx.
Gland cells of epidermis. C, cuticula; E, epithelium; g, gland
cell showing characteristic inner reticulated protoplasm and outer
striated protoplasm. 600.
Setae. D, the dorsal, capilliform, swimming setae of the mid-body
region; ’, the ventral jointed setae, occurring the whole length of
the body.
Cross-section of the body in the mid-region of body. (Ci, dorsal
cirrus; J, lumen of intestine; O, ova in body cavity. X50.
Fig. 18.
Fig. 10.
Fig. 20.
Fig. 21.
Fig. 22.
Fig. 22a.
T. W. GALLOWAY AND PAUL S. WELCH
Plate 1V
Cross-section of pharynx and esophagus, with introvert withdrawn.
E, muscular wall of the esophagus, showing the lateral mass of
muscular fibres connected with the tooth apparatus; ep, epithelial
layer that secretes the ventral teeth; Df, a longitudinal, dorsal fold
of the pharynx that invades the front of the esophagus in intro-
version; Ph, muscular wall of the pharynx. X65.
Similar cross-section a little anterior to Fig. 18. X65.
Cross-section in mid-region of body, including a dissepiment (Di).
1, dorsal ramus of notopodium, bearing dorsal cirrus (Ci); 2, ven-
tral ramus of notopodium, bearing swimming bristles supported by
aciculum; 3, dorsal ramus of neuropodium, bearing bristles and
acicula; 4, ventral ramus of neuropodium with no appendages. X50.
Cross-section of body thru the gizzard. A, aciculum; Ci, dorsal
cirrus; m/!, layer of circular muscles of body wall; m2, longitudinal
muscles; Ra, raphe where there is an anastomosis of the fibres of
the annular band of muscle fibres (2) with the innermost layer of
the gizzard. The numerals indicate three successive zones of ele-
ments in the wall: 1, the peritoneum and thin outer muscle layer;
2, annular bands of fibres, much flattened in the direction of the
long axis of the animal suggested by the broken lines; 3, muscular
columns which make up the bulk of the wall of the organ. Within
this is a thin layer consisting of muscles, epithelium, and cuticula.
X65.
“Twisted” glands (phosphorescent?) from epidermis of female. Po,
pore in cuticula; Sg, the gland with constrictions. 680.
Similar glands in the dorsal epithelium of a male specimen. X68o.
PLATE IV
PLATE V
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
23.
24.
25.
20.
27.
28.
30.
STUDIES ON ODONTOSYLLIS ENOPLA VERRILL 39
Plate V
Detail of ventral floor of esophagus, longitudinal section, in region
of teeth. Cu, cuticula lining esophagus; Ep, epithelial layer; g,
glandular epithelium in the thin portion of pharynx; ft, one of the
ventral teeth.
Two muscle columns of the gizzard, taken from transverse section of
that organ (see Fig. 21). Lettering in figures 24-28: cb, “circular
band,” a thin sheet of muscle whose fibres encircle the organ; col,
the radial muscular columns whose fibres radiate from the lumen; f,
a fissure separating the halves of one column; mi, thin inner muscu-
lar layer; mo, a thin outer muscular layer; n, nucleated protoplasm
between the outer ends of the half-columns.
Section perpendicular to 24, transverse to the columns and tangen-
tial to gizzard, just as near the outer surface as possible. 320.
Section transverse to the columns (parallel with 25), at a deeper
level. 160.
Section parallel with 24 and 25, transverse to the columns at their
inner end). X160.
Longitudinal section of columns (outer end) at right angle to Fig.
24, showing them as they appear in longitudinal section of the giz-
zard. X160.
Dorsal wall of intestinal tract showing relation of dorsal blood
vessel to it. cil, cilia; d, dorsal blood vessel; ep, epithelial lining of
digestive tract; L, lumen of blood vessel. 360.
Cross-section from mid-body region of a female in which ovulation
has not commenced. JN, glandular part of nephridium; O, ova; W,
the much stretched and thinned dermo-muscular wall. X4o.
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA
By H. C. SoLomon
Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, University of California,
under the direction of Prof. C. A. Kofoid.
Although many attempts have been made to determine the etiol-
ogy of trachoma, it was not until recently that a germ has been
demonstrated that could be considered specific. The early work was
devoted largely to bacterial examinations, and such bacteria as
Staphloccocci, Streptococci, Pneumococci, Xerose bacilli, infleunza
bacilli, and the Diplococci of Morax-Axenfeld were found in the
diseased tissue. None of these forms, however, was finally con-
sidered specific, and for a time the search was given up.
With the demonstration by Schaudinn of Spirochaete pallida as
the cause of syphilis, a new impetus was given to the study, and it
was not long before a body was demonstrated that was considered
as the cause of trachoma. The discovery was made independently by
Halberstaeder and v. Prowazek, and by Greeff.
While the bodies demonstrated have been pretty generally ac-
cepted as the cause of the disease there are still many problems to
be solved. There is a difference of opinion as to what part of the
mass described is the individual germ. Whether the germ is a
bacterium or protozoon is another disputed point. Then there still
remains the life history to be worked out in detail.
This disease seems to be closely related in its etiological factors
to a number of other organisms supposed to be associated with
certain other diseases. These include Cytoryctes variolae (small
pox) Cytoryctes vaccinia (cow pox), Neuroryctes hydrophobiae
(hydrophobia). the supposed organisms of scarlet fever, Molluscum
contagiosum, chicken pest, carp pox, jaundice of the caterpillar,
Lyssa, etc.
Halberstaeder and v. Prowazek, and Greeff claim the distinc-
tion of having first discovered and recognized the trachoma bodies.
For a time the controversy ran high, each apparently describing
different bodies, but now there is hardly any doubt that these inves-
tigators were dealing with the same organisms.
42 H. C. SOLOMON
The technique is of very great importance in this study, and
especially so the staining, and it was due to the difficulties in this
particular that the early investigators failed to detect the organism.
Adequate preparations may be obtained by making smears of the
secretion, by lightly scraping the surface of the infected eyelids or
sectioning the gross tissue removed by an operation. One great
trouble is the presence of other organisms, as there is usually a
mixed infection, and considerable extraneous matter such as pus
cells and leucocytes.
Various methods of staining have been tried, mostly giving
negative results. However the tubercular bacillus method, Loffler’s
stain for flagella, and the Giemsa method appear to give uniformly
positive results. Greeff reports that Heidenhaim’s iron alum haema-
toxylin stain would not show the bodies, but this is the stain Leber
and Hartmann use successfully and I have found it to work well.
The stain most frequently used in this work is Giema’s azur-
eosin. This is the stain used by Halberstaeder and v. Prowazek, and
Greeff, Frosch, and Clausen in their work. The staining by this
method is as follows:
I. 12 parts Giemsa’s eosin solution (2.5 cc. of 1% French eosin
solution to 500 ce. of distilled water).
2) 8 -palts or wazur 1 (1 -1e@00)):
3. 3 parts of Azur II (0.8:1.000).
The three solutions must be well mixed. Then the preparation
should be put in the mixture and kept at a temperature of 37° C. for
6-9 hours, then washed with distilled water, dried with filter paper
and mounted in cedar oil.
In material from fresh cases of trachoma and from experi-
mental cases on Orang Otangs, using the method of staining given
above, v. Prowazek describes his results as follows: Surrounding
the nuclei of the epithelial cells are dark amorphous masses (plas-
tin masses). By careful differentiation and the use of colored light,
there may be seen inside of these masses little red or reddish purple,
round bodies. (Figure 1). These color after the manner of the
nucleolus.
These trachoma bodies (the name was suggested by Greeff)
have an average size of about %4 micron, but they vary from the
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA 43
limits of visibility to 1 micron, and it is possible that there are
many beyond the limits of vision. They are seen to multiply by split-
ting and then come to lie two and two, resmbling the arrangement of
the Diplococci. In its usual position the plastin mass surrounds the
nucleus like a cap, but as the little bodies increase rapidly in num-
ber, the plastin mass becomes puffed out, then it splits into little
parts which become absorbed, and the little bodies are found near
the nucleus, and these later make their way out of the cell.
The presence of the amorphous masses and the small bodies is
typical of trachoma, and the morphological characteristics are spe-
cific. Halberstaeder and v. Prowazek, Greeff, Frosch and Clausen,
and most of the men who have worked on trachoma, consider the
small round bodies as the etiological originators (Erreger) of the
disease, while they consider the dark amorphous mass as a reaction
product of the cell of the host. As v. Prowazek describes it: The
virus seizes on the host and after a short time becomes localized in
the cell, where it reproduces. The host cell answers to the invasion
of the virus by the production of a specific, morphologically differ-
entiated substance of the cell, which is closely related to the nuclear
substance or more closely to the nucleolus of the cell. These reac-
tion products are usually found in the ectoderm cells.
There is a difference of opinion as to whether the small round
bodies or the amorphous masses are the germs. Calkins, Lowden,
Williams and Negri look upon the amorphous masses as protozoa,
and the primary cause of the disease. Their work however has been
done on other diseases and they explain the conditions of trachoma
by analogy. On the other hand the men who have done work on
trachoma, including Halberstaeder, v. Prowazek, Greeff, Frosch,
Clausen, Hartmann, Leber, Di Santo, consider the small round
bodies as specific germs, and the amorphous masses as reaction
products.
The authors who see in the amorphous masses the germ of the
disease consider the whole mass as an individual protozoon. There
is considerable constancy in the appearance of these forms, which
would easily lead to this conception, but in old cases of the disease
they are usually absent, while the small bodies may be present. In
support of this theory they describe a uninucleate cell, but on this
44 H. C. SOLOMON
point they are not very definite. It is to be supposed that the whole
mass is considered the nucleus. This mass is so structureless that it
hardly appears probable that it is the nucleus of an organism. It has
also been claimed, though it has never been confirmed, that conju-
gation has been observed; also the formation of cysts. They inter-
pret the small bodies as being idiochromidia, and forming part of
the life history of the organism. This leads to their classification
as rhizopods, in which group the formation of idiochromidia is
characteristic. The work that led to these conclusions was done
on other forms than trachoma, and at present the proof is not very
conclusive that the same cycle is followed in the case of the
trachoma organisms.
v. Prowazek gives the following reasons for taking exceptions
to the foregoing views: (1) In vaccinia the masses can be made to
disappear with a 10-20% solution of NaCl, and yet vaccination can
be successfully performed with the material that is left. The same
results can be obtained after twenty-four hours digestion with
trypsin or pepsin. (2) In vaccinia successful vaccination can be
performed with material in which no Guarneri bodies are microscop-
ically visible. (3) In hydrophobia the Negri bodies are often not
visible in virulent material. (4) Infections can be successfully per-
formed with weakened emulsions of hydrophobia virus that have
been treated centrifugally, while in the liquid thus treated no Negri
bodies were visible, having apparently been cast aside. (5) Finally,
the structure of these bodies speak against their being protozoa, as
they possess no protoplasmic structure, are hyalin, fairly homo-
geneous, and subject to changes that would be considered cell degen-
eration processes rather than stages in the development of a proto-
zoan.
While the criticisms are significant, it must be remarked that
the infectiousness of the material in which no bodies were visible
only shows that it is likely that there only remained the smaller
bodies which we infer are ultra-microscopic. It is true that it is
easier to conceive of the presence of the smaller bodies which in
their largest and visible stage are only I micron in size, as ultra-
microscopic, but this does not preclude the possibility of the larger
bodies existing in this state, especially after treatment.
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA 45
The fact that when treated centrifugally the virus still retained
its virulence might possibly be explained by the fact that some of
the bodies are so light that the centrifuge had no effect on them, or
perhaps some of the virus might have stuck to the side of the con-
tainer. This seems probable when it is considered that in chicken
pest it has been found that a solution of 1-1,000,000,000 of the virus
retains its virulence.
Now to take up the contention that the small bodies are the
germs of the disease. In vaccinia of the cornea of the rabbit, v.
Prowazek was able to trace in the epithelial cells and less frequently
in the Guarneri bodies themselves, little alveoles in which were
minute oval or round bodies, which he designates as initial bodies.
Division was described in some of these at times as binary and in
other cases as multiple spore formation. The same bodies were also
seen by Hartmann, Paschen and Mihlers and considered by them
as the organisms of the virus.
Paschen found in vaccinated children many vaccine bodies in
the lymph of the pustule, and besides these many that divided
binarily, remaining connected by the ends, and these again divided
forming a chain. These finally separated forming little round bodies
with a thread like flagellum hanging to them.
Babes found similar bodies in hydrophobia, while Negri and
Velpine could differentiate little nuclear like bodies in the Negri
bodies and their alveoles. These lay arranged symmetrically around
a central body that could not be differentiated. v. Prowazek sug-
gests that they probably came from this by multiple division.
So here in these other diseases we find a condition somewhat
similar to that found in trachoma. Thus we are able to interpretate
trachoma as caused by a related etiological factor.
According to v. Prowazek, trachoma is a disease of the epith-
elium. On the introduction of the virus into the eye, the epithelial
cells of the conjunctive enlarge. This growth continues with the
increase of the virus, and finally the cell is ruptured and the germs
spread out over the pus. After this the disease can be spread
by purely mechanical means, through contact with the pus cells
By the bursting of the cells the surface layers come to be covered
with the germs. A few little bodies may then reach the follicles, a
46 H. C. SOLOMON
condition which is usually considered as the primary stage of the
disease but which according to this author is the secondary result due
to rapid growth. In the follicles one also finds epithelial cells, and
consequently the bodies may be found there, as it is in the epithelial
cells that they are primarily localized. It is only in the old cases
that the free bodies are found, probably due to the cells containing
them having been destroyed.
Leber and Hartmann, staining with Heidenhaim’s iron alum
haematoxylin, show a light court or ring surrounding the trachoma
bodies which is colored by the Giemsa stain. (Figure 2). This
light ring is interpreted as cytoplasm, while the dark body is con-
sidered as the nucleus. They describe division as follows: The
dark body in the centre divides forming two small bodies, but these
move a short distance apart, remaining connected by a thread. In
moving apart the light surrounding mass (cytoplasm?) is pulled
along, and the result is a dumb bell shaped figure. (Figure 3.)
These figures are very similar to those of Babesia of the tick fever
in the dividing stage. These authors claim that after the entrance
of the trachoma bodies into the cell, chromatin material is thrown
out, and this changes to plastin, and while it is not probable that all
the plastin material is formed from chromatin, at least a part of it
is. This formation is typical of cell degeration, as has lately been
shown by R. Hertwig, Hartmann, and Reichow working on other
forms.
The trachoma bodies increase rapidly in number until they come
to fill up the entire space of the cytoplasm of the cell. (Figure 4))
This increase in the number of the trachoma bodies has a destruc-
tive effect on the cell. The nucleus is forced to the edge of the
cell (Figure 5) and finally destroyed (Figure 6). In this way the
cell is destroyed and after its destruction the bodies come to lie
free, and may get into the pus or on the surface of the conjunctiva.
There seems to be little doubt that the bodies described are the
germs of the disease, and the amorphous masses reaction products
of the cell. It might be added that the trachoma bodies have been
described in the nucleus (Figure 2) and lying free in the cell in
the early stages, apparently before the reaction product had been
formed. In the destruction of the cells and the irritation caused
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA 47
by these bodies, there is ample explanation of the ravages of the
disease. Besides this when we consider that in all fresh cases, the
presence of the bodies is constant, and that their morphology is
always the same, we add one more point in favor of this view.
Furthermore these bodies have never been found in any other form
of eye disease. All forms of conjunctivitis and infections of the
eyes have been examined, but the results have all been negative.
A point that has caused a great deal of doubt is that after
filtration through the finest Berkfeld filter under pressure, the
filtrate was found to be infectious, although no bodies were visible.
The explanation of this phenomenon is that the smaller ultra-micro-
scopic bodies passed through the filter, but this is purely hypo-
thetical. Prowazek, working on chicken pest, which presents the
same problem, has been able to clear up the matter. He has shown
that by using a Berkfeld filter and filling the pores with agar,
celloidin and gelatin that the filtrate was no longer infectious. In
the gelatinous mass he found the broken bodies of the germs.
In cases that have been treated and in old established cases
no trachoma bodies have been found. Greeff has shown in at least
one case that at a certain stage the disease is not infectious, but
unfortunately he does not state whether or not the trachoma bodies
were present. The indication seems to be that there is a stage in
the life cycle of the germ when it is not present in the form
described. Another fact suggestive of the life history, is that the
disease is recurrent (recidiv). After an apparent cure that has
lasted some time, the disease suddenly comes back in full vigor,
when there was no apparent new infection. This is a very important
consideration in the matter of the suppression of the disease, and
probably accounts for the great number of cases that slip into this
country despite the care of the United States Public Health and
Marine Hospital Service. In this respect it reminds us of the
action of malaria, and it is interesting to note that in 1897 Elze
published a paper trying to show the relation of trachoma to the
Plasmodium of malaria.
Many experiments have been made to grow the germ in cul-
ture. The secretion has been planted in: (1) Different fertile soils;
(2) on boullion; (3) on agar, weak and strong; (4) on glycerin
48 H. C. SOLOMON
agar; (5) on blood agar; (6) on Loffler’s blood serum; (7) on
serum agar; (8) on soils free from acids. The contents of follicles
were also planted in the soils. On no occasion were the trachoma
bodies obtained. This does not mean that they cannot be grown in
culture, but rather that the right conditions have not been tried.
Although only negative results were obtained in the attempts
to grow the germ in culture, they have been grown in culture
animals. Halberstaeder and v. Prowazek succeeded in infecting
Orang Otangs and obtaining the typical trachoma bodies. Positive
results were not obtained on all occasions, even on repetition; this
was so both when the secretion and the follicles themselves were
used for the inoculation. There is a possibility that the virus was
not all retained, but was washed away by the lachrimation. There
is also a possibility that some of the animals were naturally immune,
and also that the cases from which the virus was taken were not
in an infectious stage of the disease.
Innoculation experiments have been made on other animals,
both for the purpose of attempting to get material for experimen-
tation and also for hygienic considerations. Experiments have been
made to inoculate rabbits, guinea pigs and dogs, but with negative
results. However Greeff remarks that he remembers seeing a dog
that apparently had trachoma, the eyes presenting all the clinical
symptoms; and Dr. Kunz reports a dog kept in the trachoma bar-
racks at Thorn afflicted with the disease. In both of these instances
_ however, no microscopical examinations were made to find the
trachoma bodies.
Greeff was unable to infect the Macacus apes, while the Italian
investigators, Baiardi and Bertarelli, and Cecchetto obtained positive
results both on the Macacus and Cercopithecus. The time that
elapsed before it became certain that the infection was successful
varied from two weeks to three months. The fact that these investi-
gators working in Italy were able to get successful inoculations,
while Greeff in Germany was unsuccessful with the same species,
suggested that climatic conditions may have something to do with
the infectiousness of the virus.
Successful inoculation were performed on the Cynocephalus
(Pavinae) apes by Hess and Romer, Greeff, and Dr. Hereford.
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA AQ
The latter stated that after a time the symptoms began to disappear
and five weeks after the inoculation had disappeared entirely.
This suggests that the disease may run in a cycle, or that the culture
animal had a high resistance.
A fact that seems pertinent in regard to these experiments on
animals is that even in cases where it was apparent that the infec-
tion had taken, the condition of the conjunctiva was different from
that in man. The inflammation was not so great and there were
no infected follicles present in the manner so characteristic in human
cases. Greeff remarks that ‘while the conjunctiva reacts to the
trachoma virus, the condition of the susceptibility and in the struc-
ture of the clinical pictures there is established a great difference
between man and animals. Perhaps it is the same as we have
learned in the case of the syphilis virus, that the animals give a
lesser susceptibility as against a greater in man.”
Greeff has performed two inoculation experiments on humans.
In the first case no results were obtained. There could be no doubt
that the person from whom the virus was taken had the disease.
Two possibilities present themselves to explain the failure of the
experiment :—either that the person on whom it was made was
inherently immune to trachoma, or that the period of infectiousness
had been run. Greeff offers the latter explanation. It is the general
opinion of clinicians that the disease has its periods of infectiousness,
and after this has been run that it is no longer infectious. That the
virus from the eye of this patient of Greeff's experiment was at
one time infectious seems certain, as two members of his family
had apparently caught it from him previously.
In the second case the results were distinct. On the second day
after the inoculation there was a reddening, swelling and secretion
of the left eye, but the difference between the two eyes was slight.
Five days later there was a swelling of the lid, slight swelling of
the conjunctiva, and a slight secretion, the two eyes being well differ-
entiated. Three days later there was a distinct swelling of the lid
and conjunctiva with the formation of follicles. The next day the
eye was running, the lids heavily swollen, the conjunctiva very red,
and folds and follicles formed, presenting a typical trachoma pic-
ture. The microscopical examinations showed no cell inclusions
50 H. C. SOLOMON
until the thirteenth day, when the first were visible. After this they
increased rapidly.
From these results we can draw the following conclusions:
Trachoma is a specific infectious disease; it is transmissable by
purely mechanical means, without the presence of an intermediate
host; there is no acute or initial stage of the disease, differentiated
from a secondary or tertiary stage as in the case of syphilis since
trachoma develops completely in a few days. The fact that with
the introduction of the virus the trachoma bodies, cell inclusions,
are brought into the conjunctiva, which before was free from these,
speaks strongly for the conception of these bodies as the specific
germ of the disease.
The question as to susceptibility and immunity to this disease
has often been raised. Is there any such thing as disposition of a
race as a whole to this disease? The only fact seeming to have any
bearing on this question is that the negroes in North America seem
to be immune from it. As far as is known no case has ever been
reported among them. On the other hand in Europe and Asia it is
found to a great extent among the colored races, and in Africa it is
very prevalent, Egypt seeming to have been its original home. On
the whole it may be said that race has no proved significance in
this connection.
It is interesting to note that children up to the age of two or
three years seem to be immune. At least no cases have been noted
in very young children, even when they have been suckled by
mothers having the disease.
It has been stated that persons having gonorrheal infections
of the eyes are immune, but this is not so. It has also been said
that scrofula prepares the eye for trachoma infection, but there
is no proof of this. Of course a person in this condition may be
highly susceptible as there is a favorable condition for the retention
of the virus, if brought into contact with the eye.
It has been contended that when one eye is infected the other
becomes immune. It is true that it is usually found only in one
eye, but the reason probably is that after one eye becomes infected
the patient becomes more careful and keeps the other eye clean.
Personally I have seen a case in which both eyes were infected.
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA SI
Germaix tried infecting the free eye with the virus of the other, but
was unsuccessful. This however does not prove anything as it is
possible that he took the virus from an eye in which the infectious
stage had been run.
People whose blood contains a large amount of haemoglobin
are more likely to escape the disease. Anemia and the presence of
CO2 are favorable for the disease.
In the lowlands and swampy regions the disease is especially
prevalent, while in the highlands it is less often found. This is due
in a great measure to the conditions found in these regions. In
the swampy countries there is a greater amount of CO2 which is
favorable to the disease, and dampness is also a favorable condition.
In the highlands the conditions are less favorable for the disease as
the people are found to have more haemoglobin in the blood and
less CO2 as a rule.
It is probable that climatic conditions influence the virility,
the re-occurrence and the infectiousness of the disease. While it is
not found exclusively in any one place, it has been longest and best
known in Egypt, a warm country. It is also noticeable in the
clinics that the disease is less frequent in winter, and that with the
return of the warm weather, new infections or re-occurrences come.
There can be little doubt that trachoma is a germ disease, or
that the germ is present in the morphological structures described.
Our knowledge of the subject points to the so-called trachoma
bodies as the germ, rather than the larger amorphous masses. The
point then remains, is the parasite a protozoon or bacterium?
Halberstaeder and v. Prowazek claim that the parasites are
protozoans, while Greeff, Fresch and Clausen claim that they are
bacteria. In support of the theory that they are protozoans are the
following facts: (1) The disease and also the related diseases run
in cycles so characteristic of protozoan diseases. It has been noticed
that there is a re-occurrence after an apparent cure without a new
infection. (2) The trachoma bodies are intracellular. The only
cases of bacteria that are intracellular are the leper bacilli described
by Babes, but this is strongly opposed by Sudakowitsch; and the
Gonococci, whose intracellular nature is now explained as due to the
action of phagocytes. (3) They have also been found in the nucleus,
52 H. C. SOLOMON
a condition that has never been observed in the case of any bac-
teria. (4) They give certain reaction products that can be traced
morphologically, and by staining, to the stainable matter of the
nucleus (chromatin and nuclein). (5) They can not be grown in
culture media as can the bacteria. (6) They are very adaptive,
changing according to the environment. (7) They give new quali-
ties to their host. (8) Gall and gall salts, which have no effect on
bacteria, destroy their virulence. (9) The division as pictured by
Leber and Hartmann, shows a condition analogous to that in forms
of protozoa, especially as observed in amoeba and flagellates. (10)
They are similar morphologically to forms of protozoa found para-
sitic in amoeba. (Figure 7). (11) They are smaller than any
known bacteria.
Greeff, who considers them as bacteria, says that the fact that
they have not yet been grown in culture does not prove that they
are not bacteria, but that the right medium has not been found.
Further he argues that the smallness of the body is no criterion as
Frosch has shown some bacteria equally as small. Unfortunately it
is not stated what these bacteria are. Another point that he empha-
sizes is that the double form is characteristic of the bacteria; but with
binary fission this form would be seen in any case.
I think that the evidence now at hand greatly favors the
contention that the body is a protozoon. There still remains the
question of their classification, but with our present meagre knowl-
edge of the subject little can be said. They are undoubtedly closely
related to the germs of the other diseases that were mentioned as
being closely related to trachoma. Prowazek creates a new group to
put these forms in, calling them Chlamydozoa, i. e., mantle bearers
(referring to the fact that they surround the nucleus in the form of
a cap or mantle) and placing this group midway between the bac-
teria and protozoa.
What can be said as to the practical application of the trachoma
bodies in the diagnosis of trachoma? In new cases that have never
been under treatment the presence of these bodies is constant and
specific for this disease, but in most cases there is little need to
make so complicated an examination as the clinical picture is typical.
In old cases, or cases that have been under treatment, the bodies
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA 53
disappear, and then while the patient might be suffering from
trachoma, this form of diagnosis would be contradictory. It may be
said that this method is only confirmatory and not sufficient in itself,
When the results are positive there can be no doubt that trachoma
exists, but when these bodies are absent the disease may still exist.
Through the kindness of Dr. A. Barkan, in charge of the eye
clinic of the Cooper Medical College, I was enabled to obtain ma-
terial from trachoma patients. This material was used to demon-
strate the etiological factor of the disease and to experiment on the
susceptibility of animals. The work was done in the laboratory
of the Department of Zoology of the University of California, with
the following results.
Material was obtained from the eye of a man, forty-five years
of age, who claimed that his eyes had never before been treated.
Smears of the secretion of the eye were made, the contents of
follicles were spread upon cover glasses, and sections were made
from the conjunctiva obtained from an operation. These prepara-
tions were stained with the Giemsa stain and some with Heiden-
haim’s iron alum haematoxylin.
Examination of the preparations stained by the Giemsa method
showed many pus cells and leucocytes present in the sectioned ma-
terial. Many small eosinphile granules were also present. In the
parts of the sections showing but few pus cells or leucocytes the
trachoma bodies were found. These, as described above, were
minute deeply staining bodies, lying in a structureless amorphous
mass. These were occasionally found surrounding the nucleus, but
most often they were to be seen lying free outside of the cells in
rows, with the amorphous masses broken up and persisting only
occasionally. These bodies showed also in the other preparations
and with the iron alum haemotoxylin stain.
Other material was obtained from the eye of a Chinaman from
the secretion and by opening follicles. It was found, however, im-
possible to demonstrate any trachoma bodies. In this case it was
discovered that the patient had been under treatment before, and
as has been stated above, in sttch a case the bodies do not seem to
be present. The question however arises as to what has become of
the bodies. When the patient was brought into the clinic, it ap-
54 H. C. SOLOMON
peared that the disease was in a virulent condition, and apparently
rapidly getting worse. Now if these bodies are the direct cause of
the disease why should they be absent in such a condition. The
answer may be given that they may be present and in ultra-micro-
scopic condition, or that while the body of the germ has been de-
stroyed a toxin has remained. These explanations, however are
purely theoretical, and more information is necessary before we
can give a definite explanation.
Attempts were made to infect guinea pigs, white rats, and a dog,
with the disease. The virus for these experiments was obtained
from a patient with trachoma who at the time that the virus was
obtained had never been under treatment for her eyes. The results
were all negative. The eyes of the inoculated animals showed no
clinical symptoms of the disease and the microscopical examina-
tions were also negative.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Archives of Opthalmology, vol. 38, 1900.
Archives of Opthalmology, vol. 38, 1900.
CLARK AND SCHERESCHEWSKY.
Trachoma, Its Characters and Effects. Public Health and Marine Hos-
pital Service, U. S., 1907.
CLAUSEN.
Untersuchungen tiber die Enstehung und die Entwicklung des Trachoms.
Klinischen Jahrbuch, 1908.
Beitrage zur Trachom Forschung. Klinischen Jahrbuch, 1909. Inhalt-
verzeichnis :
a. Die Uebertragbarkeit des Trachoms. Prof. Greeff.
b. Untersuchungen zur Aetiology des Trachoms, Leber und Hart-
mann.
c. Untersuchungen tiber die sogenannten Trachomkorperchen. Dr.
C. Di Santo.
d. Wie sind die Sogenannten Trachomkorperchen differential-
diagnostisch zu verwerten. Dr. Clausen.
e. Die Einschleppung des Trachoms in den Regierungsbezirk
Arnsberg. Prof. Greeff.
Ze)
VI
READE
THE ETIOLOGY OF TRACHOMA 55
KeR EL ZE:
Plasmodienbefunde bei Trachom, 1897.
GIEMSA UND PROWAZEK.
Weitere Untersuchungen tiber sog. ultramikroskopische Infektionserreger.
| Miinchener med. Wochenschr., No. 29, 1908.
HALBERSTAEDER UND PROWAZEK.
Zur Aetiologie des Trachoms. Berliner klin. Wochenschr., No. 24, 1909.
Zu dem Aufsatz “Die Erreger des Trachoms” von Prof. Greeff. Deut.
med. Wochenschr. No. 17, 1900.
PROWAZEK UND DE REUREPAIRE.
Untersuchen tiber Variola. Miinchener med. Wochenschr. No. 44, 1908.
S. von PROWAZEK.
Chlamydozoa I, Zusammenfassende Ubersicht. Arch. fiir Protistenkunde
10, 1907.
Bemerkungen zur Kenntnis der pathogen Mikro-organismen ‘“Chlamy-
dozoa.”’ Miinchener med. Wochenschrift No. 19, 1908.
EXPLANATION OF FIGURES
Fig. 1. An epithelial cell with a few trachoma bodies surrounding the nucleus.
Fig. 2. Trachoma bodies surrounded by light court as figured by Leber.
Fig. 3. Division of trachoma bodies as figured by Leber.
Fig. 4. Cell in which trachoma bodies have greatly increased in number.
Fig. 5. Nucleus being crowded to edge of cell.
Fig. 6. The destruction of the cell, the nucleus having disappeared.
Fig. 7. An Ameba infected with protozoan parasites. (After Calkins).
DEPARTMENT OF SUMMARIES
TO BE DEVOTED TO DIGESTS*OF PROGRESS
IN: BIOLOGY ~
While the Transactions will continue to be primarily a Journal of research in micro-
biology, it is recognized that the field has become so broad as to preclude the possibility
of frequent articles in any one of the departments of special interest. Because of this
it will be the policy to present, from time to time, supplementary digests of the progress
being made in the various fields of micro-biology. It is also proposed to introduce similar
summaries of the progress made in some departments not represented in our articles of
research. This is done with the feeling that such reviews will increase the permanent
value of the Transactions to all who may not have access to a large list of technical
biological journals, nor the time to make the survey for themselves.
THE THEORY OF NERVE COMPONENTS AND THE
FORE BRAIN VESICLE OF VERTEBRATES
By F. L. LANDACRE
A critical review of the two recent papers on the fore brain
vesicle of vertebrates by J. B. Johnston (4) and C. J. Herrick (3)
would be out of place in a short sketch. They should be consulted
by those caring to follow the descriptions and arguments on which
their conclusions are based. Several points in these papers have an
important bearing on the theory of nerve components and a dis-
cussion of these in connection with some of the more general con-
clusions of that theory may not be inopportune for those whose
interest in other fields of work preclude their following closely the
development of the theory and its implications.
The theory of nerve components in its narrow sense, and as
first worked out, applies primarily to the composition of the cerebral
nerves. It has, however, extended its field until it involves not only
the peripheral nerves and sense organs, but the fundamental struc-
ture of the cord and brain as well as the embryology of all these
structures. It has gradually been enlarged into what has been called
a functional morphology of the nervous system by applying to the
58 F. L, LANDACRE
whole nervous system principles first applied to limited parts of
that system.
The significance of the theory is, however, most apparent from
a statement of the facts upon which it was founded.
Any one who has had occasion to consult the neurological lit-
erature of the last decade preceding 1900, must have been struck
by the diversity of opinion and often by the hopeless lack of agree-
ment as to the homology of the cerebral nerves in the various classes
of vertebrates. Coupled with this disagreement as to the homology
of the cerebral nerves was disagreement as to the more fundamental
problems of head morphology, particularly the problem as to the
number of head neuromeres and the relation of these to the cerebral
nerves and of the cerebral nerves to the spinal nerves.
Now while these fundamental problems are of the greatest in-
terest and of far reaching importance to the vertebrate morphology,
the question arises as to whether the point of view from which
the work was done might not have had some fundamental weakness
about it that prevented agreement among workers.
The dominant note, in the writer’s estimation, in the neurolog-
ical work of the period mentioned, was the serial homology of the
central and peripheral nervous systems; not always the avowed
object of research of course, but the dominant idea by which most
morphological conceptions were tested.
Starting with the two-root segmental spinal nerves, the effort
was made to unravel the cerebral nerves on the basis of their rela-
tion to the spinal nerves ; to determine the number of head segments ;
to place the cerebral nerves in their proper segments and to deter-
mine the homology of the cerebral nerves to each other in the vari-
ous groups of vertebrates. The aim was purely morphological and
its weakness as a working hypothesis became most apparent in the
effort to determine the homologies of the cerebral nerves with the
two root theory and serial homology as the fundamental ideas back
of the analysis. Much of the morphological work was extremely
valuable and necessary to the solution of problems in head mor-
phology which we shall have with us for a long time to come, and to
which we must return from time to time and attempt to solve from a
THE THEORY OF NERVE COMPONENTS 59
different standpoint, and after the acquisition of new material bear-
ing on these problems.
The essential weakness of any purely morphological conception
as a working basis lies in the fact that it fails to take cognizance of
the fact that an organism is primarily a living thing; that there are
certain processes that it must carry on to meet the requirements im-
posed upon it by its environment and that no structure, however
perfect anatomically, can persist and become a permanent part of
the organism, if it does not do the work demanded of it. In short,
what an animal has to do and the way it does it are more important
and furnish a better working basis in the attempt to understand its
nervous system, than the serial homology of its parts or any other
purely morphological conception that ignores the function of the
structures concerned. The primitive morphological characters of
the nervous system may be modified almost indefinitely so long as
they serve the primary functions of conduction and correlation that
adjust the organism to its environment.
These criticisms of the early workers in neurology do not apply
to them only, for their morphology was exactly in line with the
morphology of the time. It had the same strength and the same
weaknesses that the purely morphological conceptions in zoology
and embryology had. The parallelism goes further. The general
adoption of the experimental method in general zoology and embry-
ology was coincident with the appearance of the theory of nerve
components and a functional analysis of the central and peripheral
nervous systems of the vertebrates. This I take to be the deeper
significance of the recent work on the nervous system whether it
is strictly experimental or not ; not so much to ignore morphological
conceptions as to make them of secondary importance to functional
conceptions. It amounts to determining the simplest conduction
paths in the lower vertebrates and following the elaboration of these
paths in the more specialized higher forms, the conduction path be-
ing primarily the expression of an important functional fact.
Take for instance Gaskell’s (1) treatment of the typical spinal
segment. Instead of the old two-root theory which was a most
serious handicap to the correct interpretation of the homologies of
the cerebral nerves, he finds four roots; two somatic and two vis-
60 F. L. LANDACRE
ceral, with a sensory and motor component in each. This gives us
four roots to each segment and four centers in the cord. The terms
used to designate these components, somatic and visceral, are of
course morphological as are their homologues in the brain; but the
significance really lies in the fact that the visceral sensory and
visceral motor components are concerned in reflexes involving the
adjustment of internal organs to each other, while the somatic
motor and somatic sensory components are concerned in reflexes
involving the adjustment of the organism to its external environment
through external stimuli and by means of somatic muscles concerned
chiefly in locomotion.
By conceiving of these four centers of each segment as arranged
in longitudinal columns, we can speak of a longitudinal analysis
of the cord, even though the centers may not be continuous as cell
masses in consecutive segments. This conception of longitudinal
columns of the cord and brain, while it does not clear up some
of the difficulties encountered by the students of transverse seg-
mentation of the brain, furnishes us with a far more valuable con-
ception with which to attack the fundamental problems of the cord
and brain. It shows how simple generalized reflexes have been
elaborated into highly specialized reflexes, particularly those of the
special senses and of the higher types of conduction paths of the
higher mammals.
This idea was first clearly enunciated for the brain by Johnston
(5) on the basis of his study of the brain of the sturgeon. Here we
find an almost diagrammatic arrangement of the four columns with
a marked continuity throughout the length of the medulla. The
simplicity of arrangement is due in part to the hypertrophy of the
columns and in part to the widening of the central canal of the cord
into the fourth ventricle. From the medulla the columns extend
forward into the regions anterior to this with varying degrees of
continuity ; the important segmental nuclei of the metencephalon, the
mesencephalon and the diencephalon being referable to these four
columns. The conduction paths are important in determining the
exact relation of important regions in the segmental portions of
these three brain divisions and the supra-segmental centers are refer-
able to correlation tissue present to a greater or less extent in
segmental centers.
THE THEORY OF NERVE COMPONENTS 61
The older morphology sought to place these centers in their
proper places in the transverse segmentation of the brain, an effort
that met with indifferent success and when successful gave us little
clue to the functional significance of the centers. The newer mor-
phology inquires primarily as to which of the four functional
divisions, as shown most distinctly in the medulla, a particular
nucleus or tract belongs, and concerns itself only secondarily with
its place in the transverse segmentations of the head, since its rela-
tion to one of the four functional divisions determines its position
functionally and serves to explain the significance of the secondary
and tertiary reflex paths in the brain.
Turning now to the cerebral nerves, to which the theory of
nerve components was first applied in its narrow sense, we find that
the first analysis of the cerebral nerves on the basis of their com-
ponents or functional units was made by Strong (6) on an am-
phibian. This analysis was very thorough for the trigemino-facial
complex. Somewhat later a very thorough analysis of all the cere-
bral nerves in a teleost was made by Herrick (2) accompanied by
a full description of the central connection and peripheral distribu-
tion of these nerves. The basis upon which this analysis was made
is the difference in size between the fibres of the various compon-
ents such as the ear and lateral line or acoustico-lateralis component,
the general cutaneous or tactile, and the visceral including both
special visceral or gustatory and the general visceral supplying
mucous surfaces. The analysis is simplified in some types by a com-
plete isolation of ganglia which are usually fused in other types and
especially by the hypertrophy of certain of these systems—in some
types one, and in other types another—so that the course of a given
component can be traced from its origin in its ganglion to both its
central and peripheral terminations. This last principle of using
hypertrophied systems has been emphasized and used, particularly
by Herrick, in the solution of difficult problems in the morphology
of the brain and nerves. It practically amounts to selecting a type
in which nature has performed an experiment for us, as for instance
in the case of the enormously hypertrophied gustatory system of the
catfishes where this system is so large in proportion to other systems
that both its peripheral nerves and central connections can be fol-
62 F. L. LANDACRE
lowed with comparative certainty. A great deal of attention has
been paid in nerve component work to the analysis of V, VII, VIII,
IX and X nerves, particularly their sensory components because
these, excepting the VIII, are compound nerves. The III, IV and
VI are pure motor nerves and easily referable to the somatic motor
group and I and II stand, in a sense, in a class by themselves owing
to their mode of development. These nerves are amenable to the
same classification, the I being placed in the visceral sensory and the
II in the somatic sensory division. These will be referred to later.
Without attempting to give in any detail the distribution of the
three components mentioned, the general cutaneous, the acoustic-lat-
eralis and the visceral in the cerebral nerves, the general statement
may be made, taking the ganglia as a starting point, that in the
Ichthyopsida the V ganglion furnishes only general cutaneous or
tactile fibres. The VII ganglion furnishes, from two of its div-
isions, lateral line fibres and from a third division visceral fibres both
special gustatory and general. The VIII ganglion furnishes only
auditory fibres referable phylogenetically to the lateral line group.
The IX ganglion contains in Ameiurus apparently a pure special
visceral portion whose fibres supply taste buds and a lateralis gan-
glion. The X contains all four components.
The way in which these components are distributed in any given
cranial nerve trunk is quite variable. A particular nerve in two
different types retains its integrity only in a general way, the degree
of variability depending largely upon the dominance of one or the
other of these components. So that nerves vary not only in the
relative amount of any one of these components and consequently
in their mode of peripheral distribution but vary absolutely also by
containing components in one type which are absent in another. The
peripheral organs to which any one of these components is dis-
tributed are constant, as are their central connections in the brain,
and these central connections are referable to the four longitudinal
columns mentioned earlier.
The most obvious conclusion from a study of the analysis of
the cerebral nerves is that the units of which the cerebral nerves are
made up are the components and not the nerves themselves. Any
given cerebral nerve if studied in a number of types is likely to
THE THEORY OF NERVE COMPONENTS 63
show a variation in its distribution owing to the fact that it does not
have a constant structure. The cerebral nerves are more like routes
from the periphery to the brain in which the units of conduction
vary. The components consequently become the units in our analy-
sis of these cerebral nerves and the term nerve-component becomes
extremely valuable as a constant reminder that we must start with
these as a basis in our attempt to analyze the cerebral nerves rather
than the segmental position of the nerve, with reference to head
neuromeres. The determination of the precise segmental position
of a given cerebral nerve would be an interesting morphological fact
if we could ascertain it exactly, but is relatively unimportant com-
pared with an accurate knowledge of the functional divisions or
components of the nerve which enable us to determine what kind of
reflexes must be served by this nerve, and the part it plays in the
economy of the body as a functioning organism. The theory of
nerve components looks toward an explanation of how the nervous
system works.
The interesting question of the relation of the head to the trunk
is not ignored in the theory of nerve components, although it is
approached from a different point of view. The terms “general
cutaneous” and “general visceral’ applied to fibres in the cerebral
nerves that do not end in special sense organs, indicate the funda-
mental similarity of these in both brain and cord. This conclusion
is further strengthened by the similarity in mode of origin of the
two components in the brain and cord, these coming from the neural
crest in both cases.
The relation of the special somatic components of the cerebral
nerves, in which class the acoustico-lateralis and optic fibres fall
and of the special visceral, in which class the gustatory and olfac-
tory fibres fall, is not quite so simple. These classes of fibres
receive their name from the fact that they end in the cord and
brain in centers homologous to the visceral and somatic centers of
the cord and are special in the sense that they end in specialized
organs. They differ from spinal nerves in the fact that there are in
present Ichthyopsida no homologues of the special sense organs in
the trunk innervated by spinal nerves and that the specialized gan-
glia arise in a manner totally different from the spinal ganglia. The
64 F. L. LANDACRE
fact that the centers in the brain are homologous to those of the
cord enables them to be placed in the same general category from a
functional standpoint.
Whatever may prove to be the explanation of the origin of
the special sense organs and of the special ganglia, the reference of
the special components of the cerebral nerves to the two compon-
ents represented in the cord is a marked step in the direction of a
rational interpretation of the marked cephalization of the verte-
brates.
Returning now to the brain axis, we find the attempt made in
the two papers mentioned to carry the analysis of the brain stem
into the diencephalon and telencephalon. Prof. Johnston has given
his attention mainly to the question as to the exact delimitation of
the first two segments, while Prof. Herrick has taken up the question
of the extension of the four longitudinal columns into the first two
brain segments.
Both these papers contain suggestions for changes in the B. N.
A. subdivisions of the diencephalon and telencephalon. The bear-
ing of the papers on the analysis of the brain axis into logitudinal
columns, only, can be taken up here.
In the diencephalon the six primary laminae of His, i. e., the
roof plate, the floor plate and two lateral plates on each side become
ten according to Herrick. The two lateral plates of His which are
separated by the longitudinal furrow, the sulcus limitans, are divided
into four longitudinal regions by two additional furrows. The two
dorsal columns of these four lateral columns are devoted mainly to
receptive functions and the two ventral columns to effector func-
tions. The ventral columns contain chiefly the descending conduc-
tion paths and the dorsal the ascending conduction paths. The
sulcus limitans disappears in the diencephalon and its disappear-
ance is probably correlated with the absence of motor nerves
anterior to the mid-brain and to the invasion of the remaining
motor coordination tissues by visceral elements. The evagination of
the optic vesicle occurs in the dorsal lamina. The boundary between
the diencephalon and telencephalon is placed by Johnston on a line
running from the velum transversum to the chiasma. This leaves
a median unpaired portion in the telencephalon in addition to the
THE THEORY OF NERVE COMPONENTS 65
paired portions evaginated from the brain axis and surrounding the
first and second ventricles.
Prof. Herrick’s analysis of the telencephalon is based upon the
adult amphibian and the embryonic brains of vertebrates generally.
The four lateral columns of the diencephalon are evaginated
to form the hemisphere but owing to the meeting of the roof and
floor plate of His in the lamina terminalis or rostral end of the
brain, the columns situated at the extreme dorsal and the extreme
ventral parts of the lateral brain wall approach each other and are
shifted in position so as to meet on the medial wall of the lateral ven-
tricle leaving the lateral wall to be formed by the two middle col-
umns of the diencephalon.
The two ventral laminae are directly continuous with the ven-
tral columns and are concerned in efferent functions, the ventro-
medial in visceral efferent and the lateral in somatic efferent func-
tions.
The two dorsal laminae correspond to the two dorsal laminae
of the diencephalon but direct continuity between the two regions of
the brain is interrupted in forms above fishes by the great flexure
between the diencephalon and telencephalon. The olfactory bulb
was the site of the initial telencephalic evagination, but later in
phylogeny all four columns become involved and there was also
much differentiation in situ. The later stages of the telencephalon
were dominated by the entrance of tracts for the correlation of
olfactory sense with tactile and visual sensations and as we ascend
the phylogenetic series the non-olfactory correlation tissue domi-
nates more and more the functions of the telencephalon.
The significant fact about both these papers is not so much
the explanation of later stages of the first brain vesicles, although
that is significant, as the reduction of them to a simple type which
brings them into line with other parts of the brain axis and renders
clear the analysis of the whole brain axis from a functional stand-
point. It is a significant step in the process of rendering intelligible
the most puzzling field in vertebrate anatomy.
KF. L. LANDACRE
/
BIBLIOGRAPHY
GaSsKELL, W. H.
On the Structure, Distribution, and Functions of the Nerves which Inner-
vate Visceral and Vascular Systems. Jour. of Phys. Vol. 7, 1886.
Herrick, C. J.
The Cranial and First Spinal Nerves of Menidia. Jour. of Com. Neu.
and Psy. Vol. 9, 1800.
The Morphology of the Forebrain in Amphibia and Reptiles. Jour.
Com. Neu. and Psy. Vol. 20, No. 5, 19Io.
Jounston, J. B.
The Morphology of the Forebrain Vesicle in Vertebrates. The Journal
of Com. Neu. and Psy; Vol. XIX No. 5, 1900.
The Brain of Acipenser. Zool. Jahrbtcher. Vol. 15, 1901.
Strone. O. S.
The Cranial Nerves of the Amphibia. Jour. Morph. Vol. 10, 1895.
NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
A PLEA FOR MICROSCOPY, AS A STUDY AND A HOBBY
Such general terms as Naturalist, Student of Nature, or Micro-
scopist have a peculiar value in these times of specialization. It is
worth while at this time to dwell somewhat on their value, as illus-
trated in our own Society. ive
1. In the first place it furnishes a common bond between per-
sons of various employments and nationalities—whether experts or
not—who are working for a better understanding of nature. The
very diversity of the interests of these special students makes this
bond all the more necessary.
2. It furnishes a means for mutual stimulation and inter-
change of ideas, whereby the amateur gets the advantage of the
view point of the specialist, and the professional may keep the spirit
of the amateur.
3. Not only are knowledge and investigation specialized in an
extreme fashion, but the specialization, in the processes necessary
to bring work to its completion and to develop it from all needed
aspects, is so detailed that the draftsman, the photographer, the
maker of instruments of precision, the technician, as well as the
biologist, must appear in every piece of good work.
4. There ought also to be something in such a union of inter-
ested people, scattered as we are over the whole land, when it comes
to coordinating results of similar work from different localities.
This is peculiarly true of such studies as vary with locality—as,
diseases, plankton, systematic biology, and the like.
5. The proposed resumes and summaries, with suitable but
not too elaborate bibliographies, ought to be of very great aid to
the rank and file of a general society; and if this Society can fur-
nish such a general review of the important fields of biology it will
be a real contribution to the needs of the student.
For these and various other reasons it appears to me that study
with the microscope furnishes the most interesting side interest, or
68 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
hobby. It is attractive in itself and allies the student at once with
many departments of natural science. It is impossible to get out of
range of interesting things to be examined, and while different
workers will undoubtedly get returns proportional to their interest
and insight, ample returns can be had by all.
V. A. Latuam, M. D.
SOME OF THE NEEDS OF THE SOCIETY AS SEEN BY ONE OF THE
OLDER MEMBERS
In the light of the fact that specialization is on the increase, one
of the problems of the society at present is in bringing together and
holding together the older and the newer members. The newer
members are apparently less interested in the perfecting of methods,
and more in the resulting knowledge of biology. The older mem-
bers possibly like to dwell more on the instrument and on the
beauties and adjustments found in it, and on its possibilities as an
instrument of precision. We need to see that these interests are by
no means antithetical, but rather supplementary. Many modern
workers no not use their instruments and their technic to the point
of refinement practiced by earlier workers; nor get the full value
out of the modern improvements in the microscope and its ac-
cessories.
We need also to see that the Society meets the needs of both
the beginner and the man of research. If it is worth while to have
a general society containing amateur workers, it is worth while
to take such steps as will make the society helpful to the inde-
pendent worker with the microscope, even when he is making his
start. In many instances the back volumes of the Society will con-
tain much that is valuable to the beginner. Can’t we have a series of
notes, or a comprehensive article, on “How the New Worker May
Independently Take up the Work With the Microscope?” Would
not such a discussion, coupled with a brief department of notes and
suggestions of a practical nature, help keep alive the amateur and
independent worker who has not the opportunity of personal asso-
ciation with other workers?
V. A. Latuam, M. D.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 69
MICROMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
In the Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society for Oct.,
1910, is a scholarly paper by Dr. Marshall D. Ewell, twice President
of this Society, on “Comparative Micrometric Measurements.” The
paper is too technical to report in brief, but the writer’s conclusions
are:
1. That measurements of micrometric spaces, from .oI mm. to
0.I mm., when made in large series by experienced observers, may
be trusted as accurate within limits quite appreciably less than 0.1 yu.
2. That it is best to use the lowest power that will properly
resolve the object; and that greater magnification for purposes of
more accurate measurement is illusory.
THE CENTROSOME IN LIVING PROTOPLASM
The studies of living protoplasm are continually becoming more
numerous and successful. The centrosome, for example, has been
seen in living cells as follows: Of the mucous membrane from the
stomach of the frog, the cat, the dog, and the horse; of the pos-
terior corneal epithelium of the cat; in the summer ova of the tur-
bellarian Mesostoma; in the early cleavage cells of the embryo
of the nematode Ascaris; and in the eggs of certain species of
sea-urchins,
LIFE CYCLE IN AN AMEBA
Professor Maynard M. Metcalf, Journal Exp. Zool., Oct. 1910,
describes some interesting conditions believed by him to be stages in
the life-cycle of an Ameba. Upon the body of active Amebae were
formed numerous protuberances or “gemmules.’”’ These gem-
mules finally became free, and are believed, after a period of inac-
tivity, to give rise to small bi-flagellate monads containing a part of
the original nuclear matter. These may withdraw their flagella, be-
come ameboid, and occasionally divide by binary fission. Instances
of copulation, and of permanent fusion, of these flagellospores in
pairs were observed. The result was a typical small crawling ameba
(of the blattae type).
DIATOMS AS A FOOD SUPPLY FOR ORGANISMS
Systematic study of plankton, and experiments in rearing ame-
bae and larvae of different kinds, are all increasing our appreciation
70 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
of the role of Diatoms as the nutritive foundation of the various
successions of life and activity among the micro-organisms.
In a careful and quantitative study of the plankton at the south
end of the Isle of Man, it has been found that the Diatoms are
foundational to the most rapid annual increase in life, which takes
place in the Spring. Dinoflagellates furnish a well-marked, but
less pronounced, maximum later, between April and August. Cope-
pods have a maximum in early summer, usually later than that of
the Dinoflagellates.
E. J. Allen and E. W. Nelson find that Diatoms are peculiarly
satisfactory food in the artificial rearing of various marine larvae
(sea-urchins, worms, mollusks). Several American students have
found that most cultures in which Diatoms succeed prove prolific of
Ameba.
A PECULIAR ACHLYA
W. C. Coker in Botanical Gazette for Nov. 1910, describes a
new species of Achyla from North Carolina. He calls it A. caro-
liniana. The oogonial hyphae often branch in such a way as to sug-
gest the three balls of the pawn-brokers shop. The oogonial hypha
in about 1-6 of the oogonia protrudes into the oogonium in a way to
suggest the action of an antheridium. These are the distinctive
marks. This genus and other Saprolegniaceae present a most at-
tractive field of study for the amateur as well as the professional
student of aquatic botany. They are easily cultivated, are easily
observed, and respond readily to changes of conditions.
TRANSFORMATION OF SPECIES OF VAUCHERIA
A French investigator has succeeded in producing a transfor-
mation in species of the common alga Vaucheria by varying the con-
ditions of growth. IV. terrestris, which showed as a pure culture
when grown in the air, assumed all the characteristics of V. gemi-
nata when grown in an aqueous nutrient solution. By more vigor-
ous nutrition the experimenter was able to effect a still further
transformation into a form like no known form, in which there
was a tendency for the oogonial branches to assume further vege-
tative divisions and later to develop into both oogonia and anthe-
ridia. In other words, a branch that normally produced female
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 71
structures only, through changed nutrition came to develop both
sexes.
SEXUAL PERIODICITY IN DICTYOTA
An interesting case of periodicity in the release of sexual
cells in Dictyota is reported from Naples by I. F. Lewis in the Bo-
tanical Gazette, 1910. It is similar in some respects to that recorded
on page 14 of this issue for the worm Odontosyllis. Mature gametes
are released 2 or 3 days after the neap tides. The rudiments of the
next generation of gametes begin at the same time. The author
finds that the critical points (formation and liberation of the sex-
ual bodies) are reached on the day that low water occurs at or near-
est mid-day. Thus the maximum intensity of light must be a prin-
cipal factor in these periodic phenomena. At other places where
the plant has been studied this simple correspondence is somewhat
modified. This may be due to the persistence of certain inheritances
of earlier adaptations.
QUINONE FIXATION OF ALGAE
A. Bonnet says that even the most delicate algae—as the Siph-
oneae, Confervaceae, Conjugatae, Florideae, etc., may be satisfac-
torily fixed in freshly prepared quinone solution with a strength
of 4:1000. The advantages of the method are: That it may be used
in either salt or fresh water; and that it resists well the dehydration
necessary for mounting either by the glycerine-jelly or balsam
method. The treatment stains the chloroplyll a greenish brown, and
the non-green protoplasm a light yellow.
GROWTH OF NERVES IN CULTURE MEDIA
Professor Ross Granville Harrison (Jour. Exp. Zool., Dec.,
1910) has succeeded in growing excised embryonic cells from the
nervous system of tadpoles, in hanging-drop cultures of coagulated
lymph. Nerve fibrils of more than 1 mm. were thus secured which
could be observed at all stages of growth from the nerve cells.
His observations show (1) that the primitive nerve fibers are
formed by actual protoplasmic movement of the hyaline ectoplasm
of the nerve-cell in a way quite analogous to the extension of pseu-
dopodia in rhizopods, and that thesé fibers end in a rhizopod-like en-
largement with fine processes or pseudopodia; and (2) that the
72 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
neuro-fibrillae differentiate later within this filament. This dem-
onstration is believed to deny the necessity of supposing with Hen-
sen and Schultze and others, that formed structures outside the
original nerve cell are largely responsible for the structure and
course of the nerve fibers.
CAUSES OF CONJUGATION IN PARAMECIUM
Professor Jennings has recently added to his interesting studies
of the Protozoa a study of the conditions determining conjugation
in Paramecium. He finds that successive conjugations may occur
in some cases at intervals of five days and in others of two weeks
to a month. In one case conjugation was repeated after only four
divisions. In others, divisions were followed for three years with
no signs of degeneration and without any conjugation whatever.
The conditions that induce conjugation are both internal and exter-
nal: Internal (inherited), because different stock subjected to
exactly similar conditions had vastly varied periods; external, be-
cause certain nutritive cycles affect the rate. Starved individuals
do not conjugate. Individuals that have been starved and are be-
coming well-fed do not conjugate. Thriving individuals with de-
clining nutritive conditions tend to conjugate. The author is dis-
posed to believe that senile degeneration due to a long series of
divisions which has been thought to be the principal cause of con-
jugation does not figure as a factor of moment.
POWERS OF RESISTANCE IN PIOPHILA LARVAF
It has been shown that Piophila larvae, which are to be found
in cheese and are favored by some eaters of cheese, can pass thru
the gut of the dog or of man without being injured. It is claimed
that they do some damage to the wall of the intestine by the action
of their oral hooks and ventral papillae. They are very hardy and
resist the action of alcohol and other killing agents for considerable
periods of time.
THE BACILLUS OF TYPHUS
W. Predtjetschensky, in Centralblatt f. Bakteriol. u. Parasit.
1910, believes that he has discovered the specific Bacillus of typhus
fever. His evidences are: The bacilli are found abundantly in
blood of patients suffering from the fever, especially about the 6-9
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY FS
day; they are not found in other nearby patients, suffering from
other diseases but not having typhus; they show the agglutination
phenomena known in typhoid.
NEMATODE IN THE MUSCLES OF THE EARTHWORM
B. Buchanan, in Proceedings of Royal Society of Victoria Aug.
1910, describes a parasite (probably nematode) with an interesting
habitat. It was found imbedded in the circular muscle layer of an
earthworm. It has the general appearance of a nematode, but
lacks entirely the reproductive bodies. The author suggests that it
may be the larval stage.
A DEVICE FOR TRANSFERRING SPECIMENS
A simple method of transferring specimens while dehydrating
and clearing was devised by a student a few years ago and has
proven very convenient for general work.
An aluminum thimble such as can be obtained for five or ten
cents is perforated by many pin-holes and a bail of thread is at-
tached at the top. The specimens are placed in the basket thus
formed and lifted from one solution to another without handling.
The thread bail is long enough to hang over the top of the bottle
containing the solution and so support the thimble at the surface of
the liquid to prevent light specimens from floating out. The
stopper can be returned to hold the thimble in position as well as to
cover the bottle.
Eipa R. WALKER.
CHARTS TO SUIT THE COURSE
It may not be generally known to biologists how easily and
cheaply very presentable charts may be made, right in the labora-
tory. White or cream-colored curtain cloth (Holland) of any
convenient width, say forty inches, may be bought by the roll of
ten yards or more, and may easily be cut into proper lengths and
tacked onto one inch half-round moulding. The moulding may be
bought, cut into proper lengths, say forty-two inches, of any planing
mill, and may be painted and varnished in a very short time. It is
best not to attach the cloth to the moulding until after the figures are
drawn.
74 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
The figures should first be outlined lightly in pencil or in white
chalk, and then be finished with India ink and water colors of the
desired shades.
Any student assistant can, with care, make very creditable
charts, or they may be obtained by having each student in a technic
course make a chart, or a part of one, as a part of the work of the -
course.
Diagrams and figures representing sections are very easily
drawn; surface views and dissections require more artistic skill.
The ink and the water colors can be applied without difficulty
with ordinary camel’s hair brushes.
The chief advantage in making these charts is that the exact
series of figures desired for any particular course may be copied
from well known sources.
A. M. REESE.
It is a pleasure to announce that Mr. Ernst Leitz of Wetzlar,
Germany, has been awarded the degree of Doctor of Philosophy by
the University of Marburg in recognition of his distinguished
services to science thru the making of optical instruments during the
last half century.
Major E. V. Elwes, in the Journal of Marine Biological Asso-
ciation of the United Kingdom for 1910, furnishes some very valu-
able analytic keys to the genera of littoral polychetes from the
shores of the English Channel.
THE BUILD OF A MICROSCOPE
A comparison between the Microscopes of say 20 years ago
and of the present day discloses many modifications in construc-
tion and design. In place of the former tall instrument in bright
brass frequently with considerable more vibration than could be
tolerated nowadays, we have the compact, sombre-looking models
with which present day workers are familiar.
In a microscope stand, rigidity and freedom from spring when
the various parts are brought into working are extremely desirable,
but are very difficult to attain with high power oil immersion objec-
tives. Much of this spring is observable when pressure is put on
the stage to move the object in the field. A step in the right direc-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 75
tion has been made in the general construction of microscopes by
abandoning the many separate parts in favour of large portions cast
in one piece of metal. This method is one which the firm of W,
Watson & Sons Limited, 313, High Holborn, London, W. C., have
pursued with conspicuous success for several years past. There
must necessarily be separate parts, but this firm has shown a way
in which, by interlocking, those parts which must be joined together
may be made equal to solid metal, and the arrangement which has
been so much appreciated by users of their Van Heurck
microscopes has now been madeuse of in theirimproved
model of the Royal Microscope.
We append two illustrations showing the way in
which this is effected.
Fig. 2. Breet
Fig. 1 shows the back end of the stage where it is attached to
the limb. It will be noticed that rising from the surface are two
cheeks which fit on either side of the limb and are secured to it by
3 screws on each side, and the bolt for the inclining joint passes
through the centre of the whole. Obviously a stage attached in this
manner must be vastly stronger than one that is merely dependant
on attaching screws for retaining it in its position, and a practical
use of a stage built under these conditions soon discloses its. won-
derful rigidity.
In pursuance of the scheme already utilized, it will be noticed
that the limb is continued below the stage in one piece, and to the
face of it is attached, beneath the stage a substage with its coarse
70 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
and fine adjustments. This is shown in Fig. 2 and the letters refer
to the following parts:
The Limb.
1. The Limb continued downwards to carry Substage.
The bolt hole for the inclining joint.
Substage condenser carrier.
The same fitting swung out of the optical axis.
Fine adjustment milled head.
Coarse adjustment milled head.
Tail-piece carrying the mirror.
The matter is one which is of considerable interest to micro-
scopists, especially those who are interested in high power work
with the best means available, and it is an indication of the way
in which the building of the most accurate of all instruments may
be solidified and improved.
OAD S >
THE LEITZ DOUBLE DEMONSTRATION EYEPIECE WITH POINTER
This eyepiece is an important addition to the many practical,
auxiliary apparatus intended to facilitate microscopical teaching,
thus saving time.
THIS DOUBLE DEMONSTRATION EYEPIECE, with pointer, is an
instrument the need of which was seriously felt for a long time.
It has been constructed with a special view to help the teacher in
demonstrating a particular object in the visual field of a Microscope.
It is used like any ordinary Eyepiece, by simply placing it into
the draw tube of a Microscope. Jt enables two observers to view,
simultaneously, the image which is produced and by means of the
pointer they may demonstrate mutually any part of the image.
The pointer is universally adjustable by a ball joint and can
be moved forward or backward, thus the whole field can be easily
covered.
The construction of the Apparatus may be easily understood
from the accompanying illustration:
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY ING
Patented D. R. G. M. 435297
Between the lenses of the vertical ocular, just above the eye-
piece diaphragn, is placed the double prism I and II, through which
the greater part of the light passes in a straight line. The remainder
of the light being deflected on the long side of prism I into another
prism, No. III in illustration, which again directs the path of rays
into the auxiliary (side) eyepiece which is of terrestrial construc-
tion. This side eyepiece is of sufficient distance (7 inches) from the
vertical one so that the two observers will not interfere with each
other.
The focusing is chiefly done by the person observing through
the vertical ocular, it being more convenient; at the same time the
focusing of the image is performed, automatically, in the side eye-
piece.
The eyepieces have, in both tubes, an initial magnification of
approximately 3144 +. Both images are sharply defined, colorless
and free from distortion. The student will use the vertical eyepiece,
this giving him the proper position in viewing a Microscopical
image, while the demonstrator, being familiar with the object under
observation, will use the auxiliary (side) eyepiece.
This new LEITZ DOUBLE DEMONSTRATION EYEPIECE with pointer
will be of immense help to the teacher as well as to the student.
A trial will easily confirm this, and every institution sooner or
later will have one or more of these practical auxiliary apparatus.
WILLIAM HENRY SEAMAN, LL.B., M.D.
bo acs tue ave AL Sea vice eat
NECROLOGY
WILLIAM HENRY SEAMAN, LL.B., M.D.
Dr. Seaman died, June 11, 1910, in the 73rd year of his age,
and after a life of most varied and effective activity in scientific
pursuits.
He has been an active member of this Society since 1886, and
was its efficient Secretary from 1890 to 1895.
He was born November 1, 1837, in New York City, at the
family residence in Broome Street, the son and only child of John
G. and Ann R. (Wall) Seaman, both of them of the Society of
Friends.
On his father’s side he descended from Captain John Seaman,
who received a patent of a large tract of land at Hempstead, L. L,,
about the year 1650. From him most of the Seaman family in
America are descended. Dr. Seaman’s mother was a native of
Crosswicks, New Jersey, and was educated at Bethlehem, Penn-
sylvania.
Until eleven years old, Dr. Seaman was educated by his mother.
Afterward he attended a Friend’s School in Hester Street, New
York City, and assisted the principal of the school in preparing
experiments in physics and chemistry, to illustrate the lectures.
When fifteen years old (in 1852) the family removed to Plain-
field, New Jersey, and afterwards to Woodbury, New Jersey, where
they remained until 1869, when Dr. Seaman came to Washington.
For ten years, 1869-79, Dr. Seaman was employed in the De-
partment of Agriculture. In 1879 he was appointed an Assistant
Examiner in the U. S. Patent Office; was promoted from time to
time, finally to be principal Examiner. He held this position at
the time of his death.
Shortly after coming to Washington he attended law lectures
at the Columbian College Law School and in 1872 was graduated
with the degree of LL. B.: the same year he was admitted to the
bar of the District of Columbia.
So WILLIAM HENRY SEAMAN
June 27, 1871, he was appointed Lecturer in Botany in the
Medical Department of Howard University. His connection with
the Department continued until four days before his death, when
he resigned.
Dr. Seaman was appointed September 21, 1874, Professor of
Chemistry in the Medical Department of Howard University and
held this chair until he resigned. The title of the chair covered in-
organic and organic Chemistry and toxicology, and included both
didactic and laboratory work. In addition to this he also from time
to time gave practical lectures on the microscope. When the Den-
tal College was inaugurated in 1881, he became Professor also of
Chemistry therein; and when the Pharmaceutical College was re-
organized (1880-1) he became Professor of Chemistry in that Col-
lege also. May 15, 1897, he was also made Lecturer on Botany in
the Pharmaceutical College. These many duties occupied the major
part of his evenings and he doubtless gave more of his time to the
Medical School than any other member of the Faculty.
Dr. Seaman was ever ready and willing to assist the students
and gave freely of his time and information for their advantage.
It was the same with Faculty matters; his time and his “all round”
acquirements were always at the service of the Medical Depart-
ment. His knowledge of law and science and his general knowledge
and clear judgment were repeatedly called upon and were always of
value.
In 1883 the Honorary degree of M.D. was conferred upon him
by Howard University.
Three times, namely, in aR. 1900, 1910, he was appointed a
delegate from the Medical School to the Convention for the Revis-
sion of the Pharmacopoea.
In 1873 he married Miss Marianna Perkins Clark, of London-
derry, N. H., who survives him. There are no children.
Dr. Seaman contributed many articles to scientific and literary
magazines.
He was a member of many scientific societies, and spoke with
fluency both French and German, the latter being a language in
which much of his work was done. He was member and Fellow
of the American Association for the Advancement of Science; cor-
responding member of The Maryland Academy of Science; mem-
WILLIAM HENRY SEAMAN SI
ber of the Biological Society of Washington; member of the Na-
tional Geographic Society; charter member, and in 1894 President
of the Chemical Society of Washington; member of the American
Chemical Society; for a number of years Abstractor of Chemical
Patents for its journal; member and sometime President of the
Washington Microscopical Society; member and sometime Secre-
tary of the American Microscopical Society and during this service,
editor of its journal. He was a charter member of the University
Club of Washington; an early member of the Cosmos Club, of the
Washington Society of the Fine Arts, and of the American Library
Association, and an active member of the Playgrounds Association
of Washington.
By birth a member of the Society of Friends, after his mar-
riage he was a constant attendant of the First Congregational
Church, a member of its Society and also of the Congregational
Club of Washington.
S. Ba AME. MCD:
rae
fervent
wri Ores kane)
bye 2 Hy ae 7. ya!
an nN eo ye
Bs A
ae ae
eam ater
hae ,
reo hieaes “Atay dd
naa =
game or (ty Fp
mrss
f in
wf Finan 9h rhe i
a
Cia Pat oy
fod DMA TA rae EF
Pre ogtivgtcs,
; vie Ss
1 wells Olga ie
et
Ay
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED I&Q1
PUBLISHED QUARTERLY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXX
NuMBER Two
(DousBLe)
DecatTup, ILL.
Review Printinc & STATIONERY Co.
1911
NOTICE TO MEMBERS
Members of the American Microscopical Society are under
peculiar obligation this quarter to two of our members: to Dr. J. S.
Foote, who, beside furnishing the remarkable series of drawings
in his article, has donated to the Society $150 toward the publica-
tion of this number; and to Mr. Edward Pennock for securing
the adherence of eleven new members to the Society.
Application for entry as second-class matter at the post office at Decatur, Illinois, pending.
OFFICERS.
Pee sdent AAC Eo TLERTZLER, MDS. onc) as alo aa tatees aie aa ahaa Kansas City, Mo.
Vaceseressdents) SMe J LROD. .s sec de acy uaie oi Mote daiaraa fe dl pela Missoula, Mont.
SCKEtar ys) OLIN! GALE OWA Vis U1 4 sche ater erte rela an eictena) sete raveletetticns Decatur, III.
UeEGSUTET 3) ee Te (ELANIKINSONye oie cee oo eel sir ane ince ehaetetalers Charleston, Ill.
GuSTORIEi en NUAGNUS ) PELAUIM co cere le ea ee a area lata teveoey erie Meadville, Pa.
ELECTIVE MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
BEE NNIGR CORD? Ce aN 8 ee eg Ne ine A RAMEE LE eT Lincoln, Neb.
EEA VET TO Nita <aeiee rane caren aly stoma erat ete us ateyiatcbatar eran eluis a aimparsaae Gambier, Ohio
SL ADSM pe Rees ATA Snap ear adr Mi Ke PS Sarl ui ay ARN A Aran an Nas a Buffalo, N. Y.
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
R. H. Warp, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Troy, N. Y.,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1879.
J. D. Hyatt, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
ALBert McCaita, Ph.D., of Chicago, III.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883.
T. J. Burrmz, Ph.D., of Urbana, IIl,
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gro. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Buffalo, N. Y.,
at Detroit, Mich., 1890.
MarsHALL D. Ewett, M.D., of Chicago, III,
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Simon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1895 and 1906.
A. CuirrForp Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
\ at Pittsburg, Pa., 1896.
A. M. Buette, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. E1iceEnmMann, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., 1901.
Cuartes E. Bessty, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
E. A. Birce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Urbana, III.
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
HERBERT Oszorn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXX, Number 2
The Comparative Histology of Femoral Bones, with Plates A and I to
EXC DIG. LONE OObES MIO DDSI, toe cn a sie oeitrrie See piacere ene 87
Note on a Growth of Synura in Lake Cochituate, Mass., by Horatio
IN fl Bch 3 FS ci teen a i v9 Ned ED RR LES ere Sree ee NG 141
Recent Progress in Some Lines of Cytology, by Michael F. Guyer....... 145
Notes, Reviews, Etc. Mesostomum ehrenbergii (illustrated) ; Cellular
Activities Connected with Shedding of Leaves; The Herbaceous
Arrangement of Elements Derived from that of the Woody Type;
The Growth of Somatic Cells without the Body; Origin of the Ele-
ments of the Sympathetic System; Regeneration and Cell-division;
Red Blood Cells; To Demonstrate Spirochaeta Pallida; The Study
of Rotifers; A Paper Ribbon-Carrier (illustrated) ; Safety-razor
Microtome /Bladesiie rive teio eee ae ee oie deka s a eee a ete 191
INecrologys) Brederick W. Kuhne, with’ Portrait2-- os2-k occ nee eres 199
Minutesmor-the\ rAnnual e Meeting). sane ciine ian eee een Oe C OR Oree 201
Proposed Disposition of the Spencer-Tolles Fund...................2.- 204
PAG VETTISEMIIETIES acs heck ovale hol atette Sie tche state eee aS eee eotereR meine eee {-VIII
NOTICE
The Secretary is pleased to announce to the Society that more new
members have come into the Society during four months since the issue of
Vol. 29, No. 2, than in any twelve months since 1891.
The officers purpose making this the most notable year’s growth in the
history of the American Microscopical Society. This can be done with
the help of the minority of the membership now actively helping the Secre-
tary, but the result cannot be so satisfactory as if the whole body of mem-
bers were to assist.
There is no desire to make this a large, unwieldy body; but it can easily
be made large enough to sustain a creditable quarterly journal. May we not
confidently expect that each member will give his personal influence to
secure this end?
TRANSACTIONS
OF
American Microscopical Society
(Published in Quarterly Installments)
Vol. XXX APRIL 1911 No. 2
THE COMPARATIVE HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL
BONES.
By J. S. Foote, M. D.
It is interesting to notice the diversity of structure present in the
femurs of various animals. We have been led to think that bone
is bone; that long bones, and especially similar bones wherever they
occurr, have the same structure because they are used for the
same purposes. This is not true. Microscopical examinations of
entire sections of femurs of forty-three different animals show that
the structures and their arrangements are not at all the same.
They vary in different animals and even in the walls of a bone of
any one animal. The anterior wall is unlike the posterior, the
outer wall unlike the inner. Nor are the lineal portions of a bone
the same. If a long bone, like the femur, is divided into thirds, each
third is found to differ from another third. Therefore, a correct
knowledge of the histology of bone cannot be obtained from pre-
pared sections of small pieces sawed from the walls of bones. Entire
cross sections must be made in each case. Furthermore, a drawing
and description of one long bone will not answer for another.
In a general way femurs answer a common purpose, but in
specific ways they differ considerably. The various habits of
animals, the complex muscular stresses to which their femurs are
exposed and the variations in position relative to the bodies which
they support demand corresponding structural arrangements peculiar
to the animals possessing them. Thus the femurs of swimmers,
flyers, scratchers, climbers, crawlers, runners and jumpers differ
from each other very decidedly. Bone exhibits a very ready struc-
tural response to functional demands.
88 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
We are accustomed to one type of bone, viz: the Haversian
system type. It is the familiar type described and plated in books.
It is human and will not answer as a formula of the general bone
structure of animals. In most cases a small piece of a long human
bone is described. In some instances entire cross sections of small
bones, as the fibula, radius, metatarsal or metacarpal, are given.
This type, in its pure form, appears to be peculiar to man, as none of
the other femurs examined show it. The completely developed
Haversian system evidently belongs to the higher animals.
Entire cross sections of the femurs of the following forty-
three animals have been examined as they were received. They
were not selected:
LIST OF BONES EXAMINED
AMPHIBIA. MAMMALIA
F i _ Pl A; figs. Marsupials
eres 2. a Opossum, Pl. IV; fig. 22
Placentals
REPTILIA.
Order Rodentia
Alligator, Pl. I, fig. 4 Musk Rat, Pl. IV; fig. 24.
Rat PIs Ve fess:
Rabbit, Pl. IV; fig. 26.
Squirrel, Pl. IX; fig. 50.
Woodchuck, Pl. V; fig. 27.
Prairie Dog, Pl. V; fig. 28.
Snapping Turtle, Pl. gi figs. 5, 6.
AVES.
Order Steganopodes
Pelican, Pl. I, fig. 7.
Order Anseres
Mallard Duck, Pl. II; fig. 8.
Wild Goose, Pl. II; fig. 9.
Order Striges
Owl, Pl. II, fig. to.
Order Accipitres
Eagle, Pl. IT; fig. 11.
Hawk, PI. II; fig. 12.
Order Gallinae
Grouse, Pl. II; fig. 13.
Chicken, Pl. III; fig. 14.
Prairie Chicken, Pl. II]; fig. 15.
Domestic Turkey, Pl. III; fig. 16.
Wild Turkey, PI. III; fig. 17.
Peahen, Pl. III; fig. 18.
Order Picariae
Yellow Hammer, PI. III; fig. 10.
' Order Passeres
Crow, Pl. IV; fig. 20.
Yay, PLATV 3 fig.-21:
Order Carnivora
Skunk, Pl. V; fig. 20.
Raccoon, Pl. V; fig. 30, 32.
Mink, Pl. V; fig. 31.
Weasel, Pl. VI; fig. 33.
Wild Cat, Pl. VI; fig. 34.
Gat Pr Vis ig. s5:
Gray Fox, Pl. VI; fig. 36.
Wolf, Pl. VI; fig. 37.
Dog, PI. VI; fig. 38.
Order Ungulata
Elk, Pl. VII; fig. 30.
Deer, Pl. VII; fig. 40.
Ox, PEO Ville he 43!
Sheep, Pl. VIII; fig. 44.
Goat, Pl. IX; fig. 51.
Horse, Pl. VIII; fig. 41.
Pig, Pl. VIII; fig. 42.
Order Primates
Monkey, Pl. IX; fig. 52.
Man, Pl. IX; fig. 53.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 89
All sections are taken from the middle of the femurs, ground to
proper thinness, mounted in hard balsam and examined with the
same objectives, oculars and tube lengths of a Zeiss microscope.
Drawings are then made. As some of the femurs are very large and
some are very small, all drawings are made from the viewpoint of
clearness rather than from actual sizes.
The drawings do not make any effort, therefore, to give the
exact number of Haversian systems, laminae, lamellae, etc. The
aim has been merely to show the relative positions, arrangements,
proportions and developments of these structures. The horizontal
line in connection with each femur gives the natural diameter of
the bone.
The following general outline is followed in all examinations:
(1) antero-posterior diameter of the bone; (2) lateral diameter of
the bone; (3) antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal;
(4) latera ldiameter of the medullary canal; (5) medullary canal,
full or empty; (6) trabeculae of bone, present or absent; (7) can-
cellous bone, present or absent; (8) compact bone; (9) hardness
or density; (10) character of external and internal circumferential
lamellae; (11) arrangement, development and character of the
Haversian systems; (12) laminae—concentric or oblique, position
of; (13) lacunae, character of; (14) canaliculi, character of ; (15)
type of structure.
DETAILED DISCUSSION.
Femurs of the Bull Frog.
The femurs of four frogs are examined, the first unusually
large, the second of medium size and the third and fourth small.
The first femur is 3.5 mm. x 4.5 mm., the second 2.5 mm. x 3 mm.,
the third and fourth 1 x 1.3 mm.
They show different developments of the same type of bone
GPILA, Bigs, 1, 2,.3))'Ph Pigs; 1-3),
Femur of the First Frog.
Pl. A, Fig. 1.
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 3.5 mm.; lateral, 4.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 1 mm.; lateral,
2 mm.
The medullary canal is full. There are no trabecule and no
cancellous bone. The bone is soft.
90 ‘J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
Structure. The bone shows three general divisions, viz: (1)
external circumferential lamellae; (2) a central ring of radiating
canals; (3) internal circumferential lamellae. The external circum-
ferential lamellae, three or four in number, surround the bone. Their
lacunae are round and oval, their canaliculi are short and bushy and
all are poorly developed. The central ring, situated between the
external and internal circumferential lamellae, consists of con-
centric lamellae, interrupted by forty-two large radiating canals.
The lamellae are indistinct, their lacunae are round and oval and the
canaliculi communicate with the radiating canals. In some places
the canals, with their canaliculi and lacunae, present an appearance
similar to stems with fine branches and small leaves.
The canals are just visible to the naked eye, or about 0.25 mm.
in diameter. Some of them extend from the internal to the external
circumferential lamellae, some about two-thirds of that distance and
some are interrupted at various points along their way. The central
ring forms about four-fifths of the thickness of the bone, is thicker
in the posterior half than in the anterior, and presents a low de-
velopment.
The internal circumferential lamellae, three or four in number,
surround the medullary canal. They are clearer than those of the
external lamellae, their lacunae are oval and their canaliculi are
short and bushy. In the posterior wall, situated partly in the lamellar
and partly in the central ring, is a large vascular canal on its way to
the medullary canal. The internal lamellae are poorly developed.
The type of bone is lamellar, poorly developed.
The peculiar features are the radiating canals and the associ-
ation of poorly developed lamellae and lacunae with them. The
bone is an early form of lamellar development.
Femur of the Second Frog.
PIP Aisne:
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 2.5 mm.; lateral, 3 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 1.5 mm.; lateral,
1.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. There are no trabecule and no
cancellous bone. The bone is soft.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES gI
Structure. Around the bone is a very narrow ring of dense
lamellae containing a few long, narrow lacunae and long canaliculi.
In the center of the anterior wall is a notch, which extends
inward about half of the width of the wall. The notch is a part of
the nutrient canal. Beginning a little to the outer side of the
posterior mid line and extending around the outer wall, anterior
wall, and about one-fourth of the inner wall, the entire thickness of
the bone is composed of 16-18 concentric lamellae with oval lacunae
and bushy canaliculi. The remaining portion of the bone consists of
concentric lamellae in which are cross sections of 36-38 canals ar-
ranged radially in twos and threes. The canals are surrounded by
clear areas and extending from them in all directions are very fine
canaliculi. In the anterior inner wall the canals assume a longi-
tudinal direction. The type is lamellar.
Its peculiar feature is a development intermediate between that
shown in the first and third frogs.
Femur of the Third and Fourth Frogs.
PivAL iene oP i vingsa
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 1 mm.; lateral, 1.3 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 0.5.; lateral,
0.6 mm.
The medullary canal is full. There are no trabecule and no
cancellous bone. The bone is soft.
Structure. The section is composed of eight or nine lamellae,
concentrically arranged around the medullary canal. There are no
divisions into external circumferential lamellae. There are no radi-
ating canals. The lamellae are clear, their lacunae oval, long and
narrow and their canaliculi are long and numerous. The type is
lamellar.
The peculiar feature is its completeness as compared with pre-
ceding figures.
These figures show drawings of femurs taken from the same
species of frogs, but of different sizes and weights. The largest,
Fig. 1, is lowest in development ; the second in size, Fig. 2, is next,
and the third, Fig. 3, is last and most complete. They are all of the
g2 Jie/Se, HOODE, UMD:
lamellar type, though of different developments. In Fig. 1, the radi-
ating canals, with poorly developed intervening lamellae, indicate a
low stage of development. In Fig. 2 half of the canals have disap-
peared and better developed lamellae are formed. In Fig. 3 all of
the canals have disappeared and the whole bone consists of con-
centric lamellae.
Fractured and Repaired Femur of the Frog.
Pl] oFag: 2, 3:
One of the femurs (Fig. 2) had been fractured about the
middle of the shaft and repaired. The ends of the bone had slipped
by each other and new bone had formed around the fragments. In
the section, which was taken from the middle of the new bone, two
cuts of the femur appear situated eccentrically. The upper frag-
ment, proximal, shows cell growths bursting through the wall of the
bone (Pl. I, Fig. 2, A. B.). In the lower fragment, distal, no cell
outbursts appear.
Around the two fragments and extending between them is a
formation of cancellous bone which is the new bone of repair.
The cancellous bone resembles large Haversian systems, although
there are no Haversian systems in the femur. This fact suggests
a genetic relationship between cancellous bone and Haversian
systems, and also indicates that bone repairs are made by cancellous
bone. Evidently the lamellar type is the simplest type of bone struc-
ture.
Femur of the Alligator.
PL EoPig'4:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 15 mm.; lateral, 17 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 5.5 mm.; lateral,
6 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabecule. Very little can-
cellous bone. The bone is hard.
Structure. A thin cross section of this femur held up to the
light presents a ringed appearance like that of a cross section of the
trunk of a tree.
PLATE A
Anterior wall
External
Civcumferential Co
arnellae (
Radiating
Canals
Innerwall ap
Inteenal
circ.lamellae Ss
tenure afa large Frog Showen
lamellae interrupted by radiating
Canals. Low lype of structure.
Notch of _
nuteient arte vy
Anlevioe
Inner wal
Fi By wei
Femur of Frog, Showing
fomieligh ereveluer.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 93
Under the microscope the following concentric rings are found,
beginning with the circumference:
1. A wide ring composed of irregularly-shaped canals enclosed
within a network of canaliculi, radiating from long and oval lacunae,
embedded in bone substance. Lamellae do not appear. The ring
has the appearance of very incomplete Haversian systems. The
lacunae are small or large and their canaliculi are long, branching
and bushy.
2. A second narrow, laminar ring composed of two or three
lamellae between which are long narrow lacunae, with long, straight
canaliculi. The lamellae are well developed.
3. A second ring of incomplete Haversian systems, narrower
than the first, but of similar construction.
4. A second narrow lamina, like the first.
5. A third ring of incomplete Haversian systems, like the other
two, excepting that it is a little denser.
6. A third lamina, like the two first described.
7. A fourth wide ring of incomplete Haversian systems like
the others.
8. A fourth narrow ring of internal circumferential lamellae,
three or four in number, interrupted by a little cancellous structure
in the inner and outer walls. It may be noticed that the bone has
four concentric laminae alternating with four rings of incomplete
Haversian systems, which is practically the same structure as found
in the femur of the turtle. The bone is hard.
Its peculiar features are the absence of complete Haversian
systems, its uniform concentric ringed structure, its laminar de-
velopment and the presence of incomplete Haversian systems.
Femur of the Snapping Turtle.
PID igs; 6!
Antero-posterior diameter, 8 mm.; lateral diameter, 8.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 1 mm.; lateral
diameter, I mm.
Medullary canal is full. No trabecule.
Structure. The walls of the shaft are very thick, proportion-
ately, and the medullary canal is very small. The femur is nearly
94 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
solid. Around the medullary canal is a zone of cancellous bone.
Around this is a thick zone of compact bone. The bone is hard.
This variation in the relative diameters of the shaft and medullary
canal is in marked contrast with the measurements of other femurs.
The type of structure is mixed and incomplete. The bone presents
quite a complicated arrangement of its structural units, lamellae,
laminae and Haversian systems. The following structures appear,
beginning with the outer boundary and proceeding toward the medul-
lary canal:
1. A clear peripheral lamella of bone containing only a few
irregularly-shaped lacunae, with few canalicull.
2. A complete concentric lamina of bone composed of four or
five lamellae closely united. The lacunae are oval, round or long
and narrow and their canaliculi are numerous and bushy.
3. A wide ring of incomplete Haversian systems. These sys-
tems are composed of oval or round lacunae arranged around rather
large Haversian canals. The canaliculi are radiating in arrange-
ment. The lamellae of the systems are not distinctly marked. The
canals are large. The systems present an appearance of incom-
pleteness.
4. A second concentric lamina composed of three or four
lamellae of bone with long narrow lacunae and bushy canaliculi.
5. A second wide ring of Haversian systems similar in all
respects to the first.
6. A third concentric lamina of three or four lamellae similar
to the others described.
7. A third ring of Haversian systems, narrower than the
others, otherwise similar.
8. A fourth concentric lamina similar to the others described.
9. A wide zone of cancellous bone surrounding the medullary
canal.
Thus the femur has four concentric laminae alternating with
three rings of incomplete Haversian systems. The laminae appear
to be more completely developed than the systems. All of the
laminae and rings of Haversian systems, at one point of the section,
bend inward from the external surface to the cancellous central
bone.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 95
Femur of the Pelican.
Pil, hips 7
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 11.5 mm.; lateral, 12 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 9.5 mm.;
lateral, 10 mm.
The medullary canal is full. There are no trabeculae. The bone
is of medium hardness. No cancellous bone.
Structure. External circumferential lamellae, four to ten in
number, surround the bone, excepting at the anterior and outer
posterior ridges. The lamellae are well developed, their lacunae are
long and narrow and their canaliculi are long and branching. At
the anterior and posterior ridges the lamellae are interrupted by
tendon insertions.
The central ring is composed of Haversian systems in different
stages of development. Underneath the external lamellae is a
narrow ring of well-developed Haversian systems.
The main portion of the bone is composed of oval and round
lacunae, with short, bushy canaliculi, forming a delicate network
within the bone substance. There are no lemellae, laminae or
Haversian systems. Wide branching canals extend from the medul-
lary canal outward and cross the bone in all directions, forming a
coarse network. This portion of the bone resembles reptilian bone
CPlT, Fig. 4,.5, 6).
The posterior wall consists of rather indistinct whorls of lacunae
and their reticular canaliculi bordering on the medullary canal. In
some places half of a system forms the boundary line.. The outlines
of the Haversian systems are more clearly marked in the internal
than in the external half of the wall. The lacunae are long and
narrow. The internal circumferential lamellae, two or three in
number, surround the medullary canal, excepting in the posterior
wall. They form an extremely narrow boundary of the medullary
canal. The lamellae are only partly developed. The lacunae are
oval and the canaliculi are short and bushy.
The section shows a thickening a little to the inner side of the
anterior mid line. The external surface has tendon insertions. ex-
tending through the external circumferential lamellae. The canals
96 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
of this region have a transverse direction. There is another thick-
ening in the outer wall formed of crude Haversian systems and two
slight thickenings in the posterior wall formed in a like manner.
The type is Haversian system, undeveloped. The peculiar feature
of the bone is its low stage of development.
Femur of the Mallard Duck.
Pl. II, Fig. 8.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 4.6 mm.; lateral, 6.3 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 3.5 mm.; lateral,
5.5 mm.
Medullary canal empty. No trabecule and no cancellous bone.
The bone differs from that of the wild goose in that it does not show
the division into outer and inner rings of Haversian systems and
laminz. It is of medium hardness.
Structure. 1. External circumferential lamellae, four to six
in number, with long, narrow lacunae and branching canaliculi.
2. A wide ring of various combinations of irregularly-shaped
Haversian systems and short laminae. No plan of arrangement is
evident. The systems appear to be a laminar formation doubled or
rolled into crude forms. Their lacunae are rather few and their
canaliculi are short and bushy. Their lamellae are clearly marked.
They run ih all directions, as may be seen from their cross sections.
The laminae are short (inter-Haversian), and the canals are numer-
ous and frequently intersecting. Their lacunae are long or oval and
their canaliculi are bushy.
3. Internal circumferential lamellae, three or four in number,
with long lacunae and branching canaliculi. Along the posterior
ridge and surface the Haversian systems are more numerous and
better developed.
The bone is of the mixed type, but incompletely developed.
Femur of the Wild Goose.
|e Ad Bed BY 0
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 9 mm.; lateral, 8.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 7 mm.; lateral,
7 mm.
: v
— fi
oe
trom
PLATED
cell growth
bursting through
the wall ofthe
femur at A,B. anterioyY
Lamellae upper fragment wall....
of the femur
Incoinplete
Fig. | Haverslan
Femur of afro Fs >
UA NRG OU Da ee Systems...
type of Structure
Laynina..
Lowey fragment
of the femur,
Lacunoe.
AVL LY
NI F193.
Fig. 2, , Cancetlous bone p<
We Fractured and repaired bralelins NNW!
ae femur of a frog Fig. 4
Femur of an Alligatoy Show tng
Goncentric rings of very Lncomplete
HaverSian Systems and laminae
Circumferential
lamina
c — s ; ,
Cte tens eR Anterior wall
oy MYMNOs. =. aster
Circumferential Haversian ystems, # Yarrow
lamina Haversian Systems. acing of
Incomplete . :
: circumferential |
HaverSian fa ces sees Havevsian Systems
SyStems.. H. Systems..
circumferential €. lamina =~. Network of
Le canaisand
Haversian SyStemss Canatieslt
iedutiayy medullary inner wall
Qiwailecensen
Circuinferential Canal at Nl L
lamina...... Cancellous : incerna
Incomplete ome: eee Sa ; oF ay
aversian Systems. g Wide Canals
Giycumferential
lamina. .°
CancellouS bone...
#5 "9. g Fig. 6
Femur of a Snapping, turtle Showing A portion of fg.¥ enlarged.
alternating Haverslan Systems
Gnd Circumferential Laminae.and
Small medallary Canal.medullary 7
Canal iS very Small. Fig.7
Femur of a Pelican-Showing alow.
Stage of development.
it
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 97
Medullary canal is full. No trabeculz and no cancellous bone.
The bone is of medium hardness. The medullary canal is large and
the walls of bone are thin.
Structure. The external circumferential lamellae are well de-
veloped and vary from four to ten in number. Their lacunae are
long and narrow and their canaliculi are rather few in number. At
the posterior ridge are found many Haversian systems incompletely
developed. Their lacunae are round or oval and their canaliculi are
few. The anterior wall of the bone is composed of incomplete
Haversian systems occupying the whole thickness of the wall be-
tween the external and internal circumferential lamellae. The re-
mainder of the bone, about four-fifths of the whole, shows quite
different structures and arrangements in the two walls, outer and
inner. The outer wall is composed of irregulariy-shaped laminae
and undeveloped Haversian systems. The laminae are confined to
the inner half of the wall, while the Haversian systems occupy the
outer half, situated under the external circumferential lamellae.
The two halves are well marked and distinct from each other.
The lacunae of the systems and laminae are oval and their canaliculi
are few and short. The Haversian canals of the laminae are irreg-
ular and branching. The inner wall of the shaft is composed of an
internal band of well-developed laminae and an outer band of rather
poorly-developed Haversian systems. The band of Haversian sys-
tems is just under the external circumferential lamellae, the band
of laminae is just outside of the internal circumferential lamellae.
The laminae are better developed than the systems. The peculiar
structural feature of the whole wall of the bone is its division into
two equal concentric rings, one of Haversian systems and the other
of laminae. The internal circumferential lamellae, from three or
four to ten or twelve in number, are well developed. On the left
side of the bone quite large canals extend from the medullary canal
through the laminae to the Haversian canals between the laminae.
The type is mixed.
The bone has the following rings beginning with the outside:
1. External circumferential lamellae.
2. Irregular laminae and Haversian systems.
98 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
3. Well-developed laminae.
4. Internal circumferential lamellae.
Indistinct arrangements of similar structures are present in the
femurs of several other birds.
Femur of the Large Horned Owl.
Pl, II, Fag: ro.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 8 mm.; lateral, 7.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 6 mm.; lateral,
6 mm.
Medullary canal is full. No trabecule and no cancellous bone.
The bone is hard, the walls thin.
Structure. 1. The external lamellae vary in number. In some
places there are three, in some six, in other places nine. They are
narrow, their lacunae are long, numerous and have very fine, long
canaliculi. Here and there canals traverse the entire thickness of
them all.
2. A ring of small, irregularly-shaped, incomplete Haversian
systems. They are best developed along the posterior ridge. In the
anterior wall they are few and confined to the region which is just
below the surface. Between the posterior and anterior middle lines
they are rather indistinct, on account of their shape, arrangement
and incomplete formation. The canals are short or long, angular
and branching. They are very prominent and reunite with each
other frequently. Along some of them are lamellae, along others
incomplete Haversian systems. The entire ring impresses one as
a transitional blending of lamellae into Haversian systems. The
lacunae are oval, numerous and have bushy canaliculi.
3. The internal circumferential lamellae differ from others ex-
amined. They form a thick, heavy ring around the medullary canal.
There are thirteen to twenty of them, which, on the outer wall of
the bone, merge into six laminae. The whole ring of the internal
lamellae forms about one-third of the thickness of the wall of the
bone. It is traversed by many canals extending from the medullary
canal into the canals of the Haversian systems. Their lacunae are
long and numerous and their canaliculi are bushy. The bone is of ©
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 99
the Haversian system type undeveloped. The peculiar feature of the
bone is the thick, well-developed internal circumferential lamellae
which merge into laminae.
Femur of the Eagle.
Pl) Ti Figs 19.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 1 3 mm.; lateral, 14 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 11 mm.,
lateral, 11.5 mm.
Medullary canal is empty. Trabecule are present in the lower
third. No cancellous bone. The bone is of medium hardness.
Structure. The external circumferential lamellae, six to ten
in number, surround the bone, excepting at two posterior ridges,
where they are interrupted by tendon attachments. They are fully
developed. Their lacunae are long, narrow and concentrically ar-
ranged and their canaliculi are rather short and branching.
The central ring of bone is composed of six to twelve con-
centric laminae, interrupted here and there by poorly-developed
Haversian systems. The canals which separate the laminae are
relatively wide and, on account of their frequent communications
with neighboring canals, they present the appearance of a coarse
network.
The laminae are mostly short and consist of four to six or
seven lamellae. Their lacunae are oval or round and their canaliculi
are short and bushy. They indicate a low stage of development. A
few poorly-developed Haversian systems are scattered among the
laminae and in some instances appear to be circular dilatations of the
concentric canals.
Internal circumferential lamellae, six to twelve in number, sur-
round the medullary canal. They are fully developed and are fre-
quently crossed by canals extending inward from the medullary
canal. Their lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are
long and branching.
On the posterior surface are two ridges, one central and one on
the posterior inner lateral border. The bone at these points consists
of poorly-developed Haversian systems, separated by frequent wide
100 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
canals, which pass to an apex at the outer surface of the ridges. The
external circumferential lamellae are absent at these points and
tendon insertions, interspersed by many canals, occupy the ridges.
The peculiar features of the bone are its undeveloped condi-
tion and its resemblance to the femurs of the peahen and turkey.
The eagle’s medullary canal is empty, like that of the peahen, but
its laminar structure is more like that of the turkey. The type is
incomplete laminar.
Femur of the Hawk.
PL, Bigs 12:
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 4 mm.; lateral, 4.3 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 3 mm.; lateral,
3.3 mm.
The medullary canal is empty. The bone is hard.
Structure. The section is surrounded by four to six external
circumferential lamellae, fairly well developed. Their lacunae are
more frequently oval than long. This fact indicates a less complete
development. The canaliculi are bushy.
In the inner lateral posterior wall is a ridge to which are at-
tached muscle tendons penetrating the external lamellae. Under-
neath the external circumferential lamellae is a thick ring of in-
complete Haversian systems with oval lacunae and short, bushy
canaliculi. The ring is crossed at all angles by wide, irregular canals,
which are mostly confined to the ring. The Haversian systems are
most prominent and best developed near the ridge of the lateral
posterior region. This central Haversian system ring blends with
the external circumferential lamellae.
The medullary canal is enclosed by six or eight well-developed
internal circumferential lamellae with long lacunae and canaliculi.
It is distinct from the central ring. No cancellous bone.
The peculiar feature of the bone is its low development. The
type is incomplete Haversian system.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES IOI
Femur of a Grouse.
Pl. II, Fig. 13.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 5 mm.; lateral, 5.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 4 mm.;
lateral, 5 mm.
The medullary canal is empty. Trabecule are present in the
lower third. The bone is soft. No cancellous bone.
Structure. There are no distinct external circumferential
lamellae. The bone, with the exception of a narrow ring of internal
circumferential lamellae, is composed of short concentric laminae,
separated by wide canals. Each lamina consists of two to four
lamellae, with long, narrow or oval lacunae and long, branching or
bushy canaliculi. The canals freely communicate with each other
across the laminae. In the anterior wall (middle portion) is a
slight prominence or ridge, consisting of three or four poorly-
developed Haversian systems, situated close to the external surface
and several whorls of lamellae arranged around short canals running
in different directions. In the posterior wall are two ridges sep-
arated by a concave surface of bone. A single, poorly-developed
Haversian system is found at the apex of each ridge, around which
are collections of oval lacunae, with short, bushy canaliculi. Close
to the internal circumferential lamellae are a few Haversian systems
of a crude type.
Internal circumferential lamellae, three or four in number,
surround the medullary canal. Their lacunae are long and narrow.
The type of bone is the laminar.
The peculiar feature is the absence of complete Haversian
systems. The bone resembles that of a turkey.
Femur of the Domestic Chicken.
PTW) Pigeta
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 9 mm.; lateral, 9 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 7 mm.;
lateral, 7 mm.
The bone is practically round. The medullary canal is full. No
trabecule and no cancellous bone. It is of medium hardness.
102 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
Structure. 1. Well-marked external circumferential lamellae,
three to five in number, with long, narrow lacunae and branching
canaliculi. They are quite distinct from the remainder of the bone.
2. A wide ring of irregularly-shaped, incompletely-developed -
Haversian systems. Some of the systems are circular in cross sec-
tion, but most of them exhibit no definite shape. They run in various
directions, are better developed on the outer side than on the inner
side and tend to centralize at the posterior ridge and anterior surface.
At the posterior ridge they occupy the entire thickness of the wall
of the bone as far as the internal circumferential lamellae. At the
ridge surface canals and bone lamellae take a direction at right angles
to the long axis of the shaft. Along the anterior surface the systems
are better developed and extend a short distance on both sides of the
middle line. Interspersed between the systems are short lamellae.
The lacunae of the systems are oval and the canaliculi are short and
bushy. The Haversian canals are prominent in some places where
they form a network, while in other places they form a parallel
system.
3. Internal circumferential lamellae, four or five in number,
completely surrounding the medullary canal. Their lacunae are
long and narrow and their canaliculi are bushy.
Both external and internal lamellae are well-developed and dis-
tinct from the Haversian ring. The bone is of the Haversian system
type undeveloped.
Femur of the Prairie Chicken.
Pl igs:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 5 mm.; lateral, 6 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 4 mm.;
lateral, 4.5 mm.
The medullary canal is empty. Trabecule are present. The
bone is soft. No cancellous bone.
Structure. There are no distinct external circumferential
lamellae. The bone is composed of crude lamellae, crossed at all
angles by short canals, some of which extend inward from the
external surface. In the posterior and outer walls they unite and
form a coarse network, while in the anterior and inner walls they
rica
PLATE II
SS =
Posterior 7 ss
anterior ; ;
: {yrregular,
Miaikt PosterLory vidge incomplete
Haversian
Systems... *
Laminae of
the theelc
internal
Circumferential
lamellae ..
Right or External
yi CivCumferyential
mn Oe ea lavnatlce
¥ uniting
a Haver Sian Canals.
Fig.8 :
« Showing F1g.10
Femur of amallard Duck $I
Extarnall intenwal lamellae and anterior Surface Section of the femur of the large
Varlous Combinations oa _teregudar Figg horned owl Showing athin and of
laminae and HaverSian systems. : D showing external Circumferential lamellae
Femur of wild g008¢ § beans incomplete Haversian Systems and.
Ws ———____— tncom plete oY eno ems, FRick band of mye Bon eta erential
5 7 7; 5 5 ellae amellae anc prominent uwniki Haver Sia)
anterior : Ey laminae and lam ret nel pb in neting Have q
-——____+
Interior wal
Laminate
Laminae
Canals
Internal
Inn an ‘ Lamellae
Wa
Tnnew
~WaLL
Tendon poe
insertions. Fig. 1
reese Femur of a Hawk
Poslervon vidges Showing well bl eloped external and Femum of Grouse (Blue), Showing
Fug. internal lamellae and undeveloped Laminar Structure.
Central Haversian systems
Femur of an Eagle,
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 103
do not. The lamellae are not distinct, but are blended together.
Their lacunae are oval or narrow and their canaliculi are bushy or
long and branching.
A very few crude Haversian systems are found interrupting the
lamellae of the anterior and inner walls. They have only three or
four lacunae around a minute canal. Their canaliculi are few. In the
posterior wall are two ridges separated by a concave surface of
bone. Two or three undeveloped Haversian systems are found in
each ridge.
The internal circumferential lamellae, four to six in number,
surround the medullary canal. They are well developed. Their
lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are long and branch-
ing. The type of bone is lamellar.
The peculiar features are the general absence of Haversian
systems and the crude lamellar formation. The bone is not as far
advanced as that of the grouse (Blue). |
Femurs of the Domestic and Wild Turkey.
PE TIE Wigs: 16),57.
Domestic turkey. Antero-posterior diameter, 15 mm.; lateral,
17.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary
canal, 10.5 mm.; lateral, 13 mm.
Wild turkey. Antero-posterior diameter, 9 mm.; lateral,
II mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary
canal, 7 mm.; lateral, 8 mm.
Since the two bones resemble each other closely, one description
will answer for both. The medullary canals are full. No trabecule;
no cancellous bone. The type of structure is laminar. The bones
are soft. The medullary canals are relatively large and the walls
of the bones are thin.
Structure. Around the outside are four or five external circum-
ferential lamellae, between which are long, narrow lacunae, with
many canaliculi. Along the posterior ridges of the two femurs are
small areas of incomplete, irregularly-shaped Haversian systems
which occupy nearly the entire thickness of the posterior walls of
104 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
the bones. They extend nearly to the outer surfaces, where they
seem to be projected in a network of bone extensions, which pass
to the surfaces of the posterior ridges, where they blend with the
tendon attachments. In the anterior walls are small areas of the
same irregular Haversian systems. The systems do not reach either
surface. In both of these regions the systems do not appear to run
parallel with the outer and inner surfaces of the bones, but extend
in different directions. Since their cross sections are circular, ellip-
tical, angular and very irregular in shape, no one direction could
be followed by all. The Haversian canals are large, the lacunae are
oval and their canaliculi are numerous and bushy.
Between the posterior ridges and middle anterior surfaces, and
constituting eight-tenths of the whole section of the bones, are con-
centric laminae, fifteen to eighteen or twenty in number, separated
by prominent canals and crossed at frequent intervals by smaller
canals extending from both surfaces of the bones. The laminae
are composed of three or four lamellae, between which are oval
lacunae, with short, bushy canaliculi. Here and there a lamina is
interrupted by a Haversian system.
Around the medullary canal the internal circumferential lamellae
are not distinct from the adjoining laminae. The peculiar feature of
the turkey femurs is the laminar formation.
It may be noticed that the Haversian systems present in the
section are found in the posterior walls and ridges and in the
anterior walls, where muscular stress is greatest.
Femur of the Peahen.
Pl. III, Fig. 18.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 10 mm.; lateral, 11 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 8 mm.; lateral,
10 mm. Bone is thin; medullary canal is large, empty; has a net-
work of trabeculae which extends from one wall in a downward
direction to the opposite wall. They are most numerous near the
extremities of the bone. No cancellous bone. The bone is ex-
tremely hard.
Structure. The usual three divisions of the bone into external
circumferential lamellae, middle ring of Haversian systems and in-
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 105
ternal circumferential lamellae do not appear. The bone consists of
a network of canals separating short, concentric laminae. The canals
intersect at all angles. They are wide. The laminae are composed
of four or five lamellae with oval lacunae and relatively few rather
short, bushy canaliculi. In the vicinity of the posterior ridge a few
incomplete Haversian systems are found. In other parts of the
section, here and there, a system appears without any apparent
signification. The bone is peculiar in the absence of Haversian
systems. The bone trabeculae are composed of three or four
lamellae with long, narrow lacunae and branching canaliculi. A few
systems are present. The bone is of the laminar type, but does not
show a development equal to that of the turkey. However, it be-
longs to the same structural type and can be recognized as such with
no difficulty.
Femur of a Yellow Hammer.
PVE Pigs 10:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 2.5 mm.; lateral, 3 mm.
Antero-posterior and lateral diameters of the medullary canal,
0.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full and situated close to the posterior
wall. The bone is soft.
The femur consists of a wall of compact bone, composed of
three or four external circumferential lamellae and about the same
number of internal circumferential lamellae, between which are a
few irregularly-developed Haversian systems. Large canals extend
transversely across the walls of the bone communicating with the
meshes of the central bone structure.
The central portion of the bone usually occupied by the
medullary canal is composed of a fine cancellous bone formation,
with the exception of a fine medullary canal about the size of a
fine sewing needle, situated close to the posterior wall. The femur
is therefore nearly solid bone. The cancellous center is composed
of fine lamellae forming a meshwork extended from the internal
circumferential lamellae. The meshes are filled with granular ma-
terial, insoluble in ether or chloroform. It is difficult to grind out this
106 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
material and leave uninjured the meshwork. The lacunae are small,
round or oval and their canaliculi are short, bushy and infrequent.
Round and oval lacunae appear to be antecedent forms of long,
narrow lacunae. In undeveloped Haversian systems the lacunae are
round or oval, while in the complete systems they are long and
narrow. It is possible that the pressure of development accounts for
the variation in shape—the medullary canal is full and extremely
small. Its position is unlike that of other canals.
The peculiar features of this femur is the central bone form-
ation and small eccentric medullary canal. Although the yellow
hammer is a good flyer, its femur is practically a solid bone. The
type is lamellar-cancellous.
Femur of the Crow.
Pl: TV, Fig: 20:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 4 mm.; lateral, 3 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 2.5 mm.; lateral,
2mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabeculze and no cancellous
bone. The bone is soft.
Structure. 1. External circumferential lamellae, six or eight
in number, form a wide lamina around the bone. The lamellae are
not clearly defined, the lacunae are oval, with bushy, connecting
canaliculi. A little to the outer side of the anterior mid-line, the
lamina dips down and forms a semi-circular depression about 14 mm.
in diameter.
2. A central wide ring of transverse canals, enclosed by in-
complete Haversian systems and irregular lamellae. Their lacunae
and canaliculi are the same as above described. There is very little
difference in the structure of the various parts of the bone. Possibly
the Haversian systems are a little better developed in the posterior
wall.
3. Internal circumferential lamellae, two or three in number,
form a narrow ring around the medullary canal. Their lacunae are
narrow and long and their canaliculi are long and branching.
The bone is of the mixed type. The peculiar features are the
external lamina, uniform central ring and semi-circular depression.
nte
pian
PLATE AIL
+ ——+
anterior
Ivregular
HaverSian
Systems o
posterior
ridge.
Fifteen to
Seventeen
laminae...
Irregulay
Haveystan
Systems on
anterior
Vidge.......
Femur of domestic chicken Femur of a Prairie Chicken Fig. d6
showing external ,internal lamellae Showing lamellae type. Femuronde ais .
Gnd irregulay HaverStan Systems, laminae i Shh es tc Cuykey Showing
Systems on anherinean ae ane
iy on Gntertoy and posterior vidges.,
«i
Tyyvegular ‘ ‘
HaverSian 4
Systems oF Posterior ridge antercen.
postertov incomplete wall
viage Haversian SyStems.
Fifteen to Haversian Canals COM pon
eighteen
Laminae..
laminae Cancellous
btone....
Trabecula... Ewe
nulay
Bee matevial. ... 4.
o7
Systems o a medullary
Antertor Canal....—
ridge Se :
Posterior
F 2 wall....———
Fig-/7 anterloy Surface. : Fig. /9
Section o the femur of awild 719-8 le
turkey Showing laminae and ane: of 0 ganey peeve a network ecuaa ° peltans etten Eu lre rely eoae
tyre gular HaverStan Systems on of aversia Canals, or eee oe,few edutlary nal near posterior wall. Thefemar
: ; = H. sian systems and trabeculae ofbone is nearly all bone from one wall to another. The
anterior and posterior ridges. tthe k A) : Pechie LeTRC Genin lhena aha felled With granular
material
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 107.
Femur of a Blue Jay.
PL: IV, Fig: 21.
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 2.5 mm.; lateral, 2.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 2.5 mm.; lateral,
1.5 mm.
The bone is nearly round. The medullary canal is full. The
bone is hard.
Structure. The anterior and outer walls are composed of four
or five incompletely-formed laminae, frequently uniting. The
laminae consist of three or four lamellae. The inner and posterior
walls are composed of lamellae interrupted by a few incompletely-
developed Haversian systems. The lacunae are oval. The canaliculi
are few and short.
The type of bone is lamellar. The peculiar feature of the bone
is its close conformity to the lamellar type and absence of Haversian
systems.
Femur of the Opossum.
Pl IV, higi23
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 7 mm.; lateral, 8.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 3.5 mm.;
lateral, 5 mm.
Medullary canal is full. No trabecule and no cancellous bone.
The bone is soft.
Structure. The bone presents a rudimentary appearance. It is
composed of two wide external lamellar bands of incomplete form-
ation separated by a very narrow band of imperfectly-developed
Haversian systems, the whole occupying two-thirds of the posterior,
outer and anterior walls. The lamellar bands simply give the
general appearance of lamellae, but are really composed of large oval
lacunae, with extensive, bushy canaliculi forming an intricate net-
work. At short intervals short transverse canals appear, with many
radiating canaliculi. Just internal to this lamellar band is a narrow
crescent of very incomplete Haversian systems occupying the an-
terior, outer and posterior walls. The systems are merely canals,
from which radiate numerous straight canaliculi, with a few oval
lacunae around their apparent circular boundaries. Around the
108 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
medullary canal of the anterior, outer and posterior walls internal
circumferential lamellae are well developed, reaching their greatest
thickness in the outer wall. Their lacunae are long and narrow and
their canaliculi are long, straight and branching.
The inner wall of the bone is extended in the form of a heavy
ridge. It is composed of heavy, oblique canals, from which are sent
off dense networks of large canaliculi. This peculiar arrangement
forms the external half of the ridge. The internal half consists of
incomplete Haversian systems, arranged in oblique rows, converging
to a central point in the middle of the ridge. The systems are
similar to those described above. No internal circumferential
lamellae are found in this region. The bone is very poorly developed
and belongs to a type of structure characterized by incomplete de-
velopment.
The peculiar features are the undeveloped lamellar and Haver-
sian systems and the heavy oblique canals. The only complete struc-
ture is the partial internal circumferential ring of lamellae.
Femur of the Musk Rat.
Pl. TV; Fig. 24:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 5 mm.; lateral, 6.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 2.5 mm.; lateral,
3 mm.
Medullary canal has no contents. From the medullary surface
of the inner wall project a few fine trabeculae. No cancellous bone.
The bone is soft.
Structure. The bone is peculiar in many respects. The inner
wall of the bone is extended in the form of a ridge, which is com-
posed of a network of laminae and canals running transversely from
above downwards and occupying the outer four-fifths of the ridge.
Each lamina consists of two or three lamellae, with long or oval
lacunae and long branching or bushy canaliculi. The inner one-fifth
of the ridge wall consists of a network of laminae running from
the medullary canal to the outer network. Within its meshes are
found canals from which radiate many long, branching canaliculi.
The remainder of the bone (anterior, outer and posterior walls) is
composed of a very irregular, wide internal ring of lamellae sur-
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 109
rounding the medullary canal and having an outer wavy border, in
some places distinct and in other places fused with an external net-
work of laminae. Very many canals cross the lamellae on their way
from the medullary canal to the interior of the wall. Within the
lamellar ring are several round or elliptical bodies composed of 6-8
lamellae running lengthwise of the cross section. These bodies are
such as would result from a transverse section of solid pillars. In
the outer wall of the bone, lamellae form the entire thickness.
Here and there occurs a very incomplete Haversian system, consist-
ing of a central canal and radiating canaliculi.
The bone is of the lamellar type modified. Its peculiar features
are the networks of laminae and canals, the irregular lamellae, the
circular or elliptical solid bodies, and the numerous canals.
Femur of a Rat.
PEV Hig, 25.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 2.5 mm.; lateral, 3.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 1.5 mm.;
lateral, 2.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabeculze and no cancellous
bone are present. The bone is soft.
The bone has a prominent ridge in the outer wall and is some-
what egg-shape in transection.
Structure. It 1s composed of two concentric rings of about
equal width surrounding the medullary canal. The external ring
consists of lamellae, varying in number from thirteen to fifteen in the
outer ridge to six or eight in the anterior and posterior walls and
ten to twelve in the inner wall. The lacunae are long and narrow
and their canaliculi are long and branching. Here and there cross
canals appear. The internal ring consists of a network of canals,
enclosing few incomplete Haversian systems, short lamellae or
laminae and, in some places, fine network of canaliculi. The lacunae
are oval and round and the canaliculi are bushy. The lamellae
are complete. The internal circumferential lamellae are so blended
with the other structures of the internal ring that they are poorly
defined.
110 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
The bone is lamellar in type. Its peculiar features are the two
rings, one external complete lamellae and the other internal incom-
plete Haversian systems and canalicular network.
Femur of the Rabbit.
PITY iig:. 26:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 5.5 mm.; lateral, 7.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 3.5 mm.; lateral,
5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabecule and no cancellous
bone are present. The bone is soft.
Structure. 1. Around the bone is a ring of lamellae of varying
thicknesses. As a whole it is narrow, and, in the posterior wall,
merges into oblique laminae which join the internal circumferential
lamellae. The lacunae are long and narrow and the canaliculi are
long and branching.
2. There is a wide central ring of incomplete Haversian sys- |
tems and short, irregular laminae occupying the anterior and inner
walls. In the posterior wall this ring is interrupted by oblique, well-
developed Haversian systems and laminae extending from the in-
ternal to the external circumferential lamellae. In the outer wall
there are wide, oblique canals separating irregular laminae extend-
ing from the internal to the external lamellae and interdigitating
with extensions from the periosteum. These two oblique arrange-
ments enclose a small crescent of irregular systems and lamellae.
The lacunae are oval or long and the canaliculi are bushy.
3. Internal circumferential lamellae of varying thickness and
well-developed surround the medullary canal. In the inner and
posterior walls it merges into oblique, wide laminae, separated by an
oblique row of complete Haversian systems. To the outer side of
this row of systems are three or four wide, oblique laminae which
appear to be extensions of the internal lamellae.
The bone is of the mixed type. Its peculiar features are the
oblique Haversian systems and laminae.
4 Ga i4 Bs
ee ok
Fg. 20
Femur of Crow Showing
depression and trregulay Systems,
lamina,
anterior wall,
hetwork of
laminae...
>
Solid
elliptical body.
Fig. 2 4-
Bes oF Gs Rak Showing a very
ultay arrangement of laminae
ra incomplete Haversian Une
anterior
wall .
nner wall,
Right femuy of a Rlue Fay Showing
laminae. lamellae and a very few
HaverySian Systems,
PLOATE IV
anterior
wall...
Fig: 24
Fig. 23
Femur of the Opossum Showing
tncom blete lamellae Havers:
Cystorns and heavy do6ligue Canals,
Femur of a rat Showing wide Yingsof
external Circumferential Lameilae
and internal incomplete Haverstan
Systems and lamellae with a network
of Canals,
Frg.26
Femur of a rabbit Showing lamellae,
Haversian Systems and obligue laminae,
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES EEE
Femur of the Woodchuck or Ground Hog.
Ply.V5 Bigh27:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 6 mm.; lateral, 7 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 4 mm.;
lateral, 4.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. It has no trabecule nor cancellous
bone. The bone is soft.
Structure. 1. Two well-developed external laminae, dis-
tinctly separated, form the circumference of the bone. In the pos-
terior portion of the outer wall they fuse and form a single lamina.
Each lamina is composed of five or six lamellae with large round
or oval lacunae and bushy canaliculi. In the center of each lamina,
and concentric with their boundaries, is an incomplete ring of crude
Haversian systems. The two laminae are separated by a wide canal.
The external lamina is thickest in the inner wall.
2. Acentral ring of rugged, irregularly-shaped Haversian sys-
tems between which are short lamellae with no apparent regularity.
In some places the lamellae are merged into laminae. The lacunae
of the Haversian systems are long, their canaliculi are thickly set,
long and branching and their lamellae are distinct.
3. Two well-developed internal laminae distinctly separated
from each other. Each lamina is composed of five or six lamellae
with large round or oval lacunae and long canaliculi. At one point
(A) of the medullary surface of the inner wall are seen outgrowths
from the medullary canal breaking through the laminae.
The bone is of the complete mixed type. Its peculiar features
are the strongly-developed external and internal laminae, the irreg-
ular character of the Haversian systems and the medullary out-
growths.
Femur of the Prairie Dog.
Pl. V, Fig. 28.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 4.5 mm.; lateral, 5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 2.5 mm.; lateral,
3 mm. yatig 43
The medullary canal is empty. No trabeculz and no cancellous
bone. The bone is soft.
II2 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
Structure. 1. External circumferential lamellae, eight to fif-
teen in number, form an irregularly wide ring, which reaches its
greatest width in the inner wall. The lacunae are long and narrow
and the canaliculi are long.
2. A narrow central ring of incomplete Haversian systems.
Their lamellae are indistinct, their lacunae are oval and their canali-
culi are bushy.
3. A very wide ring of internal circumferential lamellae, six
to twenty-five in number. The ring is widest in the anterior wall.
Their lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are long.
Numerous canals pass from the medullary canal across the lamellae
into the interior of the bone.
The bone is of the lamellar type, with a few Haversian systems
of an incomplete formation.
Femur of the Skunk.
PL, Fig. 20:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 5 mm.; lateral, 5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 3.5 mm.; lateral,
mm.
7 Medullary canal is full. No trabeculz and no cancellous bone.
The bone is of medium hardness.
Structure. 1. A thick ring of external circumferential lamel-
lae, fourteen to seventeen in number, in the middle of which is a
concentric row of very incomplete Haversian systems. The lamellar
ring is interrupted in the posterior wall by Haversian systems. The
lacunae of the lamellae are long and branching or short and bushy.
The concentric row of Haversian systems within the external
lamellae consists of Haversian canals, a short distance apart, around
which are one or two indistinct lamellar with oval lacunae and short,
bushy canaliculi.
2. A narrow, somewhat irregular ring of poorly-developed
Haversian systems, the canals of which frequently unite. This ring
widens at the posterior wall, where it occupies the entire thickness
of it, excepting the internal circumferential lamellae. The lacunae
are oval and few and their canaliculi are short and bushy.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 113
3. Internal circumferential lamellae, thin in the posterior wall,
six to eight in number and very thick elsewhere, eighteen in number.
In the outer wall this ring has a concentric central row of incomplete
Haversian systems. The lacunae are long and narrow and their
canaliculi are long and branching. Many canals pass through this
lamellar ring on their way from the medullary canal to other canals
in the interior of the wall.
The bone is of the mixed type. Its peculiar features are the
wide rings of lamellae with central rows of Haversian systems and
incomplete development.
Femur of the Raccoon.
Pl. V, Fig. 30.
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 9 mm.; lateral, 10 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 6.5 mm.; lateral,
7 mm.
Medullary canal is full. No trabeculz. No cancellous bone.
The bone is of medium density or hardness.
Structure. 1. External circumferential lamellae, fourteen to
fifty in number, according to locality. In the anterior wall the lamel-
lar ring is thin, being composed only of a few lamellae, while, in
the posterior and inner walls, it reaches its greatest thickness, form-
ing in those regions two-thirds of the entire thickness of the bone.
Numerous canals appear at short intervals within the ring. Within
the wide lamellar ring of the inner wall are found many rather in-
complete Haversian systems. The lacunae of the lamellae are long
and narrow and the canaliculi are long.
2. An irregularly-shaped ring of Haversian systems well de
veloped. In the middle of the posterior wall it is thin, one-third or
one-fourth of the thickness of the wall. It gradually increases in
thickness in the outer wall until it reaches about the middle, where
it forms two-thirds of the width of the wall. From this point it
continues to increase to the middle of the anterior wall, where it
forms four-fifths of the bone. The systems are strongly developed.
They have three to five well-marked lamellae, their lacunae are long
and narrow and their canaliculi are long and branching. Between
114 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
the systems are short lamellae. The Haversian canals frequently
unite. In the middle of the lamellar ring of the outer wall are thirty
to thirty-five very distinct Haversian systems separated by lamellae.
These systems seem to form a group by themselves without any
especial signification.
3. A ring of internal circumferential lamellae and laminae of
varying thicknesses. In the anterior wall only a few lamellae
appear. The Haversian systems almost border the medullary canal.
In the outer wall extending around the posterior region are short,
oblique laminae, forming in some places nearly one-half of the
thickness of the bone. In the inner wall two or three laminae form
the medullary boundary. The lacunae are long and narrow and the
canaliculi are long and branching.
The femur is of the mixed type. The peculiar features of the
bone are the wide external lamellae, the irregular arrangement of
the Haversian systems and the oblique internal laminae (compare
os penis, Fig. 32).
Os Penis of the Raccoon.
Pe Voniaiow 32:
The os penis is introduced here because it resembles the Haver-
sian system type of femurs.
The antero-posterior diameter of the bone is 4 mm.; lateral,
4 mm.
The antero-posterior diameter of the central canal is 0.8 mm.;
lateral, 0.8 mm. The canal is very irregular in shape. The bone
is of medium hardness.
Structure. 1. External circumferential lamellae, seven to
twelve in number, and rather incompletely developed. They are not
equally distinct in all parts. In some places they are fairly well de-
veloped, while in others they are indistinct and interrupted by small,
incompletely-formed Haversian systems. The lacunae are large, few
in number, oval in shape and have branching canalicull.
2. A wide ring of large and small Haversian systems. The
large systems occupy the inner portion of the ring, the small ones the
outer portion. They are all fairly well developed. Their Haversian
canals frequently communicate with each other, their cross sections
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 115
are circular, their lacunae are few, long and narrow, their canaliculi
are long and branching and their lamellae are not clearly defined.
Here and there short inter-Haversian lamellae appear.
3. Internal circumferential lamellae, six or eight in number,
which form a very irregular boundary of the medullary canal by
the formation of large cancellous spaces. The lamellae seem to be
folded into cancellous structures. The lacunae are long and their
canaliculi are very numerous and branching.
The peculiar feature of this bone is its close resemblance to
the structure of some femurs. This resemblance is unexpected,
since the requirements of the two bones are apparently quite dif-
ferent. The inference is that the structure of a bone is governed
more by the individual, formative character present in an animal than
by the function; that is, when a bone is formed the forces at work
in the arrangement of its structural units are the same in all parts
and the same type of bone is constructed in the penis as elsewhere.
Femur of the Mink.
Pi Viigo. aur.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 3.5 mm.; lateral, 4.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 1.5 mm.;
lateral, 2 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabeculae and no cancellous
bone.
Structure. The usual arrangement of lamellae and Haversian
systems is not present in this bone. A portion of the anterior wall
consists of 50-60 lamellae, forming the entire thickness of the
bone. These lamellae then diminish in number to 25-20-12, and
form an irregular complete ring around the medullary canal. Numer-
ous canals pass across this ring, incompletely or completely, on their
way from the medullary canal to small canals of the interior. The
lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are long and
branching.
The Haversian systems are absent at the widest lamellar point.
They then begin to appear, in single file, gradually increase in thick-
ness to the posterior wall and diminish again as they approach the
anterior wall. In this manner they form an irregular crescent en-
116 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
closed within outer narrow lamellae and wide inner lamellae. The
crescent nearly encircles the bone. The Haversian systems are fairly
well developed, their lamellae rather indistinct, their lacunae oval
and their canaliculi relatively few. Their canals frequently unite.
In some places bands of lamellae cross the crescent extending from
the outer to the inner lamellae. Numerous canals traverse the cres-
cent. The internal circumferential lamellae form a wide, irregular
ring, fusing with the external lamellae in the anterior wall. Many
canals cross them. The lacunae are long and narrow and their
canaliculi are long and branching.
The bone is of the mixed type. The peculiar features of the
bone are the wide internal lamellar ring, with its many canals, the
narrow external lamellar ring and the long crescent of Haversian
systems.
Femur of a Weasel.
PIV i, Figs 33:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 1.5 mm.; lateral, 2 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 1 mm.;
lateral 2 mm.
The medullary canal contains a very thin layer of marrow
around the walls of the bone. There are no trabecule. The bone is
soft. No cancellous bone.
Structure. There are no distinct external and internal circum-
ferential lamellae. The anterior walls are thicker than the posterior.
The bone consists of twenty to twenty-eight concentric lamellae.
Their lacunae are narrow and oval and their canaliculi are long,
branching or bushy. The lamellae are fairly well developed. In the
outer anterior wall they are interrupted by irregularly-shaped whorls
of oval and round lacunae, with short, bushy canaliculi. In one or
two of them a central canal appears. The whorls are evidently
the early stages of Haversian systems. Besides these not a single
Haversian system can be found. Large canals cross the bone on
their way from the medullary canal to the external surface. They
are not numerous. The type of bone is the lamellar.
The peculiar feature is the complete absence of Haversian
systems in a mammalian femur.
\
!
|
PLATS V
= ae
antercor wall.
Antertor wall _
Femuy of wood¢huck oY ground
hog Showing two well developed
external and tnternal laminae and
wregular 4averStan Systems,
Femuy, of
Q pratyie POS
wide external/internal circumferential
lamellae and narrow ring of Haverstan
Systems,
Showing
Fig.3)
amink Showing wide
lamellae Crescent af HaverSian Systems
and numerous Canals.
Fig.30
Femuy of GPACCOOM Showing wide
lamellae, ivyegular arrangement of
HaverSian Systems and internal lamenac.
Femur o
anrerioy
wall...
Haversian
Systems...
Central
Canal...
Fig.29
Femur of @ Skunk Show la ae
Character fe the bone, oe eae
779. 32
Cross Section of the o$ bens
of the raccoon.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES HEL)
Femur of the Wild Cat.
Pl Vij iig. 34:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 13.5 mm.; lateral,
Ir mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 8 mm.;
lateral, 5.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabeculze and no cancellous
bone are present. The bone is hard.
Structure. 1. Around the outside of the bone is a wide ring
of lamellae, interrupted very frequently by incomplete Haversian
systems. The ring forms two-thirds of the thickness of the walls of
the bone, excepting in the posterior wall, where the central Haversian
systems occupy the whole width from the internal circumferential
lamellae outward to the circumference. As this ring approaches
the posterior wall on the inner side the lamellae separate into laminae.
Many canals traverse the ring. For the most part, all of the
structural units are indistinct. Around the anterior and a portion of
the inner wall is a narrow rim of lamellae, 4-6 in number. The
lacunae of the wide lamellar ring are long or oval and their canaliculi
are long and branching or bushy. In some places there is a network
of lacunae and their canaliculi, a formation which belongs to the
lower orders of development.
2. In the anterior wall there is a short crescent of well-
developed Haversian systems adjacent to the internal circumferential
lamellae. In other portions there is an irregular arrangement of
Haversian systems and laminae, complete and incomplete. In the
posterior wall a narrow ring of well-developed Haversian systems
appear, which is gradually lost in the wide lamellar ring.
3. Around the medullary canal is a well-defined ring of internal
circumferential lamellae, varying in thickness from three or four in
the posterior wall to thirty in the anterior wall. Numerous large
canals cross the ring to communicate with canals within the center
of the bone. The lacunae are long and canaliculi long and branched.
The bone is of the lamellar type, principally.
118 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
Femur of the Cat.
Pl Wi, Fig: 35:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 7.5 mm.; lateral, 9.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 4 mm.; lateral,
5.5 mm.
Medullary canal is full. No trabecule. No cancellous bone. The
bone is of medium hardness.
Structure. 1. External circumferential lamellae, twenty-three
to forty-five in number, form about one-half of the thickness of the
wall of the bone. They are inclined to interlace. Near the mid line
of the anterior wall four Haversian systems appear in the middle of
the lamellar ring. They are well developed and without apparent
signification. A short distance from the mid line in the inner wall
the lamellar ring divides into a wide outer and narrow inner parts
which enclose a crescent-shaped area of Haversian systems. Along
the posterior wall a few scattering, incomplete Haversian systems
are introduced into the lamellar ring. About the middle of the inner
wall is quite a sharp lateral ridge formed by lamellae. The lamellar
ring is widest at this point and narrowest in the outer wall. The
lamellae, for the most part, are clearly developed and show no
signs of a laminar formation, excepting in the anterior wall, where
there is a slight tendency toward such an arrangement. The lacunae
are long and narrow and the canaliculi are thickly set, long and
branching.
2. A ring of well-developed, large and small Haversian sys-
tems, widest in the inner wall and narrowest in the outer wall. The
ring has irregular boundaries. The systems are generally strongly
developed, and are round, elliptical or irregular in cross section.
Their lamellae are clearly marked, their lacunae are long and
narrow, their canaliculi branching and their Haversian canals are
frequently united. Inter-Haversian lamellae, short and irregular,
hold the systems together.
3. The internal circumferential lamellae are in the form of
two or three laminae in some places and five or six in others. Each
lamina is composed of four to six lamellae. Their lacunae are
long or oval and their canaliculi are bushy. The laminae do not
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 119g
present parallel sides, but are wide or narrow, and hence the width
of their internal ring varies. Numerous canals pass through the
laminae on their way from the medullary canal. The bone is of the
lamellar type. The peculiar feature of this bone is the extremely
thick ring of lamellae.
Femur of a Small Grey Fox.
Pie NV ieign 220:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 8 mm.; lateral, 9 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 5 mm.; lateral,
6.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabecule and no cancellous
bone present. The bone is soft.
Structure. 1. A ring of external circumferential lamellae,
twenty to thirty in number, surround the bone. In the outer wall the
lamellar ring is distinct, but in the inner wall it widens and merges
into laminae, which occupy the whole thickness of the wall. The
laminae are short and are separated and crossed by intercommun-
icating canals. On the inner side of the posterior wall is a ridge
and the laminae from the inner wall reach the surface at this point
and appear to interdigitate with inward extensions from the peri-
osteum. The lacunae are long and narrow, the canaliculi are long
and branching.
2. <A crescent of well-developed Haversian systems, the horns
of which begin a short distance apart in the inner wall, while the
widest part of the body occupies the outer wall. The systems are
small and large, regular and irregular in shape. Their lamellae are
well defined, their lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi
are branching. Their Haversian canals frequently communicate.
3. Around the medullary canal is a border of Haversian
systems, flattened, a few laminae and some lamellae.
The bone is of the complete mixed type. Its peculiar features
are the arrangements of the lamellae, laminae and Haversian systems.
120 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
Femur of the Wolf.
PL Vi, Fig. 37:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 16.5 mm. ; lateral, 7 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 10 mm.;
lateral, 7.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabeculae and no cancellous
bone.
Structure. 1. Around the outside of the bone is a ring of
external circumferential lamellae, sixteen to twenty-one in number,
separating into four laminae in the inner and outer walls. The
laminae are interrupted here and there by Haversian systems. As
the ring approaches the posterior middle line it narrows to three or
four lamellae, which gradually merge into the Haversian systems of
that region. Shortly after leaving the anterior mid-line of the
section, in the inner and outer walls, the external ring is re-enforced
by other lamellae, beginning higher in the inner wall than in the
outer and increasing in thickness. On each side, from two or three
lamellae to five or six laminae interrupted by Haversian systems
and forming with the external ring, three-fourths of the whole
thickness of the walls of the bone. As the laminae approach the
posterior wall they change to Haversian systems, which occupy the
whole thickness of the wall, with the exception of a narrow ring of
internal circumferential lamellae. The lacunae of the laminae and
lamellae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are branching.
The laminae are composed of four to eight lamellae with long central
canals, which are gradually rolled into Haversian systems of an
incomplete nature.
2. A crescent of well-developed Haversian systems, thick in
the anterior wall, is situated underneath the external lamellar ring.
The systems gradually merge into the posterior group of Haversian
systems. They are well developed and have two to five distinct,
concentric lamellae, with long lacunae and branching canaliculi.
Their Haversian canals frequently unite.
3. A ring of internal circumferential lamellae, thinnest in the
posterior wall and gradually increasing in thickness until it expands
into six laminae in the mid-line of the anterior wall. The lamellar
and laminar lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES I2I
branching. Many large canals pass from the medullary canal into
the interior of the bone and communicate with the canals of the
laminae and Haversian systems.
The bone is of the mixed type. The peculiar features are the
external and internal lamellae expanding into laminae and Haversian
systems.
Femur of the Dog.
PRGV ES Bigs $38)
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone is 14 mm.; lateral, 13 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 9 mm.;
lateral, 7 mm.
The bone is nearly round; medullary canal is full; no trabecule
and no cancellous bone. It is of medium hardness. This femur
shows different arrangements of lamellz, lamine and Haversian
systems in different parts of the section.
For descriptive purposes, it will be better to divide the section
into imaginary fourths, beginning with the posterior mid line and
proceeding around the section to the left or inner wall of the femur.
Structure. First fourth of inner wall—This portion is com-
posed of the following alternating structures:
I. External circumferential lamellz, narrow ring.
2. Irregular Haversian systems.
3. Lamelle (narrow) or lamina.
4. Haversian systems.
5. Lamellz or lamina.
6. Haversian systems.
7. Internal circumferential lamelle.
Second fourth of inner wall:
1. External cimcumferential laminze forming one half of
the entire thickness of the wall.
2. Haversian systems, regular in shape, wide.
3. Internal circumferential lamelle.
Third and fourth fourths of outer wall. These two fourths
have the same structure:
1. External circumferential lamelle.
2. A very wide semicircular band of well-developed Hay-
ersian systems.
3. Internal circumferential lamelle.
122 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
The lamellae, laminae and systems are well developed. The
lacunae are long and narrow or oval, their canaliculi are long and
branching or short and bushy. The Haversian canals communicate
freely and wide, prominent canals pass from medullary canal to
canals between the laminae. The bone is of the complete mixed type.
The peculiar feature of this femur is the decidedly complex arrange-
ment of tis structural units. The outer wall is not at all like the inner
wall. The posterior fourth of the inner wall is not like the anterior
fourth of the same wall. From a study of structural positions in
other femurs, it appears that the particular situation of any structure
depends upon its muscular attachments or stress. Wherever mus-
cular stress is greatest, there the Haversian systems are best de-
veloped and most numerous, and the laminae are either absent or
incomplete. Wherever muscular stress is least, there laminae or
lamellae are well developed and the Haversian systems are absent,
or few and incompletely formed. Viewed from this viewpoint, the
femur of the dog must be subject to various stresses not apparent
in many other quadrupeds. If the structure does not depend upon
the requirements present, there is no apparent reason for this com-
plex arrangement.
Femur of the Elk.
Pl Vi Figs 30:
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 35 mm.; lateral, 33 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 23 mm.;
lateral, 20 mm.
The medullary canal is full. There are no trabecule and no
cancellous bone. The bone is brittle and of medium hardness.
Structure. A wide ring of external circumferential lamellae,
14-40 in number, surround the bone. The lamellae are distinct, their
lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are long and branch
ing. The ring is widest in the anterior inner, lateral wall, where
it is divided into two portions by a canal and by different arrange-
ments of the lamellae. The central ring, constituting the greater part
of the bone, consists of fully-developed laminae separated by con-
centric canals and interrupted at short intervals by completely de-
veloped Haversian systems. The laminae are frequently transected
PLATE VI
anterior
wall
Whorls of lacunae
anterior wall.
wide ring
of external
lamellae..
Haversian
Inner Systems :....
wall ——
Lamella Internal
laminaed
[ Fig.3
Femur of a weasel, showing
e. 9. Femur of acat Showing wide ring Of
almost Pens Lamellar typ FU Ste fomellne atregular ying of Haverstan
Femur of awild cat Showing systems and internal laminae.
Uuuy the pecultay avrangement of
mh the Structural units.
— aan
ere
anterior anterioy wall
a iit
Fig. 3b
Femuy of a small grey fox
Showtng the peculiar arrangement
Fig.3
of lamellae, Laminae and HaverStan Femur of a dog acute
Systems ee Ae 37 alteynating laminae Gnel Haverstan
if ‘
A eMhus ofatne wolf showing lamellae, of the inney wall and wide band of
st q
well deve oped. and laminae Havergian Systems of Outer wall
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 123
by the canals, which freely communicate with each other. They are
composed of 5-10-12 lamellae, with long, narrow lacunae and branch-
ing canaliculi. They have the appearance of a strong development.
The canals are wide and in some places have widened into Haversian
systems.
The Haversian systems have 3-9 lamellae, long, narrow lacunae
and long branching canaliculi. The Haversian canals are large,
round or oval in shape, and freely communicate with each other.
There are no incomplete systems in the bone; in fact, there are no
incomplete bone structures of any kind. There are more Haversian
systems in the outer wall than elsewhere. Beginning at the mid-line
of the posterior wall and extending around the outer wall nearly to
the anterior mid-line, and occupying a position next to the internal
circumferential lamellae, a zone of Haversian systems, three or four
in thickness, surround the medullary canal. Their lacunae and
canaliculi are completely formed.
In the anterior wall and near the medullary canal are five or
six large vascular canals, surrounded by 3-4 lamellae. The bone is
of a mixed type, completely developed, with the laminar type pre-
dominating.
The peculiar features are the complete development of all the
bone structures and their arrangemnt. Th bone is more advanced
than that of the deer.
Femur of a Deer (white tailed).
Pl. VII, Fig. 40.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 25 mm.; lateral, 24 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 17 mm.;
lateral, 16.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabecula and no cancellous
bone are present. The bone is hard.
Structure. The bone consists almost entirely of laminae, which
vary in number in the different walls. The anterior-inner-lateral
wall is thickest and shows 31-33 laminae, the anterior-middle wall
has 26-27, the outer-mid-lateral wall has 17-18 and the posterior
lateral walls 16-17. The laminae are well developed, separated and
124 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
crossed by wide canals and are composed of three to six or eight
lamellae. Their lacunae are long, narrow and completely developed.
The canaliculi are long and branching. Here and there are found
a few scattered incomplete Haversian systems produced by a circular
widening of the concentric canals and the bending of a few lamellae
around the circular opening. The laminae form the entire section,
excepting that of the posterior ridge, which is composed of Haver-
sian systems and have a general concentric arrangement. There are
no distinct external circumferential lamellae. In the external half
of the section the laminae are arranged concentrically around the
entire bone, excepting at the posterior ridge. In the internal half
of the anterior, inner, and posterior-inner-lateral walls the laminae
are arranged in concentric arcs of circles of shorter diameters, be-
ginning and ending in the internal circumferential laminae.
By this arrangement the internal circumferential laminae are
very distinctly marked off in this region. In the outer wall the
internal laminae disappear and a regular concentric laminar arrange-
ment occupies the whole thickness of the wall. The canals between
the laminae cross them at all angles and communicate freely with
each other.
The internal circumferential laminae form an irregularly-
shaped boundary of the medullary canal only on the anterior-inner-
lateral and posterior walls. They are two or three in number and
are frequently crossed by canals extending outward from the medul-
lary canal. The surface of the posterior ridge shows the tendon at-
tachments of muscles. Extending from this surface to the internal
circumferential laminae, and for a short distance on either side of
the posterior mid-line, is the one area of Haversian systems. They
are irregular in shape, well-developed, for the most part, and by
their position indicate their importance in the valuation of muscular
stress. Their lacunae are long and narrow, generally. A few, how-
ever, show round or oval lacunae, with short, bushy canaliculi. These
form the weaker spots of the bone.
The peculiar features of this bone are its almost complete
laminar structure, its one area of Haversian systems and its associ-
ation in type with the pig and turkeys. These animals appear to be
Antari
Vascula
utar wal,
“4
PLATE Vil
Antarior wall
\
\
i
a
<TH,
aa
sibel
AAA
Gi
Ane:
Outer wall __(
Fig.39.
Left Femur of an EIK showing full
developed Haversian systems , laminae
and Theunae. ¥ ae , ldmellae.,
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 125
widely separated, if we judge from their appearances and habits, but
their femurs certainly belong to the same class.
Femur of a Horse.
PI Vill) Pig: 40
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 41.5 mm.;_ lateral,
57.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 22.5; lateral,
32 mm.
Medullary canal is full. Spongy bone surrounds the medullary
canal and is thickest in the outer wall.
Structure. The anterior, outer, posterior and inner walls may
be considered separately, as they differ in structure.
Anterior wall: The bone has the form of a blunt triangle, with
the longer side as the anterior wall. This wall is composed of well-
developed Haversian systems, with little or no inter-Haversian struc-
ture, excepting a few laminae, some distance from the surface, ex-
tending toward the outer angle. The laminae are interrupted by a
few Haversian systems. The external circumferential lamellae are
generally absent. The Haversian systems reach the external bound-
ary and in some places half systems are present with their Haversian
canals directly underneath the periosteum. The Haversian systems
vary in diameter, are well developed and have three to five or six
concentric lamellae. Their lecunae are long and their canaliculi are
long and branching. In the internal half of the wall a few well-
developed laminae appear with afew Haversian systems. The
laminae are composed of six or seven lamellae and are separated by
canals from which extend short transverse canals. Around the
medullary canal is a thin ring of internal circumferential lamellae,
arranged in the form of cancellous bone.
Outer wall: In the outer wall the external circumferential
lamellae are absent, the Haversian systems and half systems form-
ing the external boundary as they do in the anterior wall. Com-
mencing in the outer, lateral, posterior region a few laminae appear,
which increase in number until they form four-fifths of the thick-
ness of the posterior wall. The laminae are well developed and in-
126 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
terrupted by frequent Haversian systems. The deeper portion of
the wall is composed of Haversian systems. Around the medullary
canal of this wall the cancellous bone is very much thicker, while the
internal circumferential lamellae are extended from the anterior wall
with the same number of lamellae.
The posterior wall: This wall is composed of well-developed
laminae in the outer portion and Haversian systems, extending from
the circumference to the internal circumferential lamellae, in the
central or angular portion. Underneath the laminae are a few rows
of Haversian systems. Cancellous bone surrounds the medullary
canal of this wall.
The inner wall: This wall has several external laminae directly
underneath the periosteum. Each lamina is frequently interrupted
by Haversian systems. Underneath the lamina are a few layers of
large Haversian systems, and still lower down in the section a few
more laminae are found. Underneath these laminae are a few layers
of Haversian systems, and around the medullary canal are the
internal circumferential lamellae, in the form of cancellous bone and
lamellae. The bone is hard.
The type is well-developed Haversian system and lamina type.
The peculiar features of the bone are the well-developed Haversian
system and laminae. The bone belongs to a high order.
Femur of the Pig.
PLVit tie 42:
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 21.5 mm.; lateral, 18.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 16.5 mm. ; lateral,
12.5 mm.
Medullary canal is full. No trabecule. No cancellous bone.
bone is of medium hardness.
Structure. 1. Around the outside of the bone, no lamellae
are present, excepting in the form of laminae.
2. The entire bone, with the exception of the posterior wall,
ic composed of seventeen to thirty-five concentric laminae. The
laminae are separated and crossed by wide canals which frequently
communicate with each other. The separating canals, here and
there, widen into circular spaces surrounded by incompletely-
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 127
developed concentric lamellae which form incomplete Haversian
systems. Interrupting the laminae of the inner portion of the outer
wall are a few Haversian systems. The laminae are long or short
and strongly developed. They have long, narrow lacunae and
branching canaliculi. The posterior wall, for a short distance on
both sides of the middle line, is composed of Haversian systems
well developed. These are the only regular systems of the section.
3. Around the medullary canal are laminae which form a part
of the wall. The bone is decidedly of the laminar type.
Femur of the Ox.
Pl, VIN, Fig.'43.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 44 mm. ; lateral, 39 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 23 mm. ; lateral,
21 mm.
Medullary canal is full. No trabecule and no cancellous bone.
Structure. The bone is composed of three wide concentric
rings with irregular boundaries, separated by canals containing
chains of black, lacunar-like bodies with connecting and very irreg-
ular lateral, canalicular extensions. In thin sections there appear to
be no uniting structures in the canals of sufficient importance to hold
the rings together. The outside ring is further partially divided by
an incomplete central canal of similar nature. The canals have an
undulating course and communicate with other canals of the rings.
Outer or first ring: In some portions there are a few external
circumferential lamellae but generally the ring is composed of sixteen
to 20 concentric laminae divided into short lengths. The direction of
the laminae is parallel with the circumference of the bone. Occas-
ionally a few Haversian systems interrupt the laminae, as though
evolved from them. In the anterior wall, which projects pointedly,
the laminae are broken up into irregular Haversian systems which
have their best development in the middle portion of the anterior
wall. The laminae have six to ten lamellae, with long or oval
lacunae and branching or bushy canaliculi folded in some locations
into crude Haversian systems. Some laminae are solid, some have
central canals and some show these canals enlarged at intervals with
128 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
the lamellae bending around the enlargements, forming Haversian
systems. In this manner lamellae become laminae and laminae,
systems.
Second ring: The borders of the separating canals are com-
posed of clear lamellae, with no visible canaliculi. The second ring
consists of short and long laminae arranged vertically to the outer
ring, especially in the inner wall. Along the outer border of the
separating canal the lamina is concentric. As it approaches the
anterior projecting wall it merges into the irregular Haversian sys-
tems of that region. In the outer wall the laminae are much more
concentric. The laminae of this ring are folded around canalicular
expansions into large elliptical or elongated angular Haversian sys-
tems. As they approach the third ring they are more circular. Their
lacunae and canaliculi are like those of the outer ring.
Third ring: This is composed of vertical and concentric
laminae, of an Haversian system character, intricately intermixed.
There are more systems in the posterior wall. Here they are best
developed. But on the whole, the laminar systems of this ring present
a great variety of forms running in various directions and form a
complex arrangement of structural units. In the anterior projecting
wall the ring merges into the systems of that region. The lacunae and
canaliculi of this ring are like those of the outer rings. The anterior
bluntly-pointed wall of the bone is composed of irregularly-shaped,
large crude Haversian systems united by short lamellae. They have
individual lamellae, large oval lacunae and many thick bushy canal-
iculi. Aroung the medullary canal is an irregular ring of internal cir-
cumferential lamellae composed of three to fifteen lamellae and hav-
ing long, narrow lacunae, with branching canaliculi.
The bone is of the mixed type, the laminar formation predom-
inating. The peculiar features are the three rings of concentric and
vertical laminar systems.
Femur of the Sheep.
Pl, VIII, Fig. 44.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 14 mm.; lateral, 18 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 7 mm.;
lateral, 10.5 mm.
ant
out
Lay
lavers
ry otey
ostert
i7 to 3
ami ni
nmcom
Sy St ry
ryouné
videne
Cana(
anterior
wail...
outer wall
Cancellous
bono... .-
Laminaé....
HaverStan
Systems of
posterior Wall
17 to 35
lami nae
Left
of Lae
Incomplete
system
around
widened Canal
Canal
¥ig.42
Femuy o TQ Showin l r
type of stare oe gaa
PLATE VITI
Fig.45.
Haverstan System formed by
filling up meshes or Channels.
Anterio)
wall
(Seva | —
Canat
Third Ying...
Internat
lamellae...
emur of a horse Showing the arrangement
developed Haveysian Systems and laminae
Fig.4b.
a stems formed by bend-
lame
central Canals,
Fiyst ving.
Second ring
Fig-43.
Femur te OX Showing the three rings the
Sepayating Canals. laminae,and Systems
—_—
anterior
Internal
Circumferential
laminaeana
lamellae
obli ue
Lamin@e...
Crescent
shafed region
of Haversian
Systems...
External
Gircu m ferential
lameilae of
varyin
thicknesses
Fig.4-4
Section Bf the fermi of a Shee
owing Lameéliae, laminae and Haversian
Systems in irregular arrangement.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 129
The bone is widest laterally. Medullary canal is full, no trabec-
ule, nor cancellous bone. The walls are thick. The bone is hard.
Structure. The arrangement of the structural units of this
femur is complicated. 1. External circumferential lamellae, six or
seven in number in some places, increasing to twenty-four or twenty-
eight laminae in other portions. The lacunae are long and narrow,
with long, branching canaliculi. 2. Between the external and in-
ternal circumferential lamellae are small and large Haversian sys-
tems, arranged in the form of a crescent, the horns of which begin
and end near the anterior boundary of the medullary canal. The
thickest portion of the crescent is along the posterior ridge. The
systems are, for the most part, small, close together, and their Haver-
sian canals frequently unite. They have few lacunae and few
bushy canaliculi. The outer wall of the bone is composed almost
entirely of laminae, there being a few Haversian systems close to
the internal circumferential lamellae. The laminae are separated
by wide canals, which frequently cross and unite with other canals.
Each lamina is composed of three to five or six lamellae with oval
lacunae and bushy canaliculi. The inner wall of the bone has oblique
laminae and near the anterior surface are found very oblong Haver-
sian systems which appear like circular systems flattened. 3. In-
ternal circumferential lamellae in one or two laminae arranged
around the medullary canal.
The bone exhibits the laminar type of structure as much as the
Haversian system type. The peculiar features of the bone are the
crescent of Haversian systems, the concentric laminae of the outer
wall, the oblique laminae of the inner wall and the flattened systems.
It is difficult to understand the requirements which demand such a
variation in structural arrangement.
Femur of a Squirrel (large Red).
Pl. 1X,-Fig: 50:
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 4.5 mm.; lateral, 6 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 3.5 mm.;
lateral, 5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. There are no trabecule and no
cancellous bone. The bone is of medium hardness.
130 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
Structure. External circumferential lamellae, three to twenty
in number, surround the bone. In the posterior and outer walls there
are only three. Beginning in the posterior wall and extending around
the inner wall they gradually increase to twenty as they reach the
inner ridge. They then decrease to three or four as they approach
the anterior wall and then increase again to twelve or fifteen in the
outer anterior lateral wall. In this manner they form an enclosing
ring of varying thickness. Their lacunae are mostly long and
narrow and their canaliculi are numerous, long and branching.
A middle, irregularly-shaped ring of complete and incomplete
Haversian systems is situated under the external lamellae. It is of
varying widths. In the anterior wall it is extremely thin, consisting
of a few round and oval lacunae, with short, bushy canaliculi having
more or less of a circular arrangement. It increases in thickness
around the inner, posterior and outer walls, approaching the ex-
ternal surface and reaches the surface in the outer wall. It thus
forms an uneven ring and occupies an irregular position. It con-
sists of incomplete and complete Haversian systems. In many places
in the inner wall they are composed of oval lacunae with short, bushy
canaliculi arranged in a circular manner and have no central canal.
They are very incomplete. In the outer and posterior walls they
are best developed. Here they have long, narrow lacunae and long
and very numerous canaliculi.
Internal circumferential lamellae form an uneven, thick ring
around the medullary canal. In the inner wall, opposite the ridge,
there are six or eight. They here form the thinnest portion of the
ring. From this point they increase to 20-22 in the posterior wall,
then decrease to 10 or 12 in the outer wall and then increase to
25 or 30 in the anterior wall. Their lacunae are long and narrow
and their canaliculi are long, numerous and branching. They are
fully developed. The bone, therefore, is composed of three very
uneven and irregularly-shaped rings of structural units. The
lamellae are fully developed, the Haversian systems are poorly de-
veloped. The type is lamellar. The peculiar features of the bone
are the uneven rings, the complete lamellae and incomplete Haver-
sian systems.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES I3I
Femur of the Goat.
PLEX Figes7.
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 4.5 mm.; lateral, 5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 2.5 mm.; lateral,
3 mm.
The medullary canal is full. No trabeculae. No cancellous
bone. The bone is hard. .
Structure. The structures from without inward are as follows:
1. External circumferential lamellae, six to sixteen in number,
encircle the bone. Of these, six or eight form the inner and outer
boundaries of the inner and outer walls, and twelve to sixteen form
the boundaries of the anterior and posterior walls.
2. Two or three thick laminae, separated in the middle by long,
short and irregularly-shaped Haversian systems. They are thickest
in the inner wall.
3. A thick ring of irregularly-shaped Haversian systems, best
developed in the outer and posterior walls. They are displaced by
laminae in the inner and anterior walls. The systems, in cross
section, are circular, elongated or angulated. Their lacunae are
long and narrow and their canaliculi are long and branching.
4. An irregularly-shaped ring of varying widths composed of
well-developed Haversian systems.
5. Internal circumferential lamellae, four to fifteen in number.
The peculiar features of the bone are arrangements of the laminae
and Haversian systems. The bone is of mixed type.
Femur of a Monkey (Macacus rhesus).
Pl De Bigs 52:
Antero-posterior diameter of bone, 8 mm.; lateral, 8.5 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of the medullary canal, 5 mm.;
lateral, 5.5 mm.
The medullary canal is full. There are no trabecule. The bone
is of medium hardness. No cancellous bone.
Structure. There are no external and internal circumferential
lamellae distinct from the central ring of the bone, but the following
parts constitute the structure of the whole:
132 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
A crescent of well-developed Haversian systems, bordering
upon the inner wall of the medullary canal, begins in the posterior
region and extends around the inner and anterior walls to the outer
wall, where it merges into the lamellar structure. The widest part
of the crescent forms about one-third of the entire thickness of the
inner wall.
The systems are fully developed. In several places a half
system borders the medullary canal. The lacunae are long and
narrow and their canaliculi are long and branching. The Haversian
systems are united by short inter-Haversian lamellae. A second
crescent of Haversian systems borders the medullary canal extend-
ing from the posterior prominence around the posterior and outer
walls to about the middle portion of the outer wall. The systems
of the two crescents are the only fully developed systems present.
The second crescent is narrower than the first. Its widest part 1s
in the posterior region of the outer wall. The lacunae are long and
narrow.
The main structure of the inner, anterior and outer walls is
lamellar. It consists of irregularly concentric lamellae, interrupted
by rudimentary Haversian systems. They are not clearly distinct
and not easily followed for any distance. In some places they assume
a fan shape, as though on their way to Haversian systems. This
lamellar structure makes up two-thirds of the whole bone and sets
the type as lamellar. The lacunae are generally long, wider than
fully developed lacunae, and have long, branching and numerous
canaliculi. In some places the lacunae are curved and quite irregular
in shape. The Haversian systems are not clear. Their outlines are
not traceable. They consist of Haversian canals, from which radiate
fine canaliculi, extending into the surrounding lacunae. The systems
are very low in development. The posterior wall and ridge consist
of Haversian systems poorly developed. They are separated by
lamellae. Their outlines are not sharply defined, but appear to merge
into the surrounding lamellae. Their lacunae are narrow and oval.
The type of bone is lamellar, incomplete. The peculiar feature of
the bone is its low development among mammals.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 133
Femur of Man.
PLOiXk Figs
Antero-posterior diameter of the bone, 28 mm.; lateral, 30 mm.
Antero-posterior diameter of medullary canal, 16 mm.; lateral,
17 mm.
Medullary canal is full, no trabeculz, cancellous bone present
around medullary canal; compact bone encloses the cancellous and
forms greater part of the wall. The bone is of medium hardness.
The type is Haversian system. The medullary canal is large and the
walls of the bone are thick.
Structure. Around the outside the external circumferential
lamellae appear only at scattered points. Here and there a few
lamellae occupy the outer boundary for short distances. Judging
from their irregularity and poor development, they are apparently
unimportant. Their lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi
are long and numerous. The whole compact bone is composed of
Haversian systems. They extend from the inner cancellous bone to the
very circumference of the shaft and in some places the most external
systems are only half systems. They are rather small, somewhat
irregular in size and shape. In some regions they are close together,
in others they are separated by short lamellae or laminae. Their
lacunae are long and narrow and their canaliculi are long and
branching. Their Haversian canals communicate with each other
and their concentric lamellae are distinct. Around the medullary
canal is 4 ring of cancellous bone extending nearer to the anterior
external surface than to the posterior. The marrow spaces com-
municate with the medullary canal. The internal circumferential
lamellae, poorly marked, form the inner, irregular layer of the
cancellous bone. Lamellae and laminae, however, are insignificant
as structural units; the type of structure is decidedly Haversian
system. The human femur differs from all others studied.
SUMMARY.
1.—Three Types of Structure:
Although the number of fumurs examined is not yet large, it
ts large enough to indicate three types of bone structure, viz:
134 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
the lamellar, laminar and Haversian system types. These may occur
pure, or mixed.
The lamellar type is composed of several lamellae of bone, com-
pletely or incompletely developed, concentrically arranged around
the medullary canal, as in the femur of the frog (Pl. I, Fig. 1).
The laminar type is composed of several laminae of bone, com-
pletely or incompletely developed, concentrically arranged around the
medullary canal, as in the turkey, pig, deer and peahen (PI. ITI, Figs.
13, 15; Pl. VIII, Fig. 42). Each lamina consists of several lamellae
and is separated from adjacent laminae by canals.
The Haversian system type is composed of Haversian systems
generally running parallel with the external and internal surfaces
of the wall of the bone. The systems may be large or small, regular
or irregular in shape, held together by lamellae or laminae, and en-
closed or not enclosed by external and internal circumferential
lamellae or laminae, as in the femur of man (PI. IX, Fig. 53).
The femurs of other animals are made up of various com-
binations of these types, arranged according to the stress require-
ments of each. The three types of structure are present in the
femurs of many animals, but the proportions, positions, develop-
ments and arrangements of these structures vary greatly in all.
Lamellae and laminae characterize the larger number of femurs and
are usually completely developed.
A study of these bones shows a great diversity of structural
units and arrangements and wide differences in the shapes of femurs,
thickness and hardness of their walls and in the character of their
contents. Some are practically round, as the frog, turtle, crow,
domestic chicken and skunk. In some bones the antero-posterior
diameters are the longest, as in the wild goose, dog, pig, wolf, wild
cat and ox. In some the lateral diameters are the longest, as in the
alligator, wild turkey, domestic turkey, man, mallard duck, peahen,
woodchuck, rabbit, sheep, cat, raccoon, muskrat and opossum. The
walls vary in thickness. The peahen has the thinnest walls and the
turtle the thickest.
The contents of the medullary canals vary. They are empty in
the mallard duck, peahen, prairie dog, muskrat, and full in the frog,
turtle, alligator, wild turkey, domestic turkey, man, wild goose, crow,
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 135
domestic chicken, wood chuck, dog, owl, rabbit, sheep, pig, cat,
skunk, raccoon, mink, opossum, wolf (timber), ox and goat. Two
have medullary trabeculae: peahen and muskrat. Three have circum-
medullary cancellous bone: turtle, man and alligator. The bones
of the turtle, alligator, peahen, owl, sheep, goat, wild cat, ox and
man are hard; those of the wild turkey, domestic turkey, crow,
prairie dog, woodchuck, rabbit, muskrat, fox and opossum are soft,
and those of the wild goose, mallard duck, domestic chicken, dog,
pig, skunk, raccoon, mink and wolf are medium.
Haversian systems are best developed in man, horse, dog, elk,
sheep, wolf and ox. They are incomplete in the turtle, alligator,
mallard duck, crow, domestic chicken, owl, muskrat, opossum and
prairie dog.
Laminae are best developed in the pig, deer and elk, incom-
pletely developed in the turkey, peahen, wild goose, mallard duck,
owl and muskrat. They are well developed as partial structures in
the horse, ox, wolf, woodchuck, dog, rabbit, sheep and raccoon.
They are absent in the chicken, skunk, mink and opossum. They are
oblique in the sheep and rabbit.
The external circumferential lamellae are widest and best de-
veloped in the prairie dog, wild cat, cat, skunk, raccoon, muskrat,
mink and wolf; the internal lamellae, in the owl, opossum and ox.
Anterior walls are unlike posterior; outer, unlike inner walls.
Posterior ridges have best developed Haversian systems.
Nearly all femurs have two forms of lacunae and canaliculi,
long and narrow, with long, branching canaliculi, and round or oval,
with bushy canaliculi. The oval or round lacunae with bushy
canaliculi belong to incomplete developments, the long to the
complete.
2.—The Formation of Haversian Systems (Pls. VIII, Figs. 45, 46;
Pl. IX ,Figs. 47, 49):
Haversian systems appear to be formed in three ways:
1. By the concentric arrangement of round lacunae, with short,
bushy canaliculi, around the central canal (Pl. IX, Fig. 47). The
lacunae increase in number and the foreshadowed system increases
136 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
in diameter (Pl. IX, Fig. 47). These forms are found in reptile
femurs: turtle and alligator. The round lacunae then become oval
and their canaliculi are less bushy (Pl. IX, Fig. 47). This form
may be seen in some birds and low mammals; turkey, opossum.
Then the lacunae, by pressure of development, ‘apparently become
narrow and long, with long, single or slightly branching canaliculi,
as in man and the higher mammals. This method of formation is
fundamental in bone developments and seems to show a phylogenetic
history.
2. By the concentric arrangement of lamellae around the inside
of channel walls or cancellous meshes, as in bone repair or ontogen-
etic development (Pl. VIII, Fig. 45).
3. By the separation of lamellae at definite points and bending
of the lamellae around a central canal, as may be seen in the pig
(Fig. 42 and in Fig. 49). As the lamellae and laminae are the
first bone units to appear, their lacunae are the first to become long
and narrow.
The Haversian system development appears to be much later
and therefore in many animals both incomplete and complete forms
are found, the predominating character of the system indicating the
degree of development present in any animal.
3.—Some General Principles:
In working out the comparative histology of femurs, the writer
is conscious of the fact that the number of bones examined may not
be large enough to warrant the following generalizations. However,
they are presented subject to correction as future studies may
suggest:
1. The structural units of femurs are lamellae, laminae and
Haversian systems, and establish the three types of bone.
2. They may be developed or incompletely developed.
3. The characters of these units are indicators of the positions
which animals occupy in the scale of graded development.
4. The units display the species, type and individual develop-
ment by their variations in the architectural plan and the complete-
ness of their formation.
5. They exhibit evidences of phylogenesis.
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 37,
6. They show structural responses to functional demands.
7. Cancellous bone usually shows a higher state of complete-
ness than compact bone, and indicates by its position around the
medullary canal an older formation.
The first units to appear were the lamellae, with their enclosed
lacunae and canaliculi. Since they are layers of bone substance, they
were, of necessity, produced as soon as animal mass required a
skeleton.
The completeness or incompleteness of the lamellae depend
upon the pressure developments arising from the applied forces of
environing conditions, as indicated by round and oval lacunae, with
short, bushy canaliculi and long, narrow lacunae with long, branch-
ing canaliculi.
Gradations are based upon three factors which characterize the
bone:
1. The time of its appearance in vertebrate history.
2. The predominating completeness or incompleteness of the
elements which constitute its structural units.
3. The architectural plan which is present.
Thus three general grades of femurs may be recognized with
which all developments are compared:
1. The lowest grade appeared first in the amphibian. It con-
sists of single units, lamellae, unevenly developed and exhibits one
plan of arrangement. Such a bone is the femur of the frog.
2. The next grade—transitional—first appeared incompletely
in the reptile. It consists of laminae and exhibits one plan of ar-
rangement. The laminae are formed by grouping and separating
the lamellae by canals. Such bones may be seen in the turtle, alli-
gator.
3. The third and highest grade appeared, in outline, in the
reptile and in more complete form in birds and mammals. It consists
of Haversian systems, completely developed in mammals, and ex-
hibits a definite plan of arrangement. Such bones may be seen, in
their best form, in the femurs of the horse, man, ox, goat.
No femur shows a complete development of all of the elements
of its structural units. Bones vary greatly in this respect. Some
are mere outlines ; some show lamellae and laminae well developed,
138 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
and Haversian systems poorly developed. But, in all cases where the
Haversian systems are well developed, the lamellae and laminae are
also. That is, the Haversian systems are the last to develop, and
therefore belong to the highest classes of mammals. The position
which an animal occupies in the scale of development is, therefore,
indicated in part by the character of its bone units.
4. Lacunae and Canaliculi an Index of Development (Pl. IX,
Fig. 48) :
The state of development of lamellae, laminae and Haversian
systems is indicated by the characters of their lacunae and canaliculi.
Wherever these elements are round or oval and their canaliculi are
short, bushy and rather infrequent, the state of development is low;
wherever the lacunae are long and narrow and have long, branching
numerous canaliculi, the state of development is high.
The bone of the frog has a majority of oval lacunae with bushy
canaliculi, and is therefore poorly developed. Furthermore, since it
has only one unit (lamellae) it is low, comparatively. The bones of
the turtle and alligator have a majority of round lacunae with short,
bushy canaliculi, and are low in development, but they show the
three units and plan of arrangement and are higher than the frog.
The bones of the turkeys, peacock and eagle have predominating
oval lacunae with short canaliculi and incomplete Haversian systems.
They are low in development. But since they all show the laminar
formation, they are higher than the reptiles.
The bones of the wild goose, domestic chicken, prairie chicken,
mallard duck, have predominating oval lacunae and are low in de-
velopment, but high in arrangement.
5.—The Grade of Bone is Further Determined by the Development
of Its Haversian Systems. For example:
The bones of the owl, crow, pelican, hawk, yellow hammer, blue
jay have high lamellar developments and low Haversian systems.
They are low.
Among mammals the bones of the skunk, opossum, musk rat,
prairie dog, monkey, weasel, rat, mink have high lamellar develop-
HISTOLOGY OF FEMORAL BONES 139
ment and low Haversian system development. They are therefore
low.
The bones of the rabbit, pig, raccoon, woodchuck, domestic cat,
wild cat, dog, fox, goat, wolf, sheep, deer, horse, ox, elk, man have
high lamellar and Haversian system development and are therefore
high.
The development of crude Haversian systems in the reptiles and
the gradual changes which they show through the birds and mam-
mals indicate phylogenesis. No complete systems are found in the
reptiles, a very few in birds, a very few in the lower mammals, while
they show complete development in the higher mammals.
6.—Classification of Femurs:
Arranging the femurs according to their predominating struc-
tures, the following divisions may be made:
I | II | iil | IV | Vv
Incomplete
Lamellar Laminar Mixed Type: Complete Complete Mixed Type:
Type. Type. Lamellar and Haversian Lamellar, Laminar, and
Laminar. System Type |Haversian system type.
Frog, Domestic Man, Sheep,
Cat, Turkey, Dog,
Skunk, Wild Turkey, Woodchuck,
Mink, Pig, Ox,
Raccoon, Peahen, Wolf (Timber),
Musk Rat, Deer, Goat,
Prairie Dog, Eagle, Small grey fox,
Opossum, Grouse, Rabbit,
Rat, Elk.
Wild Cat, Horse,
Blue Jay,
Monkey,
Squirrel,
Weasel,
Yellow-hammer,
Hawk,
Prairie Chicken,
While variation in function may be supposed to account for a
corresponding variation in structure, it scarcely seems that the
femurs of these animals have sufficiently common demands to
associate them as they appear in the above table; nor do the like-
nesses or unlikenesses follow the zoological classification, as will be
seen from examinations of the plates. There is no close relation
between the brain development and activities and the histology of
the femur. For example, the monkey femur does not conform to
the human type. The monkey bone is chiefly lamellar, while the
140 J. S. FOOTE, M. D.
human bone is Haversian system. The monkey is much nearer the
weasel or squirrel than the human in bone structure. The horse, on
the contrary, is quite similar to man in bone development.
7.—Specific versus Functional Features:
The units fix the species type and also show the individual vari-
ations. All animals belonging to a species conform to that type and
yet display the variations which are required by environmental vicissi-
tudes. The femurs of two domestic turkeys, one weighing seventeen
pounds and the other thirty-two pounds, were examined. They were
both laminar, but the heavier turkey had more Haversian systems
and a much thicker and better developed internal circumferential
lamellae. These increases are evidently in the nature of re-enforce-
ments.
Bones thus show in their structure a response to functional de-
mands. This appears in the femurs of the two turkeys cited above.
Doubling the weight called for femur re-enforcements and they
came in an increase of Haversian systems and the thick internal
lamellae.
In order to explain such varieties of structure and arrangement
as have appeared in this study, we are driven to the following
conclusions :
1. That the structural units and their arrangements depend
primarily upon some biological law which governs the entire bone
formation of an animal and which sets the type according to which
all of its bones are constructed.
2. That the structural units and their arrangements depend
also upon the functional requirements and activities of the bone.
3. That structural variations are best accounted for as de-
pendent on the interaction of these two agencies.
The writer desires to thank those who kindly assisted in secur-
ing the femurs, and would be very glad to receive fresh femurs of
animals not included in the above list. The femurs should be fresh,
or the first observer should note the contents of the canal while it is
fresh. Sawed rings of the above femurs will be sent to interested
parties as long as they last.
Creighton Med. Coll., Omaha, Nebr.
PLATE IX
Anteriov wall
Lamellae.,
Early form. Laler. Still later.
Completed.
Laminae... Diaoyams Showin ormation of Haverstan Systems
1p peessure development
Tnner wall
Haverstan ee athe Ridge
SyStems.., _ Ott
Round. Oval. Elongated.
Fig .4- Development
7 : of Lacunae.
Diagram Showing the formation ——________.
Of HaveyStan Systems
24
External Fiq.5 0.
circumferential
Sie” . ete *
Qntertor wall ——
Squirrel (Laxge Red).
lamellae. Femur of & qe ‘s
Int¢cyna( :
Cicumferential
loemalliien Cancetlous
Rudimentary
Haver Slayr
Systems
antertoy
wall,
Crescent
Tnner wall
Lamellae
Posterior
prom inence
fbr HaverSian
Haversian
; Systems. Systems.
F019. 52 maitiea's
Femuy of a Monkey (Macacus Rhesus), f:9.S4
Femur of a goat showing
Fig 63 pecue Y Grrangement of laminae
3 nd Haverstan systems.
Section of @ human femur-center of shaft
NOTE ON A GROWTH OF SYNURA IN LAKE
COCHITUATE, MASSACHUSETTS.
By Horatio NEWTON PARKER.
In the American Naturalist, Vol. 33, No. 390, Page 485 (1899),
G. C. Whipple and the writer described a growth of Mallomonas
at the thermocline in Lake Cochituate, and later, in a paper ‘‘On the
amount of Oxygen and Carbonic Acid Dissolved in natural waters
and the Effect of These Gases Upon the Occurrence of Microscopic
Organisms” (Trans. Am. Microscopical Soc., Vol. 23, Pages 103-
144, 1901), commented on the growth as follows (Page 140):
“Tt will be seen that the organisms (Mallomonas) were concentrated
just below the thermocline. From what is now known of the dis-
tribution of oxygen and carbonic acid in Lake Cochituate, the reason
for this is at hand. At the surface and throughout the circulating
water above the thermocline oxygen was abundant, but carbonic
acid was absent. Near the bottom of the lake there was carbonic
acid, but no oxygen, and likewise an insufficient amount of light for
plant growth. But just below the thermocline there were both
carbonic acid and oxygen, and as Mallomonas is a chlorophyl bear-
ing organism, it found there favorable conditions for its develop-
ment.”
As being in line with these statements, it is desired to record here
the observations that were made on a growth of Synura in Lake
Cochituate in 1900. At that time the data were not available for
publication, but they are now presented by permission of Dexter
Brackett, Chief Engineer of the Metropolitan Water Board, and
through the courtesy of A. W. Walker, Biologist of the Board.
The noteworthy facts are given in the accompanying table.
0 3)
19
0 |8' OF 0 |&'.6F| 06 |F.6F| 09
69
8g
1g
0 0 |9°&F 9g
9°8F OF j9°SF |0 |8'sh | 0 06 : a
0 6g
8'SF 8h) 0 {L'sF as
Tg
Ssh | GLIUL Sh |L°8h 8'sh 10 9's’ |0 IL°&F Ssh | OL |L°&F 02 0S
FPR [SOTO PP |S FF 6'SF | 0 PPP OFF Gtr )O {Ltr 02 oh
USF | OTL SF |8°SF TGF | 0 rah {0 = |9°9F 9°F | OL |a°ct 0 OF
PLP 199°6 |S Lh ELF GOLF | 02 ULF U8F Sl4F);O |ULF 0 cs
SF |S1'6 |8'8h |6°8F 0'6F | 0 P'S | OLL |L°6F | OST |L'6P | OOT |S'8h | OF 083 |L° TS] 96T 929 |9°.FG] 08 |0°.S9} 08
9°09 | ¥6 |G°09 |4°09 | O 2°09 | 08 08 |9°6F | 002 |2°09 8'0¢ | OSF |9°0¢ 0s9 06g &
61S 1°08 xg
9°&9 2°08 oS &%
6°9¢ Karas) G
$89 L°8g 16
16g 6°99 |9°89 8°69 | PF 9°79 | 99 {LF GG | FS |L°99 88 06
8°19 61
0 |6'09 919 8T
89 11
FOL 91
F'69 |08°S |9°29 |T'F9 oF9 | 0 L19)}0 jPTL 1°99 | #8 9°99 8&1 CT
¥'6S |92°S |6°E9 | F9 F910 0°89 |}0 3 jFrTL SFL) 0 |F°S2 0 OL
F°6S | 3S |L'F9 |E'F9 0'F9 | 0 0°89 |}0 = |FTL 0°92 }0 |6°9L 0 a
F'6S | O'S |T'F9 849 | O a'é9 0 jo89|0 |FTL}0 |TeL}0 692] 0 j0°.44) 0 0 |8°.d4) 0 0 |e.9L) 0 |9°.FL Epa:
-ansg
———— — —_ | —__}_ | — | T_T nn | | | | ————— | | — | | -—
cele endlean esate |e cael Geli \obeleec ie lal folea Gel aelba|ecalran| el osaliae lag \egelecy |: al
P(ECHE VE SIE BIELBIEI EVE IE ISL EIEI BIS |EIE LEI EI EIE ETE) BE la.
eletlel/el[alalwalelin#lial|ale |wlael|alelale [wie |w#laelale |wAle | wie | oe
at ‘00 890 1g 400 1 990! pz adac | Tz ‘3dac | ZT ‘3das | $1 3das | OT ‘3dacg | z3das | p3dasg | pz ‘3ny | OZ ‘3ny | ZT ‘3n 3ny (aes
:0061 ‘SI 19q0}9GQ 0} ‘0061 ‘g ysNSNY WoIZ dJeNYIOD oye] ur syydap jussIyIp ye oT
jod syed ut OD 2041f pue ‘o'o sod sytun prepuejs ut einuds pure yoyuere,y sdoigap ur sinjzerodtu [,
A GROWTH OF SYNURA 143
Synura appeared on August 6th and persisted through Sep-
tember 21st, after which date it was not found, though observations
were continued until October 15th. At no time during the period
was the organism discovered at a depth of less than fifteen feet and,
though the Synura seems to have been scattered from mid-depth to
the bottom, there never were found more than 40 standard units per
¢.¢c. in any sample taken at a depth greater than 30 feet. Between
the depths of 15 and 30 feet Synura thrived, though the position of
most vigorous growth appears to have been clearly defined at
between 25 and 30 feet, for it was at these depths that the largest
numbers were obtained. The temperatures prior to September 7th
were taken with a thermometer and those obtained at 30 and 60 feet
are undoubtedly high; yet they are sufficiently accurate to show that
the lake was thermally stratified. On September 7th, and thereafter,
the temperatures were taken with a thermaphone (The Microscopy
Drinking Water, Whipple, 2d Ed., p. 54) and are accurate. It
appears from the table that during the period the temperature of
the water varied from a maximum of 77°.0 F. at the surface to a
minimum of 43°.3 F. at the bottom, and that while the growth per-
sisted the temperature of the surface to 10 foot stratum, wherein
no Synura was found, was never less than 68°.0 F. The highest
temperature at which a considerable quantity of Synura developed
was 66°.5 F., the temperature of the 15-foot sample on September
7th and the lowest temperature at which the organism was found
was 43°.6 F., the temperature of the 40-foot sample on September
1oth. The temperature of the samples ranged from 48°.5 to 50°.8 F.
at 25 and 30 feet, and, as it was at these depths that the greatest
quantities of Synura were obtained, it may be that within these
narrow limits the organism finds the temperatures that most favors
its development. Temperature is not the only factor, however, that
fostered the organism at this place in the vertical dimension, for at
higher levels there would have been less free carbonic acid and at
lower ones less oxygen and less sunlight, and all of these are essential
to the organism. However, the observations that Synura at no time
during this considerable summer growth was found at a temperature
higher than 66°.5 F. and that it was most numerous at temperatures
between 48°.5 F. and 50°.8 F., accord with the fact that in the colder
144 HORATIO NEWTON PARKER
parts of the year, in late autumn, in winter and in early spring the
organism most often develops in quantities large enough to impart
its characteristic disagreeable odor of ripe cucumbers to large bodies
of water. Moreover, the growth in Lake Cochituate throws light
on those big summer growths of Synura that sometimes unexpectedly
appear in public water supplies, infest them for a few days and
suddenly die out ; for it is quite possible that, as in Lake Cochituate,
the organisms establish themselves in a favorable environment at
a depth in the water and later by a high wind or some other agent
are brought to the surface, where they soon succumb to lack of food
and unfavorable temperature.
In studying this growth of Synura, free carbonic acid determin-
ations ought to have been made, but it was not possible to do this
prior to October 12th, at which date the organisms had entirely dis-
appeared. However, from this single observation and the temper-
atures recorded, together with what is now known of the distribution
of free carbonic acid in Lake Cochituate when it is thermally strat-
ified, it seems reasonable that during the period of this growth of
Synura, the free carbonic acid at 25 feet was about 9 parts per
million, at 15 feet about 5 parts and at less depths, about 2.5 parts.
Of course, in the absence of actual determinations, it is not certain
that the free carbonic acid then was thus distributed, but to the writer
it seems entirely probable that it was so.
What terminated this growth in Lake Cochituate is not apparent.
At the time the Synura disappeared the temperature at 30 feet, where
the growth had been largest, was unchanged (49°.0 F.), and the
supply of free carbonic acid was abundant; the only clue to the
disappearance of the Synura is to be found in the temperature read-
ings, which show that the surface waters were rapidly cooling. It
may be the Synura swam away from its plentiful food supply of
carbonic acid into the circulating cooling waters and thus perished.
Boston, Mass., March, rort.
DEPARTMENT OF SUMMARIES
TOBE DEVOTED TO DIGESTS OF PROGRESS
IN BIOLOGY
While the Transactions will continue to be primarily a Journal of research in micro-
biology, it is recognized that the field has become so broad as to preclude the possibility
of frequent articles in any one of the departments of special interest. Because of this
it will be the policy to present, from time to time, supplementary digests of the progress
being made in the various fields of micro-biology. It is also proposed to introduce similar
summaries of the progress made in some departments not represented in our articles of
research. This is done with the feeling that such reviews will increase the permanent
value of the Transactions to all who may not have access to a large list of technical
biological journals, nor the time to make the survey for themselves.
RECENT PROGRESS IN SOME LINES OF CYTOLOGY.
MicHact F. Guyer, UNIVERSITY OF CINCINNATI.
When one realizes that not only the ultimate details of all plant
and animal structure, but that practically every biological manifest-
ation of function and process from the flow of thought to the path-
ology of cancer resolves itself in last analysis into a problem of the
living cell, the temerity of any one attempting to review the whole
field judicially becomes evident. Merely to confront the literature
of the subject, is to face a veritable deluge of new facts and changing
ideas. There is today a decided leaven of unrest at work among the
anatomists and physiologists of the cell which finds expression in a
general dissatisfaction with older views, in much contradiction
among current interpretations, and in a realization of the transiency
of any conclusions until more delving has been done in the field of
bio-chemistry.
The old adage that he who would write with elegance must give
his days and nights to the reading of Addison, might well be
paralleled biologically by the statement that he who would under-
stand modern problems of the cell, must give his days and nights
to the study of the physico-chemical conditions of protoplasm.
146 MICHAEL F. GUYER
THE COLLOIDAL NATURE OF PROTOPLASM.
Inasmuch as our current problems in cell function center about
the physical nature of protoplasm, we may well begin our survey at
this point. We must discriminate at the outset between two classes
of substances found in the cell, viz., crystalloids and colloids.
Crystalloids are, for the most part, crystalline substances of a low
molecular weight which in solution diffuse readily through animal
membranes. Examples are salts, sugar, urea, etc. Colloids (kolla;
glue) are generally amorphous substances of high molecular weight
which diffuse slowly in liquids and which penetrate animal mem-
branes very poorly or not at all. They do not form true solutions as
do the crystalloids and are likely to be viscid. Examples are gelatin,
the albumins, glue, gums and the like.
The line of distinction between crystalloids and colloids is not
as fast as was originally supposed, for numerous transitions have
been found to exist. The reason for this is apparent when we
stop to realize that as a matter of fact when we use the terms
colloid and crystalloid, we are not classifying substances, but states.
Albumin, for example, which generally exists as a typical colloid,
can nevertheless be obtained in crystalline form, and conversely, the
commonest salts may be put into a colloidal form. Undoubtedly
many if not all substances may exist now in the crystalloidal now
in the colloidal state. The importance of discriminating between the
two states lies in the fact that a given substance in colloidal form
usually possesses entirely different properties from the same sub-
stance in the crystalloidal form.
Just as crystalloidal and colloidal states intergrade, so no sharp
distinction can be drawn between the so-called colloidal suspensions
and the colloidal solutions. In general, colloidal states resulting
through the mixture of a solid and liquid phase as, for instance, a
finely divided metal* and water form true suspensions. These are
— *Colloidal suspensions of metals are prepared by sending an electric
current through electrodes composed of the metal of which the suspension is
desired. Platinum, for example, has been much utilized. The electrodes are
immersed in a dish of pure water and the current turned on. A cloud
of extremely fine particles of the metal streams out into the water and
remains suspended.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 147
non-viscous and are easily coagulated by salts, whereas, through the
mixture of two liquid phases, a viscous, easily gelatinized type of
colloid results which is not so readily coagulated by salts. Wolfgang
Ostwald has recently characterized these as suspension colloids and
emulsion colloids respectively.
Living matter is characterized by its richness in colloids of the
emulsion type. Protoplasm is really an aggregate of colloids hold-
ing water for the most part, in which are contained certain salts and
non-electrolytes (crystalloids in general). These colloids form a
comparatively coherent, permanent and definitely arranged sub-
stratum by which the distribution of the other substances is largely
determined.
It is the colloidal part of an organized body, such for example
as gelatin, that permits of the swelling it may undergo by the im-
bibition of water. Such a colloid can, under favorable conditions,
absorb into its interior a large quantity of water, shrinking again as
the water is expelled. The water in such cases of imbibition must
become evenly distributed amongst the organized particles of the
colloid, pushing them farther and farther apart by the increasing
envelopes of liquid which surrounds each one until the limit of im-
bibition is reached.
Colloids may exist in a liquid or semi-liquid form also. In the
case of gelatin, for example, if the jelly-like mass which results
from the absorption of water is heated, a fluid condition results.
Many colloids remain fluid at ordinary temperatures. In such
cases the constituent particles have been sufficiently separated to
move freely past one another, yet as a system they still retain a
certain degree of organization. Thus colloidal substances may exist
in a jelly-like, a coagulated, or a precipitated form, or they may be
in pseudo-solution or fine suspension. That they persist as par-
ticles even in the fluid condition has been determined both inferen-
tially and by observation. Theoretically their behavior can be ex-
plained on no other basis, and observation of such fluids under
the microscope shows that their manner of diffracting light is such
as could only be brought about by a series of particles held in
suspension in a fluid. These particles must not be confused, how-
ever, with molecules; in general they must be aggregates of mole-
148 MICHAEL F. GUYER
cules. This is shown among other ways by their enormously greater
molecular weights. Their activities are essentially physical rather
than chemical in nature.
In fluids, the particles of the colloid, whether organic or inor-
ganic (such as finely divided metals), usually exist in the form of
suspensions rather than true solutions. We know this because
substances in true solution alter the freezing point and boiling point
of the solvent, but colloidal substances change these points little
if at all. Furthermore, solutions of crystalloids show an osmotic
pressure, their diffusibility depending upon the smallness of the
dissolved particles. On the contrary, mere suspensions show no
osmotic pressure and typical colloids behave in this manner. In
the case of the colloidal constituents of living cells, which cannot
be tested by freezing and boiling, we have to resort to this more
round-about method of determining whether or not osmotic pres-
sure exists. As a matter of fact it seems in some instances that
proteins may be, in part at least, in the form of true solutions. For
example, Starling has shown that the proteins dissolved in blood
serum have some osmotic pressure and this in an amount that is
far from being negligible. By direct. measurement he found an
osmotic pressure of 30 - 40 mm. of mercury.
It is customary to speak of colloids in the liquid state as sols
and in the more solid conditions as gels. Protoplasm, therefore,
since its fluidity is due to water, is a hydrosol. Like many other
sols protoplasm passes readily into the gel condition, becoming a
hydrogel. Of colloidal gels there are two fairly well defined classes,
viz., reversible and irreversible. In the first class, reversal of the
condition which produces the gel causes it to return to its former
state. For instance, the hydrosol of gelatin sets to a hydrogel upon
cooling, the process being reversed by heating. In the second class,
no return to the former state is produced by reversing the condi-
tions. As it is probable that the irreversible gelations are associ-
ated with a change in the colloid itself, the colloid is frequently
said to be “denatured” by the conditions acting upon it.
Protoplasm, so long as conditions for vital phenomena persist,
presents a remarkable degree of reversibility, many of its colloids
passing readily from the sol to the gel state and back again. Most
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY T49
protoplasmic structures seemingly originate through the setting or
coagulation of liquid colloids. In all probability, when we are deal-
ing with cell membranes, spindles, astral radiations, alveoli and
various other cell structures we are dealing essentially with condi-
tions of gelation. When such are seen in the living cell it 1s pre-
sumable that they are of the reversible type. What is seen in a
fixed cell is no sure criterion of what actually exists in the living cell.
Traube showed long ago that where two liquid colloids come into
contact under certain conditions, solid membranes may be formed.
Agents which tend to bring about an irreversible gelation of proto-
plasm tend to bring life to a standstill. For example, heating pro-
teids much above 45°C. produces such a permanent gelation. It
has been suggested that the heavy metals are poisonous to living
cells because they transform the proteins into irreversible gels.
While we may speak of protoplasm as a hydrophylic (1. e.
water-holding) colloid, it must not be forgotten that it also con-
tains small quantities of various crystalloids (salts, etc.). This
means that the chemical reactions of protoplasm invariably occur
in a liquid which is really a dilute solution of electrolytes. As is
well known, electrolytes when in solution dissociate more or less
into their constituent ions. For example, common salt, NaCl,
when dissolved in water exists in parts as free Na ions and free Cl
ions, and in part as molecular NaCl, the degree of dissociation
depending upon concentration of the solution. The ions thus freed
in solutions become charged electrically in the process of dissocia-
‘tion. The electro-negative ions are called the anions, the electro-
positive, the cations. In the case of solutions of sodium chloride
(NaCl), for instance, the released sodium ions bear positive
charges of electricity and are therefore the cations; the freed
chlorine ions bear negative charges and are the anions. Ions may -
consist not only of charged atoms but of charged groups of atoms
(radicals) as well. Processes of ionization occur in all solutions
of electrolytes. It is important to bear the electrical charge of the
atoms in mind for this introduces additional factors into the re-
actions of living substance. Many workers believe that the phys-
iological actions of not a few substances such as those of the com-
150 MICHAEL F. GUYER
mon salts are due to these electrical charges borne by the ionized
particles and not to the chemical nature of the particles themselves.
It is now an established fact that colloidal particles, as existing
under the conditions found in living matter, also bear electric
charges. The individual colloid particle although really composed
of many atoms or molecules behaves as a single charged particle, as
far as its electrical charge is concerned. Picton and Linder, Hardy,
and others have shown that the nature of the charge, whether
positive or negative, depends both on the nature of the colloidal
particle and of the fluid medium in which it is suspended. In gen-
eral acid colloidal particles are electro-negative, and alkaline col-
loidal particles, electro-positive. Moreover it has been determined
that the charge of the particle induces in the surrounding water or
other fluid medium the opposite kind of charge. For example, if
the particle is negative, the surrounding medium is positive. Fur-
thermore, the number* of negative or positive charges is propor-
tionate to the surface of the particle. When two or more particles
are thrown together, whether by mechanical means, heat, electric
current, or internal chemical changes in the colloids themselves,—
in short by any means whatever—if the particles coalesce there is
a reduction of surface; that is, the amount of surface of the coa-
lesced particles is much less than the sum total of the surfaces of
the original particles. Hence there must be an entire readjust-
ment of the electrical conditions. Conversely, as Bredig has shown,
when the electrical state of colloidal suspensions are disturbed in
any way there must be a corresponding re-arrangement of the col-
loidal particles. For instance, when the density of the charge of
the particles is diminished, aggregation leading to coagulation is
brought about; when the density of the charge is increased, a still
finer division of the particles is produced. Either change might
occur as a result of chemical changes in the particles themselves or
in the conditions surrounding them.
With these facts in mind we are now in position to understand
something of the conditions which are productive of gelation in
colloidal fluids. Hardy, using a sol of proteid has shown: (1) That
*The charge is measured in terms of the electrical unit which the physicist calls
the electron
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY I51
a gel is produced by the addition of electrolytes, but not by the
addition of non-electrolytes unless they act chemically; (2) that
the gelation produced by electrolytes is due to the electric charge
carried by the ion, inasmuch as identical results follow the use of
an electric current from a battery; (3) that the signs of the electric
charges carried by the ions (+ or —) determine the movements of
the colloidal particles either keeping them in suspension as a sol or
causing them to fall into the gel condition (e. g. a sol having its
colloidal particles negatively charged will pass into the gel state if
+ ions are added or if the + electrode of a battery is introduced).
These results indicate the importance of electrically charged
particles of any kind in the life of the cell and tend to clarify some
of the puzzling phenomena of protoplasmic activity. We can on
such a basis readily understand the rapid changes in the consist-
ency of protoplasm—changes from more rigid conditions to those
that are more fluid, and vice versa. Judging from the experi-
ments of Hardy they may be looked upon as due to changes in the
state of the colloids of the cells, which in their turn are determined
by the ions set free as a result of chemical changes in the cells.
As a very recent biological application of our knowledge of
colloids and the charges they bear may be cited a report of McClen-
don* on the formation or the non-formation of the so-called “fer-
tilization” membrane of the Echinoderm egg. At the time of
beginning development a substance comes to the surface of the
egg which according to McClendon bears a positive charge, that is,
it is basic. The jelly which surrounds the egg, however, is acid,
bearing therefore a negative charge. When the two substances
come in contact at the surface of the egg they precipitate each other,
thus forming the fertilization membrane. By washing away all
the jelly before the beginning of development the formation of the
membrane is prevented, although development proceeds normally.
There are apparently two special properties of colloids upon
which the possibility of forming the definite structural arrangements
seen in cells depends:
1. Science, March 10, 1911, P. 387.
152 MICHAEL F. GUYER
1. Their tendency to form aggregates and coherent systems of
various kinds (gelation, coagulation and changes in state of aggre-
gation generally) and,
2. The electrically charged nature (+ or—) of the colloidal
particles themselves. This leads adjacent particles or their aggre-
gates to repel or to attract one another electrostatically. The mutual
repulsion of particles appears, indeed, to be one of the chief factors
on which the stability of the colloidal system depends.
On the first property depends the formation of the various
colloid aggregates in the cell and the particular structure of these
aggregates. The second apparently determines in large part the
relative disposition assumed by the aggregates within the cell, (Ralph
S. Lillie? has made an application of this principle to the distribu-
tion of the nuclear aggregates or chromosomes in the cell during
division). These two properties are closely related as can be dem-
onstrated by altering either of them. Coagulative changes in a sol
are brought about, as we have seen, if the particles through any
disturbance are caused to lose all or a part of their mutually repel-
lent surface charges. Under such conditions surface tension pre-
vails and adjacent particles coalesce. It is probable that slight and
reversible changes in the state of the aggregation of the cell col-
loids are of constant occurrence in living protoplasm, and are
responsible for various of the physiological phenomena observed.
Although our knowledge of the pure physical chemistry of the
colloids in the cells is still far from complete, application of the
facts already known have been made by many workers in attempt-
ing to explain various life phenomena.
Space will not permit of an extended review of these cases but
a few representative ones will give some indication of the wide
possible application of the principles.
Loeb and Mathews particularly have in various papers insisted
on the probable physiologic importance of electrical charges car-
ried by ions, in contradistinction to the specific chemical nature of
the constituents which bear such charges. Mathews* goes so far as
American Journal of Physiology, XV, 1905, P. 46.
2.
3. See particularly his papers in The American Journal of Physiology for 1904
and 1905.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 153
to say in a comparatively recent paper that “Physiological action
is dependent upon electrical state and stability of the ion, and is
independent of chemical composition except as the chemical composi-
tion may influence its velocity and weight.” From his experimental
work he deduces a formula according to which he believes the
action of any given salt on protoplasm may be approximately pre-
dicted. Without going into detail it may be said that he has had to
take into account such factors as,—(1) The concentration of ions;
(2) The sign (+ or—) of the electric charges of the ions; (3)
The modification of the action of the ion due to its velocity and
weight (other things being equal, the faster it moves the more
powerful it is; the slower or heavier the less powerful); (4) Its
electrical stability or what he calls ionic potential* (this he empha-
sizes more and more in his later publications). He believes that
he has established in general that all anions have a stimulating effect,
all cations a depressing effect on living matter. Whether any salt
stimulates or depresses, therefore, depends upon the relative effici-
ency of its anions and cations.
Another interesting suggested application of our knowledge of
colloidal phenomena is as an explanation of the long standing prob-
lem of nerve conduction. Nerve substance is in part at least a
colloidal sol, and Mathews in particular, has adduced evidence to
show that the progression of an impulse may be due to a wave of
gelation sweeping along the nerve. Years ago Darwin found in
certain insectivorous plants (Drosera) that if one part of a leaf
were stimulated an impulse traveled across to the other side and
caused movement. As the impulse progressed he noted that the
cell was traversed by a wave of cloudiness due to a fine precipitation
which ran together into drops and then re-dissolved. Furthermore,
he found that this activity was prevented by ether, chloroform, CO,
etc., just the substances which produce anaesthesia in animals.
*Mathews defines ionic potential as the tendency of any ion or atom to change its
electrical state. He at first made usé of the method of determining it by means of the
solution tension of metals (i. e. in terms of the sum of the work necessary to transform
one atom of metal into one gram ion in the same space) but later found he could employ
other methods. As justification for applying the idea to protoplasmic activities he cites
the evidence of the chemists Bodliinder and Abegg that ionic potential is one of the chief
factors in determining chemical affinity.
154 MICHAEL F. GUYER
The conditions which prevail in the transmission of a nerve im-
pulse afford at least a very suggestive parallel. As applied to the
nervous condition the idea would be that the nerve colloids readily
form reversible gels and the nerve impulse is due to a progressive
gelation of these colloids. Anaesthetics, possibly because of their
solvent action on fats, are presumed to prevent this gelation.
R. S. Lillie has shown the plausibility of regarding the con
tractions of the swimming plates of Ctenophora as due to reversible
colloidal gelations and suggests possible extensions of the idea to
other forms of protoplasmic contraction. He has also made inter-
esting suggestions as to the applicability of the principles governing
colloidal phenomena to various features of cell division®. He found,
for example, that by the use of mutually repellant groups of floating
magnetized needles, exposed to the attractive or repulsive action of
magnetic poles, many features in the arrangement of the chromo-
somes in cell division could be simulated, particularly the positions
taken by spireme figures, and the arrangement of the chromosomes
in the equatorial plate stage of normal and of tripolar mitosis.
He regards certain features of mitosis, at least, as due essentially to
mutual electrostatic repulsions among the chromatin particles.
Another promising line of work has been the use of various
colloidal suspensions of metals in the role of enzymes. Since the
fundamental problems of the metabolism of the cell are at the
basis of all life phenomena, and inasmuch as these processes are
intimately involved at all stages with enzymic processes, any new
light on the enzymes is likely to be of very great value. Enzymic
activity is at bottom presumably a matter of catalysis. This idea
becomes all the more acceptable when we realize that many ferment-
ative processes can be strikingly paralleled by colloidal suspensions
of finely divided metals. Catalysis is seemingly purely a matter of
contact action, changes being brought about in a chemical compound
by an agent which itself is recoverable at the end of the reaction
in an unaltered state, and undiminished in amount. Bredig goes so
far as to call certain colloidal suspensions “inorganic ferments.”
This is because such suspensions are capable of catalysing many
22 deoc. (Git:
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 155
chemical reactions that may also be catalysed by ferments of cell
origin, and in an identical way. For example, colloidal suspensions
of platinum have the same power as many ferments of catalytically
decomposing hydrogen peroxide into water and oxygen. As in the
case of the ferments, this metallic substance is active in exceedingly
small quantities. Thus 1 gram atom of platinum (94.8 grams) diluted
with 70,000,000 liters of water is still able to accelerate the decom-
position of more than a million times its amount of hydrogen
peroxide. That is, 1 cubic centimeter of the suspension, containing
only one-three hundred thousandth millegram of platinum still shows
the so-called fermentative properties. The true organic ferments
themselves can scarcely rival this in minuteness of the amount nec-
essary. As is the case with true ferments, these metal sols are
very sensitive to heat and various other agencies which inhibit
fermentative processes. The parallel is so close that some investi-
gators have expressed the belief that true ferments are colloidal
sols which operate in much the same way as do the metal sols.
A few illustrations of this parallelism may not be without interest.
The oxidation of alcohol to acetic acid by Mycoderma aceti can be
paralleled by the use of finely divided platinum. Dilute oxalic acid
is decomposed by certain fungi, likewise by powdered palladium,
platinum, etc. The oxidation of pyragallol is accelerated by the
ferment laccase. The same result may be obtained by means of
colloidal platinum. Rayman and Sulc have shown that the inver-
sion of cane sugar can be brought about by the action of finely
divided metals. On the one hand, oxydase splits hydrogen peroxide
into water and atomic oxygen, invertase inverts cane sugar, zymase
ferments sugars; on the other, platinum black will do the same.
Not only do these metallic suspensions accelerate hydrolysis, but
they, like many enzymes, may also show reversibility of action,
synthesizing the original substance in the presence of an excess of
its cleavage products. Thus Nielsen* has apparently by means
of platinum black paralleled very closely the activities of the fat
splitting enzyme lipase; for he was able to produce hydrolysis of
ethyl butyrate into butyric acid and ethyl alcohol and conversely, to
4. American Journal of Physiology, 1904.
150 MICHAEL F. GUYER
synthesize these two products into ethyl butyrate again. He has
been equally successful in experiments on certain carbohydrates.
As a final example of some of the general lines along which
various investigators are attempting to apply our knowledge of col-
loidal phenomena may be cited an interesting series of experiments
by Martin H. Fisher? in which he seeks to show both the quantitative
and the qualitative importance of colloids in the regulation of the
water content of the cells of various tissues. Starting with the fact
that the living organism is built up chiefly of hydrophilic (i. e. water
absorbing) colloid materials he has devised experiments to show
that the behavior of living protoplasm in the quantitative absorption
of water is not essentially different from that of simpler non-living
hydrophylic colloids such as gelatin or various albumins, nor does
it differ qualitatively from these when subjected to parallel series of
external conditions such as the effects of various alkalies, acids and
salts. He shows, for instance, that living protoplasm can be made
to take up or give off water by the same conditions which make
gelatin of fibrin give off or take up water. In Fischer’s theory,
which he terms a colloidal absorption theory we find a distinct chal-
lenge to the older and prevailing osmotic pressure theory. He rejects
the whole idea of semi-permeable membranes which is the main stay
of the pressure theory. While such workers as Pfeffer, Hof-
meister, Durig, Hober, Hamburger, Overton, and Pauli have rec-
ognized colloidal absorption as a factor, they have considered it as
incidental or of secondary importance, and of utility principally in
explaining some of the various exceptions which arise in the appli-
cations of the osmotic pressure theory. The questions involved are
of such fundamental importance in the functioning of the cell that
we may well. consider the matter under a special heading, brief
though our discussion must be.
THE QUESTION OF SEMI-PERMEABLE MEMBRANES.
How to account for the passing of water and substances in solu-
tion into and out of the cell during nutritive exchanges, secretions,
lymph formation, etc., has long been a puzzling problem. It soon
5. Oedema; A Study of the Physiology and the Pathology of Water Absorption by
the Living Organism. John Wiley & Sons, N. Y.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 157
became evident that van’t Hoff’s laws for osmotic pressure of sub-
stances in solution (paralleling the laws of gases) would not hold
for living cells, at least in the purely mechanical way which pre-
vails in non-living matter. Physiologists found it necessary to
qualify their views of the osmotic nature of the process by using
such terms as “‘selective secretion” “‘selective absorption or diffusion”
and the like, the “selection” depending upon unknown peculiarities
of cellular structure or activity. Many workers have come to the
conclusion that the phenomena must be due to the existence of
semi-permeable membranes—that is, membranes which are perme-
able to water but not to molecules of the substances in solution or to
only certain of these—at the periphery of the cells.
This membrane is not to be confused with the ordinary visible
cell wall, since if it exists at all it must also be present in cells
devoid of a visible wall. It is regarded by the advocates of this
theory as a lipoida] (i. e. fat-like) plasma membrane. It must be
recognized at the outset that its existence is one of theoretical ne- _
cessity rather than something optically demonstrable, unless one
identifies it with an ordinary surface-tension film, but its postulated
properties are not in keeping with this latter simple physical con-
ception. However this may be, it is a fact that living cells in general
show a high degree of physical impermeability to many diffusible
substances. The turgor so characteristic of plant cells, for example,
is regarded as direct evidence of this fact, since it is due, presum-
ably, to the osmotic pressure of crystalloid substances dissolved in
the cell sap. Under such conditions substances in solution in the
cell cannot be discharged, although water may pass freely to and
fro, nor can substances in solution outside the cell pass in. How
then is the exchange of soluble substances effected by the cell? To
meet the necessities of the case it is inferred by some that a plasma
membrane ordinarily impermeable undergoes periods of permea-
bility. With this in mind various investigators have set about
finding the factors which determine and control these temporary
lapses of impermeability.
6. See especially his paper “The General Biologicai Significance of Changes in the
Permeability of the Surface Layer or Plasma-Membrane of Living Cells. Biological
Bulletin, XVII, 3, Aug. 1909.
158 MICHAEL F. GUYER
R. S. Lillie’ enumerates as such factors, the effects of electrical
or other stimulation, the influence of internally developed carbon
dioxide, and a large class of foreign substances, particularly such as
exhibit the property of dissolving or being dissolved in fats. He
regards it as probable that food materials enter the cells at times of
such permeability yet, as he points out, in both absorption and secre-
tion the relative rates at which many of the substances in solution
make their entrance or exit from the cells are largely independent
of the laws of purely physical diffusion.
As visible illustrations of the loss of diffusible materials from
the cell due to what the advocates of this theory regard as increase
of permeability of a surface membrane, may be cited the discharge
of pigments during cytolysis or, conversely, the inability of many
dyes to enter living cells.
Lillie has performed numerous experiments and adduced much
evidence in support of the membrane theory as applied to various
problems. He considers, for example, that a temporary and readily
reversible increase in the permeability of the plasma membranes is
responsible for the phenomena of stimulation in irritable tissues.
As to why increase of permeability should correspond to stimula-
tion and decrease to inhibition he answers as follows: “It is assumed
that during periods of increased permeability the loss of carbon
dioxide from the cell will be more rapid than normal; the energy-
yielding oxidative reactions of which this substance is the end-
product are thus accelerated as a direct consequence of the increased
rate of removal of the reaction-product from the system; hence the
increased contractile activity or other energy manifestation during
stimulation. Conversely, decrease of the normal permeability means
decreased loss of carbon dioxide and hence retarded oxidation and
energy-production ; stimulation is more difficult at such times because
of the greater difficulty of increasing the permeability to the critical
degree required. This general view ascribes primary importance
to the plasma membrane as probably the chief means by which the
velocity of the oxidative energy-yielding reactions in the cell is
varied.”
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 159
The rhythmical action in such tissues as cardiac muscle he
believes is due to a regular alternation of periods of increased and
decreased permeability. Again, he regards the initiation of cell
division as ascribable likewise to a periodic change of permeability
and the consequent interchange of diffusible substances and cites
evidence to show that the rhythm of the mitotic process is accom-
panied by a rhythm of alternate increase and decrease of permea-
bility or at least of factors which he regards as causing increase and
decrease of permeability. Concerning the manner in which increase
in permeability initiates mitotic division he has this to say: ‘“‘The
main factors in producing this effect are in my opinion two: first,
a disturbance of chemical equilibrium due to an increase in the rate
at which certain metabolic products (probably chiefly carbon diox-
ide) are lost from the cell; this is an effect similar to that which,
on the general theory of stimulation outlined above, underlies the
chemical effect of stimulation in muscle. The precise effect of such
a change will of course vary from cell to cell. Second, a definitely
localized increase in the general surface tension of the cell in conse-
quence of a loss or lowering of the electrical surface polarization.”
Lillie looks upon the existence of a plasma-membrane possessing
but temporary periods of permeability as an indispensable attribute
for the preservation of the chemical organization of the cell. Inas-
much as he has stated his point of view concisely in a recent paper
he may be directly quoted: “In the specific metabolism of any animal
the protein and carbohydrate food materials are split respectively
to amino-acids and sugars, both highly diffusible substances; and
many other diffusible products important in metabolism are formed
by oxidation or hydrolysis. These substances must not be lost from
the cell. It is plain that any specific organism must exhibit a con-
stant and specific metabolism—is indeed the product or the manifes-
tation of this. Now the existence of specific metabolic processes in
any cell requires the presence of many interacting substances in
proportions that must not vary widely from a constant mean; in
other words, constancy in the character of its metabolic processes is
essential to the specificity of a particular cell. Its protoplasm may
be regarded as a mixture of diverse yet constantly present sub-
160 MICHAEL F. GUYER
stances in an approximate chemical equilibrium of a highly complex
order. Any such constancy of composition, implying constancy in
the conditions of equilibrium, would be impossible in a system not
very completely isolated from its surroundings. In the cell this
isolation is due to the presence of an impermeable surface film. A
marked degree of impermeability to the great majority of its dif-
fusible contents is thus indispensable to the continued existence of
a highly complex heterogeneous system like the cell.”
The semi-permeable membrane or osmotic pressure theory is
not going unquestioned, however, for as I have already indicated,
Martin H. Fischer? has made an arraignment of the whole idea.
He objects that such membranes are not optically demonstrable,
that their existence lies only in presumed hypothetical necessities
and believes that the phenomena concerned are explicable on other
and simpler grounds. He points out the fact that formation of
“precipitation membranes” in physico-chemical experiments (to
which formation of plasma membranes by living protoplasm is sup-
posed to be analogous) is by no means a universal occurrence but
that on the contrary the phenomenon is one that happens only under
special conditions. Since no known cell is impenetrable to all dis-
solved substances in the protoplasm or in the surrounding medium
of the cell he argues that if we maintain the view of partial perme-
ability, that is permeability to some substances and not to others,
then every substance becomes a special case because there is “little
apparent connection between the kind of substances that are excep-
tions to these laws of osmotic pressure.’”’ What he is protesting
against in reality is what he considers the great overrating of the
osmotic theory as an explanation of biological phenomena. For he
goes on to say, “I am not maintaining that the laws of osmotic pres-
sure may not account for some of the phenomena observed
in at least some cells.’ He sees “little reason for accept-
ing the osmotic theory as of paramount or even great importance in
the explanation of the ways and means by which tissues absorb or
secrete water.” He would explain this process on the basis of the
hydrophylic nature of the colloids of the cell just as one must ex-
be, doc: Cit.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 161
plain the absorption and secretion of water by powdered gelatin or
fibrin on this basis. Inasmuch as all colloids do not react in the
same way either qualitatively or quantitatively toward solvents and
solutes, and since in the cell various colloids exist, inequalities in the
amount of water or solutes held by different tissues, or in different
parts of the same cell is readily explicable. The red corpuscle, for
example, is a mixture of at least four if not more colloids. There
is first the stroma which is probably largely protein in nature, and
mixed with it are at least two known lipoids, lecithin and cholesterin,
the three enumerated being, in varying degrees, of the hydrophylic
type. The two lipoids are good solvents of such substances as
chloroform, ether and alcohol. Lastly haemoglobin, although easily
obtainable in crystalline form, exist in the corpuscle probably in the
form of a colloid but one which has no affinity for water, that is, it
is not hydrophylic but “hydrophobic.” Likewise other cells pos-
sess differences in colloidal constitution—variations in the kind and
amounts of colloidal proteids, colloidal lipoids, colloidal carbo-
hydrates, etc..—and we should, therefore, expect to find correspond-
ing differences in their behavior towards solvents and solutes as
regards absorption and secretion.
Fischer finds with tissues as with fibrin and gelatin, that acids
and alkalies are the substances most capable of altering the affinity
of the hydrophylic colloids for water. Any condition which causes
or increases the production or secretion of acid (or alkalies) in the
cell, for example, leads to an increased imbibition of water—which
when exceeding normal bounds receives a special name such as plasm-
optysis or oedema—because acids increase the affinity of the hydro-
phylic colloids of the cell for water. Carbon dioxide behaves as an
acid in this respect. Any conversion of cell colloids having but
little affinity for water into hydrophylic types would of course have
a similar effect. Lack of oxygen is in the same category inasmuch
as Araki has shown that under such a condition lactic acid is
produced in the tissues.
Conversely the imbibition of water, that is, the development of
oedema, is prevented or diminished by all substances such as salts
which decrease the affinity of the hydrophylic colloids for water.
162 MICHAEL F. GUYER
The concentration of the salts in solution in the cell, therefore, is
as important factor in determining the aqueous content.
Fischer further points out that we must discriminate sharply
between the absorption or secretion of the solvent and the absorp-
tion or secretion of the substance dissolved in it, for although the
two may be frequently associated they are by no means identical
processes. In handling the question of the secretion and absorp-
tion of solutes and the retention of them in different proportions in
different cells or in different parts of the same cell he makes use
of the laws of simple solution, of adsorption and of partition. For
example, he regards the retention of haemoglobin in the red cor-
puscles as largely a matter of adsorption, the stoma being the ad-
sorbing material. The conditions are seemingly parallel to various
dyeing processes which have been shown to represent adsorption
phenomena, and he has devised experiments to show that just as
the degree of adsorption in dyeing may be varied or prevented by the
use of various mordants, precipitants, fixants and bleaches, so by a
similar use of acids, bases, salts, colloids of various kinds, heat,
etc., the combination between haemoglobin and stroma may be
increased or decreased. Speaking of the relationship between dif-
ferent colloids he goes on to say “Not only may the individual ad-
sorption characteristics of any group of colloids toward a single
other one (hemoglobin in this case) be different but they may
mutually affect éach other and so alter each other’s adsorption char-
acteristics. Lecithin and cholesterin, for example, have properties
which allow them not only to share in, or modify the ordinary ad-
sorption phenomena, as exhibited by the protein constituent of the
red blood corpuscles, but through their lipoidal character they may
not only absorb substances which the rest of the corpuscle cannot
take up, but they may be affected by means which do not affect
the rest of the blood corpuscle.”
As to the third law, he continues, “The law of partition be-
comes prominent as soon as the dissolved substance is either more
or less soluble in some substance contained within the cell than in
the solvent surrounding the cell. Hence the special ease and rapid-
ity of absorption of substances readily soluble in fat-like bodies
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 163
(lipoid-soluble substances) by cells containing such lipoids. In this
enormous difference between the solubility of substances in water
and in the fat-like bodies, both as to rate of solution and absolute
amounts dissolved (coefficient of partition), we can find the expla-
nation not only of the rapidity with which the lipoid-soluble sub-
stances enter the cells, but also of the large amounts that may be
absorbed.”
“When we consider protoplasm simply as a mixture of different
colloids (proteins, fats, carbohydrates), and consider the special
characteristics of absorption that arise out of such a mixture not
only as regards water, but as regards substances dissolved, or
pseudo-dissolved (colloids) in it, it seems to me that we account
without difficulty, even without membranes, for all those phenomena
which have up to the present been interpreted through the assump-
tion of semipermeable, partially permeable, and lipoidal membranes
about cells.”
Cell turgor, plasmolysis, and plasmoptysis (swelling until the
cell wall is ruptured) are, he believes, all explicable on the basis of
the increase of decrease of the affinity of the cell colloids for water.
R. S. Lillie has offered the following objection to an adsorp-
tion as against a membrane theory: “In adsorption equilibria are
involved, as the characteristic equation indicates: i. e., the presence
of a considerable quantity of a soluble substance in the adsorbed and
presumably non-diffusible state requires also its presence in a free
and diffusible state in sufficient concentration to maintain the equi-
librium. Again, the chief colloidal and water-insoluble constituents
of the protoplasm are readily hydrolyzable, and the conditions for
their hydrolysis undoubtedly exist in all living cells; hence it can
scarcely be doubted that the protoplasmic complex contains free
amino-acids and sugars; it must also be assumed that at least part
of the inorganic constituents exist in the form of ions free to diffuse,
even though another part may be in combination, as ion proteid or
otherwise. If these constituents were free to diffuse from the
cell, it is evident that the existence of any stable chemical organi-
zation would be precluded, and the delicate balance of conditions
164 MICHAEL F. GUYER
on which the maintenance of normal life processes depends would
be impossible.”
In most of this Fisher would doubtless acquiese only instead
of accepting Lillie’s conclusion that “in order to prevent its own
disorganization by outward diffusion of soluble constituents” living
protoplasm has an investing membrane ‘“‘impermeable—except under
special and temporary conditions—to such diffusion,’ he would
maintain that the whole phenomena is explicable on the basis of
adsorption and the equilibria involved, the equilibrium of a given
substance being not a fixed thing but subject to fluctuation with
any variation in the external as well as the internal factors, just as
the retention or loss of color in stained fibrin varies with different
conditions in the surrounding liquid. For example, suppose that
into three test-tubes the following substances be placed respectively :
into the first, an aqueous solution of toluidin blue; into the second,
a bit of fibrin and a similar solution of toluidin blue; and into the
third, a bit of fibrin and a slightly acidulated solution of toluidin
blue. The color will remain evenly distributed in the first, it will
become very dense in the fibrin and scanty in the fluid in the second,
but in the third the fibrin will remain entirely uncolored. The parallel
to the conditions of the cell is obvious. .
For an adequate appreciation of the merits of the arguments
pro and con, original papers must be referred to, as no brief ab-
stract can do the various authors justice. The papers of Overton’,
Lillie’ and Héber® present in detail the one view, that of Martin H.
Fischer®, the other.
CHEMISTRY OF THE CELL.
Since it is the proteins in general which seem to be most
immediately linked with life phenomena the recent attempts to-
ward their analysis and synthesis have been of unusual interest ta
the biologist. Enough has been determined regarding the consti-
5. Loc. Cit.
7. Nagel’s Handbuch der Physiologie, Braunschmeig, II, 744; 1906.
8. American Journal of Physiology, 1905, 1909, 1910; Biological Bulletin, 1909;
Science, 1909.
9. Weber den Mechanismus des Stoffaustausches bei den Zellen. Ergebnisse der
wissenshaftlichen Medizin. Leipzig, 1910.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 105
tution of proteins to show that they are as subject to the well
established principles of configuration, polymerization, stereometry
and the like as are the simpler organic compounds.
It has long been known that the various proteins are of very
different orders of complexity. For example there are certain
simpler types of the order of albumins, globulins and vitellins and
other more complicated grades such as haemoglobin, which is a
combination of haematin and globulin, glycoproteids (compounds
of simple proteins with carbo-hydrates), or again even more com-
plex ones such as the nucleoproteids which are resolvable into com-
pounds of simpler proteins with nuclein, itself a compound of
nucleic acid and an albumin or other free proteid.
The nucleoproteids are confined for the most part to the nucleus
except for occasional overflows or discharges into the cytoplasm.
But it should be observed that they are of the grade of simple pro-
teins plus additional substances chiefly nucleins, and there is no
reason apparent for not regarding the simpler cytoplasmic proteins
as just as characteristic of the individual which bears them as the
nucleins or the albuminous component which makes up the pro-
tein foundation for the nucleoproteid. The true nucleoproteids
differ from other phosphorous-containing proteins, such as vitellin
of egg yolk, and caseinogen, in at least the one respect that the
so-called purine bases are characteristic cleavage products. Halli-
burton’? has recently written a good non-technical paper on the
chemistry of the cell nucleus.
Since the nucleins are so characteristic of the nucleus, nucleic
acid being the chief factor responsible for the intense staining of
chromosomes, any new discoveries regarding them are of excep-
tional interest to biologists, particularly those interested in the
germinal mechanism of heredity. It is now a known fact that there
are whole series of nucleins, varying according to the relative
amounts of their nucleic acid and proteins. .
Nucleic acid yields (1) phosphoric acid, (2) a group of bases
termed purine bases, (3) a second group called the pyrimidine bases,
and (4) a hexone carbohydrate. The purine bases, four in number
10. Science Progress Vol. IV, 1909.
166 MICHAEL F. GUYER
(hypoxanthine, xanthine, adenine, guanine) have at different times
borne different names such as nuclein bases, xanthine bases, and
alloxuric bases, but they are now all termed purine bases because
all have been shown to be derivatives of a fundamental “ring”
compound called by Emil Fischer purine (C, H, N,). Likewise the
pyrimidine bases (cytosine, thymine, uracil) are all derivations of
another ring compound, pyrimidine. As methods of analysis im-
prove, the older idea that each nuclein has its own specific nucleic
acid, is giving place to the idea that nucleic acid is in reality a sub-
stance of definite and constant composition.
The tentative view of Stendel regarding the constitution of
the nucleic acid molecule is of considerable interest although it
must be borne in mind that the formula may later have to undergo
some revision. It is as follows:
O H — P — Sugar — Guanine
|
O H — P — Sugar — Adenine
|
O H — P — Sugar — Cytosine
|
O H — P — Sugar — Thymine
That is, each of four enchained atoms of phosphorus is united on
the one side to a hydroxyl group and on the other to a hexone carbo-
hydrate molecule. Each hexone group is further linked to one of
four different bases.
It has been found that nucleic acid and its salts under certain
circumstances pass into a gelatinous or colloidal condition and
Jones™ has shown that in the case of the sodium salt the gelatinous
and non-gelatinous conditions are readily convertible one into an-
other. He sees in this fact a possible explanation of the physiolog-
ical localization and migration o fnucleic acid in the cell.
The synthesis of nucleic acid in the cleavage cells after fertili-
zation is one of the most important riddles to be solved by the cell-
physiologist, for as Loeb!” has pointed out in a most suggestive paper
11. Journal of Biological Chemistry, 1908.
12. On the Chemical Character of the Process of Fertilization and its Bearing upon
the Theory of Life Phenomena. Science, Oct. 4, 1907.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 167
“the most obvious chemical reaction which the spermatozoon causes
in the egg” is “an eronmous synthesis of chromatin or nuclear ma-
terial from the constituents of the cytoplasm.” We have already
seen that nucleic acid is one of the chief constituents of nuclein or
chromatin.
Regarding Miescher’s conclusion that lecithin, which is abun-
dant in all eggs, is one of the substances from which nucleic acid
‘is formed. Loeb has this to say : “The lecithin consists of two differ-
ent groups of bodies, one being distearyl (or oleyl) glycero-phos-
phoric acid, the other being cholin. * * * The cholin can apparently
not be utilized for the synthesis of nucleins, but the other con-
stituent is able not only to furnish the phosphoric acid skeleton of
the nucleic acid molecule, but also the carbohydrates. The fatty acid
could be rendered available for this purpose by oxidation and we
shall see indeed: that phenomena of oxidation are the prerequisites
of the synthesis of nucleins. * * * The question as to whether
or not lecithin is the source of the phosphates and possibly some
other constituents of the nucleic acid group can not be decided until
synthesis of nucleic acid has been accomplished.” He goes on to
point out that “The fertilized egg cannot develop or increase the™
number of its nuclei unless an ample supply of free oxygen is
present.”
As to the chemistry of the proteins themselves great progress
has been made in our knowledge in late years. Much of the advance
has been due to the efforts of Emil Fischer® and his associates.
It is a familiar fact that the native proteins are readily broken
down artificially by hydrolysis through a series of stages to simpler
and simpler products. And it is known that essentially the same
process occurs in normal digestion.
13. The results of Fischer’s work from 1899 to 1906 have been published in book
form “Untersuchungen tiber Aminosiiuren, Polypeptide und Proteine,”’ 1906.
See also “The Work of Emil Fischer and his School on the Chemistry of the
Proteins,” by R. H. Aders Plimmer, Science Progress Vol. II, 1907-8. :
168 MICHAEL F. GUYER
The sequence runs approximately as follows:
Proteins.
—Meta- or infra-proteins.
—Proteoses.
—Peptones.
—Polypeptids (a relatively small number
of amino-acids linked together).
—Individual amino-acids, of which
there is a great variety.
Because of the great abundance of the amino-acids and because
of their universal presence as disintegration products of proteins, the
conclusion has been reached that the protein molecule is built up in
large part of a series of amino-acid polymers. These acids are
closely related to the fatty acid series. They are in fact regarded
as aminated fatty acids; that is, fatty acids given partial basic
properties by the addition of N H, molecules. This possession of
both acid and basic properties is what renders their ready linkage
possible.
Emil Fischer's work upon carbohydrates and purine com-
pounds had already become classic when he undertook the study of
proteins. He first devised a method (the ester method) for the
separation of the various kinds of amino-acids from one another
and then set about synthesizing these units into proteid-like bodies.
Curtius and Goebel found many years ago that the ethyl ester
of glycerine lost two molecules of alcohol when dissolved in water
and became, to use modern nomenclature, glycerine anhydride,
NEEL PaO iEI- see GO:
| |
COe oCHt aN EH:
Fischer found that by boiling this substance with concentrated
hydrochloric acid the so-called piperazine ring was split, giving the
hydrochloride of the base C, H, N, O;. He termed this compound
glycylglycine, calling the group NH, CH, CO the glycyl group.
Glycine being more readily prepared than other amino-acids, has
been mostly used by Fischer in the synthesis of polypeptids. De-
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 169
pending upon the number of polymers involved he uses the terms
di-, tri-, tetra-peptid, etc. He has succeeded in producing one of
sufficient complexity to contain eighteen polymers. This octadeca-
peptid has three leucine and fifteen glycine radicals. In native pro-
teins, with the possible exception of gelatin, which contains some
20 per cent of glycine, it is doubtful if such long glycine chains
exist. The complex polypeptid in question, representing the most
complicated combination ever obtained synthetically in which exact
knowledge of its constitution has been retained, has a molecular
weight of only 1213. It has been pointed out, however, that if the
glycine residues could be replaced by leucine, phenylalanine or tyro-
sine residues, this weight would be doubled or trebled and would
thus be as great as the normal for many native proteins.
Nearly one hundred polypeptids have been prepared so far.
They resemble peptones in their appearance and in their reactions
towards enzymes and various test reagents. Fischer, in fact, regards
peptones as mixtures of polypeptids. Bodies of the same type as
some of those he has constructed have also been isolated from
natural organic substances. One of his synthetic forms, l-leucyl-
triglycyl-I-tyrosin, seems to have all the properties of the albumoses.
Furthermore, Abderhalden and several of his associates, maintain
that when various of the polypeptids are injected into a living organ-
ism they are apparently utilized in metabolism in the same way that
native proteins are.
The protein-splitting ferment trypsin does not produce hydro-
lysis of polypeptids which have a less number of glycine radicals
than five. It is an interesting fact, moreover, that only certain of
the higher polypeptids are hydrocyzed by trypsin. This gives an
important clue for selecting suitable ones to use in synthetic experi-
ments since probably only those acted upon by trypsin would repre-
sent the combinations most likely to occur in the natural proteins.
Thus by studying the action of digestive ferments on polypeptids of
known constitution, and at the same time on native proteins, it is
hoped that sufficient insight will be gained into the chemical nature
of the latter, to lead eventually to their synthesis at the hand of the
chemist.
170 MICHAEL F. GUYER
For a long time the optical activity (relation to the plane of
polarized light) of compounds has been regarded as an important
test in discriminating between those produced by vital processes
and similar compounds prepared synthetically by the chemist. But
Fischer has shown that both the optically active and inactive forms
of these amino-bodies can be produced outside the body. Thus one
of the last distinctions between “vital” and laboratory products
has been swept away.
As regards the recent work of chemists on the proteins, then,
if the reviewer may quote from one of his own papers'* now in
press, “The results point clearly to the conclusion that the peptones
and higher proteins are huge molecules formed chiefly of amino-
acid molecules linked together by NH and CO affinities left unsatis-
fied as a result of processes comparable to dehydration. Such a
protein molecule may perhaps be represented as a main chain or
ring, of which the respective links are amino-acid “nuclei.” Glyco-
coll, NH,CH,COOH, for instance, would through dehydration have
for its nucleus in such a chainmNH.CH,.CO—. Furthermore, since
one H of the CH, of such “nuclei.”
(e. g., —NH.CH.CO—)
|
H
can be substituted by various compounds (acetic acid, butane,
methyl-paraoxybenzene, etc.) we are led to conclude that to each
link of the protein chain, a side chain, differing in constitution in
different cases, is attached or is attachable by replacement of this
hydrogen atom. The well known instability of living protein would
seem to be due to the fact that the chemical systems in such a giant
molecule are never fully saturated at any one time, so that there is
continually an adding and detaching and shifting of side-chains with
perhaps at times more fundamental shifts or replacements in the
amino-acid “nuclei” themselves. Quantitative and qualitative dif-
ferences of proteins would seem to depend fundamentally on the
kind and- amount of the constituent amino-acids and secondarily on
the chemical nature of the various side-chains.
14. American Naturalist
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 171
Probably the scheme as outlined is much simpler than the
true conditions in the protein molecule, but it will serve as a sort of
diagram of the relations which exist there. It is probable, too,
that the conditions in different proteins vary greatly in complexity.
The chief point to be emphasized is the fact that the results of many
investigators bear out this general conception of the protein mole-
cule.”
There is a growing interest in the properties and constitution
of certain compounds of labile nature termed lipoids, of which
lecithin and cholesterin are probably the best known. Flexner and
Noguchi, for instance, have shown that the haemolytic action of
cobra venom on red corpuscles goes on only in the presence of
blood serum, and Kyes identified the activator in the serum as
lecithin. He found, furthermore, that cholesterin has the property
of preventing the activation of cobra venom by lecithin. The inter-
est in these bodies, particularly by workers in experimental medi-
cine has in consequence, been greatly intensified.
Certain groups of lipoidal substances, the phosphatides particu-
larly, are. found very frequently in both animal and plant organs in
combination with various proteins, carbohydrates, glucosides and
alkaloids, but whether the combination is a definite chemical union or
whether, as most investigators seem inclined to believe, it is due
to the adsorbing power of the colloidal phosphatides, is unknown.
Perhaps the lecitho-protein obtained from the yolk of eggs has
received most attention.
Cholesterin which belongs to another class of lipoids charac-
terized by their freedom from both phosphorus and nitrogen, seems
to be a constant and therefore presumably an essential constituent
in the cells of both plants and animals. Recent investigations tend
to show that it has little in common with fats but belongs to the
so-called “terpenes,’’ a peculiar class of substances found chiefly in
plant secretions. Some are inclined to look upon its presence as a
protective function against the attacks of toxins, whether auto-
toxins or of external origin. It has been found by Przibram, for
example, that the serum of animals fed on cholesterin develops a
resistance against the haemolytic action of saponin eight times
greater than exists in the normal animal.
172 MICHAEL F. GUYER
A few investigators, such as Bang, believe the proteins have
been overestimated and the lipoids underestimated as the ‘‘carriers
of life.’ Speaking of lecithin in particular, Rosenheim’ has this
to) say? “°F * =* — at is quite. possible that lecithin simay _belmer
only an activator for the assimilation of toxin, or an amboceptor
which anchors the toxin on to the cell it attacks, but in a more
general sense it may play a role in the same sort of way in relation
to the safe anchorage of nitrogenous substances of food value,
which are important for cell life. The latest researches on ferment
action have clearly shown that ferments are not present in cells in
the active state but as so-called pro-ferments. To produce their
effect another—chemically so far unknown—substance is necessary ;
and that this substance may be lecithin (or a similar lipoid) is a
view that is gaining ground.”
SomE MATTERS OF TERMINOLOGY.
Along with the advances in our knowledge of cell structure have
come a number of new terms. It seems advisable, therefore, to
indicate the meaning of some of those most frequently encountered
in current literature. The unreduced number of chromosomes in
the body cells and early germ cells is now usually spoken of as the
diploid, and the reduced, as the haploid number of chromosomes.
The term synapsis which originally referred to the entire process of
the peculiar contraction of the spireme and pairing of the chromo-
somes which occurs during one stage of the maturation period is
now restricted so as to mean only the actual pairing, the contraction
phase being indicated by the term synizesis. The end-to-end pair-
ing of chromosomes is termed telosynapsis, the side-to-side pairing,
parasynapsis. The accessory or odd chromosome originally found
in the spermatogenesis of certain insects and looked upon as of pos-
sibly great significance in sex determination, is variously termed,
heterochromosome, monosome, heterotropic chromosome, idiochrom-
osome and X-chromosome. Montgomery also designates the ordi-
nary chromosomes in which there are no marked differences in be-
15. The Biochemistry of Animals and Plants. Science Progress Vol. III,
1908, P. 117.
|
|
|
,
|
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 173
havior as autosomes, and all chromosomes of different behavior he
terms allosomes. Allosomes that occur in pairs in the spermato-
gonium he calls diplosomes. The term matotic phase is used by some
workers, more particularly botanists, to indicate the series of nuclear
changes involved during the so-called ‘maturation period.” Certain
chromatin-like bodies which may be present in the cytoplasm outside
of the nucleus are termed mitochondria or chondriosomes.
INDIVIDUALITY OF CHROMOSOMES.
The question of the persistence of the individuality of chromo-
somes through successive divisions, first made prominent by Rabl
and Boveri and later by Moenkhaus'*, Tennant’, and others, con-
tinues to be a pertinent topic. If the term individuality is used in
the sense of genetic continuity as expressed by Wilson*’, that is,
that each chromosome bears a genetic relation to one only of the
previous generation, the view is pretty generally accepted by cyto-
logists, although various investigators have pronounced adversely
upon it. An adverse criticism based upon certain fact of amitosis
will be found in a paper by Child’®. In a recent paper of Morgan*°
on “Chromosomes and Heredity” there is a good general discus-
sion of the whole topic. And an interesting analysis of the scepti-
cism of Della Valle and other opponents of the theory is rendered
by Montgomery”! in his paper “On the Dimegalous Sperm and
Chromosomal Variation of Euschistus, with Reference to Chromo-
somal Continuity.’’ A recent series of chromosome studies by Miss
Bonnevie* are also of much interest in this connection. Among
botanists Overton", for instance, finds that in both the somatic and
the germ cells of certain plants the chromosomes do not lose their
identity during the periods between divisions, but persist as visible
“pro-chromosomes” arranged in parallel pairs with apparent linin
intervals.
16. American Journal of Anatomy, III, 1904.
17. Biological Bulletin, Aug. 1907.
18. Journal of Experimental Zoology, Vi, 1909.
19. Anatomischer Anzeiger, 1907.
20. American Naturalist, Aug. 1910.
21. Archiv fur Zellforschung, V, 1, 1910.
22. See Vols. of Archiv fur Zellforschung for 1908-1910.
66. Annals of Botany, 23:19-61, 1909.
174 MICHAEL F. GUYER
CHROMOSOMES AND HEREDITY.
There is an undeniable tendency at present to swing away from
the older extreme view which regards the nucleus, or more particu-
larly the chromosomes, as the exclusive mechanism of inheritance
to the view that looks upon the new individual as the resultant of
elaborate interactions of nucleus and cytoplasm, and which attributes
a monopoly of inheritance material to neither one nor the other.
There is also a manifest inclination to emphasize the importance of
quantitative factors in development. The field is too great to cover
here in any detail but general discussions will be found in recent
easily accessible papers of Morgan”*, Guyer**, and Conklin**.
Having in mind the alleged fact that offspring inherit equally
from each parent, various workers have laid stress upon the strik-
ing parity between the chromosomes of male and female pronuclei as
an incontrovertible indication of their preeminence as bearers of the
so-called hereditary characters. The validity of the assumption
that offspring inherit equally from each parent has, however, not
gone unchallenged. Guyer?® has cited adverse evidence and has
contended that there is in fact no justification for the assertion that
the entire quota of characters which go to make up a complete
organism are inherited from each parent equally. Indeed, many of
these characters—and these in general the most fundamental—are
such as are common to both parents and there is no way of measur-
ing how much comes from each parent. We know from the fact
of artificial parthenogenesis that an egg with a haploid number of
chromosomes has all the material necessary to build up a complete
organism but we have no such evidence for the male gamete. Look-
ing upon cytoplasm and chromosomes as responsive mechanism and
inciting agent respectively we can readily see how if one set of
chromosomes and the cytoplasm can cooperate to produce an organ-
ism, a second set of chromosomes could so assume or modify the
20. Loc. Cit.
23. Deficiencies of the Chromosome Theory of Heredity. Untversity of Cincin-
nati Studies, Sept. 1909. See also, Nucleus and Cytoplasm in Heredity, American Natu-
ralist (in press).
24. The Mechanism of Heredity. Science, Jan. 17, 1908.
25. Science, June 28, 1907.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 175
functions of the first as to share equally in the outcome. Such par-
ity, however, would be rather a question of equal inheritance of
the decisive factors of individual traits than of the entire organic
mechanism. The only measurable things that are contributed equally
in inheritance are the sexual and specific differences which top off
as it were the more fundamental features of the organism.
This writer is not alone in maintaining that there is a dis-
parity in the inheritance from male and female for in the follow-
ing year we find Conklin** remarking as follows: ‘In short the egg
cytoplasm fixes the type of development and the sperm and egg
nuclei supply only the details.” Again, “So far. as those charac-
teristics are concerned which appear late in development, it is highly
probable that there is equality of inheritance from both parents, but
in the early and main features of development, hereditary traits, as
well as material substance, are derived chiefly from the mother.”
From the foregoing it will be seen that while there is no con-
tention that the chromosomes are not of great importance in inheri-
tance, there is a protest against attributing inordinate importance to
them.
Apart from the apparent association between sexuality and the
“accessory” chromosome, and the visible evidence of chromosomal
individuality as shown by constancy in the relative sizes and shapes
of the individual chromosomes in the cells of certain species, there
are also indications of differences in the physiological behavior of
the separate chromosomes, each probably representing certain activi-
ties not evinced by the others. Boveri’s?® remarkable experiments
with dispermic eggs of the sea-urchin afford strong evidence to
this effect. In such eggs he found that the mitotic mechanism of
the first cleavage is usually atypical and the chromosomes are dis-
tributed in unequal numbers to the three or four blastomeres which
result from this cleavage. When such blastomeres were isolated,
while various ones developed to a greater or less extent, only those
developed normally which contained one full haploid set of chromo-
24. Science, Jan. 17, 1908.
26. Mehrpolige Mitosen als Mittel zur Analyse des Zellkerns. Vehr. d. Phys.
Med. Ges. zu Wurzburg, XXXV.
176 MICHAEL F. GUYER
somes. He concluded that for normal development to take place
one of each kind of chromosome must be present.
To cite but one more line of suggestive evidence regarding the
possible relations of individual chromosomes to heredity, attention
may be called to the work of Gates?? who has shown in his various
papers that the mutants of Oenothera Lamarckiana are character-
ized by differences of chromosomal content.
CHROMOSOMES AND MENDELISM.
In recent years considerable attention has been centered in the
chromosomes as the possible vehicles for the conveyance of those
factors which determine the Mendelian characters. Obviously, if
hereditary traits are represented in the chromosomes, then the
familiar reduction phenomena in which half the chromosomes are
set apart in one cell and half in another would supply exactly the
kind of mechanism that is necessary for such a separation of pairs
of parental characteristics as transpires in the Mendelian phenomena.
In 1900 evidence was published by Guyer?® showing that in
the spermatocytes of hybrids when the period for synapsis had
arrived, a peculiar chromosomal segregation manifested itself. The
chromosomes instead of pairing showed a decided tendency to
remain in two groups. This was interpreted as being due to an
incompatibility between the chromosomes of the maternal and pater-
nal species, the implication being that synapis, or pseudo-reduction
as it was then very generally called, in normal forms consisted in a
pairing of maternal with paternal chromosomes. The same investi-
gator*® had shown earlier that in hybrid doves there is a marked
tendency for individuals of the third generation to revert to grand-
parental forms (a phenomenon we recognize as Mendelian today).
Putting all these facts together it was pointed out how the behavior
of the chromosomes of hybrids afforded a possible explanation of
such returns.
Soon other and more direct evidence of the pairing of maternal
and paternal chromosomes during synapsis was forthcoming as the
27. See Bot. Gazette for 1907-08, and Science Jan. 31, 1908.
28. Science, Feb. 16, 1900.
29. Zoological Bulletin, II, No. 5, 1899.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 177
result of Montgomery’s*® and Sutton’s*! studies on non-hybrid
forms. Species were found in which the chromosomes differ among
themselves in size and appearance. Furthermore, the fact was soon
established that in early germ-cells the chromosomes exist in pairs,
one member of each pair being of paternal the other of maternal
origin, and that during synapsis it is the corresponding members
of a pair which unite. The ensuing reduction division simply brings
about their separation and segregation into different cells, each cell
receiving one full set of single chromosomes. Since any one pair of
chromosomes at the reduction phase presumably lines up for division
wholly by chance as to which member of the pair lies toward a
given pole of the spindle, the cells which result from the division
will in general contain some chomosomes of maternal and some
of paternal orogin.
In the mean time Guyer** had extended his observations to the
germ-cells of plants and expressed the view that “the extreme
variability seen in the offspring of fertile hybrids was possibly to be
attributed to this variability in chromatin distribution.” In a later
paper® which was an abridgement of an earlier (1900) thesis he
restated his views regarding the “separation of the paternal and
the maternal chromosomes which had fused during synapsis” and
it was pointed out how, in the case of fertile hybrids the chromo-
somes (assuming them to be the bearers of hereditary qualities)
would segregate at the reduction period and that as the result of
this separation at the subsequent period of fertilization “there are
four combinations possible, and two of the four would result in the
production of mixed offspring, while only one combination could
result in a return to one of the ancestral species.” In 1903 he**
correlated his conclusions with the so-called Mendelian principles,
which had had their renaissance in the mean time, pointing out
30. A Study of the Chromosomes of the Germ Cells of the Metazoa. Trans. Amer.
Phil. Soc. XX, 1901.
31. On the Morphology of the Chromosome Group in Brachystola magna. Biological
Bulletin, 1902.
32. Some Notes on Hybridism, Variation and Irregularities in the Division of the
Germ-cell. Science, Apr. 4, 1902.
33. Bulletin 21, University of Cincinnati. Nov. 1902.
34. Cincinnati Lancet-Clinic, May 9, 1903.
178 MICHAEL F. GUYER
that “where reversions follow the Mendelian law, the germinal
incompatibilities must be narrowed down to the qualities themselves
rather than confined to the respective germ-plasms as a whole.
These qualities must separate and each take up its abode in a
different germ-cell irrespective of whether the other qualities of
that particular germ-cell are of a different parentage or not.”
Meanwhile Cannon*® and Sutton®* came to the conclusion like-
wise that the mechanism of chromosome reduction affords a possible
explanation of Mendelian segregation if we assume that each
character which Mendelizes is carried by a particular chromosome.
This hypothesis was also supported by both Wilson and Boveri.
While these earlier papers are only the first approximations toward
present ideas regarding these matters, the historical development of
the situation is perhaps of some interest. One obvious objection
to the idea that each particular factor for the production
of a Mendalian character is confined to a single chromosome lies in
the possibility that the number of chromosomes is not as great
as the number of characters which Mendelize separately. If
we assume that the factors for a large number of characters
reside in the same chromosome, then on a theory of strict chromo-
somal individuality, we should have to suppose that the characters
in question must all Mendelize together, and we have not as yet
evidence to justify such a conclusion. We seem to be approaching
more or less closely at present the conception that each chromosome
affects to some extent the whole process of development and is not
merely an assemblage of “unit characters.” Various writers have
recently discussed the germinal basis of Mendelism from interesting
points of view and the student will do well to read papers of
Holmes?’, Spillman**, Gates*® and Morgan” in this connection.
35. Bull. Torrey Club, 1902; and ibid. 1903.
36. Biological Bulletin, 1903.
37. The Categories of Variation. American Naturalist, May, 1909.
38. Mendelian Phenomena without deVriesian Theory. Am. Nat. Apr. 1910.
39. The Material Basis of Mendelian Phenomena—Am. Nat. Apr. 1910.
205s lzoe., (Cit:
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 179
Tue Accessory CHROMOSOME AND SEX.
Nothing of a cytological nature has attracted more universal
attention during the last eight or nine years than the discoveries and
interpretations centering about a peculiar chromosome or chromo-
some-group variously designated as the ‘“‘accessory chromosome”
(McClung), ‘odd chromosome,” heterochromosome” or “mono-
some” (Montgomery ), the “heterotropic chromosome,” “idiochromo-
some,” and X-chromosome, (Wilson). This element so_ be-
haves in one of the maturation divisions of the spermatocytes
(in some forms in the first, in others in the second division)
that an asymmetrical distribution of the chromosomes follows,
resulting in the production of two equal classes of sperma-
tozoa: viz., those which contain the accessory, and those which
do not. © It is not always a simple element but, depend-
ing upon the species, there may be one, two, three, four or five
separate chromatic bodies. It has been clearly demonstrated in
insects at least that eggs fertilized by spermatozoa which possess
this accessory chromosome or chromosome-group develop into fe-
males, those fertilized by spermatozoa which do not possess it de-
velop into males. With this obvious association between a special
chromatic element and sexuality, interest has waxed exceedingly
keen in all researches bearing upon the problems involved.
Aside from the evidence of what the accessory chromosome
itself does or does not do, the great mass of facts brought together
in various other investigations points convincingly to the conclu-
sion that under normal conditions at least, sex is automatically
determined by physiological factors within the germ-cells and not
as a response of the developing organism to stimuli from without.
The reader must have clearly in mind the conditions which
prevail during maturation. In sexually produced organisms the
ordinary cells of the body and the primitive germ-cells have the
double or diploid group of chromosomes. The ultimate germ cells,
however, when ready for fertilization possess only a single or haploid
group, the double condition having been lost during the reduction
division. That is, apart from the accessory, which may be present
in one half of the male gametes, the mature germ-cell has only
180 MICHAEL F. GUYER
half as many chromosomes as the other cells of the body. The
diploid condition is restored of course at fertilization.
Historically, McClung*® writing in 1902 on the spermatogenesis
of certain Orthoptera was the first to announce and support the view
that the accessory chromosome is concerned in the determination of
sex. For although Henking*! in 1891, discovered a similar dimor-
phism of spermatozoa in Pyrrhocoris, a Hemipteran, and Paulmier*
did likewise in 1899 working on Anasa, apparently it did not occur
to either of these workers that the phenomenon was associable with
sex. The cases studied by all of these earlier investigators belonged
to the simplest type of accessory, namely, that in which, in one of
the maturation division periods, a particular chromosome instead of
dividing passes intact to one pole. As a result half of the sperma-
tozoa receive one more chromosome than the other half. McClung
regarded the accessory as “the bearer of those qualities which per-
tain to the male organism, primary among which is the faculty of
producing sex cells that have the form of spermatozoa.” Since the
maternal number of chromosomes was unknown to McClung and
the number in the male was odd instead of even, he considered
that the extra chromosome was an additional one and was male pro-
ducing. And in fact in the same year Sutton described in the
female of Brachystola twenty-two chromosomes, that is, one less
than in the male. Later studies however showed that Sutton was
mistaken in his count and that there is in reality one more chromo-
some in the female than in the male of Brachystola; viz. twenty-four.
In 1905-06 the studies of Stevens*® and Wilson** on various
species of insects showed that it was not uncommon for the acces-
sory chromosome to possess a mate usually much smaller than itself.
These two chromosomes come into close contact during synapsis
and in the ensuing division diverge to opposite poles so that while
the resulting spermatozoa have the same number of chromosomes,
there is still a dimorphism, since half of them have received the
40. Biological Bulletin, III, 1902.
41. Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Zoologie, 1891.
42. Journal of Morphology, XV, suppl. 1899.
43. See the series of papers by these authors in the Journal of Experimental
Zoology.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 181
larger and half the smaller member of this asymmetrical pair.
Wilson at first called them the large and the small idiochromosomes
but in recent papers designates them as the X and Y elements.
He believes it very probable that, the first type, in which there
is only the accessory or X-element, has arisen by the gradual disap-
pearance of the Y-element, for in different species various gradua-
tions are found between those in which the Y-element is almost or
quite as large as the X-element to those in which it is very minute.
In such forms as Nezara and Oncopeltus the two elements, X and Y,
are of the same size. and on the basis of this fact Wilson suggests
the possibility that there may be many other forms which possess
X and Y chromosomes but in an indistinguishable condition because
they are not visibly different from the other chromosomes.
Still further complications arise from the fact that the X-ele-
ment in some species is double in others triple in still others quad-
ruple and in one form (Acholla) possibly quintuple. The multiple
element, however, in every case behaves as a single X-element, pair-
ing at the reduction period with the single Y-chromosome when
such exists, and passing intact as a group to one pole while the
simple Y-element passes to the other. Payne*t regards such com-
pound elements as components of what was originally a single large
chromosome.
In late years numerous discoveries of similar facts have been
made by a rapidly increasing number of workers until now this
dimorphic condition of spermatozoa is known to be of much wider
prevalence than was suspected by the earlier workers who confined
their studies to insects. Among invertebrates the X-element in
varying degrees of structural complexity has been recorded from
diverse groups of insects (McClung, Sutton, Stevens, Wilson,
Montgomery, Gross, Lefevre, McGill, Dederer, Davis, Gutherz,
Nowlin, Boring, Jordan, Morrill, Payne, Morgan, von Baehr, Morse,
Randolph, Nichols, Cooke, Browne), myriapods (Blackmann,
Medes), arachnids (Wallace, Berry), and nematodes (Boring, Bo-
veri, Gulick, Edwards). In echinoderms (Baltzer) an interesting
reversal of conditions has been found in that the eggs instead of
44. For a discussion of such cases in Insecta see Payne’s paper; Biological Bulletin,
ISS Vilage ke
182 MICHAEL F. GUYER
the sperm possess the odd element and show the characteristic di-
morphism.
Recently the field has been extended to the vertebrates, X-ele-
ments having been recorded from such diverse forms as the guinea,
chicken, rat and man (Guyer**) the armadillo (Newman and Pat-
terson*®) the opossum (Jordan*’), and the guinea-pig (Stevens**).
Since the X-element may or may not be associated with a Y-
element, the existence of the latter seems to be a wholly capricious
one, at least as far as sex production is concerned, and for the sake
of simplicity its presence has been ignored in most discussions. So
far absolutely no hint as to its significance has come to light.
The conclusion that sex-production is based on chromosomal
dimorphism of the spermatozoa involves the assumption that the
mature eggs are all alike as regards their chromatin content. The
condition of the eggs in this respect has not been widely investi-
gated as yet but in a number of cases it is known that after the
reduction division the eggs do all contain chromosomes similar in
appearance and number. Moreover, before reduction, the odgonia
of these individuals always have an even number of chromosomes,
the unpaired chromosome which makes the number odd in the
male being here represented by two chromosomes of equal size.
A corresponding difference in number and appearance also exists
between the somatic cells of the male and female.
This fact has been definitely established in phylloxerans (Mor-
gan), aphids (Stevens, von Baehr, Morgan), the nematode Heter-
akis (Boveri, Gulick), and in several coreid Hemiptera (Morrill**).
Morrill has found that the female pronuclei are not dimorphic
in the four species he studied and that in each species the female
pronucleus contains a group of chromosomes similar to those of
the X-bearing spermatozoa of that species. He concludes as fol-
45. Anatomischer Anzeiger, XXXIV, 20-21, 22-28, 1909. Biological Bulletin, XIX,
4; Sept. 1910.
46. Journal of Morphology, XXI, 3.
47. Science, March 10, 1911.
48. Biological Bulletin, Jan. 1911.
49. For a discussion and bibliography see Morrill’s paper in the Biological Bulletin,
XIX, July, 1910.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 183
lows: “In the cleavage and early blastodern nuclei of Archimerus,
Anasa, Chelinidea and Protenor, the chromosomes are perfectly dis-
tinct and can be counted as readily as those of the gonads. Two
types of embryos are found, one having an odd and the other an
even number of chromosomes, these numbers being respectively the
same as occur in the spermatogonia and odgonia. Accordingly it
seems fair to conclude that the former are males, the latter females,
and it thus becomes possible to distinguish the sex of an embryo by
counting its chromosomes.”
A formidable difficulty seemed at one time to present itself
in the case of phylloxerans and aphids where females only are
produced from fertilized eggs. If, it was argued, there are two
classes of spermatozoa, male-producing and female-producing, why
are not both males and females produced when the eggs of these
forms have been fertilized? The remarkable’ discovery was made,
however, by Morgan in Phylloxera and independently by von Baehr
in Aphis, that while half the spermatocytes do receive the X-element
(single in Aphis, double in Phylloxera), and half do not, the latter
abort and never come to maturity. Thus only the X-class, or “fe-
male-producing” spermatozoa ever become functional. On the other
hand, both males and females develop from parthenogenetic eggs.
The interesting discovery was made both by Morgan and von Baehr
that the males have the characteristic lesser number of chromosomes,
the female the increased number. But how is this dimorphism pro-
duced, since it is well known that such parthenogenetic eggs form
but one polar body and have no reducing division? Morgan’s
work makes it practically certain that the difference in chromosome
number is brought about at the time of the extrusion of the single
polar body, half the eggs retaining one more chromosome than the
other half. Here, then, in these parthenogenetic forms, is an ex-
ample of sex-production, in which presumably something in the
egg itself, not fertilization, is the determining factor of sex. Even
before the extrusion of the polar body, indeed, the male producing
egg is distinguishable by its smaller size.
But granting that the accessory chromosome or chromosome-
group when it exists is always associated with sex-differentiation, the
184 MICHAEL F, GUYER
important query arises as to just what the relationship is between
the two. This problem is a very intricate one and has led to such
extensive discussions and subtelties o fdistinction that a resumé
brief as that necessitated by the limits of the present review must
be inadequate. Fortunately the reviewer can feel himself absolved
somewhat in this respect because of recent excellent critiques cov-
ering this entire field. By reading certain papers of Wilson®®, Mor-
gan°*', Montgomery®? and Stevens** published during the past two
years the general student can soon bring himself practically up to
date on the questions at issue.
As to what the X-element really signifies in connection with
sex at least four possibilities have been suggested: namely, (1) that
it is an actual qualitative sex-determinant; (2) that sex is deter-
mined by purely quantitative conditions of the chromatin; (3) that
the X-element is merely sex-accompanying and not sex-producing ;
(4) that sex is the resultant of several essential factors and is not
established unless all work together, the X-element being the decisive
factor.
The assumption that the X-element is an actual sex-determi-
nant operating qualitatively is at first sight the simplest explanation
but in reality it involves various complications of which we have
no evidence; such, for example, as selective fertilization. For we
have seen that eggs which are fertilized by spermatozoa carrying
the X-element always develop into females, those fertilized by sperm-
atoza of the other class always producing males. This leaves
us in the predicament of having to account for the origin of the
new X-element of these males. Obviously it must come from the
egg, and this being true, then the two egg chromosomes which before
50. a. Recent Researches on the Determination and Heredity of Sex. Science
Jan. 8, 1909.
b. The Chromosomes in Relation to the Determination of Sex. Science
Progress, Apr. 1910.
51. a. A Biological and Cytological Study of Sex Determination in Phylloxerans
and Aphids. Journal of Experimental Zoology, VII, 2; 1910.
b. Chromosomes and Heredity. American Naturalist, Aug. 1910.
52. Are Particular Chromosomes Sex Determinants? Biological Bulletin XIX, June
1910. (In connection with this read also a note by Wilson in Science, Aug. 19, 1910).
53. Further Studies on Heterochromosomes in Mosquitos. Biological Bulletin,
XX, 2; Jan. 1911.
= P ™ »
a
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 185
the reduction division correspond to the odd chromosome of the
male, must be different one from another. Hence, inasmuch as
they separate at reduction, there must be two classes of eggs, one
class containing a male determinant and one a female determinant. :
The one containing the male determinant would always have to be
selected by the sperm without the X-element, since only that combi-
nation can give rise toa male. Eggs containing the female determi-
nant would have to be fertilized by the sperm carrying the X-ele-
ment (which we have just seen must be the male determiner since
it originally determined the male from which it is derived). Hence
we are forced to the further assumption that in the egg so fertilized,
there is a female determinant native to the egg and a male determi-
nant brought in by the sperm, and that the former is dominant to
the latter, producing a female individual.
As to an explanation based on the purely quantitative relations
of the chromatin, in the majority of cases a female does develop
from those eggs which have received the most chromatin (1. e. the
accessory, or the larger X-element where X and Y-elements are
present) but unfortunately for this theory there are cases known
in which the Y-element is of greater mass than the X-element, yet
nevertheless eggs receiving the X-element develop into females.
If we accept the third possibility, that the X-element is merely
sex-accompanying, we still have thrown upon us the burden of de-
termining what its function is if it is not sex-determination. Miss
Stevens®** makes the suggestion that the differentiation of an X-ele-
ment or of unequal X and Y-elements, “may be directly related
to sex-limited inheritance of certain characters,” the idea being
apparently that sex itself is not necessarily determined by the
X-element but that certain characters which go with it are.
As to the fourth possibility, the fact that in certain partheno-
genetic forms the sex of the forthcoming offspring can be foretold
from the size of the egg before the X-element has become set apart
shows that in these cases at least, the X-element is not the only
factor concerned in sex-production, although it may be the decisive
factor.
186 MICHAEL F. GUYER
Professor Wilson®® has recently expressed an inclination to
accept a modified quantitative conception as the more intelligible
view as far as dioecious organisms are concerned. He states as
a plausible tentative hypothesis the view that “the presence of one
X-element means per se the male condition, while the addition of
a second element of the same kind produces the female condition.”
It is to be noted that the idea of quantity here is restricted to a
particular kind of chromatin, viz. that of the X-element, and is
not a mere question of the presence of a greater total amount of
chromatin. In cases such as the sea-urchin where seemingly the
egg instead of the sperm bears the X-element, the matter might
be explained upon a similar quantitative basis by inferring that the
female condition is determined by the presence of one X-element,
the male condition by the total absence of an X-element. This
second inference is not at all out of harmony with some known
facts of Mendelian inheritance. For in crossing certain horned
and hornless breeds of sheep, if we represent the horn-determining
factor by H, then for the female to have horns the factor must
be present in the duplex (HH) condition, the simplex condition
(H) leaving her hornless. However, the presence of the simplex
condition in the male results in the presence of horns, the total
absence of H being required for hornlessness.
THE Dynamics OF CELL DiIvIsIon.
The various processes concerned in cell division continue to
bring forth an unending series of new facts and new interpreta-
tions. There seem to be almost as many divergent views and shades
of opinion as there are separate workers on these problems. It
is evident that while the division of the nucleus and of the cyto-
plasm are usually closely interrelated, they are really two distinct
phenomena inasmuch as either mitosis or amitosis may occur with-
out subsequent division of the cytoplasm, and on the other hand,
as shown by McClendon** who succeeded in securing segmenta-
Bosenlaoes cits
50. Loc. ‘Cit.
54. Arch. f. Entwicklungsmechanik, XXVI, 4, 1908.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 187
tion of Echinoid eggs deprived of chromatin, repeated cytoplasmic
division may take place without the presence of the nucleus.
Because of the multiplicity of interpretations the only pro-
cedure open to the reviewer seems to be to cite a few representa-
tive papers in which discussions and bibliographies may be found.
The tendency in explaining mitosis has been to get away
from the original idea of contracts or pushing fibers and to seek
light along the lines of electro-static displacement (Gallardo, Lillie),
osmotic currents (Leduc), or osmotic diffusion (Butschli, Rhum-
bler). Some workers have confined their attention to the division
of the cytoplasm, particularly in early cleavage (R. S. Lillie®®, Rob-
ertson®®, McClendon, etc.), while others have had in mind more
the nuclear phenomena or some special phase of it such as the
nature of the spindle (e. g. F. R. Lillie’’, Morgan®®, and Spoon-
er®). Loeb’s!? address delivered at the International Zoological
Congress at Boston in 1907, contains much matter which bears on
the problems of cell division.
AMITOSIS.
During the last few years it has become evident that amitosis is
a much more common method of division than was formerly sup-
posed, and it has been shown, furthermore, that mitosis may fre-
quently follow it even in the germ cells. Child®t has perhaps made
the most extensive studies of amitosis in recent times. He reports
its occurrence in representatives of six different phyla of the animal
kingdom. A very recent review and discussion of the literature
of amitosis will be found in a paper by Richards*. He is not in
agreement with Child as regards Moniezia. Wieman* also con-
55. Biological Bulletin XVII, 1909.
56. Archiv fur Entwicklungsmechanik, XXVII, 1909.
7. American Journal of Physiology, XXVII, 1910.
58. Science, June 12, 1908. Also Biological Bulletin, 1909.
59. Journal of Experimental Zoology, Nov. 1910.
60. Journal of Experimental Zoology, Jan. 1911.
idcocs Gt.
61. See his series of studies in the Biological Bulletin for 1907, and also the Ana-
tomischer Anzeiger for 1904 and 1907.
62. Biological Bulletin, Feb., 1911.
63. Journal of Morphology. Vol. 21, No. 2, 1910.
188 MICHAEL F. GUYER
tributes some new facts and offers some interesting suggestions
in a late paper. He suggests that variation in the normal oxygen
supply may be responsible for amitosis. To quote him directly:
“The occurrence of amitosis at corresponding stages in the germ
cells of both sexes is believed to be due to a periodic fluctuation
in the nutritive supply of the cells brought about by a stimulus to
a rapid cell division which causes a temporary derangement in the
normal metabolism. In the ovary the disturbance is merely tran-
sient; but in the testis it is more prolonged for the reason appar-
ently that it is here involved in the formation of cysts, a process
that in the species under consideration is always accompanied by
rapid cell multiplication.
“In the nurse cells the initial cause of amitosis is probably the
same; but in this instance it is carried to an extreme, so that a
permanent change in metabolism occurs.
““Amitosis and mitosis are believed to stand for the extremes of
a continuous series; the different configurations of the division
figures being due to the different types of metabolism represented.”
Nemiloff has indicated two localities in which the student will
find readily observable amitotic divisions; namely, the layer of
lymphoid tissue of the amphibian liver, and the large superficial
cells of the transitional epithelium in the bladder of mammals. In
the case of the amphibian liver, however, the condition seems to be
a rather complicated one. First a depression forms in the side
of the spherical nucleus and continues to deepen until the nucleus
is completely perforated and exists in the form of a ring which
later fragments into two or more daughter nuclei. A centrosome
and attraction sphere are frequently observable but the part they
play in the division is not clearly understood.
In plants we find processes of amitosis paralleling those of ani-
mals. Griggs**, for instance, in his paper on “Some Aspects of
Amitosis in Synchytrium” reports that at certain periods direct
divisions of the nucleus are of more frequent occurrence than in-
direct divisions. He recognizes at least two different types of ami-
tosis: ‘‘(1) The karyosome of the parent nucleus gives off a small
64. Botanical Gazette, Feb. 1909.
PROGRESS IN CYTOLOGY 189
karyosome which migrates through the nuclear membrane, forms
a vacuole and a membrane about itself, and becomes an inde-
pendant small nucleus, the whole looking like a budding yeast plant.
This process is repeated until the parent nucleus is converted into
small nuclei, often forming a definite group. (2) The membrane
of the parent nucleus dissolves, and the karysome fragments into
a number of pieces, each of which becomes a new nucleus, thus
giving rise to a morula-like cluster of nuclei.
“These nuclei at later stages undergo mitosis and their’ de-
scendants form spores and become the nuclei of succeeding genera-
tions.”
INTRACELLULAR CANALS.
In a recent paper Bensley® gives an interesting discussion of
the canalicular apparatus of animal cells. Ever since Golgi in 1898
discovered what he believed to be an internal reticular structure in
nerve cells investigators have been much interested in more or less
similar appearing structures in many other kinds of cells. It seems
not improbable that they may be shown to be of universal occur-
rence in animal cells. Some investigators have maintained that they
are a real network, others, and chief among them Holmgren, that
they are a series of tubular “juice” canals. Bensley has extended
these studies to plant cells (Root-tips of Allium, Lilium, and Iris,
and the tapetum of the lily) and after a careful study of the living
as well as the fixed material he concludes that, in these plants, the
true condition during life of this seeming network is that of a
canalicular system, the familiar post-mortem vacuolated condition
being of secondary origin. Since the corresponding system in the
animal cell behaves similarly when treated by the same methods he
believes himself justified in stating as a working hypothesis “‘that the
network of canals found in many animal cells is the physiologic and
morphologic equivalent of the vacuolar system of the plant cell.”
According to Retzius and others the system in animals represents a
series of intracellular nutritive or drainage canals which are directly
related with the lymphatic system.
65. On the Nature of the Canalicular Apparatus of Animal Cells. Biological Bulle-
tin, XIX, Aug. 1910.
iiele) MICHAEL F. GUYER
As this review has already far transgressed the limits set upon
it by the editor, the reviewer reluctantly turns his face from the
numerous important topics which he had hoped to touch upon but
must now dismiss. Bearing in mind the fact that the paper is more for
the general student than for the specialist the writer has confined his
references as much as possible to general articles and particularly
to such as are written in English. Some phases of the work may
seem to the reader to have been unduely emphasized to the exclu-
sion of more strictly cytological problems. This has been done
intentionally, however, because it was felt that a digest of this
newer and less familiar field, in which the literature is scattered
and is for the most part highly technical, would be more welcome
and of greater use to the general biological reader than a resume of
the more familiar and conventional cytological problems. For in
the uncertain realm of biology one certainty stands forth conspicu-
ously ; namely, that the biologist of the future who expects to deal
with the dynamics of the living cell must be versed in colloidal
phenomena and other physico-chemical lore.
oe
DEPARTMENT OF NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
It is the purpose, in this department, to present from time to time brief original
notes, both of methods of work and of results, by members of the Society. All members
are invited to submit such items. In the absence of these there will be given a few brief
abstracts of recent work of more general interest to students and teachers. There will be
no attempt to make these abstracts exhaustive. They will illustrate progress without at-
tempting to define it, and will thus give to the teacher current illustrations, and to the
isolated student suggestions of suitable fields of investigation.—[Editor. ]
MESOSTOMUM EHRENBERGII
The specimen in question was found in one of the fresh-water
aquaria in the Zoological Laboratory. The water in which the
animal was discovered (January 6th) was obtained during October
of the previous fall from a series of spring-fed pools at Spring
Grove Cemetery, and constituted the water of a balanced aquarium.
The individual, easily examined under the low power (87
diam.) of the microscope, appears to be something entirely new
in this locality and as far as can be found has not been recorded
for this country at all. The general structure is quite similar to
that shown in a diagrammatic sketch of Mesostomum ehrenbergu
(Cerst) given by Leuckart in his Zoologische Mandtafeln, XXVIII;
furthermore, in the specific details of the nervous and reproductive
systems it corresponds with this same form as described by Graff
(quoted by Ed. Perrier in his “Traité de Zoologie”). Since but
one specimen has been found, the writer has refrained from drawing
any conclusions regarding the exact systematic position of the
form, but will describe it rather fully in the hope that the report
may lead to the discovery of other specimens.*
The worm (Fig. 1) is irregularly oval, flattened dorso-ventrally
and measures six mm. long by four mm. wide. The head end is
well marked off as a fairly pointed lobe (Fig. 1, h.) which is usually
extended and which continually feels about in a characteristic test-
ing manner.
To the naked eye the body appears somewhat yellowish in
color, but under the microscope the entire ground substance is
colorless and perfectly translucent. Throughout the dermal layers,
however, are numerous granules (Fig. 1, g.) of yellowish color,
*The writer would be greatly indebted to anyone who might be able
to offer him any information either regarding literature on the form here
described or as to where he can obtain more material.
192 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
Fig. 1
which, together with scattered spherules (Fig. 1, s.) of larger size
and brownish color, give the animal the yellowish appearance men-
tioned above. Besides these, there are also scattered throughout
the outer layers great numbers of fine rod-like structures which are
very similar to the rhabditi of Planarians. As seen on the dorsal
surface, these rods appear like little irregular projecting spines,
while along the margins they are close set and perpendicular to
the surface, giving to this region a striated appearance (Fig. 1, st.).
Occasionally distinct longitudinal markings can be observed
which represent a part of the muscular system.
The entire margin of the body, as well as the ventral suittace
is covered with a dense layer of cilia, of which those about the
head are markedly longer than the others. The animal appears to
use these cilia somewhat in locomotion, but for the most part move-
ment from place to place is the result of vigorous muscular con-
traction which results in a sort of undulatory progressive motion.
Slightly anterior to the middle of the body on the ventral sur-
face is a large sucker-like structure. Careful manipulation of the
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 193
microscope discloses only the fact that the outer part of this organ
is very muscular and the inner central area is in all probability a
definite mouth opening (Fig. 1, m.). Leading back from this mouth
cavity is a narrow rod-like digestive tract (Fig. 1, d.) such as is
characteristic of Rhabodocoelida. It extends nearly to the posterior
end of the body and shows no signs of lateral branches.
Near the median line of the body and just back of the head-
lobe is a well-defined brain (Fig. 1, b.). It is typically two-lobed.
Leading out from its anterior and lateral surfaces are numerous
clearly visible fibres which are distributed to the body wall of the
head region. Besides these general fibers there may also be seen
two clumps of nerves which go directly to the anterior tip of the
tactile head-lobe. Passing posteriorly from the two brain lobes
are the two main nerve trunks (Fig. 1, n.). They are visible for
some distance and give off numerous branches toward the periphery.
Resting directly above the brain are the eyes (Fig. I, e.), which
appear as two large irregular black pigment spots.
The most visible feature about the worm when it was first
found was the large mass of almost black ova (Fig. 1, 0.) arranged
in two irregularly parallel rows, one on either side of the digestive
system and extending over considerably more than the middle half
of the body. These ova were of large size, regularly oval, and
entirely opaque. They were eighteen in number (nine on a side)
when the animal was found, but soon all but one were shed. This.
one was retained within the body for a considerable length of time.
Other parts of the reproductive system were also visible, namely :
(1) an ovary (Fig. 1, ov.) directly in front of the mouth; (2) long
branching yolk glands, and (3) testes. The two latter showed but
slightly until after the eggs were shed.
The two well-defined flame cells could be recognized in the
tail region, one being just back of the hindermost ovum on each side.
LEON Di PEASERE:
University of Cincinnati.
CELLULAR ACTIVITIES CONNECTED WITH SHEDDING OF LEAVES
Lee (Annals of Botany, January, 1911) gives the results of
studies upon nearly fifty species of common Dicotyledons in respect
194 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
to the cellular changes accompanying and causing the fall of leaves.
As has long been known, there are two distinct processes involved:
(a) that connected with the separation of the leaf from the stem,
and (b) that of protecting the exposed surface. In Dicotyledons a
separation-layer is formed, and the leaf separates from the stem by
the disappearance of the middle lamellae of the cells of the separa-
tion-layer and the breaking of the seive tubes and vessels of the
leaf-trace at that level.
The protective-layer, which is always formed, may be formed
either before or after the leaf-fall. This layer is produced in two
principal ways: (a) by the deposit of lignin and suberin in the
walls of the cells of the leaf-base, either without any special
division of the cells. or with only irregular divisions; and (b) by
cells produced thru continued division of a regular cambiun, and
later becoming ligno-suberized. The author indicates that these
microscopic cellular differences have no relation, according to his
studies, to the systematic position of the plants.
In the study of the premature fall of leaves, which in some
plants followed the sharp cold of the late spring of Ig1o, the
present reviewer found evidence that some plants were thus stim-
ulated into the production of the separation-layer similar to that
found in normal defoliation.
THE HERBACEOUS ARRANGEMENT OF ELEMENTS DERIVED FROM THAT
OF THE WOODY TYPE
There has long been a general feeling among botanists that the
continuous woody ring found in trees and shrubs represents a
development from the herbaceous type, in which these bundles of
elements are separated by wide spaces of parenchymatous tissue.
It has been conceived that the isolated bundles have been fused
into a continuous ring by the development of cambium across the
broad medullary rays, and that in this way the bast and woody
elements have increased at the expense of the rays.
Eames (Ann. Bot., January, I91I,) gives cogent reasons for
believing that the ring type is the more primitive of the two arrange-
ments and that the scattered bundles of the herbaceous type are
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 195
derived thru a dissection of this primitive ring by invasions of the
parenchyma and by reduction of the bundle elements. He draws
his proofs both from the known palaeontological types and from
the development of some present-day herbaceous forms. He be-
lieves, therefore, that the exogenous herbs are of more modern
development than the woody plants.
THE GROWTH OF SOMATIC CELLS WITHOUT THE BODY
M. T. Burrows (Jour. Exp. Zool., January, 1911; C. R., Soc.
Biol. Paris, 1910,) continues the work of Harrison in cultivating
dissociated cells of metazoa in coagulable lymph. He has suc-
ceeded in securing the growth of isolated tissues of chick embryos,
and verified for the chick essentially what Harrison demonstrated
for the tadpole—that nerve fibres grow directly from the nerve
cells independently of the surrounding formations. Burrows was
able to apply histological tests to the fibres. The fibres grow by the
extension and retraction of the characteristic ameboid swellings
that terminate them. The technic is complicated by the fact that
the chick is warm-blooded.
In a similar way even adult tissues were made to grow success-
fully. The following tissues from dogs and cats grew under
artificial conditions, both as to the specific differential cells of the
organs and the connective tissue cells associated: the conjunctiva
and the vascular and peritoneal endothelum; the lymphatic, thyroid
and supra-renal glands ; the spleen, the kidneys, the ovaries ; cartilage
and bone marrow.
It is worthy of note that such cultures only present cell growths ;
there seems to be no tendency for the cells to group themselves
into their characteristic tissue forms.
ORIGIN OF ELEMENTS OF SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
Kuntz (Jour. Comp. Neur., 1910,) discusses the origin and
development of the sympathetic nervous system in birds and mam-
mals. He concludes that the sympathetic system is homologous
with the other functional divisions of the nervous system, has
196 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
arisen later in evolution, and in embryogenesis arises primarily by
the migration of nervous elements from the cerebro-spinal system.
These migrations of cells take place along the spinal nerves and
the vagi. He looks upon the cells that migrate from the cerebro-
spinal ganglia and from the neural tube as being homologous with
those that give rise to the neuroglia and to the neurones of the
central nervous system.
REGENERATION AND CELL DIVISION
Calkins (Jour. Exp. Zool., February, 1911,) gives an interesting
account of regeneration in a large protozoan, Uronychia, especially
as related to its normal cell divisions. It divides once in about
thirty-six hours. He concludes that there is little or no power of
regeneration immediately after division before the nucleus returns
to its normal resting distribution. Even after six to twenty-four
hours have elapsed the power of regeneration is limited, parts re-
generating only when the micro-nucleus and a part of the macro-
nucleus are both present.
On the contrary, during the whole dividing period the re-
generative power is high. At this time both segments may re-
generate, even without the micro-nucleus, tho the relation of the
plane of the section to the plane of the oncoming division has some
determinative effect upon the result. The cutting operation retards
the cell-division, but the division continues in the original plane.
RED BLOOD CELLS
Roscoe W. King (Jour. Med. Research, January, 1g11,) be-
lieves that he has conclusive evidence in support of the view that
red blood cells of the circulating blood are derived from the erythro-
blasts of the capillaries of the red marrow by a process of intra-
cellular nuclear degeneration. He has been able to demonstrate
the remains of nuclear matter quite generally in the blood cells of
normal blood. He also believes that blood platelets are extruded
fragments of erythrocytic nuclei.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 197
1O DEMONSTRATE SPIROCHAETA PALLIDA
Lenartowics’ Method:
1. Expose perfectly clean slide 5 seconds to the vapor of
1%4-2% osmic acid.
2. Cover this slide with a smear of the suspected material.
3. Fix at once in osmic vapor for not more than ten to twenty
seconds.
4. When dry stain % to 1 min. in Ziehl-Neelson carbol-fuchsin
tubercle stain.
5. Wash in water, dry, and examine with oil-immersion.
The ground is stained red and Spirochaeta pallida appears un-
stained.
THE STUDY OF ROTIFERS
Hirschfelder (Zeitschr. Wiss. Zool. 1910, p. 211,) gives the
following suggestion to students of Rotifers:
Living:
Place the animal in a drop of 1:50000 neutral red solution; sup-
port cover-glass with wax-feet; press the cover suffi-
ciently to hold without damaging the rotifer.
Dead:
1. Narcotize until completely extended by placing animals in
1.5 c. c. of water and adding 2 or 3 drops of Rousselet’s
cocaine mixture (2% cocaine hydrochloride 3 parts;
90% alcohol 1 part; water 6 parts). Let this act about
one guarter hour, without agitating the material.
2. Apply a drop of 1% osmic acid. Let this act about ten
minutes.
Transfer to distilled water for five minutes.
4. Transfer to 2% formalin.
va
A PAPER RIBBON-CARRIER.
A simpler and much more convenient ribbon-carrier than those
furnished with rotary microtomes has proven very useful in this
laboratory. Instead of an endless band for carrying the paraffin
ribbon, a roll of narrow cash-register paper is used. When a ribbon
198 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
is complete or reaches an inconvenient length, the paper carrying it
is cut from the roll and may be carried about or stored without dis-
turbing the ribbon on it. The apparatus may be pushed from the
microtome (while the paraffin block is being adjusted) without injur-
ing the ribbon already cut.
Ce
Legend: B, board; C, paper-clamp; K, knife; M, metal “U;” R, paper.
The thin board, about 15x30 cm., and the rod on which the roll
of paper revolves, are clamped to a ringstand set on the table. On
the upper end of the board is slipped a tight-fitting “U,’’ made from
a strip of sheet-metal 5 cm. wide, which extends between the two
uprights of the knife clamp. The end of the paper is brought up
around the curve of this ‘““U” and weighted with a paper clamp.
When the ribbon reaches the end of the board it may be extended on
the table. _—LABORATORY NEBRASKA WESLEYAN UNIVERSITY.
SAFETY-RAZOR MICROTOME BLADES
B. H. Bentley (Ann. Bot., January, 1911) recommends the
use of the Gillette safety razor blades in microtome work. By the use
of suitable steel supports he builds up a composite blade which has
the merit of such great cheapness that it can be discarded and re-
placed by another when dulled. They are therefore to be specially
recommended when large classes are to be taught the use of the
microtome, or where hard and gritty objects are to be sectioned.
It is claimed that the results obtained compare favorably with
those obtained by the use of regular blades.
# seg =
FREDERICK W. KUHNE
NECROLOGY
FREDERICK W. KUHNE.
Frederick W. Kuhne, a pioneer citizen of Fort Wayne, Indiana,
and a pioneer member of the American Microscopical Society, died
April 11, 1908, at the age of 77 years.
Mr. Kuhne was born in Germany, attended ‘“Schul Forte’ near
the old university town of Jena, and later embarked in mercantile
business in his homeland. In 1856, in company with his brother-in-
law and life-long friend, Rudolph Siemon, whose death was recorded
in the Transactions a few years ago, he came to Fort Wayne, and
finally established an abstract office, the first in the city. He be-
came a member of this society in 1879, and was a regular attendant
at its meetings. He was also a member of the A. A.A. S.
Although always actively engaged in business, Mr. Kuhne
retained his interest in scientific work throughout his life. He was
a charter member and leading spirit in a local microscopical society.
He was particularly interested in the study of diatoms. Beside
microscopy, his scientific interests included astronomy, mathematics,
and chess, and by his enthusiasm and example he succeeded in inter-
esting and stimulating others in his favorite studies. He was in
every way a most valuable citizen and furnished an excellent illus-
tration of what is possible to a man, even though actively engaged
in business, in following useful and elevating hobbies and in
cultivating intellectual interests.
He is survived by his wife and their three sons.
Tai PLANO RRR Tn sr rpms
‘ea bie Sota CR be
Proceedings of the American Microscopical Society
MINUTES OF THE MINNEAPOLIS MEETING.
The Society was called to order by President Osborn at 2:30 Tuesday
afternoon, December 27, I9I0.
The Executive Committee reported that on Feb. 14, 1910, Dr. F. C.
Zapffe tendered his resignation as secretary, and that on March 22, 1910,
Mr. D. L. Zook offered his resignation as treasurer. After correspondence
with the Executive Committee, ballots were mailed June 1, and a vote was
taken on the appointment of Professor T. W. Galloway as secretary and
Professor T. L. Hankinson as treasurer. The vote of the Executive Com-
mittee was unanimously in favor of the selection of these gentlemen, so that
on June 9, 1910, they were officially notified to begin their duties, and Messrs.
Zapffe and Zook were notified to transfer the books and properties of their
respective offices.
The President’s address was then read on the subject, “Concerning the
Scope and Future Work of the American Microscopical Society.”
At the close of the address a discussion was participated in by the fol-
lowing :—Professors R. H. Wolcott, Bessey, Eigenmann, Elrod, Neal, ‘and
Barker.
An informal report from the Secretary was read and the discussion
closed.
The financial report of the Treasurer was read and referred to an
auditing committee consisting of Messrs. Galloway, Hankinson and Ward,
with instructions to examine the books and vouchers and to print their find-
ings in connection with the financial summary in the quarterly publication
of the Society. The report of the Custodian of the Spencer-Tolles fund was
referred to the same committee for similar action.
WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 28, 1910, 9:30 A. M.
The meeting was called to order by President Osborn and the following
papers presented:
“Transmission of Trypanosoma lewisi by the Rat-flea” (Illustrated) ....
_ oh eT Pe eae ena pe ee es Ud Leroy D. Swingle
“Abnormalities Observed in Proteocephalus’ (Illustrated) ..George R. Larue
“Echinorhynchus moniliformis in America, and a Revision of the Echi-
DSRNGINE EET eS Swe a Sra) See vealed ore econ Ree ete Henry B. Ward.
202 MINUTES
“Odontosyllis enopla Verrill, a Phosphorescent Polychete from the Ber-
MUGass a ulustrated) eas eee eee T. W. Galloway and Paul Welch.
A nominating committee consisting of the President and Messrs. Eigen-
mann, Elrod, Swingle and Ward was appointed to prepare and present a list
of officers for the ensuing year.
The Executive Committee reported the recommendation that since the
volume for 1909 was not concluded until December 1910, the Treasurer be
authorized to remit dues for 1910 to all making proper payment for 1900.
On motion, the recommendation was adopted and the Treasurer duly
instructed. r
1:30 P. M.
The nominating committee reported the following list of officers:
A. E. Hertzler; Vice-president—M. J. Elrod; Secretary—T.
W. Galloway, term to conclude in 1913; Treasurer—T. L. Hankinson, term to
conclude in 1912; Custodian—Magnus Pflaum, term to conclude in I9I1;
Delegates to the A. A. A. S—T. W. Galloway, C. H. Eigenmann; Executive
Committee—Elective Members: R. H. Wolcott, Lincoln, Neb.; L. B. Walton,
Gambrer, Ohio; H. N. Ott, Buffalo, N. Y.
Upon motion, the persons nominated were unanimously elected.
The Executive Committee reported the following amendment to the
Constitution, and recommended that, in accordance with regular procedure,
it lie over for one year :—
To amend Constitution, Article VII. by adding: “Provided, however,
that nothing in this Constitution shall prevent the Executive Committee at
any regular meeting from transferring the Spencer-Tolles Fund to a uni-
versity or other incorporated institution for original research, under such
conditions as shall safeguard the permanence of the Fund and its application
to the general purpose for which it was intended.” (Note 1.)
The Secretary was authorized to print in the quarterly publication this
amendment to the Constitution, together with a proposed agreement for the
surrender of the Spencer-Tolles Fund to the Indiana State University, and to
invite comment and criticism from members, which might be printed in brief,
if possible, before the amendment should come up for consideration.
The Society, upon motion, expressed its regrets for the absence of
Professor Galloway and appreciation of his services as Secretary.
After informal discussion, the Society adjourned.
Henry B. Warp,
Secy. Pro Tem.
MINUTES 203
Note 1——Since the meeting the majority of the members of the Executive
Committee and of the Society, voting on this proposed amendment, have
agreed to the substitution of the following in its stead :—
Provided, however, that nothing in this constitution shall prevent the
Executive Committee at any regular meeting from transferring the Spencer-
Tolles Fund to a University, or other incorporated institution for original
research, under such conditions as shall safeguard the permanence of the
Fund, and its application to the general purpose for which it was intended;
such power to be vested in the Executive Committee only after securing, and
in obedience to, the expressed will of a majority of the constitutional mem-
bers of the American Microscopical Society, or after the constitutional failure
of said society.
PROPOSITION OF INDIANA UNIVERSITY RESPECTING THE
SPENCER-TOLLES FUND
of the first part, and the American Microscopical Society, a corporation
chartered under the laws of the District of Columbia, of the second part,
WITNESSES :
WHEREAS, the said party of the second part has paid and contributed
to the*party of ‘the first part the ‘sum of -. 0.0 ..c202.:.ccese odes e cee
dollars to be used for acquiring and clearing the title to that certain tract of
land known as the “Donaldson Farm” or University Farm, situate in Law-
rence County, Indiana, containing in all about 182 acres more or less, for the
use and benefit of the said party of the first part, or if not required therefor
to be invested in such manner as the said party of the first part may determine.
Now, THEREFORE, in consideration thereof the said party of the
first part hereby covenants and agrees to and with the said party of the
second part as follows:
First: That the said party of the first part received the said sum of
Ree ah Pek toterstater tee asneeee dollars in trust and confidence to establish within one
year from the date hereof a graduate fellowship with the value of five
hundred dollars ($500) per annum, which shall be open to graduate students
and investigators of all American institutions for higher learning and
research.
Second: The said Fellowship shall be known as the Spencer-Tolles
Memorial Fellowship founded by the American Microscopical Society in
charge of the Indiana University.
Third: The purpose of this Fellowship shall be the encouragement of
research in optics or in any subject or investigation requiring an optical
instrument especially in the nature or character of the microscope.
Fourth: All literary products or results of the said Fellowship shall,
when published, state on the title page that the author is the “Holder of
Spencer-Tolles Memorial Fellowship, founded by the American Micro-
scopical Society in charge of the Indiana University.”
Fifth: The said party of the first part shall immediately on receipt
of said fund appoint at least three of its professors, especially qualified
therefor, to serve as the “Spencer-Tolles Fellowship Committee,’ whose duty
it shall be to make all rules, determine all matters pertaining to, and select
incumbents for the said Fellowship.
Sixth: That the name, address, and subject and nature of work of the
incumbent shall be published in the annual Bulletin of the Indiana University.
Seventh: In case, for any reason, the Fellowship is not filled for any
year then the annual sum of five hundred dollars shall be set aside to be
SPENCER-TOLLES FUND 205
used either to increase the income of the Fellowship for the next following
year to the sum of one thousand dollars or to appoint a “Spencer-Tolles
Fellow” in addition to the one regularly provided for. If no selection be
made for the second following year then the said annual sum for said year
shall also be set aside and be used with the prior reserve in the third following
year for one, two, or three fellows.
Eighth: In case the said Fellowship remains vacant for three con-
secutive years, or if the reserve is permitted to accumulate beyond the sum
of Fifteen hundred dollars, or in case of non-compliance with any of the
stipulations herein contained, then in any such event this agreement shall be
void and of no effect, and the entire fund or sum herein first mentioned,
with legal interest thereon for the period of the vacancy of the Fellowship,
shall be paid by the said party of the first part to the...........0..2.......-
University for the creation of a Fellowship according to paragraph “Third.”
PATI teu Sal Clr tacts, aot csatt te Goleta, tice) STaIKS BAe Coan Sete aeTeUtG MONS oN TV sea eta nD aparece
University is hereby vested with the right and power to demand, receive
and legally enforce the transfer of the said fund upon the happening of any
of the contingencies herein mentioned.
In witness whereof, etc.”
The Society hereby invites the comment and criticism of the members
upon the proposed action. While the limitations of the funds of the Society
will not allow any extended publication of the views of the members, the
Secretary is willing to publish representative views, and to prepare a digest
of the opinions of the members in the two remaining numbers of the year.
Two principal questions are involved:
1. Is it desirable that the American Microscopical Society turn over
the Spencer-Tolles Memorial Fund to some other institution for execution?
2. If so, is the proposed plan the one to be adopted?
AN
sth! ot “ie ‘Be i Oe ate |
E ay na ith hy , i
: Saline ’
oF ; ; oe os: : ~ DODO UITS IE BoP leds PotariGbriti
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED I8QI
PUBLISHED QUARTERLY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXX
NUMBER THREE
DecaTuR, ILL.
REVIEW PRINTING & STATIONERY Co.
1911
NOTICE TO MEMBERS
The twenty-year period for which the American Microscopical
Society was originally incorporated expired in August, 1911. Some
months previous to this, the Secretary, authorized by the legal pro-
portion of the Executive Committee of the Society, including the
present officers, had this incorporation made perpetual.
- Application for entry as second-class matter at the post office at Decatur, Illinois, pending.
OFFICERS.
Presidents | As i: ELERTZEER MD ieee «ci oicteis cbereretele steie rales aie Kansas City, Mo.
Peiceeeerestacnis ofc EEROD:,. ss. cetlde ge iaie cae shemee ee ee ere Missoula, Mont.
SSECHELOMY 4 Ect W.. GALLOWAY ois, se baie cin ais ais 0 dyatatetseletayeteimrersrelersiotete Decatur, III.
EP COSUT ETI elit WeawlleT AN KUN SO Nisesiclere cai oyave) clone’ crsie cisialenslaicteveierereenels Charleston, III.
Gustodiai: NUAGNUS! (OREAUM clo lac-ccie « omiele ours oielateoiettotrlsicns Meadville, Pa.
JRE TLS WAM Oy Gra ra Conga ROA gui Um mien SP lies i ach cote a PN rR Nees tos Lincoln, Neb
PES AV VPATET ON cccteposetaiercielotaiata oie) aveale cient oauavera rote a inlets tokareteyen teceuuetorees Gambier, Ohio
JEL DNS (O ina bee’ > pe aac eae near a aD Rea abe Oe Ga aee Rg See GOON SIA ro Ware Ae ee Buffalo, N. Y
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
R. H. Warp, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Troy, N. Y.,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1879.
J. D. Hyatt, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
Apert McCatta, Ph.D., of Chicago, III.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883.
T. J. Burritt, Ph.D., of Urbana, II,
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gro. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Buffalo, N. Y.,
at Detroit, Mich., 1890.
MarsHALL D. Ewe tt, M.D., of Chicago, IIl.,
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Stmon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1895 and 1906.
A. CiiFForD Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1896.
A. M. Bueire, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. EiceENMANN, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., 1gor.
CuHar_rs E. Bessty, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
E. A. Birce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Urbana, IIL,
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
Hersert Oszorn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXX, Number 3, July to11
Origin and Meaning of Blast Cells, with one plate, by E. W. Roberts..... 211
Recent Progress in Some Fields of Experimental Zoology, I, by J. F.
Talla} OYC\E Ome T OITA ONO STOR IORI Tae IOC TORR OES LIS O10 217
Notes, Reviews, Etc. Cultures in Vitro; Bacillus leprae in Cold-blooded
Animals; “Giant Cells” in Tumors; Epithelial Fibrils and Bridges;
Fauna of Small Bodies of Water; Effects of Castration on Growth
of Special Tissues; Periodicity in Spirogyra; The Spirochaets;
Cytology of Bacteria; Algae of Missouri Botanical Garden; Edin-
vers Drawing and .Projection Apparatus: sec icic ele aisle pc). wie eteeine 235
The Proposed Transfer of the Spencer-Tolles Memorial Fund; State-
ment by Professor S. H. Gage; Some Opposing Views; Views of
Mr: PAaum, Custodian; An Answer to Mr. Pilaum=.. 3c... <- - «sect 243
Necrolosy: Mr. Henry Bauschiawath Porttait 3..7,.2).20. esse seer 254
Adiventisenients) sca toate tats c 2 tates hae ais ebaie note ola de Seite e bacm ieee I-VIII
TRANSACTIONS
OF
American Microscopical Society
(Published in Quarterly Installments)
Vol. XXA JULY 1911 No. 3
ORIGIN AND MEANING OF BLAST-CELLS.
By E. W. Roserts.
In the development of metazoan embryos from the egg cell,
there constantly comes into view new types of cells, having new
functions.
The type of cells which give rise to new forms of cell struc-
tures are usually called blast cells.
There are many varieties of these cells known, and the causes
of their production are varied in different cases.
In all types of insects, there are found on the hypodermis numer-
ous kinds of spines, which serve for various purposes. Many of
these are of giant size, in many cases several hundred times the
bulk of ordinary dermal spines.
The peculiar method by which these giant spines arise in cer-
tain cases, was discovered in the pupa of a common fly—a Sar-
cophaga, 8 day pupal stage. Perhaps the 6 and 7 day stages would
show more completely the critical phases, as at 8 days the spines
are well extended and formed.
The examination of hundreds of these spine blast cells at this
stage shows a process of cell association; the cells of the hypoder-
mis concerned in this process show usually 3 in number, 2 with their
nuclei in contact, and a third smaller cell within the group, but not
with its nucleus in contact with the others.
Two dermal cells place their nuclei in contact, each nucleus
assuming the spirem stage as in early synapsis; they appear as
though about to undergo mitosis, but this does not in this case
occur, as the spines mature with the nuclei remaining in this stage.
212 E. W. ROBERTS
A third dermal cell on the opposite side also enters the group,
this nucleus staying in a resting stage; this third cell enlarges but
gives no further evidence of functional activity.
The first and second cells on the contrary, grow to enormous
size while their nuclei are in contact; the first cell forming the giant
spine, while the second in some cases also produces an aborted spine,
showing that it also has been greatly stimulated.
Fig. 1—Diagrams of Sections of Spine-producing Cells in Sarcophaga.
The sketches from 1 to 20 of Fig. 1, are taken from the speci-
men at random, and show a variety of views of the spine cell groups.
It should be kept in mind that each peculiar view displays only
such characters as the position of the group to the section knife
reveals.
From I to I5 are vertical sections, while 16-17-19 are cross
sections of such groups.
No. 18 is a diagramatic vertical section showing a normal ar-
rangement of the dermal cells, while No. 20 is a surface diagram of
a spine cell with its neighboring dermal cells.
BLAST-CELLS 212
The shaded cells are the three cells which form the blast group,
and are numbered thus: 1, the main spine cell; 2, the stimulating
mate of the spine cell; 3, the minor group cell.
It is very probable that metazoan forms of cell life arose from
lower colonial forms of cell life; forms such as Volvox are prob-
ably between the two types, and are probably true Mesozoa.
In simple forms of colonial life the individual cells are all com-
plete in their functional activities ; while in a mesozoan colony some
of the cells have special functional activities, which the other
cells do not show.
The origin of these new types of cells is the point now to be
considered, and while they show many varieties in the complex
animal the different modifying causes may be traced back to three
quite general factors.
The first cause of differentiation would probably be conjuga-
tion between neighboring cells in a colony, the resultant cell being a
hybrid, or possibly a mutant cell differing slightly from its fellows,
which cell being of advantage to the whole colony would be con-
served by selection.
This mutant cell would as the colony became more complicated
give rise to a progeny of cells of its own special structure and
function, many of these in turn becoming successive mutants, until
as in higher Metazoa we have a multitude of continually differing
cells.
The second great cause of variation would be that of nourish-
ment; neighboring cells giving off their products of such kinds and
amounts that the special mutating type of blast cell is stimulated to
greater growth and activity, or retarded as the case may be, because
of the nutritive changes wrought by the cell activities about it.
Such a type is found in many ova, where a jacket of special
cells give their nourishment to form the food supply for the future
embryo.
Thus we see the food supply may not only have an important
part in nourishing blast cells, but it may act directly as a modifying
agent, much as Honey Bees by the use of certain foods change the
character of the adult insect.
214 E. W. ROBERTS
The third great factor in early cell differentiation is doubtless
use or function; and while the former two causes precede, this
third factor is generally the determining one of the triology which
causes the former two factors to reappear in the ontogenetic cycles.
The opposing nuclei of the insect spine cells probably represents
a degenerate conjugation or rudimentary sexual affinity.
All the resultant cells from a fertilized egg have these special
affinities, so that as is now well known by experiment they seek
to re-establish their correct relations when separated from each
other. (Roux).
The swarming of the swarm pores in Pediastrum and Hydro-
dictyon and their ultimate settlement into their formal colonial ar-
rangement is a good illustration of such an affinity.
Apogamy is the loss of sexual function; when sexual organs
though present are functionless, nevertheless the normal product of
the sexual act is developed from the oosphere, from the female sex-
ual organs or from its vicinity.
“Thus it occasionally happens with several of the Zygomycetes
(Syzygites) that the conjugating branches do not unite, but never-
theless they each form at their free extremity a cell which has the
properties of a zygospore. The apogamy is still more striking in
the case of the Saprolegniez, and is constant throughout their entire
cycle of affinity. The form of the sexual organs agrees with that of
the Peronosporee. The antheridia in many cases put out their fer-
tilization tubes, but these remain closed and emit no fertilizing sub-
stance. Nevertheless the oospores mature in the usual manner.
Other individuals have antheridia, but these put out no tubes; others
again have neither antheridial branches nor antheridia, and yet the
oospores are developed. In the last two cases we have not only
apogamy but a suppression of the sexual organs, which goes still
further in the Ascomycetes ; for in many of these neither antheridial
branch nor archicarp can be distinguished; the fructifications are
formed simply by the sprouting and interweaving of hyphal twigs of
similar form, some of which are transformed into ascogenous fila-
ments. A parallel case is known also among the Chlorophycez, the
oospores of Chara crinita mature in the normal manner without
being fertilized by spermatozoids. Finally in many fungi, especially
Plate I.
Photographs of Cell-associations thru which Spines are produced
Sarcophaga.
n
BLAST-CELLS 215
in the great division of the Basidiomycetes, the formation of the
fructification is altogether suppressed ; they have only asexual organs
of reproduction.” (Goebel).
As all nucleated forms of Protozoa are originally with a com-
plete sexual equipment, it needs but a moment’s consideration to
see that such cells evolving into colonial and from thence into meta-
zoan forms must preserve more or less modified and degenerate
conjugating tendencies.
That all the cells of a group may retain rudiments of their sexual
characters, which may on proper provocation be transferred into
normal sex organs, is well known from Coleus plants, a single piece
of leaf being capable of development into a complete plant.
It will thus be seen that the term apogamy should be properly
extended to the degeneration of sexual function in all types of cells.
Protozoa, Mesozoa and Metazoa, for it occurs in all types of cells
in some form.
Thus it seems reasonable to believe that the origin of these
different types of blast cells is in a way to be connected with a
degenerated and modified sexual function.
There is a need for accurate observation of the nuclei of the
early stages of blast cell formation; there is much here to be learned,
and the field is not difficult. We should be glad to hear the opinion
of others on this subject; it is an interesting one.
Battle Creek, Mich.
DEPARTMENT OF SUMMARIES
TO BE DEVOTED TO DIGESTS OF PROGRESS
IN BIOLOGY
While the Transactions will continue to be primarily a Journal of research in micro-
biology, it is recognized that the field has become so broad as to preclude the possibility
of frequent articles in any one of the departments of special interest. Because of this
it will be the policy to present, from time to time, supplementary digests of the progress
being made in the various fields of micro-biology. It is also proposed to introduce similar
summaries of the progress made in some departments not represented in our articles of
research. This is done with the feeling that such reviews will increase the permanent
value of the Transactions to all who may not have access to a large list of technical
biological journals, nor the time to make the survey for themselves.
nae
RECENT PROGRESS IN SOME FIELDS OF EXPERIMEN-
PAL ZOOLOG YS E:
James Francis Apsort, Washington University
The two decades immediately following the publication of the
“Origin of Species” were years of storm and stress both in biology
and in theology. In the controversies of that period the two con-
ceptions of evolution as contrasted with special creation on the one
hand, and of the Darwin-Wallace explanation of the method of
such an evolution on the other hand were inextricably confused.
Accordingly, after the smoke of battle had cleared away and the
hypothesis of evolution had found acceptance by the newer gen-
eration of working biologists, the tendency remained, to accept the
Selection Hypothesis as unquestionably as the Evolutionary Hypo-
thesis was finally accepted. Forgetting that Darwin’s inductions
were the result of long and patient accumulation of a mountain of
data and that he himself had clearly recognized the difficulties and
objections to many of his conclusions, it became the habit to “ex-
plain” all biological phenomena by this hypothesis and such a priori
methods ran riot, particularly in the field of ecology. Theoretical
biology in other words changed its attitude from an inductive to a
deductive one and, as such, after a time, reached the limit of its re-
sources, description replacing analysis in biological work.
Recently, however, the development of many new fields of
biological inquiry and the increased application of biological data
to the uses of the arts and medicine, together with the munificent
endowment which biology has received both in Europe and America
have greatly stimulated interest in the field and the inevitable re-
action has set in. In the analysis of biological phenomena the
genetic method has largely replaced the comparative method. In-
deed the tendency of the present time is so largely analytical that
“Experimental Zoology” is almost synonymous with “Modern
Zoology.”
As was to be expected, a similar examination of the method
of Evolution was soon undertaken and the practical aspects of the
218 J. F. ABBOTT
study of Heredity, and Variation have, in addition, greatly stimulated
inquiry in these fields. We now accept a Laboratory of Genetics
or a Laboratory of Experimental Evolution as a matter of course,
and it is perhaps not an overstatement that the great majority of
investigators are concerned in some way or other with an analytical
study of Variation or Heredity in some of its aspects.
The old demand of the anti-evolutionists to “show us a species
that has unquestionably come into existence under the influence of
natural selection” has not been silenced and the efforts of biologists
to answer this demand, like the labors of the alchemists of old,
while, indeed, so far they have not been exactly successful yet have
been the source of a great many important discoveries or even the
opening up of wholly new fields of research. Within the narrow
limits of this review it will not be possible to do more than touch
on a few of these results, nor will it be possible to cover the entire
field.
The attack in general has been made in two directions: (1)
The modification of Phylogeny or the experimental alteration of
the specific type and (2) the modification of Ontogeny, in other
words, analytical or experimental embryology.
Under the first head, experimental work is being done in
selective breeding, germinal transplantation, and disturbance of the
physiological balance of the organism in heredity. Under the
second head may be ranged transplantation of tissues, effects of
varied environments on developing eggs, hybridization and the de-
termination or control of sex.
Pure LINE AND PEDIGREE BREEDING
The botanists long since came to the conclusion that the limits
of artificial selection are soon reached and that therein lies the
most significant objection to the Darwinian hypothesis as originally
outlined. The recognition of this fact accounts largely for the
enthusiasm which greeted DeVries’ so-called “Mutation Theory,”
since by the application of this hypothesis the production of new
species by selection other than in a straight line, becomes possible.
The difficulties in the way of breeding animals in numbers
have made the zoologists’ contributions to this subject fewer and
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 219
less conclusive than those of the botanists. The most important
in recent times is the work of Tower with insects and Jennings and
Woodruff with protozoa.
In a series of brilliant papers Jennings! describes the results of
long continued and carefully planned breeding experiments with
Paramecium. Since it is easily possible to get a generation or
even two a day with this form, in the course of a year as many
generations can be presented for study as might require 100 cen-
turies for the human species to produce.*
Jennings finds that it is comparatively easy to produce struc-
tural or somatic alterations by environmental stimuli (changes of
food, etc.). The environment is, of course, easily controlled.
Such “acquired characters,” however, are never reproduced in the
progeny. The range of variation under the same conditions is
great and it is possible by isolation of individuals to separate out
many races. Each race has its own mean and range of variation,—
its own “mode” in other words, but selection within this race is
of no effect in altering the mean. Jennings insists that these races
(which may differ either structurally or physiologically) are mere-
ly isolated by the experimenter, not created, and that they corres-
pond in every way with the ‘‘pure lines” that Johannsen and other
botanists have worked out in plants.
Herein is found an adequate explanation of regression, which
has puzzled and obstructed the experimental selectionist so long.
Suppose the goal aimed at is size. By selecting toward this char-
acter (in Paramecium e. g.) the smaller races or “pure lines” may
be gradually dropped out until only one such remains and within
that one, selection is of no avail in changing the average. Jen-
nings states,—“In Paramecium, in the extensive study of many
years for hundreds of generations, by exact statistical methods,—
not one single instance was observed of variation in the sense of
1. Jennings H. S., Heredity, Variation and Evolution in Protozoa;—I. The fate
of new structural characters in Paramecium with special reference to the question of the
inheritance of acquired characters in Protozoa. J. Exp. Zool.—908, 5, 577. II.
Heredity of Size and Form in Paramecium, with studies of growth, environmental action
and selection. Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1909, 47, 398. ‘‘Heredity and Variation in the
Simplest Organisms.” Amer. Nat. 1909, 43, 321, (Popular resumé).
*Woodruff has kept continuous cultures of Paramecium under constant observation
for over 2,000 generations.
220 J. F. ABBOTT
an actual change’in a race.” Elise Hanel? finds practically the
same conditions with respect to pure lines in so plastic form as
Hydra, and it is getting to be more and more the belief of present
day biologists that such pure lines are to be found in all species of
animals and plants. How they arise and why they are so stable is
the great problem of the future.
THE EFFECT OF ENVIRONMENT IN HEREDITY
The issue between Darwinism and Lamarckianism was sharply
drawn by Weissmann, who showed very clearly the distinction be-
tween soma (body cells) and germ plasm (reproductive cells).
In America particularly, a great many biologists have an inclination,
—suppressed or not—toward the Lamarckian position, which pos-
tulates the hereditary influence of environmental effects on the
soma. This is the “Inheritance of Acquired Characters’ which
Weissmann denies a priori and which it has seemed impossible to
demonstrate experimentally.
Many ingenious experiments have been tried to test the hypo-
thesis. Heape* transplanted the fertilized egg of one variety of
rabbit to the oviduct of a different variety and succeeded in pro-
ducing uterine attachment and normal gestation. In every such
case, however, the foster mother imparted none of her character-
istics to the transferred offspring. Of course this result tells us
nothing of what might take place if the transplantation were done
before fertilization.
A great deal of work has been done in ovarian grafting in
mammals. In general, such an experiment, if carefully performed,
is successful, and the ovarian tissue lives in its new site. There is
always the danger that in interpreting results, a regenerated ovary
may be mistaken for the introduced tissue which has degenerated
or been absorbed.
Guthrie* transferred the ovary of a black pure bred Leghorn
pullet to a white pullet, replacing it with the ovary of the white
2. Jenaische Zeitschrift. 1907, 43, 321.
3. Heape W. Notes on the transplantation and growth of mammalian ova within a
uterine foster mother. Proc. Roy. Soc. 1890, 48, 457; 7. c. 1897, 62, 178.
4. Guthrie C. C. ‘Results of ovarian transplantation on body weight and egg weight
in fowls.” Jour. Am. Med. Assoc. 1908, 51, 1314; ibid J. Exp. Zool. 1908, 5, 563.
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 221
fowl. The birds began to lay six months afterward and the white
one was mated with a black cock, the black one with a white cock.
The controls, white X white, and black < black, gave uniform re-
sults consistent with their “pure” ancestry. The eggs from the
pseudo-crosses gave, along with normal color, a number of var-
iously spotted chicks which appeared to indicate that the residence
of the introduced ovary in the foster mother’s body had brought
about a modification of the color pattern in the chicks, different
from that normal to the race,—in other words, that the “soma”
had influenced the “germ tissue.”
Castle and Phillips® have criticised Guthrie’s results’ on the
ground that the original ovary may have regenerated and Daven-
port’ has recently repeated Guthrie’s experiments and has negated
his results. Castle and Phillips’ have carried out similar experi-
ments on guinea pigs and rabbits with negative results. Some of
the most interesting experiments along this line have been carried
out by Meisenheimer and will be referred to farther on.
In addition to such germinal transplantations, a variety of ex-
periments in modifying the environment have been attempted to
see if the operation of heredity can in such a way be controlled or
altered.
Wesenberg-Lund® found that a seasonal dimorphism obtains
in Daphnia,—the summer forms being smaller and with outgrowths
on the body. Ostwald®, however, has shown that varying the
temperature at any season will produce these forms. On the other
hand, Woltereck!® claims that the temperature effect is indirect,
that the nutrition is the effective agent and that there is a true
seasonal dimorphism.
It is likely that the discordant results have been due to the
fact that the various observers have dealt with different strains
or “pure lines,’ some of which were predominant at some times,
5. Castle W. E. and Phillips J. C. ‘‘On Germinal Transplantation in Vertebrates.”
Carnegie Pub. No. 144, 1911.
6. But see Guthrie, Science May 26, 1911.
7. Davenport C. B. Proc. Coc. Exp. Biol. and Med. 1910, 7, 168; Jour. Morph. 1911.
: el Zent. 1900, 644.
9. Ostwald Wolfgang. “Exp. Unterruch. fiber die Saison. polymorphismus bei
Daphniden. Roux. Arch. 1904, 415.
10. Woltereck R. Verh. Deutsch. Zool. Gesell. 1908, 234; 1. c. 1909, 110.
222 jz b ABBODT
and some at other times and that the environmental effect was
illusory.
Kammerer" finds that by raising the temperature it is possible
to make the males of the lizard, Lacerta muralis, (which is sexually
dimorphic in color pattern) assume the female coloration,—a con-
dition which is reproduced in the offspring.
The same experimenter’? has worked with Salamandra macu-
losa which is sometimes viviparous, bringing forth larvae which
have gills and behave as normal aquatic larvae, metamorphosing
into land salamanders by atrophy of the gills. If, however, the
mother be kept from water a small percentage of the young will
be found to have already lost their gills when born. If, then, these
mature they will give birth to gill-less young even if they themselves
are not deprived of water.
Morgan’** in a preliminary report on experiments now in pro-
gress described the results of breeding various races of Drosophila
(the pomace fly) obtained by influencing the eggs or larvae with
radium. Orange eyed, pink eyed, white eyed and short-winged flies
thus produced,* interbred in various ways give very constant re-
sults in inheritance. These experiments will be referred to farth-
er on.
An interesting experiment has been recorded by Sumner*,
in which growing mice were exposed to the outer winter tempera-
ture and compared with others bred in warmer rooms, with the
result that the average tail length, foot length, ear, etc., was found
to be considerably greater (as much as 30% in some cases) in the
mice raised in the warm room. This effect seems to be transmit-
ted to the second generation.
11. Kammerer P. “Vererbung Erzwungener Farbveriinderung,”’ etc. Roux. Arch.
1910, 29, 456.
12. Kammerer P. Die Nachkommen der Spiitgebornen Salamandra maculosa und der
friihgebornen S. atra. Roux. Arch. 1907, 25.
18. Morgan T. H. Sex Limited Inheritance in Drosophila. Science 1910, 120.
*Since the mutants have appeared independently and since Loeb and Bancroft (Sci-
ence 1911, 781) find that the radium effect is not specific or constant, Morgan himself is
not certain that the radium is the real agent in producing the mutants.
14. Sumner F. B. “Reappearance in the offspring of artificially produced parental
modifications,” etc. Am. Nat. 1910, 44, 1; 1. c. 1911, 45, 90; Roux. Arch. 1910, 30 (2), 317;
Jour. Exp. Zool. 1909, 9.
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 223
In nearly all such work on the influence of environment on
hereditary processes, the experiments have been carried on for too
short a time and in many cases are too fragmentary or incomplete
to enable one to draw definite conclusions or to be convinced that
the new type is a permanent one. There is one brilliant exception.
Tower” in two contributions has published the results of carefully
planned and admirably executed experiments on the potato beetle
which have been in progress for a decade and a half and are still
being continued. It is fair to say that this work, in its thorough-
ness and completeness is one of the most important contributions
to the analysis of the evolutionary process that has appeared in
the past half century. It will be possible to allude to only a few
of the results.
Tower has worked out in great detail the development and
configuration of the color pattern of Leptinotarsa and decides that
the localized stages of color pattern are “physiological and develop-
mental and not phylogenetic.” To quote his conclusion: In
Leptinotarsa each species, as far as we can discover, starts in larval
development endowed with a definite system of color-enzyme pro-
ducing cells; that is, all start alike from a racial condition. Given
this racial endowment, each species from the start modifies, holds
in check, or increases the activities of the centers in its own man-
ner, without any dependence upon the actions of its immediate
parental or grandparental species. In the evolution of the color
pattern, in the rise of new species, each species inherits this general
racial system of coloration entire in its germ plasm, and the fun-
daments thereof appear in development. In the production of the
new race, the capacity to modify this general color scheme is in-
herent in the germ plasm, and in heredity is transmitted to the off-
spring of the same kind as in the parent; but in the new race it is
changed, the modified capacity producing new developments of the
color centers which we recognize as the differentials of the new
races or species.”
Professor Tower then undertakes to modify artificially this
color pattern by increasing the temperature, varying the humidity,
15. Tower W. L. “An investigation of Evolution in the genus Leptinotarsa.”’ Car-
negie Pub. No. 48, 1906. Ibid. Biol. Bull. 1910, 18, 285.
224 J. F. ABBOTT
or the atmospheric pressure, etc. A slight increase or decrease in
these environmental factors was sufficient to stimulate the activity
of the color-producing enzymes, producing melanic or darker indi-
viduals; a greater increase or decrease of the factor inhibited them
and produced albinic individuals. Tower thus showed that these
environmental stimuli are not specific but general. These effects,
however, are persistent in inheritance, so long as the stimulus is
continued, and disappear immediately that stimulus is removed.
There has seldom been so clear a demonstration of the imperman-
ence of “acquired” or somatic modifications in inheritance.
Tower found, moreover, that the beetle does not mature all
her eggs in one batch but in several batches, laid at successive in-
tervals. It was thus possible to experiment on the insect by alter-
ing the environmental conditions during the maturation of some of
the eggs and restoring them to the normal for others,—the con-
trol being thus the same individual. In this way a criterion of the
specificity of the stimulus could be obtained. In some of these
experiments mutations were the result of exposing the maturing —
ova to hot and dry conditions. In one case the change was a
physiological one, 7. e. a normally two-brooded form became five-
brooded(!) a condition that persisted thirteen generations, until
the cultures were destroyed by accident. In other cases various
color-types were produced. These “mutations” like the five-brooded
form were persistent in subsequent generations and when crossed
with normal beetles the hybrids segregated in Mendelian ratio.
Another thing clearly established by Tower’s work is the im-
portance and universality of Selection in pruning away extreme
variants and “limiting the reproductive population to the individ-
uals nearest to the racial mean.”
DEVELOPMENTAL MECHANICS
Many attempts have been made of late to analyze the factors
of development and differentiation in the organism by interfering
in some way or other with the normal course of development. A
great deal of this work has been done by Prof. Loeb*® during the
16. wide Loeb J, “Dynamics of Living Matter,’ Macmillan 1906, and especially “Die
Chemische Entwicklungs-erregung des Tierischen Eies’’ Berlin 1909.
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 225
past decade and a half. In spite of the brilliancy and daring origin-
ality of his work and of those of his school, the result has been not
so much to really answer the questions for which an answer was
sought as to stimulate further inquiry or even to open up wholly
new fields for exploration and to reveal the intricacies and complex-
ities of phenomena hitherto considered relatively simple. As the
greater part of this work has been reviewed elsewhere in one way
or another, only the most recent phases of it will be alluded to here.
Conklin’ established the fact in the ascidian egg—and it was
soon afterwards confirmed by others in echinoderm, molluscan,
and other eggs,—that the protoplasm of the egg consists of differ-
ent substances that can be distinguished by color. These “organ-
forming substances” appear to be segregated and localized into dif-
ferent areas of the cleaving egg and to indicate a “preformation”
of the egg antecedent to cleavage.
By the use of the centrifuge it has been found possible to shift
the relative positions of these substances and thus further analyze
their influence in development. Morgan and Lyon,'* working with
Arbacia, (a sea-urchin with a heavily pigmented egg), found that
a rearrangement of the cytoplasmic constituents follows strong cen-
trifuging, due to the different specific gravities of these substances ;
that the resultant stratification bears no relation to the egg axis and
that while the cleavage conforms strictly to the induced stratifica-
ion, gastrulation and subsequent differentiation is unaffected.
“The factor that determines the median plane of the embryo is
dynamic and not material.”” Morgan and Spooner’® continuing the
same line of work, have discovered that the micromeres of Arbacia
arise in cleavage directly opposite the ‘“‘micropyle,”’ so called, or
fertilization funnel, and cleavage is thus independent of the differ-
entiated cytoplasmic substances. Gastrulation is also independent
of them. Miss Spooner?’ also finds the same thing to be true of
Cyclops. Getting at the problem in a different way, Morgan,??
17. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1905, 18; Biol. Bull. 1905, 8, 205.
18. Morgan T. H. and Lyon E. P. Roux. Arch. 1907, 24, 147. Also Lyon, I. c. 23, 151.
19. Morgan T. H. and Spooner G. B. “The Polarity of the Centrifugal Egg.” Row.
Arch. 1909, 28, 104.
20. Spooner G. B. J. Exp. Zool. 1911, 23.
21. Roux. Arch. 1910, 29, 205.
226 J. F. ABBOTT
Dederer?? and Browne** have used pressure to disturb the rela-
tions of the blastomeres in eggs with “precocious specification”
i. e. eggs with determinate or mosaic cleavage. By pressure the
blastomeres may be shifted in their relative positions. In Ciona
(a tunicate) and Nereis (an Annelid) such a procedure seems al-
ways to produce disturbances in the distribution of the localizing
substances so that the larvae are abnormal. This appears not to
be the case with Cerebratulus, a nemertine worm, (Dederer), nor
Cumingia, a mollusc, (Browne).
Almost every imaginable chemical and physical alteration of
the environment has been tried on developing eggs in the hope of
discovering some specific effect, but although, as was to be ex-
pected, a wide range of abnormalities has been obtained, in only a
few cases can it be said with certainty that a specific substance has
produced a specific modification of the process of development.
The famous lithium embryo of Herbst?* is one such instance. In
this case the Li. ion produces in the sea-urchin an ‘“‘exogastrula” in
which the gut is formed outside the pluteus larva. Recently an-
other such specific effect has been obtained by Stockard’ on the
embryos of the Killifish (Fundulus). The action of the Mg. ion
(chloride or nitrate) of a certain strength produces in the embryonic
fish a fusion of the two eyes into a single cyclopean eye. In neither
of these cases is there at present any reasonable connection between
the cause and its effect. Such results are valuable in opening our
eyes to the magnitude of the field that still must be conquered be-
fore we may enter upon a beginning of an understanding of the
fundamental processes of development.
The specificity of the developing tissue with respect to its dif-
ferentiation has been investigated by Harrison, Lewis and others in
a series of brilliant papers, some of which antedate the limits of
this review. By transplanting tissues or organs from one develop-
ing larva to another some most interesting results have been ob-
tained. Lewis has shown?® that any patch of ectoderm grafted over
22, 1. c. 235.
23. 1. c. 248,
24. Herbst C., Mitt. Stat. Neap. 1895, XI.
25. Stockard C. R. Artificial Production of a single median cyclopean eye in the fish
embryo by means of Mg Cl,. Roux. Arch. 1907, 33, 249.
26. Am. Jour. Anat. 1904, III; Jour. Exp. Zool. 1905, I1.
see
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 227
the optic cup of a developing salamander larva will differentiate into
a lens and conversely that an optic cup may be cut out and grafted
into the tail or side of the body where it invaginates in due form
and the contiguous ectoderm differentiates into a lens.
Transplantation of limbs and other parts of the mature organ-
ism has been accomplished in a great variety of forms by numer-
ous observers. In general the capacity of an animal to endure this
sort of treatment is a function of its degree of specialization or the
specificity of its tissues and decreases as we ascend the animal scale.
Much of this work has been done in connection with regeneration
experiments. It is of interest to note, however, that by refined
technique Guthrie and Carrel have accomplished limb-grafting in
mammals and their success in taking out and replacing sections of
blood vessels should offer wide possibilities for the surgeon. A
section of the jugular vein of the cat e. g., interchanged with a
section of the carotid will function and become modified so that the
characteristics of arterial wall are assumed by the vein tissue and
vice versa. These experiments antedate the limits of this article
and are familiar to most of its readers. Recently Pearl and Sur-
face** have made end to end anastomoses of the oviducts of the
fowl without interfering in any way with the functions of that
organ.
Grafting offers a means of regenerative control, particularly
of nervous tissues. Braus** has contended that nerve regeneration
can take place in the absence of central or ganglionic influence in
opposition to the view that regeneration of peripheral nerves can-
not take place in the absence of the ganglion cell. Harrison? has
repeated and extended Braus’s experiments and by very careful
and ingenious manipulation (involving the grafting together of
an aneurous larva with a normal one which functions as a “nurse”
has obtained results that lead him to the opposite conclusion, namely
that there 1s no “‘auto-regeneration” or nerve development within
a transplanted limb bud but that in every case a nerve branch (con-
nected with a ganglion) grows into the limb bud and differen-
27. Pearl R. and Surface F. M.. Am. J. Phys. 1908, 22, 357.
28. Braus H. “Einige Ergebnisse der Transplantation von Organanlagen bei Bom-
binator larven.” Verh. Anat. Gesell. 1904, 18.
29. Harrison R. G. ‘Experiments in Transplanting Limbs.” J. Exp. Zool. 1907, 7, 240.
228 J. F. ABBOTT
tiates. It accommodates its configuration to the limb no matter
what its source or original predestination. In a later paper, Har-
rison®® continuing his former experiments on tadpoles, emphasizes
his conclusion that the “ganglion cells are the dominant factor in
the development of the nerve fiber; and that protoplasmic bridges
do not play an essential role.” An account of an interesting series
of experiments has recently been published by Burrows**, and
Shorey** on the artificial culture of living tissues outside the body.
In 1907 Harrison** published an account of his observation of the
living developing nerve fiber of the frog removed from the body
to a drop of lymph. The neuroblasts developed into nerve cells
and fibrils and confirmed his view that such neuroblasts are always
self-differentiating.
Burrows, working with embryonic chick tissues transferred to
blood plasma (of chickens) confirms the observation of Harrison.
He finds that other tissues than nerve tissue will grow with equal
facility. The embryonic heart continues to beat normally for several
days in such a medium. The differention, however, is strictly
histogenetic and organs are not formed. Miss Shorey working
with Necturus, along the same lines, comes to the conclusion that
for such isolated cells or tissue elements to differentiate in artificial
media, the metabolic products of other tissues must be present to
act as differentiating stimuli. In other words her conclusion is the
opposite to that of Harrison, i. e. that such primordia are self-
differentiating. An inviting field for investigation thus opens to
any one who can master the delicate technique required.
THE DETERMINATION OF SEX
For a long time the question of sex-determination,—of male
as against female, and of sex-control,—of sexuality as against
asexuality, (which is a different problem) has perplexed the mind
of man, and many have been the fantastic hypotheses advanced
30. Roux. Arch. 1910, 30(2), 165.
31. Burrows M. T. “Growth of tissues of the chick embryo outside the animal body.”
J. Exp. Zool. 1911, 10, 63.
32. Shorey M. L. “Differentiation of Neuroblasts in artificial culture media.” J. c.
1911, 10, 85.
33. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. & Med. IV, 140.
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 229
to cover the phenomena. Of recent years these theories have be-
come more critical and precise and may be divided into two
classes, (1) those which hold the sex-controlling element to be en-
vironmental,—particularly in connection with nutrition (the well
known theories of Geddes and Thomson and of Schenk) and (2)
those which hold that sex control is mechanical and intrinsic and
independent of environment. The latter point of view has received
strong support in the researches of the American school of cytolo-
gists whose results have been described in a recent review in this
journal.* This point of view is not without its opponents at the
present time. In particular Russo** opposes the current Mendelian
interpretation of sex phenomena. Lecithin he finds to be a prom-
inent constituent of germ cells and constitutes the “mito-chondria”’
and other “chromidial bodies” in the cell. By injection of lecithin
Russo claims to have produced such structures, which he believes
have an important bearing on the cell potentialities. To test this,
he arranged a series of experiments with rabbits fed or injected
with lecithin. He found that in such rabbits, the treatment markedly
interfered with the “dominance” of certain color characters which
usually follow the Mendelian ratio. Likewise he found that the
feeding of lecithin caused its deposit in the gonad with the result
that the ova thus stimulated gave rise almost exclusively to female
offspring. Both these results run counter to the usually accepted
idea of the mechanical sorting out of intrinsic “determinants” in
the germ cell, whether these are embodied in the chromosomes or
not. Russo’s theory, indeed, leads back to the standpoint of Geddes
and Thomson,—that sex is a matter of metabolism,—the female
being anabolic, the male katabolic. Russo’s work, in spite of its
apparent exactness, needs confirmation, particularly in view of
the precise results obtained by selective breeders, (in Drosophila,
Abraxis, etc.).
In this connection it must be noted that Tennant*® has discov-
ered that in reciprocal crosses of two genera of sea-urchins, the
*Guyer, p. 179.
34. Russo A. “Studien tiber die’ Bestimmung des weiblichen geschlects.”? Jena. 1909.
45Tennent D. H. The Domminance of Maternal or of Paternal characters in Echino-
derm Hybrids’ Roux. Arch 1909, 29, 1.
230 J. F. ABBOTT
degree of predominance of maternal as against paternal characters
is a function of the alkalinity of the sea water.
That food, or at least environment, is significant in the pro-
duction of sexual individuals in parthenogenic strains has long been
known in the Aphids and has been established in other animals by
experiment. Shull® finds that, in the rotifer Hydatina senta,
whereas starvation has the apparent effect of producing sexual in-
dividuals in parthenogenetic strains, the effect is rather qualitative
than quantitative and must be ascribed to the presence of other
chemical substances than food, such as ammonia compounds, creatin,
urea, etc., in the culture medium. Shull believes, however, that
internal factors are also involved in the production of sexual in-
dividuals, leaving it an open question as to whether alterations of
these internal factors can be brought about by environmental stimuli
(cf. Tower’s work above). Whitney*® and Nussbaum*’ have re-
cently attacked the question of the production of sexual organs in
Hydra. The former finds that starvation will not induce the form-
ation of gonads in Hydra unless they are subjected also to low tem-
perature, whereas an abundance of food following low tempera-
tures suppresses the formation of testes and ova. Nussbaum claims
that the temperature works only indirectly in affecting nutrition.
On the basis of experiments conducted for many years he has
claimed that an abundance of food favors egg formation, which
again is practically the old claim of Geddes and Thomson. On
the basis of many similar experiments it has been clearly demon-
strated that environmental changes alter the cycle of parthenogenetic
and sexual generations but it certainly remains unproven that they
actually determine the sex.
A number of similar studies on other forms have recently been
made, particularly with Daphnia. Woltereck** found not only that
starving induced the production of sexual individuals but that
superabundance of food produced the same result. McClendon*
concludes on the basis of a variety of experiments with Daphmia
35. Shull A. F. Am. Nat. 1910, 44, 146; J. Exp. Zool. 1910, 8, 311; J. c. 1911, 10, 117.
36. Whitney D. D. Roux. Arch. 1907, 24, 524.
837. Nussbaum M. Pfltigers Arch. 1909, 130.
38. Woltereck Verh. Deut. Zool. Gesel. 1908, 2384, and 1. c. 1909, 110.
39. McClendon J. F. Am. Nat. 1910, 404.
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 231
pulex that “conditions which are adverse to the growth of the
body cells, (viz. high temperatures, concentration of excretory
products or disordered nutrition), either fail to retard the develop-
ment of the germ cells [in such parthenogenetic forms] or over-
stimulate their development so that in either case the daphnid be-
comes sexually mature at a less developed stage.”’
Returning to the subject of sex-determination it is evident that
those workers who have considered sex to be regulated by an in-
ternal automatic mechanism which is unaffected by environmental
stimuli have a much more satisfying array of evidence to put for-
ward. Quite apart from the question of the ‘“‘sex-chromosome,”
if sex is treated as a character that segregates in some way in the
gametes, in other words, that the individual is a sex-hybrid, the
direct results of breeding experiments appear to harmonize with
such an hypothesis in an astonishing way. Such results fall in line
with the conception that sex behaves as do Mendelian ‘“unit-char-
acters,’ one sex being always heterozygous and the other homozy-
gous. The best known work has been that of Doncaster and
Raynor* on the moth Abraris grossulariata and its (female)
variant lacticolor. Crossing these types in various ways produces
various divergent and complicated results, to record which would
exceed the limits of space available for the present review, but al-
though different hypotheses have been advanced to account for the
facts it seems clear that only by treating the factors as Mendelian
unit-characters can an intelligible interpretation be gained. Similar
results have been obtained by Morgan’*® with the pomace fly, Droso-
phila. The red-eyed, white-eyed, pink-eyed and orange-eyed var-
iants together with the short winged type produced as sports in the
course of experimentation behave in crossing in every instance as
Mendelian unit-characters, with the interesting addition that in
most cases the character is “sex-limited”’ 7. ¢. is carried by both sexes
but becomes evident only in one and remains latent in the other,—
a behavior similar to the heredity of color blindness in human
beings.
40. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1906, 125; Nature 1907, 76, 248,
13. Science 1910, 120.
232 ji. B ABBOLT
The conception of the dioecious individual being a sex-hybrid
receives strong confirmation of a direct nature in the ontogeny of
a single individual where that individual suffers gradual castration.
Geoffrey Smith*t has made extensive studies at Naples of spider
crabs parasitized by Sacculina. As in all crabs, the sexes are easily
distinguished structurally. The parasitization effects a gradual cas-
tration of the host through an atrophy of the genital glands and
ducts. Males thus infected by Sacculina showed every degree of
modification toward the female type! The reverse is, however, not
true of the females. It would seem, therefore, as if the male crab
carries the potentialities of the sexual characters of both sexes, i. e.
is “heterozygous,” the male determinants being dominant over the
female determinants or inhibiting them as one may prefer. Cas-
tration removes this inhibition, which would thus seem to be local-
ized in the germinal tissue, and allows the female secondary sexual
characters to appear. The mechanism of this change is not wholly
clear. It has long been known, of course, that castration deprives
the growing animal of some stimulus for the development of the
secondary sexual characters and this has been referred to an in-
ternal secretion or “hormone.” Cunningham‘? has formulated this
into a general hypothesis. Smith contends that there must be sev-
eral such “generative ferments,’ one of which stimulates the gonad
to produce another or else is “worked up” by the latter into a con-
troller of secondary sexual characters. That the mere extirpation
of the gonad is not in itself sufficient to produce the result is evi-
dent from the work of Kellogg*®? who extirpated the gonad from
the developing silk worm caterpillar without affecting the secondary
sexual characters of the moth at all. Meisenheimer*t, moreover, has
succeeded in transplanting the gonad from one sex to the other
without producing any effect on the imago. In addition to transfer-
ring the gonads or castrating the caterpillars Meisenheimer also, at
the same time, removed the rudiments of the wing in some indi-
viduals in order to see if the color pattern (which differs with the
41. Smith G. ‘Studies in the Experimental Analysis of Sex” I-II Q. J. M. S. 1909,
54, 577; ITI-IV 1. c. 1910, 55.
42. Cunningham J. T. Roux. Arch. 1908, 26, 372.
43. Kellogg V. L. J. Exp. Zool. 1905, I, 601.
44, Meisenheimer E. Verh. Deut. Zool. Gesel. 1908, 84; also ib. “Experimentelle Stu-
dien zur Soma und Geschlechts differenzierung,” I, Jena 1910.
PROGRESS IN EXPERIMENTAL ZOOLOGY 233
sex) is dependent upon the presence of the sex cells. Wherever the
wing-rudiment regenerated, the new wing was wholly uninfluenced
by the change. He found, moreover, that extirpation of the sexual
glands does not interfere in the slightest with the sexual instincts
and reactions of the male moths.
vii Bi A Pai LE ut) 5 i) am
& => AW. haat 5 im
ep ley ate P| 1 S Mee oh. Ne ( Ws date uy oie arr 4 nee “
nae Cre RRA ight HE OL ar Ia ae ee
4 : ~ : 4
SS ei k's gel HR Sia aid Vat tulad Sha gh ae
: eMovakeis Pxs
DEPARTMENT OF NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
It is the purpose, in this department, to present from time to time brief original
notes, both of methods of work and of results, by members of the Society. All members
are invited to submit such items. In the absence of these there will be given a few brief
abstracts of recent work of more general interest to students and teachers. There will be
no attempt to make these abstracts exhaustive. They will illustrate progress without at-
tempting to define it, and will thus give to the teacher current illustrations, and to the
isolated student suggestions of suitable fields of investigation.—[Editor.]
CULTURES IN VITRO.
In recent numbers of the Jour. Exp. Med. (March-May, IQIL),
Messrs. Carrel and Burrows give the technic and results of numer-
ous cultivations of the tissues of cold and warm-blooded animals
outside the body. Primary cultures were made by using fragments
taken directly from the living animals. Secondary cultures, made
of materials removed from the primary cultures were successfully
made, especially. between the third and eighth days. The results
were corroborative and in extension of those previously reported in
these notes. Tissues from malignant tumors of various kinds were
successfully grown; e. g. the Rous sarcoma of the chicken, sarcoma
of the rat, carcinoma of rat and dog. Human carcinoma did not give
good results ; because, as the authors believe, of its liquefying effect
on the culture plasma. They hope to modify the technic in such
a way as to secure the growth of the latter also.
The same authors find that the growth of tissues in vitro is regu-
lated by the dilution of the culture medium. They discover that
growth can both be accelerated and retarded by modifying the
plasma. A slight dilution, for example, always accelerated the
growth of spleen tissue, of skin, of the heart and liver of chickens.
The inference is made that the composition of the normal plasma of
the body (interstitial lymph) is not the optimum for the growth
of any of the body tissues; and thus growth is normally held in
check. Otherwise, the tissues finding their optimum conditions might
grow indefinitely and thus produce hypertrophy and even disaster.
In this event the causes for cessation of growth in animals at ma-
turity are not merely within the cell.
236 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
In the conditions found here it may be too that we have a
suggestion as to the possible origin of sportive hypertrophy and
other growth mutations.
BACILLUS LEPR# IN COLD-BLOODED ANIMALS.
Couret (Jour. Exp. Med., May, 1911) reports inoculating tad-
poles, fishes, turtles, etc., with Bacillus leprae. Quite in contrast
with the common result in warm-blooded animals, which are highly
refractory to this Bacillus, the cold-blooded vertebrates show great
receptiveness to the germs. The Bacilli multiply readily in any of
these hosts and may occur generally among the cells or be localized
in the large, so-called “lepra-cells” which they are supposed to invade.
The fish, etc., show no lesions or other external signs of their in-
fection. Dr. Couret believes that the evidence of fish being the
source of human infection by this disease is highly strengthened by
these results.
“GIANT CELLS’ IN TUMORS.
Mallory (Jour. Med. Research, April, 1911) finds at least two
types of giant cells in tumors. One results from multiple mitosis
and rapid growth. These are the true giant cells and are found in
different kinds of tumors. The second type are not indigenous tu-
mor cells at all; but are formed by the coalescence of a number of
invading endothelial leucocytes. They should not therefore give
the names to tumors (e. g. “‘giant-cell sarcoma’).
EPITHELIAL FIBRILS AND BRIDGES.
In Arch. Mikr. Anat., 1910, p. 659, Rosenstadt gives an account
of studies on the epidermis of different animals, both adult and em-
bryonic. He finds that the fibrils common to epidermal cytoplasm
run longitudinally, transversely, and vertically (i. e., perpendicular
to the exposed surface). In each of the three directions fibres pass
across the intercellular spaces, giving continuous protoplasmic con-
nection among the cells. In epithelia that produce cilia on the free
surface, similar fibrils extend into the cilia.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 237
FAUNA OF SMALL BODIES OF WATER.
E. von Daday (Zoologica 1910), in a report on the microfauna
of German East Africa, makes the point that small basins, tempo-
rary pools, marshes, and the like, are actually richer and more varied
in their fauna than are the larger lakes; and that the appearance 1s
not merely a matter of the concentration of a similar fauna into a
smaller compass.
EFFECTS OF CASTRATION ON THE GROWTH OF SPECIAL TISSUES.
Geddes (Proc. R. Soc. Edin., 1910) shows that. the removal of
testes causes a more rapid growth and division of cells in the epi-
physial cartilages. On the contrary there is an arrest of cell-devel-
opment in the penis, scrotum, and prostate glands.
Similarly Tschirwinsky finds that removal of testes is accom-
panied by a lengthening of the long bones in rams, and produces
other changes in weight, size, and so forth, which are not uniformly
distributed, but localized in certain organs and dimensions. It would
thus seem that the presence of testicular products in the blood nor-
mally retards the growth of some types of body cells and serves as
a definite stimulus to that of others, after the manner of the
hormones.
PERIODICITY IN SPIROGYRA.
Danforth (Rept. Mo. Bot. Gard., 1910) starting with a con-
sideration of the rhythmical production of sexual bodies in Dictyota,
related in period to the tides, reports an undertaking to discover what
may be the stimuli to conjugation in Spirogyra. As is well known,
some species at least of Spirogyra enter the conjugating stage as the
season gets well advanced and after an extended period of vegetative
growth. It has been a mooted question whether the period is con-
trolled internally or is due to one or more external factors. Danforth
used several species of Spirogyra, and repeated Benecke’s experi-
ments, but on the whole fails to get experimental evidence of the
factors. Benecke thought that solutions with diminished amounts
of ammonium salts produced the sexual stages. He suggested that
238 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
in nature these salts are withdrawn from the water, as the season
advances, by the higher plants.
THE SPIROCHAETS.
In the Q. J. M. S., April, 1911, Dobell expresses the view that
the organisms recently included under the term “Spirochaets” may
properly be embraced in a single group for which he proposes the
name Spirochaetoidea. Under this grouping he includes three gen-
era, as follows:
1. Spirochaeta,—free-living, aquatic spirochaets.
2. Treponema,—parasitic in various animals; e. g., the syphilis
organism, the organism of relapsing fevers,
CLC:
3. Cristispira,—parasitic in the intestine and cystalline style of
Lamellibranchs.
The author holds that the Spirochaetoidea, as thus constituted,
should stand as a separate group of Protista—distinct from the
Protozoa, the Bacteria, and the Cyanophyceae.
CYTOLOGY OF BACTERIA.
Dobell (Q. J. M. S., April, 1911) has an elaborate paper deal-
ing critically with the cell-structure of bacteria. He makes the point
that the most extended studies of bacteria have been made by bac-
teriologists, who are interested primarily in the diagnostic and eco-
logical (physiological) qualities, and their technic has been elaborated
with this in view rather than to display the cytological peculiarities.
After a historical review of the sharp divergences of opinion due to
the results of these methods, he gives an account of his own studies.
on numerous species of bacteria.
He concludes that bacteria are all nucleated cells, and that the
nuclear matter may differ in different species and at different parts
of the life-cycle of one species. These nuclei may be: (1) a system
of distinct granules ; (2) a filament; (3) larger dense mass of nuclear
substance; (4) irregular branches or anastomosing strands; and
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 239
probably (5), in some instances, in the form of a vesicle similar to
that found in higher cells.
ALGAE OF MISSOURI BOTANICAL GARDEN.
Ada Hayden (Rept. Mo. Botan. Garden, 1910) gives an ac-
count of the algae found in the pools, streams, etc., of the Missouri
Botanical Garden. Preceding the systematic account is a descrip-
tion of the conditions in the garden and an analysis of the habitats
of the algae. The field is peculiarly varied and rich, and the flora
correspondingly so.
EDINGER’ S DRAWING AND PROJECTION APPARATUS.
This apparatus was principally designed to facilitate*the draw-
ing of microscopic objects, up to even comparatively high magnifica-
tions, an image of the object being formed by direct projection on the
drawing surface, where it may be traced with pencil or pen.
It is likewise adapted for throwing microscopic objects as well
as lantern slides on the screen, by simply turning the entire apparatus
into a horizontal position. It is also available for micro-photographic
work, micro-photographs being taken by means of a camera, which is
fitted with a dark slide accommodating plates up to 24x30 cm
(94x12 inches).
To obtain a sharp focus the bellows may be instantly detached
from the dark slide holder, the image then appearing on a paper
screen, which slides into the plate holder as a substitute forthe
ground glass focusing screen.
For all the aforegoing work a powerful illuminant is essential,
therefore the apparatus is supplied with a hand-feed, electric arc
lamp taking 4 amperes. This lamp differs from most patterns in
use in that the carbons are at right angles to one another, the posi-
tive being mounted in line with the optical axis of the instrument,
such arrangement not only increasing the illuminating power by
approximately 50%, but at the same time obviating almost entirely
the unsteadiness usually found in other arc lamps. It can be run,
with a suitable small rheostat, on any ordinary house current, direct
or alternating.
240 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
The apparatus may be set upon any table but it will be found
more convenient to work with the special stand designed by us, this
table being more advantageous to perform the proper work.
The apparatus proper consists of a cast iron pillar mounted
upon a rectangular frame into which a drawing board is fitted in
such a manner that it is easily removable. The pillar is slotted so
that that part carrying illuminant and microscope can be raised or
lowered and clamped at any height by a screw; this part is also
grooved to allow the adjustment of the lamp, the stage and the ob-
jective holder by levers; the face is graduated to % cm so that the
correct position of the stage can be rapidly determined.
The Microscope Body being removable from its sleeve into
which it pushes, and the Triple Nosepiece, mounted on a sliding
fitting, can be easily interchanged with a similar slide carrying Micro-
Summar Lenses.
By turning the apparatus into the horizontal position and sliding
it out of the way to the top of the pillar, sufficient room may be
secured to fix the camera in an inverted position, that is with the
dark-slide upwards. In this position the camera is available for
photographing opaque objects placed upon the drawing board.
In order to obtain entire views of large opaque objects, a new
attachment after Prof. Martin, consisting of two special arms can be
supplied which carry the camera on the opposite side of the pillar,
the object to be photographed being laid on the floor.
This eminently practical and useful apparatus is made by the
well known Microscope firm of Ernest Leitz, Wetzlar (New York
Office, 30 East 18th Street) and is in use in almost all of the fore-
most laboratories and by leading men of Science, who highly recom-
mend this Edinger Drawing and Projection Apparatus.
NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC. 241
DESIDERATA.
The editor will be glad to give space at this point, each Quarter, for a brief statement
of requests from members for such help or exchange of services as may seem likely to
advance the scientific interests for which the Society stands.—[ Editor. ]
Those persons who have particularly fine photo-micrographs
of fresh-water animals and are willing to have them used for scien-
tific purposes, will confer a favor by writing me.
Henry B. Warp,
Univ. of Illinois.
Urbana, IIL.
The undersigned will be glad to have information, or material,
bearing on the geographical distribution of any of the species of
fresh-water Oligochaeta of the United States. I shall be glad to
identify such material for members if it comes in good condition.
T. W. GALLoway,
James Millikin Univ.,
Decatur, Ill.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 243
THE PROPOSED TRANSFER OF THE SPENCER-TOLLES
MEMORIAL FUND
By reference to the April Transactions (pp. 204-5) the members will
find a proposition from Indiana University in respect to the fund of the
American Microscopical Society built up to provide a memorial to the Spencers
and Mr. Tolles. In brief, the proposition is :—
1. The A. M. S. shall turn over the fund now amounting to about $3,300
to the University of Indiana.
2. The University of Indiana shall establish a Fellowship of $500 per
annum to be awarded to students engaged in the study of optics or of any
subject requiring an optical instrument.
3. The title page of each study published by these Fellows shall bear
the announcement that the author is the “Holder of the Spencer—Tolles Memo-
rial Fellowship, founded by the American Microscopical Society in charge of
Indiana University,” and a similar announcement shall be made in the annual
catalog of the University —[Editor].
STATEMENT BY PROFESSOR SIMON H. GAGE,
PAST PRESIDENT, A. M. S.
With reference to the proposed transfer of the Spencer-Tolles memorial
fund to the Indiana University perhaps the following statement would be
appropriate from one who was present at the origin of the fund, has watched
its growth with solicitude, and has been in touch with the devoted members
who have made it what it is.
In the first place it is well to get a clear conception of the purpose of
this fund. If one looks up the history as given in the various volumes of the
Transactions commencing with its origin in 1884, there was and has been in
the minds of the creators of that fund one fundamental idea, viz, to establish
some kind of a worthy memorial for the Spencers and for Mr. Tolles.
From the beginning also, the most fitting memorial seemed to be the
researches in the field covered by the Society which this fund could aid in
bringing to a successful conclusion and publication.
If the interpretation here given is correct, then one can assert strongly
that the sole purpose of the Society in creating this fund was to honor and
keep alive the memory of the three men who made our country respected
throughout the world by their optical instruments, especially microscopic
objectives.
So far as I have been able to learn, it never entered the minds of the
founders of this fund nor of the ones who by free service have made it grow
to its present proportions, that the purpose of the fund was in any way con-
nected with keeping the Society alive or of giving it importance.
244 THE SPENCER-TOLLES FUND
During the last few years when it seemed that the Society was on the
verge of eternal sleep, the disposition of this fund so that it might surely
fulfill the purpose for which it was created, has been very seriously considered
by many of those who created it.
At the earnest solicitations of some of the founders the writer inquired
of the past presidents and the members of the elective executive committee,
and the special Spencer-Tolles Fund committee whether it might not be wise
to ask some university to administer this fund.
The selection of a University for administrator seemed wise for two
reasons: (1) A University is of all human institutions one of the most im-
mortal. (2) In such an institution are found the ambitious young men and
women with the training and enthusiasm to make the researches which could
serve as the real and living memorials to the men we wished to honor.
Of all those addressed there was substantial agreement with this sug-
gestion except perhaps by one of the creators of the fund, and two or three
who were not contributors.
One University from which researches come in a steady stream has offered
to take our fund and establish a research fellowship for all time, granting
each year $500 for the same, truly a munificent offer. The simple question
for the Society now is, shall this offer be accepted and our memorial made a
real living and perpetual force in our country?
The only argument that can be offered against this generous offer of
Indiana University, it seems to me, is that the retention of the fund will be
to the advantage of the Society. It will help to keep it alive and give it
importance. Perhaps this is true, but I trust that the desire of the founders
of this fund will make all put aside any selfish interest, and welcome gladly
this opportunity to make the fund practically $10,000 and insure the continu-
ance of the memorial as long as our country lasts.
It seems to me furthermore that in order to see clearly for one’s self
the entire series of facts which can render an intelligent judgment possible
the following table with the accompanying statements and references should
be in the hands of each member.
Sources of the Spencer-Tolles Memorial Fund of the American Micro-
scopical Society, and estimated amount available July 1, 1911:
Acad. Natl. Sci., Phila. (Biol. and Gortlinde scien lips--se==— === 3.00
Micrso Sect.) hans eee ae ee eee $25.00 Cox; J). °D sca. 32s 255 se 5.00
Aspinwall, Jobin... 0s-—ee = eee GBHe b= (Gri, Miler eae 30.00
The Bausch & Lomb Optical Co-_----- 50200) = "Curtiss Dr.) Lestec- == 10.00
Belle Dr: PAC Mee eee 2 FOU Dennis) or Wea eee nee 5.00
*Brown,;, (Robett-2----+—-—---- === 50.00 *Duncanson, Prot. El. B.--2-— 50.00
“Brown; Jj.) stantord) 2. 2==-= = 50:00) * Biliott, Dr. Arthas 50.00
Buffalo Soc. of Natl. Science__---___- 25:00: | Beiels Adolph’ =-= = eee 2.50
Burner, Dr: Nathane 222s 1.00 Fell. Dr? Geoe "his 22_ 2. eee 5.00
Burrill erotic eee ee 5.00 Fellows; iChas..qSt22s22—2 == eae 10.00
Carter; John ~E-=—- = ee 10.00 Gages Protas oy ll sae ee 35.00
Claypole; Brot, 4h. Wes 3.00 Griffith, Eh . Aie2os ee 5.00
Goffin: VRobert: 2-22 = ee 2.00" * Hately, John \Gi-2222= = aaa 50.00
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 245
Tron City’ Micro. Society_------------- WA: 9GH Schultze) (ChasaeSeeeensees ae osee toe oees 1.06
Kellicottsy br0ise| Sve se = anne ee 5:00) * (Smithheji,G. 222s a See eee 15.00
Rendall SD rw. Dyess -- sea oe 5300) Smithy Wiay. Mi seascos eae eee 10.00
WenyonweVissieAday Mio =a ene 5300" Spencer. Lens) Co, 2s eee e enna 25.00
Kerarissse bra WVie { Ggee ae ee ee 1.00 St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journal____ 10.00
Karttschmitt, jiohnt ==. aan 6:00) - “PaylorsGeo. C.i 22-222 ee eee 3.00
Katham-oDrs) Vida Ans ssoosaco a sane 5:00)" VEroy:/Seit Ass’nia22s So eee 50.00
Wewisww lam icons soe es eee H00), . Worce;} Co) Misc S22 eee 10.00
Be wisheD) cae VWV ict paaao arenas tenes oe 1000)" Ward) Prot. wel. iB. ssosee eee 10.00
Maddoxe sD rwwlt.;) Wi.cssaseencesaceseoces 6S Ward, "Dri Re Bisco eee 25.00
Manton brs \Wisbicsna = seen eeetoee = 6:00)7 Wihelpleyso Dr: Eitn MWiesssa nee aeen ae 2.00
Mekom a Rey.) idazlets. 2-5) os anes 20.00
Mellor C@.. Ges. fe sae SS 35.00 ‘hotalu Contributionss- = ee eee $ 996.27
Mercer Dire tAts © yess ececee es eee 1.00 Sales, Proceedings, === 625.73
MitinvoreChase> Greens ss. oes ee 5.00 Int. and dividends to January, 1911 1815.11
IMosrrove Dri, Soult soon os Se sear es 5.00
Newcomerrninh, Si - a 5.00 Eromburallsouncesi 2a ee ene $3437.11
New Jersey State Micr. Society_------ 25.00 Less: Grants Nos. 1, 2 and 3 $100.00
Penmnocksmbdwis jo-cee esac sasaseennsen es 5.00 Dues Life members-_--- 32.00
pain Macnusy asso asses aeons 16.57 Expenses) soe. eos e ee 19.43
Rarersmerols Wy Neen a oe eee 25.00 +Lost in transmission 50.00 201.43
Royalvicrs: S0Ciety === == 25.20
Schoeneyav Or wilisecnasoseeen nese 2.00 Now ons ihandes=s'- eee eae 3285.68
Seawell brotaw Bienen sates eee -50 Dividend, July, 1911, estimated_--_ 99.07
shepards: Dr. Chasisiie 522 S537 2 eS 5.00
== Making total July, 1911_------------ $3334.75
*Life members.
This fund was established at the Rochester meeting of the Society
under the presidency of Hon. J. D. Cox, by the following resolution of the
committee on memorials: “Your committee would respectfully report that
in their opinion this Society should express its willingness to receive and
care for any moneys which may from time to time be voluntarily contrib-
uted for the purpose of perpetuating by suitable memorials the memory of
the late distinguished opticians, our late honorary members, Charles A.
Spencer and Robert B. Tolles, and we therefore offer the following resolu-
tone?) (p) 270).
“Resolved, That the Treasurer be directed to open two accounts with
the Charles A. Spencer Memorial Fund, and the Robert B. Tolles Memorial
Fund, and credit to each all moneys contributed for that purpose and invest
them securely till such time as an amount may be accumulated which this
Society shall deem sufficient to pay for suitable memorials and shall report
at each annual meeting of this Society the state of each of said funds.”
Signed: W. A. Rogers, H. F. Detmers, Geo. E. Blackham, and done in
full meeting, Wednesday afternoon, Aug. 20, 1884.
On Friday, Aug. 21, 1885, Dr. Geo. E. Fell, Treasurer and Custodian,
made the following report: (p. 249)
“Tn accordance with the resolution unanimously adopted at the Rochester
meeting of the Society, establishing a Spencer and Tolles Memorial Fund,
the following report is presented: _The first cash subscription to this
246 THE SPENCER-TOLLES FUND
fund was made by the Royal Microscopical Society, Dec. 17, 1884.’ The entire
subscription in this first report is as follows:
Royal Microscopical Society___--______ $25.00" a vobnekernittschnitt == es ee ee 5.00
J. D. Cox (President of Rochester Pe Oe Newcomers. 5.00
Meeting) teat ae eee eee ees 5: 00i% Chas: ¢Shepard =e. 22s2== 22-2. eee 5.00
D. S. Kellicott (Secretary of the BY MEU Griftithee= <8 aes eee ee eee 5.00
OCTET Sees ee Sees ae ee eo 5.00
George E. Fell (Treasurer and Custo
Gian: (228 s25 See ee ee ee Sh See Das 5.00
At the Rochester meeting when this fund was established, there were
present from the Royal Microscopical Society of London the Rev. W. H.
Dallinger, then President, and Mr. Alfred W. Bennett, Member of the Coun-
cil. It was at this meeting that President Cox gave his masterly address:
“Robert B. Tolles and the Angular Aperture Question.” A portrait of Mr.
Tolles and a biography of Dr. Geo. E. Blackham also appear in the Pro-
ceedings of this meeting.
Mr. Tolles died in Nov., 1883, hence the review of his work by
President Cox and the biography of Dr. Blackham came naturally at this
meeting. The presence of Dr. Dallinger and Mr. Bennett of the Royal
Microscopical Society explains in part the gift of that Society toward the
memorial.
At the close of the first report of the Custodian of this fund, Dr. Fell, in
referring to Professor Wm. A. Rogers who had made a most generous offer
for enlarging the fund, says: “He (Professor Wm. A. Rogers), suggests that
the income of the fund be awarded in prizes for specific original research.”
Three grants from the income of this fund have already been made
by the Executive Committee to aid in publishing original investigations.
The first of $50.00, was given to Dr. David C. Hilton to assist in his paper
on the Development of the Liver and the Ventral Pancreas in the Pig.
(Vol. xxiv (1902) pp. 55, and 177.) The second and the third grants were
made to Prof. F. E. and Mrs. E. S. Clements to aid in their investigations
“On the Relation of Leaf Structure to Physical Factors.” (Vol. xxv (1903)
p. 169, and xxvi (1904) pp. 19 and 287).
In the Society’s Transactions may be found Memoirs and Portraits of
the Spencers and Mr. Tolles as follows: Charles A. Spencer, by Hamilton
L. Smith, 1882, pp. 40-74; Robert B. Tolles, by Geo. E. Blackham, 1884, pp.
41-46; Herbert R. Spencer, by Henry R. Howland, 1899, pp. 252-255, without
portrait.
In the Transactions of 1901; pp. 19-29, Dr. Wm. C. Krauss discusses
“The debt of American Microscopy to Spencer and Tolles.” Portraits of all
three are given. Among other things Dr. Krauss gives a brief account of
the foundation of the Spencer—Tolles Fund; and makes the suggestion, p.
21, that the name of Herbert R. Spencer be officially added, so that the
Spencer—Tolles fund should be for a memorial to the three. This suggestion
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 247
was incorporated in the report of the Spencer—Tolles committee, 1901, p. 265-6,
and adopted by the Society, p. 277.
References to the founding, upbuilding and legislation concerning this
Spencer—Tolles Memorial Fund may be found as follows: 1884, pp. 267, 270-
271; 1885, p. 249-250, with list of original subscribers; 1886, pp. 199, 221; 1887,
list of donors, p. 326, appeal for increase and discussion of purpose, 349-350;
1888, no report; 1889, no report; 1890, p. 252; 1891, p. 209; 1892, p. 36; 1893,
DP. 34; 1804, p. 18; 1895, p. 78-80, 94; 1896, pp. 31, 46; 1807, p. 195; 1808, p. 354;
1890, p. 264; 1900, discussion, pp. 206-7, appointment of committee, p. 207, 210;
1901, Spencer-Tolles Fund Committee recommended that H. R. Cpencer be in—
cluded in memorial; adopted, pp. 265-6, 277; Standing Committee known as
Spencer-Tolles Fund Committee (see By-law IX) ; Custodian authorized, 276;
1902, p. 175, list of contributors to date, pp. 267-8, Custodian’s report, p. 282;
1902, p. 175, life members, fees to Spencer-Tolles fund, 175, 179; 1903, pp.
169, 172; 1904, p. 289; 1905, pp. 163-167; 1906, pp. 215-16, 220. Sale of Pro-
ceedings to Spencer-Tolles Fund commencing 1898. See Treasurer’s and Cus—
todian’s reports.
SOME OPPOSING VIEWS.
To the Members of the A. M. S—
The undersigned recognize the unselfish work of the Spencer—Tolles
committee in their effort to make secure the future of the Fund committed
to their care. The recent crisis in the history of the Society makes clear the
wisdom of taking at once the steps necessary to insure a proper administration
of these funds in case the existence of the American Microscopical Society
should cease.
We believe, however, that this crisis is safely past; but we recommend
that the Executive Committee be urged to take, in accordance with consti-
tutional provision, the course desirable for safeguarding the future of the
fund if the Society should discontinue.
In the meantime we submit the following reasons for believing that the
American Microscopical Society should not, under the present conditions,
accept the offer of the Indiana University.
1. The American Microscopical Society and not a group of individuals,
is responsible for the fund. Two-fifths of the fund was obtained by sale of
property belonging to the members of this corporation. The care of it has
been supplied by an officer of this Society. Every member of the Society is
directly interested in the Fund, whether he has personally contributed or not.
2. The memorial is not a mere memorial to the Spencers and Tolles;
It is an American Microscopical Society Memorial to Spencer and Tolles. So
long as this Society persists there is no institution so fit, through sympathy
and interest, to give form and direction to the memorial. The Society that
sacrificed to build it up can administer it.
3. In awarding the administration of the fund some institution will
be advantaged. This is inevitable. If, for the sake of argument, it should
248 THE SPENCER-TOLLES FUND
be admitted that this fund would keep alive the American Microscopical
Society and add to its influence, this would be a by-product of the fund’s
activity which would be alike honoring to these men and stimulative of the
various aspects of the cause in which they were interested. The perpetuity
of the American Microscopical Society is not dependent in any way upon
this fund; but there is no good ground to forego whatever strength and
encouragement would accrue from administering it in the entirely parallel
courses which the Society and the Memorial must take.
4. In the light of the suggestions above, we feel that it becomes
primarily a matter of the quality and appropriateness of the memorial. It is
proposed that the memorial take the form of a Fellowship in Indiana Univer—
sity. There have already arisen protests from members whose interests have
been connected with other Universities. Furthermore, such a fellowship
would be only one among hundreds of research fellowships in the Univer-
sities of the country. It would have little that is distinctive in its char-
acter. We believe that ways can be devised by the Executive Committee of
the Society to stimulate research in such a manner as to make a more dis-
tinctive contribution both to science and to the memory of these men than
through a University Fellowship.
5. As an example of what might be done, and still retain the adminis-
tration, we would suggest this fund be made a fund to encourage research by
publication; that its income be devoted to publishing the fourth, or index,
number of each volume of the quarterly Transactions of the American Micro-
scopical Society; that this number be known annually as the Spencer-Tolles
number; and that each of the four numbers carry a tablet or plate indicat-
ing the essential facts of this memorial. Such a device would strengthen
the hands of the American Microscopical Society in its efforts to extend the
spirit of research among amateurs and University students alike; it would
encourage the diffusion of research among groups of people not directly
reached by Universities by increasing the avenues of reliable publication;
it would leave the administration of the fund in the hands of the Society that
collected it; and, finally, it would furnish as honorable and useful, and a
more unique, memorial to the Spencers and Tolles than any possible fellow-
ship buried among numerous similar ones among the bulky pages of a
University Catalog.
6. We therefore recommend:
(a) That the Society do not accept the proposal of the Indiana
University, and
(b) That the next annual meeting take the steps necessary to amend
the constitution in such a way as to administer the Spencer-
Tolles fund through the American Microscopical Society, and
to expend the interest only of the Fund in the encouragement
of research, and to furnish a method for the permanent admin-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 249
istration of the fund in some effective way in case the Ameri-
can Microscopical Society should cease.
GrorcE Epwarp Fett, F. R. M. S.,
Past President A. M.
T. J. Burritt,
Past President A. M.
ABert McCALra,
Past President A. M. S.
HERBERT OsBorN,
Past President A. M.
Vina A. LatHam, M. D.,
Past Vice-President A. M.
F. L. LANDACRE.
Dear Sir :-—
As an organizer of the American Microscopical Society and a member
_ of the Indianapolis Congress, I most emphatically endorse the above recom-
mendations and believe it would be most unfair to the Society to separate the
Spencer-Tolles Fund from the Society at this time.
GrorcGe Epwarp Fett, M. D.
My Dear Professor :
The only excuse for placing the custody of the fund in anything but the
Society is the supposition that the latter is to cease to exist. If this can not
now be assumed it must not, in my opinion, give up to any one or to any
institution the responsibility of the trust for which it is itself beholden.
Very truly yours,
T. J. Burret.
My dear Sir:
Ever since I have considered the matter with any care it has seemed to
me wholly inadvisable to divert the Spencer-Tolles’ Fund, and in trying to
see what would be the best use to make of the income I have found nothing
better than its use for the publication of the Society proceedings. Certainly no
better monument could be erected to the memory of these three great micro—
scopists than to have every number of our Transactions bear their names.
In perpetuating the publications of the Society by means of the fund col-
lected to serve as a memorial for these men, we are, in my opinion, doing the
most with the money that can be done. Certainly these publications as they
stand upon the shelves of the scientific men of the country will be a more
suggestive memorial than a marble shaft or a granite column. I have there—
fore very fully decided in my mind that we should make such use of this fund,
Very truly yours,
CuHartes E. BEsSEY.
Dear Sir:
As I understand, the Spencer-Tolles Fund was founded to assist the
members of the A. M. S. in original research. It has on several occasions been
250 THE SPENCER-TOLLES FUND
used for that purpose. The Society is not dead or dying, but is as alive
today as it has ever been, so there is no reason for administering its assets.
In my opinion there is no good reason why any change should be made in
our method of administering this fund. Because it is not being used is no
good reason why it should be transferred to outsiders. Let it keep on ac-
cumulating and some day the Society will find good use for it.
Yours truly,
J. C. Smirg.
THE VIEWS OF MR. PFLAUM, CUSTODIAN.
To the American Microscopical Society :
Should this offer be accepted?
Our experience since 1907 shows that the existence of this society under
the old conditions is precarious. Whether, in the present state and diversified
use of the microscope, the society has any further functions may be debatable;
but it seems undeniable that this organization, under its original wide aims and
plans, lacks that stability and promise of continuity necessary for the preser-
vation and purposes of a permanent fund. It was created and gathered for
the purpose of honoring the memory of Spencer and Tolles by means of en-
couragement of microscopical research. This research was, like the compass,
to reach out in all directions. Now it is proposed by those most active in
the resurrection of the society to restrict its purpose to one line and confine
it to Micro-Biology. This seems wise and proper and promising new life;
but it is, nevertheless, an abandonment of old broad purposes and establishing
one single new one. Whether the uses of a fund can legally be made to follow
such fundamental change might be a troublesome question, but with the
answer in the negative almost in view. As a rule a trust fund can not be
diverted from a broad general purpose for which it was created, and confined
into one narrow channel. Consent thereto can not be obtained because the
majority of the donors have passed away. However, it is of greater import-
ance to examine the probable effect of this projected departure upon the
future of the Society.
It may be a serious question whether a change from an all-embracing
program to a single item may not harbor germs of discord, if not decay, if
the Society, regardless of such important change, will continue under its well-
known name. Under the designation of a whole fleet it will now offer but a
single ship, and thus sail under false pretense.
In calling attention to this matter I wish to emphasize the wholly altered
conditions under which the Society necessarily would have to conduct its
affairs to ensure a reasonable promise of success. It is certain that it can not
continue under its old broad aims. Under the specialized use of the micro-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 251
scope our transactions did for some years back no longer answer or serve
every use or expectation, and the membership dwindled year by year.*
The confining of the purposes of this society to one subject is practical
in itself; but raises the question whether enough of the old members can be
retained and new obtained to warrant that continuity which our perma-
nent fund demands regardless of the legal question involved.
There are two separate and distinct loyalties demanded of us. One is to
the Past, embracing former aims, and achievements, as represented by our
fund. The other is to the Present and Future, to the new life and activity of
the Society. It appears to me that the two are not identical, but without
being antagonistic. Antagonism arises when incompatibilities are ignored;
when recognized there may be parting in peace and amity. We should admit
that the aims of this Society have been honorably accomplished, and ac-
knowledge that many workers care nothing for, and many members have
grown out of and away from it. For this reason it seems proper to specialize
also the society itself under a new name and for a distinct purpose. It could
with credit monopolize the open field of Micro-Biology. An “American
Micro-Biological Society” would be an honored daughter of this Society. It
would be honest in name and purpose, and draw on many workers, for
whom the old Society was insufficient. And furthermore such society would
become a real scientific body which in some quarters was denied to this
organization.
However, the Spencer-Tolles Fund should remain as a monument of
the name, aims and achievements of this Society. If transferred to the
University of Indiana, under the conditions agreed upon everything will be
accomplished that the donors and the members hoped and worked for.
Very respectfully,
Macnus Priaum, Custodian.
December 15, IQIo.
AN ANSWER TO MR. PFLAUM.
Two points are voiced in Mr. Pflaum’s suggestions:
to}
1. The existence of the Society, whether under the “old conditions”
or those of the future, is too precarious to enable us to trust to it the
administration of the Spencer-Tolles Fund.
2. The changes in the Society in recent years, and especially since the
renewal of its activity, are sufficient to make the retention of the old name
a dishonest act, and even constitute a diversion of trust so far as the Spencer-
Tolles Fund is concerned.
*The records show actual membership: 1898, 214; 1899, 208; 1900, 197; 1901, 190; 1902,
179; 1903, 192; 1904, 178; 1905, 176; and 1906, 151; a loss since 1898 of over 31 per cent.
These figures are taken from the treasurer’s reports. The list of members is delusive.
The report for 1907 is not published at this writing.
252 THE SPENCER-TOLLES FUND
A careful examination of the history of the society makes it perfectly
clear that there is nothing of moment in either of these contentions.
It is true that the paid up membership of the Society is at its lowest
point in years; it is equally true that many of the older members are drop-
ping out and that few of the charter members are living. It is quite apparent,
however, to the writer, that none of this is in any way due to lack of interest
in the work represented by the American Microscopical Society nor to unwill-
ingness on the part of microscopists to join it. This is shown by the fact that
the last six months have seen more accessions in members and subscribers
than any full year since 1883, a period of 28 years. As far as the records show
there is only one year in the history of the Society when greater growth has
been recorded. Twenty-five new members in the next six months will make
this the greatest year of growth in the 33 years of its history. The Secretary
has no doubt that these will be secured.
The American Microscopical Society has as strong an appeal to the
students who use the microscope as it has ever had. It is no danger of dying
if it is given intelligent care and supervision.
In the second place, it is claimed that the Society has undergone and
is undergoing such a narrowing and limitation as to make “wholly altered
conditions” of life necessary, and to forfeit its right to be considered the
same Society.
The writer has taken the trouble to go through the files of the Transac-
tions in an effort to see just what there is of justice in this claim. There is no
better way to determine the interest of the members than by the papers pre-
sented and published in the Transactions.
In making the analysis I have attempted to classify the papers in three
heads: (1) biologic; (2) micro-technic, including microscopy, apparatus,
technic, methods, etc.; and (3) miscellaneous, including optics, micrometry,
photography, and non-biologic uses of the microsccope. It is manifest that
numerous difficulties will appear in classification. For example, many notes
classed in (2) look directly to biologic applications.
Two sets of facts were used,—the number of papers and the space oc-
cupied by them. The accompanying table gives the results in percentages of
the whole:
Jo Jo
% Micro- Miscel-
Biology technic laneous
Vols. 1-10 |Number of Papers... 51 | 29 | 20
1878-87. |Pages Occupied..... 52 17 | 31
Vols. 11-20 |Number of Papers.. SI 34 | 15
1888-97. |Pages Occupied..... | 76 14 | 10
Vols. 21-29. |Number of Papers.. 74 19 | 7
1898-1910. |Pages Occupied 8%
The table shows that Biology has always been the major interest of the
Society, and that there has been a steady growth in the interest in it
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 253
throughout the whole period. This was true when the Spencer-Tolles
Fund was conceived. A closer analysis shows that there was a sharp dimuni-
tion of interest during the second decade in group three. During the last
fifteen years the contributions in group two have steadily diminished.
Another valuable index of the interest of the membership is recorded
in the Transactions for the year 1802, eight years after the Spencer-Tolles
fund was started. This date is nearer to the beginning of the Society than
to the present, and the result may fairly be taken as a normal expression
of the interpretation which its members have put upon its proper scope.
In that year a card was sent out calling for an expression of the choice of
the members as to subjects of interest. Of the members addressed, 153
answered. Many of these expressed several interests. The vote as sum-
marized in Vol. 15 is as follows:
Bacteriology, 70 votes; apparatus, 62: medical microscopy, 61; his-
tology, 69; plant life, 42: embryology, 34; diatoms, 27; algae, 22; infusoria,
22; mosses, II; everything else, including lithology, entomology, microm-
ethy,, Cte), 13:
Allowing the whole of the last item to the non-biological studies, this
expression gives 82 % of the total interest as directly concerned with biol—
ogy; leaving only 18% for all other interests, including technic, optics, mi-
crometry, etc. This is practically the same percentage that has been ex—
pressed in Transactions during the last ten volumes.
There has been no sudden nor arbitrary change of interest in the
American Microscopic Society. What change there is has been a steady evo-
lution along the lines of the initial major interests of the Society from
the beginning. That the studies of the microscope itself and of its technic
should now be expressed in brief notes where formerly they were given
pages is perfectly natural, and argues no loss of interest. It merely argues
increase and diffusion of knowledge. It is preposterous to contend that a
society must continue to talk of just the things with which it began in order
to be its own legitimate successor.
It only remains to be said that the present Secretary has not in any
sense changed the course or rate of this evolution. He has merely recog-
nized it, and plans to utilize this increased biologic interest for the good of
the Society, and serve the real needs of the members through the publica—
tions. The emphasis will continue to be, as it has evidently been from the
beginning, on micro-biology; but the Society will continue to receive and to
publish any matter which makes a real contribution to any department of
microscopy.
If it has been legitimate for the American Microscopical Society to
hold this fund for the last 15 years and to contribute to its growth, so far
as any change of policy is concerned it is still entitled to hold and admin-
ister it in any way allowed by its present judgment and by the terms of its
own constitution relative to the matter.
T. W. Gattoway.
3
2
ES teh)
of
HENRY BAUSCH
NECROLOGY
HENRY; BAUSCH.
Mr. Henry Bausch, second vice-president of the Bausch & Lomb Opti-
cal Co., died at Augusta, Ga., March 2d, 1909. He had been ill for some
time and accompanied by his wife had gone south in January in the hope
of regaining his health.
Mr. Bausch was the third son of J. J. Bausch, who, with Henry Lomb,
organized the immense optical plant which bears their names. He was born
in Rochester, was educated in the public schools, the old Free Academy, and
Cornell University.
In 1875 he entered the St. Paul Street factory of Bausch & Lomb,
working as did his brothers, at the bench with other workmen and starting
in at the bottom in order that he might learn every part of the business. He
had been especially interested in the microscope and_ scientific apparatus
department, his early training and natural aptitude making him particularly
competent to assist in developing the manufacture of these instruments and
to supervise their construction.
During his business life he gave much time and attention to the
manufacture of the optical parts of the instruments, and this in the face of
extraordinary difficulties, for in the days when he was struggling with this
branch of science the opportunities for procuring such knowledge were few.
In 1888 Mr. Bausch married; his wife and one daughter, their only
child, survive him.
Modest and retiring in disposition, Mr. Bausch devoted himself to his
family and to the great manufacturing industry he had helped to build up.
He has long been an honored member of the American Microscopical
Society.
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED I89QI
PUBLISHED OUARTEREY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXX
NUMBER Four
Decatur, ILL.
Review PRINTING & STATIONERY Co.
1911
NOTICE TO MEMBERS
The Secretary is pleased to state that more new Members and
Subscribers have already been enlisted during the year 1911 than
in any other year of the Society’s history. With one month of
work still ahead there is no question that we shall pass well beyond
the 100 mark before the Annual Meeting.
OFFICERS.
PV OSIeNE nA Tes ERERTZUER. MD Sa.5 cievslgiiaele achels eis\ieietee Wee Kansas City, Mo.
Paper erestaent> = MG hs TEEROD® Saris a) obs dielos cinieitie:eieiava sroraisielatsta a's Missoula, Mont.
SC CHELOM\ cele VV cps GATE OWA sinyeacy a oie asaie alelore ats erohere ehalevaheleicley euersierees Decatur, III.
EV COSULEV a as ele EL ANIKIUN SONicieieicicrcievocel arore oleraieleetel olelier stersiofovesetel Charleston, Ill.
Gustodian-. | MAGNUS) (PELAUMs ca cec « iesicie ture oalate a orelstete aie cicheleee Meadville, Pa.
REE ICR VVOL COUT a arcvarcittescrolete ake oka ro eT ae aetna avotohc Siac ictoeonie Lincoln, Neb
Ee ESO VEAT: TO Nistatciavcceicte;s wlaiecdiototatereisre ajate. see roheiele lore aie ain tretauscatsteten et Gambier, Ohio
ITeDIN a OTe Repeat crea ea nt hi kM LOOMS con ems tt Sia cet im Bae Mae Buffalo, N. Y
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
R. H. Warp, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Troy, N. Y.,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1870.
J. D. Hyatt, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
Asert McCatta, Ph.D., of Chicago, Ill.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883.
T. J. Burritt, Ph.D., of Urbana, Il,
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gro. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Buffalo, N. Y.,
at Detroit, Mich., 1890.
MarsHALL D. Ewe tt, M.D., of Chicago, IIl.,
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Simon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1895 and 1906.
A. CiiFForD Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1896.
A. M. Buiette, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. Eicenmann, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., 1901.
Cuar_es E. Bessry, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
E. A. Birce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Urbana, III,
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
Hersert Ossorn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXX, Number 4, October, 1911
A New Species of Trematode from the Muskrat, Fiber zibethicus, with
Plate I, by Franklin D. Barker and Joseph W. Laughlin............. 261
The Relation of Crithidia Melophagia to the Sheep’s Blood, by Leroy
DS wan le Sra eee hae eee oe eee ee eee REPEAT Cee 275
The Common Fresh Water Oligochaeta of the United States, with 14
Mextekioures: bya dn Wa Gallowaye terete reece eee EEE LEE ene 285
Notes, Reviews, Etc. Selection Among Bacteria; Bi-lobing of Com-
pound Eyes (Plate II, Fig. 1); Exhaustion and Senility of Nerve
Cells; Treponema Pallida in Pure Cultures; Cell Inclusions of Non-
infectious Origin; Trachoma Bodies; Influence of Nerve Extirpa-
tion on Development of Muscles; Cultivation of Tissues in Alien
Sera; Selective Mating in Paramecia; Experiments on Wheat Rust
in North Dakota; Trochodota Dudenensis in Victoria; Regeneration
of Sections of Arteries; The Physiology of Reproduction; Prelimin-
ary Notice; Dedication of the Ernest Abbé Denkmal; Eighth Inter-
national Gongress of Applied Chemistry )....3.1o-iseemus eee vercmete ae 319
Gustodianss JREpOnts- Ace GR ee s cice Lit aise eto tid costs Measers le oreiecee oo nae 328
Gonstitutionsand=By Wawssjasicse6 cate se ei eee ee eee eee 330
INC CHOLOR YE TSR Ea ots clei netorsre ng alder sil dae Saleen icine ie oaks Ge eee 334
TiSt ote MlemDEES): 5,5 scr Seve sie oi csavehe etets Toke enrot Riate) et ree eee re 335
Asc Vay Se ch oe Oey er SR Ui oar Ap) eR ono ee ete hiotisds circ 345
OFFICIAL NOTICE OF THE ANNUAL MEETING
AT
WASHINGTON, D. C., DEC. 27-30, 1910
In CONNECTION WITH THE A. A. A. S.
The Meetings of the American Microscopical Society will be
limited to business sessions. Our members will offer their papers
in the sessions of Sections of the American Association and of the
similar Societies in Washington and Princeton.
Owing to the fact that many of our members expect to attend
the meeting of the Zoologists and Naturalists at Princeton, the
meeting of the A. M. S. will probably occur on Wednesday, Dec.
27, or Friday, Dec. 29.
Members will be notified by letter of the exact arrangements.
Business of extraordinary importance to the future of the
Society will be considered at this meeting, and members are urged
to be present.
& NEW SPECIES OF TREMATODE
FROM THE MUSKRAT, Fiber zibethicus*
With One Plate
By FRANKLIN D. BARKER** and JosEPH W. LAUGHLIN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GAL ROC ICEION irate eo) cvePe ela ois crave: cuisis oe: ora syare oho alevev ere: ser sedeiernielice(o els. suaucteve iavereiavetsterevscath ots Page 261
Mablenot Muskrats; Infected tccis <\s crisis ons cieelslelelels oieicieiele sisieieiv/el bis eievete:stevslelels eve lels oO Ay
PReeH ae eer atetstsvolercyai sxeketevcloistate ve evstoievecsheve reo) oleuoravere sible lel etencveie’ cai clevete tekeve is lererers ete epeis aAOS
Morphology; Of UM rematOde sateen», cje'ays a: ere s'erisfotera\ evePare lovsnalavepate:s, oxalaye eveveualee ss evahektaelats ‘ove $6, 264
Sy Sbemia tier EOSIGION! Se.2cacs o-s75 psa) averere aitels (alate aitinio cleave ere ecciaiaceic re: clave es ayerelereietorerdale nieliovaie Se 209
eapersie Oxted crars «sherelescierer si o,oit'ei sversiale arate) eo eieveusvo,susrel suelala wo] o) cialis evel chevorete larereperetarcnslet she te ea)
HK LATIACL OT ROLP LACE atte satote (crarrates Vovoto lore celenc’sy cheb oleya Vole obera\euek sYofehe sce! cutter ehoveere oisreisaste src 274
IFES. adecpgoedoooD GU0DG OUDCOSOO OCOD DOO DO ONG OOM OOD SOOMGaO Jo Ob. ce oO Mies Facing “* 274
INTRODUCTION
On examining the contents of the alimentary canal of muskrats
Fiber zibethicus which were shot on July 13, 1909, along the Loup
river near Calloway, Nebraska, a large number of trematodes, rep-
resenting several species, was found. A little later more muskrats
were secured from the same place and examined and all were found
to be infected with parasites, some of which were cestodes, others
trematodes and still others nematodes.
At the suggestion of Doctor Barker, I began the study of these
parasites of the muskrat and present the results of this study in the
following paper.
The following table shows the number of muskrats examined,
the parasites found and the organs infected.
*Studies from the Zoological Laboratory the University of Nebraska, No. 104.
**[Tt seems fitting that I should here state that the major portion of this investigation
has been done by Mr. Laughlin working under my direction and he should therefore be
given a large part of the credit for the work. I have carefully gone over all the data and
have verified it by a study of the material and the slides used in this investigation.—
Ba Di Bs
262
Specimen
uskrat.
No. 1
2
No. 3
4
No. 10
No. 11
No. 12
Muskrats
Examined.
27
BARKER AND LAUGHLIN
TABLE I
Parasites Found in Muskrats
Parasite.
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Cestode
Trematode
Trematode
Cestode
Trematode
Trematode
Nematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Cestode
Trematode
Cestode
Trematode
Trematode
Nematode
Nematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
‘Trematode
Nematode
Cestode
Cestode
Nematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Cestode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Cestode
AnAWS OW PP POP We WP BPO Prrd>
APABPABSPANNSAYS Pre Prarry
Parasites
Found.
Trematode
Trematode
Trematode
Cestode
Nematode
A
B
Cc
Organs Infected. Number.
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Caecum
Small
Small
Caecum
Small
Large
Small
Small
Caecum and large intestine
Caecum and large intestine
Caecum and large intestine
Small
Small
Caecum and large intestine
Small
Large
Large
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Large
Caecum
Caecum
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
Small
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
co
oO
Oo
dS
AWE BDH WDARWWH WOH RODROMR NODE pe
intestine
intestine
w
intestine
intestine and Caecum
intestine
intestine
a
intestine
intestine
_
intestine
intestine and Caecum
intestine and Caecum
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine and Caecum
fon)
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine and Caecum
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
intestine
_
i=)
RDN RWOR UDR RARER Ree RR DO UW DH OANEH WH
LOTALS
Organ Infected
Small intestine and Caecum
Small intestine
Large intestine and Caecum
Small intestine
Large and small intestine and Caecum
Date of
Examination.
7/13/09
A NEW SPECIES OF TREMATODE 263
It will be seen from the preceding table that the percentage of
infection was very high, every muskrat examined being infected
and that the degree of infection varied from 108 trematodes in
muskrat number 1, to two trematodes in numbers 20 and 23. The
table also shows that type A of the trematodes was found in the larg-
est number of rats, namely twenty-two, or eighty-one per cent, while
type B was found in fourteen, or fifty-one per cent, and type C in
ten, or thirty-seven per cent. The table further shows that the ces-
todes were fewer in number but more widely distributed than the
nematodes, cestodes occurring in twenty-nine per cent and nema-
todes in eighteen per cent of the muskrats examined. The small
intestine harbored the largest number of parasites, the caecum less
and the large intestine least of all. The stomach was entirely free
from parasites.
The different types of trematodes vary greatly in size, type A
measuring 30 mm and type C 3 mm, while type B was intermediate
in length.
The three types designated as A, B and C represent three very
distinct species and it is quite probable that a closer and more de-
tailed study of those classed as type B will be found to represent
more than one species. It is to be regretted that lack of time pre-
vented me from making a detailed study of all the parasites found
but this will be done later by other students in this laboratory.
As far as I have been able to learn from the literature, very
little has been published on the parasites of the muskrat and the
work which has been done is of a rather superficial nature.
TECHNIQUE
Two methods of killing and fixing were used. The first speci-
mens were killed and fixed in 10% formol. They were taken from
the muskrat, washed in normal salt, and then placed in a vial con-
taining 10% formol and allowed to stand for twenty-four hours,
and then transferred to 70% alcohol.
The remainder were killed in hot alcoholic corrosive-acetic
solution. The trematodes were first washed in normal salt solution,
then drained, and while still in the watch glass the hot corrosive was
poured over them, These were allowed to stand in the corrosive
264 BARKER AND LAUGHLIN
acetic for thirty minutes and were then transfered to 70% iodized
alcohol.
Several stains were used :—haematoxylin, borax carmine, car-
malum, eosin, and Wright’s blood stain. Haematoxylin gave the
best results in toto mounts. Wright’s blood stain stained the finer
ducts of glands well. Specimens were stained in toto in borax car-
mine for section work and the stain gave excellent results. Great
care was necessary in clearing as it was impossible to clear in cedar
oil or in xylol direct without producing great shrinkage. The best
results were obtained when the specimens were taken from absolute
alcohol to a mixture of absolute alcohol with 10% of xylol, to which
xylol was added, a pipette full at a time, until a mixture largely xylol
was obtained.
Fresh specimens mounted in glycerine proved very satisfactory
for study as the various ducts showed very distinctly ; this was espe-
cially true of the vas deferens and the vitelline ducts
MORPHOLOGY OF TREMATODE WNotocotyle
quinqueseriale n. sp.
A lack of time prevented me from studying more than one of
the trematodes obtained. The principal morphological features of
the trematode designated as type C, which I have studied in detail,
are as follows:
The body is pinkish in color, due possibly to ingested blood
from the wall of the muskrat’s intestine.
The shape of the body is that of a wedge tapering gradually
from the posterior to the anterior end. The anterior end is tapering
and the posterior end rounding, in some specimens slightly truncate.
That portion of the body anterior to the uterus is more distensible
than the posterior portion and in distended specimens has the ap-
pearance of a neck region. The dorsal surface is smooth and slight-
ly convex while the ventral surface is concave and provided with
five distinct longitudinal rows of wart-like projections or papillae
which extend from the posterior to the anterior end of the body.
Each row consists of from 16 to 18 distinct papillae, making 80 to
go papillae in all. Plate I, figs. 1, 2,6. The papillae vary somewhat
A NEW SPECIES OF TREMATODE 265
in size, but are all knob-like in shape, being set off from the body by
a slight construction. Plate I, figs. 1, 2, 6, 8, 9.
Sectioned papillae show that the uterus, vitelline glands, ovary
and testes dip into them when they lie beneath these organs. Plate
I, figs. 8, 9.
The rows of separate papillae constitute one of the most con-
stant and distinctive external characters of the worm. The skin is
smooth and without spines.
The worms vary in length from 2.5 mm to 4.0 mm, the mode
being 3.0 mm, with 15% having this length. The minimum width
of the body at its widest part, namely at the level of the ovary, is
0.66 mm, while the maximum width is 1.33 mm, the mode being 1
mm, with 45% having this width. The width is seen to be more
constant than the length.
The oral sucker is at the anterior end, ventral in position and
its musculature is strongly developed. The worms clung tena-
ciously to the walls of the intestine of the muskrat and it was neces-
sary to use some force in pulling them away.
The length of the oral sucker (anterior-posterior diameter)
varies from ¢c.20 mm to 0.416 mm, the mode being 0.30 mm, 27%
having this lergth. The width varies from 0.216 mm to 0.450 mm,
the mode being 0.333 mm, 38° having this width.
A pharynx is entirely wanting in this trematode. The mouth
opens into a very short esophagus, so short in some specimens that
it scarcely deserves the name. The esophagus divides into two in-
testinal caeca which run caudad on either side of the coils of the
uterus; posterior to the uterus they turn mesad and then pass pos-
teriorly between the ovary and testis on either side and end as blind
sacs in the posterior end of the trematode. These tubes are simple
and without secondary branchings and have nearly the same diameter
thruout. Plate I, fig. ro.
The reproductive system in this form is quite complicated and
extensive. Both male and female sexual organs are found in the
same individual. The male genitals consist of two testes, vas efferens,
vas deferens, seminal vesicle, pars prostatica, cirrus and cirrus pouch.
The testes are located in the posterior fifth or sixth of the trematode,
posterior to the uterus and one on either side of the ovary and lying
266 BARKER AND LAUGHLIN
in the same plane. They are somewhat elongated and quite irregu-
lar in outline, due to their lobes, of which there are from five to
eight. The lobes on the ventral suface extend into the ventral papil-
lae which lie ventral to them. The texture of the testes is distinctly
granular. Their length varies from 0.30 mm to 0.50 mm, the mode
being 0.35 mm for 40%. Their width varies from 0.16 mm to 0.33
mm, the mode being 0.25 mm for 65%. The length is seen to be
about twice the width.
From the inner side of the anterior border of each testis a
short vas efferens passed cephalad and mesad. The two vas efferens
unite near the shell-gland to form a large vas deferens, which
passes cephalad in the median plane of the body and dorsal to the
uterus until it reaches the anterior coils of the uterus where it turns
to the right and after making one or two loops enters the cirrus-
pouch in which it coils several times and then enters the seminal
vesicle.
In some specimens the vas deferens lies ventral to the most pos-
terior coils of the uterus but only for a short distance. Plate I,
fig. 10.
The seminal vesicle is oval or pear shaped and varies in size
according to the degree of distension by the mass of sperm cells.
It lies at the base and within the cirrus pouch. Its walls are mus-
cular, both circular and longitudinal muscle fibres being present.
Anterior to the seminal vesicle lies a long and at first somewhat
twisted tubular organ with glandular walls; this is the pars pros-
tatica.
The seminal vesicle and the base of the pars prostatica are sur-
rounded by a mass of glandular cells which form the prostate gland.
The pars prostatica leads to a well defined cirrus, the walls of which
are covered with blunt projections or spinelets which evidently aid in
copulation.
The cirrus opens into a short genital sinus which in turn opens
to the exterior thru the genital pore which is on the ventral surface
in the median line about one-fourth the diameter of the oral sucker
posterior to the oral sucker. Plate I, figs. 10, 11. The seminal
vesicle, pars prostatica and cirrus are enclosed in a common cirrus-
pouch. The terminal portions of the genital organs are seen to be
A NEW SPECIES OF TREMATODE 267
strongly developed which is a characteristic feature of the genus to
which this form belongs.
The female reproductive organs are much more extensive than
the male and more difficult to make out. The ovary is situated pos-
terior to the uterus and shell gland and lies between the two testes
and the ends of the intestinal caeca. Plate I, fig. 10.
The ovary is lobulated and very irregular in shape, which gives
the edges an indented appearance. The ovary is about the same size
as the testes, but in some specimens it is decidedly smaller. It lies in
the same plane as the testes. Its maximum length is 0.50 mm, its
minimum 0.20 mm, and the mode 0.25 mm for 33%. Its maximum
width is 0.30 mm, its minimum 0.166 mm, and the mode 0.166 mm
for 55%. The texture of the ovary is granular, having much the same
appearance as the testes. The substance of the ovary projects into
the ventral papillae as was mentioned in the description of papillae.
A well defined shell gland lies immediately anterior to the ovary,
occupying a dorsal position in the body. The anterior lobes of the
ovary frequently overlap the posterior margin of the shell gland.
The shell gland is oval or globular in shape and one-third to one-
half the size of the ovary; its texture is coarsely granular but not
as dense as the ovary and its contour is generally smooth and not
markedly lobed like the ovary.
The vitelline glands are lateral in position, lying outside of
the intestinal caeca on either side of the body, extending anteriorly
from the level of the shell gland to, or within a short distance pos-
terior to, the base of the cirrus-pouch. The glands on each side
are made up of from ten to fifteen small globular or lobed acini
which are fairly well defined and distinct, tho fusing in many in-
stances. The acini on each side are connected by a longitudinal duct
which passes along their inner side back to the most posterior acinus
where it turns mesad and forms a transverse vitelline duct which
passes to the shell gland and meets the vitelline duct from the
opposite side, the two uniting to form a well defined vitelline reser-
voir which is slightly embedded in the ventral wall of the shell
gland. Plate I, figs. ro, 11.
Neither in toto mounts nor in sections was I able to find any
trace of a Laurer’s canal.
268 BARKER AND LAUGHLIN
The oviduct passes caudad from the ovary thru the shell gland,
anterior to which it becomes the uterus. The uterus is voluminuous,
lying in close coils which vary in number and extend from the shell-
gland to a plane a little anterior to the base of the cirrus pouch.
The uterine coils occupy the median half of the body from side to
side and the third fourth from the anterior end. The uterus lies
between the intestinal caeca and is densely packed with eggs from
the shell gland to a point a little anterior to the cirrus pouch where
it becomes modified to form a long vagina. At the base of the
cirrus pouch the uterus turns to the left and then passes caudad a
short distance along the left side of the pouch and then becomes
modified and forms a long thick-walled vagina, which lies to the
left of the cirrus pouch and extends from a point near the base of
the pouch to the genital sinus just posterior to the oral sucker.
Plate dy figs: 10, £1,
Just before reaching the genital sinus the vagina passes under
the cirrus pouch and runs along ventral to it until it terminates in
the genital sinus. The walls of the vagina are thick and muscular,
two sets of muscle fibres, circular and longitudinal being plainly
visible. Plate I, fig. 7.
The eggs are of a light straw color and vary in size from 0.019
mm to 0.021 mm in length, the mode being 0.0195 mm, 37% having
this length. Their width varies from 0.01 mm to 0.013 mm, the
mode being 0.010 mm, 50% having this mode.
The eggs are further characterized by having a long polar fila-
ment at each pole. These filaments vary greatly in length from
0.031 mm to 0.26 mm, and one or both may be only rudimentary.
At one end of the egg is a polar cap similar to that found in most
species of trematodes. Plate I, figs. 3, 4, 5.
It was impossible to make out the entire exretory system but
the study of toto mounts and sections showed the main features of
the system. An excretory pore surrounded by muscle fibres is sit-
uated at- the posterior end of the worm about 0.2 mm from the
posterior end of the worm and in the median line on the dorsal sur-
face. The pore opens from a Y-shaped excretory bladder lying
just beneath it. The branches of the Y pass cephalad to the right
and left of the ovary while the main stem passes caudad for a very
A NEW SPECIES OF TREMATODE 269
short distance and ends blindly. The excretory pore is just posterior
to the fork of the branches. Anterior to the ovary the two branches
appear to break up into a number of smaller branches which it was
impossible to follow. Plate I, fig. 12.
Nothing was ascertained as to the life history of this trematode
or the means of infection, tho a large number of snails, some living,
was found in the stomach of the muskrats which suggests the pos-
sibility of snails being the intermediary host.
SYSTEMATIC, POSITION
According to Braun’s classification of the Monostonudae in
Bronn’s Klassen and Ordnungen des Thierreichs v. 4, p. 914, the
worm which J have described would be classed in the genus Noto-
cotyle Dies. by virtue of the five rows of longitudinal papillae which
according to Braun distinguishes the genus Notocotyle from the
genus Ogmogaster Jaegerskidld, which is characterized by the pos-
session of fifteen to seventeen long ribs (Langsrippen) on the ven-
tral surface.
Braun’s table of the genera constituting the family Monosto-
midae is as follows:
Nur vorderer Saugnauf.
Genifaiponus yore 24. os/s aac ase aa ee Monostomum
Genitalporus-hintensia ie. koe heise O pisthotrema
Ausser dem Saugnauf noch.
Saugwarzen in 3 Langsreihen der Bauchflache. . Notocotyle
15-17 Langsleisten auf der Bauchflache...... Ogmogaster
Braun (ibid. p. 916) describes the genus Notocotyle as follows:
Monostomiden mit verlangertem oder ovalem, stark abgeplat-
tetem Korper; Vorderende sich zuspitzend, Hintende abgerundet ;
Bauch flache concav mit in Reihen angeordneten retractilen Warzen,
auf den Drusen ausmunden.
Mund offnung subterminal, von einem Saugnapf umgeben;
Oesophagus sehr kurz, Darmschenkel bis ans hintere Korperende
reichend. Genitalporus hinter der Gabelstelle des Darmes; Gesch-
lechtsdriisen am hinteren Korperende; Laurer’scher Canal fehlt;
Eier mit 2 fadenformigen Filamenten. Leben in den Coeca der
Vogel.
270 BARKER AND LAUGHLIN
Diesing’s (1850:411) original description of the genus is as
follows:
Corpus oblongum depressum. Caput corpore continuum. Os
subterminale anticum.
Acetabula numerosa (24-50) juxta totam dorsi convexiusculli
longitudinem triseriata sessilia, orbicularia, limbo callosa. Penis
ventralis superus longe spiralis. Porus excretorius —————— In
avium intestinis crassis et coecis endoparasita.
Looss (1899:661) in discussing the genus Notocotyle holds
that the rows of papillae on the ventral surface do not constitute a
character of generic rank and to recognize them as such would
place several species in the genus which have very different internal
organizations, such as M. verrucosum, which has 3 rows of papillae
and M. proteus, which has 7 or 8 rows. Looss, however, considers
that M. verrucosum offers an arrangement of organs which can
rightly be considered as a construction type and of generic value,
and on this ground gives the following as the characters of the genus
Notocotyle.
Monostomiden mit verlangertem, hinten briet abgerundetem,
nach vorn etwas verschmalertem, flachem Ko6rper ohne sichtbare
Gliederung. Haut mit feinsten Stacheln besonders im Vorderkor-
per und auf der Bauchseite dicht durchsetzt. Der Saugnapf folgt
dicht auf die Mundoffnung, Oesophagus kurtz, Darmschenkel ein-
fach, reichen bis ins Hinterende, ohne sich daselbst zu vereinigen.
Excretionsblase wie bei Cyclocoelum, ihre Mundung bei Betrachtung
von aussen als rosettenformiges Organ erscheinent. Genitalporus
median oder fast median, in der Nahe des Saugnaufes gelegen.
Begattungsorgane vorhanden, lang gestreckt und dunn. Der Cirrus-
beutel umschliesst einen Theil der Samenblase, eine mehr oder
minder entwickelte Pars prostatica, Ductus ejaculatorius unde
Penis ; letzterer meist mit Knétchen oder Spitzchen besetzt. Hoden
symmetrisch, fast im Gussersten Hinterkorper ausserhalb der Darms-
chenkel; das gemeinsame Vas deferens bildet vor seinem Eintritt in
den Cirrusbeutel eine in mehr oder minder zahlreiche Querschlingen
gelegte aiissere Samenblase. Keimstock zwischen den Hoden;
Schalendriisencomplex vor ihm; Laurer’scher Canal vorhanden,
Receptaculum seminis fehlt. Dotterstécke massig entwickelt, in den
A NEW SPECIES OF TREMATODE 271
Seiten und vor den Hoden gelegen. Schlingen des Uterus ziemlich
regelmassig quer verlaufend die Darmschenkel nach aussen nicht
jiberschreitend. Eier wenig gefarbt, mit langen Polfaden. Im
Blindund Enddarm von Wasservogeln.
Typus: Notocotyle verrucosa (Froelich).
Looss gives the presence of spines as one of the external char-
acters of the genus but no spines were found on the form from the
muskrat. It will be seen that the inner organization of the form
described agrees with Looss’ description of the genus Notocotyle
with one or two exceptions. No trace of Laurer’s canal was found
in the form from the muskrat nor is there a well defined ductus
ejaculatorius, tho that portion of the male genital canal anterior to
the prostate gland and just posterior to the cirrus, which was
described as a part of the pars prostatica might possibly be consid-
ered as a ductus ejaculatorius.
Looss gives water birds as the hosts of Notocotyle, while the
muskrat is a water mammal and thereby the range of hosts as well
as the geographical distribution of the genus is extended.
The monostome found in the muskrat in many respects re-
sembles Ogmogaster plicatus Creplin which Jagerskiold (18917 :127-
134) (1891>:1-16) has described as found in Balaenoptera musculus
and Balaenoptera borealis. It differs, however, in having rows of
ventral longitudinal papillae instead of the characteristic longitudinal
ribs of Ogmogaster. The vitelline glands are also well developed
in the form from the muskrat and as Looss (1899 :663) points out,
the vitelline glands are not so strongly developed in Ogmogaster as
in Notocotyle.
Inasmuch as this monostome from the muskrat differs in many
respects from the species of Notocotyle described up to this time it
may be designated as a new species. One striking character which
distinguishes it from the other species is the presence of five longi-
tudinal rows of papillae on the ventral surface. This diagnostic
character suggested the name quintseriale as an appropriate specific
name for this monostome from the muskrat, which I therefore des-
ignate as Notocotyle quinqueseriale.
I desire here to acknowledge my indebtedness and appreciation
to Doctor Franklin D, Barker, of the Department of Zoology of the
272 BARKER AND LAUGHLIN
University of Nebraska, who suggested this problem to me, and
with whose helpful cooperation I have been able to complete this
research.
Papers CITED
BRANDES, GUSTAV.
1892. Revision der Monostomiden. Ctrbl. Bakt. v. 12, pp. 504-511.
Braun, Max.
1892. Vermes.
Bronn’s Klass. u. Ordnung. d. Thier-Reichs, v. 4, pp. 914, 916.
Diesinec, C. M.
1850. Systema Helminthum, v. I, p. 411.
Frolich, Joseph A. von.
1789. Beschreibungen einiger neuen Eingeweidewitrmer.
Naturforscher, Halle, v. 25, pp. 52-113.
Jagerskidld, L. A.
18918. Einiges iiber die Schmarotzer der nordatlantischen Balaenop-
teriden.
Biol. Foren. Forhandl., Verhandl. d. biol. Ver. in Stockholm, v.
3, PP. 127-134.
1891b. Ueber den Bau des Ogmogaster plicatus (Creplin).
K. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Handl., Stockholm, v. 24, pp. 1-32.
Looss, A.
1899. Weitere Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Trematoden-Fauna
Aegyptens.
Zool. Jahrb., Syst., v. 12, pp. 661-664.
1902. Ueber neue und bekannte Trematoden aus Seeschildkroten.
Nebst Eroérterungen zur Systematik und Nomenclatur.
Zool. Jahrb. v. 16, pp. 444, 546, 602, 610, 612, 6390, 701.
MonTICELLI, FRANCESCO.
1892. Studii sui trematodi endoparassiti; sul genera Notocotyl
Diesing.
Boll. Soc. di nat. v. 6, pp. 26-46.
OLsson, PETER.
1893. Bidrag till skandinaviens helminthfauna.
K. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Handl., Stockholm, v. 25, Art. 12,
pp. I-41.
A NEW SPECIES OF TREMATODE 273
SsINITzIN, D. Tu.
1896. Entoparasitic worms of birds in the vicinity of Warsaw.
(Russian Text.)
Trav. lab. cab. zool. Univ. Varsovie, pp. 1-20.
Stites, Cu. W. and A. Hassatt.
1908. Index Catalog of Medical and Veterinary Zoology.
Subjects: Trematode and Trematode Diseases. Bull. 37, Hy-
gienic Laboratory, U. S. Public Health and Marine Hospital
Service. Wash., pp. 322-323.
274 BARKER AND LAUGHLIN
ABBREVIATIONS USED AND EXPLANATION OF PLATE
C, Cirrus P. P, Pars prostatica
C. P, Cirrus pouch S. G, Shell gland
Es, Esophagus S. V, Seminal vesicle
E. P, Excretory pore T, Testis
Ex. C, Excretory canal Ut, Uterus
G. P, Genital pore Va, Vagina
I, Intestine Vd, Vas deferens
O. S, Oral sucker Ve, Vas eferens
Ov, Ovary V. G, vitelline gland
P, Papillae V. Dt, Vitelline duct
P. F, Polar filament V. Rsv. Vitelline reservoir
P. G, Prostatic gland
PLATE I
All drawings were made with a camera lucida from original
stained and mounted specimens.
Fig. 1.—Notocotyle quinqueseriale Barker and Laughlin, ventral view.
Fig. 2—Cross section of body showing papillae.
Fig. 3—Egegs of Notocotyle quinqueseriale Barker and Laughlin.
Fig. 4—Egg with polar filaments and operculum.
Fig. 5—Egg.
Fig. 6—\Longitudinal section of body showing papillae.
Fig. 7.—Cross section thru cirrus pouch and vagina.
Fig. 8—Longitudinal section of papillae, showing invasion of uterus.
Fig. o9.—Cross section of papillae.
Fig. 10—Notocotyle quinqueseriale Barker and Laughlin, ventral view.
Fig. 11—Ends of genital ducts.
Fig. 12—Posterior end showing excretory pore and canal.
Plate. I
fe) O0 00? .
90606000
PES OD.6 QO 0 ey
uw Uy
fei
Yi
Leughlina Barker de}.
TOE RELATION’ OF CRITHIDIA’ MELOPHAGIA TO, THE
SHEEP'S BLOOD, WITH REMARKS UPON DHE
CONTROVERSY BETWEEN DR. PORTER
AND DR. WOODCOCK.*
By Leroy D. SwiIncte, PH.D.
Parasitologist, University of Wyoming.
Recently Miss Porter (1911) published in Parasitology a criti-
cism on Woodcock’s work in the Zoological Record for 1909. The
criticism was against his action in inserting what she held to be his
own opinions on the genera Crithidia and Herpetomonas, which are
(quoting from her) “extreme and decidedly opposed to the opinions
of those who have worked personally on the parasites in question.”
In Woodcock’s reply (1911) to her complaint against his putting
the generic names, Crithidia and Herpetomonas in inverted comas,
he states that he placed in inverted comas only the Crithidia and
Herpetomonas from blood-sucking hosts ; but in the case of Crithidia
and Herpetomonas from non-blood-sucking hosts, he did not use
inverted comas—that is, he left these as valid genera.
In Miss Porter’s paper I was mentioned as one who did not
agree with this view of Woodcock. In replying Woodcock used
certain open-minded statements of mine, taken from a letter to him
and from a footnote on page 141 of my paper (1911), in support of
his view (hypothesis) that Crithidia and Herpetomonas from all
blood-sucking insects “are in all probability not to be regarded as be-
longing to truly independent genera but are merely developmental
phases of some Trypanosome.” (Woodcock 1911, page 154.) The
fact is that both in my footnote and letter reference was made spe-
cifically, and only, to Crithidia melophagia, and I was not even open-
minded to such a general hypothesis. Many other statements in
the paper would show this to be true; but most of all perhaps the
fact that in the same paper I described what I called a true Herpeto-
*Contribution from Parasitological Laboratory of Wyoming Agricultural Experiment
Station.
276 LEROY D. SWINGLE
monas from the rat-flea, stating that rat-fleas harbor pure Herpeto-
monas, pure trypanosomes or a mixture of the two. In Miss Por-
ter’s reply (1911a) to Woodcock, she has adequately defended our
side of the question.
The reason I was open-minded to the idea that C. melophagia
might possibly be a phase of the life history of a sheep trypanosome.
was the facts that Woodcock (1911), after a prolonged search, dis-
covered a trypanosome in the sheep’s blood, and that it is now known
that certain trypanosomes change over into crithidia-like forms in
their insectan hosts. To be sure, no one had been able previously
to find a flagellate in the sheep’s blood, altho many sheep, which
were heavily infected with sheepticks containing C. melophagia, had
been examined. Yet, in the case of negative results there still re-
mains a possibility that a further search will yield positive results.
And so in the case of the sheeptick flagellate it was not unscientific
to admit the possibility that the trypanosome discovered by Wood-
cock might yet be proved to be connected with C. melophagia. And
I doubt not that some of the forms from blood-sucking insects,
described as true Crithidia may later be shown to be only phases of
trypanosome cycles. I suggested this in the case of C. ctenopthalmi.
Anyone comparing Patton and Strickland’s description and figures
of this parasite with my paper (1911) on the rat trypanosome in the
flea will be impressed by the similarity of the parasites. (See Pat-
ton and Strickland, 1908, pp. 333-335.) For example, their figure 4
is almost exactly the same as my figures of the small trypanosome
appearing in the life-cycle of T. lewisi. And so, I believe it may
later be shown that C. ctenopthalmi is not a valid species, but merely
a part of the life cycle of T. Jewisi. Likewise, it may later be shown
experimentally that the form from the rat-flea, described by me
(1911) as Herpetomonas pattoni, is a phase in the life-cycle of T.
lewisit. Already, Swellengrebel and Strickland (1911) in their criti-
cism of my paper contend, altho they do not prove, that these forms
belong to the trypanosome cycle. Be that as it may, nevertheless |
cannot accept Woodcock’s hypothesis that the Crithidia and Her-
petomonas from all blood-sucking hosts are merely developmental
phases of some trypanosome.
CRITHIDIA MELOPHAGIA AND SHEEP’S BLOOD 277
Upon receiving Woodcock’s reply to Miss Porter, I at once
set about to test his hypothesis experimentally in one case, C. melo-
phagia.
The method of attack is as follows:
Ist. Examine microscopically the blood of several lambs and
sheep harboring sheep ticks infected with C. melophagia.
and. (a) Inject lambs hypodermically, intravenously and in-
traperitoneally with the contents of the digestive tracts of sheep
ticks containing flagellates; then examine the blood for trypan-
osomes. (b) Feed lambs on sheep ticks and their excrement teased
in salt solution.
3rd. Place freshly hatched ticks on a sheep which has been
washed in an antiseptic solution, to eliminate the possibility of their
getting the flagellates by the ingestion of contaminated faeces. The
value of this experiment may be stated thus: If the ticks do not
develop flagellates we know that they are not present in the blood of
the sheep, for practically 100% of the ticks of the United States
under normal conditions develop flagellates. But if they do develop
them they must either get them hereditarily or from the blood.
In respect to the first method, others, Flu (1908) and Porter
(1910), as well as myself (1908 and 1909), have failed to find any
flagellate or in fact any other form in the sheep’s blood that could
possibly have any connection with C. melophagia, altho repeated ex-
aminations were made of sheep harboring infected ticks. In my own
papers detailed accounts are given of my extensive, but fruitless, at-
tempts to discover a trypanosome or a non-flagellate stage of some
parasite from which C. melophagia might be derived. Notwithstand-
ing these former results, I have laboriously examined microscopical-
ly the blood of thirty sheep and lambs, many of which were harbor-
ing infected ticks. Undoubtedly all had harbored them before they
were dipped a few weeks earlier, because the flock was heavily in-
fected with ticks. Moreover, the ticks infecting the sheep were
without doubt parasitized with C. melophagia, for I have not been
able to find an uninfected tick in the flock. Generally five slides of
of blood (using large cover glasses) from each sheep were carefully
examined. Results were always negative. These facts in them-
278 LEROY D. SWINGLE
selves constitute good evidence against C. melophagia being derived
from a trypanosome in the blood of the sheep.
The second method yielded additional evidence no less valuable.
Lambs were selected for the experiments, for the reason that old
sheep might have been infected when young, and have developed an
immunity against the flagellates. Such is apparently the case with
rat trypanosomiasis, Four lambs about five months old were se-
lected. They were first examined for flagellates, but with negative
results, altho they were heavily infected with ticks harboring C.
melophagia. The youngest, No. 1, probably not more than four
months old, was inoculated subcutaneously August 22nd with the
contents of the digestive tracts of six sheepticks. In preparing the
contents for inoculation the viscera were removed and teased in nor-
mal salt solution. The heads and probosces of the ticks were also
teased in the same mixture. Examination of the mixture showed it
to be teeming with flagellates. These were then injected subcu-
taneously.
Examinations of the blood were made August 23, 24, 25, 26, 28,
and 29. The results were negative.
On August 29th a similar preparation of ten ticks was made.
Lambs 507, 606, and 572, each received 1/3 of the mixture, the first
two subcutaneously, the last intraperitoneally. At the same time 25
ticks together with masses of excrement were ground up in salt solu-
tion and fed to all four lambs by drenching. Examinations of their
blood were made as follows: Lambs 1 and 507, Aug. 31; lamb 1,
Sept. 1; lambs 572, 507 and 606, Sept. 2; all of them, Sept. 4, 6, 8, 11,
15, 22. September 15th lamb 507 showed a great many bacteria in
the blood. Sept. 17th none could be found. Otherwise the results
were all negative.
On Sept. 27th the contents from the digestive tracts of 25 ticks
were injected directly into the jugular vein of lamb No. 1. Judg-
ing from a microscopical examination of the mixture, not less than
1,000,000 flagellates were injected. The blood of the lamb was ex-
amined in 10 minutes and again in 20 minutes. On the following
day it was again examined. The results were negative. Then the
contents of 20 ticks were injected into the jugular vein, and exam-
inations made in 10 minutes and in 20 minutes. Other examina-
CRITHIDIA MELOPHAGIA AND SHEEP’S BLOOD 279
tions were made Sept. 29th and 30th, Oct. 2nd, 5th, roth, 17th, 23rd
and Nov. 2nd. No flagellates were found.
On October 2nd the contents of the digestive tracts of 25 ticks
were injected subcutaneously into lambs 507, 572 and 606. They
were examined Oct. 3rd, 5th, roth, 17th and 23rd, but no flagellates
appeared in the blood. On Oct. 28th lamb 507 was killed. In the
case of birds Woodcock (1910) was able to find trypanosomes in
the bone marrow. altho none could be found in the peripheral cir-
culation. And so I determined to examine the bone marrow, and
the blood from the lungs, the spleen and the liver of this lamb. To
make sure whether flagellates were present, I examined these organs
in fresh preparations and in stained smears. No flagellates were
found, altho this lamb had been for months heavily infected with
ticks containing C. melophagia and had been inoculated twice and
fed once with macerated ticks. Lambs 572 and 606 were examined
again Nov. Ist with negative results.
The last method consisted in eliminating the possibility of young
ticks obtaining flagellates by ingesting faeces from infected ticks.
This was accomplished as follows: Pupae were collected and
washed in several changes of water to remove any faecal matter
which might be adhering. They were then placed in a clean box
and allowed to hatch. A lamb was thoroughly washed in a soapy
antiseptic dip and rinsed with water to kill or remove all parasites
present in deposited faecal matter. The young ticks were then
placed upon this lamb, (No. 606).
Owing to the fact that a great many of the young died before
feeding more than a couple of times, only eleven ticks reached an
age of about two weeks or over. Young ticks before feeding sev-
eral times have never shown flagellated forms of Crithidia, altho in
years past as well as at this time, I have examined them for flagel-
lates. [Nevertheless, the parasites are present as has been shown by
Miss Porter (1910).] For example, a young tick which was exam-
ined October 14th after it had fed three times—Oct. 7th, roth and
12th—showed no flagellated forms. Another which was examined
three days after its first feeding contained no flagellated forms. But,
two of those, which reached further development, were examined
12 days after they were put on the lamb, and were found to be teem-
280 LEROY D. SWINGLE
ing with flagellates. Also nine others, which were between two and
three weeks old when they were examined, were packed full of
flagellates.
Thus it is evident that the flagellated forms of the Crithidia
develop when the ticks are between one and three weeks old. Since
it was impossible for these young ticks to ingest faeces from infected
ticks, their flagellates must either have been obtained from the blood
of the lamb, or have been inherited. I conclude the latter, otherwise
it would have been possible to have found them in the blood of the
lamb. In a former paper (1909) I claimed that heriditary trans-
mission exists, having found parasites in the ova. Later Miss Porter
(1910) confirmed this observation and even traced the parasite in
the pupae and young ticks. These facts together with the above
experiment justify the conclusion which I have made.
From this experiment it appears that hereditary infection is
very general, since the eleven ticks, which reached sufficient develop-
ment, all showed flagellates. In my paper (1909) I held that heredi-
tary transmission must be the most common mode of infection, and
these experiments confirm the idea. Ticks must be over three weeks
old before they lay their first pupae. Therefore, since the flagellates
develop before the ticks are three weeks old, their first offspring as
well as the later ones are exposed to hereditary infection.
To sum up, the contents of the digestive tracts of eighty-six
ticks were injected subcutaneously, intraperitoneally and_ intra-
venously into four lambs. In every case the injected fluid contained
great numbers of parasites of different shapes. Besides these in-
jections each lamb was fed on ticks together with their excrement.
In all, over sixty examinations of these lambs’ blood were made, the
results always being negative. If Crithidia melophagia is communi-
cable to the sheep, it would indeed seem strange that infection was
not accomplished when all the conceivable avenues of possible in-
fection were tried. It must also be remembered that these lambs
were also heavily infested with sheep ticks containing flagellates,
practically all the time the experiments were running. And so, tho
infection might not be possible by inoculation and feeding of the
contents of sheepticks, it ought to have taken place by the normal
associations of the ticks with the lambs, provided the flagellate is
CRITHIDIA MELOPHAGIA AND SHEEP’S BLOOD 281
communicable to the sheep. In the light of this experimental evi-
dence, it must be concluded that the flagellate of the tick is not com-
municable to the sheep and hence that it is not the insectan phase of
the life-cycle of a sheep trypanosome. Evidence has also been pro-
duced showing that the flagellate is transmitted hereditarily from
mother-tick to offspring. And Dr. Porter (1910) has shown that
it passes from one tick to another by the ingestion of faeces. Thus
it is not necessary to the propagation and spread of the species, for
it to pass thru the blood of the sheep.
In closing, certain other arguments against Woodcock’s view
might be presented advantageously. For example, since practically
all ticks over two weeks old (that is, after they have sucked blood
a half dozen times) and collected from any sheep or lamb in the
flock contain Crithidia, these flagellates must be very widely dis-
tributed among the sheep and must be fairly numerous in their
blood, provided they are merely sheep trypanosomes taken up by the
tick in the act of sucking blood. Some one might suggest that they
are trypanosomes so small in the blood as to escape notice. But this
cannot be, for Woodcock in describing the trypanosome, which he
claims is connected with Crithidia melophagia, says it is a “typical,
active trypanosome.” It is unfortunate that he did not give any de-
tails of the methods used in discovering this trypanosome. He says
that “after prolonged examination of the blood of a sheep on which
were ‘keds’ infected with this parasite” he found the trypanosome.
He does not state how many examinations he made nor over how
long a period his examinations extended. Therefore it is impossible
to say whether the examinations I have made were as prolonged and
numerous as his. It is evident, however, that I made enough exam-
inations to discover the trypanosome, provided it is so prevalent
that ticks are able to take it up in the few small drops of blood they
would suck in a couple of weeks; and such must be the case, pro-
vided their flagellates are derived from a trypanosome in the sheep’s
blood, since the ticks all become infected within two or three weeks.
Against Woodcock’s view I would mention the fact that a try-
panosome has never been found in the digestive tract of the tick,
altho hundreds of examinations have been made both of ticks in-
fected and uninfected with Crithidia. Yet, in the case of rat-fleas
282 LEROY D. SWINGLE
fed on rats infected with trypanosomes, it is very easy to find typical
trypanosomes even in the intestine long after all the flagellates have
disappeared from the stomach. If C. melophagia is the insectan
phase of a trypanosome cycle, we would expect occasionally to find
at least in young ticks a trypanosome form.
In view of the evidence presented in this paper and by other
investigators, | am unable to accept the idea that C. melophagia is
a developmental phase in the life-cycle of a sheep trypanosome, and
much more unable, the generalization that “Crithidia and Herpeto-
monas from all blood-sucking insects are merely developmental
phases of some Trypanosome.” If any one continues to hold this
view the onus probandi certainly lies with him. Such a view should
not be asserted by anyone, unless he is willing to accept the onus
probandi and actually prove the view by experiment. No view can
be considered scientific and reasonable when it is opposed by experi-
mental evidence, no matter how plausible it may appear on a priori
grounds. Were this not true, we would discard all experimental
laboratories.
REFERENCES
Brune C.
‘1908. Ueber die Flagellaten im Darm von Melophagus ovinus,
Archiv f. Protistenkunde, 12, pp. 147-153.
Patron, W. S., and StricKLaAnp, C.
1908. A Critical Review of the Relation of Blood-sucking Inverte-
brates to the Life Cycles of the Trypanosomes of Vertebrates, with
a Note on the Occurrence of a Species of Crithidia, Crithidia cten-
opthalmi, in the Alimentary Tract of Ctenopthalmus agyrtes (Heller),
Parasitology, I, pp. 322-346.
Porter, ANNIE.
1910. The Structure and Life-History of Crithidia melophagia (Flu),
an Endo-Parasite of the Sheep-Ked, Melophagus ovinus,
Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., 55, pp. 189-224.
1911. Some Remarks on the Genera Crithidia, Herpetomonas and
Trypanosoma,
Parasitology, 4, pp. 22-23.
191la. Further Remarks on the Genera Crithidia, Herpetomonas and
Trypanosoma, and Dr. Woodcock’s Views thereon,
Parasitology, 4, pp. 154-163.
CRITHIDIA MELOPHAGIA AND SHEEP'S BLOOD 283
SWELLENGREBEL, N. H., and StricKLAnp, C.
1911. Some Remarks on Dr. Swingle’s Paper, “The Transmission
of Trypanosoma lewisi by Rat Fleas,” etc.,
Parasitology, 4, pp. 105-108.
Swinc_e, L. D.
1908. On the Similarity Between Blood-platelets and Certain Hema-
tozoa, :
Jour. Infect. Dis., 5, pp. 46-54.
1909. A Study on the Life History of a Flagellate (Crithidia melo-
phagia, n. sp.) in the Alimentary Tract of the Sheep-Tick Melopha-
gus ovinus),
Jour. Infect. Dis., 6, pp. 98-121.
1911. The Transmission of Trypanosoma lewisi by Rat Fleas (Cera-
tophyllus sp. and Pulex sp.) with Short Descriptions of Three New
Herpetomonads,
Jour. Infect. Dis., 8, pp. 125-146.
Wooncock, H. M.
1910. Studies on Avian Haemoprotozoa. I. On Certain Parasites
of the Chaffinch (Fringilla coelebs) and the Redpoll (Linota rufes-
cens),
Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci., 55, pp. 641-740.
t1o1t. A Reply to Miss Porter’s Note Entitled “Some Remarks on
the Genera Crithidia, Herpetomonas and Trypanosoma,”
Parasitology, 4, pp. I5I-154.
DEPARTMENT OF SUMMARIES
TO BE DEVOTED TO DIGESTS OF PROGRESS
IN BIOLOGY
While the Transactions will continue to be primarily a Journal of research in micro-
biology, it is recognized that the field has become so broad as to preclude the possibility
of frequent articles in any one of the departments of special interest. Because of this
it will be the policy to present, from time to time, supplementary digests of the progress
being made in the various fields of micro-biology. It is also proposed to introduce similar
summaries of the progress made in some departments not represented in our articles of
research. This is done with the feeling that such reviews will increase the permanent
value of the Transactions to all who may not have access to a large list of technical
biological journals, nor the time to make the survey for themselves.
SUMMARIES IN MICRO-BIOLOGY
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
For some months the Secretary has been planning to secure for this Journal and its
Department of Summaries, a series of papers from biologists dealing with the chief groups
of microscopic plants and animals. It has not been the purpose to present a complete
survey of any of the groups. The wish has been rather to bring together in one article
a statement of the following things:—general biology, the method of finding, the methods
of capture and of keeping alive and cultivating in the laboratory; how best to study; the
general technic; the most accessible literature; and a brief outline of the classification,
with keys for the identification of at least the more representative genera and species of
the micro-organisms likely to be found by the beginning students in the United States.
It has been felt that the getting together of such data as this, while not a contribution
to science, would be a contribution especially to isolated workers and to teachers and stu-
dents in the high schools and smaller colleges.
There has been sufficient reserve on the part of the members invited to take part in
this work to make it apparent that the Secretary, in order to go convincingly to others,
must himself show his willingness to join in the effort necessary to make the movement
a success. This same reserve has made necessary that the paper on the freshwater
Oligochetes shall appear first.
It is proposed to have papers from time to time until the more common American
species of groups, such as those that follow, have been covered: the Blue-green Algae,
the Confervoid Algae, the Conjugatae, the Siphoneae, the water Molds, the common
saprophytic microscopic Fungi, the Rhizopods, Infusoria, Turbellaria, Bryozoa, fresh-
water Oligocheta, Water mites, Entomostraca, etc.
THE COMMON FRESH-WATER OLIGOCHETA OF <THE
UNITED STATES*
By T. W. GALLOWAY
1. Introduction.
In accordance with the general purpose of these articles, as
expressed above, the discussion will be confined to those Annelids
of microscopic or near-microscopic size which are most commonly
to be found in the United States, especially in the fresh waters.
It is purposed merely to facilitate the work of the beginner on the
members of the group until he shall have made such acquaintance
-with them and with the special literature of the subject as to be
able to work effectively thru that literature.
With these limitations set on the purpose, it is manifestly un-
desirable to undertake to include a complete description of all the
species and genera that have been noted for the region. Such an
attempt would at once defeat the main end of the paper, which is
to encourage the general student with the microscope to study one
of the most interesting and widely distributed types of animals.
Certain genera and species conceived to be of less interest to the be-
ginning student, for one reason or another, and yet fairly demand-
ing some notice are printed in smaller type.
2. Habitus.
The minute oligochetes are liable to be found in or near any
of the fresh waters, even in regions of extreme cold. While they
occur and may be taken free-swimming, in the running and open
waters, they prefer in general the still and even stagnant water of
lagoons and ponds and marshy pools along quiet streams where
organic matter collects and decays. In such localities they are
most at home in the upper surface of the mud at the bottom, in the
scums of various kinds at the top of the water, in and on the stems
and roots of plants submerged and decaying, among masses of
algae, on the surface (and sometimes in the body openings) of
larger aquatic animals.
Some of them (as Fridericia) are not strictly aquatic, but live
in soil, or decaying wood, or in mosses, water-saturated but away
*Contributions from the Biological Department, James Millikin University, No. 8.
286 T. W. GALLOWAY
from standing water proper. Some attack the tender parts of living
plants and may be found parasitic in their tissues, where they pro-
duce disease and death. A few forms closely related to purely
aquatic forms occur normally in quite dry places.
A number of genera are to be found in brackish waters, or
even in littoral positions where only the sea water reaches them.
3. Collecting.
The habitats mentioned above will suggest the main facts to
be kept in mind in collecting these minute annelids. After one be-
comes familiar with the species and their habits, it is possible to
watch for the larger of them and to collect them directly; but for
the most part it is necessary for the beginner to collect separate
samples of all the materials which seem likely to be infested by
them, being careful to keep adequate notes of the locality of each
collection for guidance in case the debris proves fruitful. This
material may then be gone over with more care in the laboratory.
The only special apparatus needed in collecting aquatic oli-
gochetes is a fine skimming or towing net, and a fine meshed wire
strainer with a handle a foot or so in length. These are conven-
ient in collecting surface scums or mud from the bottom.
For discovering the smaller varieties in the material brought
to the laboratory it is sometimes necessary to use special devices,
altho most kinds may readily be detected by their motions in the
jars of materials. Some species tend to collect at the sides of the
vessels and at the top of the water, and may readily be picked off
with a pipette. Others tend to form tubes of mud or other ma-
terials about their bodies and lie at the bottom or side of the vessel.
It is sometimes necessary to wash out suspected material, a little
at a time, in watch-glasses or other shallow vessels by playing a
stream of water from a pipette over it. Frequently a black back-
ground is necessary. They often cling to the debris and to one an-
other. The smaller species may frequently be found in knots of
the larger forms.
4. Methods of Care and Culture.
This subject has not received the attention which it deserves
from the students of the group, except for a few species. For this
— ae
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 287
reason only a few general hints will be given here. Jn a general
way of course, the problem is, first, to duplicate as nearly as possible
the natural conditions under which the animals flourish. Many of
these worms are exceedingly delicate and tender, and any wide
departure from the natural conditions may prove fatal. This means
that the collector should keep notes of the circumstances of finding.
The things most to be guarded are the amount and character of the
water, the food supply, the oxygen supply, and the prevention of
too great foulness from the decomposition of organic matter, and
the multiplication of bacteria and infusoria. Changes to water of
different quality, when necessary, should be made gradually unless
it has been demonstrated that the worms are hardy to the change.
When possible, therefore, enough of the water in which they are
found should be brought to the laboratory to furnish the jar.
Cultures of mud-living forms may be kept from growing foul
by allowing a slight drip of water to take place continuously into
the container. This produces some agitation and a very quiet over-
flow and keeps down the bacteria. This plan is not safe for those
that tend to come to the surface and inhabit the films that form
there. Under these circumstances it is necessary to watch the cul-
ture closely and to remove some of the foul water and add fresh.
In the case of those forms (Naididae) that reproduce by fis-
sion, it is possible to arrange cultures which much surpass the
natural conditions. This treatment consists in an enrichment of the
food supply. No exact rules can be laid down, but it has been found
possible by boiling the meal of Indian corn, or other suitable animal
or vegetable substances, to get material the addition of small
quantities of which to the culture will greatly stimulate growth and
fission. The amount best to be used must be determined in each
species by experiment. This experimentation to find the best pos-
sible conditions for growth is itself an interesting work and one
worth doing for practical laboratory purposes. In cultures arti-
ficially fed it is all the more necessary to guard against the foul-
ness and the attendant unicellular organisms.
The oxygen supply is important. The water may be frequently
agitated, or a supply of green plants may be added to the jar. In
general any increase in the depth of the water beyond that which
288 T. W. GALLOWAY
is necessary makes the getting of oxygen more difficult, except for
those that come naturally to the surface. The types that live nor-
mally in moist places, rather than in water, should have their
vivarium so arranged as to find it possible to crawl well above the
water line in and upon the kind of material in which they ordinarily
live.
5. The Study of the Living Specimens.
Many of these worms are practically transparent and thus
present a specially favorable opportunity to study the internal
organs and functions in life, without any treatment whatsoever.
The only bar to such study is their activity. After they are trans-
ferred to the slide with a pipette the cover glass should be partially
supported by thin wedges of wood or by wax feet, either of which
can be regulated in such a way as to give greater freedom or greater
pressure. In some cases a little increase of pressure will be all that
is necessary to retard the motions sufficiently for successful study.
In most cases, however, it may be necessary to use some stupefying
agent. Probably the best general agent now in use is chloretone.
A drop of a 2% solution placed at the edge of the cover-glass will
usually stupefy the worm. Repeat as often as is necessary.
Some of the longer types coil up in such a way as to make
stupefying necessary for any satisfactory study. In some instances
it is necessary to bring about the stupefaction very gradually. In
such cases it is necessary to do it in a watch glass by adding a drop
of the chloretone to a somewhat larger body of water, and repeat-
ing at intervals until the worms are quiet and will remain uncoiled.
Some of the more tender species begin to disintegrate in a little
while, after such treatment.
The student should persevere-in these studies of the living
forms, for there is nothing that will give as good results. Prob-
lems of structure which seemed hopeless at first glance will grad-
ually become clear, and relations of parts are shown in this way
which cannot possibly be seen in any other way. A few drops of a
weak aqueous solution of methylen blue will sometimes bring out
the outlines of the nervous system in a way that nothing else will.
Only a few drops should be added to a watch glass of water and
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 289
the worm should be left in it for one-half hour to several hours.
The result should be watched from time to time, as the effects of
the stain are transient.
For the identification of the aquatic oligochetes it is always
necessary to study the setae or bristles. These never show so well
after being mounted in balsam. By allowing the water to evapor-
ate and letting the weight of the cover-glass gradually rest upon
the living worm the clusters of bristles will usually stand out in
such a way that their number and shape can be made out very
satisfactorily.
6. The Making of Permanent Preparations.
Because of the incessant activity of the worms, the student is
tempted into thinking that a fixed whole-mount of the worm would
be more satisfactory. Except for dissection or sectioning the hope
to secure better results by killing are largely illusory. The killed
specimens are always at best mere caricatures of the living. The
fixing fluids coagulate the cell-contents and make them opaque.
This can be overcome in some degree by clearing reagents. The
most common use of these is to run the specimen up to absolute
alcohol, and then clear in xylol or cedar-wood oil where it may be
kept for temporary study; or permanent mounts may be made in
balsam. Whole mounts, thus cleared after being properly stained,
are useful for the location of certain structures. By staining the
specimen in toto and then rapidly decolorizing the outside tissues
completely in strong acid-alcohol before the inner cells have lost
their color, one can sometimes make quite instructive preparations.
The chief difficulty in technic is to kill and fix so as to avoid
distortion. It is next to impossible to kill them outright in such a
way as to prevent them becoming so distorted as to make section-
ing impossible. It is usual to stupefy them, as suggested above,
with chloretone to the point where they do not contract when man-
ipulated. In this stage they may be taken up with a pipette and
placed straight on filter paper in the bottom of a shallow flat dish.
By placing the mouth of the pipette on the filter paper and gradually
withdrawing it across the paper as the water bearing the limp
worm is forced out, even the longer worms may be laid out per-
290 T. W. GALLOWAY
fectly straight. Any curves may be straightened by a little jet of
water or by a moistened camel-hair brush. By placing upon this
another piece of filter paper and weighting it lightly with a piece
of glass slide, the animal will be held in place while hot saturated
solution of corosive sublimate or picric, or other desired fixative
is dashed over it. Without these or similar precautions the worms
will contract in spite of the stupefaction. By this device many
worms may be laid out on the filter paper and fixed at the same
time.
The writer has found, in the effort to get stages of budding in
the Naididae, that it is better at times to risk the contractions and
kill without stupefaction because of their tenderness and the ten-
dency of the zodids to separate during the stupefying process. In
doing this most of the water is removed from the watch glass or
other shallow dish, and an abundant flood of the heated agent is
thrown over the animal when it is most nearly straight. Usually a
number of the segments will be straight or nearly so, tho the speci-
men as a whole is not.
7. Structures Liable to be Used in Distinguishing the Species.
In the classification and identification of these worms much
dependence must be put on the sex organs. It is unfortunate that
these are mature only during limited portions of the year, and
furthermore are always complex, often exceedingly complex, and
difficult to work out in their entirety. For these reasons, features
more readily determined, even tho more superficial and variable,
are used as much as possible. Among these are:—the size, length,
number of segments; the shape of the various parts of the body;
the character of the head and prostomium; the shape of the brain;
the setae; the fission zone; the specializations of the anal segment ;
the blood vessels, the color of the blood; the position and form of
the nephridia; and the differentiations of the digestive tract.
In reckoning the position of any organ in terms of segments,
most students of the group regard the ring that bears the snout
or prostomium as segment 1, altho it does not bear setae. The
first setigerous segment (in most cases) is therefore number 2.
(Fig. 1.)
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA
=
ft Cl
Hy
@
H 12
i
Fig. 1.—A diagram illustrat-
ing the general structure of the
anterior end of an_ oligochete
(Enchytraeid) viewed from the
side as a semi-transparent object.
B, brain; B. V., ventral blood
vessel; Cl., clitellum or girdle
about sexual segments at ma-
turity; D. V., dorsal blood ves-
sel; E., esophagus; F., funnel of
male (sperm) duct (Sd); M.,
mouth; N., nephridium; Od, ovi-
duct (the ovary is on septum
11-12 behind the sperm duct);
P., prostomium; Ph, pharynx;
Sd, sperm duct; St, spermatheca;
T., testis; V. N., ventral nerve
cord.
291
Fig. 2
Fig. 2.—An imaginary longi-
tudinal section of Fig. 1, look-
ing into the floor of the body-
cavity from above, with the di-
gestive tract removed. E. S., egg
sac; G., glands on the septa be-
tween segments; L., nervous
loop about the mouth; O., ovary;
S. S., sperm sac; other letters as
in Fig. 1. The male organs are
omitted on the right side of the
animal, and the female organs,
on the left.
292 T. W. GALLOWAY
a. Head and Prostomium.—The mouth is on the ventral por-
tion of the first segment, and arching over it and extending in front
of it is a projection (prostomium) which may become very pro-
nounced as a snout or proboscis. Within the first segment is
the brain and the nervous loop around the gullet, and the eye-
spot when present. In the most of the Naididae, (Fig. 4, H.) the
4 segments near the mouth differ from the general segments
of the body in that they have no dorsal setae, tho the ventral ones
may be well developed. These modified segments are sometimes
spoken of collectively as the “head.” The degree to which segments
are specialized in this region is a distinguishing quality of some
value. Usually the septa which divide the body cavity into cham-
bers are wanting in the anterior segments, as are also the nephridia.
b. Setae.—Fig. 3 will give the student some idea of the main
classes of setae found in the aquatic worms. These structures are
chitinous, are produced by epidermal cells, have muscles attached
f 2 FE PS. 6 ? é J a ft Lz
Fig. 3
Fig. 3.—Different types of setae. Setae 1-5 are essentially straight; those 6-12 are
described as sigmoid (f§ -shaped). 1 and 2 are capilliform; 3, 4, needle-like; 5, hastiform;
6 and 8 are uncinate, with hook poorly developed; 9, 10a, 10b, biuncinate; 10c, pectinate;
11, palmate; 5 and all the biuncinate setae are bifid.
to their inner ends, and protrude beyond the surface. The differ-
ent types of setae and the names commonly applied to them in this
paper are shown in Fig. 3.
The setae are usually found in 4 bundles to each segment and
are ordinarily arranged somewhat as in Fig. 6.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 293
c. Fission Zone—This is found only in the Aeolosomatidae
and the Naididae. It is formed by the special activity of a single
segment which grows and proliferates new cells in such a way that
the anterior end of the segment forms all the organs suitable to
the posterior end of a worm of the species; and what is perhaps
more remarkable, the posterior half of the dividing segment pro-
duces the segments (4 or more) with their contained organs, that
Fig. 4.—Fission Zone in Dero,
tires, stages; A., Anterior zooid; F.,
the dividing segment and its des-
cendants; H., head (4 segments and
prostomium (Pr.) of posterior zooid
(P.); T., tentacular process of anal
segment of anterior worm; Z., zone
in front of anal segment where new
segments are formed. The region Z,
the anal segment, and region H have
all arisen from one segment of the
original worm (F).
constitute the head for the worm back of the dividing zone (Fig.
4). In those species in which fission occurs this method of multi-
plication is so effective that the sexual method is rarely put into use,
and in some species is wholly unknown.
d. The Anal Segment.—In the great majority of these worms
this region is quite simple and conforms to a general type. The
segment is usually characterized by smaller size, by less developed
setae and other segmental organs, and by a general appearance of
youth. The anal opening is usually terminal (Fig. 5) and the pos-
terior part of the intestine may be lined with cilia to its opening.
The very last segment may be quite specialized. In Dero, for
example, there are projections from the rim of the segment, and
lobings of the anal opening protrude in such a way as to form a
kind of ciliated pavilion characteristic of the genus (Fig. 5, L). This
surface is believed to assist in respiration.
2904 T. W. GALLOWAY
Fig. 5.—Diagram showing pos-
terior end of three worms. A.,
anal segment; C., coelom; G.,
gut; L., ciliated lobe of the
respiratory pavilion in Dero; T.,
non-ciliated tentacle; W., body
wall; Z., zone in front of anal
segment where new segments are
formed.
e. Blood Vessels—The following general plan may be taken
as representative of the more important blood vessels of the smaller
oligochetes :
(1) A dorsal longitudinal vessel above the gut which is con-
tractile. This commonly runs the length of the animal; but it may
begin in the region of the clitellum (Enchytraeids: Fig. 1) being
lacking in the posterior part of the body; or it may be lacking
anteriorily. It is usually contractile.
Fig. 6.—A diagram of a trans-
verse section of a worm. 5 Sap
dorsal setae; D. V., dorsal blood
vessel; G., gut; H., transverse or
peri-visceral blood vessels, often
contractile (‘“‘hearts’’); V., ven-
tral blood vessel; V. N., ventral
nerve cord; V. S., ventral setae;
W., body wall made up of
“skin” and muscles.
(2) A ventral vessel running the whole length of the body.
This is not contractile.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 295
(3) Transverse or lateral vessels which connect the dorsal
and ventral trunks, forming loops around the gut (fig. 6). These
may occur in practically all the segments of the body, as in the
Tubificidae and Lumbriculidae; or in only a few (1 to 4 or 5) in
the anterior end of the body, as in the Naididae and Enchytraeidae.
They may send branches to the body walls and to other organs.
D Fig. 7.—Diagram of anterior
blood vessels of one of the Nai-
didae (e. g. Pristina ). D.,
dorsal vessel; H., circular or
transverse (sometimes contrac-
tile) vessels connecting D with
V, the ventral vessel; L., loop
L H Vv in prostomium connecting longl-
tudinal vessels.
Fig. 7
(4) Blind contractile branches from the dorsal vessel or from
the transverse vessels (Fig. 12) characterize the Lumbriculidae.
f. Nephridia—These organs are very characteristic of the
aquatic oligochetes, in common with other annulates. Each nephri-
dium is related to two segments. It begins in the posterior part of
a segment, ordinarily as a tube with a trumpet-shaped opening ex-
tending forward from the face of a septum (Fig. 8). The tube
then penetrates the septum, and in the anterior portion of the next
posterior segment is a more or less massive part often much coiled
and glandular. From this a tubular outlet, which may have a blad-
der-like enlargement, leads thru the body wall to the outside. The
relative size and differentiation of these portions is a matter of
much variation in the different groups. They do not occur in all
the segments of the body, but are usually lacking in the special-
Fig. 8
Fig. 8.—Nephridium. Diagram showing relation of nephridium to the segments. Only
the part of the segment between the ventral body wall (W) and the intestine (1) is shown.
Eades, D., duct; F., funnel of nephridium; G., glandular part; P., external pore; S.,
septum.
290 T. W. GALLOWAY
ized “head” segments and in those in which the sex-organs are
found. There are some strong evidences for thinking that some,
at least, of the sex-ducts arise from the modified nephridia.
g. The Sex-organs——As in many hermaphrodite animals the
sex-organs in Oligochaeta are very complex. There are two main
classes of organs:—those concerned in producing the sex cells,—
ova and sperm; and the supplementary organs that are concerned
in the maturing of these cells and in bringing together the ova and
sperm in fertilization. It is this latter group that gives the com-
plexity.
MALE ORGANS
Producing sperm :—the testes, of which one or more pairs arise
from the peritoneal epithelium especially on the posterior surface
of certain definite septa (Fig. 9, O., T.).
Storing and ripening sperm:—sperm sacs (vesiculae semin-
ales), which are pouches of the septa bounding the segments that
contain the testes. These sacs may grow until they extend thru
several segments and may become quite complex in form (Figs 9,
EL; 21 ))\.
Carrying the sperm to the exterior:—sperm ducts and their
accessory structures. The sperm ducts are usually long and coiled
and may become very much differentiated along their course and at
ee ia ao: 6 | 9
wcoeeen = = >
i
5 as i Ba OE. ioe ma nee
SLL A oo Se oe Ss a
W G SUNY, E.S.
AIT monty Te
: J g ee ss BAA ee —
S$
Fig. 9
Fig. 9.—Diagram of sex organs in one of the Naididae (e. g. Dero or Nais) viewed
from the side. The left portion of the animal (not quite one-half) and everything dorsal to
the digestive tract (G) is considered to be removed. The segments are numbered. E. S., egg
sac; M. P., pore of the sperm duct whose funnel opens into segment 5; O., ovary; Od, ovi-
duct; S., septum; S. S., sperm sacs; St., spermatheca; T., testis; W., body wall.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 297
the opening. The regions that should be noticed and are subject
to variation are: (1) the inner opening, often ciliated and funnel-
shaped, where the sperm enter; (2) the tubular portion which may
be variously supplied with glands (spermiducal or “prostate”
glands), more commonly associated with the outer end of the duct;
(3) special enlargement (“atrium”) into which one or more sperm
ducts may empty; and (4) a special copulatory organ (penis )
which is a modification of the outer end of the sperm duct or of the
tissues immediately associated with it (Fig. 14).
FEMALE ORGANS
Producing ova:—the ovaries, homologous with the testes and
arising in an entirely similar way. There are usually one or more
pairs (Fig. 11, O.).
Storing and ripening of the ova:—egg sacs (receptacula
ovorum) formed as are the sperm-sacs by the pouching of the sep-
tum of the segment containing the ovaries. The egg sac is more
frequently single than the sperm sac. The egg sacs may grow pos-
teriorily thru many segments, pushing the various septa before them
(Fig. 11). In many instances the sperm sac, arising as it does an-
terior to the egg sacs, may be pushed into the egg sacs. The imma-
ture eggs escape from the ovary and, instead of lying free in the
body cavity as in the Polychetes, pass into this sac until mature or
until fertilization is possible.
Carrying the ova to the outside :—oviducts, similar in general
to the sperm ducts but usually much reduced, in some instances
being little more than a pore thru the body wall (Fig. 9, Od).
Receiving or copulatory organs:—the spermathecae (recep-
tacula seminis) are sacs, usually in pairs, into which the sperm
from another worm pass at copulation (Fig. 9 S. S.). They are re-
tained here until they are passed out by muscular contraction upon
the eggs of the individual when these are laid. Around the escaping
eggs and sperm the clitellum forms a secreted cocoon in which de-
velopment proceeds. The spermatheca may be simple, or may be
branched and lobed. In some types it opens into the gut as well as
to the outside world. The meaning of this last fact is not known.
298 T. W. GALLOWAY
8. Topics for Investigation Suitable to the General Student of
of the Group.
The group of oligochetes is one in which much remains to be
done in the United States. The morphology of only a few species
has been completely worked out. The following are some of the
directions in which profitable work may be done both by amateurs
and professional biologists :—the working up and reporting on the
local species from many parts of the country, leading to a fuller
knowledge of the distribution of the species; the discovery of new
or intermediate forms; the more exact study of the physical con-
ditions preferred by various species; the study of the best methods
of culture and propagation in artificial and controlled conditions ;
the behavior and the reactions of these various species to the en-
vironment, especially as relates to food, water-preferences, mating,
and the like; the degree and character of the variations within the
species and genera in respect to structure and behavior; the facts
concerning reproduction, both sexual and asexual. To the expert,
the group offers very favorable material for the study of divers
philosophical questions of biology.
9. Systematic (General).
PHYLUM ANNULATA.—This phylum is a rather natural
group, including organisms with bilateral symmetry and bodies made
up of a series of rings or segments. These segments appear not
merely as external rings but show also in the internal organs in var-
ious ways. Paired appendages occur usually on each segment (ex-
cept in the Leeches), and take the form of unsegmented bristles or
setae. There are two main Classes :—
Class 1. Those having setae, with the ccelom divided into segments,
and n0-stuckers>. .2.505 Chaetopoda (‘“‘bristle-worms’’).
Class 2. Those without setae, having a sucker at each end of the
body, ccelom not well differentiated into segments....
dale Aa aers Mee eee hee ae Hirudinea (leeches).
The Ciass CHAETOPODA includes two principal Orders :—
Order 1. Worms chiefly terrestrial or from fresh water; setae
small, not very numerous, usually arranged in 4
bundles in each segment of the body, and arising di-
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 299
rectly from depressions in the body wall; the segments
with the exception of the first and the last are similar
in appearance; hermaphrodite, and having complex
GEMTOCUCEVe:OL PATS! Gas: <reie suels.cin sus siobasiele Oligochaeta.
Order 2. Marine worms with numerous setae which arise from
limb-like projections from the side of the body (para-
podia) ; a number of the anterior segments are usually
highly specialized as compared with those that follow ;
reproductive organs simple and repeated in many seg-
ments; sexes separate, sex organs simple. . Polychaeta.
The OrpER OLIGOCHAETA may be separated again into two Sub-
orders somewhat less natural and satisfactory than the above di-
visions :
Sub-order 1. Worms, usually small and aquatic in habit; repro-
ductive maturity at a definite period of the year;
the clitellum, or girdle, characteristic of sexual
maturity only and poorly developed, being only
one cell thick; egg sacs large; the ducts which con-
vey the sperm to the exterior open in the segment
next back of that in which they originate internal-
Si (GBs Eases ENG is Gi) Neel tera ea re etetlee Microdrili.
Sub-order 2. Much larger worms and chiefly terrestrial, having
characteristics for the most part opposite to those
mentioned in T......... Megadrili (earthworms).
10. Systematic (Special).
A Key to the Principal Families of Aquatic Oligochaeta
(Microdrili) that have been described for the United States.
A. Small (from 1 to 15 or 25 mm.) aquatic worms; capable of multiplication
by fission (i. e. non-sexually) as well as sexually; usually quite trans-
parent.
Very small (1-10 mm.) ; no complete septa; prostomium ciliated on ven-
tral surface; some (or all) of the ventral setae capilliform (occasion-
ally some f-shaped), never bifid at free end.............2cccesccenes
Bt et Sitad 2 IGE ees vente eC A cea GN Family Aeolosomatide (p. 300).
Somewhat larger (2-25 mm.) ; complete dissepiments dividing the ccelom
into chambers; bifid setae common together with other kinds.........
SPATE Mayet ae Srey reneiatare oi oft aie Sie terys Ste Shai eeretorane toe Family Naididae (p. 301).
300 T. W. GALLOWAY
B. Do not reproduce by fission; usually less transparent than A; mostly
longer (often very much longer) worms.
Setae never bifid at the extremity, short, 2 or usually more in each
bundle; worms 5-30 mm. in length; integument inclined to be whitish
and opaque; some aquatic, some terrestrial and burrowing in organic
matter, some parasitic on plants........ Family Enchytreidae (p. 306).
Some bifid setae usually in each bundle; worms usually exceed 20 mm.
in length.
Bundles each contain a pair of f/-shaped (sometimes bifid) setae; no
capilliform setae; blind contractile appendages on the dorsal blood
vessel-or on its lateral branches (Pie. 12)enc- macs oo -cstcies ree
Etats Bk Malas aeons Family Lumbriculidae (p. 300).
Bristles usually uncinate and pectinate (Fig. 3; 6, 8, roc), but capilli-
form bristles may occur in the dorsal bundles; lateral blood-vessels
form a loop around the gut in nearly every segment; no contractile
appendages on the dorsal blood-vessel. Family Tubificidae (p. 312).
FAMILY AEOLOSOMATIDAE
This family contains at present only one genus, /Zolosoma.
The worms of this genus are very small and beautifully transpar-
ent. They are easily recognized by the presence in the integument
of minute globules usually strikingly colored. They reproduce by
fission, are more capable of changing their form than most of the
worms, and have cilia about the mouth and prostomium. They
are more hardy than most of the small forms and may be
found abundantly at the surface of cultures that are too foul for
other species. They are widely distributed and when found at all
are usually abundant.
KEY TO THE SPECIES
Integumental globules colorless.
Prostomium not wider than the segments back of it; setae capilliform and
f-shaped; first pair of nephridia at the posterior end of esophagus.
Philadelphia. (Mlmnors: : 2022.2 Resin et 8 A. niveum Leidig.
Integumental globules colored orange to dark red.
Head (prostomium) about equal in width to the following segments ;
setae curved and nearly of uniform length; no nephridia in the region
of the esophagus (i. e. anterior to the widening of the gut). Phila-
del pHIA. soos iii idineee Pain nh ele eh ot etek A. quaternarium Ehrenberg.
Head broader than the following segments; setae nearly straight; two
pairs of nephridia in front of the widening of the gut. Illinois; Mis-
soufi ; Massachusetts. 66.6. cccccecsscceccescs A. hemprichii Ehrenberg.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 301
Integumental globules colored pale yellow to olive green.
Head broader than the following segments and pointed in front; setae
both capilliform and sigmoid; two pairs of nephridia in esophageal
rezion, Tijinois; Missotris;......0-.++>.- A. tenebrarum Vejdovsky.
As in A. tenebrarum, except that the setae are capilliform and sigmoid
in the anterior segments and sigmoid alone in the posterior segments.
PSE SAS Pca tee ae Ae ite ths Ac RS 5 Rice Woe eee oes A. leidyi Cragin.
FAMILY NAIDIDAE
The Naididae are all aquatic and are small transparent worms.
Their usual method of reproduction is by fission, altho sexual
stages are known to occur in most of the genera. When present
the sexual organs are found well forward, in segments 5 and 6,
(occasionally in 7 and 8). There are usually 4 groups of setae on
each segment, but the dorsal pair of bundles may be wanting. The
dorsal setae are regularly lacking in the first 4 or 5 segments. Dis-
sepiments are well developed. The genera are distinguished on
the basis of the character of the setae and the segment on which
the first pair of the dorsal bundles occur, on the presence or absence
of “eye-spots,” on the shape of the prostomium, and on the pres-
ence or absence of special respiratory lobes (Fig. 5, L.).
KEY TO THE PRINCIPAL GENERA
Dorsal setae present.
Capilliform setae in the dorsal bundles.
Dorsal bundles begin on segment 2.
Capilliform setae together with shorter needle-like or biuncinate
setae; prostomium round or with short snout only...........
ie Sei ol piel SMEAR Loi Si a eR ROS A i a rei Genus Naidum (p. 302).
Usually only capilliform setae in the dorsal bundles; prostomium
in form of long snout or tentacle...... Genus Pristina (p. 302).
Dorsal bundles begin on segment 6.
Posterior end without respiratory lobes (Fig. 5. L).
Capilliform setae shorter or only a little longer than the
width of the body:
Prostomium not developed into a snout................
STOR AISA Ca SES co th SOUS ORES Genus Nais (p. 303).
Prostomium developed into snout...................20
ARG ISCO a OS Ce Ra Ge Genus Stylaria (p. 303).
Capilliform setae twice as long as the width of the body and
best developed on segment 6...... Genus Slavina (p. 303).
Posterior end supplied with a series of ciliated lobes serving for
respiration’. ihe ase oben Genus Dero (p. 304).
302 T. W. GALLOWAY
No capilliform setae (only bifid) in dorsal bundles...................00,
REE 33 ts Ot sees ae eee Rete Genus Ophidonais (p. 305).
Dorsal setae wholly lacking; ventral setae present.................ceceeeeees
AAT oS ng et Gerd gi aati a aged os HEE EPA SSE Genus Chetogaster (p. 305).
Genus Naipum, O. SCHMIDT.
Prostomium rounded or slightly pointed. Dorsal bristles be-
gin on segment 2, and contain both capilliform and biuncinate setae.
Only biuncinate setae in the ventral bundles. A single species re-
corded for United States.
Naidum osborm Walton. Length 1.6 mm; segments in an in-
dividual 15 to 16. Eyes absent. Digestive tract differentiated into
pharynx (segments 1-3), esophagus (4-7), stomach (segment 8),
and intestine. Dorsal bristle bundles contain one capilliform and
one biuncinate seta; the ventral bundles of 4 biuncinate setae. Cedar
Point, Sandusky, Ohio.
GENUS PRISTINA, EHRENBERG.
Dorsal bundles of setae begin on segment 2 and contain capilli-
form setae only (or occasionally hastiform also) ; eyes absent; pros-
tomium developed into a snout. The sexual condition is known for
one species (P. leidyi) in which the testes and spermathecae are
found in 7 and the ovaries in 8.
Species
P. flagellum Leidy. Length 6-7 mm., with 40-60 segments.
Dorsal setae of segment 3 not longer than others; capilliform setae
without fine teeth. Last segment with three finger-like processes;
a short, dorsal median and two longer lateral ones. Penna., IIL,
Neale
P. leidyi Smith. Length 4-8 mm., and about 30 segments to
the individual. Dorsal setae of segment 3 times as long as others;
capilliform setae about 35» and, except in 3, finely toothed. Pro-
boscis about 3 times as long as width of body. Nephridia com-
mence in segment 9. Havana, III.
P. serpentina Walton. Length 2.2 mm., with about 15 segments
in an individual; proboscis 0.2-0.3 mm. long. Dorsal bristles on
segment 3 not longer than others; capilliform setae about 300p
and finely toothed. Ventral setae 5-6 in a bundle, biuncinate, with
teeth almost equal. Cedar Point, Sandusky, O.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 303
Genus Nats, MULLER.
Prostomium rounded; dorsal bundles begin on segment 6 and
contain capilliform setae, and may also have shorter uncinate or
straight setae with divided ends; those in 6 not longer than others.
Testes and spermathece in 5; ovaries in 6. Eye-spots usually
present.
Species
N. elinguis Miller. Length 1.5 mm. Dorsal bundles with 1-3
(usually 2) setae, 1 capilliform and the other hastiform. Eye-spots
present. Illinois; Penna.
(Besides this, Walton has recently described 4 species of this genus from Lake Erie,
Sandusky, O. These were based on a few specimens and will not be described here; but
their finding indicates that this genus is probably well represented in America and will
well repay study.)
GENUS STYLARIA, LAMARCK.
This genus agrees with Nais in practically everything except in
the fact that it possesses a well developed snout, and in the some-
what better differentiation of the digestive tract into esophagus
and crop or stomach. Beddard and some others place the species
in the genus Nais.
S. lacustris (Linnaeus). Length 10-15 mm.; segments 25;
proboscis well developed, about 1 mm. in length; eye-spots present ;
dorsal bristle bundles begin on segment 6 and contain capilliform
setae only. This is either a well distributed and very variable spe-
cies, or a number of species have been referred here at one time
or another. Leidy named two species of Stylaria which from his
descriptions cannot be distinguished from S. lacustris. Penna. ;
Mass. ; Ill.; Ohio.; Mo.
Gents SLAvinA, VEJDOVSKY.
This genus is placed by some writers with Nais, and is to be distinguished from
it chiefly by the fact that the capilliform setae are confined to the dorsal bundle of seg-
ment 6, or are very much longer and are more numerous in 6 than in those that follow.
Capilliform setae are without teeth. Prostomium rounded.
S. appendiculata (D’Udekem). Length 5-15 mm., with about 35 segments. One or
more rows of sensory papillae encircle the worm in each segment. Havana, III.
S. gracilis (Leidy). Length 10 mm., with about 50 segments. Three capilliform
setae in the bundles of segment 6 and only one on those following. Pennsylvania.
304 T. W. GALLOWAY
GENUS DErRO, OKEN.
This is a widely distributed genus which is especially interest-
ing and easy to recognize because of the ciliated respiratory pro-
cesses from the body wall of the anal segment, which contain blood
vessels (Fig. 5, 3). Dorsal bristle bundles begin on segment 6 and
contain capilliform and hastiform setae. Prostomium rounded and
eyes absent. Esophagus and stomach differentiated. Nephridia
begin in segment 6. Testes and spermathecae in 5 and ovaries in 6,
as in typical Naididae.
Key TO THE AMERICAN SPECIES
All processes of the anal segment ciliated.
Ciliated processes rounded, in blunted lobes.................. D. obtusa.
CiliatedJprocesses elongated) <5) 22 ene oe ec te ee oie wee D. limosa.
Non-ciliated processes (from ventral margin of the anal segment) as well as
the ciliated.
Ciliated lobes poorly developed, not finger-like................. D. vaga.
Ciliated processes long and finger-like..............0..00000e D. furcata.
Species
D. obtusa d’Udekem. Single individual 3-4 mm. in length;
25-40 segments. Ciliated lobes short and blunt; the dorsal lip of
the branchial surface with two grooves, but not drawn out into pro-
cesses. “‘Hearts,’”’ or circum-esophageal loops of the blood vessels,
4. Mass.; Ill.; Mo.; etc.
D. limosa Leidy. Length 7-15 mm.; segments 40-60; dorsal
lip of branchial area is drawn out into 2 moderately long processes ;
5 pairs of “hearts.” Penna.; Iil.
D. vaga Leidy. Length about 8 mm., with 25 segments. Two
long non-ciliated processes from the ventral margin of branchial
area; the ciliated surface ridged and forming a sort of pavilion,
rather than lobed. Three pairs of “hearts.” The worm forms a
tube of small living plants, as Lemna, or of non-living objects, and
carries this around ; this species remains at the surface of the water
and is thus more readily discovered than the other species. Penna.;
Mass. ; IIl.; Ohio.
D. furcata Oken. Two long non-ciliated ventral processes and
4-6 ciliated respiratory processes, arranged in pairs. First dorsal
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 305
setae on segment 5. Five pairs of contractile loops or “hearts.”
Ill. ; Mo.
GENUS OPHIDONAIS, GERVAIS.
There is a present tendency to include this genus with Nais. It
has the dorsal setae, but lacks the capilliform setae found in the
bundles of that genus. All setae are short and nearly straight.
Other characteristics much as in Nais.
O. serpentina Miller. Length 15-30 mm. No proboscis. Dor-
sal setae short, straight, and bifid. Four dark pigment bands
around the anterior end of the body, one band on each of segments
2-5. Havana, Ill.
GENUS CHAETOGASTER, V. BAER.
The setae in this group are all ventral, and only uncinate setae
are found. The first setae occur in segment 2 and none are found
on segments 3-5. The prostomium is rudimentary, and the mouth
is large and terminal and used somewhat as a sucker in locomotion.
One pair of transverse blood vessels form a loop about the esopha-
Fig. 10.—Blood vessels in
Chaetogaster. Letters as in
Bion 7.
Fig. 10
gus (Fig. 10). When sexually mature, testes are found in segment
5, Ovaries in segment 6, and spermathece in segment 5. Members
of the genus are found in widely different parts of the world. One
species, at least, occurs parasitic or symbiotic on fresh water snails.
Key TO THE SPECIES
| =-ZU Res 2 (See DRE SRPMS eR CRS ane ERY fence dean Dy aR C. limnet
Free,—not parasitic.
Prostomium indistinct.
Fsopharuser/s5 length iof prarytix.. osscce elses tee C. pellucidus.
(Much like Ch. limnei).
Esophagus’ 173 lengthof ‘pharynx: jens tos eee a C. diaphanus.
306 T. W. GALLOWAY
Esophagus equal in length to the pharynx.................6- C. langi.
Prostomium distinct; esophagus 1/2 to 1 length of pharynx.............
Be RR Re EI RO Nn et rd tay eee SRE ere AOR Oty PRN oO cue 5 50 C. diastrophus.
Species
C. limnei v. Baer. Length 2 mm.; setae 8 to 16 in each bundle;
esophagus much shorter than pharynx; first enlargement of intes-
tine covered with an anastomosing network of blood vessels; lives
on or in the bodies of certain species of pond snails. New England,
Illinois, Missouri.
C. pellucidus Walton. Length 1.5 mm., with 9-11 segments.
More transparent than the preceding; setae 6-7 in each bundle;
esophagus very short; first enlargement of intestine surrounded by
12 or more pairs of blood vessels, which, however, do not anasto-
mose. Cedar Point, Ohio.
C. diaphanus Gruithuisen. Length 6-15 mm. Very transpar-
ent; esophagus very distinct but much shorter than pharynx. This
is the largest of our species, and may be found with several indi-
viduals in a chain. It is well distributed. Mass.; Ill.; Mo.; Penna.;
etc.
C. langi Bretscher. Length 1-2 mm. Esophagus long. Setae
4ina bundle. Lake Erie, Cedar Point, Ohio.
C. diastrophus Gruithuisen. Length 2-5 mm. Prostomium
more distinct than in the preceding; esophagus as long or nearly
as long as the pharynx; setae 4-7 in a bundle. Mass., Ill., Mo. (It
is probable that Leidy’s C. gulosus is identical with this, as C. dias-
trophus is widely distributed and has essentially all the characteris-
tics mentioned by Leidy.)
FAMILY ENCHYTRAEIDAE
This is a family in which are a great many species of small
worms, both aquatic and terrestrial. Only a few types, however,
have been described for the United States; and it is reasonably cer-
tain that there are still numerous members of the family in America
to be discovered. The main features that distinguish this family
are:—a decided prostomium; both dorsal and ventral bundles of
bristles, with sete nearly straight or curved but never capilliform
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 307
nor biuncinate; integument whitish and often somewhat opaque,
tho some are nearly transparent ; there is no reproduction by fission ;
the sex organs are further back than they are in the Naididae, the
testes being in segment 11 and the male pores in 12, the ovaries in
12, and the pores of the oviducts between 12 and 1 3. There isa
pair of spermathecae in segment 5. (See Fig. 1, St.) The dorsal
blood vessel does not run the whole length of the body but arises
from the intestine in the general region of the clitellum (Pigs h);
and runs forward connecting with the ventral vessel by peri-visceral
loops in the first few segments.
Only one genus, Fridericia, of this family has been even fairly
worked up for the fresh waters of the United States. In addition
to the genera and species of Enchytraeids described or referred to
below Eisen has described forms from Mexico to Alaska which are
probably confined to the Pacific coast ; two species of Fridericia and
two of Henlea have been discovered for Urbana, IIL., by Mr. Paul
Welch, the description of which is yet unpublished. A few worms
believed to belong here were partially described by Leidy years ago.
GeNus FRipeRiciA, MICHAELSEN.
Terrestrial worms with dorsal pores (openings thru the body
wall into the ccelom in the region of the head or further back) such
as are found in the larger oligochetes. Setae straight and 2 or
multiple of 2 to the bundle; if more than 2, the inner pair are young-
er and smaller. Salivary glands present. Dorsal blood vessel begins
behind the clitellum. Spermathece (Fig. 1. St.) usually with out-
pocketing lobes and may open into the gut as well as to the outside.
Six species have already been described for the United States
and as yet very few localities have been carefully studied. It is
questionable whether these six are distinct. For example, F. parva
and F, bulbosa have much in common, and F. agilis and F. agricola
are very similar. The chief points of distinction among the species
are :—size, complexity of the salivary glands, complexity of the
spermatheca and the relative length of sac and duct, and the form
of the nephridia.
308 T. W. GALLOWAY
Key TO THE SPECIES
Spermathece simple (i. e. without diverticula).
Salivary glands simple.
Duct of spermatheca twice as long as the sac............ F. bulbosa.
Duct of spermatheca four times as long as the sac......... F. parva.
Salivary lands’ slightly branched io2.5.e nc cea cule hiceiteeenmitees F. alba.
Spermathece with diverticula.
Salivaryaclandsysimples sett. eenee cree nce nels eee eee F. longa
Salivary glands branched.
Duct of spermatheca three times as long as sac............ F. agjilis.
Duct of spermatheca six or seven times as long as sac...F. agricola.
Species
F. bulbosa Rosa. Length 8 mm., 42 segments. Setae 4 per
bundle in anterior segments, 2 posteriorly. Lumen of nephridia
in front of septa short, wide and straight. Spermathece without
diverticula, and duct about twice the length of the pouch. Philadel-
phia; Mass.
F, parva Moore. Length 12 to 15 mm., with 46 segments.
Setae 4 per bundle back to the segment 25, and 2 on others. Sperm-
atheca without diverticula, duct 4 times the length of the pear-
shaped sac. Dorsal pores begin on segment 7. Dorsal blood vessel
arises in 17. Brain 3/5 as broad as long, greatest width a little pos-
terior to the middle. Prostomium conspicuously roughened with
rounded nodules. Philadelphia.
F, alba Moore. Length 15-22 mm.; segments 56-58. Setae
long and slender, and 4 to the bundle except on 2 or 3 posterior seg-
ments ; may be as many as 6 or 7 in front of the clitellum. Sperma-
theca similar to parva, but sac more spherical. Salivary glands
slightly branched, with only 2 or 3 branches. Dorsal vessel arises
in segment 22. Dorsal pores begin in 6. Almost aquatic, living in
wet leaves and moss. Penna.
F. longa Moore. Length 25-30 mm.; segments 60-69. Setae
anterior to clitellum 4; posterior, 2. Spermathecae with 5-8 diver-
ticula arranged in a whorl about central part of sac; duct 2 or 3
times as long as sac. Salivary glands simple and open in segment 5.
Brain 2/3 as broad as long, convex behind. Segments studded with
rounded knobs. Penna.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 309
F. agricola Moore. Length 20-25 mm.; segments 65. Setae 4
in bundle for first 30 segments, later 2. Spermathecz with a pair
of sacculations from the main organ, and with ducts 6-7 times length
of sac. Salivary glands conspicuous and divided into 5-7 slender
tubular branches. Brain as in longa. Dorsal pores transverse and
slit-like and begin on 7. Lives among underground bulbs of garlic.
Delaware.
F. agilis Smith. Length 25-30 mm.; segments 55-65. Setae 2
in bundle, occasionally 4. A head pore, and the dorsal pores begin
in 7. Spermathecae with 9 well developed diverticula, and with
duct 3 times length of sac. Salivary glands large and branched.
Dorsal blood vessel begins in 19. Brain concave on anterior mar-
gin and convex behind. Illinois.
Some Uncertain Genera and Species
GENUS ENCHYTRAEUS.
This genus is somewhat poorly defined, being distinguished from Fridericia by the
absence of the dorsal pores (except the head pore), by the equal straight setae except for
a curve at the free end.
Enchyiraeus albidus, a marine form found along the sea coast from Maine to N. J.
Enchytraeus socialis Leidy. Length 5-10 mm.; about 50 segments; 5-7 simple setae
per bundle; clitellum begins on segment 13. Found under the damp, decaying bark of
stumps and trees. Eastern Penna.
GENuS DISTICHOPUS.
A genus poorly described by Leidy, but later studied and described by Moore.
Similar in many respects to Fridericia, but different from it in the fact that the dorsal
setae are entirely wanting; ventral setae 4, or 3, or none to the bundle.
D. sylvestris Leidy. Length 20-30 mm.; segments 68. Salivary glands in segment
5, branched; dorsal blood vessel arises back of the clitellum in segment 13-14.
FAMILY LUMBRICULIDAE
The worms of this family are aquatic and somewhat larger
than those of the preceding families, and not really microscopic ex-
cept that they are move or less transparent, and many points of
structure and function can be observed directly by the general stu-
dent. They reproduce sexually only, and the sex organs are rather
more variable than in the families already studied. The sperma-
thece are further back (8-12) and frequently more than one pair;
there are two sperm ducts on each side arising in two successive
segments and uniting to form a right and a left spermiducal gland
310 T. W. GALLOWAY
Fig. 11.—Diagram of the sex organs in one of the Lumbriculidae. A., ‘‘atrium;”
E. S., egg sac; F., funnels of sperm ducts; M. P., the male pore or external opening from
the atrium; O., ovaries; Od., oviduct and female opening; St., spermathecae; T., testes.
Numerals indicate the segments.
(Fig. 11). The setae are /-shaped, simple or biuncinate and in
pairs. The dorsal blood vessel, or the transverse vessels arising in
each segment from it, have blind contractile pouches or appendages
(Fig. 12) except in a certain number of anterior segments. This is
distinctive of the family. Three genera recognized by Michaelsen
are recorded for the United States :—Lumbriculus, Eclipidrilus and
Sutroa.
Key to DisTtINGUISH THE GENERA
Setae bifid at extremity; prostomium rounded.................. Lumbriculus
Setae simple (not bifid) ; prostomium elongated.
Spermathecae one pair in segments 8, 9, and Io or Il........ Eclipidrilus.
Spermatheca* single in 8, -with diverticula: :....-..----.0-- cece Sutroa.
GENuS LUMBRICULUS, GRUBE.
Greatly elongated worms with a rounded prostomium; setae
bifid. The dorsal and ventral blood vessels are connected in the
posterior part of each segment; in each segment, except 8 or I0
anterior segments, there is also a pair of blind lateral branches
Fig. 12.—Diagram of blood
vessels in two segments of a
Lumbriculid. C., Caeca or
diverticula. which are _ con-
tractile; D., dorsal vessel;
H., transverse or perivisceral
loops about the gut; V., ven-
tral vessel.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA ZL
forming contractile diverticula (Fig. 12). Sperm ducts as in the
family generally, with openings on segment 8 to 10; spermathecz
simple, one pair in each of the three or more segments back of the
spermiducal pore. Two pairs of ovaries and funnels.
Lumbriculus inconstans Smith—Length 30-60 mm., and 150-
200 segments; color reddish; brain slightly concave anteriorly with
deep incision behind; the transverse contractile appendages of the
dorsal vessel begin in segment 11 and get larger and more branches
posteriorily.. Two pairs of testes in 9 and 10; two pairs of ovaries
in It and 12; sperm sacs open in 10 and extend backward as far
as 20; spermathecae 5 pairs (11-15 or 12-16). Havana, Ill.
L. limosus Leidy. Length 2-4 inches, with 170-225 segments; setae long, sigmoid,
suddenly narrowed at outer end, and bifid,—two each bundle. Sperm ducts (?) open
on 9; the reproductive organs (1) extend as far back as segment 20. Under stones and
leaves on the muddy borders of streams. Eastern Penna.
GENuS ECLIPIDRILUS, EISEN.
Under this genus may be included for the present three species of worms from
widely different parts of the country, which possibly should be placed in separate genera.
The setae are in twos and are not bifid; the prostomium is usually somewhat elongated.
The sperm ducts are complex, and each is invested with a spiral muscle about its middle,
forming a sperm reservoir; it communicates with a protrusible penis. The contractile
branches of the dorsal vessel are less well developed than in Lumbriculus.
E. frigidus Eisen. No proboscis; two pairs of testes and sperm funnels in 9 and
10; one pair of sperm sacs extending thru several segments; one pair spermathecae in
11; a pair of protrusible penes in 10; a pair of ovaries in 11 with oviducts opening on
12; one pair of nephridia in each of segments 4-8. California.
E. palustris Smith. Length about 50 mm., and 1 mm. in diameter; segments about
165. Prostomium drawn out into a proboscis. One pair testes in 10; one sperm sac well
developed, the other much reduced; two spermathecae in 9, but on the same side of the
segment; one penis on 10; one pair of ovaries in 11, oviducts opening 11-12. A pair of
nephridia in 7. Florida.
E. asymmetricus Smith. Length about 30 mm.; segments 65; prostomium extended
into a proboscis. One pair of testes in 10; single sperm sac extending as far as segment
21; the sperm duct with muscular reservoir extends thru segments 12-14; single male
pore in middle line of segment 10; no atrium or spermiducal glands, but with a penis;
two spermathecae in 9 with their pores in the middle line, one behind the other; one pair
of ovaries in 11. Nephridia absent from the anterior segments, or one pair in 6. Illinois.
GENUS SuTROA, EISEN.
Prostomium extended into a proboscis; setae not bifid. Clitellum 7-15; one pair of
testes in 10; two pairs of sperm ducts, with very much elongated spermiducal glands, sur-
rounded by the sperm sacs and opening externally on segment 10; a single spermatheca
in 8, with many diverticula, simple and branched; ovaries in 11, with oviducal pores on
11-12.
S. rostrata Eisen. Length 75 mm. Ventral blood vessel forks in 8 and is connected
with the dorsal in the prostomium only. Cocoon not pointed at the ends. San Fran-
cisco, Cal.
312 T. W. GALLOWAY
S. alpestris Eisen. Length 40 mm. Ventral vessel forked in 6, and connected with
dorsal blood vessel by loops about intestine in each segment. Cocoon globular and pointed
at ends. Donner Lake, Cal.
FAMILY TUBIFICIDAE
This large family of slender aquatic (fresh and marine) worms
is represented in America by six or more known genera and a con-
siderable number of species. They do not reproduce by fission;
but many of the species are very hardy and consequently they are
numerous and well distributed. Three kinds of bristles may be
found,—capilliform, pectinate, and uncinate; none but the unci-
nate occur in the ventral bundles. Dorsal and ventral blood ves-
sels are connected in nearly all segments of the body by transverse
branches, forming loops around the gut. The testes are in segment
10 and the ovaries in 11; the sperm ducts always have spermiducal
glands (Figs. 13, 14, S. G.) near their opening on segment 11; ovi-
ducts open 11-12; one pair of spermathecae in 10.
40
Ah te
Fig. 13.—Diagram of sex organs of one of the Tubificidae. Letters as in Fig. 9 and 11.
The points that distinguish the genera are :—the kinds of setae;
the number, size, and position of the contractile perivisceral loops
“hearts; and the character of the glands in connection with the
sperm ducts.
Key To THE GENERA
Tubificids with capilliform setae in dorsal bundles.
Peri-visceral blood vessels gradually increase in size from segment 5
(0 O35 Sse ee ECL AT BO CE CCR PEE! Genus Ilyodrilus.
Peri-visceral blood vessels much dilated (heart) in segment 8 (or 9).
Without ‘sensory papillaccr4. 7. nie nce netetel ois ise Genus Tubifex.
With sensory papillae around segments...... Genus Embolocephalus.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 55
Tubificids with no capilliform setae in dorsal bundles.
Body not whitish or opaque because of corpuscles about the viscera.
Two pairs dilated hearts.
ng 7eande ssn onprostatesiy scene acciidehaiaeeoiteeloe Genus Clitellio.
IneSrandaoreprostatesi cesses ee eclseniekeie Genus Limnodrilus.
Four pairs of hearts (7-11), the 4th enlarged...Genus Telmatodrilus.
Body milky white with corpuscles about viscera; hearts in 7-10..........
Se SR iA Gh MEIN eR a Ce eRe ai cee MeN eae LG MIRE REO A Genus Rhizodrilus.
GENUS TUBIFEX, LAMARCK.
This genus is apparently one of the best distributed of
the fresh water oligochetes. The worms have three types of
bristles,—especially in the anterior bundles,—capilliform, uncinate,
and pectinate, ventral bundles having only uncinate. The perivis-
ceral vessels of segment 8 decidedly enlarged and contractile. No
chitinous penis.
Only one fresh water species is certainly known for America,
unless we accept Michaelsen’s view that the next species, Embolo-
cephalus multisetosus Smith, is a species of Tubifex. Two or three
species have been described for brackish or salt water.
Fig. 14
Fig. 14.—More detailed diagram of the male efferent apparatus in Fig. 13. W., body
wall; S., septa; M. P., external male pore; A., wall of “‘atrium’’ which contains the penis
sheath (P. S.) and the penis (P.) and terminates the sperm duct (Sd.); F., the funnel of
the male duct which receives sperm from the segment in front; S. G., spermiducal glands
(“‘prostates”’), which may be variously placed in relation to the duct.
T. tubifex (rivulorum Lamarck). Length 30-80 mm., with
40-60 segments. Brain concave in front with lateral lobes well de-
314 T. W. GALLOWAY
veloped ; three lobed behind,—the middle lobe being shortest. This
worm is fairly common in the rich mud at the bottom of streams in
many parts of the country. It buries its anterior end in a tube of
mud, and waves the posterior end freely in the water. It is found
often in association with Limnodrilus with which it may readily
be confused before the examination of the setae.
T. irroratus (Verrill). Length 15-30 mm.; 70-90 segments. Prostomium slender.
Capilliform setae with a spiral twist at the end. Vascular system with well developed in-
tegumentary plexus; dorsal vessel contractile and supplied with valves at the constrictions.
A brackish water species, burrowing deep among the roots of beach grass. Mass.
T. benedeni, d’Udekem. Deep gray or nearly black in color, owing to greenish-gray
granules in numerous flattened papillae which cover the cuticle. Capilliform setae often
absent. In brackish or salt water between tide marks and out to 7 fathoms. Maine;
Conn.; New Brunswick.
T. hamatus Moore. Length 35-40 mm., by 8 mm.; 85-100 segments; 1-4 hooked and
bifid setae in each segment.
GENuS ILyopRILUS, EISEN.
This is a California genus erected by Eisen and contains 3 species of very local
habitat, so far as known. It agrees with Tubifex in the character of its setae and in its
general structure. It is differentiated according to Eisen by the character of the efferent
male ducts, which are short and broad; no vesicula seminalis.
I. perrieri Eisen. Length 10-12 mm.; width 1 mm. Anterior part of body much
larger than posterior. Brain broad as long. Testes in 11, 12, 13 setigerous segment;
ovaries in 10; sperm ducts of same length as atrium; penis without chitinous sheath;
oviduct with double wall; spermathecae bent, with inner end sacculated and with no
accessory glands. Fresno Co., California. ‘
I. sodalis Eisen. Length 25 mm., width 1 mm. Brain much broader than long,
with 6 ganglionic lobes on the posterior margin. Testes in setigerous segments 12-22,
ovaries 19-22; sperm ducts as long as the atrium and penis combined; no chitinous sheath
to penis; oviducts with single wall; spermathecae bent, 2-lobed, supported by a short
stem, with a large accessory gland. No differentiated hearts, but the perivisceral vessels
from 9 forward slightly contractile. San Francisco, Calif.
I. fragilis Eisen. Length 15 mm., width .25 mm., and anterior part not much en-
larged. Brain not as broad as long. Sperm ducts longer than atrium, but not so long
as atrium and penis together; penis not chitinous; spermathecae not bent, inner end
simple, large and globular; oviduct single-walled and chitinous. Fresno Co., Calif.
GENUS EMBOLOCEPHALUS, RANDOLPH.
This genus differs from Tubifex chiefly in the fact that its
head is more retractile, and the integument somewhat more heavy
and opaque and with non-retractile sensory elevations running in
rows around the segments. One pair of hearts in 8. It is ques-
tionable whether the species should be separated from Tubifex.
E. multisetosus Smith. Length 20-50 mm.; segments 60-105.
The setae are numerous, particularly in the anterior segments.
There are two sperm sacs which have been forced into a median
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 315
position dorsal to the digestive tract; one extends from 11-14, the
other into 9. Havana, Ill.
GENuS LIMNODRILUS, CLAPAREDE.
This is apparently a widely distributed genus in America, in-
cluding one species reported from many localities, and several
species described by Eisen from California. It appears that this
would be a genus peculiarly well worth study in the different parts
of this country. Eisen describes also a kindred genus (Campto-
drilus) from California, with 4 species, which Michaelsen includes
with Limnodrilus.
Limnodrilus is characterized as follows:—Aquatic worms
with uncinate setae only. Contractile hearts in 8, or 8 and 9. The
transverse blood vessels give off branches that penetrate the body
wall in the posterior segments. Penis with distinct chitinous sheath
and several times as long as broad; spermiducal glands in connec-
tion with the atrium of the sperm ducts.
The following, of which the first is the common species, may
be noted:
L. claparedianus Ratzel. Length 40-70 mm., with about 150
segments ; brain squarish with cleft behind, and antero-lateral lobes;
pharynx extends to the fifth segment; chitinous penis 8-10 times
as long as broad (length about t mm.). Illinois, California, Mis-
souri, Pennsylvania.
L. ornatus Eisen. Length 30 mm., width 0.6 mm. Brain broader behind; with
shallow cleft behind. Chitinous penis about 5 times as long as broad. Spermathecae
flask-shaped, sometimes constricted near middle; oviduct single, sac-like, longer than penis
sheath. California.
L. steigerwaldi Eisen. Length 80 mm., width .75-1 mm. Brain wider in front,
concave behind, with several large lobes projecting forward. Penis about 8 times long
as wide, largest at lower end; spermathecae narrow, pear-shaped. California.
L. monticola Eisen. Length 30 mm., 0.5 width. Brain as in L. ornatus, but more
squarish. Penis cylindrical, about 8 times as long as broad, outer end widened and trun-
cated. Spermathecae cylindrical, sometimes with slight constriction; oviduct double.
California.
L. alpestris Eisen. Length 25 mm., width 0.5 mm. Brain wide behind and three-
lobed; penis 8-10 times as long as broad, lower end pointed, with sheath trumpet-shaped
at extremity. Spermathecae constricted in the middle and coiled at upper end. California.
L. sylvani Eisen. Length 50-180 mm. and breadth 1-2 mm.; mature brain wider
than long, sometimes tri-lobed behind; penis 3 or 4 times as long as broad and % as long
as its sheath; spermathecae are constricted in middle portion and sac-like at the ends;
oviducts double walled. California.
L. igneus Eisen. Length 30 mm., width .75 mm.; color fiery red; brain broader in
front and deeply cleft in front and behind; penis at least 10 times as long as broad, the
316 T. W. GALLOWAY
lower end of the sheath being expanded and plate like; spermathecae wide and bi-lobed at
inner end; oviduct single walled and sac-like. California.
GENuS TELMATODRILUS, EISEN.
A California genus agreeing with Limnodrilus in having only uncinate setae and in
the general character of the sexual ducts. It differs chiefly in the possession of numer-
ous (8-10) spermiducal (prostate) glands, and the only slightly contractile peri-visceral
blood vessels of segments 7-11.
T. vejdovskii Eisen. Length 35-50 mm., and width 1-2 mm. Setae 8-15 in each
bundle. Esophagus long and narrow, expanding into the intestine in segment 11; the
latter is covered with a coating of pigmented cell from 15 backward. Nephridia with
vesicular peritoneal cells. Ventral blood vessel forks in 5. Brain somewhat triangular.
Lives in marshy meadows with tail protruding above the surface of the mud in shallow
waters, particularly at night. Fresno and Tulare Counties, Cal.
GENUS RHIZODRILUS, SMITH.
This genus described from Havana, Illinois, is represented by
one species, and is liable to be found in other places in the Mississip-
pi system. It differs from Tubifex in that it is without capilliform
setae, and the contractile hearts are more numerous (segments
7-10).
R. lacteus Smith. The species varies in length from 75-100
mm.; segments 215-365; slender. Nearly white and opaque owing
to the presence of numerous small corpuscles in the coelomic fluid.
Brain slightly concave on the anterior face, with two posterior lobes.
The sperm sacs extend to 15 or 16, opening, as is usual with the
family, on 11. Found among roots of submerged plants. Illinois.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
GENERAL
BEDDARD, F. E.
A Monograph of the Order of Oligochaeta. Clarendon Press, Oxford.
The best general single account in English for the student of the group.
The author has, beside, many papers on particular forms. Contains a
bibliography to 1895.
MICHAELSEN, W.
Oligochaeta; in “Das Tierreich,” 10 Lief. 1900.
Die geographische Verbreitung der Oligochaeten.
Die Siisswasserfauna Deutschlands. Heft 13,—Oligochaeta. 1909.
VEJDovSKyY, F.
System u. Morphologie der Oligochaeten—The best, classic illustrations
of the group. Prag, 1884.
Beitrage zur vergleichenden Morphologie der Anneliden:—I. Mono-
graphie der Enchytraeiden. 1879.
COMMON FRESH WATER OLIGOCHETA 3 ly,
AMERICAN WORMS
EIsen, G.
Oligochztological Researches. Annual Rept. Commissioner of Fish and
Fisheries. Washington, 1885.
Various Papers in the Publications of the Calif. Acad. of Sci. and else-
where. He reports the worms of the Harriman Expedition along the
Pacific Coast in a report valuable but inaccessible to the general student.
Lerpy, J.
Contributions to Helminthology in the Publications of Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., 1850, 1852.
Moore, J. P.
Various Papers in the Proceedings of Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.; e. g. 1895,
Pp. 341; 1905, 373.
SMITH, FRANK.
Notes on Species of No. American Oligochaeta.—Bull. Ill. State Lab
Nat. Hist., Vol. IV, Art. 8 (1895) and Art. 14 (1896); Vol. V, Art. 10
(1900) and Art. I1 (1900).
Watton, L. B.
Naididae of Cedar Point, Ohio. Amer. Naturalist, XL, p. 683 (Oct.
1906).
sls! SEE ea i ace
ae =e ee Re oa 7 veby ¢ eaBon
i)
DEPARTMENT OF NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
It is the purpose, in this department, to present from time to time brief original
notes, both of methods of work and of results, by members of the Society. All members
are invited to submit such items. In the absence of these there will be given a few brief
abstracts of recent work of more general interest to students and teachers. There will be
no attempt to make these abstracts exhaustive. They will illustrate progress without at-
tempting to define it, and will thus give to the teacher current illustrations, and to the
isolated student suggestions of suitable fields of investigation.—[Editor.]
SELECTION AMONG BACTERIA
Rettger and Sherrick (Jour. Med. Research, April, 1911) pre-
sent a study of variation in Bacteria. The chief points tested were :—
in respect to color production, and in respect to resistance to cor-
rosive sublimate. They find that sharp differences are produced by
selection in both these respects, and very distinct and permanent
strains are secured. They believe, however, that much of it is to
be explained (as is also true of different degrees of virulence in
pathogenic bacteria) by the fact that the action of bacteria is largely
a collective matter; and the total result of a strain is due to the
average results, so to speak, of the individuals. Selection may in
such instances merely mean getting pure cultures of those indi-
viduals that are more, or less, color-producing or virulent, and thus
securing greater, or less, total results. This would not explain the
increased individual resistance to the corrosive sublimate which
was secured; but it would be necessary to assume also some muta-
tion during the experiments.
It is possible that attenuation or increase in virulence, known
to take place in bacilli in passing thru animal bodies, may be due
largely to the selective effect of the animal body over the “pure”
strains (weaker or more virulent as the case may be), and only in
much less degree to an actual increase of virulence by production
of a new, more virulent type.
THE BI-LOBING OF COMPOUND EYES
The Ephemerida, or May-flies, furnish us with many queer
structural features; the writer with the late Dr. Shanks, in the
320 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
study of the larvae of these forms, discovered the interesting fact
that the males have the eyes modified to secure a kind of double
vision.
The lower portion of each compound eye is segmented off into
a distinct lobe, having a somewhat different radius of curvature.
(Plate. Ty Fig. 1).
This lower lobe is heavily pigmented, and since its ommatidia
are directed downward, is adjusted for seeing in the lesser light;
while the upper, larger lobes are less pigmented, or non-pigmented,
and face upward toward the primary source of light.
A subsequent examination of many different aquatic larvae
showed that the eyes of most of them present a distinct pigmental
division into an upper and lower portion.
This modification is probably of larval adjustment, an adapta-
tion to the condition of a stronger surface light and a more subdued
reflection from the bottom of the pool or stream.
E. W. Roserts.
EXHAUSTION AND SENILITY IN NERVE CELLS
Dolley (Jour. Med. Research, April, 1911) gives an interest-
ing account of recovery from exhaustion known to occur in nerve
cells as the result of activity. In exhaustion the following condi-
tions of cells may be distinguished.
1. Cells (which in young, healthy animals are the great major-
ity) that come fully back after activity to a resting condition. The
general cell-contents is restored first, the nucleus (exhausted first)
is last to be restored.
2. Cells that suffer, thru activity, some qualitative damage
and disorganization of structure,—either (a) temporary, i. e.
capable of a large degree of restoration, or (b) in which the dis-
integration is so profound that it represents a permanent loss.
In the cases of temporary disorganization an irregularity in
the form of the cells is shown, due to loss of substance. With repe-
tition of activity (and with increased age) this irregularity be-
comes permanent and exaggerated, accompanied by deficiency in
chromatin, by loss of nucleus, etc. A perfect natural series from
PEALE, I
Fig. 1. Section of Compound Eyes of Larva of May-fly (See p. 320).
Fig. 2. Edinger’s Drawing and Projection Apparatus [Ernest Leitz]
This cut illustrates the piece of apparatus described on page 239 of the July
number of this Journal.
=
F
a
7
4
oe a
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 321
temporary and slight to extreme and permanent disorganization
may be found. His conclusions are :—
1. Power of recuperation is inherent in all nerve cells as long
as they are really alive, but differs in different individuals and at
different ages, with different degrees of fatigue, and with differ-
ent degrees of “training.” The chromatin of the cell furnishes a
valuable index to the physiological recuperation.
2. Old age and death, from the point of view of the nerve
cell, are the natural results of past activities and incomplete re-
coveries.
3. Premature senility is the certain outcome of injudicious
and extravagant and long continued expenditure of energy without
adequate chance of suitable rest and recuperation. Resting senile
types resemble exhausted youthful types. On the other hand suit-
able use and proper restoration regularly repeated give power of
resistance to the nerve cells.
TREPONEMA PALLIDA IN PURE CULTURES
Noguchi (Jour. Exp. Med., Aug., 1911) reports the reproduc-
tion of syphilitic lesions in rabbits by means of pure cultures of
Treponema pallidum (Spirochaeta pallida). He passed the gross
human infection thru numbers of generations of rabbits. He used
infected rabbit tissues instead of human for getting pure cultures.
This gave him control of material. In purifying the strain, he used
cultures made of serum water (sheep, horse, rabbit) to which a
piece of sterile rabbit tissue (testicle or kidney) had been added.
He had great difficulty in getting pure strains. To get the first
generation of Treponema pallidum in virulent form, the following
conditions are essential :—
Presence of suitable fresh sterile tissue in serum water.
Strict anaerobiosis.
Slightly alkaline reaction.
Temperature 35°-37°C.
Rage hee dees!
He used combination hydrogen gas, vacuum, and pyrogallic
acid in an aerobic apparatus to secure strict anaerobic conditions.
He was thus able to establish that testicular lesions produced in
322 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
rabbits by means of syphilitic material are the result of multiplica-
tion of the pallida and not of some associated, indefinite parasite.
CELL INCLUSIONS OF NON-INFECTIOUS ORIGIN
Wolbach (Jour. Med. Research, April, 1911) describes a new
type of cell-inclusions, which seem not to have an infectious origin.
and are associated with lesions of a granulomatous character. The
lesions consist at first of epithelioid cells and giant cells. Later
connective tissue proliferation takes place, and produces a fibrous
tissue-mass surrounding the giant cells. Complete cicatrization
usually occurs. There is no extensive necrosis nor caseation. The
lesions have been found in lymph nodes, spleen, liver and lung.
The inclusions are neither artifacts nor parasites. They are found
most often in the giant cells, but are also found within the endo-
thelial leucocytes; rarely free in the lymph spaces. The typical in-
clusion consists of a central mass, round or oval in section, sur-
rounded by a series of radiating straight or curved spinous projec-
tion. The central mass stains differently from the spines,—except
for a smaller central body within. The author suggests that they are
fibrin derivatives formed intra vitam within the cells by a process
analogous to crystallization. No trace of tuberculosis was found
in any of the cases which develop these inclusions.
TRACHOMA BODIES
Wolbach and McKee (Jour. Med. Research, April, 1911) con-
clude that trachoma bodies are not specific of trachoma, and are not
parasitic in nature; but are merely the products of mucous secre-
tion under pathological condition. In support of this :—
1. They are found only where the mucous secretion is most
disturbed (tho this might quite as well be effect as cause).
2. Granules, apparently identical with the “red” granules of
trachoma, are found in disturbed mucous secretion elsewhere.
3. The “plastin” material of trachoma is similar in reaction
and arrangement to certain forms of mucous secretion.
INFLUENCE OF NERVE EXTIRPATION ON DEVELOPMENT OF MUSCLES
Davenport Hooker (Jour. Exp. Zool., Aug., 1911) presents a
study of the effect of the removal of the nervous system on the de-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 323
velopment and function of muscles in frog embryos. The follow-
ing results may be noted :—
1. All muscles develop normally, but less rapidly in the nerve-
less embryos than in the normal.
2. In normal embryos the nervous connection with muscles
precedes slightly the development of contractility in the muscles.
3. All muscles,—cardiac, axial, and appendicular,—differen-
tiate independently of nervous connection.
4. Embryonic cardiac muscles will contract spontaneously and
rhythmically without nervous control; axial muscles will not con-
tract spontaneously but will respond to direct mechanical stimula-
tion; appendicular muscles are dependent on the nervous system
for stimulation until late in development.
CULTIVATION OF TISSUES IN ALIEN SERA
Lambert and Hanes (Jour. Exp. Med., Aug., 1911), following
up many unsuccessful efforts to secure growth of animal tissues in
species different from that from which they were derived, have
reported undertaking to grow such tissues outside the body in plas-
ma from alien species. They found that rat sarcoma may be culti-
vated in mouse and guinea pig plasma for 30 days or more; in rab-
bit plasma, more slowly for 12 days; in dog plasma, not at all; in
human plasma (the fibrin was liquified), the cells outwandered
and formed giant cells after 4 to 6 days. Mouse sarcoma and
tissues of rat spleen were used with much the same results. Trans-
plantation back to homologous: serum was the test of the retention
of reproductive vitality.
SELECTIVE MATING IN PARAMECTA
In an elaborate paper (Jour. Exp. Zool., July, 1911) Prof. H.
S. Jennings gives the results of experiments in assortative mating
among Paramecia, and its products. It is impossible to do justice _
in a brief abstract to the luminous presentation in this paper, but
the main results (parts of which corroborate the work of Pearl and
others) may be summarized as follows :—
t. In cultures consisting of progeny of one individual or of a
mixture of races, it is the rule that the members of conjugating pairs
324 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
are smaller and less variable than the non-conjugants in the same
cultures.
| 2. This difference is only a temporary physiological one, and
has no permanent effect on the stock, since the small conjugants
grow after separation until as large as their larger relatives.
3. There is a definite correlation in size between the members
of pairs—larger mating with larger, and smaller with smaller.
This tends to prevent crossing of species of different size, and of
the different sized races of the same species,—and thus to keep the
strains distinct and to preserve the existing differentiations.
4. Owing possibly to the slower fission of the daughters of
conjugants the progeny of conjugants are for a few generations a
little larger than those of the members of the same race that have
not conjugated. This seems transient.
5. The progeny of conjugants are also somewhat more var-
iable than progeny of equivalent non-conjugants.
6. Hereditary differences may arise as a result of conjuga-
tion of individuals derived from a single individual; and sometimes
even between the descendants of the 2 members of a pair.
EXPERIMENTS ON WHEAT RUST IN NORTH DAKOTA
In the Botanical Gazette (Sept., 1911) F. J. Pritchard makes a
preliminary report on the origin and dissemination of the black rust
of cereals (Puccinia graminis) in North Dakota. He reviews the
literature of observation and experiment upon the subject and re-
ports his own experiments with inoculation. He believes that the
rust passes readily from the cereals to the barberry; that the
aecidiospores and uredospores are probably not carried long dis-
tances by wind; that P. graminis does not appear to spread to the
wheat by way of the grasses; that the form affecting wheat, that of
barley, and that of rye and oats are apparently distinct biologically ;
that uredospores and the mycelium of the stalk do not survive
winter conditions in North Dakota; that the grains of wheat are
often infested by teleutospores which may in the spring pass thru
a kind of palmella-like stage, and together with living mycelia ia
the grains infect the new, growing plant.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 325
TROCHODOTA DUNEDINENSIS IN VICTORIA
We are indebted to Mr. M. J. Allan of Geelong, Australia,
for the following facts concerning this Holothurian now reported
for the first time from Victoria (Cario Bay) and hitherto recorded
only from New Zealand:
In conformity with its genus it has in the skin numerous wheel
plates, and the spicules have loops on one end and hooks on the
other. The form is very transparent and forms a most interesting
subject of study with the microscope because of the possibility of
working out many details in the behavior of its internal organs.
The power of changing form thru muscular contraction, so char-
acteristic of holothurians, is thus subject to detailed study in life,
not commonly found in animals of this size. The degree of con-
traction and elongation is said to be very remarkable.
An ecological point of interest is the uniform occurrence to-
gether of Trochodota and Synapta digitata, another member of the
Holothurians. They seem to lay their eggs together, where they
become attached to the marine growth in the mud at the bottom
of the bay.
REGENERATION OF SECTIONS OF ARTERIES
Carrel (Jour. Exp. Med., Aug., 1911) reports that a section of
artery extirpated and patched by rubber tubing may be regenerated
completely, about this foreign structure as a frame work, by the
adjacent parts of the vessel, and become functionally complete.
THE PHYSIOLOGY OF REPRODUCTION
The book with this title, by Dr. Francis H. A. Marshall, is
well conceived and will prove a valuable book to the teacher and
general student. It is somewhat more limited in scope than its title
would indicate. With the exception of a general chapter on the
“Breeding Season” in animals in which a few representatives of var-
ious phyla are used to illustrate certain principles ; and of infrequent
references to the condition in the lower forms, as in the chapter
on fertilization, the book is confined to the reproductive processes
in mammals and in man. The reader naturally wishes that work so
well done might have given somewhat more space to the broader,
326 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
comparative view, and have found more illustrations from the lower
organisms.
Some of the main topics considered and their sequence are as
follows :—the breeding season; the oestrous cycle in mammals;
changes in the non-pregnant uterus during that cycle; the forma-
tion, development and issuance of the gametes; fertilization; the
biochemistry of the organs of sex and their products; the pheno-
mena and structures of gestation; lactation, etc. Three general
chapters follow, dealing with fertility, with the factors that de-
termine sex, and with the individual life cycle.
In method of treatment and spirit the book is admirable. The
author has done for the student a tremendous amount of work in
bringing together the results as recorded in a most varied litera-
ture. Ample citations to the literature are made for the use of the
general student of the subject, and the bibliographical references
are given at the bottom of the page, being brought up to 1908-09.
The reader will be most favorably impressed by the fairness
with which the author deals with the results of the various investi-
gators from whom he quotes, and with the sanity and judicial qual-
ity of the syntheses of these and the conclusions to be had from
them.
It is quite impossible in a brief review to do justice either to
the way in which the standard material has been handled, or to the
treatment of the newer subjects, such as the bio-chemistry of the
sexual organs and their products,—both the cellular products and
the internal secretions.
The Physiology of Reproduction, Francis H. A. Marshall; 706 pages, with illustrations.
Longmans, Green & Co., New York and London; price, $6.00 net.
PRELIMINARY NOTICE
A further study of the comparative histology of femoral bones
has been continued in the Department of Anthropology of the
United States National Museum, Washington, by the courtesy of
Dr. Silas Hrdlicka, curator of the Department of Physical An-
thropology.
The study has been confined to human bones. Embryological,
infantile, adolescent and adult femora of the ancient Egyptian, Pe-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 327
ruvian and Pueblo Indians, negro (American and African), and
white ; all of the long bones of the negro ; senile femora of the white;
and pathological tibiae of the Peruvian Indians have been examined.
Important variations of a biological character have been
found. Each one of the three races—white (including the ancient
Egyptian) , yellow, and black shows two types of structure—low and
high. The low type shows the lamellae and laminae of the lower
mammals, while the high has only the Haversian system.
The paper, giving an account of these variations, will be pub-
lished as soon as the study is completed.
J. S. Foote, Omaha, Neb.
Oct. 8th, 1911.
DEDICATION OF THE ERNST ABBE DENKMAL
On June 30, 1911, was dedicated the Ernst Abbé Denkmal.
The American Microscopical Society as one of the prominent con-
tributors to the undertaking was invited to send representatives,
but owing to the shortness of the time could not be represented.
The monument was designed by Henry Van de Velde and adorned
with reliefs of Constantin Mennier; it also contained the marble
bust of Abbé which is the work of Max Klinger. The structure is
a noble memorial to one to whom we owe primarily the greatest
improvements in the effectiveness of the microscope as an instru-
ment of research, which have been added to it for more than a
century.
It is proposed to present a portrait medal in gold to Sir Patrick
Manson in commemoration of his services in the field of tropical
medicine. The international committee having the matter in
charge has announced that the medal will be prepared by Doctor
Paul Richer of Paris, the well known sculptor and anatomist. A
bronze copy will be sent to each person subscribing $5.00 to the
fund and a silver one to such as subscribe $10.00 or over. The
committee includes Doctor Henry B. Ward of the University of
Illinois, to whom subscriptions may be sent.
328 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
EIGHTH INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS OF APPLIED CHEMISTRY
The Secretary is in receipt of the following invitation:
The officers and members of the Executive Committee of the
Eighth International Congress of Applied Chemistry have the
honor to invite American Microscopical Society to join the Con-
gress and to take part in its proceedings. The opening meeting will
be held in Washington on Wednesday, the fourth of September,
1912, and the subsequent meetings in the City of New York, closing
on Friday, the thirteenth of September.
Please send reply to Doctor Bernhard C. Hesse, Secretary,
Twenty-five Broad Street, New York.
CUSTODIANS REPORT FROM JULY 30; 1007;
TOODEC. 15, oro
Spencer-Tolles Fund
Reported’ at Boston Meeting, 1007... .....2.0.3.0.05 osu ces soe ose os pe sauua
Dividendswreceived 1908 44.4 ek cee e ie ie eee $166.88
Salevot_ Proceedings wlooSa-n een ie eee eee 55-00
Dividend sSenecervied yloOOme action on ee eich Cores 180.91
DEAFe-MeMmDetAsTOOO! Sere on Sie rns As eee ee ee 50.00
Dividends: cecéived; 1010+, ees oe ooo hoe aoc oe ee 180.87
ContributionseME PilaumyiOrosc. ace nisin tei eioes 2.20 635.86
$3,166.43
Less?; Lite-members. dues; ToQ08%). . «ou. 6 lone s 5 ae ee $ 8.00
Expense ‘GCustodian’s fice. 4.(/. 52 ...00ceene oe Ane 7.28 15.28
Total anvesteds 2 Astor cists ot trae oracioeme decks $3,151.15
Increase stonidate sa taccit eee eee $ 620.58
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 329
Grand Totals
All contributions to date..... laste, ee cso aae NRA Aree tue al A EAS cc apt $ 696.27
Milesalesvor, Proceedings mmr cles soe cree crete i Mlonalettietorarcpucntbnonetere 625.73
All life members ....... HU aa mee Ae PD aa eth Weites sae Rea ei 250/00
All interest and dividends............ nel Sek Sh nati cnie tes by dhe ote 1,720.58
$3,292.58
Less:
PMB eT ANS) ce... eve sels e SM OS ADAG St seve eh ec « LE SDS . .. $100.00
All life members dues............. ee aieet se otros 22.00
All expense custodian’s office...............-- RANTS Ms LOMAS 141.43
$3,151.15
Life members and contributors of $50.00 and over:—John Aspinwall,
Robert Brown, J. Stanford Brown, Henry B. Duncanson, A. H. Elliott, John
Hately, Iron City Microscopical Society, and Troy Scientific Association.
December, IQI0. Macnus PFiaum,
Custodian.
We the undersigned Committee hereby certify that we have carefully
examined the foregoing account of Magnus Pflaum, the Custodian, for the
years 1908, 1909 and 1910, compared the same with vouchers and found it to
correspond and correct.
T. W. GALLoway,
T. L. HANKINSON,
Henry B. Warp,
Nov. 25, Iort. Auditing Committee.
[The publication of the Custodian’s report has been delayed with the hope that the
report of the former Treasurer might be audited and thus the finances of the Society
might be stated in full up to the end of the year 1910. The Treasurer has turned over
the funds remaining from former years, with a statement of the standing of members, but
has as yet been unable to place in the hands of the Auditing Committee the final documents
on which their report must be based. It is expected that these will be in hand for the
annual meeting in Washington and be printed in the January number of the Transactions
for 1912.—Secretary. ]
330 CONSTITUTION AND BY LAWS
CONSTITUTION
ARTICLE I
This Association shall be called the AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL
Society. Its object shall be the encouragement of microscopical
research.
ArTIcLeE II
Any person interested in microscopical science may become a
member of the Society upon written application and recommenda-
tion by two members and election by the Executive Committee.
Honorary members may also be elected by the Society on nomina-
tion by the Executive Committee.
ArtTIcLe III
The officers of this Society shall consist of a President and two
Vice-Presidents, who shall hold their office for one year, and shall
be ineligible for re-election for two years after the expiration of
their terms of office, together with a Secretary, a Treasurer, and
a Custodian, who shall each be elected for three years, be eligible
for re-election, and whose terms of office shall not be coterminous.
ARTICLE IV
The duties of the officers shall be the same as are usual in simi-
lar organizations; in addition to which it shall be the duty of the
President to deliver an address during the meeting at which he pre-
sides; of the Custodian to receive and manage the property and
permanent funds of the Society under the direction of the Executive
Committee and in conjunction with a permanent committee to be
called the Spenecr-Tolles Fund Committee, and to make a full and
specific annual report of the condition of all the property, funds,
and effects in his charge; and of the Secretary to edit and publish
the Transactions of the Society.
ARTICLE V
There shall be an Executive Committee, consisting of the offi-
cers of the Society, three members elected by the Society, and the
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 331
past Presidents of the Society and of the American Society of Micro-
scopists who still retain membership in this Society.
ARTICLE VI
It shall be the duty of the Executive Committee to fix the time
and place of meeting and manage the general affairs of the Society.
ARTICLE VII*
The initiation fee shall be $3, and the dues shall be $2 annually,
payable in advance. But any person duly elected may upon payment
of $50 at one time, or in installments within the same year, become
a life member entitled to all the privileges of membership, but ex-
empt from further dues and fees. All life membership fees shall
become part of the Spencer-Tolles Fund, but during the life of such
member his dues shall be paid out of the income of said fund. A
list of all life members and of all persons or bodies who have made
donations to the Spencer-Tolles Fund in sums of $50 or over, shall
be printed in every issue of the Transactions. The income of said
fund shall be used exclusively for the encouragement and support of
original investigations within the scope and purpose of this Society.
The principal of the fund shall be kept inviolate.
ArTicLeE VIII
The election of officers shall be by ballot.
ARTICLE IX
Amendments to the Constitution may be made by a two-thirds
vote of all members present at any annual meeting, after having
been proposed at the preceding annual meeting.
*The following amendment to Article VII is proposed for the approval of the Wash-
ington meeting:
“Provided, however, that nothing in this constitution shall prevent the Executive Com-
mittee at any regular meeting from transferring the Spencer-Tolles Fund to a University,
or other incorporated institution for original research, under such conditions as shall safe-
guard the permanence of the Fund, and its application to the general purpose for which it
was intended; such power to be vested in the Executive Committee only after securing, and
in obedience to, the expressed will of a majority of the constitutional members of the
American Microscopical Society, or after the constitutional failure of said society.
332 CONSTITUTION AND BY LAWS
BY-LAWS
ARTICLE I
The Executive Committee shall, before the close of the annual
meeting for which they are elected, examine the papers presented
and decide upon their publication or otherwise dispose of them.
All papers accepted for publication must be completed by the
authors and placed in the hands of the Secretary by October rst
succeeding the meeting.
ARTICLE II
The Secretary shall edit and publish the papers accepted, with
the necessary illustrations.
ArrIcLeE III
The number of copies of Transactions of any meeting shall be
decided at that meeting. But if not decided, the Secretary shall,
unless otherwise ordered by the Executive Committee, print the
same number as for the preceding year.
ARTICLE IV
No applicant shall be considered a member until he has paid his
dues. Any member failing to pay his dues for two consecutive
years, and after two written notifications from the Treasurer, shall
be dropped from the roll, with the privilege of reinstatement at any
time on payment of all arrears. The Transactions shall not be sent
to any member whose dues are unpaid.
ARTICLE V
The election of officers shall be held on the morning of the last
day of the annual meeting. Their terms of office shall commence at
the close of the meeting at which they are elected, and shall con-
tinue until their successors are elected and qualified.
ARTICLE VI
Candidates for office shall be nominated by a committee of five
members of the Society. This committee shall be elected by a
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 333
plurality vote, by ballot, after free nomination, on the second day
of the annual meeting.
ArticLe VII
All motions or resolutions relating to the business of the Society
shall be referred for consideration to the Executive Committee
before discussion and final action by the Society.
Articer. VIET
Members of this Society shall have the privilege of enrolling
members of their families (except men over twenty-one years of
age) for any meeting upon payment of one-half the annual sub-
scription ($1).
ARTICLE IX
There shall be a standing committee known as the Spencer-
Tolles Fund Committee to take general charge of the fund and to
recommend annually what part of the income shall be expended for
the encouragement of research, but the apportionment of the sum
thus set apart shall be made by the Executive Committee.
The Spencer-Tolles Fund Committee shall also have general
charge of the expenditure of such money as may be apportioned,
under the conditions laid down by the Society for its use.
The Custodian shall be an ex-officio member of this committee.
ARTICLE X
The Executive Committee shall have the power annually to
appoint two members to represent the Society on the Council of the
American Association for the Advancement of Science, in accord-
ance with the regulations of the latter organization.
Revised by the Society, July, 1903.
TERRES SERS Sree, See Oa ee eee Peed
NECROLOGY
Announcement has been received, since the last printing of the member-
ship, of the death of the following members of the American Microscopical
Society. The Secretary will be glad to receive information that will enable
the proper honor to be rendered the deceased members of the Society:
Louis P. Barclay, M.D., ’os.
N. Howland Brown, ’ot.
John Gillett, M.D., ’o2.
Rev. Haslett McKim, ’85.
S. G. Shanks, M.D., ’oo.
Robert J. Storey, Jr., ’06.
Ernest Wende, M.D., ’o1.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 335
LIST OF MEMBERS
HONORARY MEMBERS
Crisp, FRANK, LL.B., B.A., F.R.M.S.,
5 Landsdowne Road, Notting Hill, London, England
JELGINGPT ee fp) B sie seein ae Seana gee g cts Crees 69 Burling Lane, New Rochelle, N. Y.
WEARD Re VAT STEDY AG Vig MEIDE UR ARSIMES 05 ce sis. 53 Fourth St., Troy, N. Y.
LIFE MEMBERS
IBROW.NEE ESO TAN FORD wccostecperens aie care ecteretete o'ei 6 <a 489 Fifth Ave., New York City
IBROWINSEIXOBERT + 5.2. diersctateraiclec ee seer Observatory Place, New Haven, Conn.
DUNCANSON, Pror: Henry. B., A:M.............200- State Normal, Peru, Neb.
EERO LT eo ROE, ARTHUR eg ciporer te oleate rts oers 165 Broadway, New York City
AED Yer JOEEN Ge... pct acinaictiacwiotore. ohoagaae ae Chicago Beach Hotel, Chicago, III.
MEMBERS
The figures denote the year of the member’s election, except ’78, which
marks an original member. The TRANSACTIONS are not sent to members in
arrears, and two years arrearage forfeits membership. (See Article IV of
By-Laws.)
MEMBERS ADMITTED SINCE THE LAST PUBLISHED LIST
Ackert, James Edward
Adson, Alfred W.
Bacon, Ellis W.
Banker, Prof. Howard J.
Bette, John B.
Brown, Amos P.
Brown, Everett J.
Browning, Sidney Howard
Bryant, Prof. Earl R.
Buchan, Arlene A.
Burkhart, Clarence Quinton
Carter, Prof. Charles
Coghill, Prof. George E.
Colton, Harold S.
Conel, Jesse L.
Cort, W. W.
Cott, George F.
Coulter, John Gaylord
Coutant, Richard B.
Covey, G. W.
Cowee, James Farwell
Darbaker, Leasure Kline
DeWitt, Charles H.
Dudgeon, Winfield
Eddy, Milton W.
Farlow, Prof. W. G.
Ferguson, Margaret Clay
Fisher, J. C.
Fitz-Randolph, Raymond B.
Galloway, Donnell M.
Gesner, Brower Clair
Gloss, Mary E.
Graham Charles W.
Graham, H. G.
Gutberlet, John E.
Guyer, Michael F.
Henderson, William
Henry, Edwin C.
Hicks, Alfred O.
Jeffs, Prof: R: E.
336 LIST OF MEMBERS
Jervis, Horace B. F.
Jones, Henry Neeley
Knight, F. P. H.
Larue, George R.
Latimer, Homer B.
Lawson, Stuart Johnston
Lehenbauer, Philip
LeFevre, Theodore Wm.
Longfellow, Robert Caples
Lubee, Harold Scott
Marr, George Henry
Meyer, Max
Miller, Charles H.
Miller, Rudolf C.
Mills, Charles Albert
Minehart, Prof. Velear Leroy
Norris, Prof. Harry Waldo
Norton, Charles E.
Palmer, Thomas Chalkley
Parsell, Henry V. A.
Peaslee, Leon D.
Petersen, Niels Frederick
Phelps, Jessie
Pitt, Edward
Prien, Prof. Otto L.
ACKERT, JAMES EpWaArD, ’II.......
J
Apson, ALFRED W.,
ALLEGER, WALTER W., M.D., ’04
ALLEN, Wynrrep E., A. M., ’04
AARNOED)| SETHE 200.0 6a. oe aoe
ASPINWALL, JoHN, M.A., M.E., ’oo
ATWOOD TE GS) 70% sa8 ce Water Witch Club, Highlands, Monmouth Co., N. J.
16 Seneca Parkway, Rochester, N. Y.
227 S. 6th St., Philadelphia, Pa.
ATWOOD) ile Oa eek ie aoe:
BACON EnCIG! Wit. a0 Tee eee eer
BANKER, Pror. Howarp J., Ph.D., ’11...DePauw University, Greencastle, Ind.
BARKER ALBERTA Sis (O75 Meee
BARKER, FRANKLIN D., A.M., 03
BAUSCH, BowARD, 78 isos «lec eee
BauscH, WILLIAM, ’88...........
BEARDSLEY, Pror. A. E., ’97.......
Bett, Ausert T., B.S., A.M., ’03
Brxi, ‘Crark, Eso. LL. Dy ve2
Bennett, Henry C., ’93....Hotel Longacre, 157 W. 47th St., New York City
Benstey, B. A., Ph.D. (Col.), ’05.. Biol. Dept. Uni. of Toronto, Toronto, Can.
Ray, Benjamin H.
Rector, Frank Leslie
Richards, Frederic William
Roberts, J. M.
Roberts, E. Willis
Rogers, Walter E.
Ross, Luther Sherman
Russell, W. B.
Schepp, William John
Sharpe, Prof. R. W.
Solomon, Harry Caesar
Stokes, A. C.
Taggart, Margaret W.
Todd, James C.
Valentine, Herbert E.
Van Cleave, Harley J.
Waite, Frederick C.
Walker, Thaddeus
Wallin, Ivan E.
Watson, Dr. Clyde Emil
Welch, Paul S.
Whitney, George Ansel
Wood, C. Martin
Woolle, Philip W.
elefielie ene © ° 0 e.0).6) 1a) eee se 6
che isl60.l0 10 (ole) ee ele, sels) es lekelejeexe lols
ee)
ry
00 e'\w le)le/10)s) @ kee. e048 «elle ©
University of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
179 N. St. Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.
St. Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.
1412 Tenth St., Greeley, Colo.
La. State Univ., Baton Rouge, La.
30 Broadway, NewYork City
306 E. Green St., Champaign, Ill.
Sta. A., Lincoln, Neb.
143 U St., N. W., Washington, D. C.
Box 654, Venice, Cal.
155 W. Concord St., Boston, Mass.
Newburgh, N. Y.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 337
Bessey Pron) Cmarees) Enwin,.Ph.D.; GL.D., 68... ..6. 0. a. devs Lincoln, Neb.
EELESt OEIN (Bt, TDs serie Poke kien homens Ns 111 Market St., Camden, N. J.
IBEVER. EPROPS! GEO) ES OOHi je 5% eieto'ns oie 4422 Coliseum St., New Orleans, La.
BEG, PROFS eo. AuuSeD 2 WL: : "OG; ics leas 744 Langdon St., Madison, Wis.
BEER EAC IME. MIDS Bie) oo 5 cci eae ok Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio
Bovine, Pror. DoNALDSON, ’06............- 4 Mills Place, Crawfordsville, Ind.
BoorH, Mary A., F.R.M.S., ’82.......... 60 Dartmouth St., Springfield, Mass.
[ED RASN CODES RV do Gea 3223 Clifford St., Philadelphia, Pa.
ESEDIIN ch GEOL a er) Sctalss ielivie-c) ule alerie Dales 104 Powelton Ave., Lansdowne, Pa.
EROMEEY. ROBERT ENNIS =) MID M0 9% F2). cose -eieieie 0 stele changed aebaeweronees Sonora, Cal.
brourover) Gras, A,B. )M.S. (05.0.5 ood cee ee ees Buchtel Coll., Akron, Ohio
IBROVWING PAUMOStie) Heh ste pa mehaeette:s Sei 20 E. Penn St., Germantown, Pa.
BROWN) EVERETT Ja, MSDS BY. es heicdsa es 134 W. Prairie Ave., Decatur, III.
BROWNING, SIDNEY Howarp, ’11..Royal London Ophthalmic Hospital, London
BRUNDAGE, A’ Hs MuDS 94)0./5. Sue. ois 1073 Bushwick Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y.
BryANT, Pror. Eart R., A.M. ’Io...... Muskingum College, New Concord, O.
BUCHAN ARUENE Alu Bt Ser tit ee ig ad ath arciae noida 1439 R. St., Lincoln, Neb.
BUBE AMES ENGARME SOR O2his 5. i015 oes caren « 141 Broadway, New York City
BuRKHART, CLARENCE QUINTON, ’II.......... 1235 W. Wood St., Decatur, II.
MURR MET SZROE ilies, Jie ESRI) ye 7 ioc, sae ase apace seicteke le eee ee isha caterer tee vere Urbana, Ill.
Eye eShe) 5 Pov ODA tosis vs sitke Gis. acel aawieee oe) Sinks 114 W. Second St., Oil City, Pa.
Carpenter, Dos. B:., M:Di, ’o0.... +. 6.06065. 533 Franklin St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Ganrer :PROR CHARLES, “Tis. .504 oho oceeed snk Parsons College, Fairfield, Ia.
Carter, JOHN E).’86.02%5.... 5350 Knox St., Germantown, Philadelphia, Pa.
GrARKe GEORGE: Enwe, MEDS 9624-4. secs Genessee St., Skaneateles, N. Y.
Corments, Mrs; BP. Ey PhD::’63). .2. 00% 800 4th St., S. E., Minneapolis, Minn.
Cocks, Pror. REGINALD S., ’99.... McDonogh High School, New Orleans, La.
Cocrimr, s2ROF GEORGEEE awe BaD ew nIne |. pete eee Dennison Univ., Granville, O.
MOETONE A: jis, MED 3) 104. sh onels tei ds.c00 Ferry and Otis Place, Buffalo, N. Y.
IGE TONG ELAROLD US: ,0 GENS 6 G8 oie die oa eewels day wace Box 158, Bryn Mawr, Pa.
PRONPENOPRGSE Biv, Oil Teamspciiael. cidanies cited o/e.c°0's 542 W. Packard St., Decatur, III.
GTA NW og NG ET, Sear oe Se eid dees ws 809 W. Nevada Ave., Urbana, III.
Mam GrorGe Fy ED) Jessi abis oe tv bas wine x ees 1195 Main St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Baten ERAN CISWG,, (BO, Si). cca clone cau ae ne 3481 Broadway, New York City
CouLTEeR, JoHN Gaytorp, Ph.D., ’11..... 1109 E. Monroe St., Bloomington, II.
CourTANm RIGHARD Ba MED: (til. .: 2 No. Broadway, Tarrytown, N. Y.
OUIN BGEORGHEW sp IDs sy chord. aves a ear ets bette eae College View, Neb.
CowEE, JAMES FARWELL, ’II.......:.... 161 River St., (Box 484) Troy, N. Y.
MenIG oT HOWAS (03:15 haces lasea eke 26 Selkirk Ave., W., Montreal, Canada
GeAnpAL, Geo: C., B:S.,.M.D:,-’04...;....0 5. 3674 Lindell Ave., St. Louis, Mo.
enospyy, CyRUS IR: | AsBs (OSs fiat sciccnedioscenees 43 East Ave., Ithaca, N. Y.
Passer keR, Deasune Korner, Ph.D. MD.20r ss ioe ok vd hone canons
OS aes CED ROO ERG ORS Poe OC ORE 7016 Frankstown Ave., Pittsburg, Pa.
|W iS ol a Bea [Ao oe A 209 Locust St., Evansville, Ind.
DEWrrt,.Guaanes H., MS’ tili.es7....2. 355 College Ave., Valparaiso, Ind.
338 LIST OF MEMBERS
Disprow, WILLIAM S., M.D., Ph.G,, ’or....... 151 Orchard St., Newark, N. J.
DoLny EDWARDSE- ROOLeEE RE Rete eer e et atee 948 N. 43d St., Philadelphia, Pa.
Dopp Weis ogee: 2Otr 2 B eek sh ideros 293 Hampshire St., Buffalo, N. Y.
DORR? #9. SHOBART, CPING = OS) basso kacded ou 907 Seventh St., Buffalo, N. Y.
IDRESCHER WERE RO yates ten Care Bausch & Lomb Opt. Co., Rochester, N. Y.
DIGDGEON, AWANRIELD abesui Tle mec cece eriee Central College, Pella, lowa
ECHEVERRTA}T EMILIO = MED euG2s eee ss areeieeee Hospital, Limon, Costa Rico
Eppy AMaGnTon SW a acite ea ance See. eee Box 214, State College, Pa.
EDGAReHEHOS. 9 OB See OAR ord Oe be bcteekele sien cio else ieee Gainesville, Texas
EIGENMANN, Pror. C. H., ’95..........: 630 Atwater Ave., Bloomington, Ind.
ET RIOTTeIGUTHER th FOO hese site nal eerie 17 Birr St., Rochester, N. Y.
ErRop;“PRor:\ Morton (f¢x MjASM:S:, 708 s.cs 2 cn see acl cae sees eee
SEY NRA RRL re Me Oe Uiversity of Montana, Missoula, Mont.
EESNER, JOHN, MIDE, VBse ee, Sabet ads oe cre vex oe eee Box 454, Denver, Colo.
FE WELIS WAR AES S8ORs kick oe deat ae ce aes 16 Pearl St., Council Bluffs, lowa
Byres JoHn WH), MDs MCS RIMS 3 0 ieose soos + Asean e era
Bieri Sas eee rats afc laters tins Guy’s Hospital, London, E. C., England
ARTO Ware ROEMVV en Gs collate tater comm ete eae 24 Quincy St., Cambridge, Mass.
HEEL pADOEEHE MED sole. Aes scs cae ee 520 E. Main St., Columbus, Ohio
Berri Gro wb sae SBR OMUS sh e7O) scene eee ere 24 W. Eagle St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Fettows, Cuas. S., F.R.M.S., ’83...111 Cham. of Comm., Minneapolis, Minn.
HERGUSON: IMIARGARETS GUAW. ODT cies.) fo of teterele cc 46 Dover St., Wellesley, Mass.
HERGUSON SVIEADES UVES Ete) OZ sc ce. ere ey toate eb ee Blacksburg, Va.
BTNDER AVA IRS, MOD EMOS ss Tia de< aateaaceee see 2 Union Place, Troy, N. Y.
EXSCHERS ALES O2 io Sucnice delves oseCaenteeosstees Box 1608, Milwaukee, Wis.
BisaERM. |G. a Mes lies se 4c eheie ees c ee see 410 Powers Bldg., Decatur, Ill.
Binz -RANDOLPH WAY MOND Ube) SE REMES 2 tele) ceh em acaecrier-tieed cee
SPS ioe Mee eto ears eelats State Laboratory of Hygiene, Trenton, N. J.
BEIN®D pAMES ei web Soren aeeiie nee Stoneleigh Court, Washington, D. C.
Foote, J. S. MD. ’ol:...2....:.:.+:..202-S. Thirty-first Ave, Omaha,-Neb:
FOSTER; “EDWARD! 2OO. eos bie ce ee The Daily Picayune, New Orleans, La.
ULTON WELARRY dee ASB re OA seit mie ol srot step hare cia osteo eae State College, Pa.
TFAURNISS, ele Wi NED Ee Ph DoS aes U. S. Consulate, Port au Prince, Haiti
GAGE MPROF SIMONP ELA SD O2s one oe eie ines 4 South Ave., Ithaca, N. Y.
GAGE MRS! “SUSANINA SEHEDPS 1670 nase cis eeiee cr 4 South Ave., Ithaca, N. Y.
GALLOWAY, DonNELL M.,CIT.. 222. ....0-- Rural Route No. 1, Santa Fe, Tenn.
Gattoway, Pror. T. W., A.M., Ph.D., ’o1...... 1332 West Wood, Decatur, IIl.
GATES) SEC MERWE OOE era eee ee Mee 1814 Ontario Place, Washington, D. C
GESNER, BROWER CLAIR, II.......- 110 Steadman St., Moncton, N. B., Canada
-GrttMorE, Miss Gerrrupe A., B.A., ’03...... 27 Charlotte Ave., Detroit, Mich.
Gross) Marys auMe Seemiteesa see are sarees 1919 Sherman Ave., Evanston, IIl.
Granam, ‘CHARTES Wis. isHiey dilee mesons eae eee Huntington, L. I., N. Y.
Gran VE. (G.NED Ae Oo eee was mee ieiarogc cine pie etait Elmsdale, Kansas
GRA ge Ssooi oh Jere sce ee eee aee 1921 Telegraph Ave., Oakland, Cal.
GrosskopF, Ernest C., M.D., ’99........ 187 Thirty-sixth St., Milwaukee, Wis.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 339
GREGER PEROFS DARTING: Ke mO7n ae dnces Westminster College, Fulton, Mo.
(GUTBERDET A JOBIN: ECA MEP TR. a5 tarand Nat. Hist. Bldg. U. of I., Urbana, IIl.
Guyer, MicHaet F., Ph.D., ’11....... University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
AAG i) 5 hee) Rar BOtaees cic ticsctarsiale oceoyoios Liberty Center, Henry Co., Ohio
EVANVAWEAN = ©oobeaw BOR MES 170) ora -cae State and Second Sts., Troy, N. Y.
EPAUNGEGUN SONG Eres [se OSS ch irere cite nant occ Gielecsrotnusinuats Shae ORS Charleston, Ill.
ELPA TET Uat) OEE ING J ianls pur orn. ic velsierseucia Sloss eters vole noses aerate Malott Park, Ind.
iBATD sae Dee PhD = O08 ie crac mac no ores University of Texas, Austin, Tex.
HENDERSON, WILLIAM, 'II............0000- 1083 E. Eldorado St., Decatur, Ill.
FIENR Ya DWN Gre Wie Tin.) os tosereya cs) siet oiccatere 554 S. 35th Ave., Omaha, Neb.
HeErTz_er, ARTHUR E., M.D., ’96.......... 402 Argyle Bldg., Kansas City, Mo.
Hertzoc, Maxmiian, M.D., ’or..Rm. 800, 103 E. Randolph St., Chicago, III.
CK AT ERED! OM! Blea ih 8c) yet ctetchers)2) tes are 178 Union Ave., Long Branch, N. J.
ieee TERBER TH Me PhD ea Oye sige leon icici eels 24 High St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Ereron,. DAvip) CrARK, AGM, MIDE ’or...4...0cs00- 1240 O St., Lincoln, Neb.
Ho.iis, FREDERICK S., Ph.D., ’99..... Yale Medical School, New Haven, Conn.
PUD SIRSUIN Sea VV Maa 1 rast thio ons cic eae Rie c eee OR 49 6th St., LaGrange, III.
HOW EANDs LIENRY. Ro ACM; 708% .oce0. 00s. 217 Summer St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Humpurey, Pror. O. D., Ph.D., ’95..... State Normal School, Jamaica, N. Y.
Ives, FrepErRIC E., ’02......... Woodcliff-on-Hudson, Weehawken P. O., N. J.
Jackson, Danie, Dana, B.S., ’99......... 930 President St., Brooklyn, N. Y.
eum PROF JRE. 21S. Gels Iowa Wesleyan University, Mt. Pleasant, Ia.
MEUBESSOEIORACE 5 Ey Tike stoteccis enc baka cic a wi ode 8 Charles St., Houlton, Maine
JoHNSON, Frank S., M.D., F.R.M.S., ’93...... 2521 Prairie Ave., Chicago, III.
JONES lenmva NIRELEY 1 OOn ace os ceo nae. : 32 Lincoln St., Brookline, Mass.
pam ve G HAM CEVes OOl il Sactaniioicvec co osalen den be 610 Lake St., Madison, Wis.
ISFEROGG: Jeb s MDs e7 Sion bok. eis 202 Manchester St., Battle Creek, Mich.
Kerr, ABRAM Tucker, Jr., M.D., ’95..Kelvin Place, Cornell Hts., Ithaca, N. Y.
| CINCH EF] BL) 2A ty toe 2h ea 1015 Blondeau St., Keokuk, Ia.
Koro; CHarces: Ay Ph. Diw’99) 2. 22 University of California, Berkeley, Cal.
Meena NG dV Dae OT ee ki sg EER 32 S. Fourth St., Easton, Pa.
BeRT Seta Ge AE ee) gari ote Stee sectok 4a % crv dlerte) soa Rae ae oe cl ee et
Ra eiasehicloeve rate 300 Highland Ave., Chestnut Hill, Philadelphia, Pa.
PeannAcen,, F. hs BAL O20 i. woke es Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio
PANE WENCH AEL Am TOOlt sats Sct viele s occas cco 451 Jackson Blvd., Chicago, Ill.
Apne GEOR BT sect eacte ds ocd University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.
[PerreAAVLESSHVs A. MD DADS: FUR: MS. 88.5. tee ae ee
534 CROs BASE ee Oa 1644 Morse Ave., Rogers Park, Chicago, Ill.
Latimer, Homer B., M.A., ’11..Neb. Wesleyan Univ., University Place, Neb.
Lawson, Stuart Jounston, M.D., ’11... Mohican Hotel, New London, Conn.
LEHENBAUER, Puuiip, A.M., ’II........ Nat. Hist. Bldg., U. of I., Urbana, II.
PEP EVRE,. UV HEODORE* WM; LE. ccioviess sok 06 oe Oeie Bitter Root Inn, Montana
PAPE aS TARRY © GOs 2.1. shijaeotddhcanladen pee ben 336 Pine St., Reading, Pa.
Lewis, Mrs. KATHerine B., ’89...“Elmstone,” 656 Seventh St., Buffalo, N. Y.
LID ERA Ven SS Joel Bet ee Oe Be ere ea 406 Galena St., Dixon, III.
340 LIST OF MEMBERS
Lane, Jo Epwann;D,D/S (825155 225.2..- 1104 Granite Bldg., Rochester, N. Y.
Terrrerke, SVN AGM, SMED ES POO) .cisc tec ccc Gretere vateore evstotscnceiye Nashville, Tenn.
Lome-vAnorrH) 02a at ee eae ete ee 48 Cumberland St., Rochester, N. Y.
LoNGFELLOW, Rospert Capes, M.S., M.D., ’11........ 1611 22nd St., Toledo, O.
Looss, ArtHuR, Ph.D. (Lips.), ’05...Govt. School of Medicine. Cairo, Egypt
UBER EVAROED! SCOLT nulil.n icy ccitersisrocris sore ontario ae North Gorham, Maine
Ts varann Mine Aes AG Mes MED! Ole. va st ys University of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
Lyon, Howarp Ni» M’D.,) 84.2222. So ees 828 N. Wheaton Ave., Wheaton, III.
Marr, Georce Henry, M.E., ’11............. 89 Silver St., Waterville, Maine
NarsHmaArn, \CoLeIns, MaDe 9605 224 5.55.); 2507 Penn. Ave., Washington, D. C.
Marsmary,/ Reem: PRD P0zi4 i. cnnsdnans Rockford College, Rockford, Ill.
MASTERMAN, ELMER E.,.’07......03 000055 R. F. D. No. 2, New London, Ohio
MatHresE. MeD:, Phas, ’e2i.5 hotles. e5 168 West High St., Detroit, Mich.
MAYWALD, FREDERICK J., ’02........ 1028 Seventy-second St., Brooklyn, N. Y.
McGaes,VArBERT) (PRD 80. acs, o<-scere< 315 E. Twenty-second St., Chicago, III.
McCraven, BonneER N., ’04......%..----- 1203 McKinney Ave., Houston, Tex.
Mek? JOSEPH, 884.102. tiiae eee Cae eee wk 259 Eighth St., Troy, N. Y.
MeKrryrr: birrn, te), SERAMESS 1206 ./.73) Acrsrd sicuctsrersicisinie side sien at © autre enone
RAAT Ect Meadow Park, Brownside Road, Cambuslang, Scotland
Merseer AS Crmrorn, MMD.) BOR INDSS (82sec. cans casein sloiclee on te Oem
Lec erattne oesy SN OR Ann ee mth A Re 324 Montgomery St., Syracuse, N. Y.
Mrncre Web coe DUD S100 i). sicisl ec ceiwierelietae ai 200 E. State St., Athens, Ohio
irra IAB OMe rs non Ae owe vise bryeyabere-chexereseiersitose 225 Fifth Ave. New York City
Miter, CHARLES H, ’I11...... Med. School, John Hopkins U., Baltimore, Md.
Miter, Joun A.,Ph.D., F.R.M.S., 89........ 44 Lewis Block, Buffalo, N. Y.
Misr Runorr Cy PhiG., (MiD., 211. 3.5... 2: 6 North Pearl St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Mirnrs (@mARLESVATBERT, UWilstcace ses 584 Mission St., San Francisco, Cal.
MINEHART, Pror. VELEAR Leroy, A.B., ’I1..... Cumb. Univ., Lebanon, Tenn.
Mockenrss)/ qi SR ON oe,atee cad das ne eee Se ace Burr Block, Lincoln, Neb.
Wiloinns lee IWEIDES Koy ogaaen andes soe 341 W. Fifty-seventh St., New York City
Moopy, Rosert O., M.D., ’07...... Hearst Anat. Lab. U. of Cal., Berkeley, Cal.
WWihtanrtaletocah'e (Oys One iee cmoceranrecdcccone Woodlawn Ave., Winona, Minn.
Norpiéwprr, As GES MDs: Sc): PhDs LDS 7o5s.0. <2 chee eee
SR Raa EO ORE EGe COE Earl Block, Boulder, Colo.
INORRIS) UPROF, (ERARRY@NVVIAEDOS ulD. sieves oe eel eloee 816 East St., Grinnell, Iowa
NORTON; pCHARLES Hs (VED iiss fel aatte teres 118 Lisbon St., Lewiston, Maine
INGURSE ® GEORGE SD WOSpiaAccarite che elit ee eer eeeter tare Charlestown, N. H.
OERTER ee ENED OD aea eas ee Medical Dept. Univ. of Ga., Augusta, Ga.
OREER SWE H eG rire omer errors 216 Spring St., Portland, Me.
Osporn, Pror. HErpert, M.S., ’05..... Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio
OhrpeleWArgyong IN TANIA Ohne Senaeocces ce ae Spencer Lens Co., Buffalo, N. Y.
PAEMER: LBOMAS -‘CHARKEY,-B IS. 719, ...Po0sSeeet ee ees Media, Pa., R. F. D.
Parker, Horatio N., ’99.... Technology Club, 83 Newbury St., Boston, Mass.
P&ARSELL;, Henry WV. Ay cASM., 7a 8 Fea. 122 West 81 St., New York, N. Y.
IPAM RRC Ke RAIN KA hel) a Ollias.yerseyouetexcheveielee 603 Dwight Bldg., Kansas City, Mo.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 341
EASE MIREDENG: (G7 Wy ee MN oa oe og P. O. Box 503, Altoona, Pa.
REAsters PRor; Leon; BD), Phi Dy 211: .256)...¢0.. Central College, Fayette, Mo.
PENNock, EpWARD,.°70.20:... 2. 0e05. 2. 3609 Woodland Ave., Philadelphia, Pa.
Prrerson, Nits: FREDERICK, 711...) ; ...)...560600 05 La. S. U., Baton Rouge, La.
EEA NGO MUAGKGLIS VECSOL, HOE fies ssh eh cas Coa LL cock cles ae Meadville, Pa.
EPENEEPS oO PESSIE, MIG. PTD oo'oo cid wenesc elee-orocrcers 16 N. Summit, Ypsilanti, Mich.
FAGIgly SOEDMEARD AMEE RL nck Chie ae wie Sek MLR SOR Ane eee
...Madeley House, Bulstrode Way, Gerrard’s Cross, Bucks, England
Pounp, Roscor, A.M., Ph.D., ’98..... Harvard Law School, Cambridge, Mass.
PRIEN,, Prov. Orro L,, MDiv, 112.60. 5 and 6 Fedl. Bldg., Laramie, Wyo.
ERIMCE AO PARED OSh yc Apys ls as rated yore ae eae) ba RL Urbana, III.
IMBURNG (HORGES NEI.) SONG 4 5s oelaiisas heed koe to1r H St., Sacramento, Cal.
EPS SONE I DRASTO NET QO. (were st Veale aes. eg enteties Aa
eas U. S. Bureau of Animal Industry, Washington, D. C.
Peay ADEN TAMIN Seto EEL <0. ocho Oe, ce Pine Grove, Schuylkill Co., Pa.
ecror, PRANK. Lesuin ;-M-D),11. $0000... 36 Forty-first St., Brooklyn, N. Y.
Renee, Prom) Arzert) M., PhD: (Hop.); 705 005..h bo) ck, Deke ee,
Sie Reha diners Rustam Mnteitng Aya My iee Soro W. Va. Univ., Morgantown, W. Va.
ReyYBuRN, Ropert, M.D., ’90............ 2129 F St., N. W., Washington, D. C.
IBIGHARDS, EnrAS) (OOM. oi seitatnn eed a eGee 28 1114 Wise St., Lynchburg, Va.
RicHARpDS, FREDERICK WM., ’II....212 Notre Dame St. West, Montreal, Can.
mOnEETS( Ha WiIELLIS! (Dae 0d oso ooo sco 65 Rose St., Battle Creek, Mich.
[SCOTTY THIN] PA Eg 1 ee ge eR 345 West Michigan St., Chicago, II.
REOUERG AVAL RERIS! Dhag IA | bie ria aaa aaa EM Van Decatur, Ill.
Ross, LuTHER SHERMAN, S.M., ’II............ 1308 27 St., Des Moines, Iowa.
RAUSSELIG NY. Bs¢V Tr en oo sy hoe) Oe 796 State St., Springfield, Mass.
SCHESP, WILLIAM’ JOHN) “ID: O05 056... oe. 219 Mill Street, Paterson, N. J.
SHEANTZ, HI, BiS,, A:M..’o4....... Bureau Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.
SIEPAR BPA ROR RS WW ORR. ooh ace ka Mole 177 Emerson Pl., Brooklyn, N. Y.
'S [ETO TDN AMG teal OR) a 155 Washington St., Chicago, III.
SESE SRE piyie at OOM ceca kv else ooo eed Uk: 809 Adams St., Bay City, Mich.
SHERIDAN, Ws. F., ’o5...U. S. Naval Hospital, Grays Ferry Road, Phila., Pa.
SEWED Z CW AG. ASA Rotts aati a een Seventh St. Docks, Hoboken, N. Je
'S Sey oh ig] Dah Gay ov ai ane Wee oe ee aR go2 Pine St., Philadelphia, Pa.
Secu: Cras. f- PhiD) NED. 7980 ees 2ho.8 Ackte. 218 13th St., Toledo, Ohio
2S OAs Eye JR Gar a 0 a os I 131 Carondelet St., New Orleans, La.
SEMEL DEL PRETEODORE, Wo,~ 09.55 o.oo oc boc ela ee 171 La Salle St., Chicago, II.
SmytH, Lumina Ripprez, Ph.D., ’05............. 106 E. 12th St., Topeka, Kan.
sean CBP Iy PORE NIES JO 7 ga erie oc ee Lee ae Ee eee
Bee e Se eee 37 Dryburgh Road, Putney, London, S. W., England
SoLtomon, Harry Caesar, ’II......... 1044 Bonnie Brae St., Los Angeles, Cal.
STEBBINS, J. H., Jr., Ph.D., M.D., ’or. .3 W. Twenty-ninth St., New York City
emorens A. GMI ta ee Te ik eee 503 Brandeis Bldg., Omaha, Neb.
STURDEVANT, Lazete B., A.B., B.S., Oe iit Aer Univ. of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
SYOMEMERS, PRORGFEM Bry ORG ee al isis war orn ee ere ree cee ae Ames, Iowa
342 LIST OF MEMBERS
Swincte, Pror. Leroy D., ’06............. Univ. of Wyoming, Laramie, Wyo.
“DAGGART\ MARGARET (Ws, S325 Sansa a/c) sie 805 W. Oregon St., Urbana, Ill.
Tuomas, ARTHUR H., ’99........ Twelfth and Walnut Sts., Philadelphia, Pa.
Tuomas, Pror. Mason B., ’90......... College Campus, Crawfordsville, Ind.
"Trmaetns: (GEORGES 206 .0si50 2.08 occas 6 = 1410 E. Genesee St., Syracuse, N. Y.
Topp, JAMES GBS NUD Aiea sh coer ees Univ. of Colo., Denver, Colo.
Ureren; (Carn) BS: AOls as boaters fates ston leis ete peeiele e ee eeee a ee
SOE Peet gare Central High School, R. R. No. 5, Lake Crystal, Minn.
VALENTINE pEIERBERT OM; 1c. Oe kee etch ruber ere 141 Milk St., Boston, Mass.
VAN CLRAVE MIAREEY JA 0 Dis soe chien 617 S. Wright St., Champaign, III.
Virepen 20 As MD. 85 a.0 se «sssiss0'5, 5 Broad and Queen Sts., Lyons, N. Y.
Watre;) -Preprrick (C5 PRDS O81, « visi.t)ckieeiceieace sis aa sire eee iat
[eee Medical Department, Western Reserve Univ., Cleveland, Ohio
Wauxer? Exoa’R3/Ph:D., 707.2422 250: University of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
WsuKer> PHADDEUS; MLD.) aa sl. 22- eee 33 East High St., Detroit, Mich.
WALEING§ AVAI 2s.; [O03 20 seco seals <p sis > Soe e oie eee eee Stanton, lowa
WiaAcTton 7re+B. AIM. PhD. 705.25.) 0 -ee2bc-e Kenyon Coll., Gambier, Ohio
Warp, Henry B., A.M.. Ph.D., ’87......... University of Illinois, Urbana, IIl.
WASTENEYS, GITARNOLPH, (40052 « 25 fosicisie 10> lle owls laieles quate alae am Sateen lee
Ea eee col Enoggera Reservoir, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia
Watson, Dr. CrypE Emm, ’II........... 480 Spruce St., Morganton, W. Va.
Watson, Pror. Wo. F., A.M., ’03...... Furman University, Greenville, S. C.
WereuTMan: Caras. Fi. "86. 225 wot ccc Se 5859 Michigan Ave., Chicago, Ill.
WanicnsiGro OO: (MED, ior. Sos. oes ae 2 e'ses osoee Box 416, Fergus Falls, Minn.
WEUGH- PeAUL SaeAlMs 72E | 52: Zoological Department U. of I., Urbana, III.
WELLMAN: (bron. Crricnton; M.D.; 2062... ..: (steatosis sce oe ete ee
Be ni ae oars Med. Dept. Tulane University, New Orleans, La.
WET rts) ara. s YOO pssescc eo eree er eae 79 Chapel St., Albany, N. Y.
WHE Lp_ey, H. M., M.D., Ph.G., F.R.M.S., ’o09..2342 Albion Pl., St. Louis, Mo.
Waite Cans tH tyMiDse2 see tame Stacie s Center Sandwich, N. H
Wuittey, JAMES M., M.D., F.R.MLS., ’85....504 S. Main St., Petersburg, IIL.
Wuitney, Geo. ANSEL, B.M.E., ’11............ 235 Main St., Lewiston, Maine
WirArp; (Miantin SiBO: Seveeucevie. 23 et ee 21 Walnut St., New Britain, Conn.
Win rAmson: 1 Wan.6 BERS EG A207... eas thie wine -« Scleeleio ce aiee cee eee ase see
ER Ae eee Bere 4 Meadowbank Terrace, Edinburgh, Scotland
Wotcortt, Ropert Henry, A.M., M.D., ’98...Univ. of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
Woon 'GiMAgtin, MEDS (Tie) 5555.5 ie 201-2 Millikin Bldg., Decatur, Il.
W oot; “Peep AW Es 0755098 = «eos eee eee (Westmount) Johnstown, Pa.
Wraicht (Synnex As 0 05 ses ccidae ads sae Nan aoe eee eae ae Alpine, Cal.
ZAPFFE, FREDERICK C., M.D., ’05............. 1764 Lexington St., Chicago, Ill
Zeiss, Gaur (care-De Msyon Rohr) ot2y.cuaer +o ee eee eeeer Jena, Germany
ZOS%, DAVID MES BS) OSS eae eae ees pee ease ee 59 Clark St., Chicago, IIl.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 343
SUBSCRIBERS
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES...........-. Logan Square, Philadelphia, Pa.
IBOSTONE EG UBLICHIEIBRAR VY oiioe chit siesta aes onyaociin Mer cbecieale Boston, Mass.
Boston Society oF NATURAL HIstTory............ Berkeley St., Boston, Mass.
BUREAU OF GOVERNMENT LABORATORIES........000ececerceeeeeee Manila, P. I.
GarermAre Lyn TA chao oke Casilla de Correo-69, Montevideo, Uraguay
CARNEGIE FREE LIBRARY.............0- Sig ere ails eyecare amma seins Allegheny, Pa.
AMR RIIRGTH SE THR ARV Sper) pein SoMa ket oo aiecss see aioe Meleaie game Oa ato Pittsburg, Pa.
IBFTICACO UNIVERSITY: UIBRARY $2) 0755 o5.c seers d Hoa he heow ee hae weet Chicago, Ill.
Corpgrangy STATE: NORMAL: ISIBRARY: <5... cis cscs 6 came hare eaae se Greeley, Colo.
CoLtumBiIA UNIversiry Liprary..... 16th St. and Amsterdam Ave., N. Y. City
DecaTuR TEACHERS’ PEDAGOGICAL LIBRARY........ Public Schools, Decatur, Ill.
WETROED LURE IC SEINRARY coca OSA ooo oe ene: Goa hoe toh ee Detroit, Mich.
LUEPARY. CO Abe ee cect chckiga eee sate meee es 37 Soho Square, London, England
ETEEDE COLUAIBUANE VEU SEUNG oun scien cr cr aici see creo Chicago, Ill.
PARELTNID Eu Millom cysts s So ele oc ioe oe alee die eas 159 East 61st St., New York
GR MER SBCs. acces eee ses Westboro Insane Hospital, Westboro, Mass.
EIEN aD Rs VWVENES UAL re rset ccnend ccs vie ttiee 4575 Forest Park Blvd., St. Louis, Mo.
AY GHEINIC§, INABORATOR Yoo, ss 5. 00'e cio Slo ais ola Siasiae o erome cia win eles ears Burlington, Vt.
Intrnors STATE LABORATORY OF NATURAL History LIBRARY........ Urbana, III.
PANES MATE HEN |W NIVERSTEY ILTBRARY, 0.10 csc aac <tlesiciic eee Decatur, Ill.
OHNE GRERARS INBRARV 55 Vac auanias sis ures tcl dois tone echo as Chicago, Ill.
EARORATORY. OF \EIiSToLoGYy: AND: EEMBRYOLOGY.).é 6.000. d-cepusle tie Sele lees
SESH EG OPE ee University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn.
MIEDTCATIETRRARV Pic. 4 sapieees Senn ha eri McGill University, Montreal, Canada
WEISSO URI DOTANIGATS GARDEN 406) /tce oc cie ec ota cic cra cule cielsigu St. Louis, Mo.
MuseuM CoMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY (HARVARD)............05- Cambridge, Mass.
NW EIAMESHIRE, STATE LABRARY: cc c.(05 sede acs coe ware iets 0% Concord, N. H.
New York AcADEMY OF MEDICINE..... 17 W. Forty-third St., New York City
PE Wa Y ORK PUBLIC YICIBRARVicsi 0s. o fe ode os he ce 476 Fifth Ave., New York City
INE WIRY ORK STATES CTBRARY.. a2 tects on sei ae Serial Section, Albany, N. Y.
N. Y. STATE VETERINARY COLLEGE..F lower Lib., Cornell Univ., Ithaca, N. Y.
OMmionSvTATe, WINIVERSEDYoILTRRARY? tcc c1c as ond oon ws aeaete Columbus, Ohio
RGAE AM UBET GH WIBRARY): Sitar cool sicierejeiaus storntewre seein oe Omaha, Neb.
EC AINETELD) 2 UBLEC, CABRARY 55/205 sinc cles latetate oul Olde tehicias cae Plainfield, N. J.
SGIENTIRIG JUTBRARY -peocish sic. ns set news « U. S. Patent Office, Washington, D. C.
MAPA SE MBL IG WETRRARY vais «cts 62 sade ctiooe ue at ae eee Syracuse, N. Y.
U.S. Mepicat Museum ANp Liprary..Surg. Gen.’s Office, Washington, D. C.
OINEVERSITY: OF GALIFORNTA: IUIBRARY. . <. 2c siscseitcacis Cosaieanianmiee Berkeley, Cal.
MeivERSiTy OF MONTANA: IUIBRARY ©... w/c 50% oles sc dvee ev ebneele Missoula, Mont.
RIRVERSITY OF NEBRASKA LIBRARY... 0.00 cs. a0s ce dacaccacenes Lincoln, Neb.
University or TENNESSEE Lrprary..College of Agriculture, Knoxville, Tenn.
WNIVERSITY OF. WISCONSIN LIBRARY: «|... 2. 0ic0%+¢csbeseeceree Madison, Wis.
INDEX
Abbott, J. F., Recent Progress in Some
Fields of Experimental Zoology, 217
Achyla, a peculiar, 70
Aeolosomatidae, Key to Species, 300
Ameba, life cycle in, 69
American Microscopical Society, Con-
stitution, 330; By Laws, 332; reasons
for continuance of, 8; Some thoughts
concerning the scope and future work
of, 5
Algae, quinone fixation of, 71; of Mis-
souri Botanical Garden, 239
Annelid, A phosphorescent, Bermudan
(Odontosyllis), 13
Answer to Mr. Pflaum, 251
Apparatus, Edinger’s, drawing and pro-
jection, 239
Aquatic Biology, as a field for investi-
gation, 10
Bacteria, cytology of, 238; selection
among, 319; bacillus leprae, 236;
bacillus of typhus, 72
Bausch, Henry, with portrait, 255
Bermudan Annelid, Odontosyllis
opla, 13
Bi-lobing of Compound Eyes, The, 319
Blood, red, cells of, 196
Bones, Femoral, 87
By Laws, 332
Castration, effects of, on growth of spe-
cial tissues, 237
Cells of red blood, 196
Cell-division, Regeneration and, 196
Cellular Activities Connected with Shed-
ding of Leaves, 193
en-
Cell Inclusions of Non-infectious Origin,
322
Centrosome in Living Protoplasm, The,
69
Charts to Suit the Course, 73
Color pattern in Leptinotarsa, modifica-
tions in, 223
Conjugation, causes of in Paramecium,
72
Constitution, 330
Crithidia Melophagia,
sheep’s blood, 275
Cultures in Vitro, 235
Cultures, of living tissues outside the
body, 228; of Treponema Pallida, 321;
of tissues in alien sera, 323
Custodian, Report of, 328
Dedication of the Ernest Abbé Denk-
relation of to
mal, 327
Department of Notes, Reviews, Etc., 67,
I9I, 235, 319
Department of Summaries:
Progress in The Theory of Nerve
Components, 57; in Some Lines of
Cytology, 145; in Some Fields of Ex-
perimental Zoology, 217. Fresh
Water Oligochaeta of the United
Sates, 284
Developmental Mechanics, 224
Diatoms as a Food Supply, 69
Dictyota, sexual periodicity in, 71
Double Demonstration Eyepiece, Leitz,
76
Earthworm, Nematode in Muscles of, 73
Enchytraeidae, 306
Epithelial Fibrils and Bridges, 236
Etiology of Trachoma, The, by H. C.
Solomon, 41
Exhaustion and Senility in Nerve Cells,
320
Experimental Zoology, Recent Progress
in Some Fields of, 217
Eyepiece, The Lietz Double Demonstra-
tion, 76
Eyes, Compound, The Bilobing of, 319
Fauna of Small Bodies of Water, 237
Femoral Bones, Comparative Histology
of, 87
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY
Foote, J. S.. M.D. The Comparative
Histology of Femoral Bones, 87; A
preliminary notice, 326
Fore Brain Vesicles of Vertebrates, 57
Gage, Professor S. H., On Spencer-
Tolles Fund, 243
Galloway, T. W. with Welch, Odonto-
syllis, 13; an answer to Mr. Pflaum,
251; Common Fresh Water Oligo-
chetes, 284
Germinal Transplantations, 220
Giant Cells, in Tumors, 236
Grafting of Tissues, 227
Growth of Nerves in Culture Media, 71
Guyer, Michael F., Recent Progress in
Some Lines of Cytology, 145
Herbaceous Arrangement of Elements
Derived from that of the Woody
Type, 104
Heredity, The effect of environment in,
220
Kuhne, Frederick W, with Portrait, I91
Lake Cochituate, Growth of Synura in,
141
Landacre, F. L. The Theory of Nerve
Components and the Fore Brain Ves-
icle of Vertebrates, 57
Latham, V. A., M.D., A Plea for Micro-
scopy, 67; Some of the Needs of the
Society, 68
List, of members, 335; of officers, 3, 85,
200, 259; of Subscribers, 343
Lumbriculidae, 300
Measurements, micrometric, 69
Meeting, minutes of, 201
Members, list of, 335
Mesostomum ehrenbergii, 101
Microscope, The build of, 74
Microscopy, a plea for, 67
Microtome Blades, Safety Razor, 108
Minutes of the Annual Meeting, 201
Muskrat (Fiber Zibethicus), A new
species of Trematode from, 261
Naididae, 301
345
Necrology, William Henry Seaman,
LLB., M.D., 79; Frederick W. Kuhne,
199; Henry Bausch, 255; See also
page 334
Nematode, in the muscles of the earth-
worm, 73
Nerve Cells, exhaustion and senility in,
320
Nerve Components, of Vertebrates, 57
Nervous Cord, longitudinal analysis of,
60
Nerve Extirpation, influence of on de-
velopment of muscles, 322
Nerves, growth of in culture media, 71
New Species of Trematode, A, Franklin
P. Barker and Joseph W. Laughlin,
261
Odontosyllis, Enopla Verrill, Studies on,
13; general morphology, 19; histology,
23; mating adaptations, 16; natural
history of, 13; systematic position, 17
Officers, list of, 3, 85, 209, 259
Oligochaeta, Fresh Water, 285; Habitat,
285; Collecting, 286; Classification,
208
Opposing Views, on disposition of
Spencer-Tolles Fund, 247
Origin of Elements of Sympathetic Sys-
tem, 195
Origin and Meaning of Blast Cells, by
E. W. Roberts, 211
Osteology of femurs, comparative, 87
Paramecium, causes of conjugation in,
72; breeding experiments with, 210;
selective mating in, 323
Parasitology, as a field for investiga-
tion, 10
Parker, Horatio N. Note on a Growth
of Synura in Lake Cochituate, Mass.,
141
Peaslee, Leon D., Mesostomum Ehren-
bergii, 191
Periodicity, Sexual, in Dictyota, 71; in
Spirogyra, 237; in Odontosyllis, 13
346
Pflaum, Magnus, On _ Spencer-Tolles
Fund, 250; Report of Custodian, 328
Phosphorescence in a Bermudan An-
nelid, 15
Physiology of Reproduction,
(Book Review) 325
Porter-Woodcock controversy, remarks
upon by Leroy D. Swingle, 261
Powers of Resistance in Piophila Lar-
vae, 72
President, The Address of, by Herbert
Osborn, 5
Pure Line and Pedigree Breeding, 218
Quinone Fixation of Algae, 71
Recent Progress, in Some Fields of Ex-
perimental Zoology, by J. F. Abbott,
217; in Some Lines of Cytology, by
Michael F. Guyer, 145
Reese, A. M., Charts to Suit the Course,
a3
Regeneration, and cell-division, 196; of
sections of arteries, 325
Relation of Crithidia Melophagia to the
Sheep’s Blood, 275
Report of Custodian, Magnus Pflaum,
328
Reproduction, The Physiology of, 325
Ribbon Carrier, Paper, 197
Roberts, E. W. Origin and Meaning of
Blast Cells, 211; The Bilobing of
Compound Eyes, 319
Rotifers, The study of, 197
Rust, Wheat, 324
Seaman, William Henry, LL.B., M.D.,
with Portrait, 79
Selection among Bacteria, 319
Selective Mating in Paramecia, 323
Sex, the determination of, 228
Sexual Periodicity; in Dictyota, 71; in
Spirogyra, 237; in Odontosyllis, 13
Sheep’s Blood, relation of Crithidia
Melophagia to, 275
Solomon, H. C. The Etiology of Trach-
oma, 4I
The,
Somatic Cells, growth of, without the
body, 195
INDEX
Specimens, device for transferring, 73
Spencer-Tolles Fund, 247
Spirochaeta Pallida, demonstration of,
197
Spirochaets, The, 238
Spirogyra, periodicity in, 237
Studies on a Phosphorescent Bermudan
Annelid, Odontosyllis Enopla Verrill,
by T. W. Galloway and Paul S.
Welch, 13
Synura, Note on a growth of, 141
Sympathetic System, origin of elements
of, 195
Syllidae, 18
Theory of Nerve Components and the
Fore Brain Vesicle of Vertebrates,
The, by F. L. Landacre, 57
Trachoma, Etiology of, 41; experimental
cultures of, 47; transmissibility of,
50; susceptibility and immunity to, 50;
classification, 51; bodies, 322
Transferring specimens, 73
Transformation of Species
cheria, 70
of Vau-
Transplantation of tissues, organs, and
limbs, 226
Trematode, a new species of, from the
muskrat, 261
Treponema, Pallida, in pure cultures, 321
Trochodota Dunedinensis in Victoria,
325
Tubificidae, 312
Tumors, giant cells in, 236
Typhus, bacillus of, 7
Vaucheria, transformation of species of,
7O
Vertebrates, Theory of nerve compon-
ents and the fore brain vesicles of, 57
57
Walker, Elda R. A Device for Trans-
ferring Specimens, 73
Welch, Paul S. with Galloway, Odon-
tosyllis, 13
Wheat Rust, experiments on, in N. Da-
kota, 324
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
VOLUME XXxXI
1912
ne Ti
Mies iii ae
f >t
AA my sbi i ‘ i
“f ' 4 i TAKE ie Mi
g a Tay,
nd vd n
ul Oe. 4 h
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED 1801
PUBLISHED QUARTERLY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXXI
NUMBER ONE
Entered as Second-class Matter December 12, 1910, at the Postoffice at Decatur, IIli-
nois, under act of March 3, 1879.
Decatur, ILL.
Review PRINTING & STATIONERY Co.
1912
Ph
j La
SOMONE 1
7
i
ty
ved
a
; J
VA, 3) a) Cea . ane Me's
en as | | rh mm 1)
heh ON | AD i aw aa
oid orovot i. Oneys (ae
Wisin? |
iP) oh jak Pye KaRVU yw! ‘ab eaten’
| ELA ACEH Le BRIA
i Levey Bark a4
\
ae |
Tiga e 4% Mi a
, Y
1 ( Ara) ig j j i icegt! : WA *
ti ay vie
ao fea le a Ae te
OFFICERS.
Bresidentin Een Dat EL BAT DN rie aera Wun kr pny eye Leena na Rade Austin, Texas
First Vice President: F. Creighton WELLMAN, M. D....New Orleans, La.
Second Vice President: Epwarp PENNOCK.............-.. Philadelphia, Pa.
Mecretanuen) Tes We GARPOWAV eh har wateR a aialcien tos alma a beenee Decatur, Ill.
iveastircr salt. CAM ELAN KINSON acini aici atietoseioie a eee Charleston, III.
Gusrodian: MAGNUS PEEAUMS Je+ Sean ook hose cae sale bee iobe Meadville, Pa.
ELECTIVE MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
UNC E REESESY N45 vor mtnapscbs Ai. 0 hacer «ok dames, ote Morgantown, West Va.
EMR VPAT Tire crcts amiciaretasctit) a io craeveciatanstehacio tke aaeariet thane Cleveland, Ohio
Vere Fa MERCER nie ays a tarctaee Maya Ae aN Rn eat pS Pee Cee Remedies SE Athens, Ohio
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
R. H. Warp, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Troy, N. Y.,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1879.
J. D. Hyatt, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
ALBERT McCa ta, Ph.D., of Chicago, IIl.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883.
T. J. Burriy, Ph.D., of Urbana, IIl.,
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gro. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Buffalo, N. Y.,
MarsHa.t D. Ewe tt, M.D., of Chicago, III,
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Simon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1805 and 1906.
A. CiiFForp Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1806.
at Detroit, Mich., 1890.
A. M. Briere, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. E1icGENMANN, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., 1901.
Cuares E. Bessey, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
E. A. Birce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Urbana, III,
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
HeErBert Oszorn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
A. E. Hertzvter, M.D., of Kansas City, Mo., ;
| sf at Washington, D. C., 1911
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXXI, Number 1, January, 1912
A Blight of the Mesquite, with Plate I, by F. D. Heald and I. M. Lewis...
The Lakes of Glacier National Park:—II. Lake Louise, with Plates
Li=1V:| by “Morton Je Elrod. 4. 575.208. ae tee eee
Progress in Evolutionary Thought; Some Latter Day Aspects of Dar-
WATS, sDY. Je, E's ADDOUL tc s0ie acregee Care era sc epee ae eRe eee aa eee
Notes, Reviews, Etc. On the Ontogeny of Certain Interesting Insect
Structures, with Plate V, by E. W. Roberts; An Improved Reagent
Stand, by G. H. Marr; Observations on the Plasmodium of
Myxomycetes; Animal Tumors and “Crown-gall” in Plants; Arti-
ficially Induced Segmentation of Eggs of Toad; Heterochromo-
somes in Plants; Another Step in the Study of Cells in Vitro;
Polymorphism in Algae; Disintegration of Micro-organisms; Re-
generation of Blood Platelets in Dogs; White Corpuscles and Duct-
less Glands in Toad; The Adult of the Pearl Producing Parasite of
the Oyster; Effect of Testis Extract on Females; Sexuality in
Spores of Mosses; Longevity of Bacteria in the Presence of Lactic
Acid; Crossing in Spirogyra; A Red Euglena; Effect of X-Rays on
Sex Cells; Clearing Large Objects; Sexual Fusions in Yeast; A
New Rotary Microtome; A New Medium for Dark-field Observa-
tion; An Early Letter of R. B. Tolles; A New Microscopic Alga for
America; Seasonal Succession Among Pond Animals..............
ING CEOLOR YS io isere 5 tec tis Rise oaks Te ee ee ae cen iok ee Oe ete
Minutes of the Washington’ Meeting. 2.) cee.) kc ccliesk.-tieictehiek cee epee
Finaricrall (Reports: o sscices dake ono etese eels OAR eee tie Gs Rislaisin tate Sie eee
5
II
17
TRANSACTIONS
OF
American Microscopical Society
(Published in Quarterly Installments)
Vol. XXX]] JANUARY, 1912 No. 1
A BLIGHT OF THE MESQUITE
By F. D. Heap and I. M. Lewis
Introduction—During the past three years a diseased condition
of the mesquite (Prosopis glandulosa Torr.) has been observed in
the vicinity of Austin, Texas, but the true nature of the trouble
was not determined until the past season when the writers made
this blight the subject of special study. Specimens of the blighted
mesquite were collected during the prosecution of “A Plant Disease
Survey in the Vicinity of San Antonio” and a brief statement con-
cerning the character of the disease was included.t. The rusts col-
lected during the survey were sent to Dr. F. D. Kern, Lafayette,
Indiana, for determination, and specimens of the blighted mesquite
were included. The reply was received that the blight was not due
to a rust, and a statement followed that similar collections were in
Prof. Farlow’s herbarium at Harvard. The Harvard collections
were not assigned to any definite species of fungus. Specimens
from our collections have been sent to Professor Farlow and this
information has been confirmed.
Geographical Distribution —The blight is very abundant in the
vicinity of Austin wherever the mesquite is found. It has also been
observed at all points distant from Austin where the mesquite grows
which have been visited at the proper season of the year. It is
not known at present whether the prevalence of the disease is co-
extensive with the range of the mesquite, but it seems highly prob-
able that the trouble is widely distributed.
1. Heald, F. D. and Wolf, F. A. A Plant Disease Survey in the Vicinity of San
Antonio, Texas. Bull. Bureau of Plant Ind., 226:72. 1912.
6 HEALD AND LEWIS
Symptoms and Effects ——The blight affects the leaves and pro-
duces an effect which has been popularly designated “rust,” on ac-
count of the resemblance of color to the true rusts and a slight super-
ficial similarity of structure. It first becomes evident during the
early part of the growing season, and the trouble is generally well
advanced by the last of April or the first part of May. This is very
soon after the young leaflets have reached mature size. The blight
is very conspicuous on account of the pronounced yellow color
which is assumed by the affected leaves. The diseased branches are
not generally distributed uniformly throughout the tree but the
leaves of certain branches are much more severely attacked than
others. The clusters of affected leaves are frequently so abundant
that the foliage of the tree presents a marked yellow color even from
a distance.
In the early stages of the disease the affected leaflets show a
chlorosis which begins at the margin and tip and advances until the
midrib is reached. The midrib and some of the larger veins fre-
quently retain the normal green color until somewhat later in the
progress of the disease. Very soon minute, golden-yellow nodules
make their appearance within the leaflet and they increase in size
until they raise the epidermis and then they show on both surfaces
as slightly elevated, golden-yellow papillae embedded in the lemon
yellow leaf tissues. These pustules represent immature pycnidia.
As the disease advances the leaflets begin to shrivel and turn brown
at the tip; this discoloration advances until the whole leaflet is in-
volved. Many of the affected leaflets fall before they have been
killed and have turned brown, while others are retained until the dis-
ease is farther advanced. By the time the leaf tissue has become
brown and dead many of the pycnidia are mature, and a careful ex-
amination even with the naked eye will show that they have opened
at the surface by a narrow slit or a slightly irregular fissure. By
midsummer or earlier all of the diseased leaflets have disappeared
and the affected branches are completely defoliated. There is no
evidence of a direct attack of the leaf rachis or young twigs. The
casual organism appears to be confined to the leaflets. Our observa-
tions indicate that many of the seriously affected branches are killed.
A BLIGHT OF THE MESQUITE ih
This is borne out by the presence of many dead twigs upon diseased
trees which we have had under observation for several years.
Etiology.—The blight of the mesquite described above is caused
by a parasitic fungus which we have not been able to refer to any
described species. A superficial examination might lead one to
refer the causal organism to the Uredineae, but a careful study has
revealed its true nature.
Fresh or dried material gave very poor results. The material
for the detailed study of the fungus was prepared according to the
methods employed in modern morphological investigations. Small
pieces of leaflets showing both young and advanced stages of the
disease were fixed in both picric and chrom-acetic acid fixing solu-
tions, imbedded in paraffin and cut into sections of varying thick-
ness. The stain employed was the triple stain of Fleming. The
tissue fixes readily and no difficulty was experienced in securing
excellent series of sections. The sections were supplemented in
study by teasing out the fresh pycnidia in water.
The pycnidia in their young stages consist of dense aggregates
of fungous cells embedded in the mesophyll of the leaflets. They
are globular or elongated and finally reach a diameter almost equal-
ling the thickness of the leaflet. Up to this time they consist of
an undifferentiated mass of closely compacted, fungous cells, with-
out the appearance of any pycnidial cavity, and hence resemble
small sclerotia. There is a slight hypertrophy of the host tissues
adjacent to the pycnidia and this together with the growth of the
pycnidia gives the leaflet its characteristic papillate appearanee.
These aggregates of fungous cells have a pronounced orange yellow
color (Fig. 3). The leaf tissue is apparently destroyed and re-
placed by the aggregates of fungous tissue. The mycelium does not
extend generally through the leaf tissue but appears to be con-
fined entirely to the pycnidial nodules.
By the time the sclerotial mass has nearly reached mature size
a cresentic cleft or fissure, the beginning of a pycnidial cavity, may
be seen in transverse sections. The cells adjacent to the cleft
elongate and assume a palisade-like arrangement, and later develop
the spores. The cavity is always longer than deep, and even when
completely developed retains more or less of a cresentic form in
8 HEALD AND LEWIS
transverse section. The cleft appears in an excentric position and
is generally nearer the outer surface, so that a mature pycnidium
shows a dome-shaped mass of tissue which rises into the pycnidial
cavity (Fig. 5). The pycnidial wall is many cells thick, and uni-
form in structure, but thins out somewhat above where it breaks to
form a more or less elongated or irregular fissure (Figs. 2 and 5).
The conidiophores line the entire interior of the pycnidial cavity
forming a continuous layer of cylindrical, pointed filaments from
which the spores are constricted. The spores are unicellular, con-
tinuous, hyaline, slender thread-like, 25-30x2-2.34, and either
straight or tortuous. No definite ostiole is developed but when the
pycnidium reaches maturity the external wall ruptures and a linear
or irregular fissure is formed through which the spores are extruded.
The pycnidia may reach maturity while the leaflets are still hang-
ing on the tree or not until they have fallen, but the leaf tissues
are generally brown and dead before they are perfectly developed.
Many of the pycnidia fail to develop a pycnidial cavity and remain
as sclerotia-like masses of fungous tissue. Many of these aborted
pycnidia may be found upon the fallen leaves. The fact that many
pycnidia are aborted and that perfect maturity is not reached until
a comparatively late stage in the progress of the disease, made the
determination of the character of the trouble more difficult.
All attempts to grow the blight fungus in cultures have given
only negative results. Poured plates made from pycnidia which had
been teased apart in sterile bouillon gave no growth of a fungus.
In a number of cases pycnidia were carefully dissected out from
the leaf tissue and planted in glucose agar plates, but no growth
resulted from any of the plantings. In all culture work carried out
the spores have failed to germinate.
The manner of primary infection, and the time when this in-
fection takes place have not been determined. It seems that a per-
fect stage upon the fallen leaves later in the season might be pro-
duced. Old fallen leaflets from the preceding season, collected
from beneath trees which show an unusual amount of infection,
frequently show perithecia. A single species appears to be fairly
constant. The ascospores from these fruits grow readily in cultures
on the common media, but in all cultures the colonies have failed
A BLIGHT OF THE MESQUITE 9
to produce either pycnidia or perithecia. It is impossible to state
definitely at the present time that a relationship exists between the
ascogenous form on the fallen leaves and the blight fungus. Work
is in progress which it is hoped will throw some light on this point.
Techmcal Description—An examination of mycological liter-
ature has failed to yield any known genus to which our fungus can
be referred. Although the material studied represents only a con-
idial stage it seems advisable to describe it at present as belonging
to a new genus and species, even tho later study may reveal a con-
nection with a known perfect stage.
Scleropycnium.—Heald and Lewis, n. gen.
Pyenidia when young sclerotium-like, immersed in tissues of
host, golden or orange colored and becoming hysteroid and erumpent
with maturity, and less conspicuous; pycnidial cavity appearing as
a cleft, always surrounded by wall many cells thick. Parasitic.
Mycelium obsolete.
Scleropycnium aureum Heald & Lewis, n. sp.
Pyenidia numerous, globular or oblong, separate, smooth, im-
mersed in the mesophyll, later becoming slightly erumpent, and
amphigenous, orange yellow, hysteroid, 225-250x250-400p. Wall
many cells thick, cavity generally excentric. Basidia simple, cylin-
drical, 15-18x4-5n, forming a palisade-like layer lining the pycnidial
cavity. Conidia not catenulate, continuous, hyaline, narrow cylin-
dric, 25-30x2.3p, straight or tortuous.
On living leaves of mesquite, (Prosopis glandulosa Torr.) and
causing a characteristic blight.
This fungus appears to be related to the Scolecosporeae of the
Nectrioidaceae.
ScHOOL oF Botany,
Austin, Texas.
10
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
HEALD AND LEWIS
EXPLANATION OF PLATE
An enlarged leaflet of the mesquite, showing the distribution of the
pycnidia.
Small portion of an affected leaflet, showing several mature pycnidia
which have opened by a linear or irregular fissure.
Transverse section of a young pycnidium before the appearance of
a pycnidial cavity. x 300.
Transverse section of a nearly mature pycnidium. This does not
show the typical excentric position of the cavity. x IIo.
Transverse section of a mature pycnidium from which spores are
being extruded. x 460.
Conidophores and spores. x 600.
PAGE a:
THE BAKES OF GLACIER NATIONAL PARK.
By Morton J. Exrop.
mies
LAKE LOUISE.
The trail from Glacier Basin passes over the shoulder of Lin-
coln Mountain, around the shoulder of Gunsight, and drops down
almost to the lake, lying at an elevation of 5,974 feet. As one rounds
the angle of the mountain the lake comes into view suddenly, a beau-
tiful sheet of water about a mile long and half as wide. High
cliffs on all sides except to the south rise from the water. On the
west side is a narrow strip of land which makes an admirable
camping site. The first view is had from a high elevation, which-
ever way the traveler may be going, and is very impressive. The
way leads almost to the water’s edge, and a camp on the shore will
be very pleasant.
We camped here early in September, 1909, staying over Sun-
day, September 5. Jones and I walked over Gunsight pass on the
4th. We rode from camp at Gunsight lake to the highest point on
the trail where it begins to descend, before making the final ascent
to the pass, the elevation being about 7,150 feet. It was a hard
pull. We were both heavily loaded with big cameras and collecting
material, and I was too ill to do anything but stumble along. The
pass was reached about five in the evening. Lake Louise presented
a most beautiful view, 1,300 feet below. A slight breeze was blow-
ing, rippling the surface. The position of the countless small waves
reflected the sun’s rays directly toward the pass and in our eyes.
The result was to give the lake the appearance of molten gold,
brilliant at the upper central part of the water, fading outward
toward the edges. So gorgeous was it that one could look at the lake
only with eyes alomst closed, like looking at the sun. Such a sight
*The first article in this Series appeared in Volume XXIX, No. 2.
I2 MORTON J. ELROD
one rarely sees. It was more dazzling than sunsets on Flathead
lake, which are beyond description. For a long time we sat in the
pass, reveling in the splendor of the view. The cameras were
brought into use, and the resulting photographs, when colored, give
a fair idea of the colors, although the most brilliant tints fail to do
justice to the picture. Slowly we picked our way down the rocks to
the lake and to camp, avoiding the trail. A few minutes after our
arrival at camp the sun sank behind the high crags to the west, and
immediately the air became quite chilly.
The lake shore was searched the following day for insects,
frogs, snakes, etc., and the lake waters examined for microscopic
life. It was so cool that insects were scarce. Two frogs were
found, one not yet fully transformed, still retaining a portion of the
tail, although it was September. No snakes were seen. There were
no squirrels calling in the scrubby timber. While we ate breakfast
a goat was seen slowly working his way along the cliffs above us.
For fifteen or twenty minutes he was in view, so close glasses were
not needed, then disappeared among the rocks at the pass.
Collections of entomostraca were made from the water on the
morning of September 5, 1909. The rectangular dredge was used,
with butcher’s linen top sewed to iron frame and fine silk bolting
cloth for bag. The apparatus was thrown out as far as possible, al-
lowed to sink, and hauled in. It was thrown out some 40 or 50
feet. At each haul the microscopic life was washed out in a large
bottle, then transferred to a smaller bottle and preserved. The act
of throwing out and hauling in the dredge was repeated several
times until by an accident the silk net was torn, and no more col-
lecting with it was possible.
There was an abundance of microscopic life. No attempt was
made to determine the material quantitively. Such a thing was im-
possible. The big red entomostracan, so abundant in Peary and
Nansen lakes at the top of the rocks at Sperry glacier wall, was the
most abundant species.
The results of the work with the net indicate that the lake has
an abundance of entomostracan food for fish, and if young fry were
planted they would doubtless do well. The lake waters fall over a
cliff immediately at the outlet into a second lake 1,700 feet lower.
THE LAKES OF GLACIER NATIONAL PARK 13
This lower lake is full of fish, and is a great resort for fishermen,
although somewhat difficult of access. With Lake Louise stocked
with fish the tourist would find it a delightful place for a camp. It
is easy of access, there is plenty of wood, the scenery is very im-
pressive, and climbing may be indulged in to the heart’s content.
From the high cliffs just back of camp a high waterfall breaks into
spray before reaching the talus below. The stream heads in snow
banks in a big basin, invisible for the cliffs. A second fall comes
over the rocks above the lake, the water supplied by a small glacier
just east of the pass. The trail passes at the foot of the fall,
reached by an easy walk. The cliffs of Mt. Jackson, across the lake
from the trail side, are high, abrupt and very impressive.
Botanizing is good. While the timber is short and scrubby, it is
nevertheless quite abundant, every shelf and protected place sup-
porting its clump or clumps of trees. The patches of timber here
and there among the cliffs give them added beauty, and show where
the shelves of rock are, and often indicate a way up, if one is in-
clind to prospect. Mosses, lichens, and ferns, as also alpine water
loving plants, abound among the rocks and in the crevices along the
water courses or on the scree or talus below the snow beds or ice.
Insects are doubtless abundant on warm days, although at the time
of our visit scarce because of the lateness of the season. Frost was
on the ground in quantity the morning of September 5. We were
not searching for insects, but from the character of the country and
its location they are surely abundant.
The depth of the lake was not then determined. So far as
then known no boat had been placed on its surface. In 1910 we
planned to visit the place again when provided with a canvas boat,
but plans miscarried, and the visit was not made. From appear-
ances it is quite deep. It surely does not freeze to the bottom, and
fish would undoubtedly find a quiet home and do well.
From Glazier Basin to Lake Louise is about three hours, more
or less. Fish fry transported to Lake Louise would be attended to
last at Glacier Basin, as there is no water between that place and
Lake Louise. It does not seem a difficult task to stock the lake with
fish. It is large enough to furnish a home and food for a large
number. They would be confined to the waters of the lake, as there
14 MORTON J. ELROD
is no portion of either the inlet or outlet which fish could travel.
But that makes little difference. Now that the lake is a part of
a government reserve it should be stocked with fish for the benefit
of the thousands who will doubtless camp on its shores. The
traveling public visiting the park will surely visit the lake in large
numbers, for it is one of the scenic spots of the park, is easily
reached, and is a delightful place in which to linger. Nansen,
Peary and Louise may be attended to at one planting. Gunsight,
across the divide, may be stocked from the other side, via St. Mary
lake.
In 1911 I made another trip through the Park and stopped over
night at Lake Louise. We worked on Gunsight lake in the fore-
noon, packed up just after lunch, started up the trail to the pass
about two in the afternoon, and made camp at Lake Louise about
six. The day, August 23, was one of the most perfect of the entire
trip. Owing to the high cliffs of Gunsight west of the lake the sun
sets early. The lake was in shadow when we arrived at its shore,
but the golden summit of Jackson was brilliant in the evening sun-
light, and the distant summits to the south, outside the Park limits,
had an unusual clearness of form and outline.
While the boys made camp and the cook prepared dinner I put
the canvas boat together. The job for me took forty minutes, the
best record for the summer. After the evening meal Duffy, our
cook, and myself hastened out on the lake. I wished to do the
work before darkness came on.
The surface net only was used. Near shore no great abundance
of life was found. In the middle, where the water was deepest, one
drag of a few hundred yards resulted in almost filling the little
bucket of the net with the blood red entomostraca and a clear,
transparent species in lesser numbers. One haul gave an abundance
of material. There is an enormous amount of life in the lake. Ow-
ing to the lateness in the day and the depth of the water the bottom
dredge was not used.
The depth of the lake is as follows:
Upper end, 200 yards off shore, 88 feet.
In the middle, half way down, 118 feet.
Almost two thirds down, 244 feet.
THE LAKES OF GLACIER NATIONAL PARK 15
Water temperature, 4o F.
Air temperature, 52 F.
Time, 7:30 p. m., August 23, IQII.
A lake as large as Louise, with a depth of 244 feet, will support
a large amount of fish life, even though they may be confined to the
waters of the lake. The lake has an elevation of 5974 feet, 698 feet
higher than Gunsight, 2119 feet higher than Avalanche lake, 1501
feet higher than the upper St. Mary, and 1113 feet higher than
McDermott. It is 599 feet higher than Hidden Lake, which is 2231
feet above Lake McDonald. Louise is therefore 2830 feet, or a little
more than half a mile, above Lake McDonald.
But Louise is in a basin on the south side of Gunsight pass,
exposed to the southern sun. Although the sun rises late and sets
early for the lake surface, it nevertheless shines with powerful ef-
fect during every day when not obscured by clouds. This would not
be true of Avalanche, Hidden or Gunsight lakes. The snow around
the lake and on the slope of the pass must melt early in the spring,
hastening the breaking of the ice in the lake. This melting snow
will bring down quantities of food from the grass and timbered
slopes above, even from the bare rocks. Although at a high eleva-
tion the lake must remain ice free quite late. The prevailing air
currents are from the lower regions upward toward the pass, blow-
ing over the lake on the way. These will carry insect life for food.
They are warm currents in the fall, as proven by experiments else-
where, and will retard freezing on the lake.
Everything considered, it seems clear that fish will live in the
lake. They stand a poorer show than they would in almost any other
lake examined, due to the absence of creek inlets and outlet, and
to the elevation. But the lake is deep, and just now full of life.
Tourists will find the lake a splendid camping site. They will enjoy
the pass, the scenery, the lake, and all surrounding it, as well as any
other place in the park. When they begin to camp on the lake shore
and fish there is little chance of the increase of fish beyond the ca-
pacity of the lake to furnish food.
16 MORTON J. ELROD
DESCRIPTION OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate [I—Toward the summit of Mt. Jackson from Gunsight Pass, above
Lake Louise. The unnamed glacier, only a part of which is visible, drains
into Lake Louise. Other ice masses, similar but smaller, make up the water
supply. The summit on the right is Jackson, 10,023 feet elevation. Note
absence of vegetation and precipitous cliffs.
Plate III, A—Lake Louise from continental divide at Gunsight Pass. The
view is to the south. The rippled surface of the water gave a beautiful gold-
en reflection of the sun at the time the picture was taken. The water from
the lake drops over cliffs 1,700 feet high. Note the precipitous rocks and
scant vegetation.
Plate III, B—The outlet of Lake Louise, a portion of which is seen in the
upper left hand corner. From Lake Louise in the upper left to the unnamed
lake in the lower right hand corner the fall is 1,700 feet. The lower lake is
full of fish, the upper lake has none.
Plate IV, A—The first view of Lake Louise from the trail from Lake Mc-
Donald as it rounds the shoulder of Gunsight mountain. Above the lake at
the upper end is Gunsight Pass. The trail passes at the foot of the water-
fall not far above the lake surface, winds back and forth across the broad
talus slope, then around crags and through rock clefts to the pass. Mt. Jack-
son is on the right, Gunsight on the left. Citadel shows above and beyond
the pass. Note the tremendous cliffs and portions of glaciers.
Plate IV, B—Falls above Lake Louise, from the trail. This stream is
the main inlet of the lake, and comes from the glacier shown in Plate II.
HE SE
Plate III
Plate 1V
ERRATA
Tw
Page 17, paragraph 3, line 2, Maupertuis.
Page 23, line 4, stands for stand.
Page 24, paragraph 5, line 7, once for one.
Page 25, paragraph 2, line 5, rank for rack.
Page 27, line 2, Quetelet’s.
Page 30, paragraph 2, line 5, case for care.
Page 32, last line, physical for spiritual.
Page 33, Bibliographical note: the last two references under Poul-
ton’s name should not be so included. They are independent
collections of essays by various authors.
zz a
ais, =
iece>
DEPARTMENT OF SUMMARIES
TO BE DEVOTED TO DIGESTS OF PROGRESS
IN BIOLOGY
While the Transactions will continue to be primarily a Journal of research in mier>-
viology, it is recognized that the field has become so broad as to preclude the possibilitv
of freauent articles in any one of the departments of special interest. Because of this
it will be the policy to present, from time to time, supplementary digests of the progress
being made in the various fields of micro-biology, It is also proposed to introduce similar
summaries of the progress made in some departments not represented in our articles of
research. This is done with the feeling that such reviews will increase the permanent
value of the Transactions to all who may not have access to a large list of technical
piological journals, nor the time to make the survey for themselves.
.
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT
SOME LATTER-DAY ASPECTS OF “DARWINISM.”
By J. F. Apgorr.
A lecture given before the faculty and students of Washington University Jan. 9, 1912.
If any one thing can be taken as a symbol of the present time,
I fancy the most appropriate would be the hammer. Not only is
the hammer the symbol of constructive industry so characteristic of
our age, but it may also typify the spirit of iconoclasm, which is
equally, if not more strikingly, characteristic. From the muck-
raking of a popular magazine to the calm, deliberate, destructive
criticism of a system of philosophy, now is essentially a time of
making over. The present generation has no reverence for tradi-
tions of the past unless they be in harmony with the point of view
of the present.
It is by some considered a sort of poetic justice that the image
of the greatest iconoclast of modern times, in effect if not in pur-
pose,—Charles Darwin,—should be torn from its pedestal by those
upon whose shoulders his mantle of leadership in Biology has fallen.
For in spite of the fact that the theory of evolution is far wider
than Darwin’s hypothesis of Natural Selection, and that Darwin’s
theories were anticipated in many ways by Maupertius and others;
in spite of the fact, too, that Darwin’s own personality was the op-
posite of aggressive, the fact remains that Darwin’s name stands as
the personification of that intellectual insurgency which shattered
18 J. F. ABBOTT
the placid conventions of centuries, and although Darwin himself,
without question, worked with an eye “single to the pursuit of
truth” for its own sake, yet the publication of “The Origin of
Species” in 1859, like an absent-minded prod of an ant hill with a
walking stick, instantly set up a commotion which took decades to
subside.
Like a spark in prairie grass in the autumn, the fire of the idea
at once spread in all directions, biological interpretations of history,
ot philosophy, of psychology, of economics, of astronomy, sociology,
of pedagogy soon became the order of the day and the world was
apparently fully persuaded to the new way of thinking.
This had little to do, perhaps, with the “origin of species” as
such. What, then, was the significant kernel of Darwin’s specula-
tions that was so fruitful of growth and so capable of transforma-
tion?
Briefly, it was this—the substitution of a natural for a super-
natural explanation of the material organic universe. It was this
that aroused the united wrath and enmity of the Church and en-
gendered the bitter disputes which occupied the sixties and seventies.
To Darwin more than to any one else, perhaps, was this directed,
for, while evolution was in the air not only throughout the 19th
century, but during the larger part of the 18th as well, and although
biology came into the debate comparatively late, yet the polemic
ability of Huxley and the imperturable materialism of Darwin com-
bined to draw upon the biologists all the theological lightnings with
which the sky was charged.
The ‘“anthropocentric”’ conception of man as the center and
chief factor in a universe created for his especial use and enjoy-
ment was decidedly a hard one to forego, and in spite of the gradual
acceptance of the evolutionary standpoint during the latter half of
the century past, there has always been a small remnant, silenced
but unconvinced, whose recantation has been much like the famous
one of Galileo.
Biologists have discovered that the fundamental characteristic
of living matter, by virtue of which it is alive, is mutability, and
that stability is synonymous with death. It is not otherwise with
hypotheses or with ideas. So long as they retain the vital spark we
must expect their nature to be at least susceptible of change. When
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 19
an hypothesis has passed this stage, it is no longer a working basis,
but has become a creed.
Darwin’s theory of “Natural Selection’’, announced a half cent-
ury ago, struggling for recognition, and finally achieving it, has
been no exception, and the addition of new facts, the assembling of
a mass of data, beside which even Darwin’s patient and painstaking
accumulation seems insignificant, could not otherwise than alter our
point of view. To those, however, to whom the indefinite is abhor-
rent and who find a certain soul-satisfaction in a rigid creed, the
calling into question, on the part of biologists, of some of the funda-
mentals of Darwinism has been hailed as a tardy renunciation of
heresy, for which the only alternative is a reversion to first princi-
ples.
One of the curious consequences, then, of the increase in inter-
est and knowledge along evolutionary lines has been a recrudescence
of what may be called anti-Darwinism literature, and this has been
not alone the product of hidebound conservatives. Among biolog-
ists there have not been lacking those who feel that Darwinism has
had its day and have hailed with satisfaction various subsidiary
hypotheses as ‘“‘new theories of evolution.” It is not to be wondered
at, then, if the layman is somewhat puzzled, and doubtful of what
he should think or believe.
In most people’s minds the primary difficulty, perhaps, is in the
confusion of two radically different conceptions—Evolution and
Darwinism. These are not synonomous terms. Evolution would,
perhaps, have been the philosophical basis of modern thought even
if Darwin had never lived, and the refutation of the whole principle
of natural selection would not alter in the slightest the theory of
evolution as such, since Darwinism is but one of several possible
explanations for an evolution otherwise conceded to exist.
Darwinism, then, must stand or fall on its merits, and if it falls
we must seek some other explanation of the method of evolution.
To deal adequately with the history of the Theory of Evolu-
tion, even if details be omitted, would require not a lecture hour,
but a semester course. One point, however, needs a word of com-
ment.
Since the mind of man first began to ferment and ideas other
than those of food and shelter rose to the surface, two aspects of
20 J. F. ABBOTT
nature have claimed his attention, one the static—dealing with things
as they are, always have been and presumably always shall be—the
other, the dynamic, that recognizes the apparent stability of nature
to be illusory and that, to quote a familiar phrase,—‘the only stable
thing in the cosmos is the fact of change.”
The latter was more especially the trend of earlier thinking, the
former was set and crystallized by the influence of the medizval
church, and it was because scientific progress in the 19th century
again brought men around to the dynamic point of view that the in-
evitable clash occurred between ecclesiastical dogma and scientific
speculation.
It is well to keep clearly in mind the implications of these two
points of view, for they are mutually exclusive, and to try to combine
them is to invite mental anarchy. To think of the Universe (by
which is usually meant that atom of it called earth) as a stable
something, unchanging in its physical aspects, permanent in its or-
ganic types or species and immutable in the intrinsic nature of what
we call human spirit or soul,—that is one thing. To conceive of the
Universe, physical and spiritual, as a constant flux, in which matter
has no stability in form (if in substance), where time and space are
but artificial concepts of the human mind, that is quite another. Let
there be added to this constant changefulness of things the con-
comitant of law and order and we have the evolutionary stand-
point. The other is the concept of special creation, which was char-
acteristic of the mental attitude of Europe (with certain excep-
tions) until the middle of the last century. The former has been the
characteristic point of view since. The “Origin of Species” stands
at the dividing line, for although it would be quite incorrect to as-
sert that this book was the cause of the change in the point of view
of the western world, yet, like a burning glass, it certainly focused
the various divergent rays of evolutionary thought and brought to
a blaze the smoldering fires of opposition to the established order of
thought. It offered a mechanical explanation of the evolutionary
process in the organic world and demanded no superphysical agen-
cies to bring it about. Herein was its great and novel strength and
also, as we shall see, its weakness.
It has seemed worth while, therefore, to review the standpoint
of the Darwinian Theory in the light of present day advances and
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 21
try to discover just where we stand, since the adage that “where
there is so much smoke there must be fire” is not without its em-
pirical justification. Since the greatest danger in such an exposi-
tion is that of discursiveness, I shall try to confine myself pretty
closely to my topic. I shall not take time to discuss Evolution in its
broader aspects, either historically or analytically. I shall take it
for granted that you are all Evolutionists in this general sense. If
any one truly believes that Adam and Eve are historical characters
and that the Mosaic account of the Creation is anything more than
a childish tale, suitable for childish minds, I take no issue with him.
I merely do not understand the workings of his mind, nor, I fancy,
will he of mine.
The outlines of the Darwinian Theory are no doubt familiar to
most of you, but it may not be out of place to review them, since un-
less we understand perfectly what the original hypothesis is we are
hardly in a position to appreciate criticisms of it.
The first thing that strikes the attention of the naturalist in the
field is the astounding prodigality of Nature,—the wasteful largesse
of individuals,—of life itself.
“Nature”, to quote Tennyson,
So careful of the type she seems,
So careless of the single life,
That I, considering everywhere
Her secret meaning in her deeds,
And finding that of fifty seeds
She often brings but one to bear.
The poet did not avail himself of his poetic license in limiting
the number to fifty. The more prosaic minded scientist knows that
fifty myriads would more nearly approach the fact.
A few examples will make this clear. We learn that an eel may
lay 15,000,000 eggs, the oyster 1% to 16 million, the codfish 60 mil-
lion. Yet if any considerable number of any species survive, these
huge numbers would seem unnecessary. Let us take as an extreme
example the hypothetical case of an annual plant producing two
seeds only. If each seed sprouted and survived, at the end of twen-
ty-one years there would be 1,048,576 plants! Jordan estimates that
if all the fly eggs laid in a single day in a large city should actually
hatch out, the inhabitants of the city where this happened could not
22 J; B.LABBORT
escape in time to avoid being smothered by the mass of hatching
flies. The common mosquito completes its life cycle in about ten
days. Each female lays 200-400 eggs. Let us take the minimum
number, 200. If one half of these are females there will be 100
left as the first generation. It is a startling problem in arithmetic
to figure out how many mosquitos a single summer would produce if
all survived. We see at once that it is not the ratio of increase that
is significant, but the ratio of net increase, which is a very different
thing. Out of the hosts of individuals born into existence only a
few survive each time, and a constant balance is maintained. When
this balance is disturbed, as in the case of the importation of rabbits
into Australia, we have a startling instance of the unchecked pro-
ductivity of Nature. The question now comes up,—‘‘Are those in-
dividuals that survive merely the lucky beneficiaries of chance and
has their selection been indiscriminate, or has there been some cri-
terion of selection, some standard attained, that Nature permits them
to survive and propagate their kind?” The Darwinians hold to the
latter view, and this second step in the hypothesis now demands ex-
amination.
Conceding this elimination to be an indisputable fact, what is
the basis for the postulated selection? We recognize that variation
is universal, but few except the naturalist have any idea how uni-
versal it is, how all-pervading, affecting not only form and structure,
color, etc., but habits and physiological traits, invisible, but very sig-
nificant withal. Another thing about these variations, which have
been called fortuitous or chance variations, to distinguish them from
other kinds, to be mentioned later, is the very important fact that
they are susceptible of mathematical treatment, 1. e., may be studied
quantitatively instead of qualitatively, which is a great advance. If
I shake the dice out of the box a thousand times, although I can
never predict just what any one throw will be, yet I can figure out
very exactly, by the Law of Chance, just how many of one combina-
tion will turn up out of the whole lot. In the same way the insur-
ance actuary, although he may not have any second sight as to when
I shall die, yet knows to a fraction just how many men of my age
out of every thousand are going to die during the next twelve
months. In the same way, although I cannot tell just how many
rays any one daisy may have, yet out of a thousand I can tell how
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 23
many will have 12 rays, how many 21, and how many 40. For we
have learned that the greater number of variants are found about
the middle dimension, the mean, and the farther away we get from
such a mean the fewer examples we find out of a thousand, so
that of the lowest and highest extreme there may be only one or
two. We may plot these dimensions in a curve, and when we do so
we find that the curve is of the class known to mathematicians as
the ‘“binominal curve.”
Now another aspect of existence claims attention. In spite of
this all pervading variability, men and dogs and oak trees are all
pretty much like other men, dogs and oaks. Particularly they are
much like their immediate ancestors,—a resemblance which we rec-
ognize by the term Heredity. Heredity and variation are but two
sides of the medal. Comparing an individual with its ancestor we
see that there are many points of similarity. These we class as
hereditary, the balance of dissimilarity we call variation. It must
be kept in mind that neither of these terms stand for concrete things,
but only for relations,—comparisons, as a matter of fact. In the
relative proportion of these two constituents,—the warp and woof
of the individual fabric.—there enters another and significant factor.
Ole Olson, here, resembles his mother so closely that any one’s
attention is attracted at once to the phenomenon. His brothers and
sisters are all apparently cast in the same mould. His uncles and
aunts bear a family resemblance, his great grandfather perhaps less
of a one, but altogether they class themselves first as Olesons, next
as Scandinavians, then as Europeans, then as Caucasians, then as
human beings. The native of Russia or of sunny Italy is also a
European and a Caucasian, although not even a child would think
of calling him a member of the Oleson family. Wu Ting Fang is a
human being as well, although no disguise could make one mistake
him for a European. It needs no argument to prove that the reason
the Olesons look alike is that they are of one family. The reason
they are unlike Caruso is that they are more remotely related, but
that both Oleson and Caruso look more alike than they resemble
Wu Ting Fang is but other evidence for what we know already,—
that they are related to each other much more closely than either
of them to the Mongolian. .In other words, individuals resemble
each other largely in direct proportion to the closeness of their re-
24 J. F. ABBOTT
lation,—a rule that works both ways, for, as we say, “like begets
like”.
Acting on this belief, Darwin claimed that since in the struggle
for existence the best adapted survive, and survive on account of
possessing, accidentally, as it were, certain favorable variations, thea
these very variations, like begetting like, would not only perpetuate
themselves, but would become intensified generation after genera-
tion. Now, not only the organic but also the inorganic universe is
in a constant state of flux. The “‘rock-ribbed hills” are as transitory
as the April snowflake in the eye of Him for whom time does not
exist. If the environment were constant it would not matter
whether a species varied or not. But with a changing environment,
the perpetuation of selected types, based on appropriately fayorable
variations, permits of a flexible adjustment of the specific type to
the new conditions; in other words, the formation of a new type
or species. This is the Origin of Species according to Darwin.
Let us, at the risk of being tedious, give a brief summary of
this train of thought.
Given, first, the fact, which is undeniable, that of every type
of animal or plant there are born into existence an infinitely greater
number than can possibly find food or room to exist in, and we
have as a corollary, that of this multitude, only a few can survive
to propagate the series—this is the famous “Struggle for Existence”.
Given, in the second place, the fact, now a thousandfold more
emphasized than in Darwin’s time, that every individual animal or
plant, and indeed every part of an individual, is subject to variation
within limits, so that there is never such a thing as a duplicate in
nature; combine this variation with the fact of heredity, which
implies that the progeny are, as a rule, more nearly like the parents
than they are like anything else, and we have a basis for elimina-
tion, 1. e., those individuals in the struggle for existence whose varia-
tions are such as to lend even a slight advantage in that struggle are
the ones who will survive and thus bring about the “Survival of the
Fittest.”
Given, in the third place, the survival of the fittest, and com-
bine with it a changing environment such that those characters, once
of advantage, become less advantageous than other characters pro-
duced by this same variation, and we have through the constant
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 25
elimination, in the never ceasing struggle for existence, the establish-
ment of a new type adapted in this way to the new environment,
but one adapted, remaining fixed and only subject to elimination in
conflict with other types better adapted.
Such in outline is the essence of Darwinism,—a mechanical
theory of the origin of species through the elimination of the unfit
and the survival of the fittest to propagate their kind. The words
“Natural Selection” were used by Darwin in the belief that es-
sentially the same process takes place in nature that the plant or ani-
mal breeder uses, in selecting for breeding those individuals that
conform to an ideal type.
The latter-day opponents of Darwinism may be divided into two
groups: those who deny in toto that there is such a thing as the nat-
ural selection to which I have referred; and those who, while ac-
cepting the existence of such a factor, yet deny its universal appli-
cation, and in particular deny its function in the formation of new
species, offering in its place substitutionary or emendatory theories.
The former are truly destructive critics to be refuted or accepted.
The others offer something else which must be considered. To the
former group belong such men as Dennert?, Fleischman?, Wolff’, and
Driesch. In the second group may be included De Vries‘, Delage’,
Eimer®, and Morgan’.
To use a rather trite comparison, the chain of steps involved
in the uprearing of a theory is no stronger than its weakest link.
Any one fact disproved, or any one deduction shown to be inconse-
quent, straightway reduces the theory builded on that fact or deduc-
tion to the rack of an unproved speculation.
For the opponents of the natural selection theory to show that
any fact of nature is inexplicable on the basis of that theory is to
shatter the whole hypothesis, since as a comprehensive explanation
of the method of evolution, Darwinism must be all or nothing.
That there are such inexplicable facts is believed by many biologists,
a. EF. Denuert, Vom Sterbelager des Darwinismus, 1903.
A. Fleischman, Die Descendenz-Theorie, 1901.
G. Wolff, Beitrage zur Kritik der Darwin’schen Lehre, 1898; Der Gegenwartige
des Darwinismus, 1896.
H. De Vries, Die Mutationslehre, 1901.
Y. Delage, L’Heredite, 1903.
Th. Eimer, Orthogenesis der Schmetterlinge, 1897.
T. H. Morgan, Evolution and Adaptation.
Stan
NAWNPRAwWNeE
26 J. F. ABBOTT
though it does not of necessity follow, as some have thought, that
because the all-sufficiency of the hypothesis may have been con-
troverted, its all-importance as a significant factor in the argument
can be left out of consideration.
Briefly summarizing the points that have been made against
the natural selection theory we may note, first, the insignificance of
fluctuating variations, such that they can have no possible selective
value. For example, Kellogg* mentions the fact that the white pelt
of polar bears is of very great aid in securing food, but that it is
almost impossible to conceive that the few white hairs on an orig-
inally darker ground could have had any selective value or could
have played any part in the struggle for existence between such a
bear and a normal one. Herbert Spencer® calls attention to the fact
that a certain Greenland right whale weighing about 44,800 pounds
had femurs weighing together three and a half ounces, “while a
sample of the razorback whale (Balonoptera musculus) 50 feet
long, and estimated to weigh 56,000 pounds, had rudimentary
femurs weighing together one ounce; so that these vanishing rem-
nants of hind-limbs weighed but one 896,oooth part of the animal.”
It is indeed questionable whether the advantage or disadvantage in
nourishment or weight accruing to the whale with the two-ounce
femur in comparison with one, let us say, with a four-ounce femur
would be significant in the struggle for existence. Yet according
to Darwin’s hypothesis, there would be no possible method for de-
veloping such a condition except through the elimination of indi-
viduals having a less well-adapted structure. This objection nat-
urally occurred to Darwin, but he believed that in the intense strug-
gle for existence even the minutest differences would be significant
in determining which should survive; and later biologists have
had their attention attracted to the fact of correlation in variation,
by virtue of which characters of no significance in themselves are
linked, as it were, with other characters which have selective value.
These characters might often be physiological and hence invisible,
but of none the less significance in the life and activities of the
creature possessing them.
A second point well made is the inutility of many specific char-
acters. For example, one of the largest groups of beetles, the
8. L. Kellogg, Darwinism To-day, 1907. ‘
9. A Rejoinder to Professor Weismann, Contemporary Review, Sept., 1893.
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 27
Carabidz, is divided into two special groups by the practically in-
variable character of the presence of two microscopic hairs over the
eye, or of only one such hair. The scientific imagination is em-
barassed in an attempt to read utility into any such character as
this. The same is true of many color markings, notably in those
molluscs whose beautiful color markings are covered by the mantle
and visible only when the animal is dead and the shell cleaned. The
answer made to this objection is that many characters now useless
have been useful at some earlier stage in phylogeny and have lost
their function through change of habit. The specious argument is
also often heard that it is not for mere man to decide what is useful
or not to an organism far removed from his own experience.
A third important point is found in the fact, easily demon-
strated, that according to Quatelet’s law, the extreme variants are
always fewest in number. These extreme variations would be the
ones of most value in selection, but it is hard to see how they could
help being swamped out in promiscuous mating and brought back
to average mediocrity, because of the fewness of their numbers,
since the chance of their mating together and thus perpetuating the
variation is infinitely smaller than that of losing the advantage by
mating with an individual without the variation.
Fourth, in the same connection, although Darwin’s hypothesis
is based entirely on chance variations, it is almost absurd to believe
that advantageous variations should occur in many individuals at
the same time; yet, to have any effect on the mass, this fortuitous
variation in a given direction is a necessity to assume. For ex-
ample, in bilaterally symmetrical animals it has been found that the
index of variability in the right and left sides is very often quite
different, yet the purely mechanical theory of natural selection is
asked to explain how, for example, two eyes that focus together
may arise in conformity with the law of chance. The pro-Darwin-
ians, who try to answer this objection at all, are obliged to call upon
some new supporting hypothesis, such as orthogenesis or directive
variation, which is a very different thing from Darwin’s fortuitous
variations.
Another very potent objection, raised long ago by Mivart, is
this: that many characters easily recognized to be very useful to
the individual and hence easily conceived to be the basis of selection
28 J. F. ABBOTT
on account of their usefulness, are so, however, only when they
have become perfected, and are of no use, and hence have no se-
lective value, in their incipient states. Many such examples occur
to anyone: the electric organ of the torpedo fish, for instance, or
the cameleon’s tongue, or, to use an even more vital illustration, one
to which Kellogg (1. c.) calls attention, that classic example of all
evolutionary writers, the mimicry of one insect species by another.
We have two kinds of resemblance that must be recalled, one, the
general resemblance by virtue of which an animal resembles its
whole environment, as a white fox on the snow, or a lizard on a
sand-bank ; and the specific resemblance which we call mimicry, in
which the animal, usually an edible insect, imitates another inedible
species in the finest details, and thus escapes destruction by its
natural foes. Think a moment and you will see that for such a
resemblance to have any influence in the struggle for existence it
must be all or nothing; an approximation would not be of any
value, yet by the Darwinian hypothesis such a final form must have
been reached by the gradual elimination of minute variations, each
of which would have selective value, so that in the end a typical
mimetic form would remain.
Perhaps the most vital objection of all is this: that fluctuating
variations, which are the only kind considered by Darwin, are
always confined to plus or minus changes in something already ex-
isting. Consequently the progress of such variations must always
be linear. They are quantitative, that is, and not qualitative. For
instance, an appendage may on the basis of such variations be-
come longer or shorter, heavier or lighter, but the appendage must
previously exist before it can vary in this way; fluctuating varia-
tions cannot explain the original appearance of the rudiment. Noth-
ing is more evident than that evolution is polygenetic and qualita-
tive, so that it would seem necessary, even if natural selection is the
basis for the development of new forms, that some supplementary
influence should intervene at the proper t'me to produce qualitative
differences for such variations to work on.
One other development of the study must be mentioned: it
has been established, first by Kropotkin and later by others, that the
struggle for existence about which so much has been said, while
real enough, no doubt, is not so universal as previously suggested.
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 29
First, the factor of what has been called ‘‘mutual aid” must be taken
into account, the development of the social instinct and the superior-
ity of a species,—say of bees,—in which a social organization is
perfected, over a species of solitary bees, such that advantages ac-
cruing through merely fluctuating variations of the individual would
be of very little significance in comparison with the advantage gain-
ed through co-operation. Second, it will be readily seen that the
competition, real as it is, between the hosts of individuals born into
the world is thoroughly over before sexual maturity, as for instance
in the May-flies, which spend a year or two as aquatic larve and
then emerge for a few brief hours of adult life as winged insects.
It will be readily seen that if adult characters are used as a basis for
selection, the “struggle for existence’ in this case, and the resultant
selection as individuals must have been over and done with before
metamorphosis, (omitting of course all reference to sexual selec-
tion). Third, among the lower forms, accident probably plays a
very much larger part in the elimination of individuals than com-
petition. To quote Kellogg?®: ‘‘What shall decide, when the big
whale opens his mouth in the midst of a shoal of myriads of tiny
Copepods floating in the pelagic waters of the Aleutian seas, what
Copepods shall disappear forever? Mainly, we may say, the chance
of position. A bit more or less of size, or strength, or redness, or
yellowness, or irritability, or what not, of form and function, is
going to avail little when the water rushes into the yawning throat.
Now this chance and this luck are the luck and chance of the law
of probabilities; that is, luck and chance capable of being math-
ematically determined. Given so much ocean, with so many whales
swimming about in such and such curves at such and such rates and
opening and closing their mouths intermittently at such and such:
intervals, and just so many shoals of so many million Copepods,
these shoals at such and such distances apart, and any mathematical
friend will reckon for you the chances any one Copepod individual
has at any given moment of being swallowed. But Darwinian varia-
tions in the Copepod body will be represented by no function in the
mathematician’s formula.’”’ And Wolff" has somewhat humorously
called attention to the fact that the fate of millions of tapeworms
10. Darwinism To-day.
11. G. Wolff, Beitrage zur Kritik der Darwin’schen Lehre.
30 J. F. ABBOTT
may hang on a speech made in the Reichstag concerning the in-
spection or limitation of the importation of meat.
You will have noted that all these objections are in the way of
destructive and academic criticsm, seem to be faultfinding, so to
speak; and it must be said that for most of the points mentioned, the
latter-day exponents of “Darwinismus” have a more or less appro-
priate reply. Experimental Biology, however, has made certain
contributions to the subject that force a re-statement of the original
Darwinian position and in the minds of many compel an abandon-
ment of the selection hypothesis as an explanation of the Method
of Evolution. Chief among these have been the results of animal
and plant breeding. Beginning with Galton and continued by
others, the principle of regression has been emphasized. That is,
not even by artificial selection can the type be indefinitely moved
from its center of stability.
Within the past few years Johannsen’? has conducted extensive
experiments in breeding beans, and Jennings'® in rearing Parame-
cium, one of the one-celled microscopic organisms commonly found
in stagnant water. The advantage of both of these types is that in
the care of the beans the flowers may be self-fertilized, and in the
case of the Paramecium reproduction occurs by direct fission of the
parent organism into two. In both cases the progeny of any one
individual may be kept separate without the introduction of un-
known factors through the cross fertilization or mixing of two
strains, necessary with most animals and plants. Both these ob-
servers found that the progeny of each individual showed a range
of variation, which could be plotted in a curve, but that selection
from this lot did not alter the curve, i. e., it was impossible to vary
the type by selection, for the reason that by something intrinsic in
the nature of the race it regressed or reverted to the norm of its
derivitive. The progeny of each individual differs from another,
and these have been called genotypes or pure lines. The species
itself has been made up of numerous genotypes of this kind, which
by constant crossing or hybridizing one with another have produced
an apparently greater range of variation for the whole group (the
phenotype). Now, it is apparent that selection (natural or arti-
12. Johannsen, W. ‘Uber Erblichkeit in Populationen und in Reinem Linien,” 1903.
13. Jennings, H. S. American Naturalist 1909, v. 43, 321 and elsewhere.
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 31
ficial) from the mass of the race can do nothing more than isolate
individual pure lines, which are in themselves capable of varying
only within narrow limits, and hence incapable of providing that
adjustment to a changing environment which brings about the
formation of a new species. This is, after all, merely the experi-
mental proof of the conclusion previously reached on a priori
grounds, that selection cannot create, but can only modify.
Secondly, whenever a biologist has had an opportunity to study
a large series of forms, particularly wherever the rocks have af-
forded the past history of some one type, like that of the Am-
monites, it has been evident that variation as expressed in the suc-
cession of forms in time has not been haphazard—now in this di-
rection, now that—but has steadily followed a line of progress. It
has, in other words, been directive or Orthogenetic variation, and
whatever the nature of the internal perfecting principle at the bot-
tom of it (about which we know nothing at all), it is certain that in
these cases the mechanical explanation of Darwin is too easy, too
naive, and does not accord with the facts.
In the third place, Tower has shown in experiments on potato
beetles that various sorts of bizarre types, apparently permanent in
their heredity, may be produced by the direct action of environ-
mental stimuli, provided the environmental stimulus be applied at
a time when the germ cells are maturing and when apparently the
germ plasm is relatively unstable. The direct action of the envi-
ronment in producing new types must be denied, by hypothesis, by
thorough-going Darwinians, altho conceded by the Lamarckians.
For all of these phenomena, fundamental and unsettling as they
are, we have not a glimmer of understanding or of explanation.
Whither, then, shall we head our bark, we who have held so long
to the star of Natural Selection? Shall we drift idly on the sea of
speculation, or shall we stop rowing? As this is a college rather
than a nautical audience, let me vary the figure. Those of you who
have watched a foot ball game may often have seen times when the
ball was being steadily and uninterruptedly advanced down the
field; then all at once there would be a fumble and the ball would
be lost. In the scramble no one seemed to know where it was, under
the mass of men. When this happens it isn’t customary, however,
for the players to retire to the side lines and declare the game off.
32 J. F. ABBOTT
Neither do they start all over again. But the referee marks the
spot and all line up for a fresh scrimmage.
In attempting to solve the riddle of Evolution, biologists may
perhaps have temporarily lost the ball, but they have, by no means,
lost the game.
To come again to plain statements, the recent pamphleteers
who seem to think that there is no alternative between Darwinism
and Genesis't may well be counselled to read some of the contribu-
tions to evolutionary literature of the past twenty years in order
to properly ballast their zeal with facts. These contributions may
safely be said to have had no influence whatever in crumbling the
foundations of Darwinism. The real attack has come from within
and only from those with eyes “single to the truth” like Darwin
himself, and who follow the truth as they find it, no matter where
it lead them.
A couple of years ago the scientific men of all nations and
classes gathered together to celebrate the semi-centennial of the
publication of a book, and wherever groups of any size could as-
semble symposia were held, in which the influence of that book was
discussed, the author’s views analyzed and compared with present
day opinions on the same subjects. Some of the criticisms were
laudatory, some were adverse. Well known men, in discussing the
same point, frequently took opposite sides, but it never occurred
to any one to question the preeminence of that book as a landmark
of intellectual’progress, something to measure by and to date from.
The book was Darwin’s “Origin of Species”, and it was not without
significance that biologists should estimate its worth in such fashion,
for it has been my personal experience that outside the ranks of
professional scientists, a goodly number of those who unhesitatingly
endorse the “Origin of Species” and the doctrines that it stands for,
would be quite unable to say whether the work was written in prose
or in blank verse.
In conclusion, let me quote Huxley, from an address written in
1880: “History warns us that it is the customary fate of new
truths to begin as heresies and to end as superstit‘ons; and, as
matters now stand, it is hardly rash to anticipate that in another
twenty years the new generation, educated under the influences of
14. Wolff refers to ‘‘the episode of Darwinism” and suggests that our attitude toward
him should be “‘as if he had never existed.”” (Quoted by Kellogg.)
PROGRESS IN EVOLUTIONARY THOUGHT 33
the present day, will be in danger of accepting the main doctrines
of the Origin of Species with as little reflection as so many of our
contemporaries twenty years ago rejected them. Against any such
consummation let us all devoutly pray; for the scientific spirit is
of more value than its products, and irrationally held truths may be
more harmful than reasoned errors. Now the essence of the sci-
entific spirit is criticism. It tells us that whenever a doctrine claims
our assent we should reply, “Take it if you can compel it.’ The
struggle for existence holds as much in the intellectual as in the
spiritual world. A theory is a species of thinking and its right to
exist 1s co-extensive with its power of resisting extinction by its
rivals.”
Honest Biologists will tell you today that Darwin’s hypothesis
has proved inadequate to explain all the phenomena that must be
explained if it be a universal key to the riddle of evolutionary
progress. But that it does explain much that is otherwise inexpli-
cable no one can deny. That it is the most useful tool fashioned by
the intellect of man since Lavoisier’s generalization of the Conserva-
tion of Matter or Newton’s “Law” no one will deny either. And if
in the progress of knowledge we finally outgrow its use altogether,
yet Darwin will continue to stand for all time, second to none among
those whose labors have helped to free man from the shackles of
superstition and helped him toward that larger freedom of thought
which we like to think makes for man’s greater happiness and bet-
terment.
NOTE: In addition to the references mentioned in footnotes, the fol-
lowing works are valuable in getting a viewpoint with respect to the modern
critical attitude toward the Selection Theory.
Hesse, R.
“Abstammungslehre und Darwinismus.” Leipsig, 1908. (Popular ex-
position, pro and con).
Eorsy, P:
“Vorlesungen irbe Deszendenz Theorie.” I and II Teile (pro-Darwinian).
Poutton, E. B.
1908. “Essays on Evolution.” Oxford, (pro-Darwinian).
1909. “Darwin and Modern Science”. 29 essays by specialists in com-
memoration of the centenary of Darwin’s birth. Cambridge.
1909. “Fifty years of Darwin.” Centennial addresses (referred to
above). Holt, N. Y.
Rant, E.
“Geschichte der Biologischen Theorien.” II Teil (anti-Darwinian).
cin
oy "we =
. the SDA Lea bet)
Nite , 0 ie 5) Hi Hite al tl Nat Va ei
a id ny res) SHIH tenon mh
sie ae alta diiabeinss 1h Agents Ny ad
Me ah yas ksh ge dy ene ae
We Oy Te ae spared yh sets efhogr aD
MOT ae ad ae Via ey Whee |» Teka Abi gly eee may
iy AN Ny al) Hime ibe ca biginedty v0 Lay ye ae nh napa hi
AeOW WEE VQ Te Ad i righ WEA? ASW SED, Lesetahtr Hitt. MiNi a
Coe intily, SA URI, Mh NRHP TM tet beh ab itl th ha Wi ib
Gist net ne | vin Maye BAe 4 Ms MANLY Tas tardies am i A ”
barn UMAR DCU uh ee ay | et ts east aa at mit, i
it Lest aS SHA) |, ail a eh 1a OER A Piet Miap A je ;
i
A 4,
Las mee POEs Le aa Ske | ih ei a ee
wl ; A dl : } Pb teeth
Vi} Lm BM ty ee: metity ipith ie five ifn Hive oh Eyal Yan
ey 0m Ler, es te eR Me ‘bake neti), ) een fal
} hs chal Va pth wee eb: ete eR en OPED eh
va eh ne Me De
Ree Uo one eo nF a ea Hing AOR
“i . ; Td baka ea He! my) te a eee | ee rie a AM an ‘
f ' NDB pepe ys ol Hey, Wine’, oe (iy eh eG ee a ne a “ed
| Pe ee ae wo RES
An eh wets) Rie He So dara, wih wane tt © ee a
| * Te aL Le eR ee eae me ee AS
iy a Ce, ee | ny
Le PRA PAR TN Bo NS Lae NE Be EY eg GPE sane Sd Mh yi ie f.
thas! as Ay a x . Upits ae tal ne
ive te Fei ES AR BONG 1): anon rn + ewe Oe mi aya ay
hiegs Tay hi ai Wii» Wie Pj! BA). , Parte diay an ie
D G iba boat atl WA? pies a
pi : bitin Pu : er | ha) , ; , a ‘
} , ey Mapa | vf hs mil yy AWD Te Ph ae | erent gut Myla im
a5 tale f a ree ; 1 iy 10 Oe Ae oe ne #3! ;
ar in ‘| 2 bis Fa ; i rou e) : pix C1, See al
AY ied Way eee Le ee a Ut! Mai
. ? q tl ae
y a f pir } idl y me
®) Abie Hal b rtp 7 tine Yt he Ae y babe Wt
pir a ete Ha ae gy al en ial AY) eke mf
ofA OR AG EDR ipa op bak ain Mahaney vain he, Al 40 ae
ay “s
ky Wy Pa
Pe ea ROT lk LL NC APY as it K
; had wi ei i
, Le i ; al t w by) i) \nbpe 4 cai wet a ,
; | | Ay raelbnes AIR RY Sith ea baat hy Paha be
» i ’ % 7 ib ‘ ii
Z
i a. i
& j j ‘
uA Oy Ay ih! Ca Wied
: i) ¢ PL
i
Reve i
DEPARTMENT OF NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
It is the purpose, in this department, to present from time to time brief original
notes, both of methods of work and of results, by members of the Society. All members
are invited to submit such items. In the absence of these there will be given a few brief
abstracts of recent work of more general interest to students and teachers. There will be
no attempt to make these abstracts exhaustive. They will illustrate progress without at-
tempting to define it, and will thus give to the teacher current illustrations, and to the
isolated student suggestions of suitable fields of investigation.—{[Editor.]
ON THE ONTOGENY OF CERTAIN INTERESTING INSECT STRUCTURES.
The young student of microscopy who studies carefully the
chitinous structures of various Arthropoda will find many most
interesting and peculiar formations. These are well worth an effort
to understand.
Chitin, in a state of purity, is a white amorphous substance, and
is excreted by the cells of the epidermis. It is secreted in a semi-
fluid form and hardens rapidly on exposure to the air. Chemically,
it is supposed to be expressed by the formula C,,H,,NO,,. The
chitin is manufactured in the cytoplasm of the cell, probably by
specialized plastids analogous to the chloroplasts of plants.
In most cases it is produced in rows or strands of small part-
icles, which are extruded thru the wall of the cell; and upon hard-
ening it forms an encasing mold of the surface on which it hardens.
The extrusion of these cell products in vesicular shaped cell
membranes forms the various kinds of scales found on insects,—
the strings of particles forming the striations which give these scales
their refractive properties.
Thus a single cell may produce branched or plumed scales,
or spines of various shapes; and even spines or scales with a sensory
function. In this latter instance the cell retains its living contents
during adult life.
The cross-section of the chitinous foot-pad on the foot of a
grasshopper, as shown in Fig. 1 (Plate V), furnishes us with a very
36 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
complex series of ontogenetic changes in the cells of the chitin
organ.
Fig. 2. Diagrammatic sketch of one
of the units in the chitinous pad of the
grasshopper’s foot. The letters correspond
in significance with those of Fig. 1.
Originally the cells of the hypodermis (epidermis) were situat-
ed on the exterior, as at the point marked A. They were then true
epidermis spine cells, each cell being an irregular hexagon and hav-
ing for its sagitlal outline the form of a short spine with a toothed
margin.
The chitin-organ cells (F) then began their excretion of chitin
which gradually hardened on exposure to the air. This stage was
continued until the section marked B was completed,—the spine
cells still being hexagonal, with an opening at each corner of the
hexagon.
At the end of the period in which B is formed, a radical change
occurs: the six channels at the points of the hexagonal cells now
coalesce into a single channel (C) which persists thru a long period
of secretion, until the point marked D is reached. At this time
another radical change in the process takes place. The secreting cells
(F) become entirely detached from the chitinous pad (A-B-C-D),
and form a convoluted gland surface which pours its secretion into
the space which is formed at E.
Fig. 1. Photograph of the footpad of the grasshopper.
x
<
IG:
a
Fig. 3. Photograph of a section of the tongue of Horse-fly, showing the pseudo-
tracheal grooves.
Plate V
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 37
It is presumed that during life the channels (E) remain open,
and convey gland products from E to the exterior thru the hexagonal
interstices.
The adhesive otgan on the pulvillus of a fly’s foot is similar
in origin to this pad of the grasshopper, with the exception that
the serrations on the original epidermal cells (A) are prolonged in
minute hairs, many to the cell—which hairs have a small cup on
the end into which the adhesive fluid is exuded.
The pulvillus of the fly’s foot is homologous with the foot-pad
of the grasshopper,—only in the fly the pad has become pendant and
has moved outward until it lies side by side with the terminal pair
of pads, which have been metamorphosed into claws for grasping
purposes.
The pseudo-tracheal tubes from the tongue of the horse-fly
(Tabanide), shown in Fig. 3 (Plate II), are another very compli-
cated form of chitin cell formation. They represent both phyloge-
netic and ontogenetic changes.
The appendages of the insect head are now quite generally con-
sidered to be metamorphosed legs, of which each segment of the
body originally bore a pair. Under this description and with this
homology, would be included the so-called “tongue” of insects.
Fig. 4. Diagram of the cells of the hypodermis of the “tongue” of the Horse-fly,
suggesting the ontogenetic origin of the pseudo-trachea.
The two legs from which the tongue is formed were evidently
covered with a hypodermal layer of cells, each cell of which bears
several spines, much perhaps as on the other side of the leg (at
Pe Sifie: 3).
At first the hypodermal layer of cells is flat, with cells of many
spines, as at A, Fig. 4. Later it forms a series of parallel invagina-
tions or furrows into which are turned the spines with their bases
projecting outward,—which bases form the peculiar shoulder at the
edge of the furrow. These spines lie in the furrow alternately, as
at B, Fig. 4, first from one side of the furrow and then from the
other.
38 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
As the chitin deposit thickens, the hypodermal gland cells come
to lie more and more removed from their original position and form,
as at C, Fig. 4, until finally when the structure is finished, as in D,
there is no further connection between the cells and their finished
skeletal product.
These false tracheal tubes serve for sucking fluids up into a
central channel formed between the pair of legs which conveys
fluid to the mouth. This lobe of the tongue seems homologous with
the foot-pads on the other legs and is probably a compound of
several pads, very much modified in function.
In many kinds of flies the space between the furrows is cov-
ered with spines, many of which are sensory in function. In some
flies the furrows appear to be closed tubes, which bear a striking
appearance and much resemble true tracheal tubes. It is only by
knowing the ontogeny of these structures that one can judge cor-
rectly of their nature.
The microtome work, on which these photographs and studies
are based, was done by the late Dr. G. S. Shanks.
E. W. Roserts, Battle Creek, Mich.
AN IMPROVED REAGENT STAND.
All users of Bausch & Lomb’s reagent stand No. 16342 have
no doubt found it one of the best devices for the purpose to be
obtained. Some of them, like the writer, may have seen times when
it would have been an improvement if the reagent bottles were on a
revolving base so that by a slight touch the desired bottle could be
brought nearest the operator.
The writer obtained the above result so easily and at such
small expense that the following cut and description of the modified
reagent stand is submitted, hoping it may prove of interest to
others.
Referring to the following cut showing a cross section of the
stand: The base, in order to reduce the weight, was recessed 5%
inches diameter to a depth % inch below the bottom of the recess
which received the bell-glass cover.
In order to get the revolving feature, an ordinary ball bearing
furniture caster was used by removing the truck and securing the
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 39
remainder to a wooden plug one and one-quarter inches diameter
inserted into the center of the base of the stand as shown.
gee!
( Soe
d
To the top surface of the caster was secured a piece of well
seasoned wood (Turntable) turned 5% inches diameter and 1%
inches thick, the bottom side being recessed %4 inch deep to receive
the top of the caster, and the top surface recessed with holes of prop-
er diameter and depth to receive the balsam bottle and the seven
reagent bottles.
Geo. H. Marr, Waterville, Me.
SEND IN YOUR NOTES.
Send in notes of your most successful methods and practise in collecting, cultivating,
breeding, and preserving microscopic animals and plants; your best methods of pre-
paring and displaying some difficult or unusual type; specially effective methods of class
demonstration; striking pedagogical devices liable to make microscopic work more valuable
to students. Indeed, send any unpublished notes of your discoveries which have added
zest or efficiency to your own work. (Ed.)
4O NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
OBSERVATIONS ON PLASMODIUM OF MYXOMYCETES.
Jahn (Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell, 1911) reports studies on the
Myxomycetes, such as Stemonitis, Trichia, and Physarum. (1)
Plasmodia may be observed in formation by drying out the ciliated
spore stage, thus forcing them to become encysted. On wetting,
these divide. The process may be repeated several times. (2)
Certain of the ameboid cells initiate the plasmodium formation, and
may devour other surrounding amebe. (3) Nuclear divisions en-
sue, the rate of division among them remaining quite uniform, as
the number of nuclei is normally even. (4) Ameboid copulation
and nuclear union were seen. (5) The plasmodia nuclei possess
the 2x number of chromosomes as against the x number in the
ameba nuclei. (6) The reduction division is the one immediately
preceding the spore formation.
ANIMAL TUMORS AND “CROWN GALL” IN PLANTS.
Dr. Erwin F. Smith in his presidential address before the
Botanical Society of America at Washington (also in Circular 85,
U. S. Bur. Plant Ind., and in Science Feb. 2, 1912) emphasizes cer-
tain most interesting and suggestive resemblances between “‘crown-
gall’ in plants and malignant animal tumors. He succeeds in show-
ing that the similarities are not merely superficial and incidental
ones. He finds that they agree (1) in being non-granulomatous ;
(2) in that cells of the arganism become a disturbing force, multiply-
ing without reference to the pAysiological needs of the region; (3)
in the general structure of the primary tumor; (4) in the production
from these of secondary tumors; (5) in the actual connection by
strands of invading tumor cells of the primary tumor with its deriva-
tive secondary tumors; (6) in that the form of structure of the
secondary tumor tends to be that of the organ in which the primary
tumor is found rather than of the organ in which the secondary
tumor itself occurs; (7) complete recovery if all the tumor tissue is
removed, otherwise growth may continue.
Dr. Smith finds that the crown-gall is accompanied, and caused,
by a micro-organism (Bacterium tumefaciens) and that it may
readily be transferred to healthy plants by innoculation. He also
found evidences that this organism produces in fish ulcerous growths
similar to animal sarcoma.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 41
ARTIFICIALLY INDUCED SEGMENTATION OF EGGS OF TOAD.
Bataillon (various papers in Comptes Rendu 1911) has pro-
duced segmentation of the eggs of the toad without the male cells.
The method involves bathing the eggs in blood, and in puncturing the
egg with a needle. He holds that the mere puncture will not serve,
but that some foreign body must find its way into the wound.
Blood of fish or frog or toad; or the sperms, extract of the spleen
or testis will serve to stimulate the nuclear action.
HETEROCHROMOSOMES IN PLANTS.
Tahara (Bot. Mag. Tokyo, 1910) has discovered in Morus
indica, the wild mulberry, a differentiation among the chromosomes
comparable to that earlier discovered among animals. During the
early prophase stages in nuclei of the sporophyte, and still more
noticeably as the chromosomes enter the equatorial plate, two pairs
of the chromosomes are larger than the others. In the spore mother
cells (X-generation) there are 14 chromosomes (bivalent), one pair
of which shows larger than the rest. This paper opens up a most
interesting field for the students of plant cytology, considering the
important place which the heterochromosome has in the theory of
zoology.
A similar phenomenon is reported by Ishikawa (same journal)
for Ginkgo biloba. :
ANOTHER STEP IN THE STUDY OF CELLS IN VITRO.
Lambert and Harns (J. Exp. Med. Nov. 1911) call attention
to the advantage of the im vitro method in studying the exact ef-
fects of specific cyto-toxins as compared with the complex body
conditions. They note the following results: (1) Mouse sarcoma,
growing vigorously in plasma of normal rats, is unable to grow in
plasma immunized by mouse sarcoma injections; (2) rat sarcoma,
which is readily cultivated in normal guinea pigs, will not grow in
plasma of guinea pigs which have been previously treated with the
rat tissue. He believes that the reason for these failures to grow
is the presence of cytotoxins which have developed in these alien
plasmas.
42 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
POLYMORPHISM IN ALGAE.
In Proc. Linn. Soc. N. So. Wales (1910), G. I. Playfair re-
ports a piece of work on Desmids, which needs to be done, and might
be undertaken profitably even by isolated students, for other groups
of alge also. It requires careful observation over long periods
of time. He discovers great polymorphism among the Desmids, as
among other algze: and believes that only about 10 per cent of the
species are valid, the other 90 per cent being polymorphic forms of
them. The degree of polymorphism and the environmental factors
influencing it both need to be studied for numerous alge.
DISINTEGRATION OF MICRO-ORGANISMS.
J. E. Barnard (Jour. R. M. S. Oct. 1911) describes a mechan-
ical method for disintegrating organic cells and obtaining the proto-
plasmic contents by rupturing the cell walls. This is done by grind-
ing in a metal vessel, by means of rotating balls pressing against
the surface of the vessel. Construction is such as to minimize fric-
tion with its resulting heat and disintegration of the metal. No
abrasive material is used. The object of the apparatus is to get
bacterial proteins or other cell constituents, especially the toxins in
the case of those bacteria that retain their toxins in large degree
within the cells.
REGENERATION OF BLOOD PLATELETS IN DOGS.
Dake (Jour. Exp. Med. Sept. 1911) gives the following results
of a series of experiments: (1) Repeated withdrawal, defibrina-
tion, and reinjection of blood in dogs reduces the platelets to a very
low percentage of their normal number; (2) at such times there is
a tendency to bleed profusely; (3) platelets regenerate very rapid-
ly,—about 1-5 of the total in 24 hours. From these results he be-
lieves that the platelets are normally produced rapidly, utilized or
disintegrated rapidly, and have a brief life-history.
WHITE CORPUSCLES AND DUCTLESS GLANDS IN TOAD.
H. Mietens (Jena. Zeitschr., 1910) finds that the white blood
corpuscles arise, in the embryo of the common toad, (1) from
unspecialized blood cells which may also give rise to the colored
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 43
cells; (2) from mesenchyme cells; and (3) from endocardial cells
that become ‘freed. In the adult, both white and red cells may
arise in the mesenchyme of the liver. According to this writer some
of the ductless glands, as thymus and spleen, arise from the entrance
and multiplication of migratory cells within the sheaths of certain
biood vessels.
THE ADULT OF THE PEARL-PRODUCING PARASITE OF THE OYSTER.
T. Southwell (Ceylon Marine Biological Reports V:1911) be-
lieves that he has demonstrated the probability that the adult of the
worm, which in the larval stage stimulates the formation of the
pearl in the oyster, is Tetrarhynchus unionifactor and may occur in
the Elasmobranchs that feed upon oysters. The adult worm was
found in specimens of fish which had been kept in an enclosure and
fed on infected oysters,—whereas similar fish not so fed were
destitute of them.
EFFECT OF TESTIS EXTRACT ON FEMALES,
Since the discovery of the role of hormones in the blood and of
the influence of the products of sex glands on the development of
the secondary sex characters in males, efforts have been made to
determine to what extent male characters can be induced in females
thru the influence of male hormones.
Geoffrey Smith (Q. T. M. S. 1911) fails to find any evidence
that the internal secretions of the testis of the cock, when injected
into the female, tends to produce the secondary sexual characters
of the male.
SEXUALITY IN SPORES OF MOSSES.
Marchal (Bull. Soc. Roy, Bot. Belg. 1911) says that a dicecious
moss (e. g. Brgyum caespiticium), is really heterosporous, and that
half the spores produce protonemata from which male, and half
from which female, gametophytes arise exclusively. He claims that
this dicecism begins in the tetrad,—two spores from each tetrad
producing male, and two female, gametophtes. This suggests the
Mendelian segregation of sex characters.
44 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
LONGEVITY OF BACTERIA IN THE PRESENCE OF LACTIC ACID.
Darbois (C. R. Soc. Biol. 1910) finds that Micrococcus
Melitensis, which is not a particularly hardy species, survives ex-
posure to a lactic ferment in milk as much as 18 days. This suggests
that contaminated milk may thus carry infection in products made
from it for considerable periods.
CROSSING IN SPIROGYRA.
Andrews (Bull. Tor. Bot. Club, 1911) notes the discovery of
conjugation of Spirogyra crassa and Spirogyra communis. Re-
ciprocal crosses were found, tho usually the protoplasm of S.
communis moved over into S. crassa. It is to be hoped that there
may be later studies of the hybrids after the germination of the
zygopores, which are said to be normal in appearance.
A RED EUGLENA.
Hardy (Victorian Nat., 1911) describes a new Euglena, which
he calls E. rubra, from near Melbourne, Victoria. It occurs in the
same locality with E. viridis. The author gives a full account of its
structure, habits, and divergence from E. wiridis.
EFFECT OF X-RAYS ON SEX CELLS.
Nogier and Regand (Compt. Rendu. Soc. Biol., 1911) report
that complete castration and destruction of semen-producing cells in
adult cats and dogs is possible, without injury to intermediate tis-
sues, by means of X-rays.
METHODS OF WORK FOR MICROSCOPISTS.
It is desired that this department shall become of real value to the members. To
this end the readers are urged to send in brief, yet clear and complete, accounts of suc-
cessful devices or methods in connection with any department of microscopy. Quite a
number of members have expressed a wish for some such clearing house of practical sug-
gestions for the use of student and teacher. (Ed.)
CLEARING LARGE OBJECTS.
O. Schultze recommends the following clearing process to pre-
pare for the examination of somewhat pigmented, or otherwise
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 45
opaque, objects in toto. It will clear such objects as tadpoles, worms,
etc., so that the internal organs may be studied. Use:—
E perieent Chronvomeid) 1). 0.0.2. 3 BO! Cc: ic:
Paarradewaianeiler meets ehh sia ie oe BC. €;
TESOL) OUI Ba De cs Ne 10 drops
This fixes, depigments, and clears.
SEXUAL FUSIONS IN YEAST.
A. Guilliermond (Compt. Rendu, 1911) has observed fusion of
yeast cells preliminary to the formation of ascospores. He believes
that he has established that the common parthenogenetic formation
of asci marks a retrogression from the copulating condition, such
as is well known in species of Saprolegnia.
PHOTO-MICROGRAPHY.
In a little hand-book entitled ‘““Elementary Photo-Micrography”
Mr. Walter Bagshaw undertakes to make easy, or at least pleasant
and hopeful, the way of the beginner who cannot take the time,
nor undergo the expense, necessary to operate an elaborate and
costly apparatus. The chief excellence of the book consists in its
simple direct style; in its avoidance of unnecessary technical de-
tails, however interesting; in its common-sense appliances and de-
vices. By means of the book any worker with the microscope, who
has knowledge of photography, will be able at once to combine the
two knowledges in such a way as to make a permanent record of
the things that interest him.
The various chapters deal with such subjects as these: How to
make a simple microscopic outfit; Photo-Micrography without a mi-
croscope; Illumination; Focussing, Measuring amplification; Ex-
posure; Requisites for development—and rules for developing, fix-
ing, clearing, intensification, reduction, printing, etc.; Lantern slide
making. There are also appendices containing information useful
to the operator.
Elementary Photo-Micrography, by Walter Bagshaw, with 103 pages and _illustra-
tions. Second Edition. 2/6 net. Iliffe & Sons, Lim., London.
46 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
CENTENARY OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES.
The Society has received an invitation to be represented at the
celebration of the centenary anniversary of the founding of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, on March nineteenth
to twenty-first next. Mr. Edward Pennock, second vice-president of
the American Microscopical Society, and Dr. H. L. Shantz, of
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C., have been named as
delegates representing this society.
A NEW ROTARY MICROTOME.,
The Spencer Lens Company have recently came out with a new
rotary microtome which obviates the difficulties inherent in the old
rotary microtomes, and provides for cutting sections of uniform
and even thickness with the same accuracy and delicacy that have
heretofore been obtained only on the best sliding microtomes. Any
person interested in such a microtome would do well to write the
Spencer Lens Co. for circular describing this instrument.
AN EARLY LETTER OF R. B. TOLLES.
In the light of the recent action of the Executive Committee of
the American Microscopical Society to retain the administration of
the Spencer-Tolles memorial fund within the Society and to begin
using the income of the fund as soon as practicable as a memorial,
the following letter, written by Mr. Tolles when he was twenty
years of age, will prove interesting. It is furnished by the wife of
the late Charles X. Dalton.
Canastota, June 30, ’44.
My Dear Grandfather :
I handed a letter to Father while he was here to yourself, stating that
I hoped to be in Conn. by this present time. You may not yet have received
that letter; I now write for that reason and because I do not incur the
expense of postage. Father then (when here) intended to be in Conn.
soon to see you and hand you the letter. I imagine he has not gone as yet.
I had every reason to suppose when I borrowed the money of you last
fall that I should be able to return it by the last spring past. The reason that
I was and am not at present is, that I have not rec’d one half of my wages
(at $2 per week, and board and clothes out of that). The arrangement I
made with Mr. Spemcer was that there should be no stated times of pay-
ments, but rather at his convenience, as his orders are large and time inter-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY — 47
venes between them. But I did not suppose it would be so inconveniently
that way, as in fact. However, it will be right at the end of the year, next
Oct., and I do not suppose it likely that I will be able to pay the $10 before;
but then it shall come with interest. The most unpleasant part of the matter
is that I am not able to do anything for my sisters, but I shall do more after
the time mentioned. I am in a situation to learn a good deal that will be
profitable to me hereafter, in a dollar and cents view, too, and therefore I
take up with a good deal of inconvenience and some chagrin, which is better
by the way, than with a tinsel character to be an adventurer upon the world;
for it ends well.
We have been making Daguerreotype Instruments for taking portraits. I
am now making myself one. I may have such word from New York as to
enable me to take it east and finally sell it in N. Y. or otherwheres. I sup-
pose we make better instruments of this kind than are made otherwheres.
This of mine will be worth $15 to $25. I have thought some of going abroad
and taking portraits myself, but that is somewhat slow. I wish much to see
you and more especially to hear from you by letter that you enjoy health, etc.
Your affectionate Grandson,
R. B. Totes.
Father expects to make sale of an improvement on the Rail Road Cos.
for the prevention of accidents from the “Snake heads” as they call them (a
loosend rail bent up at the end, a frequent thing). Mr. Spencer, my em-
ployer, has taken the negotiations into his hands, and it is quite probable that
it may result favorably. R. B. T.
A NEW MEDIUM FOR DARK-FIELD OBSERVATION— ‘THE LEITZ CONCEN-
TRIC REFLECTING CONDENSER.”
This improved Reflecting Condenser, the invention of Dr. Felix
Jentzsch,* of the scientific department of E. Leitz, Wetzlar, is
adapted for observation under dark-ground illumination, and more
especially for bringing into view living and unstained bacteria.
Every Microscopist familiar with the darkground illuminating
apparatus has certainly realized the importance of such an instru-
ment, and it undoubtedly will interest him to learn that E. Leitz
has now introduced a new type of Darkfield Condenser, the so-
called ‘‘Concentric Reflecting Condenser.”
The object of this method is to establish an extremely vivid
contrast between the intensely illuminated bacteria and the dark
back-ground. To obtain such a dark back-ground it is essential
*Physikalische Zeitschrift, Vol. 11, pp. 993-1000, 1910, and Verhandlungen der
deutschen Physikalischen Gesellschaft, Vol. i2, pp. 975-991, 1910. Paper read on the
22 Sept., 1910, before the 82nd German Congress of Science and Medicine at Konigsberg.
48 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
that none of the rays which go to illuminate the object should pass
directly into the objective, and to secure an intense illumination of
the object it is necessary to employ a very powerful source of light
and to form a perfectly defined image of the radiant within the
preparation itself.
Both requirements are satisfied by the presence of two reflect-
ing surfaces, one convex, the other concave, both being arranged as
indicated in Fig. 1. Since the rays are brought to a focus by reflec-
tion only, whilst refraction does not enter into the process, there
is no chromatic dispersion. The spherical aberration, on the other
hand, is reduced to an insignificant amount and does not within the
entire zone which enters into consideration exceed 0.7 per mile or
0.0007 of the focal length of the system, i. e., in the condenser as
actually made the whole of the rays which enter the condenser in
a direction parallel to the axis are brought to a focus accurately
within 2.3 micron. This entitles the Concentric Condenser to be
looked upon as the most perfectly corrected optical combination
which is in existence at the present time, and it represents the closest
approach to an ideally perfect aplanatic system which has yet been
produced.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 49
This interesting result has been accomplished by the use of
concentric zones of spheres, the radii of which are in the ratio of
1:226. From Fig. 2, which reproduces a photo-micrograph ob-
tained with the aid of fluorescent uranium glass, it will be seen how
very nearly the actual path of the rays conform to the theoretical
conditions.
The close approach to mathematical precision with which the
rays are brought to a focus renders it very essential that the con-
denser should be accurately centered and carefully focussed. The
optical system is accordingly mounted in a cell which may be slipped
into the substage collar of the microscope stand, in the place of the
ordinary condenser: it has, however, in addition a special center-
ing device within the cell. To obtain an accurate focus the object
slide should have a definite thickness, up to 1 mm. The condenser
is focussed with the aid of the rack and pinion of the substage.
A NEW MICROSCOPIC ALGA FOR AMERICA.
E. N. Transeau (Trans. Ill. Acad. Sci. 1911) reports the find-
ing of the rare alga, Gloeotaenium, in Illinois. As found the alga
appears in 2- or 4-celled families, and is a striking microscopic
type. Its occurrence is remarkably limited, being found only in an
area of about two square meters in the corner of a small artificial
pond formed by excavating clay in a tile-yard. Before this it has
been found only in Trinidad in the Western hemisphere.
SEASONAL SUCCESSION AMONG POND ANIMALS.
W. C. Allee (Trans. Ill. Acad. Sci. 1911) reports a piece of
work the like of which should be done with care in many parts of
the country. He has made a study of the seasonal succession of
animals in old forest ponds at the south end of Lake Michigan.
Such a study demands regular collections of materials during the
year; a record of all observable physical conditions, as tempera-
ture, amount of water, chemical and other character of the water,
amount and character of organic food, etc.; an identification of the
species and an estimate of the absolute and relative frequency of
each; and finally an analysis of the results in such a way as to reach
the laws and the causal factors of the successions. Such work
lends itself in an excellent way to the possibilities of the isolated
50 . NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
student with the microscope, both with plants and animals, and in
the interrelations of plants and animals. Mr. Allee summarizes his
results as follows:
1. The phenomena of seasonal succession hold, both in regard
to succession of species and to the number of individuals in a
species.
2. In numbers the crustaceans are dominant in Spring and
Autumn with Asellus communis as the dominant species; the Mol-
lusks are dominant in mid-summer, with Lymnaca reflexa as the
dominant species.
3. The most crowded habitat in the spring is the bottom
along the margin of the ponds; in mid-summer, at the surface and
in the deepest water; and in the autumn, near the green water
plants.
4. The range of animals is more restricted during their breed-
ing season.
EEA OR
NECROLOGY
Mr. Charles F. Cox, for many years a member of the American
Microscopical Society, died in New York City recently. He was a
Fellow of the American Association, of the Royal Microscopical
Society, of the New York Academy, and a member of numerous
- other scientific societies. As treasurer of the New York Academy
and of the New York Botanical Garden, and as a member of the
Council or Board of Directors of other organizations, Mr. Cox
contributed largely from a rich and successful business experience
to the advancement of scientific work in this country. He was pri-
marily a railroad man serving in important positions some of the
greatest and most successful corporations of the United States ; nev-
ertheless he found time to devote to scientific studies. His book on
Protoplasm and Life was his largest contribution to scientific litera-
ture, but numerous smaller papers and contributions presented at
meetings of the scientific societies evince at once his interest in and
capacity for scientific study. His work was done primarily in the
microscopical structure of plant and animals and the fundamental
relations of these to the theory of evolution.
Mr. Cox’ career is a splendid example of that contribution to
scientific advancement common in the old world, and especially in
England, but unfortunately rare on this continent. Science can ill
afford to lose such services and we may hope that the example of
such a life will be a stimulus to pointing out one way in which inves-
tigation may be effectively furthered by those who are not primarily
devoted to it.
Announcement of the death of the following members of the
American Microscopical Society has been received.
Robert Brown, Life Member.
James Farwell Cowee, ’11.
PROCEEDINGS
of the American Microscopical Society
MINUTES OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING.
The Society was called to order by Vice President Elrod at 3:30 p. m.
Dec. 27, IQII.
The Executive Committee recommended for passage at this meeting the
proposed amendment to the constitution, making Article VII read as follows:
The initiation fee shall be $3, and the dues shall be $2 annually, payable
in advance. But any person duly elected may upon payment of $50 at one
time, or in installments within the same year, become a life member entitled
to all the privileges of membership, but exempt from further dues and fees.
All life membership fees shall become part of the Spencer-Tolles Fund, but
during the life of such member his dues shall be paid out of the income of
said fund. A list of all life members and of all persons or bodies who have
made donations to the Spencer-Tolles Fund in sums of $50 or over, shall be
printed in every issue of the Transactions. The income of said fund shall
be used exclusively for the encouragement and support of original investi-
gations within the scope and purpose of this Society. The principal of the
fund shall be kept inviolate; provided, however, that nothing in this consti-
tution shall prevent the Executive Committee at any regular meeting from
transferring the Spencer-Tolles Fund to a University, or other incorporated
institution for original research, under such conditions as shall safeguard the
permanence of the Fund, and its application to the general purpose for which
it was intended; such power to be vested in the Executive Committee only
after securing, and in obedience to, the expressed will of a majority of the
constitutional members of the American Microscopical Society, or after the
constitutional failure of said Society.
This report was accepted and the proposed amendment unanimously sup-
ported.
Owing to the fact that only one session was contemplated, By-laws V
and VI were suspended. The meeting, as a committee of the whole, nominat-
ed the following officers:
President: Professor F. D. Heald, University of Texas.
First V. Pres.: Professor F. Creighton Wellman, Tulane University.
Second V. Pres.: Mr. Edward Pennock, Philadelphia, Pa.
Custodian: Mr. Magnus Pflaum, Meadville, Pa.
Elective Members of Executive Committee: Professor A. M. Reese,
University of West Va.; Professor F. C. Waite, Western Reserve Univer-
sity; Professor W. F. Mercer, Ohio University (Athens).
54 MINUTES
Members of the Council of the American Association: Prof. T. W. Gal-
loway, James Millikin University; Dr. Brayton H. Ransom, Bureau Animal
Industry, Washington.
To fill vacancy in Spencer-Tolles Committee: Professor S. H. Gage,
Cornell University.
The Society instructed the Secretary to cast the ballot for these nominees.
The reports of the Custodian and Treasurer for 1911 were read and re-
ferred to an auditing committee comsisting of Professor H. B. Ward, Pro-
fessor T. J. Burrill, and Mr. P. A. Lehenbauer.
The President and Secretary were appointed a committee to approve the
minutes for publication.
Society adjourned.
Morton J. Exrop, President.
T. W. Gatitoway, Secretary.
FINANCIAL STANDING
The secretary is glad to be able at this time to publish the finan-
cial standing of the Society to the beginning of the present year.
This includes the reports of the treasurers for a period of 5 years.
The report of Treasurer J. C. Smith was made promptly at the
close of his term of office, and was audited and approved shortly
afterward. Its tardy publication is in no way chargeable to Mr.
Smith, and is an all too poor recognition of his accuracy and pains-
taking service to the Society.
MINUTES 55
CUSTODIAN’S REPORT FOR YEAR ENDING DEC, 20, 1911
Spencer-Tolles Fund
Reported at Minneapolis; Meeting, TOTO... 0056.0. o eee eee ccc eee ee $3,151.15
Dividends becelvied welOIEr meee e erences slaccaiee es oer $191.58
OMNBATEX PENSE LLELIENEM 5). .ieicalslerec so cicieis «oo sve 8/0 waspevsvessvarshaye 19.43 211.01
$3,362.16
WessMmattes tO tis lo thewmlVleIribensepyeisversrcvstet lecops) soles sie snvele (abe) sub el oievane otal 10.00
otalmntnveste ayy ever yest rer berate aiee tat oiave aio ce buavellovalapatone ierovs Staeig ebavereraine $3,352.16
RV eEMCREASe EMILE Ces Viea lyr Vilssssaxc vig cise slain. 3 a ae ie odo Skala veep $ 201.01
Grand Totals
EMM CONEEUDINE ON StutOm Maciel miislelercpatare rotates tant loletojcver taney vara: ee eteiciay ieee $ 606.27
PS ICS MO TM ETOCCECINGS sie) arsicuecs oo cles aio rae io wie: are See the ia ele eyelet 625.73
Penn MEA ep NU GSI EL SHEDS. ce v.cA ec ehalacer sie ai creas ais ecg, ean aie ale oa ares big Oe alateres 250.00
EERE EESE ANG GIVIGENAS 7 a's).,5 seca careaiasie Saar sae aw shic con's c oeieeits 1,912.16
$3,484.16
Less:
PUM INEST Pa ces hovs) Gee 18 Sead s 2 chore’ te djareves Slavs <0) a mpaleoepiekeatie $100.00
EET DLEMIDETSHIDNAUES oi oa cisiorcss: 6 sin 6-6 miele #0 e/s ota tyaejermiacaley’ 32.00 132.00
$3,352.16
Life members and contributors of $50.00 and over:—John Aspinwall,
Robert Brown, J. Stanford Brown, Henry B. Duncanson, A. H. Elliott, John
Hately, Iron City Microscopical Society, and Troy Scientific Association.
Macnus PFiaum,
Custodian.
We the undersigned Committee hereby certify that we have carefully
examined the foregoing account, compared the same with vouchers and find
it to correspond and correct.
Henry B. Warp,
T. J. Burritt,
P. A. LEHENBAUER,
Auditing Committee.
56
On
Dr
MINUTES
REPORT OF J.C: SMITH, TREASURER? OF (PE
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY
SUMMARY FOR 1906-1907
Band BPE 0) oct ars arorsteretevleieis 6 cin wel ele sate oats erect roe $129.45
:—To Membership Dues:
TiCO%O 1 jo IIR Pe eeny Mere ee AU Pee L Mea A canto ae Oe $ 2.00
TOOB yy ara otkere sais 0 orbes hearin eu tee bint CISC ee EE 6.00
EQOGE. i cfasctosasts osseschal cacsiciens bless arbe oteloisroe Bieter ex Pee eIG ata 20.00
QO ais tices iaraiectotevels stararetdiseave sic tartare oustsbetcele eter iatere Tate eee 64.00
LOO ZI pre oteveiertaleete he Sia wien xarste Sea Ts ois tale eleimrore acre eisteletoe eee 278.00
TOOS pe Hie sect ciatasd face era wie her Aeintele ecco ee Sete orate etc ee eee 12.00 382.00
Admission fEES foie ce isis ce eetetoioeiele cs Sie ele eres ieee 21.00
Subserbers Viol: Omi eects srs te ects selec nate wrole Masters iere 6.00
advertisers Volta Vie eet Rel Cee nen. ts cae a eae ae. e 8.00
AAVETHSERS V Ol OWLS oceans Heese ica oacemen ee aer 108.25 116.25
$654.70
Credit :
postage, stationery and printing—Secretary............... $30.62
postage and; stationery— Treasurers... ccecews csc sss clecers 18.75 $ 49.37
expressage—sectetary ' 2, Unc se ac os cies ttom este enemas 36.45
expressage— lreasurer’ (2502.05. catcet sed jection « ol asrreeiee 1.75 38.20
tyPE WHAlINng—SEChetARy once « bivjoiscsie <lsieisisidiele aie saele sae aloe 17.75
Sundries—Secretaty, | 2 desis sieve e(swiel as osese © tiie reise ateteteceistekers 4.68
R. R. fare to meeting as by appropriation—Secretary....... 25.00
Bank charges for collecting checks—Treasurer............ 2.50
Plates! WOl! NOCVUL Bee secre Beetaarsincien bist sieies seiner 43.63
Panties Vols DON VLMea eye seccie thers ttowte cistere eslerstere ere eeiaiere 318.23
BalANCe NOM MANE yea tate ciel tafe aiots cisielcte siaiaei%— oiais) sloietelsjerseeeeiae 155-43
$654.70
Checked and found to correspond with books and vouchers.
Davin L. Zoox,
Henry B. Warp.
March 18, 1908.
MINUTES 57
SUMMARY OF ACCOUNT OF THE AMERICAN MICRO-
SCOPICAL SOCIETY DURING, THE INCUMBENCY
OF DAVID) Ly ZOOK, TREASURER
Dr:
From J. C. Smith, former Treasurer:
BOT eo asec ie te EA me bare cana MTA AB id $50.00
TE Cha sah secteur amici retin oy Mic cuet Te later cae | Bi 90.00
OTe Chega reat aetcn fabs sai ee meet ran UAE OM Ie Sea ean Seg Ve Cath i 90.37. $149.37
eter PELGHINMGUCS Haut oe Nee hie hd Sens om ees te A a tg tole! ore 562.76
PGMS SOUS h pete tian VE hes gs storia ia, berth cusionoicums Gabatoens 6 24.00
Supset Perse tow ViOls exe slime penser \vee sya cca dnala nia voyateicksesis/s si) ats 2.00
BeHScuibersr ton VOll DOG he tates eel ice Ole fa cap enote Siarhe ooh 38.00
SeISCIMELS On VOle, Pee Vell 2 rr cya ctce sieve, were avorete Gildlthe armor ha lexdoe ate 6.00 46.00
$782.13
Cr
Sranoneny or secretary and: Dreasurets... sti e ue). dcias emia» ceva oedde $ 19.95
inostagersused iby, Secretary, and reastitet es)... seeheca ec ee oueilsnie 23.25
Pexcnanee on remittances: Dy mMembenss ii... sce a « o'siiays'- veils c «4.6is of iwipeiers 2.75
EOC AIM) LOL) SCCHECAL Vino sisiaiais, crosses sic sre Seley’ yatoveje average ow sis! o/ hala reuse 39.20
Retinpiniecan Gen platecucparscrn an sleeps ves iva seminars, Ala eats Cn ae aC Metra 513.83
Check to American Microscopical Society to balance.................. 183.15
$782.13
We the undersigned Auditing Committee certify that we have examined
the above account and find it to correspond to the books and vouchers sub-
mitted therewith.
Jane27, TOLL.
T. W. Gatitoway,
T. L. Hankinson,
Henry B. Warp.
[Two vouchers, totaling $6.06, put into the hands of the auditing com-
mittee by Mr. Zook, satisfactorily account for the apparent discrepancy be-
tween the balance of the preceding year and the cash at the opening of his
account. ]
58
MINUTES
REPORT OF T. L. HANKINSON, TREASURER OF THE
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY
For the period from July 21, 1910, to December 21, 1911.
Dr.
former Treasurer, D. L. Zook, as balance due the Society........ $ 183.15
dues otvold members: ei seood ace eee eros eee eee Ree L Tee 321.75
initiation fees and dues of new membefs.................00.0005 410.00
subscriptions tot Vol. XXX of Transactions::::.¢2: a:2:.Aseeees 58.00
sale"oF sets’ Of Uransactions: 24)c m2.c caisineve Socials bene Wes eee 100.00
other <sales sof iransactions..i:-)- 5,6 oes cose sie see ae eee eee 63.50
advertisers in Vol. XXIX, No. 2, and Vol. XXX, Nos. 1, 2 and 3 193.10
J. S. Foote to help defray the expenses of publishing his paper in
AVi(6y Ra, Be Ae a Oe at ee eT aot hooey 5 < 150.00
contrbation for mmaking sa iplatesin cette «sions ace ee eeu 3.00
otal ECeIpts LO Dee. ST, MOTT. 2). ios, saus, asa slate ine ae bie aie ie eee $1,482.50
(Oi
printing of five quarterly numbers of the Transactions, Vol.
OOO INO: 2), ANG AV Ol REX Na a sae on wie ino ctae Densthe eile ee sel oer $ 963.33
enotavine plates fOr MransacttOnS: 5+ seats <6 sea ae eee eee 90.93
postage of Secretary and mailing Transactions.................. 142.08
Expressage’ Of, OECHEEALY. aioe ose icie esos heals coder te 5 ovat sw acl ee 16.35
POSTAGE (Of sl REASUTET orc tasce arc hate seas eerege deen remerr ee eetar ere are ere ee 25.03
HrintineoraCitcular JEtters..cs.c.00 css conics die ec cee bee oe eee 12.22
PMNS OL advertising aMaALter..cin.0ee cw ek etnies eee ee eee 61.24
StatlOnensy, ais cist ees eRe othe ee Mei ceeicis Chee Cote cet mene 17.00
stenography and other office expenses of the Secretary........... 41.45
the ‘same tor the Custodian. Jsa. [65 620. Wade os bee ae Sete tome 23.43
the{same tor the i reastiretit cic. cee sos cae cuse cclee saat teins 75
legal services involved in incorporating the Society.............. 18.20
SUN Cry eX PELSEStie sere cueisvn setereerereinl cise rete eleseei isis @tehei sie sloeemeetetete 3.00
balancefon hand Wee) 2t TOU. sca. eee octet e ne cele asia e esierae ieee 67.49
NOE Lire farcrotetneapets theierorstoereren eek Pines els baeaieke clade eet POE esicr tees $1,482.50
Examined and found correct, with proper vouchers for expenditures.
F. J. Burri1u,
Henry B. Warp,
P. A. LEHENBAUER,
Auditing Committee.
if getty
iu $ ‘
Vit a! i eT j =
4 Lae Witte re, SS tN J ’ aOR i)
7 De aL ae ry a Aes te aoe Og err) al i) k
RH ec has a aA eA a
- a 7 at ' =i ' ! ’ ‘A %
‘ ‘i ] 7 ei : i i) ; oy he 4
2h Ro eG. ae 4 ae ' A Re: ia ee | o\
mj
pa
ie iar i f ; ? te | | ‘e Ae | i \ \
AP iy Mal ty it Spy hei’ Pa ae Many
RON Met) edn AMAT Ds
=
~ bi
ae py Pana
My ea rnt ei NER
Be +o 2 h wi ony wit Ve Ae ee
be Res Ss.) A nen ye Meta ah Lath pay
é ) i; Land hl . vw : top,
iy, a 4) 4 NOL LAY orna ¢ 2 <n nik pty! Can : »|
i > i 3 ih ree
|
Wf , ; ul : r ¢ ’ eet i 4
: ae Ts ye i
j bf oe ee Sy] OPAL
= ’ 7) > are AY, baie d pol
/ LP. AY se Pa
vt {
4 i
y ah: bee
Ov hora
An,
at
i
it
pe
aa pd eas
fear Pay
My erty ¥ a;
rar >
|
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED I89Q1
PUBLISHED QUARTERLY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXXI
NuMBER Two
Entered as Second-class Matter December 12, 1910, at the Postoffice at Decatur, IIli-
nois, under act of March 3, 1879.
Decatur, ILL.
Review Printinc & STATIONERY Co.
1912
“PAOITIRG MART |
TAD? Wes ; i
i ay i
, i
Ve" HiqaoeoToi M, (Visor: of
Ph aay YiIo0¢
‘ } ae Sin Wid eke
a aye Pa es ae a ae qu away er ve
fig
‘ ene ri AP 4 i “4 ; é
y v a>
| '
4
{ + i r)
fa ke
i
*
i
iy : ;
'
i ’ '
i Wiha yb
t j ne ‘ APM pany’ Dial “ne
ee t
| ,
;
: COR ON ie A Tab
ae 1 vy At RNS WR PY ie ee ae Yor
| Ae)
OFFICERS.
eesti enions Fath); DELEALD Ey rr irate a iets rele ee noha Austin, Texas
First Vice President: F. CREIGHTON WELLMAN, M. D....New Orleans, La.
Second Vice President: EpWARD PENNOCK................ Philadelphia, Pa.
SCRAATATS. She Nie CONTODON ek OU eet RH BOGEN CIGGH DemtCEn aoc Decatur, III.
AGC OSUR CIs wile Nessa FAVANIEN SONitc is myeteicisisies olaveis wicier nice Clee een Charleston, III.
GUSLO iI My NUAGNUSMEEL AU ME eeeloite cicteninie Seis te eens Meadville, Pa.
ELECTIVE MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
PNAC RRS Soo cs cs Me ete aii cemyateie an le. werner s Morgantown, West Va.
12, ACs AINE eae BREE Sn OEIC IB TEES NE cio eee aes Cleveland, Ohio
VPs Lost VIER CER eee re aay Sere ner are eer eae pee eR islath atliatciave chet Athens, Ohio
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
R. H. Warp, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Troy, N. Y,,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1879.
J. D. Hyatt, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
Apert McCa tra, Ph.D., of Chicago, Ill.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883
tJ. Burritt, Ph.D., of Urbana, Ill,
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gro. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Buffalo, N. Y.,
at Detroit, Mich., 18go.
MarsHALt D. Ewe tt, M.D., of Chicago, IIl.,
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Simon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1895 and 1906.
A. CirrForp Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1896.
A. M. Bietre, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. E1icenMANN, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., 1901.
CuHartes E. Bessty, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
E. A. Birce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Urbana, IIL,
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
Herpsert Osporn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
A. E. Hertzzter, M.D., of Kansas City, Mo., :
2 Z at Washington, D. C., 1911
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXXI, Number 2, April, 1912
The Structure and Development of the Colony in Gonium, with Plate V,
by} RY Al Hamper i vs Saheb edi soeleds woe sicteeee ne Con eee eee
The Modern Theory of the Cell as a Complex of Organized Units, with
Double Plates VI-XITI, by E.. Wo Roberts. .0: .5- ania. <n sten ecg eee
Notes, Reviews, Etc. A Gift to the Society; Trypanosome Infection and
Effectiveness of Primate Serum; Pure Cultures of Amebe Parasitic
in Mammals; A Method of Diagnosis in Syphilis; Treponema palli-
dum in Monkeys; Ecological Succession of Plants and Animals;
Chromatic Reduction in Cell Development; The Reserve of Food in
Trees; Alternation of Generation in Floridee ; Relation of the Proto-
plasm of Adjacent Protoplasts; A New Form of Parasitism; Bacteria
in River Water; Continuous Division in Paramecium; Cockroach as
an Agent of Contamination; Poison for Arrow Heads Taken from
Larvae; Anopheles; Modern Microscopy; Laboratory Diagnosis; The
House Fly; The Spirochetes; Pellagra; Injurious Insects; Indexing
and Filing methods for the Microscopist; How to Determine the
Presence of Intestinal Parasites; Examination of Sputum for Tuber-
cle Bacilli; Detection of Typhoid Bacillus in water; Butterfly Scales ;
Cinnamon Oil for Examining Rough Minerals; Mounting Scales of
Insects, Diatones, Etc.; Simple Drawing Apparatus................-
Niecroloaay-? Wise tt. Soha ce wisraneicls helo G ce «eines ave ayeeitteis nee clolste es eel rsinie tain
65
85
TRANSACTIONS
OF
American Microscopical Society
(Published in Quarterly Installments)
Vol. XXXI APRIL, 1912 No. 2
cre SLRUCTURE) AND, DEVELOPMENT, ‘OF, THE COL-
ONY IN GONIUM
By R. A. HARPER
Gonium, a simple coenobic plant growing in all our fresh waters
and becoming very abundant when conditions are favorable, is an
interesting type which illustrates in very simple terms a close approx-
imation to a pure mosaic development. The plant is a simple plate-
shaped colony consisting of four, eight, or sixteen cells. The
arrangement of these cells is strikingly uniform in the sixteen celled
colony and in this respect it is in marked contrast with such forms
as the water net. There are no structural variations in Gonium cor-
responding to the various shaped meshes with from three to six or
seven sides which we find in the water net, and as we shall see this
relative fixity of type is doubtless correlated with the method of for-
mation of the colonies by a definitely specified series of cell divisions.
In its method of development Gonium thus affords an interesting
type for comparison with other coenobic plants in which the colonies
are formed by the spontaneous aggregation of free swimming zoo-
spores. The forms I have studied seem to agree in all essential re-
spects with the description of the widespread species Gonium pecto-
rale, Mull. I have found it in aquarium jars at Madison and in
open pools at Berkeley, Calif. The figures and micro-photographs
here given are all from the Californian material.
The structure and development of the flat plate-shaped colonies
of Gonium and their relationship to other members of the volvox
series have been carefully described by many of the earlier students
of the algae (1, 3, 6, 16). The morphogenetic processes by which
66 HARPER
the solid and hollow globular colonies of Pandorina and Eudorina
and the plate-shaped colonies of Gonium and the later discovered
Platydorina are developed early attracted attention and the order of
cell division and the cell lineage have been accurately worked out.?
In my material I do not find that the third divisions tend to be
radial, as is described for Eudorina and as Al. Braun? thought they
must be for Gonium. Cohn’s? figures of the eight celled colonies
whose correctness Braun doubted are good representations of forms,
which I find quite commonly. The very young eight celled stage
consists simply of two rows of cells and is quite unlike that described
for Eudorina. The figures of Biitchli? and Migula** for the sixteen
celled stage are quite inadequate as compared with the earlier one of
Cohn.? They fail to show the form of the cells accurately and give
no correct indication of the apparent difference in size between the
central and peripheral cells. They also fail to show that the middle
cell on each side is somewhat drawn back toward the center as was
noted by Miillert®, Cohn® and Al. Braun’, Oltmann’s” figure taken
from Migula is incorrect in all these particulars. Braun’ regards
the colony as consisting of three concentric series of cells, four, four
and eight, thus emphasizing the fact that four of the outer twelve
cells are out of alignment with the other eight.
Microphotographs of colonies in a stage of vigorous and rapid
growth such as are reproduced in figures 4 to 6 show that the six-
teen cells form a square with its corners truncated, giving it a some-
what octagonal outline with a slight depression in the middle of each
side. The cells are ovoid or pear shaped (Fig. 19) and bear two
cilia at the narrowed end. Part of the cilia are shown in the eight
celled colony (Fig. 17). By means of these cilia the organism
moves through the water flatwise so that it presents its edge view
when observed from above under the microscope. Such an edge
view of an eight celled colony is shown in figure 19, and we observe
that the cells are noticeably longer than they are wide. The long
axis of the cells in the outer row is inclined outward so that the cilia
of these cells do not point straight ahead, but obliquely forward.
As the colony swims it rotates edgewise. This mode of locc-
motion seems extremely awkward since the colony thus offers the
greatest resistance to the water. The arrangement of the cells in
two series, with four in the interior and twelve in the periphery, is
THE COLONY 1N GONIUM 67
correlated with the presence of the large square intercellular space,
which is an almost universal characteristic of the colonies. It is not
impossible that the opening so formed has some significance in main-
taining the equilibrium of the colony as it moves through the water.
The water which is to be displaced does not necessarily all have to
flow around the edges of the colony; a portion may pass directly
through the opening in the middle and doubtless this favors steadi-
ness of movement.
It has been claimed that the whole colony is imbedded in a gela-
tinous secretion which is so abundant as to fill all the intercellular
spaces, including the central square Migula™ finds evidence of the
thickness of this gelatinous envelope in the observation that the
motion of the cilia is limited to the outer one-half or two-thirds of
their length. I have not been able to convince myself of the pres-
ence of any such abundance of jelly about the colonies in my ma-
terial. The cell walls are gelatinous and I have frequently observed
the motion of the peripheral portion of a cilium while the basal por-
tion remains quiet as if held in some way. The same cilium may,
however, a few moments later bend freely from its base. Such ob-
servations can be readily made on mature colonies whose cells are
dividing. The ciliary motion becomes very weak at this time, as
will be noted below. Moore and Goodspeed*® report that the entire
cilium may take part in the stroke, though usually only the peripheral
one-half or one-third is used. Of course, the amount of jelly se-
creted may vary under different environmental conditions.
The most important characteristics of the colony as a whole are
to be found in the space-relations between the cells. These rela-
tions are on the whole strikingly constant and constitute the funda-
mental structural features of the plant. If we examine the inter-
relations of the cells of the colony beginning at either corner in the
outer row we find, counting the points of contact of each cell with
its neighbor, that we have the simple series, 3, 3, 4, repeated four
times (See Figs. 1 to 6). The pairs of cells that make the corners
of the square are each in contact with only three cells while the
middle cell of the side, which is in the slight depression, is just as
regularly in contact with four. Each of the four interior cells is in
contact with six of its sister cells and these simple relations bring
with them an arrangement of the cell walls involving the formation
68 HARPER
of the series of curves which Cohn long ago observed and figured
and which come out very clearly when the colony is photographed a
little out of focus, as shown in figure 13. We see from this that
each of the four inner cells is in reality an inequilateral hexagon,
that side which is adjacent to the central square being a little longer
than the others. The walls of the cells, as the photograph shows,
form four sets of parallel curves. The intercellular spaces are in
the same fashion shown to be triangles with somewhat unequal sides,
showing at once that the cells are arranged as compactly as possible.
All of these structural characteristics we see at a glance are just
those which would obtain in any system of spherical liquid or semi-
liquid globules which are placed in two such series, that is, twelve
about four, assuming also a tendency to the greatest possible com-
pactness. The details of the organization of the colony are in
accord with the principle of least surfaces, limited by the method of
division by which the cells were produced. Every semi-fluid drop-
let of protoplasm has rounded itself up in cross section as perfectly
as is consistent with its adhesion to and pressure from the adjacent
droplets.
If we put together a series of equal circles arranged in this
fashion we shall find that the four inner circles will not be in contact
either with each other (text Fig. 1) or with certain of the peripheral
cells (text, Fig. 2). To bring into contact the whole series of cells
as we find them in the Gonium colonies the diameters of the inner
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
cells must be increased relatively to those of the outer series. This
is apparently accomplished in Gonium by the flattening of the inner
cells and by lateral compression of each of the cells in the outer
series. This lateral compression of the peripheral cells is especially -
conspicuous in the young colonies, where the outer cells are fre-
quently (Figs. 1-6) quite oblong.
THE COLONY IN GONIUM 69
We have thus a plant of definite form with a specific arrange-
ment of its constituent parts which is strikingly uniform and whose
cells show in certain respects the adhesiveness and surface tensions
of colloidal droplets of protoplasm. That the cells have also an
internal organization is, however, shown by their pear shaped form
and the slightly flaring position of the peripheral series (Fig. 19).
The constancy in structural features in Gonium as compared with
Hydrodictyon is as noted above rather striking and is doubtless due
to the mosaic type of development here present.
The only modification in the cell relations which can be re-
garded as at all normal is that in which the central intercellular
square is omitted, two of the four cells of the inner series being
brought together so that they are in contact, the other two being pro-
portionately separated. This generally leads to a change of form of
the whole colony, in some cases giving it a somewhat rhomboidal
outline (Fig. 11). In the case shown in figure 12 the absence of
the intercellular square in the center has been compensated in a
sense by the formation of another intercellular square at one corner
between the inner and outer series of cells. The colony has thus
become more nearly square like the ordinary type. These cases with
rhomboidal central group are rather rare, so few as to make a frac-
tion of one per cent of the colonies to be observed under normal con-
ditions. In them the greater compactness of the central group leads
to a correspondingly increased crowding in the outer series. This
may lead to the crowding of one cell out of the plane of the others
so that it overlaps two or the displaced cell may come to lie squarely
in front of or behind its neighbor. How the cilia are placed in such
a case I have not been able to determine. I have never seen the six-
teen cells arranged to form a perfect rhomboid. The evidence is
clear that the colony is in a state of unstable equilibrium owing to
the presence of twelve cells in the peripheral series in the space
which would be more naturally filled by ten, as shown in text
figure 6.
The figures 14 and 15 illustrate divergences from type which
may plainly be classified as pathological or monstrous. Figure 15, for
example, shows a colony with sixteen cells in a totally aberrant
arrangement. This was the only case of the sort which I have ob-
served. Cases in which one or more of the cells have died or have
70 HARPER
been broken out of the colony in some fashion, are much more com-
mon. Such a case is illustrated in figure 14. In such cases the
colony shows no tendency to regenerate the missing cells nor to
modify its form so as to produce a symmetrical outline. Colonies
frequently split in two. This process is shown going on in figure
16. The result is two colonies of eight. Such colonies show no
power of regeneration, but they may live and reproduce themselves
in an entirely normal fashion. They are to be distinguished from
colonies of eight cells formed in ordinary reproduction. Their
shape is different, as will be noted.
We may turn now to the problem of the reproduction of the
plant in order to determine the method by which such a sixteen
celled colony is produced in ontogeny. The cells of the colony are
all capable of vegetative reproduction and each one, as a rule, pro-
duces a new sixteen celled plate. Division occurs commonly at
night from ten to twelve P. M., and the new colonies are set free
from the parent cells by the following morning. The general be-
havior of the plant in these respects is analogous to that of Pan-
dorina, and other related forms. One can watch the process of
division readily under the microscope. The colonies generally con-
tinue to move about until the division has reached an advanced
stage in each cell, but they become very sluggish and can be readily
followed. It is impossible, however, in the case of the sixteen celled
colonies to obtain satisfactory photographs of these division stages.
The connection between the cells apparently becomes very loose.
The walls gelatinize and the intercellular connections are broken.
As a result the colony becomes warped in various fashions and it is
impossible to get any large area of it in a single focus. Figure 10
shows about half of a colony in which the cells are beginning to
divide. The colony was sc warped that the other half was badly
out of focus. In cell a division is just beginning; in cell D the first
division is complete. Cell c has divided twice and three daughter
cells show in the negative, though they have not been brought out in
the reproduction. It is obvious at once that the planes of division
of the different cells of the colony show no orientation with refer-
ence to each other or to the plane of the parent colony. In the case
of the four celled colonies conditions are more favorable in this re-
spect and I have obtained a photograph showing the first division of
THE COLONY IN GONIUM Tal
all four of the cells in such a colony. This is shown in figure 22.
Division does not begin in all of the cells simultaneously and it pro-
gresses quite irregularly, after it has once begun. Here again it is
evident that the plane of division is independently determined in
each cell.
After the cells are all in division while the motion of the cilia
continues weakly the colony may become lodged in such fashion as
not to move further, and under these conditions it is easy to make
caméra lucida sketches of the entire sixteen cells of the colony,
showing the stage of division which each cell has reached. Text
figures 3, 4, and 5 show three successive stages in the reproduction
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
of the same colony, separated from each other by intervals of about
thirty to forty minutes. The drawings were made with camera
lucida between ten and eleven thirty p.m. <A glance at the first of
these sketches shows at once that the planes of division are different
for the different cells. The first division may lie at almost any
angle to the plane of the colony and in almost any direction from
tangential to radial. It is observed at once that the form of the
whole has no dominating influence on the orientation of the division
planes, although it is entirely conceivable that such influence should
be exerted here, if anywhere, since the cells have been in contact
with each other and there is every opportunity for cellular interac-
tion. There is no evidence either of any general form—regulating
principle at work. Each cell is apparently self-determined as to the
plane of its division, that is the plane of division is determined by
cellular organization as contrasted with any assumed heredity of
form for the whole organism. When once the first division is
begun, however, the plane of the future colony is fixed. A glance at
the figures shows at once that the subsequent divisions follow the
principle of rectangular intersection, the spindle figures, which may
72 HARPER
be assumed to be present here as in other algae, always lying in the
same plane. Each successive plane of division tends to cut that of
the preceding division at right angles. No one would question that
this is a phenomenon of cellular behavior and is due to the organiza-
tion of the cell itself, and it works out to produce, as we shall see,
a many celled colony of perfectly definite form and organization
which is also doubtless fairly adaptive.
The four celled stage consists of equal quadrants which tend at
once to round up, leaving a four sided intercellular space between
them in the middle. As noted, the colony is already under pressure
from the gelatinous cell wall which swells at this stage and forms an
envelope which is in contact with the cell mass, although it is so
transparent that it does not come out in the photographs. The posi-
tion of the cells as formed is unstable and this pressure is sufficient
in many cases to lead to a slight displacement of the four cells at
once, especially as the movement of the cilia tends also to produce
unequal strains in the whole mass and thus to lead to readjustments
so as to produce the greatest possible compactness. The displace-
ment may go so far as to form a markedly rhomboidal instead of a
square group. This condition is shown in a number of young colo-
nies in text figures 3 and 4. It may perpetuate itself throughout the
whole life of the colony (Figs. 11 and 12) or it may apparently dis-
appear again later under the conditions of surface tension that de-
velop as the colony grows. It consists in the familiar phenomenon
of the separation of two of the cells and the approximation of the
other two so that they become slightly flattened on each other in the
central region. The next division is at right angles to the second
and we thus get a group of eight cells arranged in two rows of four
each. This is an interesting stage and is shown in its various ap-
pearances in several of the young colonies (text figures 3, 4, and 5).
If the colony is under favorable conditions the division may stop at
this stage. The cells seem healthy, however, and may grow to nor-
mal size as an eight-celled colony (Figs. 17-20) which, however,
bears no resemblance in the arrangement of its cells to the normal
sixteen-celled colony. I find no tendency whatever in the third di-
vision for the new cell walls to assume a position radial to the out-
line of the colony as is described for Eudorina at this stage and as
Braun thought must also be true for Gonium. Such a modification
THE COLONY IN GONIUM 73
might be expected if there were any tendency here to the regula-
tions which Driesch assumes in his equipotential harmonic systems,
since the placing of the third plane of division radially gives in
Eudorina a rounded eight-celled group much more nearly resembling
the typical sixteen-celled colony of Gonium. The oblong eight-
celled colonies have no resemblance in form to the normal colonies
and yet they occur abundantly. Their cells grow to normal size and
reproduce normally, giving either eight or sixteen-celled colonies,
according as the conditions are more or less favorable. I shall dis-
cuss this point further a little later. The eight cells as they enlarge
are subjected to still further pressure. In rounding up, too, they
increase the diameter of the whole colony in one direction more than
in the other. The result is that the group becomes curved, as is
shown plainly in edge views (text figures 3 and 4). The fourth
division occurs at right angles to the third and we get thus the two
rows of four cells each divided into two rows and the sixteen-celled
colony is thus produced with four cells forming a square or rhom-
boid in the center and twelve cells forming a peripheral series about
them. Such colonies are shown in figures I to 9 in successive stages
of development.
That the spindle figures always lie in the same planes in the
successive divisions may be due to intracellular organization or per-
haps, and more probably, in the third and fourth divisions to exter-
nal stimuli. As noted the cells round up considerably after each
division and are thus subjected to pressure from the swollen mother
cell wall. This pressure on the edges of the four celled plate may
be a stimulus which aids in determining the plane of the next divi-
sion. At the eight and sixteen celled stage the curved form of the
young colonies is good evidence of pressure from the mother cell
wall though the latter has become so gelatinized that it is very diffi-
cult to make it visible under the microscope. The young sixteen-
celled colonies are quite saucer-shaped, as has been observed by the
earlier students of the colonies. Kny”?"4" has demonstrated
the effect of pressures and tensions on the plane of cell division. He
concludes that there is a tendency for the cells to divide at right
angle to the plain in which pressure is exerted upon them though this
tendency may be overcome by his so-called “internal forces.” It is
certainly impossible as yet to ascribe to pressures and tensions any
74 HARPER
universally constant effect on cell growth and division, though there
can be no question that both may act as determining stimuli in specific
cases. With such stimuli present it seems at least unnecessary in the
case of Gonium to assume any specific preformation of the germ
plasm to determine the plane of cell division in the young colony.
The major growth of the colony here is against the pressure of the
mother cell wall just as in Hydrodictyon, as I have pointed out, the
major growth of the cells is against the pressure of the adjoining
cells in the young net.
That the curvature of the young colonies is purely mechanical
and is forced upon them by their environment is plain from the fact
that a little later when the mother cell wall breaks the plate flattens
out immediately. In some cases the mother cell wall may become so
distended that this flattening out takes place while the young colony is
still enclosed.
In the development of the colonies as just described we have
apparently an example of mosaic development. The original par-
ent cell could be laid off into a series of sections, by lines cutting each
other at right angles, so that each fragment would represent a cell of
the future colony in something near its proper relations to all the
others (text figure 7). There might be conceived to be a localized
area in the germ cell representing each particular cell of the adult
organism. The germ cell has merely been expanded and cut up into
pieces, each of which becomes a definitely placed cell of the com-
pleted colony.
Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 8
In text figure 5 I have drawn the outer boundaries of the gel-
atinous cell walls. These outer layers are apparently denser and
more resistant and with the swelling of the inner layers become
stretched into figures representing very diagrammatically the arrange-
ment of the cells of the parent colony. The expansion and round-
ing up of the cell walls leads to their separation everywhere except
THE COLONY IN GONIUM 75
at the points of protoplasmic continuity between the adjacent cells.
Here, although the plasmodesmen have evidently been withdrawn,
the pit structure of the cell walls persists as a region of stronger
union between the adjacent cells. It is interesting to know that this
pit region, or at least the so-called middle lamella which forms the
floor of the respective pits, is of about the same size between each
pair of cells and appears as a definite disc-like region of connection,
from which the cell walls are stretched to form the triangular inter-
cellular spaces which are now very much larger than they were
before the swelling of the cell walls occurred. As noted above, this
particular colony was one of those whose central group of four
formed a rhomboidal rather than a square figure and the point of
union of the two cells that are in contact and the wide separation of
the other two is conspicuously shown at this stage. It is obvious
that a colony of this form is characterized by the greatest possible
compactness in the arrangement of its cells. The intercellular spaces
are triangular throughout, showing that the globular cell bodies have
come into as close relations to each other as possible. Such an
arrangement as this, as noted above, would result from surface ten-
sion and adhesion between viscous colloidal globules.
The cilia are shown still present with a number of the cells of
the colony as they appeared at this stage and in two cases still
showing feeble movements. It would seem probable that the con-
nection of these cilia through the cell wall with one of the daughter
cells of the new forming colony is maintained, though this is difficult
of determination, and it is not impossible that the movements are
autonomous and that the cilia have been broken off from connection
with the parent cell at this stage. The persistence of the cilia at
these late stages in cell division has been observed in other members
of the volvox series. The daughter colonies proceed to grow now
to the size of the parent and in this process of growth adhesion and
surface tension play a part in developing the details of the mature
structure as was suggested above. The daughter colonies escape
from the mother cell walls during the night and in the morning I
find them swimming freely, with no evidence as to their origin. In
the case of my material if the plant were studied merely in the day
time an increase in the number of colonies would be observed, but
with no suggestion as to how they arose.
76 HARPER
Since all the cells tend to be of equal diameter and circular in
section the production of the mature colony with the definite space
relations between its cells requires very considerable readjustments.
If division and growth took place without gliding of the cells upon
each other we might get a square colony such as is shown in text
figure 7. The arrows indicate the pairings resulting from the last
division. A comparison of such a diagram as this with any of the
photographs of the normal colonies shows at a glance that the read-
justments occurring in the formation and growth of the colony tend
to a more stable arrangement of the cells and greater compactness.
The square intercellular spaces are all replaced.by triangular inter-
cellular spaces except in the one case between the cells of the central
group of four. The main modifications arise from the crowding in
the outer series of twelve since ten is the normal number to form a
series about a group of four (text figure 6). If the colony consisted
of fourteen cells the crowding and consequent tensions would disap-
pear. In the young colonies, as a matter of fact, the twelve cells
of the peripheral row are much compressed laterally in order to
maintain connection with the central group of four (Figs. 1-6). In
the very young colonies the cells are much flattened upon each other.
This may be due to loss of turgor due to a reduction in the amount
of osmotically active substances during cell division or it may be due
to stronger adhesion between the young cell boundaries. As growth
proceeds, the cells tend to round up more and more and this brings
to bear a stretching tension on each of the four of the central series,
which tends, as noted, to flatten them out, that is, increase their
diameter as seen from the face of the colony, at the expense of their
vertical diameter. It also tends to draw them apart from each
other, and in the vast majority of cases, results in the production of
the square intercellular space in the center of the whole colony. In
the adult colony, for this reason, the central cells seem larger, but
there is no evidence that they really are greater in mass, their appar-
ently increased size being due to the flattening just described. The
tensions which are brought to bear on the central cells may be best
understood perhaps from such a diagram as is given in text figure 8,
in which the large circle and the lines from 1 to 4 represent the
mother cell and the successive planes of its division. The small
circles represent the daughter cells in the relative positions which
THE COLONY IN GONIUM 77
they occupy in the adult colony. The inner group of four have
maintained approximately their original position while the outer
series have been shifted about them. The arrows indicate the pair-
ing of the daughter cells of the last division. This shifting of the
outer series around the inner group leads to the greatest compact-
ness with the least possible readjustment of the relations of the indi-
vidual cells. If the inner cells were shifted with reference to the
outer series two of the pairs of sister cells would be widely sepa-
rated in order to produce the configuration of the adult colony. It
is plain that in such a system, the cells all tending to round up, very
considerable tensions may be developed and that as noted the central
cells will be flattened and the peripheral cells compressed laterally
as they are seen to be in the photographs of the young and growing
colonies,
The method of reproduction of the cells by simple bipartition
with rectangular intersection of the successive planes of division and
the surface tensions of the viscous colloidal protoplasmic masses of
the cells with their internally determined pear-shaped form and ca-
pacity for forming protoplasmic connections give two sets of fac-
tors whose interactions determine the shape of the cells and of the
intercellular spaces and the shape of the whole colony. The relative
diameters of the cells give a suggestion at once of the relations of
pressure and surface tension between them. The outlines in the
micro-photographs are not perfectly sharp and since the peripheral
cells lean outward more or less the photographs show them in more
or less oblique optical section while the central cells appear in trans-
verse section. None the less the fairly constant and interesting evi-
dence of lateral compression in the peripheral cells and flattening in
the central cells is unquestionably an expression of factors of sur-
face tension and adhesion present in such a system. The tangential
or periclinal axes of the central cells are about equal to the radial
axes of the peripheral cells. The radial axes of the inner cells are
intermediate between the two. The four cells of the outer series
which are withdrawn somewhat toward the center of the colony tend
to be pear shaped in optical section and seem perhaps to be less com-
pressed laterally at their bases than the other eight of the series.
It is evident that to provide for the pit connections which are
seen to be present in the old colonies secondary unions must be estab-
78 HARPER
lished wherever cells are in contact. Sixteen such connections must
be established in the ordinary colonies and 17 in the rhomboidal colo-
nies in addition to the eight that may be regarded as persisting be-
tween the sister cells in the last division.
That as noted the colonies are under considerable tension be-
tween their parts is experimentally demonstrated at every stage in
their study. To obtain the photographs it is necessary to kill the
organisms in order to bring them to rest. This is a matter of some
difficulty since it was immediately found that any shock from poison
or by other means which would lead to a contraction of the proto-
plasmic mass would result at once in breaking up the colony. Ex-
treme dilutions of Flemming’s weaker solution were used. Slight
changes in the turgidity of the cell, due to a change in the concen-
tration of the medium have the same effect. Any sudden shock
leading to further rounding up or contraction is practically certain
to break the adhesion and protoplasmic continuity between adjacent
cells and the colonies fly apart with a succession of sudden jerks, as
can be easily observed under the microscope. Figure 22 shows a
colony so broken up.
It is not uncommon to find that in the ordinary course of their
existence the continuity between certain cells in the colony may be
broken, and thus square or oblong instead of triangular intercellular
spaces are produced (Fig. 7). As noted the mature condition shows
the cells well rounded (Fig. 8). The walls have become gelatinous
and swollen and the plasmodesmen tend to be withdrawn though the
pit connections may become more prominent. The colonies some-
times split through the middle, thus producing two eight-celled colo-
nies (Fig. 16). These are, however, different in form from those
which result from the interruption of the normal process of repro-
duction. The eight-celled colonies produced by the interruption of
the division of the mother cell vary considerably in their form. The
most common type is that shown in figures 17 and 18. Figure 20
shows a very aberrant type seen only once.
These eight-celled colonies indicate most clearly that there is no
tendency in Gonium to the process of regeneration. They remain in
the form in which they are produced, whether as a result of splitting
the parent colony or from dwarfed development in reproduction.
The cells of the eight-celled colonies formed by dwarfing undergo
THE COLONY IN GONIUM 79
rearrangements due to surface tension during their growth analo-
gous to those which take place in the sixteen-celled colonies and as
a result they regularly consist of two compact rhomboidal groups of
four cells. These two groups may, however, be quite variously
placed with reference to each other, as is shown in the figures just
referred to. There is no tendency to morphallaxis or regeneration
of any sort. The individual cells of Gonium are totipotent and
capable of reproducing the whole colony in its perfect form by nor-
mal reproduction, but if the process is interrupted the product is not
a diminutive model of the adult type, but quite a differently or-
ganized individual, as is also true of the half colonies produced by
fragmentation. There is no reason in the nature of the case why
if the arrangement of the eight cells were controlled by some regu-
lative teleological principle it should not operate to rearrange the
eight-celled groups into a form corresponding to that of the normal
sixteen-celled colony, only on a smaller scale. This could be ac-
complished by putting two cells in the center with eight around the
periphery, or one in the center with seven around it, or we might
have the crossed arrangement found in the eight-celled stages of
Eudorina.
The four-celled form of Gonium is generally regarded as a dis-
tinct species. The material of this type which I have had for study
appeared in a pool in which the sixteen-celled colonies had been very
abundant but were beginning to disappear. Eight-celled colonies
were also relatively more numerous than they had been before and
the conditions suggested strongly that the four-celled colonies might
be also degenerate forms of the sixteen-celled type. I was, how-
ever, never able to observe the formation of four-celled colonies
from the sixteen-celled type. The adhesion between the cells in the
four-celled colonies seems very weak and the cells early round up so
as to form the characteristic square intercellular space between them
(ifigs: 21;/22)..
We have in Gonium an organism of definite and characteristic
structure whose heredity and ontogeny may be expressed in terms of
cell organization and simple mechanical interactions of the cells in
their growth from the germ cell to the mature condition. The most
fundamental feature in the cell organization is that which determines
8o HARPER
that the successive planes of division shall intersect at right angles,
the spindles lying always in the same plane. I have not been able to
work out the processes of nuclear and cell division in these minute
cells. On the basis of the work of Timberlake and others on nuclear
division in the water net and other algal cells we may assume that
a centrosome is present here and that the spindle is formed in con-
nection with the divergence of two daughter centrosomes. The in-
tersection of the successive planes of division at right angles implies
that, as is generally the case, this divergence extends to a distance of
go degrees for each of the daughter centrosomes and that the plane
in which the divergence occurs is maintained unchanged. either as a
result of internal cellular organization or external stimuli. In
neither case would any specific representation of the form of the
colony in the organization of the germ plasm be implied.
The method of forming the colonies in Gonium stands in
marked contrast with that in the water net. We lack here the con-
vincing evidence that the structure of the germ plasm does not rep-
resent the space relations of the parts of the adult, which we have in
coenobes which are formed by the aggregation of free swimming
units, still it seems to me gratuitous to assume in the cells of Gonium
any complex specific representation of the structure of the colony as
a whole. It is obvious here that the organization of the whole cell
which may determine the position of the spindle and the planes of
cell division is in no specific sense an anlage for the form of the col-
ony and the colloidal qualities of the protoplasm which determine the
adhesive and surface tension qualities of the cells are factors in
quite another category than the space relations between the cells
which they determine. Gonium illustrates clearly the numerous and
complex interactions of the most delicate and intensive sort which
may arise between cells as a result of their properties as colloidal
droplets on the one hand and their fixed method of reproduction by
bipartition on the other. These interactions may have much to do
in determining the method of formation of such globular colonies as
are found in other members of the volvox series.
CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.
THE COLONY IN GONIUM 81
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Braun, A.
Uber einige Volvocineen u. Bemerkungen u. s. w. Ber. d. Berl. Ges.
Naturf. Freunde. Bot. Z. 1875, p. 180, u. p. 190.
_
2. BurTscHLti.
Protozoa. Bronn’s Klassen u. Ordn. d. Tierreichs 1.
3. Coun, F.
Untersuchung iiber die Entwicklungsgesch. der mikroskop. Algen
u. Pilze. Nov. Act. Acad. Caes. Leop. Carol. Vol. XXIV, 1854, p.
101-256, Tf. 15-20. : /
4.
Bemerkungen iiber die Organisation einiger Schwarmzellen.
Beitrage zur Biologie der Pflanzen. Bd. II, 1876-77. p. to1-121.
5. Focke, G. W.
Physiologische Studien. 1 u. 2. Heft. Bremen, 1847.
6. Fresenius, G.
Ueber die Algengatt. Jandorina, Gonium und Raphidium. Abhdl.
der Senckenberg, Naturf. Gesellsch. Bd. II, 1856-58. p. 187-200. Tf.
VEL.
7. KEIN, L.
Vergleichende Untersuchungen ueber Morphologie und Biologie der
Fortpflanzung bei der Gattung Volvox. Berichte der Naturf. Ges.
zu. Freiburg i. Br. V. 1. i890.
Morphologische und biologische Studien ueber die Gattung Volvox.
Pringsheims Jahrb. XX, 2. 1880.
Neue Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Gattung Volvox. Berichte d.
deutschen bot. Gesellschaft, VII, 1.
Toy Kaw,
Ueber den Einfluss von Zug und Druck auf die Richtung der
Sheidewande in sich theilenden Pflanzenzellen. Ber. der Deutschen
Botanischen Gesellschaft. Jahn, 1806, Band XIV, Heft 9, p. 378-301.
Dr,
Ueber den Einfluss von Zug und Druck auf die Richtung der
Scheidewande in sich theilenden Pflanzenzellen. Jahrbiicher ftir
wissenschaftliche Botanik, Band XXXVII, Heft I, p. 56-08.
12. Korom, L. A.
Plankton studies. II. On Pleodorina illinoisensis, a new species
from the plankton of the Illinois River. Bull. Ill. State Lab. Nat.
Hist. 1898, 5. p. 273.
82
13:
14.
vise
16.
Wis
18.
19.
20.
HARPER
Plankton Studies. III. On Platydorina, a new genus of the family
Volvocideae. Bull. Ill. State Lab. Nat. Hist. 1899. 5. Nr. 9.
Micuta, W.
Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Gonium pectorale. Bot. Centralbl. 1890. 43.
Moorr, A. R., and Goopspeep, T. H.
Galvanotropic Orientation in Gonium Pectorale. University of Calif.
Pub. in Physiology. Vol. 4, No. 4, pp. 17-23. May 6, 1911.
Miuxter, O. F.
(Kongl. svensk. vetenskabs Akademien nya Handlingar. II. p. 12.
fies Oe
Kleine Schriften aus der Naturhistoric. Dessau 1782 herausgeg. von
Goeze. p. 15-21. Tf. 4. (Gonium).
OLTMANN.
Morphologie und Biologie der Algen. 1904.
OVERTON.
Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Gattung Volvox. Botanisches Central-
blatt, 1889. No. 29-36.
Perty, M.
Zur Kenntniss Kleinster Lebensformen nach Bau, Functionen, Sys-
tematik, etc. Bern, 1852, 17 Tf.
WarMING, AUG.
Om en fircellet Gonium (Dujardins Tetramonas socialis.) Botanik
tidsskrift 3 raekke. 1. bind 1876, p. 69-83. Tf. I.
THE COLONY IN GONIUM 83
INDEX OF FIGURES
Figs. 1-19 and 23—Gonium pectorale.
Figs. 21-22—Gonium socialis.
Figs. 1-6—Show a series of stages in the growth of the typical 16 celled
colonies with square central intercellular space. X about 600.
Fig. 7—Colony beginning to break up at three points, the protoplasmic con-
tinuity between adjacent cells is broken, allowing the formation of square
or oblong intercellular spaces. X about 600.
Figs. 8 and 9—Nearly mature colonies; 8 older than 9. 8 X about 500. 9 X
about 600.
Fig. 1o—Beginning of reproduction. a cell beginning to divide. b First
division completed. c Second division completed. Outlines of the daugh-
ter cells do not come out in the reproduction. X about 600.
Figs. 11 and 12—Colonies with central cells forming more or less rhomboidal
groups. X about 600.
Fig. 13—Photographed slightly out of focus to show the pattern formed by
the cell boundaries. X about 600.
Figs. 14 and 15—Irregular and abnormal colonies. X about 600.
Fig. 16—Colony splitting to form two eight celled colonies. X about 600.
Figs. 17-20—Eight celled colonies formed by inhibition of cell division at
eight celled stage. Background painted out in Fig. 17 so as to bring out
the cilia. X about goo. Fig. 18 X about 600. Fig. 19, edge view, X about
350. Fig. 20 X about 600.
Figs. 21 and 22—Four celled colonies. In Fig. 22 all four of the cells are
dividing in different planes.
Fig. 23—Colony breaking up in fixation. The cells fly apart quite violently
and lie scattered about as shown.
A,
Me ? Ah i ie
iy Sta Nt A
Ls iy iog
ee hg)
‘ Lay
} }
a
——s
——
THE MODERN THEORY OF THE CELL AS A COMPLEX
OF ORGANIZED UNITS
By E. W. Roserts.
CONTENTS
ity oliapnmeyelbroavornes ehatal elanhobialolalae Sooo oMIGecO NAS Gos OGUcmOncEOOOsU oT odo do 85
ZenGenetale Discussions obncell-stnuctine sacra okra cetorsteliole te sialererociereletete 88
2. lillustrationef stich unities\ of decreasing value...) <..cl nes caves 890
AMMAR COMPALAVeRStIOY.: Ol) CElSis1a) tiaice siciicpeielisimne aicloiaiety sie sistas ois sipieiere 89
Muscle fibrils, as differentiated within the cell...................- 90
Theory of the ebb and flow of units between nucleus and reticulum 92
Mutual stimulation of cells in tissues and its results.............. 93
Qualitative differentiation of cells, leading to mutants and tissues.. 94
Effects of varying food upon cells and cell parts.................. 04
Yolk formation in eggs and embryonic tissue.............eseee00: 04
Degeneration of larvalMtisstte anton rOOdSe 4.4. ae/ceie ciel te ciclereree eee er 06
Some Special Cell Structures: Pigment Masses, Pseudopodia, Etc. 06
Epidermal cells and) theirs products: s...-4)3 vlys alors’ te sicker tateia ci elasiee eel 07
Seo sree CS eee and Po cela ne Dieos OUR ae Soka conn Dee pac. os Samco ne or 100
Binireleatewcelll sua scm cel eters ei eees neat crank aces Sieve tela fe otis Pete topsts Povohewel oe 100
Hormationor: wallsjand skeletons! by \cellsaj.2.. eo e sein ere cle IOI
INervelacell sipeen ra etre ater Murer iein crayactn alieaeteresewepaiete: Saliee ci marcl Me ive os eneeear 101
5. The theory of the interrelation of nuclear and cytoplasmic units...... 102
lihistratedmbywinhizopodsehemasr esis seis recieve eietsnroriorekieiere 103
iiliustratedabyals pikosyitasecea cima acclse acetic cick 105
I. INTRODUCTION AND DEFINITION
The matter herein is not presented in a dogmatic, but rather
in a suggestive, spirit. It is believed that the photographs present
evidence in support of the views advanced.
*The writer wishes to extend his thanks to all who have aided in the preparation of
this work. In an especial way he wishes to express his obligation to Dr. S. G. Shanks
of Albany, N. Y., and Mr. Frank Dienelt, Loda, Ili., both deceased. Dr. Shanks was
much interested in the theories advanced in the paper and prepared some 800 slides of
serial sections from which these cytological photographs were made. Mr. Dienelt intro-
duced the writer to beauties of insect microscopy. This great hearted farmer, microsco-
pist, and astronomer was, for more than 60 years, an arduous worker in the advancement
of his favorite studies. During this time he made upward of 20,000 microscopic slides
illustrating insect structure.
86 ROBERTS
The writer has found the view that the cell is composed of
smaller units, each of which has a somewhat sharply defined work,
of great value in forming a comprehensive mental picture of living
matter. While this view, as opposed to that which regards proto-
plasm as a definite substance, is in no sense new and 1s the one held
by most cytologists, the writer believes that the real significance of
this newer view has not been fully realized by students.
Life is not to be looked upon as a force or a principle, but
rather as the sum total of the component materials and forces enter-
ing into a given relation. The recognizable persistence of such a
relation, we speak of as its life. Any change in the components
entering into a given relation produces a corresponding change in
the net result. This accounts for the constant change in the expres-
sion of all organic and inorganic groups, which is called evolution.
Text-books have taught for the last fifty years that the cell
is “the unit” of such “living,” organic structure; and that it is com-
posed of a mystic jelly substance called protoplasm, which jelly (by
powers equally mystic) is capable of carrying on all the varied
processes of life.
Many modern workers are inclined to believe that the cell is
not “the unit” of organic structure, but that more correctly speaking
it is only one of a series of natural groupings, being in fact a whole
household by itself, made up of smaller and smaller groupings of
units governed entirely by natural chemical and physical conditions.
In the spirit of this conception the cell, which is in truth a con-
venient unit, may be described as a series of groupings of structures,
increasing in complexity upward, arranged by past environment,
and capable of modification by present environment.
Certain of these smaller units that make up the cell are clearly
recognizable with the technic of the day; some of them at the other
extreme are of the order of the molecule, with which the chemist
must acquaint us; doubtless there are still other intermediate units
lying between these extremes about which, at the present moment,
we can only speculate, since they are too minute for microtechnic and
too complex and multiform for satisfactory chemical analysis.
For more satisfactory approach to the problems involved I pro-
pose the following analysis of the cell structure; and taking the cell
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 87
as the “unit” of study we may conceive the following order of subor-
dinate units:
1. Intra-cellular units of the first order:—the nucleus; the
cytoplasmic mass ; and possibly the centrosphere. These seem to be
somewhat coordinate in rank and subject to recognizable interac-
tions.
2. Intra-cellular units of the second order:—(a) Within
nucleus—chromosomes, spindle fibrils, etc.; (b) without nucleus
(cytoplasm )—chloroplastids and other plastids, pyrenoids, centro-
spheres, etc. As a collective, descriptive term for the various kinds
of units of this order, within the nucleus, I propose the term nucleo-
some; for those constituting the cytoplasm, the term cytosome. In
the light of our ignorance of just what portions of the protoplasm
do the particular things done within it, it is desirable to have such a
term referring to the complex and composite nature of protoplasm
in order to prevent us looking upon these various products as formed
by the whole body of matter as a unitary mass. It is the thesis of
this paper that work of the cell is done by the differentiated units of
which the cell is composed, rather than by a “substance.”
3. Intra-cellular units of the third order. Our analysis of this
order of unit halts and awaits a more perfect technic. We have,
however, gone far enough to feel that the chromosomes of the
nucleus are composed of bodies—granules—arranged with some
definiteness upon the linin thread-work. Whether there is a similar
differentiation in other cell units we cannot say certainly from obser-
vation.
4. Intra-cellular units of the nt?. order. Here belong the
chemical unities of the order of the molecule. It is not the purpose
of this paper to discuss the units of this class. We can only say
that the characteristics of the higher units come from the character
and relations of these; and that there are probably several series of
ascending units between these and those suggested under 3 above.
Some of these subordinate units at least are endowed with one
particular distinguishing quality: they undergo binary division at
certain periods of their growth. It seems probable indeed that this
is the process by which all organic groups multiply ; and it is possible
88 ROBERTS
that this extends even throughout the ultimates of inorganic phe-
nomena.
2. GENERAL DISCUSSION OF CELL STRUCTURE
The cell, as a rule, consists of a body composed of smaller
units, which carry on all the vegetative processes of the group.
This is usually termed the cyto-reticulum. This cyto-reticulum
body contains an important structure called the nucleus, which plays
an important part in the divisions of the cell, both direct and indi-
rect. The nucleus, as we find it functioning in indirect divisions of
the cells in higher forms of organic life, was not always present in
the complexity in which it now exists. This is suggested by the
fact that it is structurally much simpler in the lower types of cells.
It must have developed from its phylogenetic ancestors, just as is
true of all higher organic structures. Its functioning as a compound
division-organ may have arisen from the compounding of the binary
division functions of lower organic units whose union gave rise to it.
The cell as we know it today, represents a line of descent from
a remote geologic past, its present structure of nucleus and cyto-
plasm having grown from primitive groupings of lower and lower
elements.
Furthermore the organic is but the inorganic in certain natural
groupings. Life both comes into view and disintegrates from its
groupings by natural processes. The more we know both of or-
ganic and inorganic, the more reasonable becomes the assumption
that the principle of the inorganic is the same as of the organic.
Strasburger states the matter in this way: “The original proto-
plasm had no nucleus, all its parts being capable of both formative
and nutritive functions. Then there was a gradual separation of
both formative and nutritive parts, and the formative parts were the
first differentiated carriers of hereditary qualities.
At first they were scattered in the cytoplasm, but later they be-
came grouped, as in the Cyanophyceae; next the nucleus would be
marked off by a membrane. Simple constriction might suffice for
the division of such a nucleus, but as the difference between the
hereditary units became so great that each unit carried only one
quality, a more exact division would become necessary. The units
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 89
would become arranged longitudinally in a thread, where they would
undergo doubling, and the longitudinal division of the thread would
separate the products of that doubling.”
3. ILLUSTRATIONS OF SUCH UNITIES OF DECREASING VALUE
All organic structures show arrangement comparable to this;
these relations are determined by natural conditions and are seem-
ingly but a recapitulation in all the groups.
A typical series might be thus enumerated: nation, state, county,
city, person, cells, cytosomes, daughter cytosomes, etc., clear
down to the negative electrical corpuscle which is now deemed by
many to be close to the border-land between matter and energy.
In a similar way, a series of animal structures such as muscle
serves well as an illustration. The muscles cover the skeleton, and
give iorm to the body; the muscle group is made up of individual
muscles, which in turn are made up of bundles of muscle cells ; these
muscle cells are constructed of intracellular fibrils, which in turn are
formed of smaller units.
Such groupings might be further illustrated, but enough is
shown, to illustrate the fact, that higher groups are all composed of
smaller groups, extending indefinitely lower apparently than optical
instruments alone will ever carry us.
4. COMPARATIVE STUDY OF CELLS
There is a crying need for comprehensive knowledge of the life
history of the various types of cells. In order to be effective this
must be comparative and be based on the three great phases of cell
life, the complete ontogenetic stages through which a cell passes on
its way to its natural end :—viz., its
Pro,—or growth,—stages.
Meta,—or functioning,—stages.
Ana,—or disintegration,—stages.
The probable phylogenetic significance of the ontogenetic stages
of derivation and development would form an interesting phase of
the treatment,—numbers of types being brought together for com-
parison.
A knowledge of the chemistry and physics of the various types
at different stages is badly needed, also of the relations of cell types
go ROBERTS
to their neighboring cell types, and to their other environmental con-
ditions; and as badly needed as any phase, is an understanding of
the relation between the vegetative cytosome system and the nucleus.
This is a gold mine of the future; no better field lies before the
young student of biology.
Muscle Fibrils, as Differentiated Within the Cell
That the cell can be extremely complicated, is well shown in
figure 3, of the long section of the multinucleated muscle cells of a
spider’s leg; it will be plainly seen that the cell cavity contains many
nuclei, scores of them in some cases. These giant muscle cells may
be degenerate muscle bundles in which the walls of the component
cells are not developed. In such a case the structure is termed a
syncytium.
The walls of these cells, of which a better view is had in a cross
section (Fig. 4), are seen to be lined with long bundles of cytosomes,
which arise in plastids derived from the nuclear reticulum.
The plastids from which such cellular fibrils originate are well
shown in figure 1, and a later stage of the same in figure 2, from
the back thoracic muscles of the Tussock Moth. The female of the
Tussock Moth is wingless, and as a result we may expect to find
early atrophy of the back thoracic muscles which move the wings in
this sex.
Figures I and 2 both represent the female of this moth at two-
day intervals. In figure 2 all but two of the muscle cells show dis-
tinct signs of degeneration, being much shrunken.
Ee ban
Fig. A.—The muscle cells in the leg of Spiders. The large cross section shows the
fibrils arranged in flat radial plates: from the leg of Anglena.
The longitudinal sections and the small cross sections are in the early blast-stages,
from embryo of Lycosa.
THE CELE AS: A COMPLEX, OF UNITS gti
Fig. B.—Diagram of the nuclear attachments with the cytosome fibril system, in the
leg muscles of a Spider, Agalena. Nuclear extensions are connected with the cell mem-
branes.
Figure 5 shows the muscle-cells of a newly hatched frog tad-
pole’s tail ; the cytosome fibrils are in active stages of binary division.
Many of the cells are multinucleated, and all these early stages of
cells contain cytosome plastids of elaborated foods, commonly called
the yolk grains; these are used as food for the growing fibrils.
Figure 6 is a long section of the back thoracic muscles of a fly
pupa. Note the cyto-yolk grains and tracheal tubes between the
muscle bundles ; also the perimysium cells in the fibril bundles.
Figures 7 and 8 show long and cross sections of the developing
cytosome fibrils in a Salamander pup. Note the increasing bulk by
binary divisions of the fibrils.
It has been taught for years that the contractile and extensile
powers of cells are due to what was termed “the general contractil-
ity of protoplasm’’; this is evidently an error, as close observation
will show that the motile and contractile powers are due to specific
cytosome structures, in many cases in the form of fibrils.
The tails of sperms, all muscles, cilia, flagella, dendrites, pseudo-
podia, nerve fibrils, etc., are moved by contractile cytosomes.
In figures 9-10 the vegetative stages of sperm development are
shown. They are from the testicle of a salamander. The entire
shape of the cell and of its appendages is here determined; the motile
tail has cytosomes which both form and move it.
All the Protozoa or single cell animals and plants are extremely
complicated, and have the cytosome structures elaborately diversi-
fied in function, as contractile and sensory fibrils, secretive and ex-
cretive organs, and in some cases sexual organs; they are not the
simple jelly masses often described in text books.
Figure 11 is a section of the intestinal cells of the Carpenter
Q2 ROBERTS
Ant. The photo shows nicely the cytosome fibrils which form and
move the cilia on them.
Figure 12 shows the developing sperms in the mother-cells of
the earth worm. The sperms are developing the cytosome fibrils in
the tails in a variety of stages.
Theory of Ebb and Flow of Units From Reticulum to Nucleus
The cyto-reticulum cell-structures are extremely complex in
nature, and they show modifications for the performance of a great
variety of function in a single cell; the division of labor among them
is in some cases as varied as a more highly organized metazoan
group, each individual cell having need for more or less of all the
physital requirements of the higher groups.
Paramecium is a good subject in which to study the diversity
of cytosome structures in a single cell. It is to the variations in the
arrangements and functions of these cytosomes, and their smaller
component groups, that we owe the great variety of expression found
in organic life.
They are the true vegetative body of the cell, and it is possible
that their arrangement and character is transmitted to the nucleus by
minute representatives of the vegetative groups.
These representatives are assembled on the nuclear reticulum
during early pro-stages of indirect or mitotic division; during direct
division of the cell these representatives are not used, as the entire
vegetative body is directly divided.
As in a metazoan group we find the body characters are trans-
mitted by the sex sells, it follows that these characters must have
been received from some source before they could be reproduced or
given out again. Thus we see a constant working of a process in
both directions :—the nucleus constantly buds out the characters of
the cell body, while the body characters as constantly modify the
nuclear characters.
This principle may be illustrated from a yet higher grouping.
A nation, state, city, etc., will be constantly modified by emigrants
from other countries, states and cities, the modification depending on
the relative proportions and strengths of the new factors, the whole
assemblage being also as constantly modified by the total environ-
ment.
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 93
In a similar way it may be argued that the cytosome body bears
a corresponding relation to the nucleus; and we believe this point
should be most thoroughly investigated, as no history of cell life can
be complete without it.
Mutual Stimulation of Cells in Tissues, and Its Results
As, in the ontogenetic development of a metazoan group, new
types and functions and groupings of cells constantly come into
view, we suggest that such new types should arise in many cases, by
some form of cell association,—a semi-conjugational arrangement.
Phylogenetically we well know that many new types and varie-
ties arise by conjugation. This is the advantage of sex and indirect
division,—that we get greater variety, and as a result greater re-
source from uniting differing individuals, than from like individuals.
Such a mutually stimulating grouping of a non-conjugating na-
ture is shown in figure 13, of the giant spines or sexual horns on a
male fly; figure 14 is a photo of the giant nuclei of these horns, while
figures 15 and 16 are vertical sections of giant spines from other
parts of the fly’s body.
We have examined the nuclei of hundreds of the giant spine
cells on this pupa, and all alike show in section, various numbers of
cells with their nuclei in contact.
The explanation that seems reasonable, is that many of these
spines arose in their phylogenetic development as a result of muta-
tions produced by mixing slightly varying individual cells of the
same or allied varieties.
In figures 18 and 20 will be seen the so-called “nurse-cells”
which aid in forming the ovum. These nurse-cells are evidently of
the nature of the stimulating cells in these giant spine groups. Their
function must be something more than supplying food, for they
themselves have to be fed so they may attain their giant size. They
are constant in number in a species; thus this variety of Ephemera
has six, while the variety of Mosquito has four and a variety of
Chironomous has only one.
The real food cells are evidently the jacket of small cells which
surround the ovum. From these small cells come the chromidia
which form the yolk cytosomes.
94 ROBERTS
There are also, in the embryo sac of all higher plants, various
numbers of large cells cut out along with the ovum cell. This
phenomenon is quite widespread, and it seems as if blast cells requir-
ing large amounts of nutriment cannot encompass the task without
other cells of large size in the group.
This is an interesting field for research.
There are various other conjugant cells in different tissues of
these young animals that show similar arrangements; but this being
a striking type, we offer it in hope of stimulating further investiga-
tion.
Qualitative Differentiation of Cells, Leading to Mutants and Tissues
The two cells resulting from mitotic division are not in all cases
like their progenitor; they are in many cases progressive mutants.
That is, the contents of the cells resulting from the divisions may
differ much in their vegetative functions and in their subsequent de-
velopment. This becomes very evident when we watch the develop-
ment of their vegetative systems from the nuclosome divisions of the
nucleolus. The nucleosomes show variations in number, shape, size,
position, structure and functions.
There thus arises in metazoan tissues a constantly varying type
of cells, which is supplemented in many cases, such as ferns and
other lower plants, by well known semi-conjugational cell arrange-
ments. This 1s usually known as apogamy.
These mutations have an ancestral origin.
Effects of Varying Food Upon Cells and Cell Parts
We also suggest that the new types of cytosomes which elab-
orate the yolk granules and other food products in these growing
cells, may have a direct modifying action on the other cytosomes
which use them for food.
Food and the quest for the same, has been a great factor in the
development of organic life, and it is wise to investigate the onto-
genetic development, to detect traces of such reaction.
Yolk Formation in Eggs and Embryonic Tissues
If the type of product to be elaborated in a cyto-plastid is of a
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 95
food nature, the daughter cytosomes do not remain adherent as in
fibril products, but lie freely in the plastid wall in a semifluid mass.
The yolk of all egg cells is formed primarily by these cyto-
plastid inbuddings ; this is a very elaborate process, and spreads over
the time of the growth of the egg, from the mitosis which cuts out
the future sex cell, to the time of the maturity of the yolk products.
A fine type of the elaboration of yolk plastids is shown in figure
17, of the ova of a spider. Here the enormous growth of the yolk
cyto-plastids is well depicted.
The sex nucleus of the egg takes little part in the yolk formation
of insect eggs; there are special nutritive cells set apart, which fur-
nish elaborated cytosome products. Some of these cytosome prod-
ucts continue their growth in the plasma of the sex cell, there form-
ing anew from the pabulum the typical yolk-cells or plastids.
The nutritive cells form a typical ovilemma around the sex cell.
A good type of this is shown in figure 18, of the young ova of an
Ephemera, in which case six cells are situated around the micropyle,
while a complete jacket of smaller cells form the egg membrane
proper.
The yolk cyto-plastids present a close resemblance to true cell
types ; in some cases showing a cell wall, plasma, and a staining body
resembling a nucleus. This body is capable of division and subdi-
vision; see figure 19, of the same Ephemera ova further matured.
Another illustration of these yolk cyto-plastids is seen in figure
20, of the nearly mature eggs of the mosquito.
The yolk of ova is thus seen to be a special product of certain
food cells (the ovalemma), which live for the sole purpose of fur-
nishing food for the future embryo.
In developing embryos there is constantly a part of the cells set
aside to manufacture special foods for the growing tissue cells.
This gives the growing embryo a constantly developing and changing
diet, and this process will doubtless be found to have a phylogenetic
derivation and significance. It gives a continually new and develop-
ing food environment, and must be a profound factor in the modifi-
cation and growth of the ontogenetic series of types of cells and their
groups.
96 ROBERTS
Degeneration of Larval Tissue Into Foods
After the larva is hatched from the egg, the yolk food supply
will be found nearly exhausted, and an immediate new food supply
must be had. This when obtained is constantly assimilated by the
larval tissues, which re-elaborate therefrom according to their needs.
During this larval stage, there is an extensive storage of cyto-
some food products: fat, yolk ,etc., beside all the larval tissue which
will become useless when the pupa stage is entered upon.
These larval tissues as fast as they become ontogenetically use-
less, suffer anatosis stages and thereby disintegrate into foods.
There are countless variations of these processes. In many cases it
is accomplished by phagocytosis, as in figure 21, from a moth pupa,
and figure 22, from an ant pupa.
There are in many cases anatosis phases on a large scale, and in
some cases reversion to primitive organic types will be found.
In a developing pupa such as the Carpenter Ant,—Camponotus,
—we have a striking illustration of the great variety of types among
the food cells. These types are all grown in certain hereditary loca-
tions, and have in each type certain elaborated food products, which
mature at certain times, and have certain stages of growing cells
to feed. When mature they either undergo anatosis where grown, or
migrate by amoeboid movements, or in blood streams, to where they
are to be usd.
In one type of food cell there are two large bilateral plastids de-
veloped, which dominate all the other plastids. The other plastids
develop as a swarm of dark staining bodies on the reticulum of the
nucleus, between the dominant plastids. (See Fig. 23.) In an-
other type the plastids are developed in many equal sized bodies as
shown in figure 24. In still another type of these food cells, they
become detached and are carried in blood streams into the develop-
ing legs, etc., where they undergo anatosis reduction into blood pabu-
lum and are used as food.
Some Special Cell Structures, Pigment Masses, Pseudopodia, Etc.
It should be kept in mind that cells with irregular outlines are
hereditarily just as marked, and have just as natural groupings in
their fundamental makeup, as the most symmetrical ones. A glance,
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS Q7
for example, at the irregular outlines of the pigment cells of a sala-
mander (Fig. 27), will show the apparent anastomosing of the pseu-
dopodia ; these reticulated appearances are caused by the branching
of the groups of cytosomes, the branches becoming superimposed in
the focal plane.
Figure 28 gives, for comparison, a view of a pigment ceil from a
young fish embryo, with the fibrils in a conventional radiating
arrangement.
In a pigment cell the cyto-fibrils are self delineating ; in an object
as colorless as an Ameba in a living state, such structures are prac-
tically invisible, only proper fixing and staining reagents being able to
show them. In fact, this is the reason so many writers have called
them “structureless protoplasm.”
In Polycistine, Foraminifera, Rhizopods, etc., the pseudopodia
are sent out at certain hereditarily determined places in the cell wall,
forming “arm holes” in the silica, lime and chitine cases. (See Fig.
29 and Fig. 30.) These arms are merely cytosome structures, which
are capable of extension and contraction. Some writers figure the
so-called spindles of these pseudopodia, but none seem to realize
their value.
During life a continual flow of cell plasma with floating cor-
puscles of cytosome derivation, may be seen over and among the
fibrils. This flowing, streaming and boiling of cytosome products is
due apparently to chemical and physical changes which take place
on the addition of various components, by which the chemical bal-
ances of the groups are all thrown out of place and new readjust-
ments follow. This furnishes us with the processes which are
spoken of collectively as life.
Epidermal Cells and Their Products
The markings on insect hairs and scales are all cytosome prod-
ucts, and they serve a variety of purposes, from mimicry to the gor-
geous color effects seen in flies, bees, beetles, butterflies, etc. (See
Fig. 31, of the scales of Lepisma; and Fig. 32, of the cyto-fibrils in
the walls of moth scales in cross section. )
98 ROBERTS
4H
Wu 7
Fig. C.—Diagram of cross and longi- Fig. D.—Diagram of Branching spines
tudinal section of scale of Tussock moth, of a spider, showing long and cross sections
showing arrangement of fibrils. of the system of fibrils.
These scales are formed by vesicular sac-like extrusions of cer-
tain epidermal cells, and are caused by the growth and arrangement
of the cytosome structures, which form groups of fibrils by binary
divisions of the cytosomes remaining adherent in a longitudinal
manner. These cyto-fibrils, by their aggregate extension, push the
wall of the cell outward, forming a vesicle, in which the fibrils are
plainly seen as the striations; later the vesicles are flattened or other-
wise shaped, and the chitin of the cell wall becomes hardened.
In inscts which go through a pupal stage, very peculiar phe-
nomena occur. When the larva is mature, and ready to enter the
pupal state, the larval skin is ruptured and cast off. The insect now
has the wings, legs, antennae, etc., well developed. They are folded
by the insect ventrally, and the casting off of the larval skin ruptures
the epiderm cells, which exude their cytosome products in a fluid
state. This forms a coating of slime which rapidly oxidizes in the
air, forming the pupal case.
The pupa now being protected by the pupa case, again elaborates
its cytosome products in the epidermal cells, but this time they exude
slowly, and form the scales as above. (See text Figs. C-G; and PI. 6.
Figs. 31-36. )
In figure 37, we have a strongly stained view of the cytosomes
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 99
Fig. E.—Diagram of long and cross
section of the cytosome fibrils in the spines
of Trogdotyle larva. The spines have 5 Fig. F.—Diagram of a multispined cell
heads or fibrils. from the tongue of a Syrphus fly.
in the epidermal cells of a locust. By the extrusion of these cyto-
somes we get a variety of products: plain chitine, single scales,
branching scales and multispined scales.
All the chitin structures of insects are formed by the oxidization
of these various cytosome products. The diverse nature and group-
ings of these vegetative structures produce a multitude of external
markings in organic life.
All the cell processes of assimilation and excretion are carried
on by these cytosomes, and all the various animal and vegetable
structures are the results of their groupings.
Fig. G.—Multi-spined cell from the pulvilli of a fly’s foot;
showing cytosome fibrils.
Figure 38 is a section of the spiral tracheal tubes of a butterfly
larva, Mamestra picta. The tubes are of dermal origin and consist
of a layer of hypodermal cells which pour out their cytosome prod-
100 ROBERTS
ucts into the lumen of the tubes, where the products are oxidized into
a chitinous intima. This intima is thrown into spiral crenulations or
threads by contraction and relaxations of the muscular system.
These tubes sometimes contain dermal scales or spines.
Secretory Cells
In animals all the gland products are elaborated by these cells, a
fine type of which is shown in the liver cells of a spider (Fig. 39).
Here will be seen the cyto-plastids full of their peculiar products,
while those on the margin are breaking down in ana-phase, and void-
ing their contents into the duct, where it is conveyed to its place of
disposal.
Figure 40 is a view of the salivary glands of a Katydid. The
large plastids are full of the peculiar semi-fluid cell-products.
Binucleate Cells
In some insects such as Apis, and some Hemiptera (See Fig.
24), the intestinal and fat cells will in many cases be found binucle-
ated. It is believed that these nuclei are physiologically different.
One nucleus, and its cytosomes, is vegetative undergoing anatosis,
the elaborated products being discharged into the food mass in the
intestine. This nucleus is as continually replaced by division of the
other, which is a generative nucleus. This adaptation may be due to
the quantities of fat used in wax and other products.
In most animals, however, the secreting cytosomes elaborate
their products several times in succession; and finally the entire
cell contents are voided, the cell being replaced by a new one.
During anatosis the cell products are disposed of in two ways;
(1) voided into ducts and carried from the body (excretion), or
(2) emptied into the blood circulation, there acting as a food or stim-
ulus for other cells in a pro- or meta-stages.
Anatosis is sometimes called “self phagocytosis,” and is a wide-
spread function in the animal and vegetable world; phagocytosis by
amoeboid cells may be considered as another phase of this phe-
nomena.
Anatosis is the complement, or the opposite, of digestion; by
the discharge of anatosis products into food masses the food is
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS IOI
partically disorganized, and is then absorbed by other cells in a meta-
stage, which re-elaborate it. They then undergo anatosis them-
selves, voiding the products into the lymphatic or the blood system
(as the case may be), by which it is carried to the other cells of the
group, which use the nourishment for pro- and meta-stages.
This constant succession of pro-, meta- and ana-phases of cyto-
some life keep alive the body of the person or cell group. Certain
series of cytosomes constantly undergo ana-phases, that new groups
may undergo pro and meta-stages. When the pro and meta-stages no
longer equal the ana-stages, deterioration and death ensues.
This occurs naturally when the series of acquired hereditary*
characters are completed in the ontogenetic development.
Formation of Walls and Skeletons by Cells
The cytosome membranes of many types of cells, which in many
cases form the structural basis of cell walls, are often filled in with
deposits of various substances, such as lime, silica, chitine, cellulose,
etc. These substances do not easily decay, so we have many fine
records left us of the arrangement of the original cytosomes which
formed the membrane, in and on which the deposit was laid. Such
elaborate deposits are well shown in Diatoms, Polycistinee, Foramim-
fera, Sponge spicules, etc.
These cell walls all owe their peculiar form and structures to
the minute (cytosome) groupings of the vegetative bodies of the
cells.
Nerve Cells
Figure 43 is a section of the optic lobe of the brain of a moth.
The multitude of curious extensions which nerve cells put forth are
all actuated and formed by the cytosome groups, their various ar-
rangements staining nicely ; so intricate is the complex of these cyto-
some nerve structures that it is now deemed possible that there is not
a fixed living cell in a metazoan body that is not reached by their
*Author’s Note—It is believed that most students of the theory of Evolution will
agree that organisms do acquire new characters, both in an ontogenetic and phylogenetic
agit various schools of Evolution merely differ as to the factors and their relative
importance in producing the new aspects which organisms acquire.
We have carefully avoided taking sides in these arguments in this work, as they
have an abundant literature of their own.
102 ROBERTS
extensions. It is due to the growth and multiplication of these ex-
tensions from the cytosome groups, that we get growth and increase
of the cell group. How rapid this growth is will be seen when it is
stated that in some insects the complete span of time from egg to
mature insect is but a few days.
Figure 44 shows the growth of the cytosome fibrils in the brain
_ cells of a Salamander.
Figures 45 and 46 show the active growing stages of the optical
elements of a Tussock Moth eye. There are three days’ difference
between figures 45 and 46; the number of cells has not increased.
The growth is entirely due to the enormous development of the cyto-
some systems.
Figure 42 shows a cross section of these cytosome fibril ele-
ments in the same eye.
5. THEORY OF VEGETATIVE CELL STRUCTURES AND THEIR RELATION TO
THE NUCLEUS
The relation of the vegetative cyto-structures to the nucleus is
of the utmost importance to a comprehensive understanding of the
problem of organic life.
The structure of a typical cell in vegetative stage as conceived
by the writer is given in the diagram below (text figure 8).
Fig. H.—Diagram designed to show the rela-
tion of nucleosomes and cytosomes in the cell.
1, nucleolus; 2, nuclear units—nucleosomes; 3,
nuclear membrane; 4, cytosomes or pyrenoids; 5,
daughter cytosomes; 6, grand-daughter cytosomes ;
7, cell wall; 8, centrosome.
The cell and all its lower cytosome groupings are constantly
arranged in halves of duplicate polarity. All these groups have
definite family-numbers of components, a minimum point of great-
est stability, and a maximum point of instability.
This is in accord with the discovery by Mendeleef of the peri-
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 103
odic law of the elements; it has been possible for him to formulate
the principal in accordance with which it is possible to group the
various elements in the physico-chemical world into something like a
harmonious scale.
The nucleus of a cell contains a body called the nucleolus; this
body contains in various semi-fluid forms the balancing polarity
groups of units. That is, if the vegetative group contains say four-
teen negative pyrenoids, the nucleolus will contain a balancing group
of fourteen positive units of equal value. If fourteen is the num-
ber at which the components of the group are at their greatest point
of stability, an octave higher or double the number, or twenty-eight,
will be the point of instability.
The growth of the cell from its point of stability to its adult
point of instability is caused by a recapitulation of this same process
in all the lower component groups; this continues until by binary
divisions of all the cytosome groups, the stability of the larger cell
groups is at its weakest point.
The nucleolus units are now attracted strongly by the negative
vegetative groups, and this divides the nucleolus units into two
groups of fourteen each. These immediately go toward their nega-
tive pyrenoid groups, and take their places in the middle of an equal
number of vegetative units. _ Acomplete division of the cell contents
is thus effected, both of the resultant cells being at the point of great-
est stability.
Illustrated by Rhizopods
We cannot accept the view of Haeckel and other early writers
that Rhizopods are the lowest of the forms of single cell life.
The Rhizopods are all parasitic or degenerate animal cells,
which live on other organic matter, having lost the power of making
their own food through their own chloroplast system.
Therefore we may expect to find the chloroplast system in all
animal cells in a more or less rudimentary or specialized condition.
In all the Rhizopods the nucleus forms the chloroplast system
by outbudding minute portions of nucleus matter called chromidia ;
these form all the vegetative parts of the cell.
By the fusion of several of these chromidia the new nuclei of a
104 ROBERTS
progeny of embryos or gametes are formed, the entire body being
thus broken down into young.
Fig. I.—Reproduction in Rhizopods.
See the works on Rhizopods by Lister, Calkins, Hertwig, El-
petiewsky and Siger.
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 105
Now let us see if this production of plastids in all animal cells
is not from similar chromidia fragments budded from the nucleus.
In the cyto-plastids from an ant, Camponotus (Fig. 47), we see the
swarm of chromidia emerging from the nucleus in all stages of
growth. The larger plastids have various numbers of these chrom-
idial granules, which take the nuclear stain very precisely.
Compare this cell with the figure of a Rhizopod by Hertwig
(Fig. 44), and the resemblance is striking. There is this difference,
however, in the Rhizopod: the plastids become detached as young,
while in the food cell of the Camponotus they are specialized as food
for growing tissues.
These chromidia are the nuclear elements of all the cytosome
systems, and that they are entitled to be called cells in some cases is
well shown by their ability to reform into definite nuclear structures.
Heidenhain’s great work on “The Cell and Plasma” states that
these chromidia have been found in all cell structures but muscle
fibrils ; here it is evidently diffused among other elements.
This agrees essentialiy with the numerous observations of the
author. All the lower protozoa, both plants and animals, form their
various swarm spores in this manner from chromidia.
In many cases the nucleus remains intact until after the spores
are reieased, thus showing that the spores are not formed by its frag-
mentation.
Illustrated by Spirogyra
Spirogyra jugalis has a chromosome number of 14-28.
Several varieties of Spirogyra were examined, and the chromo-
some number of the type can be compared with the pyrenoid number
of the different specimens examined.
Below are tabulated the counts of the pyrenoid numbers in many
cells of each kind.
The pyrenoids should be counted only at adult stages or immedi-
ately after division; since between these points the pyrenoids are
undergoing division and are indeterminate in number:
S. maxima, adult 6 bands, 14 pyrenoids in a band.
S. hassallii, adult 2 bands, 14 pyrenoids in a band.
S. porticalis, adult 1 band, 28 pyrenoids in a band.
106 ROBERTS
. jugalis, adult 4 bands, 28 pyrenoids in a band.
fluviatilis, adult 4 bands, 14 pyrenoids in a band.
barians, 1 band, 14 pyrenoids in a band, adult.
tenuissima, 1 band, 56 pyrenoids in a band, adult.
condensata, 1 band, 7 pyrenoids in a band, adult.
setiformis, 4 bands, 7 pyrenoids in a band, adult.
ANAKAKY
The identification of the species may not be positive in all these
cases ; the individual variation is so great it is almost impossible.
The number of chloroplast bands does not seem material, they
simply represent divided pyrenoid groups; extra divisions, either
way, among the pyrenoids does not affect the results.
In many plants the pyrenoid groups may be compounded, as in
Zygnema and many Diatoms and Desmids.
(A diagram of No. 6 at adult and binary stage is given.)
Fig. J.—Division in the cells of Spirogyra.
During life there is a connecting filament between each pyrenoid
and the nucleus. Special effort is needed to determine whether
these relations exist between the vegetative and nuclear groups of
other types of cells as well. Here is a field almost untouched as yet.
For many years the vegetative division of the lower Algae was
described as a binary division. Research with modern staining
methods has developed the fact that the divisions are in reality but
little different from the mitotic divisions of higher plants.
True binary division does occur, however, in many well certi-
fied cases ; in such instances the nucleus seems to be the functionary
organ.
During indirect or mitotic division, the vegetative body is repre-
sented on the nuclear reticulum, the nucleoli units migrate outward
and are caught in the network of minor vegetative units.
These groups now undergo all their characteristic attractions
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 107
and repulsions which form the pro—and meta—stages of mitosis, by
which new cells get duplicate representation.
Cells which undergo binary division for long series of divisions
and only at rare intervals resort to mitosis or conjugational division,
use the nucleolus as a means of binary division; while the higher
Metazoan groups use mitosis almost entirely. By mitosis and cell
associations arise the elaborately diversified cell structures and func-
tions found in such groups.
A diagramatic sketch of the representatives on a nuclear spirem
in early synapsis stages of mitotic division in Spirogyra jugalis
might show something like figure It.
BDeeeD ee oOeseQeeseH eseQvecH eee 0000 ceOeH oe ee eer QeseOar20eD
PRETO MVLSC TS MCSE Mee rt M BAOMSCFAAFFOMAFOMNSFHO EAH see MeteM Berra eon
eters mo wOoFI oS oyrFooqpeasacgyver®*weroesesoeweesew eeSy C2eVed OLY
Fig. K.—Diagram illustrating binary division. The large dots of the upper row
represent the chromosomes, the smaller dots the minor units on the skein. The lower
row shows the division of all the components of the skein.
This has led up by easy stages to an understanding of the process
of conjugation.
In conjugation the nuclei of both male and female sex cells pre-
pare for remating by reducing the number of chromosomes, by which
each loses its opposite sex elements; the new nucleus is composed of
representatives from both parent chromosome groups, the character
of the new cell person depending on the dominant factors represented
at the union of the chromosome groups, modified constantly during its
life by environment.
In parthenogenesis the ovum nucleus undergoes segmentation
without conjugation and its attendant phenomena.
The body within the nucleus, called the nucleolus, plays an im-
portant part in the reformation of the vegetative structures of the
cyto-plasm after mitosis. As it is composed of inbudded opposites
of the vegetative groups, they would naturally be reproduced by its
outbuddings.
The contents of this body are found in a variety of semi-fluid
states, and is generally recognized by its peculiar staining properties,
the contained substance being known as chromatin.
108 ROBERTS
In early vegetative stages of cell life, the nucleolus undergoes a
remarkable series of binary divisions, producing within the nucleus a
number of daughter bodies known as nucleosomes. These bodies
enlarge by vacuolation, forming globular bodies, which migrate in
many cases to the nuclear membrane, and in many other cases come
to lie entirely outside of the membranes, to which they remain at-
tached by filaments.
A further duplication of this cytosome group now occurs in
many cases, the product of the first nucleolus reduction functioning
as nuclei for a second generation, which in turn function as nuclei
for a third generation, and these in turn produce other generations.
These subdivisions of the vegetative structures all bear a certain
hereditary relation to the family type, all being governed by the fam-
ily pitch or key, under the periodic or rhythmic law. In other words,
the family composition is written in a certain key, to which all the
factors bear a certain definite family relation, regardless of what the
pitch of the keynote may be.
In all these generations of nucleosomes, there are constantly
met certain heterogeneous divisions of the various elements, which
would at first thought appear to upset the validity of the conclusion.
The student of these matters will find plenty of examples for him-
self.
Mature thought brings us to believe that the keynotes are deter-
mined by the averages of the phenomena, not by individual depart-
ures from the family type. The averages form the dominant factors,
while the variants form the secondary or weaker factors of the
assemblage. This idea of averages gives us a good understanding of
the results obtained by crossing species with a varying number of
chromosomes.
According to Rosenberg, in the Botanical Gazette of September,
1909, page 234, he has obtained most interesting results in this line
with Drosera plants.
“In D. longifolia there are 40 chromosomes in the nuclei of the
sporophyte, and 20 in the gametophyte, while in D. rotundifolia the
numbers are 20 and Io respectively.”
“Tn the hybrid called D. abovata the sporophyte shows regularly
30 chromosomes, the anticipated number.”
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 10g
Rosenberg ‘‘crossed D. abovata with D. longifolia, and while
usually there were no results (he) obtained a few embryos. These
contained at least 33 chromosomes, and in one case 37 were counted.
The theoretical number would be 35.”
In the Botanical Gazette, Vol. 48, page 179, Gates gives the re-
sults of the cross between Oenothera lata, 14 chromosomes, and O.
gigas, with 28 chromosomes; the resultant hybrids show 20 and 22.
The theoretical number would be 21.
In figure 47 of the food storage cells of a Camponotus pupa, the
nuclei will be seen full of nucleosomes derived from reduction divi-
sions of the nucleolus. These nucleosomes are rapidly growing and
becoming drawn outward into the cyto-plasm fluids, in which plasm
are found the food products which they reorganize and store in meta-
phase.
Later in many cases, after these cyto-plastids have matured
their special cytosome products in meta-phase, the contents of the
plastids undergo anatosis reduction divisions.
The importance of close observation of the nucleosome bodies
during the formation of vegetative bodies cannot be overestimated ;
probably all had their origin phylogenetically from this source, no
matter how obscure their ontogenetic derivation may now be.
During mitosis or indirect cell division, the vegetative opposites
forming the nucleolus are supposed to undergo binary division, and
take their place as nucleosomes among the minor vegetative repre-
sentatives on the nuclear reticulum ; eventually they form the chrom-
osomes.
The nucleus and nucleolus are reformed in ana-phase of mitosis
by a reversal of the pro-stage.
The centrosome is a body which plays an important role in
mitotic cell divisions. As the direct or binary divisions of the cell
are carried on by the nucleolus, so the indirect division is initated by
binary division of the centrosome body. The nucleolus disappears
during mitotic cell division, and reappears at telophase; meanwhile
the centrosomes are functionally active. Their functions are homol-
ogous, each functioning in its own peculiar style of cell division.
IIO ROBERTS
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES
Pirate VI
Fig. 1. Cross section of the back thoracic muscles of a Tussock Moth
pupa, 4 day stage of a female.
Fig. 2. Cross section of the same group two days later; all but two of
the cells are now degenerating.
Fig. 3. Multinucleated muscle-cells from a Spider’s leg.
Fig. 4. Cross section of the above muscle-cells from a Spider.
Fig. 5. Long section of the muscle-cells in a newly hatched Frog
tadpole tail. The fibrils are undergoing longitudinal binary divisions.
Fig. 6. Long section of the back thoracic muscles of a Fly pupa, Sar-
chophaga, eight day stage.
PLaTE VII
Fig. 7. Muscle cells from a Salamander pup, showing the enormous
numbers of cytosome fibrils which arise.
Fig. 8. Cross section of the above muscle-cells, showing the rapid in-
crease of fibrils by division of cytosomes.
Fig. 9. Nucleosomes during early stages of sperm formation in Sala-
mander testis.
Fig. 10. Formation of tails by growth of cytosomes in the tails of Sala-
mander sperms.
Fig. 11. The growth of cytosome fibrils into cilia. From the intestinal
cells of an Ant pupa.
Fig. 12. The development of cytosome fibrils in the tails of Earthworm
sperms.
Pate VI
Piate VII
Toa
Aron
ors
i j aby :
PaaS eh oe ,
Se ee A SNe a hg ee ae
wy:
Bt
Hs
l
t
;
1
a
e
S
<3)
&
<
|
A,
Pirate IX
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS DET
Priate VIII
Fig. 13. Giant spines on the head of a male fly.
Fig. 14. Nuclei of giant spines of above, showing the cytosome fibrils
coiled in the cytoplasm around the nucleus.
Fig. 15. Vertical section of mutually stimulating cells of giant spines.
From a Fly pupa. Sarcophaga.
Fig. 16. Vertical section of mutually stimulating cells of a Fly pupa.
The nuclei are in contact.
Fig. 17. The formation of yolk plastids in Spider eggs.
Fig. 18. The nurse cells which secrete food for developing ova. Ephe-
mera.
Pruate IX
Fig. 19. Ephemera ova further developed showing the development of
the yolk plastids with their cytosome contents.
Fig. 20. Developing ova of the Mosquito, showing the formation of the
yolk plastids, also the nurse cells.
Fig. 21, Phagocytes invading fatty tissue. Tussock Moth pupa.
Fig. 22. Phagocytes breaking down tissue in the pupa of an Ant.
Camponotus.
Fig. 23. Food cells with large plastids. Camponotus.
Fig. 24. Food cell of a Fly, showing the plastids with their chromidia
contents. These chromidia originate within the nucleus.
112 ROBERTS
PLATE X
Fig. 25. Disintegration of food cells into blood pabulum. The cell
walls have dissolved and the contents are disintegrating. From the Ant
pupa, Campanotus.
Fig. 26. Shows cellular disintegration into blood pabulum in a Tussock
Moth pupa.
Fig. 27. Anastomosing pigment fibrils in the skin of the Salamander.
Fig. 28. Pigment cell with non-anastomosing cytosome fibrils. From a
young Fish.
Fig. 29. Silicious shells of Polycistinae from Barbadoes Islands.
Fig. 30. Calcareous shells of Foraminifera.
PLATE XI
Fig. 31. Scales of Lepisma, showing cytosome fibrils in the walls.
Fig. 32. Cross section of the scales of a Tussock Moth, showing the
cytosome fibrils in the walls.
Fig. 33. Multispined cells from the base of a Syrphus Fly tongue.
Fig. 34. Branching scales from a Spider, showing the divisions of the
cytosome fibrils which form the branches. Anglena.
Fig. 35. Ornamental spines of Trogdoderma larva. These symetrical
forms are all determined by the growth and character of the cytosome fibrils.
Fig. 36. Multispined cells from the foot-pad of a Fly. These are formed
by the cytosomes and enable the insect to walk on difficult surfaces.
PLATE X
ne FF op
a ae,
4
< 1h
Piate Xi
Piatt XII
gC I en Ee et A A A
a
i aera
« tf
Suis nH
SiR OT Bee Sel heruns ES
4
=
=
‘A
4
Q
&
<
4
a
THE CELL AS A COMPLEX OF UNITS 113
PLATE XII
Fig. 37. Strongly stained view of the giant spines on the saws of a Lo-
cust. The cytosome fibrils show nicely.
Fig. 38. Section of the tracheal tubes of a larva. Manestra picta.
Fig. 30. Plastids in the liver of a Spider. Anglena.
Fig. 40. View of the salivary glands of a Katydid. The cell is full of
the elaborated cytosome products.
Fig. 41. Binucleated intestinal and fat cells. Hemiptera.
Fig. 42. Cross section of the cytosome fibrils in a Tussock Moth eye.
PiatTe XIII
Fig. 43. Section of the optic lobe of a Moth, showing the cytosome nerve
extensions.
Fig. 44. View of the active extension of the fibrils of brain-cells. The
lower part is composed of sections of these cytosome fibrils.
Fig. 45. Section of the rapidly developing eye of a Tussock Moth, five
day pupal stage.
Fig. 46. Section of the same Tussock Moth pupal eye at the eight day
stage. The magnification is the same in both cases.
Fig. 47. Shows nucleosomes migrating outward and becoming cyto-
somes. From a Camponotus pupa.
Fig. 48. Shows the cytosomes functioning as nuclei in a new generation
of swarm cells. From a fresh water Rhizopod, after Hertwig.
DEPARTMENT OF NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
It is the purpose, in this department, to present from time to time brief original
notes, both of methods of work and of results, by members of the Society. All members
are invited to submit such items. In the absence of these there will be given a few brief
abstracts of recent work of more general interest to students and teachers. There will be
no attempt to make these abstracts exhaustive. They will illustrate progress without at-
tempting to define it, and will thus give to the teacher current illustrations, and to the
isolated student suggestions of suitable fields of investigation.—[Editor.]
A GIET TO THE SOCIETY
The Society is indebted to Mr. E. W. Roberts for a contri-
bution of $125 to the funds of the Society to defray the expenses
of printing the remarkable series of photographs accompanying
his article. Mr. Roberts is a photographer as well as an inde-
pendent student with the microscope, and the Secretary is glad
to present his article, not in any sense as the last word on
cytology, but as a good illustration of what may be done by the
non-professional student, and as presenting an interesting and
thoughtful interpretation of some of the facts of cell structure
and behavior.
TRYPANOSOME INFECTION AND COMPARATIVE EFFECTIVENESS OF PRI-
MATE SERUM
Mesnil and Leboeuf (Compt. Rend. Biol., Jan., 1912), in an
effort to determine whether the active substances of different serums
are identical or related, report somewhat conflicting results. In a
first series of experiments, species of trypanosomes were taken which
are peculiarly susceptible to baboon serums, and these were found
susceptible also to serum of man and the mangabey. Similarly, spe-
cies only slightly susceptible to one of these serums proved little so to
the others ; but the degrees of susceptibility were not constant.
This latter fact led to experiments in which strains of trypano-
somes v.cre developed, through cultures, to an optimum resistance,
which in some instances was 200 times as high as at the outset.
With such cultures it was found that the effectiveness of human and
baboon and mangabey serums was distinctly different,—the effective-
ness decreasing in the order mentioned. It is concluded that the
active substances are therefore similar, but not identical, and that
the similarity is in some degrees a measure of the closeness of the
relationship between these mammals.
116 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
FREE PURE CULTURES OF AMEBA PARASITIC IN MAMMALS
Williams (Jour. Med. Research, Dec., 1911) gives a summary of
the resuits of efforts to get pure cultures of amebz found in human
and other mammalian bodies, and to cultivate these without the bac-
teria which accompany them.
1. Certain strains of such parasitic amebz may readily be kept
going by using as food sterilized brain, liver, or kidney tissue from
dogs, rabbits or guinea-pigs.
2. Such artificial cultures do not show essential morphologic
variations as the result of this change of regimen.
3. Certain characteristics used by some students as diagnostic
of the pathogenic forms (as, large size, motility, highly refractive
ectoplasm, weak, chromatin, etc.) are found to belong as well to non-
pathogenic forms, apparently ; and thus the diagnostic value of these
qualities is correspondingly diminished.
4. It is suggested that the amebe themselves, and not merely
the bacteria usually associated with them, may be responsible for
amebic dysentery and amebic abscesses.
A METHOD OF DIAGNOSIS IN SYPHILIS
Noguchi (Jour. Exp. Med., Dec., 1911) reports instances of a
cutaneous reaction produced in syphilitic patients by the injection of
luetin (an extract of pure cultures of Treponema pallidum), espe-
caily in tertiary and hereditary (latent) cases, which he hopes may
prove valuable in diagnosis of this disease,—as supplementing the
Wassermann reaction which is more constant in primary or sec-
ondary forms.
TREPONEMA PALLIDUM IN MONKEYS
The same investigator (Jour. Exp. Med., Jan., 1912) has inoc-
ulated two species of lower monkeys with pure cultures of T. palli-
dum taken originally from human syphilitic lesions. This results in
lesions resembling the primary lesions in man and those caused in
the monkey by direct inoculation of monkeys with human serum
containing the spirochaetes. The blood of the monkeys furthermore
developed the property of giving the positive Wassermann reaction.
This result verifies the identity of his supposed pure strains with the
disease germ, and definitely relates the Wassermann reaction to the
T. pallidum.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 117
ECOLOGICAL SUCCESSION OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS
Shelford (Biol. Bull., Dec., 1911) concludes a series of papers
dealing with the biological succession in ponds at the head of Lake
Michigan. The following are some of the conclusions reached by
the author as the result of this series of interesting studies:
i. The quantity of bacteria, plankton, vegetation, and large ani-
mals increases with the age of the pond.
2. Terrigenous bottom and oxygen content decrease with the
age of the pond.
3. Fish tend to adapt themselves to the type of food rather
than to become distributed or furnish successions in accordance with
the type of food. They are not necessarily most abundant where
food is greatest.
4. Small oxygen content of older ponds will account for ab-
sence of fish from them.
5. Conditions outside the breeding season are probably less im-
portant than those of this season in determining the success of fish.
6. The conditions most favorable to the normal feeding of fish
are not only different from those most favorable to breeding, but are
even antagonistic; and the former tend to encroach on the latter.
ment, and the preservation of balance between the breeding condi-
tions and the adult life-conditions.
7. Animal succession in ponds is due to an unused increment
of excretory and decomposition products which causes increase in
vegetation ; a decrease in oxygen at the bottom; and a general change
in the conditions affecting breeding.
8. Succession of particular species, rather than the continued
dominance of some when they once become dominant, results from
the inflexibility of their standards of demands in accordance with
the changing conditions.
CHROMATIC REDUCTION IN CELL DEVELOPMENT
Rohde (Zeit. Wiss. Zool., 1911) undertakes to show that a
marked characteristic of the differentiation and maturing of cells is
the reduction of chromatin of the nucleus. He suggests, as illus-
trative of this, a series with bacteria at one end and the red blood-
cells of mammals at the other. The bacteria he considers as prac-
118 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
tically all nucleus. The corpuscles on the other hand have lost their
nuclei wholly. Between these extremes we have various stages of
chromatin reduction in the development of the specialized Metazoan
tissues. The maturation divisions in ova and sperm, the bodily ex-
trusion of chromatin observed on the part of blood-cells, etc., he re-
gards as illustrations of the process.
THE RESERVE OF FOOD IN TREES
Preston and Phillips (Forest Quart., 1911) agree with the com-
mon view that starch is the principal form in which reserve food is
stored in trees. They doubt that cellulose is able to act at all asa
reserve material. The maximum contained reserve for deciduous
trees occurs about the time the leaves fall, and during the next few
weeks there is a decided reduction in its amount. The sugar content
in trees remains pretty constant except for an increase in spring dur-
ing the unfolding of the buds.
ALTERNATION OF GENERATION IN FLORIDEZZ
Lewis (Bot. Gaz., Mch., 1912), by artificial plantings of tetra-
spores and carpospores of Polysiphonia and some other genera of
red algae. gets experimental results supporting the general conclu-
sion that tetraspores produce only the sexual plants and carpospores
only the tetrasporic plants. In no instance was an exception found
to the rule, although a considerable number of plantings developed
to maturity. Tetraspores from a given individual produced male
and female plants in approximately equal numbers. It is also con-
cluded that no greater growth vigor comes to the carpospores over
the tetraspores because of the double number of chromosomes con-
tained by them.
RELATION OF THE PROTOPLASM OF ADJACENT PROTOPLASTS
Thoday (Ann. Bot., 1911) undertakes to throw light on the rela-
tion that exists between protoplasms of contiguous cells, by an ex-
amination of the relation between the parasite, Cuscuta, and its host.
She finds that there is no direct protoplasmic connection between the
cells of Cuscuta and the host, but that the phloem cells of the para-
site haustoria apply themselves to the sieve plates of the phloem of
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 119g
the host. The wall of the former breaks down over the area of con-
tact, but the protoplasmic threads do not penetrate and become con-
tinuous with the protoplasm of the seive cells. The parasite seems
to receive the food passively through the action of internal pressure
in the cells of the host.
The author suggests that this study appears to lend support to
Gardiner’s view that connecting threads of protoplasm, as found be-
tween the cells of some plants, represent original connections be-
tween genetically connected cells due to lack of complete dividing
walls along the plane of division, and are not secondary connections
of the protoplasts effected by the cell walls being perforated by ad-
vancing protoplasmic fibrils.
A NEW FORM OF PARASITISM
Jensen (Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, 1910) reports the study of
several species of dipterous larvae, belonging to not less than three
different families, that are able to live in the mixture found in pitch-
ers of Nepenthes. They are able to resist the action of the ferments
secreted by the Nepenthes, which digests the other contained organ-
isms. He found that closely related larvae taken from nearby
waters were wholly unable to withstand the action of the fluid.
These conditions seem quite analogous to those encountered and
overcome by some intestinal parasites of animals.
BACTERIA IN RIVER WATER
Reiss (Verh. Phys. Med. Gessell. Wurtzburg, 1911) reports the
finding of as many as sixty-two species of bacteria in samples of
river water taken from the Main, near Wurtzburg. On cultivation,
a number of species showed resemblances to known pathogenic types,
but seemed to have lost their virulence. This is certainly a remark-
able showing of bacteria.
CONDITION OF CONTINUOUS DIVISION IN PARAMECIUM
Woodruff (Biol. Bull., Dec., 1911) believes that most, if not
all, normal individuals of Paramecium, under suitable environmental
conditions, possess unlimited power of reproduction without conju-
gation or artificial stimulation ; and that the discrepant results of dif-
120 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
ferent workers are possibly due to undetermined and unmet varia-
tions in the cultural demands of the various strains isolated for study.
THE COCKROACH AS AN AGENT OF CONTAMINATION
Morrell (Brit. Med. Jour., 1911), through experimentation with
the feces of the cockroach, discovers that it is to be regarded as a
significant carrier of disease in addition to being a general nuisance.
He reports that the feces will produce souring of milk; carry various
intestinal bacteria; transmit tubercle bacilli; transmit disease pro-
ducing cocci; and carry various molds.
BUSHMAN’S POISON FOR ARROW HEADS TAKEN FROM LARVZE
Trommsdorff (Archiv Schiffs- u. Tropen-hygiene: Heft 19;
Band XV., 1911) while on an expedition in the Northeast part of
German S. W. Africa, was told by a native that the Kalahari bush-
men, in addition to using the vegetable juices, also obtain a poison
for their arrow heads from certain larve. By bribery the native
was persuaded to show how and where the larve were obtained.
The native took him to a large hole under a bush and in a few min-
utes dug up several brown sandy objects about the size of a hazel nut.
When broken open each contained a yellowish, curved larva with two
pairs of legs. Trommsdorff was not able to experiment then, but in
November, 1910, he obtained a supply; made an emulsion with
salt solution and injected this into a number of animals. The effect on
dogs was to cause a localized oedema at the site of injection, acute
inflammation of all internal organs, dyspnoea, and death in 16-18
hours. Experiments are fully reported in the original article.
ANOPHELES
Anopheles and anopheline, as signifying a particular kind of mosquito,
are words in daily use, and are often pronounced wrongly. The error lies in
giving the o a short value instead of a long. The users of these terms forget
that they are derived from the Greek, and the o is an omega and not an
omicron. Therefore anopheles or anopheline should be pronounced andphélés
or anophéline; not andphélés or andphéline. Curiously, the people who mis-
pronounce these words as regards the 0, give the correct quantity to the two
e’s in anopheles. They recognize the first e to be an epsilon or short e, and the
second to be an eta or long e in the word anopheles; and the e in anopheline
always to be short.—(J. R. A. Med. Corps., Jan., 1912.)
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 121
MODERN MICROSCOPY
It is no longer possible for the publications of the American
Microscopical Society to give the space which was given in the early
years of the society to technic of microscopy; nor is it necessary.
The great majority of the members of the society are well versed in
the possibilities of the miscroscope and in the methods preliminary
to its use; and students in colleges and universities have regular
courses given to the subject. Furthermore, the independent ama-
teur can, for a dollar or two, secure any one of several books which
will give more satisfactory service to the beginner than could pos-
sibly be given by a journal such as this.
The fourth edition of such a book has recently been issued.
It contains in compact compass such instructions as will enable the
beginner to select an outfit and to proceed with its use in an intelli-
gent way.
Parts I and II, contained in earlier editions, are here enlarged
and brought up to date. Part III is new, and will prove extraor-
dinary value to the independent student.
Part I, consisting of five chapters, deals with such subjects as the
microscope, its construction, the facts about the optical parts, illumi-
nation, accessory apparatus, principles to be held in mind in the
choice of an outfit, and the like. Part II deals with the principles
underlying the general technic of preparing materials for microscopic
examination and the application of these principles to special cases.
It comprises fifteen chapters. Part II], which is new, is really a
series of condensed articles by experts on a number of topics of
special interest to the amateur student. One can easily wish that
other similar chapters on other groups of objects might have been
added. These chapters are: Introduction to Use of the Petrolog-
ical Microscope, by Frederic J. Cheshire; Rotifera, by C. F. Rous-
selet; Mites Found in Fresh Water, by C. D. Soar, one of our own
honored members; Collection and Preparation of Foraminifera, by
Arthur Earland; Collection and Preparation of Mosses and Liver-
worts, by T. H. Russell; Microscope and Nature Study, by W. M.
Webb; The Microscopy of Foods, by Cuthbert Andrews. As might
readily be expected, these chapters are somewhat uneven in quality.
The writers are English and the book is written from the English
122 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
point of view. This does not interfere with its suggestiveness to
American students, although it will necessitate certain adjustments in
the chapters involving English fauna and flora.
Modern Microscopy. A Handbook for Beginners and Students. M. I. Cross and
M. J. Cole. 4th Edition. Chicago, 1912. Chicago Medical Book Co. Price $2.00.
LABORATORY DIAGNOSIS
In Professor Todd’s recently issued second edition of “Clinical
Diagnosis” there is an extraordinary amount of material interesting
not only to the physician but to the general student with the micro-
scope. It is at once a clear and a concise presentation of the micro-
scopic and chemical study of disease.
The general chapters relate to examination of sputum; of urine;
of blood; of stomach contents ; of feces; miscellaneous examination,
including pus, mouth, eye, ear, skin, milk, etc. ; animal parasites ; bac-
teriological methods ; preparation and use of vaccines; apparatus and
reagents.
The mere enumeration of these chapters does little toward giv-
ing the reader a conception of the exceptional richness of the con-
tents nor is it possible in the limits of this review to do more than
suggest this. The revision contains all the essential matter of the first
edition and introduces, among many other things: a discussion of the
use of artificial light with the microscope; simple apparatus for
photo-micrographic work; the antiformin method for detection of
tubercle bacilli; detection and significance of albumin in the
sputum; Tsuchiya’s modification of Esbach’s test for quantitative
estimation of albumin in urine; Benedict’s methods for determining
quantity of sugar in urine; Wright and Kinnicutt’s method of count-
ing blood platelets; Harlow’s blood stain; a simple technic for diag-
nosis of typhoid fever by blood cultures; the Wassermann reactions
for testing syphilis, and Frothingham’s impression method for the
detection of Negri bodies in rabies.
The chapter on the animal parasites has been rewritten and en-
larged ; and a general chapter on bacteriological methods and one on
preparation and use of vaccines have been added. The discussion
of parasites in relation to human diseases takes on new significance
in the light of recent progress in the study of such parasitic diseases
as malaria, syphilis, relapsing fever, the numerous tropical trypano-
some diseases, hookworm disease, and others. The book will prove,
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 123
as has its predecessor, a most valuable manual in the hands of all
physicians who use the microscope in diagnosis, and almost in equal
degree a valued book of reference for the general student with the
microscope.
Clinical Diagnosis. A Manual of Laboratory Methods. James Campbell Todd,
M.D., Professor of Pathology, Univ. of Colorado. Revised Edition, with 469 pages and
illustrations. Philadelphia and London. W. B. Saunders Co. 1912. Cloth $2.25 net.
THE HOUSE FLY: DISEASE CARRIER
Dr. L. O. Howard, in a volume with the above title, undertakes
to bring to public attention, in a readable form, the principal facts
underlying the warfare that needs to be waged against the “Filth” or
“Typhoid” fly. The author disclaims the purpose of producing a
scientific monograph; but the book is really a monograph on the fly
as related to human life. The chapter headings are as follows:
Zoological Position, Life History and Habits; The Natural Enemies
of the Typhoid Fly ; the Carriage of Disease by Flies; Remedies and
Preventive Measures; Other Flies Frequenting Houses. There are
also a number of appendices giving bibliographical lists and extracts
of articles by Dr. Howard and others on the flies frequenting human
and other excrement, on regulations of the Health Department of the
District of Columbia relating to house flies, on directions for build-
ing a sanitary priviy, on disposal of night soil.
In addition to the general interest in the subject because of its
practical importance to dweller in town and country alike, one chap-
ter particularly furnishes matter which should be of special interest
to microscopists. This is Chapter II, dealing with the natural ene-
mies of the fly. Those readily lending themselves to study by the
general student of the microscope are: Fungous parasites (chiefly
three species of Empusa) in the soft tissues; Protozoa in the di-
gestive tract; nematodes in the proboscis and in and about the head;
mites which attach to the surface of the flies; and a number of para-
sitic insect enemies.
The figures illustrate a number of species of common flies.
The House Fly: Disease Carrier. L. O. Howard, 312 pages; illustrated. New
York 1911. Frederick A. Stokes Co. Price, $1.95 postpaid.
THE SPIROCHETES
The peculiar interest which has recently attached to Spirochetes
grows chiefly out of the brilliant series of scientific investigations,
124 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
beginning with the discovery by Schaudinn in 1905, showing that
Treponema (Spirochaeta) pallidum is definitely responsible for the
lesions occurring in syphilis, and leading to its isolation, identifica-
tion, and control.
In addition to this they have considerable claim to biological in-
terest because of their apparently intermediate position between bac-
teria and protozoa.
Dr. W. Cecil Bozanquet, of the Royal College of Physicians of
London, has recently brought together in a small book of two sec-
tions the matter of chief biological interest to the student. In Sec-
tion 1 are discussed such topics as their biological position, morphol-
ogy, habitat, cultivation, multiplication and development, association
with other organisms, pathogenic qualities, methods of staining and
examination. In Section 2 is given a systematic description of the
known species, together with illustrations.
In his summary of the phenomena of pathogenicity of the Spiro-
chetes the author classes them in three classes with ascending degrees
of virulence: (1) those of slight virulence producing a local affection
or lesion only ; (2) those in which there is a well marked local lesion,
followed by a generalized infection, with relapses not a marked
feature; and (3) those of most intense virulence producing immedi-
ate generalized septicemia, accompanied by fever, tendency to re-
lapses, and enlargement of the spleen. In the second group would
come those associated with yaws and syphilis; and under the third,
those causing the relapsing fevers, fowl-spirillosis, etc.
The author’s work was evidently done before the isolation of
Treponema pallida and recent demonstration of the causal connec-
tion between it and syphilis.
Spirochaetes. W. Cecil Bosanquet, M. D., octavo of 152 pages, illustrated. Phila-
delphia and London. W. B. Saunders Co., 1911. Artistically bound, $2.50 net.
PELLAGRA AS AN AMERICAN PROBLEM
Dr. George M. Niles, in a book of 250 pages, undertakes to give
a readable account of this apparently modern disease. The effort is
a timely one in America, in the light of the great increase in the
recorded instances of the malady in the United States.
The following chapter headings will indicate the order and scope
of the treatment: General Historic Considerations; Pellagra in the
United States; The Etiology of Pellagra ; Symptomatology and Clin-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 125
ical Course; Pathology and Morbid Anatomy; Diagnosis, Course,
and Prognosis of Pellagra; Treatment of the Disease; Prophylaxis ;
Description and Discussion of Some Recent Experiments on Ani-
mals. There is an index of authors and of topics. The earliest ac-
counts, which may possibly relate to pellagra, are not certain; but it
is suspected among the American Indians as early as 1600, and even
then was believed to be related to the use of Indian corn. From this
time forward, under different names, and in different countries,
records appear which seem to indicate pellagra. Not until 1863 do
we hear definitely of it among the whites of America. There has
been since that time a gradual accumulation of data, and apparently
an increase of the disease itself, until at the present time the author
believes that there are from 6,000 to 10,000 cases in the United
States.
The author quotes liberally from the various students of the
etiology of pellagra and presents the various views, which may bi
classified as follows:
A. Those which hold that it is wholly unconnected with Indian
Corn, but caused by some parasite with seasonal periods of activity
and latency. (Dr. Sambon.)
B. Those holding Indian Corn responsible for the disease.
I. Through good corn, even.
1. Because it lacks some necessary nutritive property.
2. Because it contains some toxic substance which
tends to cause the disease.
li. Through spoiled corn only.
1. Because of toxic substances produced by the spoil-
ing of corn or by the action of organisms in it. (Lombroso.)
2. Because of the direct conveyance to the human sys-
tem of organisms that in turn produce directly or indirectly the dis-
ease.
The author believes that the malady is related to spoiled corn
(toxins produced therein). The prophylaxis must necessarily be
uncertain until the etiology is determined but in the meantime it is
certainly a part of the duty of governments to see that meal made of
moldy corn is not distributed to consumers.
126 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
There is no evidence that it is or has been seriously considered
to be contagious. The principal suggestions cluster about inspection
of corn and corn products and the prohibition of commerce or use of
spoiled corn.
Pellagra. By George M. Niles, M. D., Atlanta School of Medicine, 252 pages, il-
lustrated. Philadelphia and London; W. B. Saunders Co., 1912. Cloth, $3.00 net.
INJURIOUS INSECTS
Dean E. W. Sanderson has given us a most beautifully illus-
trated account of the principal insect pests. The illustrations are
drawn from the most varied and authoritative sources. The text is
in most places clear and direct, and the book is eminently readable.
On examining it one is at once impressed with the marvelous value
of co-operation in scientific work. Here are gathered from all quar-
ters the results of the most laborious and painstaking work of hun-
dreds of scientific men all over the country. It seems like the work
of one man, and is ready for the common man to utilize.
There are twenty-eight chapters. The book begins with a gen-
efal chapter on “Injury to Crops by Insect Pests,” in which it is esti-
mated that the annual damage done by insects in the United States
is as much as $1,000,000,000. An analysis is made of this total as it
affects the various types of crops. A chapter follows on “Beneficial
Insects,” in which the work of predaceous forms, such as the lady-
bird beetle, and of parasitic types, is described. There are three
chapters on control of insect pests, insecticides, spraying and the like.
The body of the book consists of a discussion of the insects in-
juring the special crops: as small grains; corn; stored grains; clover ;
tobacco ; cotton; hop plant; potatoes and tomatoes; beans and peas;
beets and spinach; cabbage and cruciferous plants; melons and
squash, etc.; sweet potatoes; strawberry; raspberry and blackberry ;
currant and gooseberry; grape; orchard fruits (3 chapters).
It is difficult to see how this matter could be put into form more
available for the general reader and student. It furnishes an excel-
lent starting point for the amateur student with the microscope, as
well.
Insect Pests of Farm, Garden and Orchard. E. Dwight Sanderson, Dean of Col-
lege of Agriculture, W. Va. Univ.; 684 pages, 513 illustrations. New York; John
Wiley and Sons, 1912. Price, $300 (12/6) net.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 127
' INDEXING AND FILING METHODS FOR THE MICROSCOPIST
Text :—The next best thing to knowing a thing is to know where
it can be found when wanted.
Application of the above text by an amateur Microscopist :
1. Filing Brief Articles.
The amateur, especially if he is working alone, groping in the
dark, as it were, must depend upon what has been done by others
for his start and early ideas, to a great extent, and this knowledge
must be gained from their published work usually. A great deal of
this work was done during the years 1840 to 1880, when the “battle
of the lenses’ was waged, and great interest was taken in the resolu-
tion of the markings on diatoms, etc. Great interest was also taken
in general microscopy during this period and the results are found in
the papers, periodicals, etc., published on the subject during that
time.
The writer endeavors to obtain as many of these periodicals,
etc., as possible, and after looking them over removes the pages con-
taining such articles as he wishes to preserve. If an article occupies
two or more leaves they are kept together by placing three ‘“dabs” of
mucilage near the top edges and pressing them together. These
articles are then filed and indexed by the vertical filing system. Ex-
cellent equipment for this system can be purchased, but they are
quite expensive, and the plan adopted by the writer is as follows:
Folders are made from sheets of Manila paper heavy enough to stand
alone and 17% inches long by 13 inches wide, which are folded so
that one end projects % inch beyond the other. This projecting end
is then cut so as to leave a tab on which to write the subject of the
contents of the folder. These tabs have a length equal to one-third
the width of the folder, which is 13 inches. Part of the folders have
this tab located in the middle of its width, part of them have it even
with the left hand edge and the remainder have it even with the
right hand edge. We now have vertical folders 13 inches wide by
8% inches deep, with a half inch tab on the top edge.
Twenty-six of the folders having the tabs even with the left
hand edge are then marked with a letter of the alphabet and stood on
128 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
edge in a drawer or box 91% inches deep by 14 inches wide and as
long as the user wishes.
The articles taken from the periodicals are now placed in the
folders according to their subject matter, which is written on the
tabs. The folders are now arranged behind their proper alphabetical
index folders first placed in the drawer. These index folders act as
alphabetical guides and in them is also placed articles on a subject
which at first may not seem of sufficient importance to call for a sep-
arate folder.
In cutting out articles from periodicals, etc., as above described
there will be cases where the last page of the last leaf of the article
clipped contains the beginning of an article on another subject which
it is also desired to keep. In this case the writer proceeds as fol-
lows: The most important article is given the preference and filed
in the proper folder, then in the folder having the tab bearing the
subject of the other article is placed a sheet on which is written the
title of the second article and a note to the effect that it is on back of
such an article—naming the title of the first article. In this way
cross references can also be made, so that it makes a very complete
system. There is no pasting required, except the “dabs’’ spoken of
above; the contents are already indexed when the folders are prop-
erly placed, so no card index is necessary and the space occupied is
limited only by the size and number of boxes or drawers called for.
While the above sounds complicated, it is in fact very simple;
the secret of satisfaction with it lies in filing material away as fast
as it collects rather than allowing a lot to collect before placing it in
the folders.
The writer uses the above method for pamphlet, specimen pages
and reviews of books, photographs, sketches; in fact, anything of
that character can be placed in the file and readily referred to.
2. Card Index for Notes.
The writer also makes great use of the card index and is a firm
believer in its value in nearly every profession. The regular size
cards, 3x5 inches and 4x6 inches, are the ones used, with arrange-
ment of rulings to suit the case.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 129
CARD “A”
Zoo. Zoology
375 | An Inroduction to Zoology.
| R. W. Hegner (Univ. of Mich.)
Macmillan Co., N. Y.
Oct. 1910. 8 vo.-ils.—cloth—425 pgs.-1 vol.
$2.50 net.
|
|
|
|
|
Hai et
In order to show the working of the system as used by the writer
we will assume that a catalogue or notice has been received from an
agent or publisher regarding a book on Zoology. The book is en-
tered on card “A” for future reference. Later on the book is pur-
chased and entered on card “B,” being given the number 375, which
is the next consecutive number under “Bibliography,” which com-
prises all books, periodicals, papers, and everything of a like nature
in which the writer is interested or has brought to his notice. The
number 375 is merely for use in referring to matter in that book and
is now entered on card “A,” as shown.
CARD ES Br
Bib. Bibliography
370 IE
aval |
3/2 | o
373
374
375 An Introduction to Zoology—Hegner.
376
377
378
379
Cards “A” and “B” form an index on Bibliography and if de-
sired a third card may be used which would be an author’s index, for
the purpose of keeping all of the writings of an author together and
on which the entry would be as follows:
Hegner, R. W.
375—An Introduction to Zoology.
Other works or papers by Hegner being added as they appear
from time to time.
130 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
We will say in perusing the book we found a description of the
odontophores of mollusks and directions for preparing and mount-
ing them, and, wishing to make a note of it, we fill out card “C,” the
“No. 375, page 253,” indicating the reference and page on which the
information is found. The writer uses card “C” in a card index of
notes on technique, general information, etc., and it is of great use
if it is desired to compose a paper or anything of that sort on a cer-
tain subject.
CARD sey.
Odo. Odontophores
(Here follows such notes, etc., as is desired
for this place, the numbers (375) giving the
| reference, where more complete informa—
tion imay = bestound! 1h desired: nen
Ree a ee eo ae 375 page 253)
eG S51 AL PL TE
Later on we find a mollusk and, wishing to prepare a slide, refer
to card “C,” and the result is card “D,” on which is filled in the infor-.
mation indicated. The number 750.375 is a system of classification
similar in principle to the Dewey classification of literature, applied
to this subject. The integral part of the number showing whether it
belongs to the animal, vegetable or mineral kingdom, also the par-
ticular division of the kingdom, and the decimal part showing which
part of the system it relates to—nervous, circulatory, etc_—in case it
is of the animal kingdom.
CARD Sp”
750. 395 Odontophore—(Name of Mollusc)
Kill | Medium Directions—duration, notes, etc.
Fix. |
Wash
Stain
Harden
Mount.
Section thi
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 131
One frequently runs across information when away from home
and laboratory so that it is necessary to make notes and transcribe
them to cards upon arrival home. To overcome this, the writer, in-
stead of using the ordinary notebook, uses the “National Simplex
Memorandum Book No. 4450,” partly filled with quadrille ruled
leaves for ordinary notes, sketches, etc., which is for temporary use.
The remainder of the filling consists of 3x5 inch index cards per-
forated to match the regular fillers. The necessary notes, sketches,
etc., are made on these cards, which are placed in the regular indexes
upon arrival home and fresh ones placed in the memorandum book.
He also uses a similar book, No. 4480, for the 4x6 inch cards and
finds this system of keeping notes very satisfactory indeed ; far Letter
than the bound notebooks.
The professional will probably condemn all of the above as
being too complicated and requiring too much valuable time, and it
would be quite a task for him to file and index the material he has
collected during a number of years of professional life, although it
would be well worth the trouble.
If the beginner will adopt the above system or such modification
of it as best meets his wants he will never regret it and every year
adds to its value to him.
In order to show how the value of the system may be more fully
realized let us assume that it has been quite generally adopted by
others interested in Microscopical work and that the writer runs
across some subject requiring special technique or processes with
which he is not very familiar. He applies to the society of which he
may be a member, or to friends interested in a similar line of work,
for information on the subject. They look over their indexes and,
finding the object sought, make out a copy of their cards and send to
him. He uses the information and places the card in his index for
future reference. If they do not find the actual information on their
cards, they may find a reference in their index of “Bibliography”
as per cards “A” or “B,” which will tell the inquirer where the infor-
mation may be found.
Such an interchange of card index information would prove of
mutual benefit to fellow-workers and especially isolated workers like
the writer. | Geo. H. Marr,
Waterville, Maine.
132 NOTES, REVIEW'S, ELC.
HOW TO DETERMINE THE PRESENCE OF INTESTINAL PARASITES
Darling (Société de Pathologic Exotique, May 10, 1911) de-
scribes two simple methods for determinining the presence of intes-
tinal parasites, especially the oxyuris, Ankylostoma duodenale and
the Strongylus stercorale.
The first method consists in mixing a small portion of the feces
with sterile water in a Petri dish and incubating at 37 degrees for
twenty-four hours.
The second method is based upon the separation of the ova by
means of centrifuging. The specimen is shaken vigorously in a test
tube with sterilized distilled water, then centrifuged after calcium
chloride has been added. The supernatant fluid is then examined
for the ova —(V. A. L., in La Tribune Med., Mch., 1912.)
EXAMINATLON OF SPUTUM FOR TUBERCLE BACILLI
Many methods have been tested by which sputum may be liqui-
fied and the bacilli precipitated, and the use of the centrifuge and
filter dispensed with. The following are presented by Nemmser and
Martos-Lissowska (Deutsch Med. Woch., Sept. 14, 1911; p. 1697) ;
(1) Alkaline trypsin digestion.
To o.1 ce. of trypsin and 5 cc. of a 0.4% sodium hydrate solu-
tion are added 5 cc. of sputum. Shake the mixture with the addi-
tion of a few drops of CHCl, and incubate at 37° C for 24 hours.
Then there will be found beneath a clear supernatant liquid, a com-
pact deposit, which can be readily removed and stained.*
(2) Acid trypsin digestion.
As above; except that 0.4% HCl is substituted for the soda so-
lution, and no CHCl: need be added.
(3) Oxidation.
To 5 cc. of sputum 5-10 drops of perchloric acid—HClO,—and
5 cc. of water are added. This is incubated, and treated as before.
Instead of the perchloric acid, 0.5 grm. of potassium chlorate and
5 cc. of 0.4% HCl may be substituted.
*Much’s method of sputum staining is very valuable for all suspected cases of phthisis
in which no tubercle bacilli are found by the usual methods of examination. This con-
sists of treatment with anilin gentian violet for 48 hours and then with Gram’s solution.
By this means non-acid fast forms of tubercle bacilli, which fail to retain the dye under
Ziehl’s process, may be seen. See Roepke, Deutsch Med. Woch., Oct., 1911, p. 1937, or
J. R. A. and Med. Corps, Mch., 1912, p. 357.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 133
The sediment obtained by these methods is more abundant, and
can be fixed to the slide more easily than that which is deposited by
antiformin. Tubercle bacilli were found by these methods 21 times
in 300 examinations, in which they would otherwise have escaped
detection.
DETECTION OF TYPHOID BACILLUS IN WATER
A method is reported (Lemke: Deutsch Med. Woch., Sept.,
IQII; p. 1698) based on the fact that the bacilli are inhibited to a less
degree by a strongly saline fluid than are water bacteria. Add 3-5%
sodium chloride to peptone broth of + 10 to + 25 acidity to phenolph-
thalein. He prepares a watery solution of malachite green Merck Ia,
Eid 120% 0.2) CC..0:3,, 015, 0:7,.1.0, 1.4 cc: of this are mixed) with
quantities of 100 cc. of the salt broth. 15 cc. of each are placed in
tubes, which are then inoculated with the suspected water. He has
recovered the typhoid bacillus in 60 experiments after artificially
contaminating the water,—in one instance when only 2 typhoid
germs were introduced.
BUTTERFLY SCALES
B. Braman of the N. Y. Micros. Soc. proposed the following ex-
cellent method in 1881:
Dissolve ! part of Anthony’s “French Diamond Varnish” in 2
parts pure benzole. Apply a drop or two of the solution to a slide.
In a few seconds, or as soon as varnish has set, press the wing of the
moth or butterfly gently upon the slide and then carefully lift it
away. ‘The transfer of the scales shows a beautiful natural arrange-
ment on the wing. Make a shallow cell around and apply cover.
Canada balsam must not be used, as it disarranges the object.
CINNAMON OIL FOR EXAMINING ROUGH MINERALS FOR INCLUSIONS,
FLAWS, ETC.
By applying a few drops of the oil to the surface of a transpar-
ent mineral, it is possible to examine the interior for inclusions, flaws,
etc., without grinding the surface flat. Sand can also be examined
for inclusions under the microscope.
ARRANGING AND MOUNTING SCALES OF INSECTS AND DIATOMS, ETC.
Use liquid gelatin thinned with an equal volume of 50% acetic
134 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
acid. Spread a very thin coating on slide and let dry; place the ob-
ject on; breathe on it very gently to soften the gelatin and to allow
adhesion of objects. If carefully done it holds well.
SIMPLE DRAWING APPARATUS
A very useful accessory in micro-biological work is announced
by Baush & Lamb Optical Company. It is designed for drawing
from microscopic specimens, where magnified images of from 50 to
430 diameters are desired, the full diameter of the image circle being
utilized for all magnifications within that range. It enables one to
work with the eye at its normal reading distance from the pencil, a
feature greatly appreciated by one doing much work of this char-
acter.
The apparatus is very simple but accurately constructed, and is
thoroughly satisfactory in use. Adjustments are reduced to a mini-
mum, the standard image distance of 250 mm (10 in.) from mirror
to drawing surface being fixed It is designed to accommodate al-
most any standard microscope.
The following detail of the makeup of the apparatus will make
clear its character:
Microscope Support—Of wood, substantially constructed and
neatly finished permanently attached to base, which is one piece, with
drawing board top surface 128x175 mm, height 90 mm, assuring
standard image of 250 mm with microscope in position; provided
with simple metal clamp to hold microscope rigidly in place.
Drawing Board—Provides smoothly finished drawing surface
282 mm (11% in.) square, with light shield in position.
Light Shield—Sheet metal, neatly finished in black to avoid re-
flections; of a size and form to shade effectively three sides of the
drawing surface.
Mirror—s50 mm in diameter hinged, with stop at angle of 45 de-
grees to direct image perpendicularly to drawing surface; mounted
on metal clamp which can be readily attached to microscope draw
tube in any desired position ; mirror can be raised for changing eye-
pieces without removing.
Lamp—Special hand-feed go arc, protected by metal hood hav-
ing small observation window; provided with bulls-eye condenser,
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 135
adjustable in tube for giving parallel or converging beam of light as
desired ; entire lamp mounted on support and adjustable vertically
and laterally.
Rheostat—Of fixed form, accommodating 110 volts; 5 amperes
of current must be used with arc lamp to regulate the current.
NECROLOGY
DR. SETH G. SHANKS
Dr. S. G. Shanks, a member of the American Microscopical So-
ciety since 1900, died Nov. 5th, 1910. He was an expert and devoted
microscopist, and gave much time to the preparation of microscopic
slides. It is an interesting coincidence that the illustrations of Mr. E.
W. Roberts’ paper, published in this number, are photographs of sec-
tions made by Dr. Shanks,
Dr. Shanks was a student under Dr. James Armsby and gradu-
ated from the Albany Medical College in 1875, taking the prize for
the best thesis. After a year of hospital work he entered upon pri-
vate practice.
His acquaintances testify that he was a most charming com-
panion, and, while he was of a very retiring disposition, he endeared
himself to all those who came close to him.
Mrs. Shanks and their daughter survive him.
ROBERT BROWN
Mr. Robert Brown, of New Haven, Conn., a member of this
Society since 1885, and a Life Member since 1903, Secretary Emer-
itus of the Yale Observatory, died June 11, 1g1I, at the home of
his sister.
The cause of his death was gradual weakening of the heart. He
was born March 8, 1836, in Cincinnati, Ohio, where his father was a
business man who came to this country from Scotland in 1830. He
prepared for college under Charles Mathews, principal of a private
school in Cincinnati, but on account of ill health did not enter Yale
until the third term of Freshman year. During Sophomore year he
138 NECROLOGY
was largely instrumental in obtaining the first gymnasium, on Library
street, and in college was a member of Linonia, Psi Upsilon and
Scroll and Key. After graduation he spent one year at the Yale
Medical School for the study of comparative anatomy, but the follow_
ing year he returned to Cincinnati and was associated with his father
in business until 1866. He then became assistant secretary of the
Cincinnati Gas Light & Coke Company, and subsequently filled the
positions of secretary, treasurer and vice president, remaining with
the company sixteen years. Soon after the organization of the new
astronomical observatory at Yale, he accepted the newly created office
of secretary of that department, which he held until his resignation in
1907, at the close of twenty-five years of service.
At a meeting held at Cincinnati in 1864 to draft resolutions rela-
tive to the death of Professor Silliman he advanced a proposition
which led to the formation of a Yale Club, believed to be the first one
ever organized, of which he became the first secretary. In 1861-62
he was treasurer of the Young Men’s Mercantile Library Association
of Cincinnati, and its corresponding secretary for the succeeding two
years. From 1863 to 1883 he was director and treasurer of the The-
ological and Religious Library, of which he was a life member; he
was manager of the Cincinnati Public Library from 1864 to 1869;
member of the School Board of Cincinnati, 1864-65, and correspond-
ing secretary of the Cincinnati Horticultural Society from 1859 to
1868. He was a member of the National Conference of Charities
and Corrections, and of the Mohonk Indian Conference; a member
and fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Sci-
ence; a life member of the Historical Society of New Haven, of the
American Forestry Association, of the Yale University Club, and of
the Appalachian Club. He was a member of the Country and Grad-
uates clubs of New Haven, as well as a charter member of the Yale
Club of Cincinnati. He was married October 2, 1860, to Miss Caro-
line P. Root, who died October 28, 1908. Two children (adopted)
survive, Mrs. Flora C. Fullerton and Mrs. Jessie S. MacFarland.
{Thru the Courtesy of the Vale Alumni Weekly.)
AT Tt 4 : , ee
£5) 5 any ‘FY ei ian yh hig
any OD mt
il
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED I89Q1
PUBLISHED, QUARTERLY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXXII
NUMBER THREE
Entered as Second-class Matter December 12, 1910, at the Postoffice at Decatur, IIli-
nois, under act of March 3, 1879.
DECATUR, ILL.
Review PRINTING & STATIONERY Co.
1912
ait)
4
Ua 4
Ce asm
ry TRAE Ni
on) :
be
id] yi!
MTBOIGO9¢O 19000" Ag
. VISIOO¢
roy GAs CNEL ih) aa) ‘. h
Un ae vi
~
Yat ICM hs
y
'
PS
i , , nis §
' wa. s Wool W
7 i* lhe) iF wie 1) oe ow a > Away wl “Vases Oe be
(ae
i ‘del wa Pete) Ge ire ier ee: aig
ira
OFFICERS.
JEragiaieiies) AD eho insy Ganemomooabne sadecibians onpimooocatHe Austin, Texas
First Vice President: F. CreiGHToON WELLMAN, M. D....New Orleans, La.
Second Vice President: EDWARD PENNOCK...........++--- Philadelphia, Pa.
Secretary: T. W. GALLOWAY... 620 feed edocs cece sens ceceers Decatur, III.
MPOUSUNCHa yt las RUANKINSONni ia scetereteisrercraiaveloreliefolsveksrsienevareyoxel« Charleston, III.
Gustodiancs NUAGNUS) IO BUAUIMG-\eeicia sclera cracrairieaie orexelstelerstelensts Meadville, Pa.
ELECTIVE MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
PAU INT RE EGE -gee mice Reo hu shee reualayed ale len siep iors ober onener alemenets Morgantown, West Va.
FR Wan (Ge VV PACED earisten eat teeta Sieh ela tose rotctev rat cla Na oy shesiefeuctone kel ay avevets Cleveland, Ohio
SAV Ai GRR Wate ee cS Pyar tet tere eaten ral] sPoyeiletes bhcteteraveiatietonats betel Athens, Ohio
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
R. H. Warp, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Troy, N. Y.,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1879.
J. D. Hyart, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
Apert McCa.ta, Ph.D., of Chicago, Ill.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883
T. J. Burr, Ph.D., of Urbana, Il,
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gro. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M:S., of Buffalo, N. Y., : ‘
at Detroit, Mich., 1890.
MarsHALL D. Ewe tt, M.D., of Chicago, III.
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Stmon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1805 and 1906.
A. CrirForp Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1896.
A. M. BuietLe, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. E1iceENMANN, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., 1901.
CuHartes E. Bessry, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
E. A. Brrce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Urbana, IIL,
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
HERBERT Oszorn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
A. E. Herrzper, M.D., of Kan City, Mo., .
eye mein: at Washington, D. C., 1911
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote
TABLE, OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXXI, Number 3, July, 1912
A Bacterial Canker of Plum Twigs, with Plate XIV, by I. M. Lewis....
North American Frog Bladder Flukes, with Plates XV-XVI, by W. W.
0 5: Gua Ee eae ne IDE COR OPW igh Ae RM ane Retr uE dy een aeee ark Wp Soe! |
Notes on Organ Formation in the Trematode, Microphallus opacus, with
Plates XVil-XiVLU, iby iSewallWinightss2 12. sheen) Le
Recent Developments in Drawing by the Aid of Projection Apparatus,
Used on the House Lighting System, with Plates XIX-XXV, by
Srmony Fs NWGare so. Meu 2b obo onion RU ete ee aie ee ee ee
Notes, Reviews, Etc. A Convenient Apparatus for Laboratory Photo-
graphy, by F. D. Heald; Nature of the Intromittent Organ of the
Odonata, by E. W. Roberts; Suggestions for Amateur Microscopists,
by V. A. Latham; Preliminary Notice; Microbiology; Feeding Habits
of Mackerel; Kala Azar and Bed Bugs; Cell Size and Nuclear Size;
Protozoa in Hay Infusions; Internal Factors Influencing Sex in
Hyditina senta; Reinvigoration of Parthenogenetic Strains of Hyda-
tina; Can Sperm Cells Develop Without the Egg? Adaptation of
Fish to Temperature; Effect of Contact and Tension on Tendrils;
To Mount Dissections of Mouth-parts of Insects Under one Cover-
glass, Without Cement; Terpineol,—a New Clearing Agent; Develop-
ment of Sperm on Hybrids; Function of the Male Accessory Glands
in Mammals; Inheritance of Left-handedness; Effects of Darkness
on Goldfish; A new Ultra Condenser for Viewing Ultra-microscopic
Particles; Honorary Degree to Mr. E. Leitz Jr.; Metallurgical Ap-
PAT ALUIS, 5. cisletene wisdsscseycycrarte lonete ese cewoee eee aey sks weet eins tote gia svete URE Ue
Necrology: William Henry Walmsley, with Cut, by Dr. J. Frederick
Bl en ent at si sca tee eres oe te eee otoictels nist tok ionic Rb aor, ae
145
167
177
199
TRANSACTIONS
OF
American Microscopical Society
(Published in Quarterly Installments)
Vol. XXXI JWT, 1912 No. 3
A BACTERIAL CANKER OF PLUM TWIGS
By I. M. Lewis
A disease of plum trees popularly known among growers as
canker was first called to my attention during the summer of Ig10.
Since that time it has been kept under observation and has been
found to be one of the most prevalent and serious diseases of the
plum which occurs in this area. It was first reported from this
locality by Heald! and Wolf in their report of the diseases prevalent
in the vicinity of San Antonio, Texas, and a brief description of the
symptoms was here given. These writers made collections in sev-
eral different orchards and reported it to be the cause of much dam-
age. The same disease had been previously recorded by Heald? in
1905 from Nebraska. A similar and perhaps identical disease was
reported from Delaware in 1905 by Jackson*, and the statement
made that it causes considerable damage to the plum orchards in
that section of the country. These reports were all based upon in-
complete studies but agree very well in the description of the symp-
toms, the seriousness of the disease, and the probable bacterial origin
of it. A careful search through the literature failed to reveal more
information concerning this canker than is contained in the notes
cited above. It seemed therefore, that in view of its widespread
"4, Heald F. D. and Wolf F. A. A Plant disease survey in the vicinity of San
Antonio, Texas. Bulletin U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Plant Industry,
996-32 2
ata: He F. D. Annual Report of the Nebraska Agricultural Experiment Station,
19 :32-33. 1905.
3. Jackson, H. S. Bacteriosis of plums. Annual Report of the Delaware Agricul-
tural Experiment Station, 18:75-76. 1905.
146 LEWIS
distribution and unknown etiology, a careful study including cultural
work and inoculations should be carried out. Accordingly at the.
beginning of the present season such a study was undertaken.
SYMPTOMS
The first visible indication of a young canker is the appear-
ance upon the wood of the first season’s growth of a small water-
soaked spot surrounding a lenticel. Such a spot enlarges rather
slowly and the tissue immediately surrounding the lenticel becomes
slightly bulged outward due to the great numbers of bacteria which
have multiplied in the underlying tissue. As the spots increase in
size, they soon became much longer than wide, frequently reaching a
length of one to three centimeters. The twig may be completely
girdled but this is not generally the case. In the majority of the
cankers about one-half the diameter of the twig is involved. The
infected areas always become more or less sunken with age and the
color changes to a purplish black with a transluctent border. It
frequently happens that several of these areas become confluent,
producing a very much elongated area, and one which encircles the
twig completely and kills it.
These sunken areas, show in cross section, a number of radial
rifts or cavities extending outward in the young wood and cortex
to just below the epidermis. As the twig increases in size, these rifts
open to the outside, forming a medium longitudinal fissure. The
cankered tissue contains great numbers of bacteria which may be
frequently seen to form a bacterial ooze. The new cankers never
appear upon any of the wood except that of the first season’s
growth. Twigs have been observed upon which a dozen cankers
were present in different stages of development. These Cankers do
not generally become healed over but persist on the twigs of the
second and succeeding seasons as open perennial cankers.
When once a tree has become invaded, and the diseased branch-
es permitted to remain in the tree, it would require the most drastic
pruning to remove all of the diseased wood. In many cases the
tree is so badly damaged as to render its complete removal advis-
able. The older branches shown in the accompanying plate are
six years old.
A CANKER OF PLUM TWIGS 147
THE CAUSAL ORGANISM
The organism which causes the disease is readily isolated from
the underlying wood and cortex of young unopened cankers. Such
tissue was removed by means of a sterile scalpel, placed on a sterile
glass slide in a few drops of bullion, and teased apart so as to secure
a suspension of the bacteria. Dilutions were made from this into
plain agar in the usual way and series of plates poured. Several
such isolations were made. In every case where the young unopened
spots were employed the cultures secured were so nearly pure that
there seemed little doubt that the prevailing organism was the one
responsible for the cankers. The second and third plates of a series
were frequently secured containing fifty to two hundred colonies
without a single contamination. The colonies do not develop at a
temperature of 37° but are visible at 25° after forty-eight hours.
The surface colonies are almost white at first, translucent, moist
and glistening. They later become distinctly yellow and reach a
diameter of one to five millimeters. The deep colonies are lenti-
cular and darker in color. In hanging drops, the organism was
found to be a small actively motile, rod-shaped form occurring
singly or in pairs, or occasionally more than two together. The
organism grew well in all the different kinds of culture media in
which it was tried.
Cultures five days old grown upon sloped agar were used in
making the inoculations. A number of young plum trees growing
in pots in the greenhouse furnished the material for the inoculations.
These trees bore young rapidly growing shoots a foot or more in
length and the leaves were young and tender. Sterile water was
added to the agar tubes and the growth removed by means of a
sterile needle was completely mixed with the water, and then trans-
ferred to an atomizer and sprayed upon the young twigs. These
trees were then placed in a dark room and covered with bell jars
where they remained forty-eight hours. They were then removed
to the green house in which the atmosphere was moderately humid
and remained here throughout the experiment. Control plants were
sprayed with distilled water and otherwise treated in exactly the
same manner as the inoculations.
148 LEWIS
The first visible results of the inoculations was the appearance
of numerous, small, water-soaked spots on the young leaves near
the tip of the branches. These spots began to appear about two
weeks after the inoculations were made. They soon changed in
color to a purplish black and a microscopic examination revealed
the presence of great numbers of bacteria within the tissue. Isola-
tions from the leaf spots yielded pure cultures of the same organism
that had been isolated from the twig cankers and sprayed upon the
leaves. The leaf-spots were also apparently identical with the
“shot-hole leaf-spots” of plums described by Smith*, and caused by
Pseudomonas pruni. The appearance of the water-soaked areas
upon the leaves was accompanied by the development of a few
upon the twigs, but they were not present here in anything like the
great numbers which appeared on the leaves. They were, however,
identical with the young cankers which develop in the field under
natural conditions.
A number of the young twigs were next inoculated by means
of punctures. <A sterile teasing needle was used in making the
puncture and then some of the bacteria were introduced into the
wound. These plants were treated in exactly the same manner after
inoculations as the sprayed plants. They were sprinkled well and
kept in the dark under bell jars for forty-eight hours and then re-
moved to the greenhouse. Control twigs were punctured, sprayed
with tap water, and treated otherwise in the same manner. The
punctures of control twigs, afer removal to the greenhouse, soon
became dry and there was never any indication of infection. The
inoculations were almost without exception surrounded by the
characteristic water-soaked tissue within a few days and in due time
typical cankers developed. Similar inoculations were made with
young peach trees, and in this case also the punctures were almost
uniformly successful.
With the successful isolation of the organism and the artificial
production of the cankers by it, the question arose as to its identity.
The fact that the organism is capable of producing a leaf spot that
is in all ways apparently identical with the “shot-hole” spot already
4. Smith, Erwin F. Obervations on a hitherto unreported bacterial disease, the
cause of which enters the plant through ordinary stomata. Science N. S. 17 :456-457.
at right
d
,
s at left one year old
Twig
Pseudomonas pruni.
Cankers caused by
Plum
A CANKER OF PLUM TWIGS 149
widely known, suggests the probability that the organism which
causes the cankers is identical with Smith’s Pseudomonas pruni.
The orchards from which the original isolations were made were
carefully examined in order to determine the prevalence of a leaf-
spot, and whether the black spot of the fruit was present or not.
The shot hole spot was found to be abundant but the amount of
spotting of the fruit was very slight. However, a few of the char-
acteristic spots were found upon the fruits. Isolutions were made
from both of these sources and the same yellow organism was ob-
tained. The organism isolated from the cankers was grown side
by side with these in all of the common culture media, and the fact
established that they are identical. Moreover, the cultural charac-
teristics agree in all respects with the original description of Smith
for Pseudomonas pruni. I feel no hesitancy, therefore, in assigning
this organism as the cause of the cankers herein described. Inci-
dentally it has also been shown that this organism is capable of caus-
ing canker of peach trees upon cross inoculations
UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS, SCHOOL oF BOTANY
NORTH AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES
By W. W. Cort*
The bladder fluke of the frog was first reported in Europe by
Loschge (1785), and fifteen years later was given the name Dis-
tomum cygnoides by Zeder (1800). But not until Looss (1894)
published his classic work on the distomes of European: fish and
frogs, did it receive an adequate description.
Leidy (1851: 207) was the first to notice bladder flukes in
American frogs, but his description is too brief and superficial to
make a precise diagnosis of his forms possible. The first detailed
description of these flukes from this continent was Bensley’s account
(1897) of two varieties of Distomum cygnoides from Canada.
From material also collected in Canada Stafford (1902) later re-
ported Bensley’s two varieties and described also three new species.
As far as I can find out, the literature contains no further mention
of frog bladder flukes from North America.
The evolution of the nomenclature of this group is very inter-
esting, and gives a typical illustration of the advance during the last
decade in the knowledge of the structure of distomes. Braun (1899)
was among the first to feel that the old genus Distomum was an
unnatural group. He recognized the similarity in structure between
the bladder flukes found in different cold blooded vertebrates, and
suggested that Distomum folium, Distomum cygnoides, Distomum
cymbiforme, and Distomum patellare be grouped together into the
new genus Phyllodistomum with Distomum folium as the type
species. Looss (1899) published the same year the first of his papers
on the division of the genus Distomum. He further split up Braun’s
group, and for the distomes from the urinary bladder of the frog
established the new genus Gorgodera (1899: 695). The old form
Distomum cygnoides was made the type species and Bensley’s
American varieties were included in it as separate species under the
*Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory of the University of Illinois, under
the Direction of Henry B. Ward, No. 17.
152 CORT
names Gorgodera amplicava and Gorgodera simplex. In his earlier
work Looss (1894) had mentioned that the frog bladder fluke de-
scribed by Olsson as Distomum vitellilobum had only two testes
instead of nine as in Distomum cygnoides, but he considered it to
be a young form of the latter species. The discovery that Gorgo-
dera simplex had only two testes, however, caused him to include in
his diagnosis of Gorgodera forms with both two and nine testes.
Stafford (1902) accepted Looss’ new genus and named his three
new species Gorgodera translucida, Gorgodera opaca, and Gorgodera
attenuata. He noted that this genus should be divided into two
groups, one containing forms with two testes and the other with
nine, but he made no attempt to separate them into distinct genera.
In the same year Looss (1902: 851) divided the genus Gorgodera,
and established for the species with two testes the genus Gorgo-
derina. Later Stafford (1905: 687) accepted Looss’ grouping and
renamed his species of 1902 accordingly.
Stafford’s species are very poorly described and in some of
them the most essential points for comparison are omitted entirely.
The differences which he noted between Gorgoderina simplex and
Gorgoderina opaca are so slight that I am forced to doubt their
specific distinctness. He based his description of Gorgoderina
opaca on three specimens, which he found with a large number of
Gorgoderina translucida in toads. After comparing his description
of Gorgoderina opaca with the two descriptions and a specimen of
Gorgoderina simplex, the only two points of difference which hold
good are the greater width and bluntness of the posterior body
region in the former species, and the difference in hosts. The first
difference is probably due to a more contracted condition, and since
in this group there seems to be no very definite specificity of hosts the
second difference loses its value. None of Stafford’s type material
could be obtained. Considering these facts I feel justified in calling
Gorgoderina opaca a synonym of Gorgoderina simplex.
Gorgoderina translucida differs from all the other species of
this genus in the broadness and thinness of its posterior body region.
Osborn (1903) notes its similarity to Phyllodistomum americanum
from the salamander and after comparison of specimens of the two
species states that he considers them to be in the same genus. The
AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES 153
structural differences between the genus Phyllodistomum from the
urinary bladder of fish and Gorgoderina from frogs and toads is
not great and depends largely on differences in body shape, the
members of the former genus being flat and spatula-shaped and of
the latter thicker and more cylindrical. Gorgoderina translucida
and Phyllodistomum americanum in both hosts and shape seem
almost to constitute a transition between the two genera. Another
observation along this same line is that of Ssinitzin (1905) who,
after comparing Gorgoderina vitellilobum and Phyllodistomum
folium, considered their structure to be so similar, that he decided
that they belonged to the same genus. Therefore he put Phyllodts-
tomum folium which is the type species of its genus into the genus
Gorgoderina. 1 feel that at this time I have not sufficient data to
pass judgment on the relationship of these two genera.
The European members of these genera are well known and their
whole life histories have been thoroughly worked out. The Amer-
ican forms on the other hand are very slightly known, having been
reported but few times and very inadequately described. As already
noted but three authors have reported frog bladder flukes from
North America.
Leidy (1851:207 & 1856:44) reported bladder flukes which he
called Distomum cygnoides from Rana pipiens, Rana palustris,
Rana halecina, Salamandra maculosa, Salamandra rubra, and Sala-
mandra salmonea.
Bensley (1897) described Distomum cygnoides var. A and B,
forms which were later called Gorgodera amplicava and Gorgoder-
ina simplex from Rana clamitans, Rana virescens, and Rana cates-
bina from Toronto, Canada.
Stafford (1902) also from Toronto, Canada, described Gorgo-
derina translucida, from Bufo lentiginosus and Rana virescens, Gor-
goderina opaca from Bufo lentiginosus, Gorgoderina simplex from
Rana catesbina, Gorgoderina attenuata from Rana virescens and
Rana catesbiana, and Gorgodera amplicava from Rana catesbiana.
I have at hand for the present study Gorgoderina attenuata
from Rana catesbiana, Rice Lake, Ontario, from Rana pipiens, Ur-
bana, Illinois, from Rana pipiens, Bemidji, Minnesota, and from
Rana pipiens, North Judson, Indiana; further Gorgodera amplicava
154 CORT
and Gorgodcrina simplex from Rana catesbiana, Rice Lake, Ontario;
and finally a new species of Gorgodera from Rana virescens, Ur-
bana, Illinois, and from Rana pipiens, Bemidji, Minnesota.
From a study of the above material I am able to supplement
Stafford’s short description of Gorgoderina attenuata and add the
description of a new species in the genus Gorgodera.
GORGODERINA ATTENUATA STAFFORD 1902
During the fall of 1910 while examining for parasites a number
of leopard frogs (Rana pipiens) I found in the urinary bladder of
nine hosts thirty-seven specimens of Gorgodera attenuata Stafford.
The heaviest infection in a single frog was nine. In the following
spring Dr. Henry B. Ward kindly turned over to me a number of in-
dividuals of the same species collected by A. J. Huntsman from bull-
frogs (Rana catesbiana) at Rice Lake, Ontario, Canada. These Can-
adian forms were a little smaller and more attenuated than those from
Rana pipiens. There can be no doubt in my estimation that these
two lots are both Gorgoderina attenuata. The size and ratio of the
suckers, the shape of the body and size of the egg all correspond.
The specimens from the bull-frog are a little less crowded with eggs
and are probably a little younger than the other lot. This species
is easily recognized on account of the extreme attenuation of the
posterior region of the body, and the large size of the acetabulum as
compared with the oral sucker (Fig. 7).
On account of the great activity of the worms only the general
body relations could be made out in the living material. With the
acetabulum firmly attached to the wall of the bladder, the posterior
end would often stretch out to two or three times its normal length,
become very slender and lash violently from side to side. In no
other species of bladder flukes which have been examined alive has
this activity been so pronounced. The total length of the living
worms was about ten or twelve times their width, and the ventral
sucker which was like a large bowl attached at its base, divided the
animal into two distinct regions. The anterior region was cylin-
drical and narrow, comprising about one-third to one-fourth the
length of the animal, and the posterior region, which was three-
fourths as thick as wide, ended in a rather sharp point.
AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES 155
Sixteen of these specimens, when preserved in alcohol, varied
in length from 3.3 mm. to 7.2 mm., while the Canadian material
ranged from 3.5 mm. to 4.8 mm. The width depends somewhat on
the state of contraction, varying from about 0.35 mm. to 0.56 mm.
Measurements of cross sections of three different worms at the
region of the anterior testis gave 0.46 mm. in width by 0.35 mm. in
thickness, 0.56 mm. in width by 0.46 mm. in thickness, and 0.54 mm.
in width by 0.46 mm. in thickness.
The ratio in size of the suckers (os, vs, Fig. 7) in Gorgoderina
attenuata offers an important point in specific diagnosis, and sepa-
rates it from all the other American species of this genus. The
oral sucker in sixteen specimens ranged from 0.26 mm. to 0.33 mm.
in diameter, and the acetabulum from 0.6 mm. to 0.82 mm., always
having a width noticibly greater than the width of the body. The
ratio of the suckers varied in different individuals from 1:2.1 up
to 1:3 with an average ratio of 1:2.5. Stafford notes the ratio in
Gorgoderina translucida as 1:1.5 to 1:1.75 and in Gorgoderina sim-
plex as 1:1.3 up to 1:1.5. As noted by this author in these two spe-
cies, and observed by me in Gorgoderina simplex, the edges of the
acetabulum do not extend beyond the sides of the body.
The digestive system offers few points of importance in specific
diagnosis. The mouth opens ventrally thru the oral sucker into a
narrow esophagus about 0.4 mm long. The intestinal ceca are wide
apart and close to the lateral margins in the region of the body occu-
pied by the reproductive organs, but back of the posterior testis they
approach each other and terminate almost in contact not far from
the posterior extremity of the animal.
As in other trematodes the anatomy of the reproductive sys-
tem offers the clearest specific differences, and will be considered
in some detail. Just back of the acetabulum are the paired vitelline
glands (v, Fig. 7), which are compact organs, lobed but not divided
into follicles, and connected by a transverse duct. The ovary
(o, Fig. 7), is a small round or oval structure close behind the vitel-
laria and to one side of the body. In seven out of thirteen speci-
ments the ovary was on the right side, the anterior testis to the left
and the posterior testis on the same side as the ovary, and in the
other six this order was reversed. This arrangement seems to indi-
150 CORT
cate a condition of sexual amphitypy in this species. In a specimen
5.2 mm. in length, the ovary measured 0.32 mm. in length by 0.24
mm. in width. It is wider than thick and lies near the ventral surface.
In a cross section which measured 0.31 mm. in width by 0.33 mm.
in thickness, the ovary had a width of 0.22 mm. and a thickness of
0.20 mm. (Fig. 4). The ratio of thickness to width is greater than
in most trematodes, but less in the next species to be described.
The testes are rather large, slightly elongated structures, lying
the one slightly behind the other on opposite sides of the body, the
anterior being just behind and on the opposite side from the ovary
(t, Fig. 7). They have a greater thickness than width and lie
toward the dorsal surface. In the mount for which the ovary was
measured the anterior testis had a length of 0.78 mm. and a width
of 0.30 mm.; and the posterior testis was 0.93 mm. in length by
0.32 mm. in width. In a cross section 0.47 mm. in width by 0.44 mm.
in thickness, the anterior testis measured 0.20 mm. in width by
0.26 mm. in thickness. From the anterior ends of the testes the vasa
efferentia pass forward. They run close along the dorsal body wall
and unite in front of the vitellaria to form the vas deferens. Just
anterior to the attachment of the acetabulum, the vas deferens en-
larges into the seminal vesicle, a large pyriform sac filled with
sperms. From the dosal margin of the anterior end of this organ,
the ductus ejaculatorius goes directly ventrad to the genital pore,
having clustered around the middle of its course the prostate glands,
and being of about uniform caliber thruout its length (/, Fig. 5).
The connections of the female reproductive system of Gor-
goderwna attenuata are toward the dorsal surface. The oviduct
originates from the middle of the dorsal surface of the ovary, and
widens almost immediately into the fertilization space. It soon
narrows again and gives off Laurer’s canal before entering the re-
gion surrounded by the unicellular gland cells of the so-called “shell
gland” (Fig. 13). Since Goldschmidt (1909) has conclusively
shown that this structure has nothing to do with the production of
shell material, I shall follow his lead in discarding the name of shell
gland, and call it Mehlis’ gland after its discoverer. Within Mehlis’
gland and the oviduct becomes thicker walled and changes to the
ootpye, which receives the short median duct from the yolk glands.
AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES 57;
The beginning of the uterus passes forward, curves over between the
yolk glands, and is lost in the mass of coils which fill the posterior
body region. The coils and folds of the uterus of Gorgoderina
attenuata are so complicaed that it is impossible to distinguish any
definite arrangement. In fact they seem to fill all the available
space in the posterior end and this whole region is so crowded with
eggs that all the organs are more or less obscured. In front of the
vitellaria the uterus makes several voluminous transverse folds,
and then passes forward along the mid line of the body to the gen-
ital pore. The last part is modified into a short metraterm (mt, Fig.
5), which has slightly thicker walls than the rest of the uterus.
Eggs from living individuals of this species taken from near
the genital pore, measured about 0.053 mm. by 0.034 mm., while
eggs from the same region of alcoholic specimens were only 0,032
mm. by 0.022 mm. This shows the danger in the study of species
having thin shelled eggs of comparing the measurements of eggs
from alcoholic material with those from living animals. In the
largest eggs fully developed miracidia could be seen turning around
within the shell. Such eggs when placed in ordinary tap or distilled
water after ten or fifteen minutes began to pop open and liberate
the miracidia. In fact when the worm was broken up in water on
a slide, and studied under high power, in a short time great numbers
of the minute larvae swarmed across the field of vision. They
were cylindrical in shape, pointed at one end, and swam with a
rapid whirling motion. Gradually they became distorted and went
to pieces, none living more than a few minutes. We can judge
from the above observation that in a few minutes after the eggs
pass from the salinity of the frog’s bladder into the surrounding
water the change in osmotic pressure liberates the miracidia, which
start in their search for a snail host. Whether they can live for
more than a few minutes it would take further observations and
experiments to decide. It may be of value to note in this connection
that for the demonstration of the miracidia stage of trematodes to
classes, there is probably no material more easily obtained and
better for study than the larvae which are liberated from the eggs of
the frog bladder flukes. As in all the forms of this group I have
ever seen, the eggs are in an advanced stage of development, I am
confident that this experiment would work with any of these species.
158 CORT
GORGODERA MINIMA NOV. SP.
In the fall of 1910 I found in the bladder of a large specimen
of the bull frog (Rana catesbiana) fifty very small trematodes
(Fig. 1) which differed so greatly from all the known species that
I have considered them to belong to a new species of the genus
Gorgodera. In October of the following year, I obtained some
further specimens (Fig. 2) of the same species, which had been
collected from the leopard frog (Rana pipiens) at Bemidji, Min-
nesota, by Herman Douthitt. In the bull frog the wall of the blad-
der was thickly crowded with the minute worms, which were so
tightly attached by the acetabulum, that it was necessary to tear the
tissue of the bladder to shreds before they would loosen their hold.
When killed in corrosive acetic by the shaking method of Looss
the worms became somewhat contracted, and showed a tendency
to bend backward at the acetabulum forming an angle of almost
go degrees.
These distomes vary in length from 0.9 mm. to 1.58 mm. The
smallest individuals have a considerable number of eggs in the
posterior end, while the largest have the uterus crowded thruout
its length. In a specimen measuring 1.58 mm. the internal organs
were almost entirely obscured, and the posterior end assumed the
character of a distended egg sac. The extremely small size of this
species is very striking. In the genus Gorgodera the smallest pre-
viously described form is between 3 mm. and 5 mm. in length, and
the others are all over 7 mm. [I shall call this new species Gorgodera
minima.
The ventral sucker divides the worm into two nearly equal
parts (vs, Figs. 1 & 2), the anterior region being somewhat narrower
and shorter than the posterior. Both regions are almost cylindrical,
the posterior tapering slightly to a blunt point. In an individual
crowded with eggs, a cross section thru the middle of the anterior
end measured 0.27 mm. in width by 0.26 mm. in thickness (Fig. 8),
one at the region of the ovary 0.37 mm. in width by 0.31 mm. in
thickness (Fig. 10), and one thru the posterior testis 0.31 mm. by
0.27 mm. (Fig. 11).
The acetabulum in Gorgodera minima is very large as com-
pared with the size of the worm and appears much as in the pro-
AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES 159
ceeding species. It is circular from ventral view, the average diam-
eter for ten specimens being 0.39 mm. The oral sucker has a diam-
eter of about 0.20 mm., making the ratio of the two a little less
than 2/21.
The mouth appears as a slit-like transverse aperture toward
the anterior part of the oral sucker (m, Fig. 1), opening ventrally
and about one-fifth or one-sixth the width of the sucker. The eso-
phagus is short and narrow, about 0.017 mm. in width and 0.12 mm.
in length. The intestinal ceca are about 0.06 mm. in width and at the
beginning of their course are dorsal, and wide apart to give room
for the greatly developed vesicula seminalis. In the narrow portion
of the animal just dorsal to the acetabulum the ceca come closer
together, and just posterior to this structure they spread very widely
to pass to the outside of the reproductive organs, which fill almost
the entire width of the animal at this region. They continue back-
ward outside of the reproductive organs almost to the posterior
extremity of the body. They may be next to the outside wall or
portions of the uterus may run to the outside of them.
The reproductive system of Gorgodera minima is very similar
to that of Gorgodera amplicava and Gorgodera cygnoides. The
chief differences are in the relative size of the parts and in the dis-
tances between them, which to some extent at least are determined
by the size and shape of the animal. The testes are nine in number,
five on the same side as the ovary and four on the opposite side
(Fig. 1). They are in shape rectangular prisms crowded very
closely together. All the testes seem to be about the same size and
the average measurements for a single testis are 0.05 mm. longi-
tudinally, 0.08 mm. laterally, and 0.24 mm. dorsoventrally (Fig. 11).
This peculiar shape is an important distinguishing feature of the
species. One might compare the testes to two series of cigar boxes
attached by strings thru their centers and arranged four on one side
and five on the other, with the strings from each lateral series con-
necting further forward. The testes themselves are somewhat irreg-
ular in outline, slightly lobed, and connected by a series of short
tubules. From the middle of the anterior surfaces of the anterior
testes on each side run forward the vasa efferentia. These tubules
unite in front of the ovary and the yolk glands into the vas deferens,
which passes dorsal to the acetabulum into the vesicula seminalis,
160 CORT
a large pyriform sac following a slightly spiral course and filled
with sperms (s, Fig. 1). In a worm o.g mm. long this organ meas-
ured 0.14 mm. in length, and in a cross section of another worm,
0.30 mm. in width and 0.26 mm. in thickness, it measured 0.99 mm.
in width by o.11 mm. in thickness (Fig. 8). These measurements
are of course somewhat modified by the state of contraction, but
are given to show the relatively large size of the seminal vesicle in
this species. From the anterior end of the seminal vesicle the ejac-
ulatory duct curves down, and opens ventrally at the common gential
pore. This duct is quite long in Gorgodcra minima and widens out
before opening into the pore into a small chamber lined with rather
tall epithelial cells among which are heavily staining club-shaped
cells, which appear to be glandular. Around the first part of the
ejaculatory duct are grouped the prostate glands (p, Fig. 6).
The vitellaria in Gorgodera minima are composed of two groups
of nine to eleven follicles each, lying one to each side of the animal
just back of the acetabulum. They are connected by a transverse
vitelline duct which opens into a common vitelline reservoir. On
the left side immediately behind these glands, and often overlapping
them ventrally is the ovary which is irregular and slightly lobed,
and has a thickness almost equal to the thickness of the worm ( Fig.
4). Inacross section thru the middle of the ovary, 0.28 mm. wide by
0.26 mm, thick, this organ had a width of 0.12 mm. and a thickness
of 0.20 mm. (Fig. 10). It lies toward the ventral surface and is
widest toward this side. In a frontal section 1.1 mm. long by 0.28
mm. wide, the ovary measured 0.1 mm. with the length of the animal
and 0.15 mm. with its width. None of my specimens showed sexual
amphitypy, in all of them the ovary being to the left. The oviduct
leaves the dorsal surface of the ovary, widens immediately into the
fertilization space, and narrowing again, passes forward still near
the dorsal surface to change into the ootype within Mehlis’ gland.
This is a small group of unicellular gland cells, which lie dorsally
between the groups of follicles of the vitelline glands. Within
Mehlis’ gland the median duct from the vitellaria opens into the
ootype. Laurer’s canal opens from the oviduct about half way be-
tween the fertilization space and the ootype. From its junction with
the oviduct, this duct which is very narrow, passes ventrad and then
doubles back to open on the dorsal surface back of the ovary (Fig.
AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES 161
3). As with the testes the longest axes of the vitellaria and ovary
are with the thickness of the animal.
From the ootype the uterus goes to the side opposite the ovary
and folds down the region outside of the testes to the posterior
extremity of the body, where it fill with its coils the region back
of the intestinal ceca and testes. From this region it winds forward
on the opposite side, filling not only the region between the groups
of testes, but also all the available space between the testes and
body wall and even between the individual testes. In front of the
testes it emerges from this mass of coils, to pass to the ventral side
of the ovary, over the acetabulum and forward ventral to the vesi-
cula seminalis to the genital pore (Fig. 4). In such a uterus as the
one described above the whole course is distended with eggs. In
younger worms where fewer eggs are present there is less compli-
cation. In general the course of the uterus is down the side opposite
the ovary and up the other side to the gen‘tal pore filling all the
available space between the organs.
The eggs in Gorgodera minima increase in size as they develop
in the uterus from the ootype to the gential pore. In preserved spec-
imens the eggs average in size at the ootype about 0.021 mm. by
0.014 mm., in the coils of the posterior end 0.024 mm. by 0.017 mm.,
and just behind the genital pore, where they contain fully developed
embryos, 0.032 mm. by 0.022 mm. Looss (1894:63) notes similar
differences in size in the eggs of Distomum cygnoides. I have no
measurements of eggs from living animals. As noted by Stafford
(1902:418) in Gorgoderina simplex and observed by me in Gorgo-
derina attenuata eggs of the type found in this group shrink consid-
erably after preservation in alcohol. Therefore in this species also
comparisons should not be made between living and preserved eggs.
Gorgodcra minima is the second American species of the
genus Gorgodera, the other species being Gorgodera amplicava,
described by Bensley (1897). The most striking differences between
these two species are in the size and shape of the animals, the ratio
in size of the suckers, and in the shape and relations of the repro-
ductive organs. Gorgodera minima is a very small worm, I to 2
mm. in length, with the anterior and the posterior regions of almost
equal size and almost cylindrical, while Gorgodera amplicava is
162 CORT
much longer, 3 to 5 mm., considerably wider, with the posterior
body flattened and pointed much like the blade of a two edged knife.
The anterior region in this worm is also very small in proportion to
the posterior, being about one-third as long and not one-fourth as
wide, altho thicker. In Gorgodera amplicava the acetabulum is not
only twice as large as in Gorgodera minima, but is from two and one-
half to three times as large as the oral sucker, while in the later
species the ratio is less than two to one. The great relative thick-
ness of the testes and ovary in Gorgodera minima is another feature
which differentiates it from Gorgodera amplicava. The seminal ves-
icle is relatively much larger in the former than in the latter species.
The European species of Gorgodera are larger than the American,
all being over 7 mm. in length. Gorgodera minima is by far the
smallest representative of the genus Gorgodera yet reported.
In order to facilitate comparison there is given here a list of
the genera and species of frog bladder flukes, a table of the hosts
and localities of the forms reported from North America, and a key
for the identification of North American species.
Of frog bladder flukes there have been described two genera
and ten species:
(GORGODERA GORGODERINA
Gorgodera Pagenestecheri Ssinitzin Gorgoderina simplex Looss
Gorgodera Loossi Ssinitzin Syn. Gorgoderina opaca Stafford
Gorgodera Varsoviensis Ssinitzin Gorgoderina vitellilobum Olsson
Gorgodera Amplicava Looss Gorgoderina translucida Stafford
Gorgodera minima Cort Gorgoderina attenuata Stafford.
AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES
1603
The following table includes all the reports which could be
found of frog bladder flukes from North America.
Froc BLADDER FLUKES REPORTED FROM NoRTH
Author
Leidy.
Date
1851
1897
1902
1912 Cort.
The following key may be of value to
the identification of any specimens of this
Bensley.
Stafford.
Name used
Distomum
cygnoides.
Distomum
cygnoides,
var.
Distomum
cygnoides,
var.
Gorgodera,
translucida.
Gorgodera
simplex.
Gorgodera
opaca,
Gorgodera
attenuata.
Gorgodera
amplicava.
into their hands.
Present name
(?)
Gorgodera
amplicava.
Gorgoderina
simplex.
Gorgoderina
translucida.
Gorgoderina
simplex.
. Gorgoderina
simplex.
Gorgoderina
attenuata.
Gorgodera
amplicava.
Gorgoderina
simplex.
Gorgodera
amplicavya.
Gorgoderina
attenuata.
Gorgoderina
attenuata.
Gorgoderina
attenuata.
Gorgoderina
attenuata,
Gorgodera
minima.
Gorgodera
minima,
Hosts
Rana pipiens,
Rana palustris,
Rana halecina,
Salamandra mac-
ulosa, Salaman-
dra rubra, Sala-
mandra salmonea.
Rana clamitans.
Rana virescens.
Rana catesbiana.
Bufo
lentiginosus.
Rana virescens.
Rana catesbiana
Bufo |
lentiginosus.
Rana virescens.
Rana catesbiana
Rana catesbiana
Rana catesbiana
Rana catesbiana
Rana catesbiana
Rana pipiens.
Rana pipiens.
Rana pipiens.
Rana pipiens.
Rana catesbiana
AMERICA
Locality
(is)
Toronto, Canada.
Toronto, Canada.
Toronto, Canada.
Toronto, Canada.
Toronto, Canada.
Toronto, Canada.
Toronto, Canada.
Rice Lake
Ontario, Can.
Rice Lake
Ontario, Can.
Rice Lake
Ontario, Can.
Urbana, III.
North Judson, Ind.
Bemidji, Minn.
Bemidji, Minn.
Urbana, Ill.
American workers for
group which may fall
Key To NortH AMERICAN FroG BLADDER FLUKES
1(4) Bladder flukes with nine testes.
Genus Gorgodera Looss 1899...2
2(3) Length 3-5 mm.; posterior body region flat and transparent; acetabulum
2.5 to 3 times the size of oral sucker.
Gorgodera amplicava Looss 1899
3(2) Length 1 to 2 mm.; posterior body region opaque and almost cylindrical ;
acetabulum 1.6-2 times oral sucker.
Gorgodera minima nov. sp.
1604 CORT
4(1) Bladder flukes with two testes.
Genus Gorgoderina Looss 1902...5
5(6) Posterior body region broad flat and transparent; thickness about one-
third the width.
Gorgoderina translucida Stafford 1902
6(5) Posterior body region opaque and thick; thickness one-half or more
than sone-halh, widths. sick onthe. ¢. cae c eerie eee 7
7(8) Acetabulum 1.3 to 1.5 times oral sucker.
Gorgoderina simplex Stafford 1902
Syn. Gorgoderina opaca Stafford 1902
8(7) Acetabulum more than 2 times oral sucker.
Gorgodera attenuata Stafford 1902
Osborn’s Phyllodistomum americanum from a urodele should
be mentioned in this connection. It is possible that this form may
be found in the frog. Frog bladder flukes which do not come under
this key may perhaps belong to one or the other of the European
species of these genera not yet reported in this country.
I wish to express my gratitude to Professor Henry B. Ward
for the use of material from his collection and for his kindly advice
and criticism in the preparation of this paper.
LITERATURE CITED
Bensley, R. R. 1897. Two forms of Distomum cygnoides. Centr. f. Bakt.,
1 Abt., 21 :326-331.
Braun, M. 1899. Ueber Clinostomum Leidy. Zool. Anz., 22 :484-493.
Goldsmith, R. 1909. Ejischale, Schalendriise und Dotterzellen der Trema-
toden. Zool. Anz., 34:481-497.
Leidy, J. 1851. Contributions to Helminthology. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., 5 :205-2009.
1856. A Synopsis of Entozoa and some of their Ectocogeners
observed by the author. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 8:42-58.
Loschge, F. H. 1785. Nachricht von besondern Eingeweidewiirmer aus der
Harnblase des Frosches. Naturforscher, 21:10-14. (Cited after Stiles).
Looss, A. 1804. Die Distomen unserer Fische und Froésche. Bibl. Zool.,
16, 203 pp.
1899. Weitere Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Trematoden-fauna
Aegyptens. Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 12:521-784.
——_——. 1902. Ueber neue und bekannte Trematoden aus Seeschildkro-
ten. Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 16 :411-794.
Osborn, H. L. 1903. On Phyllodistomum americanum (n. s.): a New Blad-
der Distome from Amblystoma punctatum. Biol. Bull., 4:252-258.
AMERICAN FROG BLADDER FLUKES 165
Ssinitzin, D, Th. 1905. Contributions to the Natural History of Trema-
todes. The Distomes of Fish and Frogs in the vicinity of Warsaw.
Separate, 210 pp. (Russian). Abstracted by Dampf, A., Centr. f. Bakt.,
1 Abt., 39 :667-670.
Stafford, J. 1902. The American Representatives of Distomum cygnoides.
Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 17 :411-424.
1905. Trematodes from Canadian Vertebrates. Zool. Anz.,
28 :681-6094.
Zeder, J. G. H. 1800. Erster Nachtrag zur Naturgeschichte der Einge-
weidewtrmer von J. A. C. Goeze, 175 pp. Cited after Looss (1894).
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN PLATES
e, Esophagus od, Oviduct
f, Fertilization space p, Prostate glands
g, Genital pore s, Seminal vesicle
i, Intestine t, Testes
1, Laurers’ canal u, Uterus
m, Mouth v, Vitelline gland
mg, Mehlis’ gland vd, Vas deferens
mt, Metraterm ve, Vas efferens
os, Oral sucker vs, Ventral sucker.
o, Ovary
106 CORT
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
All drawings were made with a camera lucida.
PLATE XV
Fig. 1. Gorgodera minima from Urbana, Illinois, seen from ventral
surface. Young specimen with but few eggs in the uterus. 108.
Fig. 2. Gorgodera minima from Bemidji, Minnesota, seen from dorsal
surface. About the same age and size as figure I but slightly less magni-
fied. X88.
Fig. 3. Reconstruction from frontal sections of the region just back of
the acetabulum in Gorgodera minima, showing the organs and their connec- _
tions in the female reproductive system, as seen from dorsal surface. X18o.
Fig. 4. Cross section of body at level of ovary in Gorgoderina attenu-
ata. X180.
Fig. 5. Reconstruction from sagittal sections of Gorgoderina attenuata,
showing the genital pore and the ends of the ducts of the reproductive sys-
tems. X300.
Fig. 6. Reconstruction from sagittal sections of Gorgodera minima,
showing the genital pore and the ends of the ducts of the reproductive sys-
tems. X300.
Fig. 7. Gorgoderina attenuata seen from ventral surface. X36.
PLATE XVI
Fig. 8-12. A series of cross sections from a specimen of Gorgodera
minima, showing the structure of important organs at different levels. X18o.
Fig. 8. Section thru the seminal vesicle at about the level of the guide
line to s in figure I.
Fig. 9. Section thru the acetabulum at about the level of the guide line
to vs in figure I.
Fig. to. Section thru the ovary at about the level of the guide line to o
in figure I.
Fig. 11. Section thru the testicular region at about the level of the mid-
dle guide line from ¢ in figure 1.
_ Fig. 12. Section thru the post-testicular region at about the level of the
guide line to u in figure I.
Fig. 13. Reconstruction from frontal sections of the region just back
of the acetabulum in Gorgoderina attenuata, showing the organs and their
connections in the female reproductive system as seen from the dorsal
surface. X18o.
XV
PLATE
PLATE XVI
NOTES, ON THE ANATOMY OF THE) TREMATODE;
MECKROPHALEUS OPACUS*
SEWALL WRIGHT
This investigation has been carried on with material furnished
by Dr. H. B. Ward from type specimens of Microphallus opacus
collected in 1893 from Amuia calva in Lake St. Clair. I was unable
to use whole mounts to any great extent. Most of the work was
done with transverse, frontal and sagittal sections, 5-20 thick and
stained on the slide with Ehrlich’s haematoxylin. This species was
first described by Ward in 1894 as Distoma opacum. Its present
genus, Microphallus, of which it is the only member was founded
by Ward in 1901. A description of the general appearance and of
the suckers may be found in Ward (1894) and need not be repeated.
The body wall is of the usual type among trematodes. There
is a noncellular cuticula, several layers of muscle fibres and a region
of closely packed cells merging with the looser parenchyma. The
cuticula presents a finely dotted appearance, the nature of which
was not determined. Adjacent to the cuticula is a layer of very fine
muscle fibres, a little over Im apart. Next is a layer of coarse long-
itudinal fibres and two layers of coarse oblique fibres making angles
of 60° with each other and the longitudinal, the three thus forming
a pattern of equilateral triangles. The fibres in these layers are at
varying distances apart depending upon the part of the body ex-
amined. They are most abundant in the anterior ventral region.
The cuticula continues into the digestive tract lining the prepharynx
and esophagus. Coarse longitudinal fibres, some two dozen in num-
ber, lie below the cuticula in these regions. The pharynx is com-
posed mainly of radial muscle fibres but has a layer of circular
fibres on the inside and anteriorly on the outside.
The excretory system consists of sixteen large flame cells, a
system of canals, a large bilobed vesicle, and a short ciliated canal
*Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory of the University of Illinois, under
the Direction of Henry B. Ward, No. 18.
168 WRIGHT
to the exterior (Fig. 2). The details were obtained by reconstruct-
ing the system in four series of transverse sections. The recon-
structions were made by measurements with the ocular micrometer
and plotted on a previously reconstructed lateral or dorsal view
of the animal. These four series checked with each other. The
number and position of the flame cells was checked in several other
series. The excretory pore as a rule is placed dorsally and slightly
in front of the extreme end. It is at the end of a short, thickly cili-
ated canal, the outlet of a vesicle which extends forward for one-
third to two-fifths of the length of the body. Almost from the first
the vesicle shows median longitudinal constrictions on the dorsal
and ventral surfaces, and at one-third to one-half its length it divides
completely into right and left lobes. These are more or less cylin-
drical, tapering somewhat at the anterior end. The whole vesicle
lies fairly close to the dorsal surface. The lining of the vesicle
and its outlet are crowded with nuclei but muscle fibres were not
detected.
The system of canals and flame cells is bilaterally symmetrical,
eight flame cells on each side of the body. There is also a certain
biradial symmetry. As mentioned above, the vesicle lies along the
dorsal surface of the body. A canal drops to the ventral surface
from the anterior end of each lobe and divides into a posterior and
an anterior branch. Four flame cells supply the posterior and four
the anterior and with corresponding canals. In fact, all of the
flame cells are similarly placed with respect to canals; all have just
three forks between them and the excretory vesicle. In each of
the pairs of flame cells which are immediately connected by a fork,
one is decidedly dorsal, the other ventral.
The details of the system can best be described by considering
one side of the body only (Figs. 1 and 2). The first ventral flame
cell is at the side of the anterior sucker, often closely against it. The
first dorsal is above the esophagus, a little off the median line. Canals
run from them and unite near the side of the body. The united
canal runs back longitudinally. The second ventral flame cell is
lateral to the intestinal branches or seminal vesicle and not far from
the ventral surface. The second dorsal is above these organs and
near the median line. In some specimens the second ventral or
second dorsal flame cell is close against the seminal vesicle or ovary,
ANATOMY MICROPHALLUS OPACUS 169
but this seems to be an accidental relation. The canals of this pair
unite a little above the longitudinal canal from the first pair of flame
cells and are joined with the latter by a very short canal. In one
case this short canal was shortened to disappearance on one side.
Beyond the junction the canal continues longitudinally to the region
along side of the ventral sucker where it is joined by the corres-
ponding canal supplied by the third and fourth pairs of flame cells.
The fourth ventral flame cell is near the posterior end of the animal,
pressed back by the last fold of the uterus. The fourth dorsal is
close against the posterior side of the testis on that side of the body.
Canals from these two run toward each other and toward the side
of the body all the time confined in the narrow space between uterus
and body wall. They are usually pressed flat and difficult to follow.
The united canal runs forward and downward still outside the uter-
ine folds. The third ventral flame cell is near the side of the ventral
sucker. The third dorsal is close against the anterior face of the tes-
tis. I found one exception in which it was considerably anterior to
the testis. The canals of this pair run outside the folds of the uterus
and join near the ventral surface. The resulting canal runs poste-
riad to a union with the canal supplied by the fourth pair. The
canal thus formed runs in toward the ventral sucker to join the
canal supplied by the first four flame cells on that side of the body
as mentioned above. The large canal following this union runs
perpendicularly upward between the folds of the uterus, the only
one to do so, to the anterior end of the lobe of the excretory vesicle
on its side.
These flame cells are very favorable for study. They are very
large and of typical form, each cell having a conspicuous nucleus,
cytoplasmic processses in all directions, and at one side a conical
bunch of cilia some 15 long which projects into the blind end of
a canal.
The great simplicity of the excretory system may be merely
correlated with the small size of the animal and due to degeneration,
but it seems not unlikely that it has more significance. In the fact
that the main trunks divide in the middle of the body into anterior
and posterior branches, it is a good representative of Looss’ typical
form for distomes of which he (1894) considers such forms as that
in which the main trunks go to the anterior end of the body and re-
170 WRIGHT
turn on themselves, or in which the system is a complex network,
to be later modifications.
In the nervous system, the large nerves show fairly well on
slides stained with haematoxylin as gray bundles of fibres in a blue
background. The smaller nerves, I frequently had trouble in fol-
lowing from section to section. Only the large nerves could be fol-
lowed in transverse sections. Various tangential sections gave the
best results.
The central part of the nervous system is a large mass form-
ing an arch over the prepharynx just in front of the pharynx (Fig.
3). Radiating from each end are nerves connecting with the eight
longitudinal trunks an dnerves supplying the oral sucker. Six
nerves are given off at each end, four in a more or less horizontal
plane (Fig. 4), one upwards and one downwards. The largest one
runs posteriad from the central mass and lateriad at an angle of
about 30°. Near the end of the first third of the body it drops
down to the ventral surface and continues back along this surface
curving inward somewhat in the region of the ventral sucker. This
is the main trunk. The next nerve in order in the horizontal plane
is a very fine one, at right angles to the long axis of the body and
connecting with the lateral trunk. Next comes a large bundle
going forward and out some 45° and dividing into a short branch
running to the sides of the oral sucker and the large lateral trunk
which runs far back along the lateral margin of the body. A large
but short branch runs directly forward over the dorsal surface of
the oral sucker. The ventral bundle runs outwards and forward
somewhat and is connected at the ventral surface with the corres-
ponding nerve on the other side by a commissure. Two small nerves
run forward from points near the connection and the fairly large
ventral longitudinal trunk runs backward one-fourth to one-third the
length of the animal. It stops just where the main trunk reaches
the ventral surface. The dorsal bundle from the central mass divides
at the dorsal surface, the forward branch running to the anterior
end of the body, curving down with the curve of the body and end-
ing just above the oral sucker while the backward branch is the dor-
sal longitudinal trunk and runs back parallel to the long axis of the
animal. A short distance back of the central mass the main trunk
sends out large nerges to the ventral, lateral, and dorsal trunks (Fig.
ANATOMY MICROPHALLUS OPACUS 171
5). The dorsal and lateral trunks and the nerves on the ventral
surface, the ventral and main trunks, are connected by commissures.
In my preparations I could not determine the number satisfactorily
and in the case of those connecting with the lateral trunks none were
found which could certainly be demonstrated as complete commis-
sures. The main trunk sends a couple of branches from each side
to the ventral sucker. These seem to run directly into the circular
muscles surrounding the base of the sucker. The system in the
posterior part of the body could not be determined at all.
This arrangement of the nervous system agrees in most respects
with that which I have found described for other distomes. I have
not, however, found reference to the ventral longitudinal trunk.
The main trunk is the one usually called ventral. As the ventral
trunk is immediately below the main trunk, close to it, and smaller,
it would probably be difficult to distinguish in whole mounts.
Only a few additions need be made to the description of the
reproductive system by Ward (1894 and 1901). There is a curious
interweaving of the vasa deferentia, the yolk ducts and the uterus
(Figs. 8 and 9). The vasa deferentia run forward and downward
from the testes and unite in the middle region of the body. The yolk
ducts run forward and upward from the yolk glands and unite
above the union of the vasa deferentia. Instead however of passing
each other symmetrically, the right yolk duct passes in front of
below the right vas deferens while the left yolk duct passes over and
behind the left vas deferens. The uterus passes in front of the
yolk duct but behind the vasa deferentia. The yolk ducts are dis-
torted from bilateral symmetry somewhat, the vasa deferentia more.
This was the relation in all series examined including one described
later in which there were two ovaries so that the reproductive organs
were unusually symmetrical.
Ward (1894) after stating that as the animals become mature
the yolk glands increase in size, continues thus: “In older speci-
mens, I am inclined to think that they are again reduced in size but
evidence on this point is incomplete.” My slides are not of the right
stages to give evidence on an early increase in size, but they clearly
show a later reduction. The changes in the size of all the reproduct-
ive organs are very interesting. In young specimens the yolk ducts
end in large masses occupying most of the sides of the posterior half
172 WRIGHT
of the body. Each gland is composed of a number of large spherical
lobes, some fused side by side and some connected by small ducts
in an irregular way. In these specimens the uterus is a narrow tube
winding around in the parenchyma between the two yolk glands;
the ovary and testes are large and round often over one-half the
thickness of a cross section, while the seminal vesicle may be rather
small, often smaller than the ovary (Fig. 6). On the other hand, in
older specimens the lobes of the yolk glands lose their spherical
appearance and become irregular masses compressed into the mould
of the uterine folds which here fill the hind body so completely that
almost no parenchyma can be seen (Fig. 7). In some cases nothing
can be found of the yolk glands but the stumps of their ducts and
perhaps a few scattered yolk cells. Here the testes are smaller and
compressed into an irregular shape, and the ovary is smaller, while
the seminal vesicle becomes larger than the ovary, sometimes swollen
to reach almost from the dorsal to the ventral surface. Thus the
organs which produce the components of the egg—ova, sperm, and
shell, reach their maximum early. The organs which store the
sperm and eggs, reach their maximum later at the expense of the
former set. The changes in the yolk glands and uterus are most
striking.
At first sight the uterus seems to fill the hind body with a series
of irregular, chance folds. These folds cannot be followed in whole
mounts owing to concealment by the yolk glands or to their own com-
plexity. Examination of sections shows, however, that there is a
simple and fairly constant plan beneath the secondary complexities.
I followed the convolutions in nine series. Seven followed the plan
below perfectly, the two others differed slightly. The method of
study was the reconstruction of serial sections, transverse in eight
cases, frontal in the other. The general plan (Figs. 10 and 11) is
this: The uterus drops down from the shell gland and enlarges
in the center of a cross section in the middle region of the body,
proceeds posteriad, enlarging all the time, finally loops forward on
the right side, dorsal to the yolk glands, and reaches its starting
point. Then it doubles back on itself, retracing its course but ventral
to the yolk glands and again reaches the starting point. Then it
forms the same folds on the left side but in reverse order and the
final portion, become small again, goes forward side by side with
ANATOMY MICROPHALLUS OPACUS W783
the first portion and where the latter rises toward the shell gland,
the former drops to leave the body at the genital pore. The dorsal
circuit on both sides is typically quadrilateral in shape tho there are
usually additional minor twists in it. The lateral and anterior sides
are the most enlarged portions of the uterus. Sometimes they have
a diameter one-fourth that of the body. The ventral circuit is
typically triangular, in fact almost invariably has only two bends.
One very remarkable specimen was examined (Fig. 9). Aside
from minor peculiarities it was distinguished by having two ovaries.
This specimen was the shortest in proportion to its other dimensions
of any examined. The dimensions were 1.0x0.7x0.55 mm., length,
breadth and thickness. The anterior sucker and digestive tract
were normal except that the branches of the intestine were unusually
short and diverged at right angles to the esophagus, being closely
pressed against the seminal vesicle. The ventral sucker was ex-
tremely far back. The opening was at the beginning of the last
third of the body. Its breadth was about normal but it was unus-
ually low and very long, far from the normal spherical shape.
Its deep cavity was turned posteriad. The seminal vesicle was
centrally placed and globular. The ductus ejaculatorius, instead of
dropping straight downward, went almost directly posteriad and
with the metraterm left the body at an extremely oblique angle.
The opening was, however, left of the ventral sucker as is normal.
Transverse sections normally split the ductus; here they showed a
nearly circular cross section. The two ovaries were exactly paired
with each other, right and left. Both were dorsal to the seminal
vesicle. Both were ellipsoidal and closely followed by a normal
testis. The left ovary, the abnormal one, was considerably the
larger. It had no oviduct. The outlet of the right was normal tho
somewhat displaced in parts. There was more symmetry in the
position of Laurer’s canal, the first part of the uterus and the yolk
ducts than usual. The relations of the yolk ducts and vasa defer-
entia were however asymmetrical as mentioned before.
174 WRIGHT
SUMMARY
The principal points discussed are:
(1) The nature of the integument.
(2) The excretory system, particularly its biradial symmetry and the
similar relations of all the sixteen flame cells in the system.
(3) The nervous system, particularly the presence of eight longitudinal
nerves.
(4) The asymmetrical relation of the yolk ducts and vasa deferentia.
(5) The alternation in maximum development of yolk glands, ovary
and testes on one hand with seminal vesicle and uterus on the other.
(6) The arrangement of the folds of the uterus.
(7) A specimen with two ovaries.
In conclusion I wish to express my gratitude to Professor
Henry B. Ward for the material and for the aid and encouragement
he has given me in this work.
Papers CITED
Looss, A. 1894. Die Distomem unserer Fische und Froesche. Bibl. Zool.,
Heft. 16.
Ward, H. B. 1894. On the parasites of the Lake Fish. I. Notes on the
Structure and Life History of Distoma opacum n. sp. Proc. Amer. Mic.
Soc., 15 :173-182.
1901. Notes on the Parasites of the Lake Fish. III. On the
Structure of the Copulatory Organs in Microphallus nov. gen. Trans.
Amer. Mic. Soc., 22 :175-187.
ANATOMY MICROPHALLUS OPACUS 175
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
ABBREVIATIONS
CNM _ Central nerve mass Ov. Ovary :
DE Ductus ejaculatorius P Copulatory papilla
DLN Dorsal longitudinal nerve Ph Pharynx
EC Excretory canal Pre Prepharynx
EV Excretory vesicle SG So-called Shell gland
FC Flame cell SV Seminal vesicle
Int Intestinal branch Tdiestis
LC Laurer’s canal Ut Uterus
LLN Lateral longitudinal nerve VS Ventral sucker
M_ Metraterm YD So-called Yolk duct
MLN Main longitudinal nerve YG So-called Yolk gland
Geer Besonasts 1D First dorsal flame cell
cee 1V First ventral flame cell
Os Oral sucker 5D)
Od Oviduct etc. Second dorsal flame cell, etc.
PLaTeE XVII
Fig. 1. Excretory system of left side, in lateral aspect, reconstructed
by measurements from transverse sections. Somewhat foreshortened. 60.
Fig. 2. Excretory system. Dorsal view. Reconstructed from same
series as Fig. I. X60.
Fig. 3. Nervous system. Dorsal view. Diagramatic. 60.
Fig. 4. Frontal section, showing the nerves leading from the central
nerve mass at one side. X75.
Fig. 5. Transverse section showing the eight longitudinal nerve trunks
and two commissures. X75.
Pirate XVIII
Fig. 6. Transverse section thru posterior part of body, showing well
developed yolk glands and small uterus. 45.
Fig. 7. Transverse section similar to that of Fig. 6 but in another series,
showing remnants of yolk glands and enlarge uterus. 45.
Fig. 8. Reconstruction from several transverse sections, showing typical
arrangement of reproductive organs (except middle of uterus) from posterior
end. X75.
Fig. 9. Similar reconstruction to Fig. 8. Made from the specimen
with two ovaries. X75.
Fig. 10. Ventral view of the folds of the uterus, reconstructed by meas-
urements from transverse sections. X60.
Fig. 11. Similar view to Fig. 10. Showing a younger stage. O60.
a Yad Wad! aR eng Et
a 4) js ANE iN ay ‘Bike
oAMEA ives?) gale ai
> Wit Aaa py samt i
a Ay at ‘ Finny if a cm
aly AeA she |
| Pro arn Bhs MM Vinee AN iy REE
pe ‘) ii
“or se i nt ambiad oe i
if q | i ; anti) Pedy dundee gi he
A Wes ea Vs) pina il hae A
ay 3) uy 1 ae Pet a Sapeacnay nash
atid % {cap A epi) Sieg ‘ae lilepigheenig
Ta} roa Nig Wh feays oy iol Mie AN ni ee
1 MS ea hb Mee wR
CREP EH ods HA Neon yer (ia ; Tilinis
; 7 Ful CTE Aaa? pee RU ee f
Ty ees eta wid W ; 0 | fe ae |
i he rs ty SRDS pe sy en
Pa IT a a Pee Sine MET |e atk eel, EG peptic
Meat Boaains a yeh a Me eee ar ie toe erie eae n | ha
Pra, a HRN cua Ne Lomo seninte Vila ee
a Gem i: elu ts ee
a ie Oe geraets ie: » POI DIR )? BRON BA) Dy eh SA
Labveivl APPR dts | ald ALS Vals" ONL gi its re ag SS
a TAN aoe alate
TE SR ee
iad eT a i "4 PLA Hist Pyiad ae
4
Pil ot a Wey isi Leave Nien } d relat hoe rt ve
pal i aia a a
an.
Law Bal pie Wag h PTT Oy) RD RE Merlot ney
: Pa il Ie TR TaD, GH aye His y hehe |
orstiys iar a fare Oe at Bes og he GaN eraldnee, ab Bo At i
| LAW il were dn re wtay Wie WMiniiys Maw Honey aa
LVR LEP ROT NL peste Thee rege)! tet eee Ni,
Sg PRD CMPD: Aires, ad OE a Bate OY eid ain a Peay else be i
| i . / ; rae
Cr real: TP ide ei? A! ah a (Pl Sa TAL |
| s TH | as
CUTE GH metre Stee i aki Aa resi ate Tee aa weal i bin weed Ler) iad
) RG" 0) ben bali eerie: wide
AM OMe TA Satan s Je OT ae way mE ware
f : i |
‘ a | ve ey ay
Ae at | ma ‘i ab is
Pe MRE pre Ba UN
PLaTE XVII
Pirate XVIII
RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN DRAWING BY THE AID
OF, PROJECTION: APPARATUS USEDION THE
MOUSE, LIGHTING SYSTEM:
By Simon H. GAGE
In the very first accounts that have come down to us of images
in darkened rooms (1558-1568), it is insisted on with great enthu-
siasm that here is a means to aid in drawing the complex images of
natural scenery. for example, Daniello Barbero, who first spe-
cifically mentions the use of a lens to give a more perfect screen
image, says in his work on perspective, Venice, 1568: ‘Seeing
therefore, on the paper screen the outline of things, you can draw
with a pencil all the perspective and shading and coloring according
to nature, holding the paper tightly till you have finished the draw-
ing.”
Following down the stream of history it is found that every
great expounder of projection apparatus brings out with emphasis
the help which it promises for lessening the drudgery of getting
accurate drawings.
The one thing necessary for bringing about the universal em-
ployment of projection apparatus for drawing was the general dis-
tribution of a source of light of proper intensity to give images of
sufficient brilliancy so that the details could be seen clearly enough
to be traced with accuracy. The light must furthermore be under
control at all hours of the day and night, and furnish the light from
a very small source. The electric light fulfills all the requirements,
when used from an arc lamp.
The real advance for drawing was made when it was seen
that an are lamp could be made small enough, or rather that the
carbons used in an are lamp could be made small enough, so that
the current used in the ordinary house lighting system could be em-
ployed to run the arc lamp.
For this most useful addition to the working machinery of the
investigator and the student, we are most indebted to Dr. L. Edinger,
178 GAGE
the eminent director of the Neurologic Institute at Frankfort on the
Main. In 1907, only five years ago, he replaced his drawing and
photographing outfit using oil or gas light, by one using a small arc
lamp. This small arc lamp was worked out and perfected by the
optical works of Leitz at Wetzlar.
This method of drawing has been so far perfected and cheap-
ened that it is now available for private workers as well as for insti-
tutions; for students as well as for directors of laboratories.
It seemed to the writer that perhaps he could do no better
service at this time than to call attention to the method, and point
yout from his experience with all the forms some of the necessary
rules to follow to get the best results most easily and safely.
In the first place one must possess an arc lamp in which the
carbons are held at right angles to each other; and, in passing, it
is gratifying to remember that the now so widely used right angled
arc lamp for projection, was devised in 1894 by Mr. Albert T.
Thompson of Boston. Without a lamp for holding the carbons in
this position so that the one giving the light can remain constantly
in the optic axis, the small drawing outfits would be practically
impossible.
The carbons must be small, from the small current used, viz.:
3 to 6 amperes; and they should be soft cored. A small arc lamp
is a convenience, but any arc lamp designed for the carbons at right
angles can be used by employing bushings or adapters to hold the
small carbons.
Either direct or alternating electric current can be used. One
must know which current is on his house lighting system, and also
the voltage. Both these facts can be learned by inquiry at the office
of the electric lighting company furnishing the electricity.
INSTALLING AN ALTERNATING CURRENT ARC LAMP.
As alternating current systems are more common than direct
current ones, an outfit on such a system will be first considered.
In the first place, it cannot be stated with too much emphasis
that: “One must never try to use an arc lamp on the house lighting
system without a rheostat. Hence in purchasing the outfit it is nec-
essary to get a rheostat adapted for the voltage (usually 110 or 220)
and which will not allow more than 5 to 6 amperes of current to flow
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 179
through the lamp. If more current were allowed to flow the fuses
of the line would be burned out.
Assuming that the worker has the proper rheostat and lamp,
how shall it be connected with the lighting system?
Wiring for the small arc lamp :—This is shown in fig. 1, which
is especially prepared to show how to install this drawing outfit.
It is also shown in fig. 6, 13, and 14. One can use the good, heavy
flexible twisted wire, but it is better to use the asbestos covered
cable employed for flat irons and other heating devices. A cord
from one to three meters in length (3 to 10 ft.) will usually suffice.
Screen
Fig 1
Fig. 1. Diagram of the Microscope for drawing, the Arc Lamp with small right
angled carbons, the Wiring, the Rheostat and the connections with the house lighting
system.
A. The small are lamp with the condenser (C) giving parallel rays, the vertical
(V-C) and the horizontal (H-C) carbons; F the feeding mechanism, and the wires (W3,
di-ect from the line, W4 through the rheostat). The rheostat (R) is in one wire. The
sesarable plug (Sp) is connected below with the cable (W2) and above with the lamp
socket (So) with its key switch, (K). Still above is the incandescent lamp cable (W1)
connecting the lamp socket with the house current.
B. The Microscope in section showing the beam of parallel rays from the lamp
condenser entering the substage condenser (S-C) directly (as in fig. 14) or reflected in by
the mirror (M#) as in fig. 2, 3, 12, 15); St. Stage of the microscope; O objective, FI, I,
El, the field lens, the real image and the eye lens of the ocular (Oc); M? the prism or
45 degree mirror for reflecting the image forming rays down on the drawing paper.
C. Cored carbons of equal size for alternating current.
D. Carbons of the correct relative size for direct current.
E. Face view of the disc on the end of the lamp condenser tube showing the con-
denser (C) and the spot of light (1) reflected back from the substage condenser.
(1) One end of the cord is connected with the cap of a sepa-
rable attachment plug (figs. 1, 6). This connection must be care-
fully and thoroughly made:so that there will be no short circuits.
180 GAGE
(2) One of the wires of the cable is cut some distance from
the other end, and one of the cut ends is attached to one binding
post, and the other to the other binding post of the rheostat (figs.
I, 2, 3). This will put the rheostat in series, as it is called. No
current can then flow through the lamp or indeed along the wires
without passing through the rheostat.
(3) The wires at the end of the cable are now connected with
the binding posts of the arc lamp—one wire for each carbon.
All binding screws for connecting the wires with the separable
plug, the rheostat, or the arc lamp should be set tight so that there
will be good metallic connection and so that, in using the apparatus,
the wires will not separate from their connections.
Connection with any lamp socket of the house lighting system
can now be made by means of the separable attachment plug (figs.
1a 0)
The arc lamp must be supplied with soft cored carbons not over
8 mm (5-16 in.) in diameter. If only from three to four amperes
of current is used, then the carbons should not be over 6 mm. (1-4
in.) in diameter. One must select carbons of a size that the whole
end will be heated by the current used or the light will not remain
constantly in one axis, and it will be necessary to change the mirror
of the lamp to get the light in the optic axis every time the crater
wanders on the carbon tip. If the whole end of the carbon is white
hot, as will occur if the carbon is small enough, then the light will
be steady.
_ The ends of the two carbons must be in the correct relative
position as shown in fig. 1 or the best light will not be given, due to
the shading of one carbon by the other.
INSTALLING A Direct CurRRENT Arc LAmp
As a direct current arc lamp gives more than twice as much
light for the same amperage as the alternating current, it would
always be used if available.
The same lamp serves for both currents. The only difference
is that for the direct current the upper carbon must be larger as
the positive carbon burns out faster than the negative carbon.
This is a good proportion: Upper or positive carbon 8 mm. in
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 181
diameter ; Lower or negative carbon 6 mm. in diameter. Then they
will shorten about equally.
With the alternating current each carbon is positive half the
time; with the direct current one carbon is positive all the time and
one negative all the time.
In installing the lamp one proceeds precisely as for the alter-
nating current, that is, a separable plug is connected with one end
of the cable; a rheostat is inserted along one of the wires, and the
other end of the cable has one wire to each binding post of the arc
lamp (fig. 1). The only complication is that the positive wire must
be connected with the binding post of the upper carbon, and the
negative wire to the binding post of the lower carbon.
Usually one does not know which wire is positive and which
is negative, and it is necessary to find out by experiment as follows:
Connect up the lamp as for the alternating current without regard
to positive and negative. Put in some equal sized carbons and turn
on the current. Let it run for a minute or two and then separate
the carbons till the lamp goes out, then look at the carbons and
watch them while they cool. The positive one will be brightest in
the beginning, and stay red the longer. If the upper one is brightest
it shows that the lamp is connected up correctly. If the lower one
is brightest the polarity is turned around. To correct this, pull
out the cap of the separable plug, turn it half way around and in-
sert itagain. This should reverse the polarity and cause the current
to run through the lamp in the right direction. Light the lamp
again and make sure that the upper carbon is the brightest and
remains glowing the longest. Finally when the upper carbon is
positive some kind of a mark should be made on the lamp socket,
the plug and its cap so that all can be connected in exactly the same
way again, or one would have the trouble of correcting for polarity
every time the connections were made.
For turning on the lamp and putting it out, proceed exactly as
for the alternating current lamp.
Carbons for the Direct Current Lamp.—Use 8 mm. carbons for
the upper or positive one and 6 mm. carbons for the negative or
lower one; 7 upper, 5 lower answer also.
182 GAGE
One must look at the carbons occasionally and be sure that
they are in the correct relative position to give unobstructed pas-
sage to the light toward the condenser (fig. 1 C).
Feeding the Carbons Together—One must feed the carbons
together every two or three minutes for the best effect. With the
alternating current the arc might burn for 10 minutes, but the light
is not so good as when the carbons are fed often.
Condenser for the Small Arc Lamp.—To collect the light given
off by the arc lamp there must be some form of a condenser in
connection with it. This can be a large condenser such as is used
with magic lanterns (figs. 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 13) or for the simplest
apparatus it is a small condenser in a tube extending out in line
with the upper carbon of the arc lamp (figs. 1-3, 12, 14-15). In
all the lamps now used for drawing the special condenser is in a
telescoping tube so that it can be put at its principal focal distance
from the carbon tips, when it will give a beam of nearly parallel
light, or the tube can be pulled out more or less, thus giving a con-
verging cone of light.
For a microscope, any compound miscroscope can be used
which can be inclined to the horizontal.
For reflecting the image forming rays down upon the drawing
paper, a mirror or prism must be put at the end of the tube of the
microscope whether an ocular is used or not (fig.1,-15).
The only difficulty one is liable to have with the microscope is
that the fine adjustment may not work well when the microscope
is made horizontal.
Suppose now that one has a complete outfit, how shall it be
put in actual use?
STARTING THE Arc LAMP
(1) The carbons of the arc lamp should be separated so that
they do not touch.
(2) The separable plug is screwed into any lamp socket near
the point where the drawing is to be done.
(3) The key switch of the lamp socket is turned on.
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 183
(4) The cap of the separable plug connected with the wiring
of the arc lamp is pushed in place.
(5) The carbons of the are lamp are brought in contact by
using the feeding screws of the lamp. If there is current there
will be a flash of light. The carbons must be at once slightly separ-
ated and the are will be fully established.
STOPPING THE Arc LAMP
For putting out the light there are three safe methods:
(1) The carbons are separated by turning the feeding screws
of the arc lamp.
(2) If there is a special knife switch as shown in fig. 6, s.,
that can be opened.
(3) The cap of the separable plug can be pulled off.
Of course one can turn off the current by the use of the key
switch in the socket used for turning on and off the incandescent
light, but the sockets are not constructed for so much current as
is used with the arc lamp, and there is danger of a short circuit
and a burning out of the socket or a blowing out of the nearest
fuse on the line. It is better, therefore, to shut off the current
by either of the three safe methods. If one must turn off the cur-
rent by the key switch of the lamp socket, it should be snapped over
as quickly as possible.
GETTING THE LIGHT THROUGH THE MICROSCOPE
There are two different arrangements of the lamp and the
microscope (figs. 1-3, 12, 15 and figs. 5-9, 12-14).
(1) All the parts are put in one continuous line, then the
source of light, the principal axis of the lamp condenser and of the
substage condenser, the objective and the ocular, when one is
used, form one continuous axis. This is theoretically the best
possible arrangement and is entirely practicable when one has an
optical bench on which to arrange the parts as in figs. 5-11, 13.
Where there is no optical bench, there is much difficulty in lining
up the microscope and the lamp.
(2) The microscope and the lamp with its condenser are
placed on the same level, but at approximately right angles to each
184 GAGE
other, and the microscope mirror is used to direct the light through
the microscope as in ordinary microscopic observation. Where
there is no optical bench as in figs. 1-3, 12, 14-15, it is much easier
to get the light through the microscope with this arrangement than
with the lamp and microscope in one axis.
For getting the light through the microscope when all parts
are in line the microscope mirror is removed or turned aside and
then one must adjust the lamp with its condenser until the light
goes through the microscope. If there is no optical bench, this is
easier said than done, especially with high powers.
With the lamp and microscope at right angles the light is got
through the microscope in this simple mechanical fashion:
(A) A disc of card-board, asbestos or tin 15 cm. (6 in.) in
diameter is blackened with some dull black paint like “‘dead-black
Japalac;” a hole of the right size is made in the middle and it is put
over the telescoping condenser tube as shown in figs. 1-3, 15. This
shield helps to cut out stray light, but its main purpose is to act
as a screen to aid in getting the light through the microscope.
(B) The plane mirror is set at about 45 degrees facing the
lamp. When the light strikes the mirror it is reflected up to the
microscope. The lower face of the substage condenser, or if no
condenser is used, the slide bearing the specimen, reflects some
of this light back on its path to the mirror, and the mirror reflects
it back toward the lamp. This light will form a spot on the disc
by the lamp condenser (fig. 4). If now one turns the mirror slight-
ly so that the spot of light goes into the lamp condenser then the
light will pass through the microscope, and if the reflector beyond
the ocular (fig. 1 m*) is present the image will appear on the draw-
ing surface below, when the microscope is in focus. By a slight
movement of the mirror the field will become evenly lighted.
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 185
UsE OF THE SUBSTAGE CONDENSER IN DRAWING
For objectives of 16 mm. (2-3 in.) and higher the substage
condenser can be used. It will insure the possibility of bringing
into service the entire aperture of the objective. The diaphragm
of the substage condenser should be wide open to start with. Some-
times it improves the reflected image to close it somewhat; but as a
MG »
Mj \Y
Hw
Fig. 4
Fig. 4. Black disc at the end of the lamp-condenser tube to cut off stray light and to
receive the spot of light reflected back from the substage condenser.
C. The lamp condenser; I, the spot of light reflected back from the substage con-
denser.
rule it will be found that for drawing, the diaphragm is consider-
ably wider open than for ordinary direct observation.
Mirror to Use.—lf a mirror is used to direct the light as in
fig. 1-3, then for the 16 mm. one should use the concave mirror
and for objectives of 8 mm. and higher the plane mirror should
be used.
For objectives lower than 16 mm. the substage should be re-
moved or turned aside and the concave mirror used; or if the parts
are all in line (fig. 5-14), the lamp condenser should be in posi-
186 GAGE
tion to give a converging cone of light, and the lamp brought near
enough the microscope to fully light the object.
In using the substage condenser for drawing with projection
it is necessary to be more precise than for ordinary observation.
One should be careful in the first place to have the lamp-con-
denser so that it gives a practically parallel beam of light as the
usual substage condenser is constructed for parallel beams. In
the second place the entire field should be lighted. For this one
must vary the position of the substage condenser for different
objectives. Its position for high powers must be changed de-
pending on the thickness of the slide used also.
A slight change in the position of the substage condenser
often acts like magic on the projected image.
MrrROR OR PRISM FOR REFLECTING THE IMAGE FormMING Rays
DowNWARD TO THE DRAWING SURFACE
If a prism is used it should be large enough to include the entire
field, and it must be accurately set to reflect the axial beam so that
it strikes the drawing surface at right angles. If a mirror is used,
it must be silvered on the face or be of thin glass, otherwise there
will be a troublesome double reflection. The mirror likewise should
have a stop at the proper angle. For the horizontal microscope
the mirror or prism reflects the rays downward at right angles.
All that one has to look out for is to have the mirror or prism at
45 degrees and directly above the ocular. If it is at all sidewise
there will be a lateral distortion of the image. This is easily seen
by turning it considerably, when the projected field will be oval and
not circular as it is when the mirror or prism is directly above the
ocular.
DRAWING IN A Dark ROOM OR IN THE EVENING
For drawing in the evening or in a dark room all one needs
is any one of the outfits shown and a screen or shield to prevent
stray light from the arc lamp from falling on the drawing surface
or getting into the face of the draughtsman. A vertical shield of
black card-board is good (fig. 2), or a metal enclosure (fig. 14)
or the cloth tent (figs. 12, 15).
For drawing in a light room there must be some kind of an
enclosure to cut off the excess stray light. There are ustally
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 187
plenty of rooms or shady corners where only a moderate amount
of shading is necessary, then any of the devices shown in figs. 3,
12-15 will answer. But one must not forget that a screen image
which looks brilliant in a dark room will look gray and washed out
in a light place.
OBJECTIVES AND OcuLars TO USE
So effective is the arc lamp on the house circuit that one can
use objectives from the lowest to the water or oil immersions.
The lower oculars give more brilliant images than the higher
ones just as for ordinary microscopic observation, but one can use
even with the oil immersion, occulars as high as the x8 or x12.
MAGNIFICATION OF THE DRAWING
This is easily obtained by the use of a stage micrometer. The
image of the spaces on the micrometer will, of course, be magni-
fied just the same amount as the specimen drawn, and knowing the
actual size of the spaces one can get the size of the image and divide
the size of the image by the size of the object and the quotient will
be the magnification. for example if the micrometer is in 1ooths
mm. and the image of one space measures 2.5 mm. then the mag-
nification must have been 250 times linear.
For varying the magnification to get any desired size one has
several resources:
(1) Use a higher or lower objective.
(2) Use a higher or lower ocular.
(3) For slight variations in magnification the easiest method
is to put the drawing surface farther from or nearer the microscope.
This can be accomplished by raising the microscope higher up from
the table by the use of aditional blocks or the elevating devices
provided (figs. 11, 15) or by the use of an adjustable drawing shelf
(figs. 5-9, 13); or finally by the use of a separate drawing table
and mirror which can be moved nearer to or farther from the
microscope (fig. 8).
For DRAWING LARGE OBJECTS
The small outfits shown in figs. 1-3, 12, 14, 15, do not enable
one to draw objects much over 5 mm. in diameter when an ocular
is employed. If no ocular is used then objects 10 mm. in diame-
188 GAGE
ter can be drawn. For larger objects, indeed extending up to
lantern slide size, one must be supplied with a condenser such as
is used for lantern slide projection. The special tube and con-
denser of the small arc lamp is removed and the lamp put into a
lamp-house. Then by the use of a suitable stage or holder for
the objects and a suitable objective one can draw objects from
the size of lantern slides down, and at a magnification from x1
upward.
This is one of the best possible ways of getting lecture room
diagrams. For that, one naturally uses a vertical drawing sur-
face, and gets the size by the greater or less distance (see also
hgs: U1, 13).
For large microscopic objects no ocular is used, and in most
cases no substage condenser. The converging cone of light from
the large lamp condenser answers perfectly for the illumination.
A person who has not tried it will be astonished at the results which
can be obtained by means of the arc lamp on the house circuit for
lantern slide projection as well as for making drawings.
Condenser
SS
FAS
Fig. 6
Trig. 6. Diagram showing the wiring and the relation of the parts for lantern slide
projection by means of the house electric lighting system.
The arc lamp and its wiring and connection with a rheostat and the house system is
the same as in fig. 1, except that in this figure there is a knife switch (S) introduced to
furnish means for turning on and off the current with absolute safety. Instead of a
microscope there is present a projection objective for lantern slides (L S).
For projection and drawing with high powers when an ocular
is used with one of the magic lantern condensers, figs. 9, II, 13,
one must use a special substage condenser or the converging cone
of light from the larger condenser must be rendered parallel before
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 1&9
it reaches the ordinary substage condenser. For this a concave
lens is put in the path of the converging beam at a point so that the
parallel beam will be of the diameter of the substage condenser.
The focus of the concave lens to use for parallelizing the rays de-
I y
pends upon the focus of the condenser. If it is about 15 cm. from
the lens face to its focue then a concave lens of 16 to 20 diopters
HMA
UM
SS
S
N
S
S
S
BS
BS
S
Fig. 10
Fig. 10. Diagrams to show how to construct an optical bench and the blocks with
sockets for holding the different pieces of apparatus.
In the lower figure is shown a face view of the base board (base) with its tracks of
brass rods (t-t), and with the blocks with their sockets for receiving the different pieces of
apparatus. Each block is independent and slides freely back and forth on the track.
Under the block carrying the arc lamp (Radiant) is a covering of asbestos (as).
A. End view of the base board and its tracks (b) with a block (bl) for carrying the
objective. The block is partly of wood (the blackened portion) and has V-shaped grooves
in it which rest on the tracks. The upper part of the block is of sheet lead to give weight
and_ stability.
The post is a bolt flatteded at one end (p) to fasten to the wooden shield (sh) which
carries the objective. The lower end of the bolt is received by the socket and fixed by
the set screw at the side (s).
B. Sectional view of the track showing how it is fastened to the base board.
C. Side view of an apparatus block (bl) showing how the drawing mirror (mr)
is supported from the shield (sh) holding the objective. The axial ray of the image
forming beam is also shown (a-a).
D. View from above of the drawing mirror and its support.
E. Section of the mirror showing how the glass is held in a copper casing.
I. Sectional view of the socket for receiving the post of the apparatus. It is made
of a railing flange with a short brass or iron tube for socket. The set screw (s) can be
put at any desired level. This flange-is screwed to the top of the supporting blocks as
shown in the lower figure.
190 GAGE
will answer. If the main condenser has a focus of 20 to 40 cm.
(8-16 in.) then a concave lens of 8 to 12 diopters suffices. Indeed
with a main condenser of 25 to 35 cm. (10 to 14 in.) one can get
very good results with the ordinary substage condenser if no
parallelizing lens at all is used, but the converging cone of light
is directed into the substage condenser at a point where its diameter
is that of the lower end of the substage condenser.
UsE OF THE SMALL DRAWING OUTFITS FOR DEMONSTRATION
In the evening or in a dark room these small outfits are ad-
mirable for demonstrations to small classes. For the purposes of
demonstration it is better to remove or turn aside the reflecting
mirror over the ocular, and then to use a screen of white card-
board. White paper is one of the best screens ever used. One
can project images with the oil immersion with the screen one
meter (3 to 4 feet) from the microscope, and thus make the image
visible to classes of 10 to 20 standing or sitting near. For the oil
immersion, of course the specimen would need to be very trans-
parent. With the objectives of 8 mm. and lower powers, and
oculars of x 3 or x 4 one can project brilliant screen images at a
distance of 2 to 4 meters (6-12 feet) in a well darkened room.
Up to the present time three optical houses have brought out
small lamps and arrangements for drawing by the light from the
house circuit.
All have been tested fully by me personally, and all have been
found effective. All work more satisfactorily in the evening or in
a dark room or in a shaded corner. Below are given figures of
these outfits, and in the explanations of the figures are brought
out the special points of each.
The complete, small outfit of Leitz, exclusive of the microscope, costs 169 marks
in Germany. If the duty must be paid, the cost is $68.00 in New York. (Fig. 12).
The Bausch & Lomb simple outfit costs $25.00 exclusive of the microscope. (Fig. 14).
The Apparatus of the Spencer Lens Company, exclusive of the microscope, costs
$38.00. (Fig. 15).
With all, the various parts are sold separately, and any one interested could get
the special circulars of the different houses with the prices of the separate parts.
If one already possesses some of the parts, and has a little ingenuity, a drawing out-
fit can be assembled in the laboratory or home which will answer all requirements at a
considerable saving of expense, although it may lack some of the conveniences in the
regularly made outfits.
If one works long at a time the rheostat gets pretty hot, and occasionally hot cinders
fall from the burning carbons, hence it is wise to set the lamp and rheostat on a
blackened sheet of asbestos.
XIX
Plate
Bios 3"
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS I9gI
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
Plate XIX
Photograph of the author’s drawing outfit, for the house lighting
system, arranged for evening or dark room drawing.
s-w. Separable plug and wires connecting the house lighting sys-
tem with the arc lamp.
r. Rheostat in series (i. e. in one wire). It does not allow more
than 5 to 6 amperes of current to flow.
1. Are lamp with small carbons at right angles. There is a black
disc at the end of the lamp-condenser tube to aid in getting the
light through the microscope. The lamp is at right angles to the
microscope, but it can also be used in the optic axis if desired.
m-s. Microscope mirror and substage condenser.
m. Tube of the microscope and a 45 degree mirror or prism to
reflect the image forming rays down upon the drawing surface.
im. Image on the drawing surface.
sh. Shield of blackened card-board to cut off stray light from
the drawing surface and the face of the observer. It was left in
place about three fourths of the time of exposure of the negative,
hence it appears as if transparent.
Photograph of the author’s drawing outfit for the house lighting
system with a black, cloth tent over the end of the microscope and
the drawing surface, for use in a light room.
s-w. The cap of the separable plug and the two wires from the
same to the arc lamp. One wire is cut and the two ends joined to
the rheostat so that the current shall traverse the rheostat.
r. Rheostat in series; it does not allow more than five or six
amperes of current to flow.
1. Arc lamp with condenser for giving parallel rays; it is at right
angles with the miscroscope but may be used in the optic axis if
desired; it is easier for many to get the light through the micro-
scope with this relation than with the lamp in line with the micro-
scope.
m. Mirror of the microscope.
t. Tent of black cloth supported by a wire frame. It cuts off stray
light from the drawing surface, and enables one to draw in a light
room.
=
Ke)
to
Fig.
GAGE
Plate XX
Photograph of the author’s apparatus for drawing objects the
size of lantern slides.
The illumination can be by the ordinary heavy lantern slide current,
or by the small current of the house lighting supply. If the
current is direct, then the automatic arc lamp of the Bausch &
Lomb Optical Co. can be used for currents from 5 to 25 amperes.
The 5 ampere current is sufficient for drawing. If one wishes
to draw on a horizontal surface, then a mirror is put beyond
the objective. If the drawing is on a vertical surface, as for
wall diagrams, then the mirror is removed.
a-a-a, axis; as., adjustable shelf attached to the table legs; b., the
base board with track (see fig. 10); c¢, triple condenser with
water cell; 1, automatic arc lamp; I-s, lantern slide carrier; m,
mirror beyond the objective; o, objective; r, rheostat of the
theater dimmer type; s., table switch for turning the current on
and off the lamp; w., wire cable from the supply; tw., triple wire
to the arc lamp.
Photograph of the author’s apparatus for drawing with the
microscope without an ocular or substage condenser.
The are lamp is Mr. Albert T. Thompson’s automatic lamp for
direct current. It can be used on small currents, and up to
25 amperes.
This is the first automatic arc lamp for right angled carbons.
By means of the optical bench carrying all the apparatus, the
different parts are pulled forward so that the microscope tube
and mirror project over the drawing shelf. This is adjustable
up and down for varying the magnification.
The stage of the microscope (st) is independent and contains a
large glass water cell against which the specimen rests. It con-
ducts away the heat from the specimen.
Plate XX
tis
i ert ;
Pn en
Plate XXI
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 193
Plate XXI
Photograph of the author’s apparatus for drawing with the
microscope and a movable table with large plate glass mirror.
a-a-a, Axial ray of the illuminating and image forming beam;
b, base board of the optical bench; c, condenser with water cell:
im, drawing surface where the image is projected; 1 h, lamp
house. It was present only during a part of the exposure of the
negative, hence it appears transparent, showing the hand-feed
arc lamp within; m., the large mirror attached to the drawing
table; r, rheostat. It is of the ordinary form; s, the double pole,
table switch for opening and closing the circuit; w 1, 2, supply
wire to the switch and from the switch directly to the arc lamp;
w 3, 4, 5, (upper carbon) the supply wire to the switch, and
from the switch to the one binding post of the rheostat (4);
from the other binding post of the rheostat (5) a wire passes
directly to the arc lamp (lower carbon). No current can go
through the lamp without going through the rheostat with this
arrangement; and with the double pole switch, the current is
cut completely off the entire apparatus when the switch is open.
The adjustable drawing shelf has an arrangement for moving
up and down on metal ways which can be attached to any table,
whatever the form of the legs. The supporting brackets are
jointed so that the shelf can be let down when the large drawing
table needs to be brought up close to the projection table. This
method of moving the drawing shelf and lowering it is due to
Dr. B. F. Kingsbury.
Photograph of the author’s apparatus for drawing with the large
condenser, an ordinary microscope and an ocular.
194
Big. 1r
GAGE
Plate XXII
Edinger vertical drawing and photographic apparatus for use
on the house current. Made by E. Leitz.
The arc lamp is of the Liliput form with small right angled car-
bons.
The lamp condenser is large, such as is used for lantern slide
projection, hence large as well as small objects can be illuminated
by it.
For convenience in feeding the carbons there is a rod extend-
ing down within reach of the artist.
The microscope and stage are separate and _ independently
movable on the vertical optical bench. In addition to the lamp
condenser there are two or more substage condensers of differ-
ent foci.
The object is put on the upper side of the stage.
The microscope can be used with an ocular, or the draw tube
and ocular can be removed from the large microscope tube, and
then objectives alone used, thus’ giving very large fields.
If desired for projection on a vertical screen, the apparatus ro-
tates on a central axis to the horizontal position.
The vertical position is advantageous for drawing objects which
must remain horizontal, but for most microscopic specimens
which can be put in a vertical position, the apparatus is less con-
venient than one of the horizontal outfits.
Plate XAXIL
ity
o .
Alp eA
ae i carat
—E
I]
[xX
x a}
aye
‘|
d
Fig. 12.
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 195
Plate XXIII
Edinger’s drawing microscope with cloth tent. Made by E. Leitz,
Wetzlar.
The lamp condenser is small, and composed of a single double
convex lens at the end of a telescoping tube. If the tube is in,
the beam is nearly parallel, if pulled out more or less there is a
converging cone of light. The lamp is supported on a vertical
tube and can be set at any desired height and at any angle. As
shown, the mirror is used to direct the light up through the
microscope.
The microscope itself is inclined at 45 degrees and the mirror at
222 degrees, thus directing the light vertically down upon the
drawing surface.
It is necessary to be careful in giving the microscope and the
mirror the right inclination or the image will be distorted. The
correct adjustment is more difficult than with the horizontal
microscope.
For drawing in a light room a cloth tent is provided and is sup-
ported above and on the sides by metal arches. If it is very
light one can pull the cloth over the head as in focusing a camera.
In the evening or in a dark room the cloth can be opened widely
to expose the drawing surface.
This apparatus was demonstrated at the meeting of the Ana-
tomische Gesellschaft at its Leipzig meeting, April, 1911. With
it one can draw with objectives of 50 mm. focus through the
scale to oil immersions.
190
Fig. 13.
Fig. 14.
GAGE
Plate XXIV
Combined drawing and photomicrographic apparatus of the
Bausch & Lomb Optical Company, for use on the house lighting
system.
This is a kind of universal apparatus serving for drawing with
the microscope, projection with a microscope and with a magic
lantern; opaque projection, and finally for photographing with
all objectives and with the microscope.
It can be used in a horizontal, an inclined or a vertical position.
For drawing with the microscope in a horizontal position there
is an adjustable drawing shelf with a cloth tent for shutting out
daylight in a light room.
The large condenser enables one to use the apparatus on speci-
mens of all sizes up to lantern slides.
Simple drawing apparatus for the microscope, the Bausch &
Lomb Optical Company.
There is a hand feed, right angled arc lamp for small carbons,
wiring and connections for the house circuit and a rheostat which
will not permit over 6 amperes of current to flow. The lamp con-
denser is in a telescoping tube so that either a parallel or a con-
verging beam of light can be obtained.
The microscope is on a support giving a drawing distance of 25
centimeters (10 inches), and the drawing surface is enclosed by
a metal shield to keep out stray light.
The lamp and the microscope are put in one line. For this the
lamp is adjustable on a vertical support and it can be inclined at
any angle. ;
If one finds it easier to use the mirror, and have the lamp at right
angles to the microscope, this outfit lends itself perfectly to that
arrangement.
Plate XXIV
-
ae
a ee
wa
tie
Plate XXV
orange
f
i
i
Ls
:
'
:
t
Fig. Is.
Fig. 16.
DRAWING PROJECTION APPARATUS 197
Plate XXV
Spencer Lens Company’s apparatus for drawing with the micro-
scope.
This consists of a small arc lamp with the proper wiring, rheo-
stat and connections for the house electric supply. The lamp has
all the adjustments, and the condenser tube is telescoping so that
the beam of light may be parallel or converging.
At the end of the condenser tube is a black disc for cutting off
stray light and serving as a screen upon which the spot of light
from the substage condenser can be thrown, thus serving as an
aid in getting the mirror at the right angle to send the light
through the microscope.
The microscope is supported on an adjustable shelf which can be
raised or lowered on the vertical rods, thus enabling one to get
any desired magnification.
The vertical supports for the microscope shelf serve to carry a
curved metal band to support the cloth curtains to shade the
drawing surface. There are two curtains and they hang freely,
thus avoiding all interference with the hands in drawing. If
one desires, the arc lamp can be put in line with the microscope
and the mirror turned aside.
For a reflector beyond the ocular a prism is used, thus avoiding
any defects of a mirror.
Photograph of the author’s large projection outfit arranged for
use with a vertical microscope.
This shows that the microscope mirror turns the illuminating
beam from the condenser up through the microscope,-and that to
get the image on a vertical screen in the lecture room it is neces-
sary to use a second mirror or prism to direct the beam horizon-
tally again.
The lamp is the new three wire automatic lamp of the Bausch &
Lomb Optical Company. The feeding screws (hf) and the fine
adjustment screws (fa) project out behind the lamp house (lh).
The lamp house was left in position about three fourths of the
time of exposure of the negative, hence it appears transparent,
showing the are lamp within. The window for observing the
arc is opposite the ends of the carbons (g).
rf
4 if 4 7
, . i y
? Vt Ae ve it On j
sy \ PLE i Ne Ts a, yan Ni
et vay A a et ns
{ ea tL a Wiley ' Vin
; We eee eh}
lal / Oh Maiti aw
on us Pe
| VU Ate Caw bY
1] ;
mtn
Bi)
i
r P a | it
r i :
ayy bs, ; .
i jodi eet;
a ny
. a)
{
fi
i r | Nea? Ha A anenivn
min
Wiis
DEPARTMENT OF NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
It is the purpose, in this department, to present from time to time brief original
notes, both of methods of work and of results, by members of the Society. All members
are invited to submit such items. In the absence of these there will be given a few brief
abstracts of recent work of more general interest to students and teachers. There will be
no attempt to make these abstracts exhaustive. They will illustrate progress without at-
tempting to define it, and will thus give to the teacher current illustrations, and to the
isolated student suggestions of suitable fields of investigation.—[Editor.]
A CONVENIENT APPARATUS FOR LABORATORY PHOTOGRAPHY
During the past seven years the writer has used with consider-
able satisfaction an apparatus that is well suited for use in photo-
graphing various types of biological specimens. Every well-equipped
biological laboratory should be provided with an apparatus of some
sort which will make possible the ready photographing of specimens
when placed in a horizontal position. Doubtless many have ex-
hausted their patience trying to get satisfactory pictures of bac-
terial cultures, fungi, flowers, insects, embryos, etc., which must be
supported in a vertical position if an ordinary tripod is used, and
many makeshifts are frequently brought into play, and these often-
times without the desired results. It was a few trying experiences
that led to the construction of the apparatus described.
The prototype of the apparatus constructed was found in the
crude device described and illustrated by Smith’ as a “simple appa-
ratus for holding the camera in place when one wishes to photograph
down.” The apparatus shown in the accompanying illustration
(Plate XXVI, Fig. 1) consists of two essential parts: the horizon-
tal stage, a piece of French plate glass, 2x3 ft., supported six inches
above the platform carrying the backgrounds ; and the rigid upright
support permitting the adjustment of the camera at any desired
height above the stage. The plate glass is elevated 6 inches above
the platform and rests upon a support at the foot of the upright
for its entire width and is held in place at the opposite end by two
wedge-shaped corner posts. All the surfaces in contact with the
glass are padded with strips of felt. The upright support, 8 inches
wide and 6 feet high, is firmly braced to the narrow rear extension
of the platform and is provided with a medium longitudinal slot
1. Smith, Erwin F. Bacteria in Relation to Plant Diseases. Vol. 1, p. 133. 1905.
200 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
just large enough to carry a tripod screw. In photographing small
specimens the camera can be attached directly to the upright sup-
port, but for large specimens it is necessary to have the camera
removed from the upright. In order to secure this the apparatus
is provided with a quadrangular frame the same width as the up-
right, and of such a size as to throw the camera over the center of
the stage. The illustration shows a Premo, 4x5 camera in position.
The quadrangular frame is held in position by two wooden screws
and can be adjusted to any desired height, while the camera can
also be raised or lowered upon the frame.
The platform is supported by five large, wood-roller, ball-bear-
ing castors, three of which appear in the illustration. The appara-
tus constructed according to this plan is easily moved about the
laboratory; it is light, but sufficiently rigid to prevent vibra-
tions of the camera. It is always ready to use at a moment’s notice,
and long exasperating delays are avoided.
The object to be photographed is placed upon the plate glass
stage and is thus held six inches above the background. By this
means shadows are entirely avoided. Various colored backgrounds,
which for purposes of record are numbered, should be provided.
For these backgrounds sheets of bristol board, or better, picture
matting with rough surfaces, may be satisfactorily employed. The
Ingento convertible tripod attachment is sometimes used for photo-
graphing down, and is especially desirable for field work, but the
apparatus here described is so far superior for laboratory work
that it will repay the cost of construction many times.
The writer uses a long-focus, 5x7, Premo camera with various
combinations of lenses for nearly all work. Specimens three feet
in length may be photographed, or small objects may be taken
natural size or enlarged six times or slightly more. The apparatus
is adapted for use in various kinds of botanical, bacteriological or
zoological work. The quality of work obtained by its use can be
seen in Bulletin 135, “Symptoms of Disease in Plants” published
by the writer from the University of Texas. Practically all the
halftones in the above bulletin are from photographs taken with the
type of apparatus here described.
w=
University of Texas. F. D, HEALD.
PLATE XXVI
:
ee
Fig. 1. Convenient Photographic OutSt for Laboratory.
Fig. 2. Intromittent organ of male Odonata.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 201
NATURE OF THE INTROMITTENT ORGAN OF THE ODONATA
In the great family of insects called Odonata, the males have a
peculiar accessory sexual organ known as the intromittent organ.
This is situated on the rear segment of the thorax on the ventral
side, and is used as an accessory organ during copulation. Before
copulation the males, which emerge from the water before the fe-
males, fill the organ with seminal fluid from their own sexual organs.
They are now ready for a mate and sally forth over some likely pond
or stream watching for a female pupa which is just emerging from
the water.
The female when ready to emerge casts her pupal skin and
crawls up some convenient plant stem until she emerges from the
water. The male seeing her thus grasps her by the neck with his
anal forceps and carries her to some suitable place where she may
dry herself ready for flight. When ready for flight they mate in the
air. Again his anal forceps are brought into play; he grasps her by
the neck and supports their combined weight in the flight. She
now places the tip of her abdomen in contact with his thoracic clasp-
ers, while with the intromittent organ the sperms are transmitted.
It is quite an interesting problem how this intromittent organ
arose in the phylogeny of the insect, and what organs and functions
were modified in producing the effect.
Originally the sexual organs of the male, at least the external
accessory organs, must have been anal in situation as in most of
the insect families.
Evidently in this case the forceps and this functional develop-
ment for carrying the female by the neck rendered it more difficult
for the female to get her body around into proper position for re-
ceiving the male elements. Perhaps the extreme elongation of the
abdomen in both sexes also entered into the modification.
So, simultaneously with the development of the forceps and the
elongated abdomen, must have developed the habit of the male of
first emitting his semen on the appendages of the thorax.
Now right here lies the peculiar discovery noted in this paper ;
the intromittent organ is jointed in the manner of insect legs, and the
writer raises the question as to whether it is homologous with a pair
of legs. This organ consists of four well defined joints, which may
202 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
be seen in the photo and are numbered a, b, c, d. In case this is a
true leg structure the segments would be (a) coxa, (b) femur,
(c) tibia, (d) tarsus. See plate XX VI, Fig. 2 and text figure 1.
Fig. 1. Diagram ot male (left) and female (right) accessory abdominal appendages
for copulation. (See also Plate XXVI, Fig. 2).
The question immediately arises, did not the Odonata once
have a thorax of four segments, and does not this leg structure
represent a rudimentary fourth segment ?
There is a good opportunity here for investigation of larval
and nymph forms of the different species to look for evidence for
or against this theory of the origin of the organ.
This leg structure is paired, forming a single median organ,
the inner opposed surfaces of which are hollowed out forming a
cavity in which the seminal elements are retained. The terminal
segments or tarsi are prolonged into a minute tapering tube. The
two preceding segments of the thorax have a pair of clasping or-
gans by which certain appendages of the female abdomen are
grasped to enable her to retain her difficult position during copula-
tion. See the diagram of the ventral aspect of the male thorax
where the claspers are designated 1 and 2, and the female accessory
abdominal appendages which slip under the male claspers (text
Fig. 1).
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 203
These two claspers on the male thorax do not show any evi-
dence of joints and are evidently simple modifications of the hypo-
derm of the segments on which they are located.
These claspers present certain arrangements of external sense
organs which vary in the different species.
It my be that some of the readers of the Transactions will have
a different theory of the origin of this structure and its nature; if
so, we should much like to hear from them and get other facts
bearing on the embryology of the organ.
Battle Creek, Mich. E. W. Roserts.
SUGGESTIONS FOR AMATEUR MICROSCOPISTS
1. Whole Mounts—Many interesting and beautiful specimens
may be made from small insects, by steeping in concentrated carbolic
acid solution, and mounting entire without compression. This agent
is used especially to render transparent such subjects as acari and
lice, parasites of birds, as it clears the outer skin and renders the
internal organs visible. Crystallized carbolic acid liquified by heat,
with the addition of 1 drachm of glycerine to 4 ounces of the melted
carbolic acid, will not become solid again.
The acaridae or mites give interesting studies in color, form,
and variety. For literaure, see Science Gossip, or the monograph
on the Oribatidae in the Ray Society by A. D. Michael.
2. Internal Organs of Cockroach—The members of the cock-
roach family can easily be obtained, and furnish interesting material.
To kill, put a few drops of chloroform on blotting paper and cover
together with animal. It is well to select some special and definite
line of study,—as, say, the abdominal viscera,—after having studied
the external parts.
To study the viscera of course requires dissection. The fol-
lowing suggestions will aid the beginner:
Remove all external appendages, as wings and legs, with scis-
sors. To make a dissecting dish, take a piece of gutta percha, such
as is supplied for boot soles, cut a piece 442x2™% inches, soften in
hot water, bend the edges so as to form a dish or pan. Drop into
this a mixture of paraffin, white or blackened by lampblack, as pre-
ferred. Before this is entirely set the back of the insect may be
204 NOTES, REVIEWS, EDC:
pressed gently on the surface. This will do away with the need of
pins. When this is set cover with about 30-50% alcohol and dissect.
First remove the chitinous covering by shallow cuts along the
side with fine pointed scissors. Don’t injure organs within. Raise
the skin gradually with forceps, beginning at the thoracic end,
gently clearing away the attachments of the trachea with new steel
or with gold plated needles. Rusty tools tear delicate tissues. The
trachae, the intestine and its outgrowths, the genitalia, etc., may
thus be removed, stained as desired, and mounted in dilute glycerine,
in which form it may be kept for extended examination.
If it is desired to study the nervous system the dissection should
be made from the back instead of from the belly.
3. Study of Variation—There is much of value and interest
to the general student in the study of the variation that occurs in
corresponding organs in different animals. Take, for example,
some peculiar glandular bodies found in the rectal pouch of various
insects, known as the rectal papillae. These are connected with the
function performed by the kidneys in higher animals,—excretion
of uric acid. Well formed crystals are frequently found in the
pouches. In the blow-fly they are 4 in number, of a pyramidal
shape, projecting from the wall of the rectum. In the ear-wig
there are 6 of the papillae which are of a circular shape; in the flea
there are 6, but oval; in the bee they are 8 in number and elongated.
The student will find, after once undertaking such comparative
studies, an abundant field of interest open up to industry and in-
telligence.
4. Using Newly Hatched Specimens—Newly hatched insects
are usually better than the older battered specimens for the study
of many features. For example, the wings of butterflies are more
beautiful and more representative if the animal is removed from
the chrysalis before it has time to spread its wings. So the mouth
parts of the blow-fly,—as the tongue,—can be handled and mounted
more readily by the usual methods, when taken thus early, than by
waiting until it is old and stiff.
A freshly hatched blow-fly, fed on a mixture of cochineal and
sugar, will be found on dissection, to have its whole digestive tract
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 205
stained with carmine. Thus making more instructive and easy the
dissection of it.
5. Lo examine a living flea—Insert a living flea under a tum-
bler, with some blotting paper on which are a few drops of chloro-
form. As soon as it becomes entirely still, fix it on a white card
by laying its side in a minute drop of balsam or other transparent
gum. When the eflect of the anaesthetic has passed away the dry-
ing gum will hold the animal fast, and the motion of its legs and
mouth parts may be studied. The problem is one of determining
how long to allow the anaesthetic to act, and the rate of hardening
of the gum.
6. Non Rusting Needles—Ordinary steel needles rust readily
and corrode in various media. This can be prevented by coating
them with gold. This may be done by shaking up an aqueous solu-
tion of gold chloride with sulphuric ether, which, taking up the
gold from the solution, will deposit it on any steel which comes in
contact with it. Surgeons’ needles, especially those that are flat or
triangular, if ground, sharpened and highly polished, are most
useful instruments for minute dissection when gilded as above.
Rusted implements will catch on delicate tissues, and often spoil
one’s preparations.
It is to be remembered that excellent needles for use in cor-
roding reagents may be made by drawing out glass rods to the fine-
ness of a needle point, over a spirit lamp.
7. Simple life cell—Take a slip of cork, such as is used for
pinning insects in museums. Cut it the size of your microscopical
slides. Make an oval hole, about 1x34 in. in diameter, thru the
center, allowing the sides to taper slightly. Place the cork between
glass slides, interposing a pad of wet blotting paper (with a cor-
responding hole in it) between the bottom slide and the cork. After
placing the organisms within, the whole may be bound together by
two elastic bands. Podurae and other small animals, not strictly
aquatic, kept in these damp cells and fed on oatmeal, or other suit-
able food, will often thrive perfectly well, and may be studied at
any moment. In this way extended studies of habits and life his-
tories may be made. [From S. J. McIntire].
Vipa A. LatHam, M. D.
200 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
PRELIMINARY NOTICE
A further study of 125 cross sections of the femora of as many
lower animals has been continued in the American Museum of
Natural History, New York, during the present summer. The list
includes amphibians, reptiles, birds and mammals. This makes
over 300 femora so far examined, one hundred of which are human.
Important variations occur. The lower animals furnish the
key to the surprising variations which are found in man. The
amphibians are pretty true to their lamellar type. The reptiles
seem to show divergence. The lizard group retains the amphibian
lamellae, the alligator and some turtles have departed from it and
show a crude system formation. Some birds conform to the
lamellar, some to the laminar and some to the Haversian system
type. A much larger number of mammals belong to the laminar
type than was expected. Mammalian species often show a high
and low type. For example, the African Elephant is composed
entirely of Haversian system, high; the Asiatic, of Haversian sys-
tems, laminae, and lamellae in about equal parts, low. The hippo-
potamus, rhinoceros, giraffe, wart hog, water buffalo, camel, ar-
madillo are low.
It is the intention of the writer to publish articles on the sub-
ject as soon as the sections can be drawn and described.
Creighton Med. College. J.. S.. Fooxe:
MICROBIOLOGY
This compact manual, which is now in its second edition, is
an exceedingly timely resumé of a field which is of prime interest
to members of this Society. The book is the product of a large
number of collaborators, whose work has been brought together
under the editorship of Professor Charles E. Marshall. While
such books are always subject to some unevenness and repetition
and lack of unity as compared with the work of a single author,
there is here at least a compensating gain in authoritativeness in a
wide range of material.
The book is divided into three general parts: Morphology
and Culture of Microorganisms; Physiology of Microorganisms ;
and Applied Microbiology.
The editor has made an effort to present the fundamental facts
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 207
and principles of the subject in such a way as to “show how these
principles fit into subjects of a more or less strictly professional or
practical nature.” The relation of these microdrganisms to Agri-
culture and to Domestic Science is treated at length and well.
In the morphological part we naturally have chapters on Molds,
Yeasts, Bacteria, Protozoa, and the so-called invisible microorgan-
isms. The physiological section includes Metabolism, Effects of
Physical and Chemical Conditions on the Microdrganisms, and
their mutual influences. Under applied microbiology are such di-
visions as microbiology of the air, of water and sewage, of the soil,
of milk and milk products, of various special industries, and of the
diseases of plants, of animals and of man.
A brief history of the advance of microbiology opens the vol-
ume.
FEEDING HABITS OF MACKEREL
Bullen (Jour. Mar. Biol. Assn., June 1912) gives some con-
clusions on the feeding of mackerel in the English Channel. It is
claimed that the mackerel feeds in two ways: “First, by a system
of filtration upon plankton organisms, and secondly upon prey of
a large character which is hunted by sight.” From March to June
the mackerel were feeding exclusively on plankton,—first vegetable,
and later the general zooplankton. The author, by examination of
stomachs oi the fish, finds that there is considerable evidence for
believing that they are incapable of assimilating the larger prey
when feeding largely on the minor forms of plankton. Later still
they passed to larger zooplankton and to such larger animals as
were presented. It is concluded that there are two main types of
the active “selective” feeding, and that the mackerel can subsist on
these for reasonable periods of time, irrespective of the season.
One of these is the selection of individual prey; the other is the
selection of plankton organisms where they occur in great num-
bers, even tho the individual organism is too small for the mackerel
to distinguish. These conditions apparently determine the move-
ments of the mackerel and the method of catching them, and a
knowledge of the facts may well assist in an understanding of the
problems of the fisheries.
Microbiology for Agriculture and Domestic Science Students. Edited by Charles E.
Marshall. Illustrated; 724 pages. P. Blakiston & Co., Phila. Price $2.50.
208 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
KALA AZAR AND BED BUGS
There has been a disposition for some years to seek to fasten
on the bed-bug the responsibility for transmitting some of the in-
fections diseases. The habits of the animal lend decided substance
to these expectations and the odium in which it is held doubtless
makes its case the more hopeless.
Capt. W: S) Patton, I/'M.'S., (Ind! Med. Gazz, Feb. 19; 1912 )5
reports that he has, by feeding Cimex rotundatus and C. lectularius
on a case of Kala Azar, in whose blood the parasite had been identi-
fied, discovered an extended development of the parasite in these
bugs. He also discovered that in bugs, in which the developing
forms are present, again fed on the blood of a Kala Azar case, the
flagellates are destroyed within 24 hours. However, if the bugs
are not fed the second t‘me the development goes on and is com-
pleted by the 10-12th day after the single feed. The parasite goes
thru its complete cycle in both species. By the 7th-9th day the bug
swarms with the flagellate stage in masses of rosettes. It is also
claimed that the bugs do not contain, naturally, a flagellate.
CELL SIZE AND NUCLEAR SIZE
Conklin (Jour. Exp. Zool. Jan. 1912) in an elaborate paper
based on a series of experiments and observations on Crepidula
and Fulgar gives a most interesting series of conclusions concerning
the size of cells and nuclei. Among these may be mentioned:
1. Inequality of cell division is due to internal causes rather
than to pressure from without; and the controlling factors within
are more intimate than the mere presence of metabolic substances
such as yolk.
2. The size ratio between plasma and neucleus in the different
blastomeres of an egg is not constant nor self-regulating ; but seems
to depend rather on the rate of cell division.
3. The inciting cause of cell division seems to lie in the coin-
cidence of centrosomal, chromosomal, and cytosomal rhythms.
4. The size of the nucleus is dependent upon at least three
factors: the initial quantity of chromatin; the volume of the cyto-
plasm; the length of the resting period.
5. In Crepidula the volume of cytoplasm more than doubles
during the passage from the t-cell stage to the 24-cell stage; the
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 2009
yolk decreases in volume nearly one-half in that time; and the entire
embryo has less mass at the 24 than at the 1-cell stage. This shows
that the protoplasmic growth during cleavage occurs at the expense
of the yolk.
6. The average increase of protoplasm for each division in
early cleavage (32 cells) is 6 per cent; of nucleus, 5-9 per cent;
of chromatin, 8 per cent.
PROTOZOA IN HAY INFUSIONS
Woodruff (Jour. Exp. Zool., Feb., 1912), discusses a number
of series of experiments on hay infusions with a view to determin-
ing the sources and sequence of their protozoan population. To
determine the sources, he (1) used sterilized hay and water, ex-
posed to air; (2) sterilized water with fresh hay, and air excluded;
(3) ordinary tap water, with sterilized hay and air excluded; and
(4), as controls, fresh hay, tap water, and loosely covered vessels.
The experiments, which are valuable to the ordinary laboratory
worker, furnish the following conclusions:
1. Air, water, and hay are all sources of protozoa in infus-
ions,—the air being least, and the hay most, important. But ordi-
nary hay, added to ordinary tap water, while furnishing some pro-
tozoa, will not produce a sufficient number of representative pro-
tozoa for the study of the full sequences.
2. In order, therefore, to study standard sequences it is nec-
essary to ‘‘seed” the infusions with matter from general laboratory
cultures. In such ‘‘seeded”’ infusions a definite sequence of appear-
ance, of dominance (or maximum) and of disappearance was ob-
served. The sequence of appearance at the surface of the infusion
is as follows: Monad, Colpoda, Hypotrichida, Paramecium, Vor-
ticella, and Ameba.
3. The middle of the infusion is inhabited chiefly by free-
swimming types brought there by over crowding at the top and bot-
tom, and does not manifest so definite a sequence.
4. The appearance, in appreciable numbers, of any of these
types (except Ameba), at the bottom of the infusion, coincides
with, or quickly follows, its surface maximum,—and seems to indi-
cate the beginning of its decline.
5. As biological elements entering into the determination of
210 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
the sequence may be included: the relative power and rate of divis-
ion among them; the occurrence of the most satisfactory food con-
ditions ; specific excretion products, modifying the character of the
water.
Fine (in the same Journal) makes a study of the chemical
properties of the hay infusions and concludes that there is no inti-
mately mutual relation between the sequence of the protozoa and
the course of titratable acidity produced by the action of bacteria
on the acid-yielding materials of the infusion.
INTERNAL FACTORS INFLUENCING SEX IN HYDATINA SENTA
Schull (Jour. Exp. Zool., Feb., 1912), summaries some studies
on the life cycle of Hydatina senta, as follows:
1. Long continued parthenogenesis is accompanied by a pro-
gressive decrease in the proportion of male-producers.
2. <A similar decrease occurs in the size of family produced,—
tho the author states that there seems to be no correlation between
these two declines.
3. Individuals hatched from fertilized eggs are not only all
females, but are all female-producers. :
4. The sex is determined a generation in advance. That is
to say, whether a given female is to be a male-producer or a female-
producer (so far as the manure culture is concerned) 1s irrevocably
decided during the growth period of the parthenogenetic egg from
which the female hatches.
REINVIGORATION OF PARTHENOGERIC STRAINS OF HYDATINA
Whitney (Jour. Exp. Zool. Apr., 1912), finds in strains of this
organism whose reproductive powers had declined thru 384 par-
thenogentic generations, extending over a period of 29 months,
that inbreedings of closely related individuals produced a slight
increase in their reproductive powers; that cross-breeding of two
such weakened races (altho originally derived parthenogentically
from the same stock) produced a sudden and pronounced increase
in the rate of reproduction of the ensuing race.
CAN SPERM CELLS DEVELOP WITHOUT THE EGG?
Loeb and Bancroft (Jour. Exp. Zool. Apr., 1912), raise this
interesting question and undertake to nurture spermatozoa in cul-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 211
ture media. This experiment is the natural correlative of those
which have shown that many ova may be stimulated artificially to
produce embryos. In these studies the sperm cells of the chicken
were used and were cultivated in egg yolk, egg albumen, chicken
blood serum, and Ringer solutions.
It was found that spermatozoa did undergo some transforma-
tions. These include the shortening of the head, the formation of
a vesicle about the head and middle piece, the dispersal thru the
vesicle of the matter of the head, the gradual reformation of the
chromatin into objects suggestive of chromosomes.
On the whole, while no evidence has been found that division
can take place in the sperm outside the egg, the results thus far may
be comprhended in the statement that the sperm is able to organize
itself into something much resembling a nucleus.
ADAPTATION OF FISH TO TEMPERATURE
Loeb and Wasteneys (Jour. Exp. Zool., May, 1912), inquire
into the phenomena associated with adaptation to changed tempera-
tures. It has long been known that animals may gradually be ren-
dered immune to temperatures which applied outright would cause
death.
In these experiments it was found that fish could be rendered
immune to the hurtful eflects of a sudden transfer to water of a
temperature of 35°C by being placed for 30 hours or more in a
temperature of 27°. Similarly they may be made immune to a
temperature of 39°C. The ability to endure water at 35° was
not lost or weakened by keeping the fish at a temperature of 10°-14°
for 33 days after having been acclimatized to water at 27°; nor by
keeping them for two days at a temperature of 0°.4C, after their
two days exposure to 27°.
It was also found that fish could stand a sudden increase of
temperature better with a higher concentration of sea-water up to
a certain maximum solution—beyond which the ability again de-
clined. This is thought to be due to specific effects of the salts
rather than to changed osmotic conditions.
EFFECT OF CONTACT AND TENSION ON TENDRILS
Brush (Bot. Gaz. June, 1912), finds that the tendrils of Passi-
22 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
flora which are actually functioning in supporting the plant are pos-
sessed of greater breaking strength, all along their length, than
tendrils of similar age that are not functioning. According to the
conclusions of the author there are two different factors, contact
and tension, which combine to produce the increased strength. The
effect of contact of the tendril with supporting objects is to increase
the numbers, and the thickness of the walls, of the cells of the xylem;
while the effect of tension is to produce a thickening of the walls
of the pith by which it comes to function as a real mechanical tissue.
It has never been considered that pith achieved any mechanical
value.
TO MOUNT DISSECTIONS OF MOUTH-PARTS OF INSECTS, UNDER ONE
COVER-GLASS, WITHOUT CEMENT*
1. Dissect out the various parts; place them on a slide; put
another slide on top; tie with cotton, and put into methylated spirit
for 24-48 hours, according to size of specimens.
2. Remove one of the slides, carefully detach the parts, and
place them in clove oil (or terpineol: V. A. L.) to clear. Then
cover with turpentine.
3. Place the mouthparts on a slide in the desired order, cover
all with a cover glass which must be held securely on with wire clip.
Allow thin Canada balsam in benzole to run under cover. As the
benzole evaporates add more of the thin balsam, until the space is
filled.
4. Allow preparation to dry a week or more. Remove clip,
wash away excess balsam with camel’s hair brush in benzole. When
completely dry apply coat of shellac varnish, if desired, to edge of
cover glass.
TERPINEOL: A NEW CLEARING AGENT
This agent can be used for all microscopical purposes including
celloidinzed sections. The oils are chemically known as terpines,
terpene alcohols, sesquiterpenes, and a few others with their esters,
such as terpinyl acetate. All these substances are found in varying
amounts in one and the same oil.
*Personal communication from Martin J. Cole, London, to Dr. V. A. Latham.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 213
CH—CH,
CH,—CH,
very much resembles cineol which has as its chief constituent oil
cajeput, oil eucalyptus, and a few other oils. Altho terpineol is not
itself present in these oils, its derivatives, such as cineol, terpinyl
acetate are the chief constituents. The chief draw back to most of
the oils is that they are not universally applicable to microscopic
purposes, and so several kinds must be kept. They often, too, dis-
solve celloidin and the anilim stains; and are high priced.
Men meol Cre 1 {CHC (OH) (CH, ).
The new terpineol, which is manufactured synthetically from
oil turpentine, replaces oil of bergamot by clearing celloidin sec-
tions, having a perfect clearing action; dissolves paraffin; does not
dissolve anilin colors; has a refractive index of 1.49; and is only
1-5 the price of bergamot.
Viapaeelee
DEVELOPMENT OF SPERM IN HYBRIDS
Pall (Arch. Mikr. Anat. 1911) report studies on the sperma-
togenesis in hybrid ducks and in young mules, in comparison with
the stages characteristic of the pure parental strains. The early
stages of development in the testis appears to be normal, so far as
microscopic technic can determine; but for some reason the dividing
cells in the last division stages, are unable to form perfect sperma-
tozoa. This is one of the reasons at least for the frequent infertility
of hybrids.
FUNCTION OF THE MALE ACCESSORY REPRODUCTIVE GLANDS IN
MAMMALS
Iwanov (Arch. Mikr. Anat. 1911) believes that there are prob-
ably two functions to the prostatic fluid and other secretions pro-
duced by the glands accessory to the male reproductive structures
in mammals. His conclusions are based upon experimentation.
The principal function he believes to be one of diluting the seminal
fluid proper and of furnishing volume by means of which emission
is facilitated and a medium of motion insured. Secondly, he be-
lieves that there are elements in the prostate secretion, particularly,
that serve to stimulate the sperm cells to higher activity,—coinci-
dently with shortened life.
214 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
INHERITANCE OF LEFT HANDEDNESS
Jordan (Am. Breeders’ Mag. 1911) reports studies of left-
handedness of nearly 3000 individuals belonging to 78 lines of des-
cent. The evidences are that left-handedness is inherited, but ap-
parently not in accordance with the Mendelian principles. He be-
lieves that left-handedness is correlated with greater size and weight
of the right hemisphere of the brain.
EFFECTS OF DARKNESS ON GOLDFISH
Ogneff (Anat. Anzeig., 1911) describes changes in gold fish
which have been kept three years or more in darkness. The prin-
ciple points noted are:
1. The golden appearance gives place to darker color, due
histologically to the development and spreading of black chromat-
aphores which cover the crystals that give the normal shimmer.
2. The ovaries become more compact and degenerative changes
set in.
3. The eye undergoes a distinct series of degenerative changes.
All the cells become smaller; the layer of rods and cones disappears
altogether ; the pigment processes that normally penetrate between
the rods and cones fail. Functionally, these changes result in blind-
ness,—all within the life of the single individual.
A NEW ULTRA CONDENSER FOR VIEWING ULTRA-MICROSCOPIC PARTCLES
The Ultra Condenser has been devised by Dr. Felix Jentzsch*,
of the scientific department of E. Leitz, Wetzlar and serves for
ultra-microscopic observations, especially for the examination of
gases and fluids. It is not available for the examination of solids.
The designation Ultra Condenser signifies that the apparatus
is an appendage which renders an ordinary microscope available
for ultra-microscopic observations.
*Physikalische Zeitschrift, Vol. 11, pp. 1000-1001 WVerhandlungen der deutschen
Physikalischen Gesellschaft, Vol. 12, pp. 991-993, 1910. Paper read on the 22nd Sept.,
1910, before the German Congress of Science and Medicine at Koenigsberg.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 215
Whereas in all previously devised methods the illuminating
pencil enters from one side only, this condenser causes the light to
converge to one point from all sides. This is achieved by means of
two glass bodies having each a reflecting spherical surface, as shown
in Fig. 1. It will be seen that every ray is reflected four times, twice
before the particle becomes a centre of disturbance and twice after
this occurrence. In this way the whole of the rays, with the excep-
tion of a very small portion, leave the ultra-condenser on the same
side on which they entered it. The point of convergence is sur-
rounded by a hollow sphere which is ground out of the upper body
of glass and which is provided for the accommodation of the gases,
vapours, or liquids which are to be examined.
210 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
The whole is firmly cemented into a metal box fitted with a
bayonet jointed and rubber faced cover, by means of which the
hollow can be closed tightly. Gases and liquids may be led in
through two small tubes. The centre of the cover is fitted with a
small disc of quartz, which serves as an observation window. It
goes without saying that there is no occasion to introduce an immer-
sion fluid of any kind.
Figure 2 demonstrates the position of the Condenser when
used in connection with the microscope.
HONORARY DEGREE TO MR. E. LEITZ, JR.
The University of Giessen has conferred on Mr. E. Leitz, Jr.,
director of the microscopic concern, Ernst Leitz, Wetzlar, Germany,
the honorary degree of doctor of medicine. The title in the certifi-
cate reads:
“Dem zielbewussten Leiter der Weltfirma Leitz und weitblick-
enden Organisator auf sozialem Gebiet, dem talentvollen Foerderer
der Mikroskopie, Mikro-photographie und Projektion, dem Schoep-
fer neuer Instrumente und Konstruktionen, der durch seine reichen
Zuwendungen von optischen Apparaten die Weissenschaftlichen
Institute in hohem Masse unterstuetzte, ausbauen und befruchten
half, fuer seine Verdienste um die Universitaet.”
METALLURGICAL APPARATUS
C. Reichert, Vienna, emphasizes the importance of Metallo-
graphy by the issuance of a special catalog descriptive of his older
and more recent apparatus for microscopic analysis of metals.
Formerly such work was confined largely to the laboratory
of the research chemist or metallurgist, but since it is coming to
be appreciated that microscopic examination is one of the most
efficient means of determining the soundness and uniformity of
metals, these instruments are a necessary part of the equinment of
contractors, engineers, as well as of the manufacturers of the metal
and those who manufacture special products from the metal.
In addition to the older models originated by Prof. Rejto and
the auxiliary appliances used with these, the body of the catalog
is given to the discussion of the principles of a new metallographic
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 217
microscope, with reflecting camera, photomicrographic apparatus,
and the like.
Reichert Fluorescence- Microscope
This new pattern secures a more perfect illumination of the
metal surface, requires only one prepared surface, is more conven-
ient for the rapid taking of a series of photographs, and has a more
convenient form of slow adjustment. It would seem that the device
offered reaches the limit of possible convenience in passing frcin
optical observation to photographing. The catalog describes also a
special microscopic apparatus for the measurement of the compara-
tive hardness and tenacity of various materials. The apparatus was
devised by Mr. J. A. Brinell. The catalog may be had on appli-
cation.
ty ~ 1 ,
Oh aya yi? LS mil ia sii UNE SOO or Ryo a ane
Darin A f
ae re Aer OP Peer te aa Pk) eel
uf a ; 7 ,
Mar i} ih Vee iw ty iv Ah
a7 ye Ew hy Ab ao Pie) ey Thi ey , A
ra wep = {hy "i Sher ine iat
| Pe iris Dhaene if hl Lr ale ae ‘ bb’
bra Pky oh | a eka
‘ [ °
(‘Au i ddd if hie
hoy Aa OP i Lar) ; it P ii
i pa We
eal
“we
ae fu
an . of
, SCO) | UTR we Te eA OB
. oy aT ; ut Ay, a
' { it oh ay TPR iw He ee haley ee ') an roe ae
ig ee alah Frage Wid tee spl le ie? (8)? SU ay a a
boa
i
vii) wee ; iat) ep
; . vin per ae eee ay POU AGS) Tanne ial Gia aaa F
: ie ite) Ys iis Y WA ite toa AD ee ie \
oS Cy ane 4) PTA edt nee) uy ii pi tt ‘ ‘ ¢
Vay bare = : | :
a ti ia Pe PRR STUW AS Cereai! has ; Foy LEA iy
: j n :
r Me = i ae f -
7 : roe | pail ie Om 7 me | 71 a4 +y t oth ow
i. Peis al AeA : ; Th;
[ ‘ 7 Dis is x
Piet *) hes Py ys Tu ntl A A es
4! af dM) i iat
1 1
— , * ) i j ' —_ » ‘
ba OOM bes fue ; 5
e REL
' ARSE il ail nls .
' ead
' Wi Thabo Fete, ( , aN)
7% 195 i ” 7 i i, V at v? er ia ]
, 048 ‘ y ‘ 2; LA hy i f AA
'
: 7 /
2 ii if ; Gt wey VUs hel rs
. t we ¥ ak ay, Pe a CT ae
‘ f
inpoe s ‘ i) i We Ae Dee " :
5
Fi ' Nd A a ee UP Wie! y a ; wile’) OL Ry se
mL
Mu ¢
U ¥
)
WILLIAM H. WALMSLEY
NECROLOGY
WILLIAM HENRY WALMSLEY
(Born October 12th, 1830—Died October 22nd, 1005.)
W. H. Walmsley was descended from Thomas and Elizabeth
Trotter Walmsley, who came from Settle, Yorkshire, England, at
the time of William Penn’s first visit to America and purchased
land on the Neshaminy Creek, Bucks Co., Pennsylvania.
William Henry, the eldest son, was born October 12th, 1830,
at Byberry, Bucks Co., Pa. He was educated at Westtown Boarding
School. While there he became much interested in the study of
Botany and other science; But at the age of eighteen he was obliged
to leave school abruptly on account of the death of his father—to
begin his business career in the wholesale dry goods house of Bar-
croft and Beaver in Philadelphia. On November 23d, 1854, he mar-
ried Annie M. Bunting, daughter of Jacob Parker Bunting (Alder-
man of New York City). Being a member of the Society of
Friends—he was read ‘out of meeting” for daring to wed outside
of the Sect:—later, the society wanted to reinstate him to good
standing, but as he had joined the Church wherein his wife wor-
shipped, he preferred to remain an Episcopalian.
In Providence, R. I., about 1865, he became interested in the
study of the microscope and the preparation and mounting of slides,
soon taking high rank with such men as Dr. J. G. Hunt. He was
especially successful in making slides of arranged diatoms, insects
and vegetable tissues.
His great love and success in the study of Fungi was man-
ifested in the discovery and classification of at least 1500 varieties.
within walking distance of Capon Springs, Virginia. He was en-
gaged at the time of his death with Drs. Macfarlane and Harsh-
berger in the preparation of a work on Relation of Rag Weed to
Hay Fever, and also had all the material ready to write a book on
the Mushroom.
iS)
to
eo)
NECROLOGY
In 1870 he became a partner in the firm of James W. Queen
& Co., of Philadelphia, giving his entire attention to the Micro-
scopical Department. In 1877, he associated himself with R. & J.
Beck of London, England; and later, upon the death of the Becks,
he carried on the American branch under his own name for many
years.
In addition to inventing many devices and improvements to the
microscope and its accessories, he was an enthusiast in photography
and did much to perfect and simplify former methods, and great
credit is due him for his patience, perseverance and skill, especially
in the field of photo-micrography. He was also much interested in
the development of acetylene gas for use in photo-micrography and
the manufacture of generators, and a special form of burner for
using the gas.
Later, he was connected with the Pepper Laboratory of the
University of Pennsylvania. Under his personal supervision was
installed and equipped one of the finest outfits of photo-micrographic
apparatus, everything of the latest tyye for research work.
In 1902, he wrote The A. B. C. of Photo-Micrography, a prac-
tical guide for beginners which was very favorably received and is
used extensively, not only in America and Europe, but all over the
world where the English language is used.
He held membership in the following societies: American
Microscopical, of which he was a charter member; a Fellow
of the American Association for the Advancement of Science;
life member of The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia ;
Royal Microscopical Society of England; Botanical Society of the
University of Pennsylvania; Honorary member of the Microscop-
ical Societies of Chicago and San Francisco; and of the Photo-
graphic Society of Philadelphia.
The career of William Henry Walmsley presents a personality
and character worthy of remembrance, devoted to his home and to
his work; honorable, conscientious, kindly and sympathetic, always
ready and willing to extend a helping hand; so genial and so cordial,
that he endeared himself to the hearts of his many friends.
J. FREDERICK HeErBerT, M. D
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
American Microscopical
Society
ORGANIZED 1878 INCORPORATED 1891
PUBLISHED QUARTERLY
BY THE SOCIETY
EDITED BY THE SECRETARY
VOLUME XXXI
NuMBER Four
Entered as Second-class Matter Dec
ember 12, 1910, at the Postoffice at Decatur, IIli-
nois, under act of March 3, 1879.
Decatur, It.
Review Printinc & STATIONERY Co.
1912
LON i
Ps Baty
rm)
hay
Mra) eed al ee
i ’ aH ANA vy}
he Nahant eAOrTCs what vi
be , i? ‘ fe) i
Pay ae lw di
"he " ie Ca
ari) AR MPN AN RY m pais ni sae iv mia unis Wy Wei
9
: ‘ re Ae
Ty ‘) |
i Wh : We y uy Mi i hi vas 1m j aot: ay = REAM cla id ibs AG
i Hit uh 4) Lheaiies (4 hk rt " a i fs
ec ih os pry 1h ee | ny Vit HW ores
party! i | \: | 7
DEVE | Lip. i Ne Hin Fo ei Ali hon i.
| i i ; mH hie or Teele iere) ea 1h a 0 ue h ‘ ite (oarel ve r
’ , ee iy |
ty W ‘ Les 1% ae f AS Lage in yer aA OMA Noe Bik
yi New “i an ¥ AV me Pp ; j iy le Pry \ \ rine
| ¥
ae ti : ie ah) Lee ri , ig z ‘ rr ; Lk
} i] Wi ia es ‘ : ; . ‘ |
mul if really F m
yi sith | ‘
ee Ad ee) JN ; . AA Laat hin
Hal COUN n sn Re RLS Ro iyi 1 Live
' Poay / RNY : (
j , ;
Whey 4 » ; v ) re Ve VG iu i A 1
=) i ra
é j ts
a
aT] i ar)
Wak ’
Ae F |
i
i vf : HEATER ee SR ONE
ai) ES CS EO ae ei ae arin aes
# 2 ; | ' i, BE A eke i i ‘ane
ai vi ao? oy Sint ; 5 arkee } ut) i ey,
hy ; eh) von aa ei OE ys hang oh) eh yin ys! a iq what Ly est
ml Fi \ ( , eile Me ed J j ae of aly Fi Bay ve de ag
; / te a
x) ; ’ ifs) st * ahs Vata ve ay fb ha Maite
' if a? 7 , f v
CT a ie oy, nea ee
Mi yen mC ema al) a Hh
| water eh
1 hy a4 if f 4 ve ‘he WM
} '
OTe yy
+ @
ie Ly
sp | oy
} a
} > Piha d TD her el 8
i)! iW
OFFICERS.
ET ESICCG te DMV ELE ATED serie des ieaat ae oe nate tere eee Philadelphia, Pa.
First Vice President: F. CreigHton WELLMAN, M. D....New Orleans, La.
Second Vice President: EpwarpD PENNOCK.............6+5 Philadelphia, Pa.
SHAR AALS MSE IE CYR ECOM IS 2a iB 5 cs AME Oe AB YAR CIDA eo HES Be Decatur, III.
dincasurers aia tes ETA NIKDNSON Mesa ae ee eee Charleston, Ill.
Custodians } MAGNUS: PREAUM iy: telnet oc a aercraloioieste Meadville, Pa.
ELECTIVE MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
PNRM NIUE TIE SE one hey leis AS caved eters SeaTAMEE s omintel a ote Morgantown, West Va.
EVs" A CSNY Gru oie Ua ati at A oe REE ARN os AR Cleveland, Ohio
We MGVEERGER ys titam enya a runs rite ics a OME iE e A LRA B bd an Athens, Ohio
EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Past Presidents still retaining membership in the Society
R. H. Warp, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Troy, N. Y.,
at Indianapolis, Ind., 1878, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1879.
J. D. Hyatt, of New Rochelle, N. Y.,
at Columbus, Ohio, 1881.
AvBert McCatta, Ph.D., of Chicago, Il.
at Chicago, IIl., 1883
dy). BURRILL; PhD: of Urbana, Ills
at Chautauqua, N. Y., 1886, and at Buffalo, N. Y., 1904.
Gro. E. Fett, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Buffalo, N. Y.,
at Detroit, Mich., 1890.
MarsHALL D. Ewe tt, M.D., of Chicago, III,
at Rochester, N. Y., 1892, and at Boston, Mass., 1907.
Simon Henry Gace, B.S., of Ithaca, N. Y.,
at Ithaca, N. Y., 1895 and 1906.
A. Cyirrorp Mercer, M.D., F.R.M.S., of Syracuse, N. Y.,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1806.
A. M. Buerte, M.D., of Columbus, Ohio,
at New York City, 1900.
C. H. Eicenmann, Ph.D., of Bloomington, Ind.,
at Denver, Colo., rgo1.
CwHartes E. Bessey, LL.D., of Lincoln, Neb.,
E. A. Birce, LL.D., of Madison, Wis.,
Henry B. Warp, A.M., Ph.D., of Urbana, III,
at Pittsburg, Pa., 1902.
at Winona Lake, Ind., 1903.
at Sandusky, Ohio, 1905.
HeErverT Oszorn, M.S., of Columbus, Ohio,
at Minneapolis, Minn. 1910
JN, 183) 18 , M.D., of Kansas City, Mo., ;
a Pasa " ee ef at Washington, D. C., 1911
The Society does not hold itself responsible for the opinions expressed
by members in its published Transactions unless endorsed by a special vote
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR VOLUME XXXI, Number 4, October, 1912
Some American Lebertia, with Plates XXVII and XXVIII, by Ruth
Marrs hadi ls Peete he taccevetals Gishatprotetovennts le be level ne tot fehoines senses Oe ee eee 225
Results of Recent Studies of the Mammalian Epiphysis Cerebri, by H. E.
ORGAM yet hasta be ep bila cece eee ecto ie ele terre tec (ek hee kta 231
The Melanconiales, with nine Text figures, by C. W. Edgerton.......... 243
Notes and Reviews—The Cleveland Meeting; Mimicking Ameboid and
Streaming Motions of Protoplasm; Relation of Blood to Size in
Rabbits; Culture of Malarial Plasmodia; Pure Cultures of Spiro-
chaeta in Vitro; Notes on Pollen; Root Nodules in Plants other than
Leguminosae; A Plea for the Fish; Heredity in Relation to Eugenics ;
Heredity and Eugenics; Filar connections between Nuclear and Cy-
toplasmic Bodies; New Models in Binocular Microscopes.......... 267
Tst Vote Mem Perse isch tac, cides ale tole e Genre hee ne Mea oreo eal en ae eee 279
HEISE Ote | SUDSCHIDET SH yaraicdros ssw crete aac toks aston ete clere ee re era e Oe eee 287
rr eax ency es io vevopste vo sa nises alae Male copaye Mace tekelenees Keo oot tot ce a PTENN ost falls Baa Oe 289
NOTICE OF ANNUAL MEETING
The Annual Meeting of the American Microscopical Society
will occur in Cleveland, Ohio, on Dec. 31, 1912, and Jan. 1, 1913.
The Executive Committee will lunch together at 12:30 p. m. Dec.
31, at the University Club, and the business meeting will occur at
3:30 p. m. Jan. 1, at which time the annual election of officers will
take place. The place of the business meeting has not yet been
determined. Members will find it scheduled in the general program
of the A. A. A. S. The Headquarters will be Hotel Euclid, Euclid
Avenue and East 14th Street.
TRANSACTIONS
OF
American Microscopical Society
(Published in Quarterly Installments)
Vol. XXXI OCTOBER, 1912 No. 4
SOME AMERICAN LEBERTIA
By RutH MARSHALL
The genus Lebertia of the water-mites is easily recognized by
the character of the epimera. It belongs to a small group of genera,
the subfamily Lebertiinae, characterized by the union of the four
pairs of epimera into a single group, with their more or less com-
plete fusion. This forms a shield which covers a large part of the
ventral surface of the body.
In Lebertia the first and second pairs of plates of the two
sides are in contact, while the third is partly fused with the second
and fourth. The third and fourth diverge from the median line,
and in the bay thus formed lies the genital area. The latter con-
sists of two oblong plates, each with three acetabula. The sexes
are alike. The covering of the rest of the body is soft or thick-
ened, striate, minutely papilliate or developing bits of chitin.
The palpi are small and leg-like; the second joint is stout, the
fifth is very small, and all bear bristles or hairs. The legs increase
markedly in size from the first to the fourth, and all are tipped with
claws. They bear many stout bristles, and sometimes swimming
hairs.
Dr. Sig Thor, the Norwegian hydrachnologist, who has made
the most extensive studies in the Lebertia, divides the genus into
six subgenera; however, the characters which separate the groups
seem rather small and inconstant.
Over sixty species have been described; only three of these
are from other regions than European, these being from Kamts-
226 RUTH MARSHALL
chatka. L. porosa Thor, a widely distributed European species,
has been found in Siberia. L. tauinsignita (Leb.) and L. insignis
(Neum.) were reported by Doctor F. Koenike from Canada; but
Doctor Thor thinks that these were not identical with the European
forms. Three species are described in the present paper, two of
which appear to be new. The Lebertia inhabit the colder waters,
and this accounts for their very meager occurrence in the author’s
large collection of water-mites, which came chiefly from the Mis-
sissippi basin. One species, however, was found in the Waupaca
Chain-o’-Lakes, lakes of glacial origin, in eastern Wisconsin; but
the other two came from mountain lakes of the West. For the
latter, the author is indebted to Mr. Chauncey Juday.
Lebertia parmata n. sp.
Pie Oe LI, Pigs. 4)..55) Pl OV TLL Pigs: 6.7,
This mite resembles L. sparsicapillata Thor closely, but is not
identical with it, as has been determined by a comparison with a
specimen of the European form sent to the author by Dr. Thor.
The body is oblong, about 1.4 mm. in length. The color cannot
be determined, as the material has been in preserving fluids. The
group of epimera cover a relatively small part of the ventral sur-
face. The cleft between the posterior ends of the second and third
plates on each side is longer and wider than is common, and the
space between the plates and the genital area is likewise greater.
The posterior margin of the fourth epimera is narrow. The gen-
ital area is enclosed for only about two-thirds of its length by the
approaching margins of the plates. The acetabula are of nearly
equal size.
The epimera are covered with pores; the skin of the body at
first appears smooth, but small pores and minute parallel striae
can be made out by careful focusing. The large glands, of un-
known function, described and figured by Thor (1902) for L.
porosa were clearly seen close to the fourth epimera, with their
long tubes extending to the capitulum (Pl. XX VII, Fig. 4).
The palpi have little to distinguish them from typical mem-
bers. The last points of the legs are enlarged at the distal ends
rather noticeably. There are stout bristles on all segments except
the sixth, but no swimming hairs are present.
SOME AMERICAN LEBERTIA 227,
Four specimens of this species were found in material taken by
Mr. Juday from Kern Lake, California, July 20, 1904.
Lebertia artaacetabula n. sp.
Pl. XXVII, Figs. 1-3
This mite is a small member of the genus, only about 0.8 mm.
in length. The nymph measures 0.65 mm. The color cannot be
determined. But one adult has been found, together with tree
nymphs. They were collected in the Waupaca Lakes, of Wiscon-
sin, July 10, 1911. These are the only members of the genus found
by the author in very extensive collections in that state extending
Over several years.
The epimeral shield covers the greater part of the ventral
surface of the body, and extends back a little farther than the
genital area. The genital plates are closely fitted into the bay thus
formed by the epimera; they are distinctly narrowed at the an-
terior end. The chitenous bar at their posterior end is indistinct.
The six acetabula are very narrow.
The skin appears to be very finely papilliated; the epimera
and the appendages bear fine pores. The last three pairs of legs
bear a few swimming hairs. On the joints of all of the middle seg-
ments of the legs the broad saber-like bristles are conspicuous,
especially at the distal ends.
Lebertia porosa Thor.
Pl. XXVIII, Figs. 8-11
This species is represented here by one individual only. This
was found in Twin Lakes, Colorado, in the weeds near shore, by
Mr. Chauncey Juday, in August, 1902. It measures about 1.6 mm. ;
the color cannot be determined.
Dr. Thor has kindly sent the author several specimens of L.
porosa from Europe. A careful comparison of the American form
with these shows but slight differences, such as the little greater
width of the fourth epimera, differences which do not appear to
justify the formation of a new species, or even a variety, based
upon a knowledge of but a single specimen.
The epimera cover a relatively larger area of the body than in
L. parmata, and the posterior inner angle of the fourth is conspic-
uously broader. The genital plates come up close to the epimera
228 RUTH MARSHALL
and are enclosed by them for about three-fourths of their length.
The last pair of acetabula are nearly circular. The skin is finely
papilliate, with a few faint irregular lines. The appendages and
plates have pores.
The second joint of the palpus is very stout and somewhat
bent. The legs are rather slender, and there are not as many stout
bristles on the joints as are found in the other two specimens here
described. Swimming hairs, however, are found well developed
on the fourth and fifth segment of the last two pairs of legs.
Biological Laboratory, Rockford College.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Ha sert, J. N.
1gtt. Claire Is. Survey, Acarinida: 1-Hydracarina. Roy. Irish Acad.,
XXXII :39 :22.
KOoENIKE, F.
1895. Nordamerikanische Hydrachniden. Abh. Naturv. Vereins Bre-
men, XIII :2o1.
1897. Acari collected during the Willem Barendtsz-Expeditions of 1881
and 1882. Tijdschrift Entom., XL :240-242.
1902. Acht neue Lebertia Arten, etc. Zool. Anz., XXV :610-615.
1903. Vier unbekannte norddeutsche Hydrachniden. Zool. Anz.,
XXVI :536.
1904. Hydrachniden aus der nordwestdeutschen Fauna. Abh. Nat. Ver.
Bremen, XVIII :63-65.
1908. Neue einheimische Lebertia-Arten. Abh. Nat. Ver. Brem.,XIX,
2 1342-348.
1909. Die Siisswasser Fauna Deutschlands, XII :63:73. Jena.
1911. Neue Hydracarinen-Arten aus Westfalen. Zool. Anz., XXXVII:
324-320.
1911. Sechs neue norddeutsche Wassermilben. Abh. Nat. Ver. Bremen,
XX,2 :236-342.
Mactio, C.
1908. Due Nuove Specie Trentine di “Lebertia”. Rend. 1st Lomb. Sc.
Lett. II,XLI :1-4.
1909. Idracarini del Trentino. Atti Soc. Ital. Sc. Nat., XLVIII :269-277.
MontI, R.
1903. Ueber eine neue Lebertia-Art. Zool. Anz. XXVI :688-693.
1904. Di un’altra nuova specie “Lebertia”’, etc. R. Istituto Lomb, Se
Lett. I1,XXXVII :3-8.
Neumavy, C.
1880. Om Sveriges Hydrachnider. Konigl Svenska Vet.-Akad.
Handlgr., XVII,1 :68-7o.
SOME AMERICAN LEBERTIA 229
Prersic, R.
1896. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der in Sachsen einheimischen Hydrachnid-
en-Formen. Inaug. Diss. Leipsig.
1897. Deutschlands Hydrachniden. Bibliotheca Zoologica, X X11 :233-
237. Stuttgart, 1897-1900.
1897. Einige neue deutsche Hydrachniden. Zool. Anz., XX :350-351.
1898. Hydrachnidenformen aus der Hohen Tatra. Zool. Anz., XXI:13.
1901. Hydrachnidae (und Halacaridae). Das Tierreich, XIII :146-151.
Berlin.
Soar, C. D.
1899. British Freshwater Mites. Science Gossip (n. ser.), VI:44-45.
Tuor, S.
1897. Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydrachnider. Arch. Math.
Naturv., X1X,6 :31.
1898. Andet Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydrachnider. Arch.
Math. Naturv., XX,3,1 :40.
1899. Tredie Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydrachnider. Arch.
Math. Naturv., XX1I,5 :34.
1899. En ny Hydrachnide-slegt og andre nye arter fundne i Norge
sommeren 1899. Kristiania.
1900. Hydrachnologische Notizen I-III. Nyt. Mag. Naturv., XXXVIII:
268-274.
1901. Fjerde Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydrachnider. Arch.
Math. Naturv., XXIII,4:19-21.
1902. Eigenartige bisher unbekannte Drtisen bei einzelnen “Hydrach-
niden”-Formen. Zool. Anz., XXV :401-400.
1903. Bemerkungen zur neuren “Hydrachniden” Nomenclature. Nyt.
Mag. Naturv., XLI,1 :69-70.
1903. Untersuchungen iiber die Haut verschiedener dickhautiger Acar-
ina. Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien, XIV :291-306.
1903. Recherches sur L’Anatomie comparée des Acariens Prostigma-
tiques. Ann. Sc. Nat. Zool., XIX,3. Paris.
1905. Lebertia-Studien I. Zool. Anz., XXVIII :815-823.
1905. Lebertia-Studien II-V. Zool. Anz., X XIX :41-60.
1906. Lebertia-Studien VI-VIII. Zool. Anz., X XIX :762-790.
1906. Lebertia-Studien IX. Zool. Anz., XXX :69-78.
1906. Lebertia-Studien X. Zool. Anz., XXX :271-275.
1906. Lebertia-Studien XI-XIV. Zool. Anz., XXX :463-484.
1907. Lebertia-Studien XV. Zool. Anz., XXXI:105-115.
1907. Lebertia-Studien XVI-XVII. Zool. Anz., XXXI :272-280.
1907. Lebertia-Studien XVIII. Zool. Anz., XXXI:510-512.
1907. Eine neue Neolebertia-Art aus Italien. Zool. Anz. XXXI:
902-904.
1907. Lebertia-Studien XIX-XXIII. Zool. Anz., XXXII :150-172.
1911. Lebertia-Studien XXIV-XXV. Zool. Anz., XXXVII :385-304.
230 RUTH MARSHALL
1911. Eine neue Neolebertia-Art und eine neue Pilolebertia-Art aus
Sachsen, etc. Zool. Anz., XX XVIII :326-331.
1911. Neue Acarina aus Asien (Kamtschtka). Zool. Anz., XXXVIII:
420-427.
1912. Lebertia-Studien XXVI-XXVIII. Zool. Anz., XXXIX :529-536.
Viets K.
1908. Drei neue Hydrachniden-Formen. Zool. Anz., XXXIII:52-53.
1908. Weitere hydrachnologische Beitrage. Abh. Nat. Ver. Bremen,
XIX :464-467.
WALTER, C.
1907. Die Hydracarinen der Schweiz. Inaug. Diss. Revue Suisse de
Zool., XV :465-571.
1911. Hydracarinen der nordschwedeschen Hochgebirge. Natur. Unter.
Sarckg. Schwed., IV,5 :595-600.
Wotcort, R. H.
1905. A Review of the Genera of the Water-Mites. Trans. Am. Mic.
Soc., XX VI :205-207. (Repr. as Studies from the Zool. Lab. Univ. of
Nebraska, No. 66.)
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
Plate XXVII
Fig. 1. Lebertia artaacetabula, ventral view.
Fig. 2. Lebertia artaacetabula, palpus and legs, left side.
Fig. 3. Lebertia artaacetabula, nymph.
Fig. 4. Lebertia parmata, ventral view.
Fig. 5. Lebertia parmata, genital field.
Plate XXVIII
Fig. 6. Lebertia parmata, right palpus, inner side.
Fig. 7. Lebertia parmata, legs, right side.
Fig. 8. Lebertia porosa, epimera and genital area.
Fig. 9. Lebertia porosa, Ist leg.
Fig. 10. Lebertia porosa, 2nd, 3rd, 4th legs, right side.
Fig. 11. Lebertia porosa, right palpus, inner side.
PLATE XXVII
PLATE XXVIII
DEPARTMENT OF SUMMARIES
LO BE DEVOTED TO DIGESTS OF PROGRESS
IN BIOLOGY
While the Transactions will continue to be primarily a Journal of research in mier~
diology, it is recognized that the field has become so broad as to preclude the possibilit~
of frequent articles in any one of the departments of special interest. Because of this
it will be the policy to present, from time to time, supplementary digests of the progress
being made in the various fields of micro-viology. It is also proposed to introduce similar
summaries of the progress made in some departments not represented in our articles of
research. This is done with the feeling that such reviews will increase the permanent
value of the Transactions to all who may not have access to a large list of technical
oiological journals, nor the time to make the survey for themselves.
RESULTS OF RECENT STUDIES OF THE MAMMALIAN
EPLPH YSIS *CEREBRI
By H. E. Jorpan
The last decade has witnessed great activity in the study of
the “organs of internal secretion”, notably the hypophysis. The
definite results here obtained have stimulated renewed interest in
that enigmatical body, the conarium or epiphysis cerebri. The in-
vestigation of this organ has been approached from various di-
rections, namely, histological, histogenetic (embryological), path-
ological, clinical and experimental (physiological). In view of
certain contradictory histological and experimental results, 1t seems
premature to speak of a pineal “gland”. Certain gross and micro-
scopical morphological characters recall glandular tissue; but the
absence of excretory ducts vitiates the strict analogy. Certain
other characters (e. g. cysts or blind alveoli, profuse vascularity )
suggests an organ of internal secretion. It is the main purpose
of this paper to record, and briefly analyze, the findings which
have been reported for and against physiological significance, and
to determine the present state and general trend of our knowledge
of the pineal organ of mammals. Certain details, of only sub-
sidiary significance from the standpoint of our chief object, may
properly be neglected. Nor need comparative morphological ob-
servations be here noted. As regards cytological and histological
facts, only those will be specially considered that indicate or con-
232 H. E. JORDAN
travert glandular activity. A summary of progress made will
serve the better to indicate what still awaits solution, and, in a
measure, suggest the best methods of further approach.
HISTOLOGICAL STUDIES
Since histological observations would seem to be simplest and
therefore least liable to differences of interpretation, the analysis
logically considers these first.
With modern technique Dimitrovat (1901) carefully studied
the pineal bodies of a number of the common domestic mammals,
and arrived at the conclusion that the parenchyma consists of a
single cell type, a neuroglia cell. Cysts, pigment granules, brain
sand, and a few striped muscle cells (ox) were also described in
certain forms and in varying quantities. Certain cytoplasmic
granules and vacuoles of uncertain significance, but suggestive of
secretion, were also noted. The point of prime importance, how-
ever, pertains to the conclusion that the earlier? identification of
several (two to four) different types of parenchymal cells is un-
tenable. Nor could Dimitrova identify ganglion cells. On a basis
of a histogenetic study of the pineal organ of the sheep, Jordan’
(1911) confirms Dimitrova’s findings respecting a single type of
parenchymal cell. Costantinit (1910) on the contrary, describes
“acidophile” and ‘‘basophile” cells, the presence of which he in-
terprets as indicating an internal secretory function.
The neuroglia parenchymal cells frequently contain melanic
granules (e. g. young sheep; Jordan®). Dimitrova®, and Pappen-
heimer* (1910), moreover, describe colloid spherules in the cyto-
plasm. Such are certainly not present in sheep. In the latter, fat
1 Dimitrova, Z. (1901)—-Recherches sur la structure de la glande piné@ali chez
quelques mammiféres. Le Neuraxe 2:3.
2 The earlier histological literature is fully reviewed in the works of Studnicka
(Oppel’s Lehrbuch, 1905), Dimitrova, and Cutore; the pathological and clinical literature
in the paper by Bailey and Jelliffe, loc. cit.
3 Jordan, H. E. (1911)—-The Histogenesis of the Pineal Body of the Sheep. Amer.
Journ. of Anat., 12:3.
4 Constantini, G. (1910)—Pathologica, 2:45. Ref. Neurol. Centrbl., Aug. 1, 1911.
5/4 loc:) leit:
6 loc. cit. :
7 Pappenheimer, A. M. (1910)—Ueber geschwiilste des Corpus pineale. Virchow’s
Archiv ftir path. Anat. und Phys., Bd. 200.
MAMMALIAN EPIPHYSIS CEREBRI 233
vacuoles frequently appear. Bailey and Jelliffe’ (1911) state that
“histologic evidence points to the fact that this structure (pineal
body) contains elements which ally it to the blood glands—the
chromaffine system—and that like other members of this series,
the hypophysis, thymus, thyroid, and adrenals, etc., it plays a part
in trophism”. But a careful search for phaeochrome granules in
the pineal body of the sheep gave me only negative evidence.
Though the pineal is by some included in the ‘‘chromaffine system”,
I know of no positive cytological evidence of a “‘chromaffine reac-
tion” of any parenchymal cells, hence its classification as a “blood-
gland” (von Cyon®; 1910) seems unwarranted.
The sparse sensory nerve supply is limited to the proximo-
ventral and proximo-dorsal portion of the structure; and the sym-
pathetic to the blood vessels. The proximo-dorsal bundle from
the superior commissure, may represent the parietal (pineal) nerve
of lower forms. The body is very vascular. It is roughly divided
by pial trabeculae into lobes and lobules (follicles). Commonly,
mammalian pineals contain ependyma-lined cysts, clumps of pig-
ment, and brain sand (acervulus), all of which features vary great-
ly according to form, and more especially according to age. Cysts
and intracellular pigment granules are more numerous in youth,
clumps of intercellular pigments and brain sand in advanced age.
Pigment in the adult pineal seems to be most abundant in the horse
(Dimitrova’’).
Histological marks in general indicate a progressive involution
with age, beginning about the time of puberty—about seven years
in man (Bailey and Jelliffe'!) ; about 8 months in sheep (Jordan’*).
This histological involution is accompanied by decrease in size.
Illing’® (1910) has described a few smooth muscle cells in the
finer trabeculae (ox). Ganglion cells, and occasional striped muscle
8 Bailey, P. and Jelliffe, S. E. (1911)—Tumors of the Pineal Body. Archiv f.
Int. Med. 8:6.
9 yv. Cyon, E. (1910)—Die Gefiissdrtisen als regulatorische Schutz organe des
Zentral, nervensystems. Berlin.
10 loc. cit.
Id, Joc: eit:
12 loc: cit.
13 Illing, P. (1910)—Vergleichend.Anatomische und Histologische Untersuchungen
ueber die Epiphysis cerebri einiger Siiuger. Inaug. Diss. Leipzig.
234 H. E. JORDAN
cells (ox and calf; Nicholas'*, 1900, and Dimitrova’’) are possibly
to be interpreted as teratomatous in nature. The pineal body, in
common with rudimentary structures, seems especially prone to
teratomata. Possibly the various nuclear and cytoplasmic phe-
nomena (e. g. basophile and acidophile granules, vacuoles, “colloid
spherules,” etc.), on the basis of which the parenchymal cells have
been classified as of several distinct types, have only degenerative
significance.
Judged from structural marks, the pineal body has small func-
tional value, limited to late foetal or early post-natal (pre-pubertal)
life.
In view of the fact that striped muscle is the only mesodermal
element that has been described in the supposedly normal pineal
parenchyma, and this only occasionally and in very small amount,
it may possibly be that cells so interpreted are in reality enlarged
fusiform or rectangular elements which, by reason of a regular
arrangement of the cytoplasmic granules, simulate a striped muscle-
cell appearance. Otherwise, if, and where, actually present, the
pineal is probably teratomatous.
The cytoplasmic melanic granules of foetal and young stages
(sheep) must probably be interpreted in terms of the phylogenetic
history (regression) of the pineal organ. Tendency to pigment
elaboration may be a survival of the ancestral condition when the
pineal functioned as an “eye” (light perceptive). An alternative
interpretation might regard the melanic granules as secretory pro-
ducts in a transient phase as a chromatic proteid (Dyson™, IgI1),
the vacuoles representing the decomposition phases. The pigment
clumps of old .pineals probably signify degeneration products.
The cysts also may have only ancestral significance; for they
are especially numerous and well developed in certain birds. Since
they are in communiction during no portion of the developmental
history of the pineal either with the surface or the recess, how-
ever, they are the more difficult of interpretation. Moreover, they
14 Nicolas, M. (1900)—-Note sur la presence des fibres musculaires striees dans la
glande pineale de quelques mammiferes. Compt. rend de la soc. de biol., Paris.
15, loc. cit.
16 Dyson, Z. (1911)—An Investigation on Cutaneous Pigmentation in Normal and
Pathological Conditions. Journ. Path. and Bact. 15:3.
MAMMALIAN EPIPHYSIS CEREBRI 235
seem filled with a very dilute fluid. Indeed, the cysts appear to
have origin through the accumulation of fluid forcing the arrange-
ment of the parenchymal cells for a time into alveoli-like structures.
The fluid may possibly be lymph, which has escaped from the large
perivascular lymph spaces.
PATHOLOGICAL STUDIES
All the more complete histological descriptions of pineal
tumors identify several types of cells more or less distinct. In a
large pineal tumor (ca. 3.5 cm. dia.), for which the term “neu-
roglia ependymale”’ is suggested, Pappenheimer™ describes besides
neuroglia cells, ‘‘neuroblast-like cells’, ‘“ependyma-like cells’ and
embryonal striped muscle cells. The latter are very few in num-
ber, and found only in several sections. The cytoplasm of the
several cell types is said to be frequently vacuolated and to contain
“colloid” spherules.
In a large tumor (1.5 in. dia.) replacing the pineal body,
Bailey and Jelliffe'* describe hair and cartilage. Teratomata of
the pineal body are described also by Neumann’? (1900), Mar-
burg”? (1909; mixed tumor), and Frankl-Hochwart*! (1909). Oth-
er neoplastic growths, replacing the pineal, include epithelial car-
cinoma, neuroglioma, sarcoma, adenoma, choric-epithelioma, glio-
sarcoma, hemorrhagic angiosarcoma, glioma, and gliosarcoma”.
The frequency of a pure or mixed gliomatous condition among
pineal tumors is significant. Indeed, the adult pineal is normally
essentially a mass of neuroglia cells, i.e., practically a small or po-
tential glimoa. In view of the frequent presence of considerable
quantities of pigment, coupled with the tendency to neoplastic alter-
ations, the absence of melanotic tumors of the pineal seems re-
markable.
175 loc: ‘cit:
18 lec. cit.
19 Neuman, P. (1900)—Ein neuer Fall von Teratom der Zirbeldrtise. Inag. Diss.
KGnigsberg.
20. Marburg, O. (1909)—Zur Kenntnis der nmormalen und pathologischen His-
tologie der Zirbeldritise, Die Adipositas cerebralis. Arb. a. d. Wiener Neurol. Institut, 17.
21. Frankl-Hochwart, L. (1909)—Ueber Diagnose der Zirbeldrtisentumoren.
Deutsch. Ztschr. f. Nervenh., 37.
22. For review of these cases of pineal tumors and list of literature see Bailey
and Jelliffe.
236 H. E. JORDAN
EMBRYOLOGICAL STUDIES
The pineal body arises as an ependymal diverticulum from
the roof of the diencephalon. In the sheep (Jordan?*) of the 5 cm.
stage of development the ependymal cells of this apically thickened
pocket are actively proliferating and undergoing the early differ-
entiation processes in the formdtion of neuroglia and inter-neuroglia
(less differentiated neuroglia) cells. Both types (stages) contain
abundant small spherical melanic granules. At half term (21 cm.)
the body is filled with blind cysts, lined with tall columnar (epen-
dymal) cells. The cysts in sections contain a coagulated fluid. They
progressively disappear, only a few persisting to birth and oc-
casionally after. Cutore** (1911) records histological observations
on certain embryonic and foetal stages in ox and man. He also
recognizes originally only neuroglia (differentiated from epen-
dyma) cells; but he describes a secondary differentiation into cells
with “epithelial character” and “lypmhatic elements.”
Cytological findings in the sheep give no evidence of secretory
function. Cutore, on the contrary, maintains that an organ of
such complex structure, constituted of neuroglia, epithelial, and
lymphatic tissue, with tubular cavities, pigment cells, calcareous
concretions, and a rich blood supply is not in a condition of regres-
sion. He believes that these structural characteristics warrant at-
tributing to it the significance of a glandular organ with an in-
ternal secretion. However, the evidence presented for internal se-
cretion seems far from adequate to the demands of a demonstration.
CLINICAL STUDIES
A very interesting and suggestive feature of pineal investiga-
tion relates to the clinical symptoms accompanying a tumor con-
dition of this organ. Frankl-Hochwart?? (1909) first directed
special attention to the possible influence of the pineal body in cases
of young individuals who showed—besides the ordinary tumor
symptoms and those accompanying diseases of the corpora quadri-
gemina—abnormal size, extraordinary hair growth, obesity, drowsi-
23) locsxeits
24. Cutore, . (1911)—II corpo pineale di alcuni mammiferi. Archivio Italiano di
Anatomia e di Embryologia, 9: 3 and 4.
25.) loch cit:
MAMMALIAN EPIPHYSIS CEREBRI 237
ness, premature genital and sexual development, and mental pre-
cocity. Marburg®*® (1908-1909) had previously called attention to
a possible relation between pineal tumor (hypopinealismus) and
adiposis, ‘‘adipositas cerebralis”. Examination of the clinical his-
tories of the cases mentioned at the close of a previous section,
“Pathological Studies’, shows that the symptoms accompanying
disease of the pineal organ are adiposis, early sexual maturity, and
cachexia.
Illustrative of typical cases of diseased pineal are two described
by Pellizzi*? (1910) under the title, “Makrogenistomia praecox”’:
One, a child of 5 years, measured 127 cm. Already at the seventh
month the abnormal development was evident. At 2 years his gen-
etalia were like those of an adult, and erections and ejaculations,
with spermatozoa, occurred. Profuse pubic hair and beard were
present. Radiographs indicated an age of about 16 years. The
jaws, however, were infantile in character. A second patient was
similar to the above, with hydrocephalus; and idiotic. Analysis of
eases with similar symptom-complex reported by previous observ-
ers, and checked at necropsy, leads Pellizzi** to the hypothesis that
the syndrome present in his cases relates to changes in the pineal
body. He gives also a critical differential diagnosis between the
pineal syndrome and the symptom-complex of pituitary disturbance
(dyspituitarism ).
An interesting complication arises from the fact that disease
of the hypophysis also causes adiposis. Why should a pineal tumor
produce the identical result? A possible explanation is as follows:
a pineal tumor may block the aqueduct of Sylvius, and thus pro-
duce internal hydrocephalus, with consequent pressure on, and
atrophy of, the hypophsis. On the basis of the work notably of
Paulesco”® (1908) and of Cushing*® (1909) it seems certain that
hypopituitarism is associated with adiposis, genital atrophy and
26; loc. ‘cit.
27. Pellizzi, G. B. (1910)—La sindrome “‘macrogenistomia praece.’’ Riv. Ital. di
Neuropatol., Psich. ed Eleccroterapia, 3:5—-Ref. Neurol. Centrbl., Aug. 1, 1911.
28. loc. cit.
29. Paulesco, M. C. (1908)—-L’Hypophyse du Cerveau, Vigot Fréres, Paris.
30. Cushing, H. (1909)—Partial Hypophysectomy for Acromegaly, with Remarks
on the Function of the Pituitary Body.- Ann. of Surg., 1903.
238 H. E. JORDAN
lack of sexual development; and that apituitarism is a concomitant
of cachexia, usually leading to death. However, pineal tumors
seem to cause also genital hypertrophy and sexual precocity, a con-
dition associated likewise with hyperpituitarism. Thus a seem-
ingly serious contradiction appears, which somewhat invalidates
the explanation of symptoms associated with pineal tumor as an in-
direct effect on the hypophysis. Bailey and Jelliffe®! suggest that
“possibly here the type of tumor introduces new elements that must
be reckoned with, and whereas adiposis may be a more general fac-
tor dependent on hypopinealism, or on hydrocephalus, the sexual
precocity may be due to a specific type of tumor, namely to tera-
tomata, or possibly also to adenomata” p. 859. They suggest still
another possibility: ‘‘It may be that the precocious sexual develop-
ment may be an early irritative sign of a purely nervous character
acting through the pars nervosa sympathetic system, which is very
rich, and that later increases in pressure brings about degeneration
or atrophic phenomena. Further, Cushing’s hypothesis which as-
sumes that dyspituitarism results from lessened pituitary secretions
in the cerebrospinal fluid, which results from pressure on the in-
fundibulum, may be the explanation of these sexual changes”.
p. 859.
More specifically, Marburg*? (1909) describes (a) universal
adiposity as due to hyperpinealismus, (b) premature development
of the genital organs or genital hypertrophy as due to hypopineal-
ismus, and (c) cachexia as due to absence of pineal or apineal-
ismus.
Kidd** (1910) points out that a and b are the exact reverse
of hyperpituitarism and hypopituitarism. He suggests that there
may be a “functional relationship between the pineal and the pitui-
tary, the former’s function waning as the latter’s begins to wax”.
On this basis he explains the results of the hypophysectomy experi-
ments on puppies by Crowe, Cushing and Homans** (1910), show-
31. loc: cit:
325) loc: cit.
33. Kidd, L. (1910)—-Pineal Experimentation. British Medical Journal, Dec. 24,
1910.
34. Crowe, S. J., Cushing, H. and Homan, J. (1910)—-Experimental Hypophysec-
tomy. Johns Hopkins Bulletin 21:230.
MAMMALIAN EPIPHYSIS CEREBRI 239
ing that puppies survived this operation much longer than adult
dogs. He suggests that “the puppy’s active pineal may secrete a
substance that to some slight extent takes the place, physiologically,
of his at present immature pituitary” p. 2003.
EXPERIMENTAL ( PHYSIOLOGICAL ) STUDIES
The experimental work has naturally occupied itself with in-
jections of pineal extract, and with attempts to extirpate the organ.
Injections of pineal extract were first made by von Cyon*®
(1903 and 1907) with the result of no effect on blood pressure and
of irregular alterations in the force and frequency of the heart-
beat, chiefly slowing it. He believed this effect due to the salts
of the calcareous concretions. He further regarded the pineal as
an organ designed to regulate mechanically, by contraction and re-
laxation, the pressure of the cerebrospinal fluid in the brain ven-
tricles and incidentally cerebral blood pressure. That the pos-
sible functional significance of pineal extract does not depend upon
the presence of the salts (calcium carbonate and phosphate) of
the conconcretions seems strongly indicated by the fact of their
increase with age, concomitant with the appearance of cytological
and histological degenerative alterations.
Dixon and Halliburton®® (1909) prepared in four different
ways extracts of the pineal organ of 125 adult sheep. Injections
were made intravenously into anaesthetized cats. They record a
slight transient fall of blood pressure. They conclude that their
work throws no light on the possible physiological action of the
pineal body in mammals.
Jordan and Eyster*’ (1911) performed similar experiments
with sheeps’ pineal extract on dog, cat, sheep and rabbit. They
record a uniform result of a slight fall of blood pressure, slight
improvement in the beat of the isolated cat’s heart, transient
diuresis, and a slight irregular respiratory effect.
The foregoing results are again, in part at least, the reverse
35. v. Cyon, E.—Zur physiologie der Zirbeldrtise. Archiv ftir die gesammte Phy-
siologie, 1903, p. 98, and Comptes rendus de 1’Académie des Sciences, 1907, 144, p. 868.
36. Dixon, W. E. and Halliburton, W. D.—Der Pinealkorper. Quar. Journ. of exp.
physiol., 1909, II, p. 283.
37. Jordan, H. E. and Eyster, J. A. E. (1911)—The Physiological Action of Ex-
tracts of the Pineal Body. Amer. Journ. of Physiol. 29:11.
240 H. E. JORDAN
of those obtained with extracts of the hypophysis (anterior por-
tion of pituitary body) and again suggests a compensatory or an-
tagonistic regulatory functional relationship. Kidd further sug-
gests pineal feeding and transplantation experiments. Extracts
should also be tried upon completely hypophysectomized puppies
to determine whether this might operate to prolong life.
Cytological study of the sheep’s pineal organ has convinced
me** that any possible secretory activity is limited to the young
animal, or possibly also to the foetus. Accordingly it follows, in
my opinion, that experimental work with extracts should be
confined to those from young material. Kidd*® urges the same
point, and suggests that the question be investigated with extracts
of the pineal of newly-born or very young rabbits, kittens, puppies
or guinea-pigs. The experiments, he suggests, should be performed
on two series of animals, namely (1) very young ones, and (2)
adults. “It is possible that in the case of the former a condition of
experimental hyperpinealismus might be induced; in the case of
adult animals there should be subsequent microscopical examina-
tion of their pituitary, thyroid, parathyroid, adrenals and genital
glands.” The last suggestion made in this quotation assumes a
close relationship between the pineal and the organs of internal
secretion, for which assumption there is no basis of convincing
histological or experimental data.
The association of hypopinealism with sexual precocity (a
symptom also of hyperpituitarism) may perhaps be explained on
the basis of the absence of an inhibitory (on pituitary growth) se-
cretion of the pineal; or possibly simply the absence of the ordi-
nary pressure prevalent during normal concomitant pineal and
pituitary development.
Extirpation experiments have thus far been successfully per-
formed in numbers only on rabbits. Exner and Boese*® (1910)
operated on 95, of which 22 survived, but only 6 lived to sexual
maturity. Loss of pineal in these six gave no evidence of any effect
on development or the appearance of sexual maturity.
38. loc. cit.
39 elocw Cit.
40. Exner and Boese (1910)—tteber Expérimentelle Extirpation des Glandula Pin-
ealis. Deut. Zeit. f. Chir. October.
MAMMALIAN EPIPHYSIS CEREBRI 241
Sarteschi*! (1910) studied the pineal in castrated animals (cer-
tain common mammals). He destroyed the organ by thermo-
cautery. Castration showed no effect. Neither did the destruction
by cautery give any noticeable effect. The pineal was removed in
11 rabbits. Only two survived the operation. The only result
recorded is emaciation. One is suspicious, however, that this may
have been a general post-operative condition rather than a specific
effect of pineal absence.
Cats and dogs are impracticable for this operation due to the
presence of an ossified tentorium, into a median notch of the lower
border of which the pineal organ fits.
From every standpoint (except expense) the sheep (lamb)
seems the most promising subject for this work. Numerous at-
tempts have been made by several investigators to remove this body
in the sheep but as yet without successful issue. As in cerebral sur-
gery generally, profuse hemorrhage obscures the field and renders
difficult the final step in the operation, i.e., clean and complete re-
moval. This is a prohibitory detail, however, which it seems pos-
sible ultimately to circumvent.
Future attempts to elucidate the functional significance of the
pineal body of mammals will find the most promising material in
extracts, and extirpation experiments, of lambs. The influence of
the extracts should be observed in young, old and hypophysec-
tomized animals (sheep).
To date, a conservative estimate of all the evidence indicates
very meagre, if any, functional activity, probably never essential
to life. The practical absence of a pineal body in the opossum
(Jordan**, 1911), adds further support to this conclusion. Biedl**
(1910), however, arrives at the conclusion that the pineal body is
an organ of internal secretion with metabolic significance limited
to the young. The clinical symptoms associated with pineal tumor
are probably to be interpreted as symptoms of pressure on the cor-
pora quadrigemina, or as due indirectly, through compression of
41. Sarteschi, U.—Richerche istologische sulla glandula pinealse. Folia Neuro
Biologica 4:6. Ref. Neurol. Centrbl. Aug. 1, 19.
42. Jordan, H. E. (1911)—-The microscopic anatomy of the epiphysis of the opos-
sum. Anat. Rec., vol. 5, no. 7.
43. Biedl, A. (1910)—Innere Sekretion, Berlin.
242 H. E. JORDAN
the aqueduct and consequent third ventricle hydrocephalus, to dis-
turbance of the pituitary body. The slight disagreement regarding
histological details probably finds its explanation in the fact that
the pineal body, in common with rudimentary organs generally, is
the seat of regressive changes, and of some degree of teratomatous
alterations**.
Anatomical Laboratory, University of Virginia.
44. Other recent papers not directly accessible dealing with the pineal organ are
(a) Anglade et Ducos, 1908, Note préliminaire sur l’anatomie et la physiologie de la
glande pinéale. Sociéte d’Anat. et de Physiol. de Bordeaux, Proces. Dec. 14. (b)
Calasescu et Urechia, 1910, Les cellules acidophiles de glande pinéale, Compt. rend.
Soc. Biol. T. 68.; (c) Krabbe—Sur la Glande Pinéale chez l'homme. Nouvelle Icono-
graphic de la Salpétriere, Paris, 24 Année, no. 4. July, August 1911, p. 257-272.
SUMMARIES IN MICRO-BIOLOGY
For some months the Secretary has been planning to secure for this Journal and its
Department of Summaries, a series of papers from biologists dealing with the chief groups
of microscopic plants and animals. It has not been the purpose to present a complete
survey of any of the groups. The wish has been rather to bring together in one article
a statement of the following things:—general biology, the method of finding, the methods
of capture and of keeping alive and cultivating in the laboratory; how best to study; the
general technic; the most accessible literature; and a brief outline of the classification,
with keys for the identification of at least the more representative genera and species of
the micro-organisms likely to be found by the beginning students in the United States.
It has been felt that the getting together of such data as this, while not a contribution
to science, would be a contribution especially to isolated workers and to teachers and stu-
dents in the high schools and smaller colleges.
A paper has already appeared treating the aquatic Oligochetes. The following is
the second paper of the series. It is proposed to have such synopses from time to time
until the more common American species of such groups as the following have been
covered: The Blue-green Algae, Conjugating Algae, Diatoms, other Green Algae,
Zygomycetes, Downy Mildews, Yeasts, Powdery Mildews, Hyphomycetes, Smuts, Rusts;
Rhizopods, Infusoria, Turbeliaria, Bryozoa, Water Mites, Entomostraca, etc.—[Editor.]
THE MELANCONIALES*
By C. W. EpGERTON
The Melanconiales, one of the orders of the large group of
fungi generally known as the Fungi Imperfecti, consists of more
than forty genera and several hundred described species. These
are microscopic forms and many of them are as yet but little known
to science. The genera in this group, as well as in the other groups
of the imperfect fungi, are generally spoken of as “form” genera
because the species, for the most part, are but the conidial stages of
some of the higher fungi such as the ascomycetes. As the perfect
or sexual stages are either not known or but rarely seen, it is neces-
sary to classify these forms by the stages that commonly develop.
And this results in a classification which is strictly artificial, many
forms which would be widely separated in a natural classification
being placed side by side in the ‘‘form” genera.
This group of fungi is a very important one both from the
economic and scientific standpoints, and doubtless will interest
some. Our lack of knowledge of many of the forms, however,
makes the presentation of the subject rather difficult and all that can
be done is to briefly describe a few of the species that are common
in this country and also note the various problems which make the
group particularly interesting.
Collection of Material for Study
The majority of these fungi are parasitic on higher plants,
producing leaf spots, lesions on the stems, or rots of the fruits.
*This article is written by request. It is not meant to be technical in any way, it
being the desire of the author to treat the subject in such a way that it will interest
the teachers and students of biology in some of these lower forms of plant life that are
usually not known outside of the larger colleges and universities. Our knowledge of
many of these forms is not very definite and it would be impossible at the present time
to enumerate and describe all the forms that are known to occur in this country. In
this article, an attempt has been made to describe the more important genera and also
to describe briefly a few of the more common species. In the genera, Gloeosporium and
Colletotrichum, more species have been. enumerated than in the other genera, as more
work has been done with these and our knowledge is more definite.
244 C. W. EDGERTON
Many of them are very common and it is not usually difficult to
pick up some of them. The spots or lesions, however, are not
usually distinct from those caused by other parasitic fungi and it
is not always possible to be sure of one of them in the field, espe-
cially by a person who has not had much experience in collecting
them. After a person becomes better acquainted with some of the
different forms, he can often tell whether a fungus belongs to this
group by means of a good hand lens, though he can not always be
sure. For the beginner who wishes to become acquainted with this
group, leaves showing dead areas or spots, stems with blackened or
sunken lesions, and fruits or vegetables with spots or rots should
be collected. These can be brought into the laboratory and studied.
Examination and Study of Material Collected
For the examination of the material, a good microscope with
2/3 and 1/6 objectives, a good hand razor, a few spear shaped
needles, and a few moist chambers are necessary. Thin cross sec-
tions through the fruiting pustules should be made with the razor
and these should be mounted in water and examined. With the
low power objective, the characters of the fruiting pustule can be
made out and one can readily tell whether the fungus belongs to
the Melanconiales or some other order. For the study of the other
characters such as the spores, coniliophores, and setae, the high
power objective is necessary. A person who has studied the group
for some time can generally tell whether a fungus belongs in this
group or not by merely scraping off some of the pustules and ex-
amining them in a crushed mount. He is able to do this, however,
because he knows the shape and appearance of the spores and
setae. If there is anything peculiar in the mount, he must also
make sections for examination.
These crushed mounts or sections can be preserved by run-
ning a little 50% glycerin tinted with eosin under the cover slips.
These preserved mounts are often very useful for comparison
when other forms are collected.
Often material that is brought in from the field shows the fun-
gus only partially developed, or else the spores have all been washed
off by recent rains. If the material is in this condition, it can be
placed in a moist chamber for a day or so and examined again.
THE MELANCONIALES 245
Many of the forms will develop well in this manner. Often also
the moist chamber comes in handy in preserving’ the material over
night or even longer when an immediate examination is impossible.
If a thorough study is being made of any of these fungi, micro-
tome sections are often not only helpful but essential. With these,
the development of the pustules, the finer characters of the coni-
diophores and underlying stroma, and the condition of the diseased
host cells can be made out. For a killing solution, the writer gen-
erally uses Gilson’s Fixing Solution*. This is an alcoholic solution
and the spores are held in place in the pustules. With the aqueous
fixing solutions, the spores are generally washed out of the pustules.
Any of the ordinary stains can be used, the writer generally using
Iron Alum Haematoxylin with Congo Red as a counter stain.
Culture of the Fungi
A great deal can be found out concerning these fungi by merely
examining the material collected in the field, but if this can be sup-
plemented with some culture work, the study will become more
interesting and instructive. If some of the apparatus and materials
of the bacteriological laboratory are available, such as sterilizers,
petri dishes and test tubes, the fungi should be cultured and their
growth watched. Most of the fungi grow well on any of the ordi-
nary culture media, though media made from potato tubers, bean
pods, or corn meal are perhaps the best. These forms can be isol-
ated by either making dilution cultures with the spores, or by trans-
ferring some diseased material from the host plant after the outside
tissues are stripped off or cut away with a sterile knife. A large
majority of these fungi grow and fruit well on culture media.
The Orders of the Imperfect Fungi
In the classification of most plants, whether high or low in the
plant kingdom, the characters of the sexual stage are generally
used, but in the Fungi Imperfecti, the sexual stages are so often
unknown or so infrequently seen, that other characters must be
used. As the conidial stage of these forms is the one most often
*Gilson’s fixing solution: 95% alcohol 42cc., water 60cc., glacial acetic acid 18cc.,
nitric acid (conc) 2cc., corrosive sublimate (sat. sol.) llcc. The material is left in the
fixer 6-24 hours and washed directly in 70% alcohol.
246 C. W. EDGERTON
seen, the characters of this stage are the ones which must be used
if the fungi are to be satisfactorily separated and classified.
The Fungi Imperfecti are divided into three orders, the char-
acters of the conidial fructifications being the ones that are used to
separate them. These orders are as follows:
Sphaeropsidales. In this order, the conidia are borne on simple
or branched conidiophores within pycnidia or within cavities in a
stroma. The pycnidia are quite variable in shape, size, texture, and
color, and they may be open to the surface by an ostiole or they may
be entirely closed.
Melancomales. In this order, the spores are borne on short,
simple or branched conidiophores which arise from a more or less
well developed stroma. The fruiting pustule, or acervulus, con-
sisting of the stroma, conidiophores, and spores, usually develops
underneath the spidermis or cortex of the host plant and later
breaks through to the surface, though this is not always the case.
Hyphomycetes. In this group, the conidia are borne in various
ways, but generally on conidiophores arising directly from the
mycelial threads. This group includés all of the forms that cannot
be classified in the first two orders.
The Acervulus
As can be seen, the presence of the acervulus is the one dis-
tinguishing character of the Melanconiales. Beyond this one char-
acter, there is nothing common in the group. And as the acervulus
is not a definite structure, it is not always a good separating char-
acter. Forms exist which are more or less on the boundary line
between the Melanconiales and the Sphaeropsidales, and also be-
tween the Melanconiales and the Hyphomycetes. Furthermore
there are forms which could be placed in two of the orders and
some in even all three, as different methods of spore development
occur at different times in their development.
The shape and appearance of the acervulus varies considerably
even within the same species. Figures 1 and 2 represent two types
which often occur. Figure 1 was drawn from sections from a to-
mato that was affected with a Gloeosporium, while figure 2 was
from an apple also affected with a Gloeosporium. This difference,
however, is not a specific one as both types frequently develop on
THE MELANCONIALES 247
the same host. Figure 2, as a rule, represents an older condition
than figure 1. These figures show the main characteristics of the
iti
u
Att
FIG. 2
Fig. 1. Acervulus of Gloeosporium fructigenum from the fruit of tomato
Fig. 2. Acervulus of Gloeosporium fructigenum from apple.
acervulus of any of the genera, showing the ruptured epidermis,
the fungus stroma at the base of the acervulus and the conidiophores
and spores.
While all of the members of the Melanconiales develop the
spores in acervuli, this does not mean that they are related. There
are many forms possessing this structure which are known to be
widely separated and would be placed in widely separated groups
if a natural classification were used. Many have looked on it as pe-
culiar that these divergent forms would have the same method of
conidial formation. But when we study the development of the
acervulus and understand its probable origin, it does not seem so
peculiar. It is certain that these fungi did not all originate from a
common form and it must follow that this method of fruiting must
have been developed by a number of different forms independently.
All of these fungi which grow within the tissues of higher
plants, must be able in some way to come to the surface for spore
formation. The single mycelial threads of most of them are unable
to rupture the epidermis of the host plant and some other method
must be used. In the Melanconiales, a number of fungus threads
develop underneath the epidermis, form a fungus stroma, and be-
gin to produce a dense layer of short conidiophores. While a single
fungus thread can not develop a great deal of strength by itself,
this whole mass of fungus tissue by an outward growth, can exert
enough strength to rupture the epidermal or cortical tissue and thus
come to the surface for spore formation. There is no great regu-
larity about these acervuli in shape and size or in the amount of
stromatic tissue developed; in fact an acervulus is really nothing
248 C. W. EDGERTON
but a rather dense mass of fungus tissue and not a definite fruiting
body as this term is-applied to other forms of fructification. Know-
ing the structure and development of the acervulus, it is then not
difficult to understand why so many different forms have this meth-
od of spore production. This form of fruiting is very simple, and
perhaps is the easiest method which could be developed by the
forms which grow within the tissues of living plants. The mere
fact that many of these forms will grow like hyphomycetes produc-
ing the spores directly on the mycelium when there is sufficient
moisture to allow them to grow on the surface of the culture me-
dium or affected plant, shows that the acervulus is not always a
definite structure but rather a development of tissue to bring the
fungus to the surface.
The Perfect Stages
A number of species of the Melanconiales have been shown in
recent years to have ascogenous stages in their life history. Strictly
speaking, these forms should not be considered as members of this
order and should be classified among the ascomycetes, but for the
sake of convenience, they are still often considered as members of
this group. The perfect stages are only rarely seen, and if an at-
tempt is made to determine a species, it must be done with the im-
perfect characters alone.
Some of our most important and common forms of this order
are now known to have ascogenous stages. In some of these, the
ascomycete fructification develops as a winter stage, that is, it de-
velops on the dead portions of the host plant during the winter
months. Examples of such forms are the Gloeosporiums from the
sycamore and currant, the Marssonia from the walnut, and the
Myxosporium from the dogwood. In other forms, the season
seems to have nothing to do with the development of the ascogenous
stage, this being developed along with the conidial or immediately
following it. This group includes many of our common Gloeos-
poriums and Colletotrichums such as are found on apples, cotton
bolls, ete.
Many different ascogenous genera have been connected with
different members of the Melanconiales, and many of these are
THE MELANCONIALES 249
widely separated in our present classification of the ascomycetes.
Among these are the following:
Gnomonia, connected with forms in the genera Gloeosporium
and Marssonia.
Glomerella (figure 3), connected with forms in the genera
Gloeosporium and Colletotrichum.
Pseudopeziza, connected with a Gloeosporium.
Neofabrea, connected with a Gloeosporium.
Sphaerella, connected with a Gloeosporium.
Diaporthe, connected with forms in the genus Myxosporium.
Fig. 3. Glomerella gossypii, the perfect stage of Colletotrichum gossypu.
Many other ascogenous forms have also been found growing
with members of the Melanconiales, and the probability is that they
are connected, though the absolute proof is still wanting. Among
these are the following:
Trochila, with forms in the genera Gloeosporium and Mars-
sonia.
Anthostomella, with Myxosporium species.
Pseudovalsa, with Coryneum species.
While there are doubtless other ascogenous genera connected
with forms in the Melanconiales, these are sufficient to show that
this group is made up of a large number of widely related forms,
and that the classification does not show relationship among them.
Characters of the Genera
According to Engler and Prantl, there are forty-six genera in
the order Melanconiales. These are separated mostly on spore char-
acters, though other characters such as the presence or absence of
setae, or the presence or lack of branching of the conidiophores
are sometimes used. A great number of these genera, however, are
250 C. W. EDGERTON
not important. Many of them have only from one to a few species
and these are very rare. Many of them are also but very little
known. There are only about eight genera that are really important
and common and these only will be considered in this article. A
key for distinguishing these genera follows:
I. Conidia hyaline, one-celled, globose to oblong.
1. Fungi generally growing on leaves, fruits or tender stems.
(1). Acervuli with but few or no setae........ Gloeosporium.
(2). Acervuli with setae, generally abundant. .Colletotrichum.
2. Fungi generally growing on woody branches or trees or shrubs.
(1). Spores straight or slightly curved........ Myxosporum.
II. Conidia dark, one-celled, Elebose or oblong, solitary on the conidio-
PHOKES : sSrieh esse eee eC eT Eee ee eee Melanconium.
III. Conidia hyaline, two-celled, fe growing on leaves...... Marssonia.
IV. Conidia dark, two to several septate, oblong to cylindric.
1. Condia with cilia or appendages at the apex........ Pestalozzia.
2. Conidia without cilia, oblong or elongate............. Coryneum.
V. Conidia hyaline, long filiform, generally continuous....Cylindrosporium.
As may be seen from the key, the characters separating some
of the genera are not clear cut and distinct. The differences be-
tween Gloeosporium and Colletotrichum, or Gloeosporium and
Myxosporium are not always clear. In fact, some individual spe-
cies may be placed in any one of the three genera. However, as
most of these forms will finally be placed in the genera of ascomy-
cetes to which they really belong, their position among the imper-
fect fungi is not really important.
Specific Differences
Before taking up the common species of the Melanconiales, it
may be well to call attention to some of the difficulties ahead of
the person who tries to determine these forms accurately. Up until
the past few years, botanists as a rule determined the species in this
group to a large extent by the hosts upon which they were found
growing. If a form was found on a new host, it was usually de-
termined as a new species. While some of these forms possess
morphological characters that distinguish them from other species,
we have a large number of others which cannot be told apart by
morphological characters. During the past few years, a number
of botanists have been working on this group and it has been found
that a number of these described forms are identical. This has
THE MELANCONIALES 251
been proven by cross inoculation experiments. It has also been
found that some forms, though morphologically very similar to
others, cannot be successfully inoculated into the hosts of the other
forms. This makes them distinct from a physiological standpoint
at least. Whether these should be considered as good species is
still an undecided question. In this article, these forms are left as
distinct species and they are separated from each other by host
characters alone.
Furthermore, a person is liable to pick up forms, especially
from the genera Gloeosporium and Colletotrichum, which do not
seem to be described, or at least are not described from the host
on which he found them. It is difficult to determine these beyond
the genus and it is perhaps better not to try to determine the spe-
cies, as it is almost impossible to make sure of their idenfity with-
out carrying on cross inoculation experiments.
In this article, only the common and better known forms are
included. It is possible that all of these are not good species, but
it seems better to keep them separate until they are proved to be
identical with other forms.
THE GENUS GLOEOSPORIUM
The genus Gloeosporium, with some 400 described species, is
the largest one of the order, and contains many forms which are
very common. Some of our worst diseases of plants are produced
by members of this genus, the loss produced by them running up
into millions of dollars each year.
In this genus, the acervuli generally develop underneath the
epidermis or cortex of leaves, stems, or fruits and become erump-
ent. The spores are hyaline and either straight or curved. They
are typically one-celled, though some two-celled spores are met
with in some of the forms. The conidiophores are short and much
crowded. A few setae are sometimes present, though usually not
abundant.
There are a number of very common forms and a large num-
ber which are not well known. Besides the described forms there
are a large number of others on various hosts, some of which are
distinct enough to be good species. The forms commonly met with
in this country follow:
252 C. W. EDGERTON
Key to the Species of the Genus Gloeosporium
I. Spores straight or nearly so, oblong or cylindrical.
1. Spores relatively large, usually more than Ioy in length.
(1). Spores exuding from the acervuli in slimy pink masses.
a. Found on apple, pear, quince, grapes, fig, tomato,
pepper, sweet pea, maple leaves, raspberry canes,
and perhaps other fruits and stems. G. fructigenum.
b. Found on greenhouse plants, very close to the pre-
ceding species and perhaps identical...G. cinctum.
c. Found on privet, very close to preceding species.
PTR IMEE EL ae kane eee ee sc G. cingulatum.
(2). Spores in mass some other color than pink.
a. Found on sycamore and oaks; ascogenous stage,
Gnromonta neste ae eee ee G. nervisequum.
2. Spores smaller, generally less than Io long.
(1). Found on blackberry and raspberry canes....G. venetum.
(2). Found on fruit and branches of grape..G. ampelophagum.
(3); Found on ‘cranberry “iruite oe. se-e e eee G. minus.
Il. Spores more or less curved.
1. Found on clover and alfalfa; spores fusoid....... G. caulivorum.
2. Found on currant leaves; spores sickle shaped; ascogenous stage,
Psendopevizay. a a2 0s Ne Se woke Sonic Serine erase ee G. ribis.
3. Found on branches and fruits of apple in the northwest; spores
decidedly curved; ascogenous stage, Neofabrea.
FUT ET TR PRL OLE ee ts: G. malicorticts.
4. Found on cactus in the southwest; spores lunate; ascogenous
stage, ‘Sphiaerellay® 52) cis. vereias ehtkae stones tears ed oe G. lunatum.
Description of Common Species
Gloeosporium fructigenum Berk. This fungus is quite com-
mon on a large number of hosts though perhaps more frequently
seen on the apple. The loss caused by this fungus is very great.
The fungus attacks the fruits, branches and leaves of the different
hosts. Affected fruits show spots or a general decay; affected
stems, cankers or lesions ; and affected leaves, either spots or a gen-
eral blight. The acervuli develop as little papillae over the surface
of the diseased portion of the host plant. The spores are produced
very abundantly and ooze out of the acervuli in slimy pink masses.
They are oblong to cylindric, often slightly narrower near the
center than towards the ends, hyaline, one-celled, and about
12-20 x 4-6 in size. When fresh, a clear nucleus is generally seen
near the center of the spore. A few scattering setae are also some-
THE MELANCONIALES 253
times present in the acervuli. The ascogenous or perithecial stage
develops occasionally along with the conidial stage on the host or
immediately following it, and it develops quite commonly on arti-
ficial media in pure cultures. The ascospores are generally slightly
curved but in other ways they are very similar to the conidia. Since
the discovery of the perfect stage, the fungus has gone by the name
of Glomerella fructigena or Glomerella rufomaculans; the former
name being the correct one according to our present rules of nomen-
clature.
Glocosporium cinctum B, & C. This fungus is found on orchids
and other plants commonly grown in greenhouses. The morpholog-
ical characters are practically identical with the preceding species
and it is possible that the two are the same. However, not enough
cross inoculation experiments have been carried on to make per-
fectly sure of their identity and it seems better to leave them separ-
ated. The ascogenous stage is often seen and is now known as
Glomerella cincta (Stoneman) Sp. & v. Schr.
Gloeosporium cingulatum Atk. This fungus grows on the
smaller branches of privet, causing them to die and blight. The
characters of the conidial and ascogenous stages are practically
identical with Glocosporium fructigenum. Since the discovery of
the ascogenous stage, the fingus has been known as Glomerella
cingulata (Stoneman) Sp. & v. Schr.
Glocosparium nervisequum (Fuckel) Sacc. This species is
quite common on sycamore and oaks of the species, alba, velutina,
and coccinea. On these trees, it occurs both on the twigs and leaves.
On sycamore leaves, it first attacks the tissue along the veins, caus-
ing it to turn brown and die. It was from these dead strips along
the veins that it received its name. It also affects the young twigs
and kills them, causing the leaves to wilt and die. The oak leaves,
as a rule, are affected in spots, though occasionally the disease runs
along the veins. In all of the affected tissue, the acervuli develop
abundantly. The acervuli are light in color and from 100-300, in
diameter. The conidia, which are about 10-14 x 4-6p in size, de-
velop in abundance on the conidiophores and in moist weather or
when the leaves are placed in. moist chamber ooze out of the acer-
vuli in creamy white masses or strings. On the twigs, the acervulli
254 C. W. EDGERTON
develop in a similar manner to those on the leaves. This stage on
the twigs, if it were the only one known, would place the fungus
in the genus Myxosporium, where it has been described as My-vos-
porium valsoideum (Sacc.) All., and Myxosporium platanicolum
E. & E. The ascogenous stage which develops on the old leaves on
the ground during the winter months, is known as Gnomonia
veneta (Sacc. & Speg.) Kleb. The characters of this stage are
very different from those of Glomerella, the ascospores being two-
ceiled, with one of the cells several times as large as the other.
Gloeosporium venetum Speg. This fungus occurs on the leaves
and canes of blackberries and raspberries and is quite com-
mon in the northern states where it often does considerable
damage. The disease appears in the form of spots on the canes,
these at first being purplish in color but later become grey and
sunken. On the leaves, small dead spots develop. The acervuli,
which form quite abundantly in the older spots, are small, averag-
ing about 50-150p in diameter. The spores are hyaline, one-celled,
and small, generally only about 6-8 long. The fungus grows very
poorly on artificial media and is not always easy to isolate. The
4-7 x 3-4p. The ascogenous stage is not known.
Gloeosporium ampelophagum (Pass.) Sacc. This fungus oc-
curs on the fruit and twigs of the grape and is well distributed
throughout the United States. On the fruit, sunken spots develop
which have more or less of a bird’s eye appearance. The central
paler portion of the spot is surrounded by a reddish zone which is
generally quite characteristic. On the twigs, the spots are similar
to those on the fruit, except that they are elongated in the direc-
tion of the main axis of the twig. The acervuli develop quite
abundantly over the surface of the spots. The spores are hyaline,
generally elliptical to oblong in shape, and small, usually about
4-7 X 3-4u. The ascogenous stage is not known.
Gloeosporium minus Shear. The fungus occurs sparingly on
the leaves and fruit of the cranberry. Definite spots are not formed,
though the tissue is slightly brown around the acervuli. The
acervuli are small and scattering. The conidia, which are about
6-9 X 3-4p in size, form in a pale pinkish glutinous mass at the top
of the acervulus. No ascogenous stage is known.
THE MELANCONIALES 255
Gloeosportum caulivorum Kirchner. This fungus is quite
abundant on clover in certain sections of the United States, espe-
cially in the West Virginia-Pennsylvania region. Long, dark col-
ored, sunken spots develop on the stems and petioles of the host,
these often causing the death of the portions of the plant above.
The smali acervuli develop abundantly in the sunken spots. The
conidia are hyaline, cylindrical to fusoid, curved, and 12-22x
3.5-5.5u in size. No ascogenous stage is known.
Gloeosporium ribis (Lib.) Mont. & Desm. This fungus oc-
curs quite abundantly on leaves of the cultivated currant in various
parts of the United States and often does considerable damage by
defoliating the plants. The dead spots which develop on the leaves
are brownish to blackish with a somewhat lighter center and are
generally about 1-2 mm. in diameter. The acervuli develop on the
upper side of the leaf. The spores (Figure 4) are hyaline, one-
FIG. 4
Fig. 4. Spores of Gloeosporium ribis
celled, sickle-shaped, and are about 15-20 x 6-8u in size. They ooze
out of the acervuli in small light colored masses. The ascogenous
stage has been found and is now known as Pseudopeziza ribis Kleb.
Glocosporium malicorticis Cordley. This species occuring on
fruit and branches of the apple in the north Pacific states, often
does considerable damage, causing perhaps the worst disease of
apples in that section. On the branches and twigs, the disease does
the most damage as it causes the formation of large cankers fol-
lowed by the death of the portions of the host above the parts
affected. The cankers are slightly darker in color than the healthy
portions and somewhat sunken. On the fruit, the fungus causes
the development of light brown rotten spots which may gradually
spread over the whole surface. On both the wood and the fruit,
the acervuli develop and produce spores in abundance. The spores
are very striking in appearance on account of their shape. Some
of them are bent into nearly. a complete circle. The ascogenous
256 C. W. EDGERTON
stage has been found and described as Neofabrea malicorticis
Jackson.
Glocosporium lunatum E. & E. This species occurs abundantly
on certain species of cactus in the southwest, forming circular spots
1-3 cm. in diameter. The acervuli are abundant, 60-125 in diame-
ter. The conidia are lunate fusoid, 12-20 x 2-3, often one septate.
This species is not a typical Gloeosporium on account of the spores
being often septate. Possibly the genus Marssonia would fit it bet-
ter than Gloeosporium. However, the ascogenous stage has been
found, and the genus to which the conidial stage belongs is not really
important. The ascogenous stage has been described as Sphaerella
opuntiae E. & E.
THE GENUS COLLETOTRICHUM
The genus Colletotrichum, with some 80 or more described
species, is very similar to Gloeosporium. The only difference be-
tween the two genera is in the abundance of setae in the acervuli.
The species in this genus seem to fall into groups; those with
straight spores and those with curved spores. Many of the
straight spored forms are very closely related to Gloeosporium fruc-
tigenum, perhaps some of them being identical. The forms with
curved spores, however, are very distinct. This genus also con-
tains some very bad disease producers, nearly all of those described
below causing serious trouble. Mention will only be made of the
more common described forms, and these will be separated by the
hosts upon which they are found growing, as it is impossible to
separate them by morphological characters.
Key to the Commoner Species of Colletotrichum
I. Spores straight or nearly so.
Tt. Found on cotton im southern states...... 005 cee ens C. gossypu.
2. Found on watermelon and cucumber.............. C. lagenarium.
ai) Round ions beats 4-.bse s/o jotnstestee de eee sei ets C. lindemuthianum.
4... Found on clover and salfaliian. son. siciefsirsin~ incl -/d jefe C. trifolit.
&. Pound on snapdrason . ois..c.cje is ers acle jefe eraie ais -yotekelol= C. antirrhini.
Gre Pound OnAcCiLEUS mEntltstcr nite ec ieeier ts cece C. glocosporioides.
II. Spores curved.
Py houndvonssiganr Canessccies slots tees chink heer C. falcatum.
2. Found on Johnson Grass, sorghum, and related plants..C. lineola.
3. Found on grasses and cereals... 3). 2-0-0 secs oe ins C. cereale.
THE MELANCONIALES 257
Description of Common Species
Colletotrichum gossypii Southworth. This species is found on
the various parts of the cotton plant, though it is seen more fre-
quently on the bolls. It at first produces sunken discolored spots
on the bolls, but these generally increase in size so that a general
rot is produced. The spores are produced very abundantly in the
acervuli, often the whole surface of the spot being covered with a
slimy pink mass of them. The spores (Figure 5) which are iden-
tical with those of Gloecosporium fructigenum, develop both on the
FIG. 5
Fig. 5. Spores and setae of Colletotrichum gossypu
conidiophores and setae. The setae are usually abundant. The
ascogenous stage has been found and is now known as Glomerella
gossypu Edg.
Colletotrichum lagenarium (Pass.) Ell. & Hals. This fungus
is found on the fruits and leaves of such plants as cucumbers and
watermelons. Watersoaked, sunken spots which later become
covered with the slimy spore masses, form on the fruits and often
ruin them. The morphological characters of this fungus are prac-
tically the same as those of Gloeosporium fructigenum. No asco-
genous stage has as yet been found. |
Colletotrichum lindemuthianum (Sacc. & Magn.) Scrib. This
fungus, found on the pods and leaves of the cultivated bean, causes
the much dreaded bean anthracnose disease. Large, sunken, dark
colored, slimy ulcers develop on the bean pods rendering them
worthless. Morphological characters of the fungus quite similar to
Gloeosporium fructigenum, the main difference being the darker
color of the bean fungus. Physiologically, however, this fungus is
quite distinct. The ascogenous stage, belonging to the genus Glo-
merella, has been found in pure cultures but it has not been named.
Colletotrichum trifolti Bain. This fungus forms dark colored
spots on the stems and petioles of clover and alfalfa, often doing a
258 C. W. EDGERTON
great deal of damage. Morphological characters similar to Gloeos-
porium fructigenum. The ascogenous stage has been reported but
has not been described or named but probably belongs to the genus
Glomerella.
Colletotrichum antirrhini Stewart. This fungus occurs on the
cultivated snapdragon and some related wild plants producing dark
colored lesions on the stems and petioles. Morphological charac-
ters similar to Glocosporium fructigenum. The ascogenous stage
has as yet not been found.
Colletotrichum gloeosporioides Penz. This fungus, found on
various citrus fruits such as oranges, lemons, and pomelos, produces
a disease of the fruits, leaves, and twigs. Spots are formed on the
fruits which are often followed by a general rot. The leaves are
either affected in spots or along the margins. The twigs are also
killed back from the tips. The morphological characters of the
fungus are similar to those of Glocosporium fructigenum. No asco-
genous stage has been reported.
Colletotrichum falcatum Went. This fungus is found on the
leaves and stalks of sugar cane in the southern states, where it often
does considerable damage. Spots up to one to two feet long de-
velop on the midribs of the leaves. These spots are at first red in
color but later turn to white or gray at the center. The fungus also
grows on the inside of the cane stalk. The tissue is at first turned
red but later horizontal white spots appear within the red. The
fungus fruits abundantly on the older spots on the leaves and oc-
casionally on the stalks. To the naked eye, the acervuli appear as
small black pustules. The acervuli always contain setae in abund-
FIG. 6
Fig. 6. Spores of Colletotrichum falcatum
ance. The spores (Figure 6) are hyaline, curved, somewhat
pointed at one end and more rounded at the other, 24-32 x 6-7p.
The spores when fresh show a clear nucleus near the center. No
ascogenous stage has been found.
THE MELANCONIALES 259
Colletotrichum lineola Corda. This fungus is found on the
leaves and to some extent on the seeds of such plants as Johnson
grass, broom corn and sorghum. Bright red spots develop very
abundantly on the leaves, these being covered with the black acer-
vuli. Morphological characters are very similar to those of Col-
letetrichum falcatum, though this fungus cannot be satisfactorily
inoculated into sugar cane. No ascogenous stage has been found
ious cereals and grasses in various sections of the United States
as yet.
Colletotrichum cereale Manns. This fungus is found on var-
affecting various parts of the host plants, though perhaps more
common in the flowering parts. It often causes a shrinkage and
shriveling of the grains. The morphological characters of the
fungus are very similar to those of Colletotrichum falcatum, though
the fungus is probably physiologically distinct. No ascogenous
stage has as yet been found.
THE GENUS MYXOSPORIUM
The genus Myxosporium, with about 90 described species,
contains a few species that are fairly common in the United States.
The characters distinguishing this genus from Gloeosporium are
not always clear cut. The Myxosporium species generally grow on
woody branches, while the Gloeosporium species on fruits, leaves,
and tender branches. But there are a number of species which
grow on both woody branches and fruits, such as Gloeosporium
fructigenum and Gloeosporium malicorticis. It seems best to re-
strict the genus Myxosporium to those forms that grow only on
woody branches. Some of the species of Myxosporium are para-
sitic while others are only saprophytic.
In the genus Myxosporium, the acervulus usually develops
underneath from one to several layers of cells of the host plant and
then becomes erumpent. The conidia, which are one-celled, hya-
line, and straight or slightly curved, are produced singly on the
short, simple crowded conidiophores. There are a few well known
species and many that are but little known. As only a few of these
forms will be mentioned, no attempt will be made to separate them
by a key.
260 C. W. EDGERTON
Description of Species
Myxosporium corticolum Edg. This fungus occurs very
abundantly on branches and trunks of apples and pears in the north-
eastern states. It is principally a disease of the bark tissue and does
not extend to the cambium. Slightly sunken cankers are formed
which are at first smooth but later become cracked and checked.
The acervuli, which are about 1-2 mm. in diameter, develop under
four or five layers of bark cells. The spores are straight, cylindri-
cal, hyaline, 18-32 x 6-Qu. These ooze out of the acervuli in white
strings or masses.
Myxosporium coloratum (Peck) Sacc. This fungus is found
is found on the branches of the yellow poplar (Liriodendron). It
is a very striking species as the spores ooze out of the acervuli in
reddish masses. The acervuli are small and appear as little papillae
over the surface of the bark. The spores are hyaline, straight or
curved, 12-18 x 5-8p.
Myxosporium mtidum B. & C. This fungus is found on the
branches of dogwood (Cornus alternifolia) and is very common in
the northeastern states. The acervuli are small, about 40-60p, but
abundant on the dead portions of the host, appearing as small yel-
low papillae. They develop under several layers of the host cells.
The spores, which are hyaline, straight, 9-12 x 3-5, are produced
very abundantly and ooze out in yellow masses. The ascogenous
fungus Diaporthe albocarnis E. & E. appears on the diseased twigs
in the late winter and, as has been proven by some cultural experi-
ments, belongs to the Myxosporium.
Myxosporium ulmi (Oud.) Sacc. This fungus is occasion-
ally found on the dead branches of the elm. The acervuli appear
as little papillae over the surface of the bark. The conidia are
hyaline, aval or obovate, 14-19 x 6-8p.
THE GENUS MELANCONIUM
The genus Melanconium, consisting of over 100 described
species contains a few common well known species, but most of
them have been but little studied. The characters of this genus
approach quite closely to those of the genus Gloeosporium with the
exception of the color of the spores. While Gloeosporium spores
are hyaline, Melanconium spores are dark colored. Setae are also
THE MELANCONIALES 261
lacking, and the spores are typically straight. Only two species
will be mentioned in this discussion. While there are a number of
others described from woody branches of trees and shrubs in the
United States, these are mostly uncommon or but little known.
Description of Species
Melanconium fuligineum (Scribn. & Viala) Cav. This fungus
occurs on the fruit and perhaps the leaves of the cultivated grape,
especially in the southern states. The fruit rots and dries up on
the vines. The acervuli appear as small papillae over the fruit.
The spores are slightly smoky in appearance, elliptical to oblong,
8-12 x 3.5-54. There seems to be some confusion regarding this
fungus and Gloeosporium fructigenum on account of some similar-
ity between the two. The spores of the Melanconium, however,
are smaller and generally more pointed than those of the Gloeos-
porium and when mature show the smoky appearance.
Melanconium sacchari Massee. This fungus is found on dead
pieces of sugar cane, and also occasionally on the living cane, in the
Southern states. It produces the well known “Rind Disease” which
is very serious in some places in the tropics. Sugar cane stalks
affected with this fungus dry out rapidly, and the rather large black
acervuli develop very abundantly on the rind tissue especially
around the nodes. The spores (Figure 7) are dark brown, oval to
@ @@
Sp %
BIGAy
Fig. 7. Spores of Melanconium sacchari
cylindrical, often guttulate, 10-12 x 4-6u. The spores ooze out of
the acervuli in black glistening masses or in long black strings, these
sometimes being several centimeters long.
THE GENUS MARSSONIA
The genus Marssonia consists of about 80 described species,
some of which are very common and well known. Most of the
species in this genus are parasitic on leaves. This genus is in many
ways very similar to Gloeosporium, the only real difference is that
the spores are two-celled instead of continuous. The spores are
262 C. W. EDGERTON
hyaline, stright or curved, and are borne on short crowded coni-
diophores in the acervulus. The different described species have
never been worked over carefully, so only a few of the better
known ones will be mentioned in this article.
Description of Species
Marssonia castagnet (Desm. and Mont.) Sacc. This fungus
occurs very commonly on the leaves of the white poplar in the
United States. The leaves are sometimes affected so seriously that
many of them are shed. The spots formed, are somewhat circular
and dark colored. A few small acervuli develop near the center
of each spot, the spores oozing out of them in more or less whitish
masses. The conidia (Figure 8) are hyaline, oblong clavate, slightly
FIG. 8
Fig. 8. Spores of Marssonia castagnei
constricted at the septum, 18-25 x 8-10on. The ascogenous fungus,
Trochila populorum Desm., is often found during the late winter in
the old spots on the leaves and is probably the perfect stage of this
Marssonia.
Marssonia juglandis (Lib.) Sacc. This fungus forms small
circular or irregular spots on the leaves of walnut and butternut
and is quite widely distributed throughout the United States. The
conidia are fusoid, curved, with the apex somewhat pointed,
20-25 x5. The ascogenous stage has been found and is known
as Gnomonia leptostyla (Fr.) Ces. and De Not.
Marssonia martini Sacc. and Ellis. This fungus forms small
circular spots on the leaves of some species of oaks. The acervuli
develop abundantly near the center of the spots. The spores are
fusoid, 12-15 x 2.5p.
Marssonia ochroleuca B. & C. This fungus forms small cir-
cular spots on the leaves of the chestnut. This fungus is very sim-
ilar to the preceding species.
THE MELANCONIALES 263
THE GENUS PESTALOZZIA.
The genus Pestalozzia is a very large one, having over 200
described species. The forms of this genus are very common,
though our knowledge of them is so slight that they are difficult
to determine. Some of them are parasitic, but a great many are
saphrophytic and are probably not confined to any one host. The
acervuli have the same general structure as those of the previous
genera. The spores (Figure 9) however, are very characteristic.
FIG. 9
Fig. 9. Spores of a Pestalozzia from a Leaf Spot on Sugar Cane
They are two to several septate and at least some of the cells are
dark colored. Furthermore at the apex of the spore, there are two
or more long, hyaline appendages or cilia. The acervuli always
have a black appearance on account of the spores. As there are so
many species, many of which have not been carefully worked over,
it seems best only to mention a few of the more common forms.
Pestalozzia guepina Desm. This fungus occurs on the leaves of
a number of different trees and shrubs and perhaps also some
herbaceous plants. A variety of this species is also found on the
cranberry. The acervuli are small and black. The conidia are
about 20n long and from three to four septate and have from three
to four cilia or appendages.
Pestalozzia palmarum Cooke. This fungus is found on the
leaves and fruits of various palms producing discolored spots.
The conidia are fusiform, 4 septate and have three cilia. They
average about 15 x 5-6p.
Pestalozzia funerea Desm. This species also occurs on a wide
range of hosts. It has been reported in this country on ginseng,
appearing in a black velvety growth at the base of the leaves and
flower stalks. The conidia are 4 septate, 22-32 x 6-84 and have
from two to five cilia.
264 C. W. EDGERTON
Pestalozzia uvicola Speg. This fungus attacks the fruit of
grapes in this country causing a rot. The conidia are 4 septate,
35 x 8-10p, and have three cilia.
THE GENUS CORYNEUM.
The genus Cornyeum with over go described species, contains
a few forms that are more or less common. This genus differs
from the preceding genera in spore characters. The spores are two
to several septate and dark colored. They also lack the cilia or
appendages that are characteristic of the genus Pestalozzia. A
few of the species are parasitic but a great many are probably only
-saprophytes. As with the other genera, many of the species are
not well known. Only two species will be mentioned.
Coryneum beierincku Oud. This fungus forms spots on the
leaves, fruits, and buds of the peach often causing considerable
damage. Many of the young buds are killed. The acervuli are
produced sparingly in the spots. The spores are dark colored,
rather large, and from two to several septate.
Coryneum foliicolum Fuckel. This fungus forms spots on the
leaves of a number of different trees. In this country, it is fre-
quently reported on the leaves of the apple. The spores are for
the most part 4 celled and from about 13-16.5 x 4-5.5p.
THE GENUS CYLINDROSPORIUM.
The genus Cylindrosporium with over 100 described species
contains a few forms that are very common and important. This
genus differs from those previously described in the characters of
the spores. The spores of Cylindrosporium are hyaline, long fili-
form, and generally continuous. The acervuli are subepidermal
and light colored. Only two common species will be mentioned.
Cylindrosporium padi Karst. This fungus is found on the
leaves of various stone fruits such as cherries and plums, producing
the trouble generally known as the “Shot Hole” disease. Small
reddish spots develop which later drop out leaving small circular
holes in the leaf. Before the tissue drops out, however, the small
acervuli develop and shed the spores. The spores are long filiform,
curved, and measure about 48-60 x 2p.
tin ti
THE MELANCONITALES 265
Cylindrosporium pomi Brooks. This fungus produces small
spots or specks on the fruit of the apple. This trouble is very com-
mon in most of the apple districts of the country. The acervuli
develop sparingly in these spots. The spores are hyaline, from
one to five celled, variously curved, 15-80 x 2-2.5n.
Literature
The literature dealing with the different species of the Melan-
coniales is very scattering. There are no monographs of any of
the genera. The literature that is available is found mostly within
scientific journals and Experiment Station bulletins. Below are
given a few titles, including studies of a number of the different
species in the different genera. Most of this literature is very
easily obtained. Further references, if desired, can be found in
the bibliographies given in these articles.
Duccar, B. M. Fungous diseases of plants. 1909.
Epcerton, C. W. The physiology and development of some anthracnoses.
Bot. Gazette 45 :367-408. 1908.
Epcerton, C. W. The bean anthracnose. La. Ex. Sta. Bull. 119. Igio.
Epcerton, C. W. Some sugar cane diseases. La. Exp. Sta. Bull. 120. Igto.
Epcerton, C. W. The red rot of sugar cane. La. Exp. Sta. Bull. 133. Ig11.
Lewis, C. E. Apple diseases caused by Coryneum foliicolum Fuckel and
Phoma mali Schulz et Sacc. Maine Exp. Sta. Bull. 170. 1900.
Setpy, A. D., and Manns, T. F. Studies on diseases of cereals and grasses.
Ohio Exp. Sta. Bull. 203. 1909.
SHEAR, C. L. Cranberry diseases. Bur. of Plant Industry Bull. 110. 1907.
SmitH, R. E. California peach blight. Cal. Exp. Sta. Bull. 191. 1907.
STEvENS and Hatt. Diseases of economic plants. IgI0.
Wor, F. A. A rot of grapes due to Pestalozzia uvicola Speg. Nebr. Exp.
Sta. Report 21 :69-72. 1908.
Louisiana Agricultutal Experiment Station.
ALP CLE A
| LER pes a : -
ae he: hee brn eine
Pa ey ee Hau), TERS We FET ORNS, nea
Wott a
ane te Chg aU hoi Giahts
i. yaad ea Fev aed
ey a be MA God ced Pb L
Died : : Baidiy
ee A RN hay EIS ie Pe Aree
be ri :
Wed VA! .
oe cue! Be TE Ly pee a
Tuts fig UDR ut hy Oye
Lae We Wy Sian t | | , _ :
. i Rae Vat a
‘ i
Aig a1
mo ee re 3 Aaah i BE byl ee 64,
DEPARTMENT OP NOTES REVIEWS, FC.
It is the purpose, in this department, to present from time to time brief original
notes, both of methods of work and of results, by members of the Society. All members
are invited to submit such items. In the absence of these there will be given a few brief
abstracts of recent work of more general interest to students and teachers. There will be
no attempt to make these abstracts exhaustive. They will illustrate progress without at-
tempting to define it, and will thus give to the teacher current illustrations, and to the
isolated student suggestions of suitable fields of investigation.—[Editor. ]
THE CLEVELAND MEETING
In accordance with the vote at Minneapolis, the meeting of
the American Microscopical Society in affiliation with the A. A.
A. S., at Cleveland Dec. 31 and Jan. 1, will be a business meeting
purely. The days are so full of special scientific meetings and the
interests of our membership are so varied that it seems unwise to
add to the competing meetings. The members of the A. M. S. who
have papers prepared are requested to offer them before the ap-
propriate section of the American Association, or before the affil-
iated special societies of which they may be members.
It has been found impossible to hold together any considerable
body of members for general meetings in the presence of the at-
tractive special meetings in which the majority of our membership
are interested. This is taken by some to indicate that we should
not meet at all under the shadow of these special sections and so-
cieties—but should meet separately at some other period. The
history of the last few years in which separate meetings of the
A. M. S. were attempted tend to show, however, that the meeting
of a society of such inclusive interests can no longer bring large
numbers of members half way across the continent. Furthermore,
scientific societies are too numerous now to allow us to expect
such large accessions to our membership at the place of meeting,
as was formerly the case.
These are some of the considerations that have led the pres-
ent Secretary to conclude that it is wisest, at least for the present,
to devote the time and money of the society to building up the
Transactions as a journal of general interest, which shall bring to
all the members more matter than would ordinarily be presented
268 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
at a meeting. If the members wish the renewal of summer meet-
ings this can be carried out after the society regains its full strength.
In this connection, it may be pertinent to suggest that, in the
opinion of the Secretary, the Microscopical Societies of more local
character should be able to carry on successful meetings. These
may be state or city societies. There is no reason why really live,
valuable meetings for practical discussions and demonstrations can-
not be had under these circumstances. The number of people who
use the microscope and are interested in its application is greatly
increased. There are more indeed in a single city than were found
in the whole nation when this society was organized. The A. M. S.
stands ready to serve such local societies in any way possible. In-
deed it seems as tho an effective division of labor would be: (1)
the national society to furnish a magazine of microscopy and micro-
scopic research; and (2) state and city societies to furnish the per-
sonal contacts and stimulus thru meetings. Some such broad affil-
iation of national and local societies ought to be possible, and mu-
tually supportive.
The policy of concentrating the strength of the society on its
Quarterly. Transactions has, during the last two years, undoubtedly ©
given the society the best growth it has ever had in the same length
of time. None of this growth has been the artificial growth due to
temporary and complimentary members secured at the place of
meeting. The present growth is of individuals and libraries that
find in the Transactions a promise of something they need. In the
list of names when the present Secretary took charge there were
232 members and 33 subscribers. Of these 58 have died or definite-
ly resigned during the last two years. Of the remainder, 36 have
paid no fees. This leaves a net membership of 138 from the
original list. Three subscribers have discontinued. Seventeen new
subscribers have been added, making a total of 47. A total of 161
members and subscribers has been added. There are now listed
271 paying members, or 318 members and subscribers. We have not
yet been able to reach the seli-supporting membership of 400 for
which we have been hoping, but we have more than made good the
earlier total membership. Two more years of growth equal to the
past two will give an income sufficient to print the Transactions on
a scale that will be a credit to the society and to science.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 269
The Secretary feels that this result can be quickly attained by
the sympathetic efforts of the members to extend information of
the society and its Transactions among their friends. The Secre-
tary cannot do this. The individual member can.
MIMICKING THE AMEBOID AND STREAMING MOTIONS OF PROTOPLASM
Robertson (Science Oct. 4, 1912) reports a method of mimick-
ing the motions of protoplasm in the Ameba which he claims is very
striking and instructive.
1. Ameboid Motions. Prepare a 10% solution of camphor-
gum in benzol. Color this deeply by the addition of Sudan III or
Scharlach R. Place a drop of this mixture upon the surface of
water. Thru the alterations of surface tension, lengthy and ir-
regular “pseudopodia” are rapidly thrown out and withdrawn.
2. Streaming Motion. Add to portions of the solution
described above olive oil or other viscous liquid, and place drops
of the mixture on water as before. By increasing the amount of
the oil the alterations of form are less and less rapid; but the in-
ternal streaming is energetic and striking.
RELATIONS OF BLOOD TO SIZE IN RABBITS
Boycott (Jour. Path. and Bact., April, 1912) summarizes the
results of studies on the relation of the size of rabbits to growth
and quality of blood therein, as follows:
t. Small rabbits are found to have a larger percent of haemo-
globin, and more blood and haemoglobin in proportion to body
weight, than, large rabbits.
2. Male rabbits appear to have more haemoglobin per unit
of blood than the female.
3. After the suckling period, rabbits have at least haemoglobin
relatively to the body weight when it weighs 1.5 to 2 kilos.
4. A rabbit of 2 kilos has about 6.5 c.c. oxygen capacity and
about 45 c.c. of blood per kilo of body weight.
CULTURE OF MALARIAL PLASMODIA
Bass and Johns (Jour. Exp. Med. Oct. 1912) report the results
of successful cultures of malarial plasmodia in vitro. This relates
to the asexual cycle, tho the authors found suggestions of the sex-
ual.
270 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
The asexual cycle of Plasmodium vivax and P. falciparum
were grown in vitro in human blood and in red blood cells in Locke’s
solution. There is evidence that the parasites cannot grow outside
the red blood cells. Leucocytes devour the malarial plasmodia
grown in vitro only when the parasites escape from red cells. By
removing leucocytes, successive generations of both species may be
had by adding fresh red cells and serum at proper intervals. The
generation period varies greatly with temperature and probably
with other conditions.
PURE CULTURES OF SPIROCHAETA IN VITRO
Noguchi (Jour. Exp. Med. Aug. 1912) describes the pure culti-
vation of several species of Spérochaeta and Treponema pallida in
vitro. The conditions are: a temperature of about 37°C.; fresh
sterile tissue, and a body fluid capable of forming a loose fibrin
with the tissue; and some oxygen.
The germs do not lose wholly their pathogenic quality by such
cultivation, tho the virulence seems diminished.
Both longitudinal and transverse division of these organisms is
affirmed by the writer.
NOTES ON POLLEN
Lord Avebury gives (Jour. R. M. S., Oct. 1912) in popular
form many facts relating to pollen,—its structure, development,
variations in size, form and surface, colors, etc. He includes a
table giving length of the pollen grain and length of pistil. He
concludes that there is a distinct relation between these, especially
convincing when nearly related species are compared. The article
concludes with a summary of the family traits of the pollen of the
various natural orders of plants.
ROOT NODULES IN PLANTS OTHER THAN THE LEGUMINOS4
Since the discovery that atmospheric nitrogen is assimilated by
leguminous plants thru the action of symbiotic bacteria in the
nodules of the roots, it has been an open question as to how widely
this relationship and this power extend in the plant kingdom. In
the investigation of this question it has been found that root nodules
exist in Cycadaceze, Eleaginacee, in Alnus, Podocarpus, and
Myrica.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 27X
Spratt (Am. Bot., July 1912) reports studies of several genera
of the Podocarpinee and finds root nodules on all examined. These
nodules are modified lateral roots. They are produced by the in-
fection of the meristematic tissue of the young root, by Pseudo-
monas radicicola, shown to be identical in cultures with the infest-
ing bacterium in Leguminose. Cultures also show these organ-
isms capable of assimilating atmospheric nitrogen.
A PLEA FOR THE FISH
“When removing an undersized trout from your hook, always
moisten your hands before grasping the fish; otherwise the dry
hand will remove the slime from the back of the trout, when it is
only a question of time until fungus sets in and the fish will die.
Always kill your fish that are large enough to keep, as soon
as taken from the hook. This can be done by giving it a stroke
with a stick on the head, back of the eyes. It will avoid al! suffering
and make your fish far better for table use.
The American Fisheries Society at Washington, D. C., Septem-
ber 21-24, 1908, recommended that the various State Commissions
educate the people by every means in their power to follow the di-
rections given about wetting the hands.
Indorsed by twenty-eight Fish and Game Commissions
throughout the United States.”
| G. H. Tuompson, Fish Culturist,
Superintendent of the Estes Park Fish Hatchery.
HEREDITY IN RELATION TO EUGENICS
This book, by Dr. C. B. Davenport of the Carnegie Institu-
tion, is an effort to bring together, in a form that the intelligent
worker even tho not a special student of biology may comprehend,
some of the results derived from our modern studies of heredity,
the methods whereby these results have been reached, and certain
applications of these methods to the study of human traits and
thru these to human guidance. The book ought to serve in a very
real way the social worker, the physician, and the teacher of gen-
eral biology. Dr. Davenport is one of the leading American stu-
dents of this subject.
In Chapter I on “Eugenics: Its Nature, Importance and Aims’,
the writer defines the scope of this new hope that the quality of the
272 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
human race may be definitely improved by proper breeding,—as
definitely improved as the breeds of domestic animals have been.
Unless scientific principles come to influence marriage selection,
human progress will cease.
Chapter II discusses the scientific method whereby our pro-
gress is now being made in the study of heredity, and the application
of this method and its results to human breeding.
In Chapter III a great mass of material relating to the in-
heritance of family traits is brought together. It is shown that
many qualities are inherited in accordance with the Meudelian ex-
pectation. Among these are color of eyes and hair; stature; mus-
ical, artistic, literary ability; mechanical skill; memory; tempera-
ment; mental ability; insanity; criminality; many defects of body
and mind leading to disease; and numerous other personal char-
acteristics.
Chapters IV and V deal with the Geographic Distribution of
Inheritable Traits as determined by barriers, migrations, etc.
Chapters VI and VII deal with concrete American instances in
which individuals with marked personal characteristics have im-
pressed in special degree the lines of descent springing from them;
and instances of marked family traits which persist for generations.
In Chapter VIII the author discusses the relation of Eugenics
to Euthenics,—of the heredity influences to the environmental in-
fluences in molding the future of the human race. This is a very
suggestive chapter and should be appreciated by all social workers.
The concluding chapter has to do with the relation of organ-
ized society to the matter of Eugenics, both as to the studies which
must be prosecuted and to the application of the result in social
control.
A good bibliography and index add to the usefulness of the
book.
Heredity in Relation to Eugenics, by Charles B. Davenport. Illustrated; 298 pages.
Henry Holt & Co., New York. Price, $2.00; by mail, $2.17.
HEREDITY AND EUGENICS
This book is a composite product of several men who, among
Americans, are the leaders in the recent experimental study of
heredity. It contains a somewhat popularized summary of the re-
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 273
cent advances of our knowledge of variation in plants and animals,
of inheritance, and of evolution. It is entirely authoritative, and
brings to the general student a dependable digest of the best con-
clusions in this department of investigation. This digest is similar
to the summaries which are being given from time to time, in the
Transactions, of the various special fields of biological research.
The chapters were originally given as lectures during the sum-
mer quarter of 1911 at the University of Chicago. The lectures
quite naturally overlap to a certain extent.
Professor Coulter introduces the subject in a lucid way with
two general lectures :—Recent Developments in Heredity and Evo-
lution, and The Physical Basis of Heredity and Evolution from
the Cytological Standpoint.
Professor Castle offers two chapters on The Matter of Evolu-
tion, and Heredity and Sex. In these chapters the general outline
of Mendelism is given and its relation to other methods of evolu-
tion suggested, especially in the animal kingdom.
In Professor East’s chapters the application of Mendelism is
made to plant inheritance and breeding. The chapters are en-
titled :—Inheritance in Higher Plants, and Application of Biologi-
cal Principles to Plant Breeding.
In Chapter VII, Professor Tower discussed the possibility of
modifying the nature of the reproductive material of organisms by
experimental processes, in such a way as to change inheritance
from the outside. Professor Tower by no means confines his dis-
cussion to his own remarkable work on the chrysomelid beetles ;
but this work gives him added authority to discuss that of other
people and is the backbone of his contribution. This part of the
book has been less exploited elsewhere than the matter in the other
chapters, and will prove somewhat more difficult to the general
reader.
In the concluding lectures Dr. Davenport makes the applica-
tion of the laws of organic heredity to man. The titles of Chap-
ters VIII and IX are:—The Inheritance of Physical and Mental
Traits of Man and Their Application to Eugenics; and The
Heredity and Eugenics, by Castle, Coulter, Davenport, East, and Tower. University
of Chicago Press, 1912. 315 pages, illustrated. Price, $2.50; by mail, $2.70.
274 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
Geography of Man in Relation to Eugenics. These chapters are
drawn largely from Dr. Davenport’s book reviewed above.
THREAD ATTACHMENTS BETWEEN NUCLEAR AND CYTOPLASMIC BODIES
I have read with much interest Mr. E. W. Roberts’ article,
“The Modern Theory of the Cell as a Complex of Organized
Units,” in Transactions of April, 1912.
Being an ardent worker in Cytology and having spent some
years in trying to unravel a few of the many existing cytological
problems, I was particularly attracted by some of the remarks and
views advanced by Mr. Roberts in his highly attractive and inter-
esting contribution.
Although many of Mr. Roberts’ remarks appear at present of
a very speculative character, and will require, possibly, many years
of close microscopical work before they can either be proved or
disproved; yet to me whilst reading them they have a charm of
their likely possibilities.
Work in connection with a subject such as this presents great
difficulties, both concerning the microscopical as well as the chemi-
cal character of the cell.
I was not aware of the fact until I read this paper that the cells
of Spirogyra during life contained connecting filaments between
each pyrenoid body and the nucleus; although I have examined
Spirogyra many times in connection with various cytological work;
this only proves to me how easily most important structure may
evade the careful searchings of, I think I may say without egotism,
a trained eye.
Apart from perhaps another point of interest in this cytologi-
cal contribution the finding of the presence of these connecting fila-
ments, if beyond doubt, is a wonderful achievement and a splendid
addition to present knowledge of the complexity of the cell. I think
Mr. Roberts is quite correct in his statement, that the question
whether these connecting threads exist between the vegetative and
nuclear groups of other types of cells is a field that has been en-
tirely untouched up to the present.
Seriously considering the value of further development in this
line of research, I felt myself irresistibly compelled to make in-
vestigations in this direction.
a
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 275
I chose for my subjects to work upon Allium and Hya-
cinthus. In my laboratory work, these have been almost classical
objects and I have done an endless amount of work upon them for
years past. Accordingly I was most anxious to ascertain whether
the keen attention which I had given to the examination of other
detail and structures, upon which I was working, had so clouded
my eyes that it had shut out from view the possible presence of
threads connecting nuclear with protoplasmic bodies.
At first I resolved to examine again some of my many and
valued sections illustrating highly interesting phases in mitosis.
This I did, but after their once more careful study, I was unable
to convince myself of the presence of any structures such as Mr.
Roberts described in Spirogyra, although there were several in-
stances which left conflicting doubts in my mind. Considering
some of these specimens again on another occasion, I came to the
definite conclusion since nearly all of them were stained and spe-
cially differentiated in order to show the nucleus and nuclear
structures only, leaving the surrounding protoplasm almost indis-
tinct by contrast, that it was evident such a contrast of the stain-
ing between these two structures was useless in order to establish
the presence or non-presence of these nuclear attachments.
After a number of efforts to get a uniform stain, I succeeded
by cutting some extremely thin transverse sections (2u) of Allium
(growing root tips). These I fixed in the usual manner to the
slips without the aid of fixitive (this latter procedure can readily
‘be understood as most important when fine detail is to be searched
for). | have always found that it is much easier with very thin
sections to get equality of staining by carefully watching the dif-
ferentiation process under the microscope. This is not the case
with thicker sections, say 10% or more. The nucleus in these thicker
sections still holds the stain deeply even when that in the cytoplasm
has been entirely extracted. As mentioned above I felt confident
that this equality of stain over the whole cell inclusion was abso-
lutely important and essential to future success, and could only
be obtained by working upon very thin sections.
When the time came to examine these last preparations, using
critical illumination with oil immersion, condenser, etc., my hopes
276 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
and expectations were rewarded. Although not present in the
majority of cells, there were many in which distinct filar attach-
ments could be seen between chromatin bodies in the nucleus and
granules in the cytoplasm. They were not numerous in the indi-
vidual cells, the most I counted was two, and in a very few in-
stances three. The fact of their apparent scarcity and not find-
ing more than three in any one cell examined, may quite possibly
be accounted for by the extreme thinness of the sections and the
plane of cutting. As far as I can at present make out, these struc-
tures cannot be seen when the cell is not strictly in a vegetative
condition. However, notwithstanding the comparative few cases
in which they could be observed, the fact of their being distinctly
seen in many cells and in several separate sections of different ser-
ies, may be taken, I think, as proof of their being present in the
cells of the growing root tips of the onion.
Up to the present I have not had the time to cut and examine
similarly treated sections of the root tips of Hyacinthus, but I feel
almost certain they will not be found missing here, and before long
I hope to be able to extend my work and observations in this direc-
tion to other vegetable tissues as well as some of the various ani-
mal cells. I adopted Heidentain’s iron haematoxytin method of
staining, giving baths of not less than twelve hours both in the
iron solution and the haematoxytin and differentiating slowly in
a very weak solution of the iron alum. I think twenty minutes at
least should be taken for this purpose. It seems to me useless to
attempt any work upon sections that are much over 2 in thick-
ness for reasons already stated. I am inclined to think that it
would be an advantage to the above process to use as counter stains
eosin and acid rubin, particularly a watery solution of the former.
This in my hands works very well after staining with iron haema-
toxytin. It is not always easy to prevent diffused staining with
acid rubin, but when successful results are obtained with either
eosin or rubin even better observation results may be expected.
In conclusion I feel sure there is much of great interest await-
ing the careful and persevering worker in this field of research,
and in the event of these filar attachments between nucleus and
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 277
cytoplasm being proved a constant feature it is difficult at the
moment to appreciate their full meaning.
EK. J. SHEPPARD, F. R. M. S.
134 Kennington Road, Lambeth, London S. E., England.
NEW MODELS IN BINOCULAR MICROSCOPES
The optical works of Ernst Leitz, Wetzlar, Germany, have in-
troduced a new model of Binocular Microscope, which they des-
ignate as the ‘““Greenough-Leitz.”” It is interesting to note that new
ideas have effected a considerable change in construction of this
particular model in comparison with the older forms.
The new principles involved in the construction of the “Green-
ough-Leitz” are the result of frequent demands made upon man-
ufacturers to provide certain modifications. The illustration (Fig.
1) will convince the reader that unusual stability is featured in
the instrument. The coarse adjustment by rack and pinion is sit-
uated in the column of the stand, independent of the prism tubes,
the latter being permanently a part of a heavy bent arm which is in
turn attached to the rack arrangement of the stand.
FIG. 1 FIG. 2
As a Dermatoscope and for the examination of large surfaces
an arrangement is provided as shown in Fig. 2. The auxillary
278 NOTES, REVIEWS, ETC.
foot is of hard rubber and carries a separate rack and pinion coarse-
adjustment. The curved arm carrying the prism tubes is readily
adapted to the column of the hard rubber foot.
FIG. 3 FIG. 4
Of still further interest to most all scientists is the fact that
the ‘“Greenough-Leitz” is also made in folding form, for the con-
venience of those who wish to carry the microscope into the field.
Fig. 3 shows the provisions for this arrangement, viz: the folding
foot and the microscope stage mounted so that it can be swung
vertically in the microscope axis. The manner of placing the
entire equipment in a case is illustrated by Fig. 4. Compactness
is featured here and the result is that the demand of those actively
engaged in field work for an outfit of this construction has at last
been gratified.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 279
LIST OF MEMBERS
HONORARY MEMBERS
Crisp, FRANK, LL.B., BA, F.RUM_S.,
5 Landsdowne Road, Notting Hill, London, England
FeIVGACE TENN oA) etpepe ne eat OPN ies | katie aS 69 Burling Lane, New Rochelle, N. Y.
Vexep ake Elansren, A.M. M.D) FR.M.S.....esss0 53h oust St. Drom Nid
LIFE MEMBERS
PROM NEL SO RANBORD ee ayes Siciec-cc 6 os ob ese ols 489 Fifth Ave., New York City
DUNGCANSON, PROF: Hrnry B:, A-M...............0: State Normal, Peru, Neb.
EPO RT MM ERORUARTEVUR EL. oo 4)5 6 score Scale ayes cielo 165 Broadway, New York City
UAT OING Grey lops Woke. c, ciara 5 siee « oisyé ciel <fece§ Chicago Beach Hotel, Chicago, Ill.
MEMBERS
The figures denote the year of the member’s election, except ’78, which
marks an original member. The TRANSACTIONS are not sent to members in
arrears, and two years arrearage forfeits membership. (See Article IV of
By-Laws.)
MEMBERS ADMITTED SINCE THE LAST PUBLISHED LIST
Andras.) J.C: Howard, George
Atherton, L. G. James, W. M.
Aubert, A. B. Jenner, E. A.
Baird, Grace Jean Johnson, B. J.
Baker si. Re Jordan, HE:
Barbour, W. C. Kaserman, E. O.
Barre, H. W. Kesler, J. L.
Blacks J; a: Kincaid, Trevor
Boyd, M. F. Lambert, C. A.
Brown, F. R. Marshall, W. S.
Bullitt, J. B. McDonald, R. E.
Canver, G1 Metcalf, Zeno P.
Clark, Howard W. Morris, Capel
Cone, A. B. Murfee, E. H.
Davis, H. S. Oglevee, C. S.
Ellis, M. M. Orcutt, A. W.
attic. Ps W: Orueta, Domingo De
Garretson, Eugene Pammel, L. H.
Hagler, E. E. Pollard, J) Wis
Hall, Alice Louise Massey, A. B.
Hjorth, Ludvig C. Powers, E. B.
Howard, Robert Nesbit O eRansiens ieee
280 LIST OF MEMBERS
Rasquier, T. B. Smith, Frank
Rees, Maurice H. Stevens, H. E.
Reid, Alfred Stewart, Maude Gertrude
Richards, Aute Sumner, George
RatshhRa iG: Trenner, Simeon
Scott Js We Tuttle, A. H.
Small, Howard Warbrick, J.C:
ACKERT:. JAMES (EDWARD, “IU... 22202. ve denn 306 E. Green St., Champaign, II.
ADSON? VATEREDMWE, (ilicne hace eine On see eee eee Sta. A., Lincoln, Neh.
ATEN, WiINERED) CASI 04... pein teste 205 E. Willow St., Stockton, Cal.
INNDRAS On CrseseNee [2 sake yarn terme eis 540 S. Main St., Manchester, Ill.
ARNOLD SEMEL ROOK ee ei cin ee eee 155 W. Concord St., Boston, Mass.
ATHERTON, Pror. L. G., A.B., M.S., ’12..State Normal School, Madison, S. D.
ATWOODn HeSe 7Ono cece Water Witch Club, Highlands, Monmouth Co., N. J.
ATE WOOD! WE ents 7S aisatec¥o cites ae 16 Seneca Parkway, Rochester, N. Y.
IAQBERT: GAS Se) SMESe TD iar ihe aectanga ciate 118 East 62nd St., New York, N. Y.
BIS CONS TODIST Sw VVesmeil beers ccs ol ont eae eee ree 227 S. 6th St., Philadelphia, Pa.
Barr VGRACE JEAN) Abs 122. ...ce\siecita anh « 5605 Madison Ave., Chicago, Ill.
IBV Aceipi pala) decane ed MID Erk ae eae bela ps 324 North 53rd Ave., Chicago, Ill.
BANKER, Pror. Howarp J., Ph.D., ’11...DePauw University, Greencastle, Ind.
IBISRIBOWR sail Ceae Teaiaty Aree ates ell A at 155 West 65th St., New York, N. Y.
BARKER). MEBERI Ses Oia, Sent uu eure hicks Wace ee at ton a, hs See eM ng ee Moylan, Pa.
BARKER, FRANKLIN D., A.M., ’03....... University of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
BARRE EE WeebiScsh MvAr m2 tani tastes. cuoabnetcmneerae Clemson College, S. C.
BAUSCH: IEDWARDIN Zoran csi cemiis aac 179 N. St. Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.
BAUSCH VVTEETANE 4 MOGs eis Seat) stvelecicie Yara lone iets St. Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.
IBPARDSEEY? HP ROR WALA LS OZ cok ten) ae coe tee 1412 Tenth St., Greeley, Colo.
BEL VADBER TM aed Sem ANE OStsrss lea asl: La. State Univ., Baton Rouge, La.
BENNETT, Henry C., ’93....Hotel Longacre, 157 W. 47th St., New York City
BENsLEY, B. A., Ph.D. (Col.), ’05..Biol. Dept. Uni. of Toronto, Toronto, Can.
Bressry; ‘Pror. CHARLES) Enwin,7eb.D:, LED: 798.3 t.cecaces. 5 oe Lincoln, Neb.
BEGTS i) OEUNM De fale bs hie me cance ts taenataer ee ye 111 Market St., Camden, N. J.
BEYER, ROP: (Gro E200; a5 oe eee 4422 Coliseum St., New Orleans, La.
BiRGS) PROF ECA SCDE ELD VOO. es seriee 744 Langdon St., Madison, Wis.
IBEAC Ks ih bles NDE eres Nee cae eae cht eae Ve rai 735 Wilson Bldg., Dallas, Texas
IBYejorevios, ANAS INDI DIT fe reyes Sat ae Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio
BoptnE, Pror. DoNALDSON, ’96............- 4 Mills Place, Crawfordsville, Ind.
Boome Wary eA RUREMES 2 282" eel 60 Dartmouth St., Springfield, Mass.
Boyp, Pror. M. F., M.D., ’12..Dept. Path. & Bact., Univ. lowa, Iowa City, Ia.
BOVERWICUSH ALM O20 WAN chee airs yam 3223 Clifford St., Philadelphia, Pa.
BROOKOVER \GHAS) VAVBUIMES SOS wee mer eee Buchtel Coll., Akron, Ohio
BROWN AMOS es) Jel) irate te iepaednets ote tel 20 E. Penn St., Germantown, Pa.
BROWNE Sec PAM 12 bhi, tet claet erent William Nast College, Kiukiang, China
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 281
BrowNInc, Sipney Howarp, ’11..Royal London Ophthalmic Hospital, London
IBRUNDAGH WAV Ee. MD. O40 .02 neces 1073 Bushwick Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y.
BRYANT, Pror. Eart R., A.M. ’Io...... Muskingum College, New Concord, O.
wer, PAMES EDGAR, Eso,, 7920... 06.0 cwe dren 141 Broadway, New York City
peer ror: J. B. MA, MD), 72..0..0o.cws eee. University, Mississippi
Reorermmran sino Le) VED). 9B. eroisiolele satay ticlrardlonarteaoityhens Cements Urbana, Ill.
ENGI) SESE) SOD Gh 4 ve! 6.0.5 cis sdvdieng db arete mcr ger anaes 114 W. Second St., Oil City, Pa.
WARNER ROK sCHAREES, OTT ss. ossn cee adds stb Parsons College, Fairfield, Ia.
(CARTER OHIN F.(78625. 32.0.5 5356 Knox St., Germantown, Philadelphia, Pa.
GARnuERMsbRon. G1. ALM, 12... cece ere 526 W. 123rd St., New York, N. Y.
Gram Grorce Epw., ‘M.D. ’06...........--. Genessee St., Skaneateles, N. Y.
arnnemtowAED, We, AZM, 712. oo. ccc vclanceceawsampcneneitel Fairport, lowa
Cremenrs, Mrs Pak:, PhiD., ’03...:...: 800 4th St., S. E., Minneapolis, Minn.
COCKS UPRORW REGINALD S., (OO. ..0casnleeues Tulane Univ., New Orleans, La.
COGHIEE PROP GEORGE E., Ph:D., ?22 2... ccecs 006 Dennison Univ., Granville, O.
CORIO sl 015 Ded oa Ferry and Otis Place, Buffalo, N. Y.
urronpveinroniis:, ein. TT... ec cee cc cee we we Box 158, Bryn Mawr, Pa.
(CORN WANS 1223 Fi) as Editorial Staff, “Lumberman,”’ Chicago, II.
SPORE PESSE EMT E foe coc cis 5 cobb 0 ciclsw ous 542 W. Packard St.. Decatur, III.
CORT VW VWirre GAG. OTD: sic eres c oi ote one Colorado Coll., Colorado Springs, Colo.
WOT GEORGEN EM en De). rlsjle «lesccare.s o o'eicdeum sl anise eid a 1195 Main St., Buffalo, N. Y.
WaniGrIERANCIS! GSO. dca te ec sade casos 3481 Broadway, New York City
CouLTER, JoHN Gaytorp, Ph.D., ’11..... 1109 FE. Monroe St., Bloomington, III.
CoumsnrikicaArp Bs MDs 7I1.,...2..6¢ 2 No. Broadway, Tarrytown, N. Y.
WOVE Veg GEORGE Wirt Ll ry ssccseihics os wane eee 557 W. 183 St., New York, N. Y.
BEATE ae loTOMAS. 703 v5 a. ofS Shiels aadwes 26 Selkirk Ave., W., Montreal, Canada
Grannare, Gro.-C., B.S., M.Ds 04.6.2... .. 3674 Lindell Ave., St. Louis, Mo.
Rrra emis th. | ALBA 05 2225. ..0 casi delecs oon 43 East Ave., Ithaca, N. Y.
iD YTEIEVATeI Dread USING Oped ot GC eo 2) ated D eee Ll D JOR Oy a SN ot Di
Qn og BoB atts SEO ET Ee eee 7016 Frankstown Ave., Pittsburg, Pa.
ere TRIE OOo oc Lisheirie mn ws bos siesein ais 209 Locust St., Evansville, Ind.
DAVIS EPROPS Ele iS ev Phi). 2128504... «.. University of Florida, Gainesville, Fla.
ayy rer GmARERSUET MOS 2 49T... sce. cae « 355 College Ave., Valparaiso, Ind.
Dissrow, WittiaM S., M.D., Ph.G,, ’or....... 151 Orchard St., Newark, N. J.
Di eEe SEN MWARDYE TOO cc). cos bo 5c sce dies wos 0948 N. 43d St., Philadelphia, Pa.
LES 0 293 Hampshire St., Buffalo, N. Y.
IDRESCHER,, We TE. 787... 12... Care Bausch & Lomb Opt. Co., Rochester, N. Y.
DunpcEon, WINFIELD, B.S., ’11....Allabahad Christian Coll., Allabahad, India
IBGHEVERRTA, Eoarm70, M.D), 102: 2.62 0. sec. oles Hospital, Limon, Costa Rico
PR MOE RON) NW Eh 1ED << cts ie caiess ee ee ee 143 McAllister, State College, Pa.
IBTGEMNGAN ING) ROE) ©. Ele; °Q5)1i0 e100 « ole 630 Atwater Ave., Bloomington, Ind.
Brice Rone. IME! PHD 712.6 ccc. cdrensicke Mente 1109 13th St., Boulder, Colo.
Pano ELGr NORTON: J:; M<A-: M-S:, "OS. /</\:2%.5,. ios ie a eee
OKA T SR REESE ers beara Uiversity of Montana, Missoula, Mont.
PEER OEEN: « MD) 783 eo elisa. ooelan sit yaaa nee Box 454, Denver, Colo.
282 LIST OF MEMBERS
EEWERDE PAL EAI Soh ras hs te, eth Boas 16 Pearl St., Council Bluffs, lowa
Eyre. Jone Ee; (Mi. MUS. aR MUS) oo?! By obs ar). BT, a ae
Ket iets el haled asareeee iets Guy’s Hospital, London, E. C., England
BARTOW MEROR! Wei Ge tpi, tee eo pein erey 24 Quincy St., Cambridge, Mass.
BADTIGN PROPSUP Ws 1B.9. MUS. a2: eee. Trinity Univ., Waxahachie, Texas
BEiERaeAnOUPE, IVi Da: 70s sn. ee eee 520 E. Main St., Columbus, Ohio
BEE GEO. wie a iBROMES 78) nee, ae an 24 W. Eagle St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Fe.tows, Cuas. S., F.R.M.S., ’83...111 Cham. of Comm., Minneapolis, Minn.
EERGUSON MARGARET Gravagll. 0. secon eine 46 Dover St., Wellesley, Mass.
HERGuSoN, Mmane,, MeS: Ph DY 102: . 035% fo ees eth hens Blacksburg, Va.
ETNDERAVVEMS ep Re, Mi Re OStirate.sc.01s, och cicrcielareee ee 2 Union Place, Troy, N. Y.
ISCHER PATER 702) |: oasis HE ORGAO ONO UES SOLA HE Box 1608, Milwaukee, Wis.
FISHER tis Gree, OUT Te. pe ce ee ole clever 410 Powers Bldg., Decatur, III.
BiInzsRANDOLPH) ‘RAY Mon». Ul RLMLS,, 251. Jay. el alee eee eee
ois eRe ORE ees State Laboratory of Hygiene, Trenton, N. J.
BEINT AMES, MacMeDe Work ween... Stoneleigh Court, Washington, D. C.
FOOTE NA SES HUME Rae amiceraceceie oie 202 S. Thirty-first Ave., Omaha, Neb.
Posters HpwARD: WOO As)... <aeuivie 6 steele The Daily Picayune, New Orleans, La.
PULToN petaRny, RYscAWR) JOR CSER4.c Aisin cick bale cea eee State College, Pa.
Burnisse EeeW MLD: seheDs tosence. U. S. Consulate, Port au Prince, Haiti
GAGE SPRORS SIMON HEIs IBESs 7e2) ee eee biece 4 South Ave., Ithaca, N. Y.
GAGE, UMRS:) SUSANNA PHELPS 0/87 5.2004. .50 400 4 South Ave., Ithaca, N. Y.
GALLOWAY, DoNNELLY Mee am. 2h. 28s. ee Rural Route No. 6, Columbia, Tenn.
GALLoway, Pror. T. W., A.M., Ph.D., ’or...... 1332 West Wood, Decatur, IIL.
(CARRETSONS p LSUGENE “l2ier ect one konto en 428 Fargo Ave., Buffalo, N. Y.
(GATES EU MERIOO Rae ease Pome aes 1814 Ontario Place, Washington, D. C.
GESNER, BROWER CLAIR, II........ 110 Steadman St., Moncton, N. B., Canada
GittmMorE, Miss GertrupE A., B.A., ’03...... 27 Charlotte Ave., Detroit, Mich.
GOSS HIVEAR Va) Bae MES to uTilnemts, sak ere neem tater: 1919 Sherman Ave., Evanston, Ill.
GRAHAME CHA RTIES Ves NsESt2) wi Dilss tae oso) slcvsverelcnstertevarors Huntington, L. I., N. Y.
GRATIAM EIEN G AMIDE OOEEE tates cnc cnicsaiuy acee eteleuecne Elmsdale, Kansas
GRAVALROIS a HO2: see rat eel alee 3535 Telegraph Ave., Oakland, Cal.
Grosskopr, Ernest C., M.D., ’99........ 187 Thirty-sixth St., Milwaukee, Wis.
GREGER, Prom, DARTING KG.) 076... .-<ckle-as Westminster College, Fulton, Mo.
GutpEREET; JoHN Ex ACM Tits. .o.0.. Nat. Hist. Bldg. U. of I., Urbana, II1.
Guyer wMiienArn Eo) PIDs sir. noe... University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
EVAAG: GD Exel. Daz QOue fteinadce.ctaaeleee oe Liberty Center, Henry Co., Ohio
RLAGEER SNE Eee iL IDI Y PaRee ree Fie el nels aa Hagler Building, Springfield, III.
EVAL PATICEMEOUISE WN Di 1228.2). 4th Avenue and Lock St., Tarentum, Pa.
EVAN ANHAIT | Gas EARaMIES Sie 7051 <icsyoucl seers State and Second Sts., Troy, N. Y.
ELANIKTNISONE Le ls SeOS «NERA lateness. oe state ee, Acie Charleston, III.
EVATRTELD JOH NAV tos hG25s bine cmclicbe lacie cnet ok eee eee ne Malott Park, Ind.
ERATED wha] ytletat ID) Se OOM mie ek nokn Rarer University of Texas, Austin, Tex.
EVEN DERSONG AVY TL ETAN Sta Iiy. . hist ee toate eiclere 1083 E. Eldorado St., Decatur, Il.
MEN em wane Gr, NIMD Py aly vispaciciyeesrrece ere: 554 S. 35th Ave., Omaha, Neb.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 283
Hertzier, ARTHUR E., M.D.; ’06.. 0.0.0... 402 Argyle Bldg., Kansas City, Mo.
HErtTzoc, MAXMILIAN, M.D., ’o1.........-.... 1604 Mallers Bldg., Chicago, Ill.
Eons wATKRED ©). 2002 iiicislstalacis cao we ee 178 Union Ave., Long Branch, N. J.
Pe wEPERBER TY Mis oP). 87 «0s ists ct ctl se ckto aera tie 24 High St., Buffalo, N. Y.
PrTON Pe OAVIDICLARK, AvM.. M.D! ?on.s {sock oes 1240 O St., Lincoln, Neb.
FMTORTE A MAUDVIGH C7122)... 6 5: Meadowdale, Snohomish County, Washington
Honnrs) PREDERICK S.,; Ph,D:, 90... .. Indiana Med. School, Indianapolis, Ind.
REO SISUINGGS HV VMAS He acts Salers dejetc. aye eves stay etaud soy ssereuateleneuatite 49 6th St., LaGrange, III.
FLOW ARDS GEORGE,0 1264 d..0 oo. esved Sitwell Vale, Moorgate, Rotherham, Eng.
Howarp, Rosert Nessirt, ’12..Ookiep, Namaqualand, Cape Province, S. Africa
EVOW MAND eEnENRYs Ro AU. 208... 06s cece se 217 Summer St., Buffalo, N. Y.
TivESW PREDERTC)E, 02.5.0... 5... Woodcliff-on-Hudson, Weehawken P. O., N. J.
Jackson, Dante Dana, B.S., ’o9......... 930 President St., Brooklyn, N. Y.
An Sea a NE VEGI Te. eae cso elee'e 1231 Locust St., Philadelphia, Pa.
ERESs EROR MR UE. OTT 38h 5.5). Sek Iowa Wesleyan University, Mt. Pleasant, Ia.
re mnae re NIMEAY TIDI 6, i Sisieaia, vile e2cbdiede aya evaselelova Science Hall, Indianola, Ia.
ER VIS EL ORACEM aE hinn DInyscsclnetciedsscoces oot 8 Charles St., Houlton, Maine
OUNSONS ES Mi Biel 2) ciexaicicl vier ate -telsielew were aicne a Sielnaren Joplin, Mo., R. F. D. 4-147
JoHNson, Franx S., M.D., F.R.M.S., ’93...... 2521 Prairie Ave., Chicago, Ill.
ONES EDENRY ENEELEY)) (08... 60400000000 sees 32 Lincoln St., Brookline, Mass.
ORDA ES ROM le Eis 2! 25 se peyclet sy si0,s-sse ars University Place, Charlottesville, Va.
ACSC EM OPA NCE OO), ccaic sic oeicisasise rsieltte einterhe lnreie 610 Lake St., Madison, Wis.
PAGER MEAN ee ROR. En) ©), PHD: 12sec wanes idacces cess Jefferson City, Tenn.
ESBEPOGG a auite MIND) 77800 52s. sks 5 c.ye's 202 Manchester St., Battle Creek, Mich.
RSME OHS Jit bes 7TD)\.)ascichs we siclsd'e ele ss ..Baylor University, Waco, Texas
KINCAID, Trevor, A.M., ’12........ University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.
SCI TMGEE GN, E15 2 [BE CA re re De ne ces a ee 1o15 Blondeau St., Keokuk, Ia.
FOROID) GHARLES: Av! PhD00... ...: University of California, Berkeley, Cal.
RCM LG mer POMEL Pe i Sh oes folsvabevale adele wish 32 S. Fourth St., Easton, Pa.
SG. Leb GAS wae Bee 0d 6s] DDR oy PRIA Cin cre cits es mernises cy ON RARE A Cs Or
Meee eat ca ahs Starches 300 Highland Ave., Chestnut Hill, Philadelphia, Pa.
IDARUBERSME Cipe NG TOE Serra ses onto 4 aby Ha S ora So a He irate ae sits RR ee
Borner nctt Bank of New South Wales, Warwick, Queensland, Australia
IGANDAGRE iE, Plat WB WAL 0203 sk) o6 dadicrnntone Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio
ABAUN Me VITGPAT Ac NOO., 4 <)cars.orceleletersi colette fraltiels 451 Jackson Blvd., Chicago, Ill.
WARES GEORGE RO: UTD. Sea suoe.<\ oc University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.
ILAT I EUAINE INS VE ee hE DD) DAS ead Stal Re LSE Wotey a. ae aa nn bana Rang
Cg COO UIG OG CGC ora 1644 Morse Ave., Rogers Park, Chicago, III.
LatiMER, Homer B., M.A., ’11..Neb. Wesleyan Univ., University Place, Neb.
Lawson, Stuart JouHNsToN, M.D., ’11... Mohican Hotel, New London, Conn.
LEHENBAUER, PHILIP, A.M., ’1I.......: Nat. Hist. Bldg., U. of I., Urbana, IIl.
WEREYRE GhETEODORE; WMG, oLTsice« «006 cs beens odes oer Bitter Root Inn, Montana
EERP EA MOL TARRY, OG: A4/)%:..5 aol en Waa ie ies ee cee 336 Pine St., Reading, Pa.
Lewis, Mrs. KATHERINE B., ’89...‘‘Elmstone,” 656 Seventh St., Buffalo, N. Y.
Bra See IWAN Woh oe cea siataeichs-olnrd eee ee eis 406 Galena St., Dixon, II.
284 LIST OF MEMBERS
ENE: EDWARD \DIDIS S20. eee cccioe 1104 Granite Bldg., Rochester, N. Y.
apiaretsibaee UV NEL ACIS NSE GEN 3:3 5.5 eiebad ae idace phe woes ae Gee Nashville, Tenn.
Howe VAnoiPH O02. cette peek bok an a 48 Cumberland St., Rochester, N. Y.
LoNnGFELLow, Rospert Capes, M.S., M.D., ’11........ 1611 22nd St., Toledo, O.
Looss, ArtHurR, Ph.D. (Lips.), ’05...Govt. School of Medicine. Cairo, Egypt
EUEERAELARODD “SCOTTI Asta eee cerca eee etalon foretold North Gorham, Maine
Lyon, Howarp N., M.D., ’84...........55 828 N. Wheaton Ave., Wheaton, III.
Marr, GrorceE Henry, M.E., ’11......:...... 94 Silver St., Waterville, Maine
ManrsHatt, Comins, M.D., ’96.......55<3 2507 Penn. Ave., Washington, D. C.
MARSH AE. Rr: API aD HieO7i meee s ss te ene Rockford College, Rockford, Ill.
MARSHATT, AW. -Ss, PHD i ri2se oc a:.53¢2e08 139 E. Gilman St., Madison, Wis.
Muassry, Prom Bt {B/Se tree ee near br sicbca e Clemson College, S. C.
MASTERMAN? HLMER By 9704.5 Sisk. .a enn R. F. D. No. 2, New London, Ohio
MASSEY SP RORLO Bo sno nol a Rand txstew. tel brorce cut daetee erate Clemson College, S. C.
MATHER SE. Maps Phas loos anaes sto esee 168 West High St., Detroit, Mich.
MAYWALD, FREDERICK J., ’02........ 1028 Seventy-second St., Brooklyn, N. Y.
MceGaria, Arsert: PRD, "800.4-.00. 00. 315 E. Twenty-second St., Chicago, Ill.
McCraven, Bonner N., ’04...........055 1203 McKinney Ave., Houston, Tex
Mc bDonann, RO Es “Soh ip 255 cass sc cdaes dae Mereniee deen ae Glen Rose, Texas
MICKAVANOSEPE: Odi. idea ea. en AKesaen as taaees as 259 Eighth St., Troy, N. Y.
McKeever, Frep L., FIRMS. ’06: -.......4. 429 Pender St., Vancouver, B. C.
NrRcen > Ay (CLIFFORD, “IME I UE R.M.S 5 820. iac ave kgs vee ss baa ee
AACS MSO ee Ree A er 324 Montgomery St., Syracuse, N. Y.
MERGERS Wie PR DICGUG Peneeh 25 ae Ser etetarenne 200 E. State St., Athens, Ohio
METCALF, PRoF) ZENO Ps BAGS tI2: cc12.:: A. & M. College, W. Raleigh, N. C.
IMiSVDR) ENFAGC TS Otis noe ta sce ae heen, 5 18 W. 27th St., New York City
Minter. CHARLES Hi. “ii. 2.22. Med. School, John Hopkins U., Baltimore, Md.
Mitter, Joun A.,Ph.D., F.R.M.S., ’89........ 44 Lewis Block, Buffalo, N. Y.
Mittrr, Ruporr ©, PiiG:, MDS rr. cin.e.- 6 North Pearl St., Buffalo, N. Y.
MINEEHART, Pror. VELEAR LeEroy, A:B., 22. c5065000 oc soo. 0 Morgantown, Ky.
MOCKED. a) thts, (SRi8O Retacian enc eet > ath are Burr Block, Lincoln, Neb.
Mornrrr. Fis MsD iy O76tey.octo coach 341 W. Fifty-seventh St., New York City
Moopy, Rosert O., M.D., ’07...... Hearst Anat. Lab. U. of Cal., Berkeley, Cal.
MORRIS} CAPER7 122-5, .. seen. s Leafield, Gibsons Hill, Norwood, London, S. E.
Murree, Pror. E. H., A.M., LL.D., ’12...... Brenau College, Gainesville, Ga.
NORRIS, PRor) “HRARRY) WiAsino, (FT) le ed dae cues 816 East St., Grinnell, Iowa
NORTON, (@HAREESLELS MEDE Biri esseeecrccne 118 Lisbon St., Lewiston, Maine
NOURSES GEORGE AID: VOSmUas santo Ue oe LCE ee center: Charlestown, N. H.
OgiEvEr. G. SeeBISHSc: Da iote ae te eae 1006 N. Union St., Lincoln, Ill.
Onpr Wor SON ss Sacts ot. coer eee ees Ch Se sere 216 Spring St., Portland, Me.
Orcurrt AS WB Ss MAL 126s aa, 308 Natural History Bldg., Urbana, III.
ORUETAS DOMINGOU DEM 2a clase ieraiiclcd saelnerie octane Gijon (Asturias), Spain
Osszorn, Pror. Herpert, M.S., ’05..... Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio
One sElanvev, Ne waa Oaeteniae ate eee Spencer Lens Co., Buffalo, N. Y.
PALMERS UHOMASCHATIGEYA BB 59s)) WD arsrsstevoceoetevonstete) reise Media, Pa., R. F. D.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 285
AREMET ROR Wi wks IMCS. Phy 412) oss centre e Station A., Ames, lowa
Parker, Horatio N., ’99........ College of Agriculture U. of I, Urbana, Ill.
IBARSERTAVELENRY) VisiAs; "A. Mb TE coktus es 0s ~ 122 West 81 St., New York, N. Y.
PATRICKS RANK, (Pit D).5) OTs 6 tise. d ogeree 603 Dwight Bldg., Kansas City, Mo.
PSA BEVIS TDS Nios Sid) orl aia bi csettateyayaiieieisyeiereceleiaue ehvietaleiste P. ©. Box'.503;,, Alt6ona, Pa:
REAGcrRE, PRor, WEon DY Ph. D.,)7'ro...) 22% Public Museum, Milwaukee, Wis.
IBENINOGI SDWARD) 770. «6 0's cies soesie 3609 Woodland Ave., Philadelphia, Pa.
Peterson, NIELS FREDERICK, IP. 2.. 0000s cise see La. S. U., Baton Rouge, La.
AWN MIVUAGNIUS MISO: TOR aie list kroiiciemace lovaialele Same ietavel te olets Meadville, Pa.
(Ph RO ors I PSE oo Oe a ne 16 N. Summit, Ypsilanti, Mich.
SERRE Sea VIR Sau Oa GraG EIS i OTT os. Sys. :4) eer susyeracer tiered ites Arlo Flats, Lincoln, Neb.
EpEET MELD) VVPADRID PLSD) ans ica! yan, si saa) apsis G. o.d Wa blavel Ble hd Vilas weusieneichore sia wieuslsierelorereneyss
...Madeley House, Bulstrode Way, Gerrard’s Cross, Bucks, England
Potiarp, Pror. J. W. H., M.D.,’12.Washington and Lee Univ., Lexington, Va.
Pounp, Roscor, A.M., Ph.D., ’o8..... Harvard Law School, Cambridge, Mass.
ROWERS BOWANB., “I2s.c..<60000.0 06 Midlothian, Texas, R. R. No. 2, Box 27
Prien, Pror. Otto L.; M.D.V., ’11........ 5 and 6 Fedl. Bldg., Laramie, Wyo.
BREN CHRO SERED HMOs bis sisie cers <5!E1e)e/<. 0,0) ,)2,0 2:6 sio E. Clark St., Champaign, Ill.
IBVBURN A GEORGE ph GOs) ois) 2% ois,0,001030 0,6 «aie es or 1o1r H St., Sacramento, Cal.
IVANISERR SH ETP ES TB ards tales Wale asics ofS % siesltieeys » 203 Seneca St., Manlius, N. Y.
VAIN SORE MS RAWCTON lds.) OO) cisheisicisdcrs/odie nose ss «/a:04 «eoeidluls fieraetaepameredis
Ee clots ees U. S. Bureau of Animal Industry, Washington, D. C.
RCO UmERM Bt ME Die TO aS. ahs visntern dd oh lslenle enw «cle tlere aes Clinton, Conn.
RAVAREENIVAMIUN, Els, TTins cists dais. ¥ 0 cise tele Pine Grove, Schuylkill Co., Pa.
Rector, Frank Lesuiz, M.D., ’11.......... 36 Forty-first St., Brooklyn, N. Y.
Rear SR MOAURIOE otc citer (Oke) ac Slaciaw eietngfeVsisrajsiess alelbwiece't MOAR eS Tarkio, Mo.
Reese, enor ArperT iv; Ph.D. (Hop:), ’05......88 5.4. deen bh oeedade ss
Fe ee TE OIE ROLES ICL ERROR W. Va. Univ., Morgantown, W. Va.
IRISTID: TAURI SS eNO R CeO BCR Cre Kuala Lumpur, Selangor, Fed. Malay States
REYBURN, Rosert, M.D., ’90............ 2129 F St., N. W., Washington, D. C.
RICHARDS, AUTE)) PhNDs, 712s. bc5 yee ose 2206 San Antonio St., Austin, Tex.
RECHARDSH MSIPAS EGOS aa 5 tise teehee cel esie dress 06 1114 Floyd St., Lynchburg, Va.
RicHArpSs, FREDERICK WM., ’II....212 Notre Dame St. West, Montreal, Can.
IBRRES DOV EETIEST Elicrae a's osre|s 66) e108, «00 4 Fe 65 Rose St., Battle Creek, Mich.
ROBURDS ie Miah Talhah. ol Richa olseieinvesice 2s 345 West Michigan St., Chicago, Il.
ROGERS HAV VAIL MER US | Mei ye tay ialmstshs io, cy o}eceyscs, « 6) <isverevaaloletsielele hesels yeualeyevahd Decatur, Ill.
Ross, LutHer SHERMAN, S.M., “I1.........+%- 1308 27 St., Des Moines, Iowa.
RAISE |G MINIS) ene TD Wee kien tk. Meaie oticinte he wie a jahclarard Sieyayepernyyerouey Hudson, Ohio
SCOLT Pe Wisp lone Gecess. « Kansas State Agricultural College, Manhattan, Kans.
SHrAndiz tele 1. BS. ;AcMs O4s)a2.3,. Bureau Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.
SHARPEN ROR ue WV. OG. Sicha ao.) eie/e's 8010 177 Emerson Pl., Brooklyn, N. Y.
RoraAgeE GE Ee, POSS J atlsefare se siad di sielsm et sere ce 809 Adams St., Bay City, Mich.
SHERIDAN, Wo. F., ’05....U. S. S. Flusses, (care Postmaster, New York City
SreUiazed GENAS SE Sob is cu aise o. Sevete Clete s are Seventh St. Docks, Hoboken, N. J.
SHEVA EE MIR OD Gs Ha panst Ry aeltee «, Nelatare oieieyereyerensreye go2 Pine St., Philadelphia, Pa.
286 LIST OF MEMBERS
SrocumM AGHAG shape he Dy MED c78s acces cence oaier 218 13th St., Toledo, Ohio
SMrADTMEOWARD i 125 aetna nae eee 203 West Avenue, Jenkintown, Pa.
SmITH, Pror. FRANK, A.M., ’12.......... 913 W. California Ave., Urbana, Ill.
SM ETE A). eo OO res = oot cite Seka oeteets 131 Carondelet St., New Orleans, La.
SMITHivs MEIEQDORE WV MOS arinsss eee cine cee cee 171 La Salle St., Chicago, Ill.
Suevra, umn Ripper, Ph Di705 32 0.22080. +o 106 E. 12th St., Topeka, Kan.
SoarsiGs) DSeB IR: MASS JO7a i ateictac sis crcl ole tre Oe ee ee
hk ae teehee van te 37 Dryburgh Road, Putney, London, S. W., England
Sotomon, Harry CAESAR, ’II......... 1044 Bonnie Brae St., Los Angeles, Cal.
STEBBINS, 9). Els, JR (PRD MD 01). 2.1.3. 01 vt 50 E. qtst St., New York City
STEVENS ME ROR VEL (Her MUSs PID np kib eae wee eels hele Seen Dies Ory e eens
Be Sear eer ee ere Agricultural Experiment Station, Gainesville, Fla.
STEWART, MAupE GERTRUDE, B.L., ’12...... 410 Winona St., Northfield, Minn.
SToKEs SAGGs MUD: Prms cence beiateteor 503 Brandeis Bldg., Omaha, Neb.
STURDEVANT, LAZELLE B., A.B., B.S., ’03..... Univ. of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
SUMMERS: Ee ROR: Mice ELA AOG) vel Societe ei ehersieeoeioeieeeneer Ames, Iowa
SUMNERW GEORGE 125 ee cones oe eee P. O. Box 1110, Montreal, Quebec
SwWINGee,| Pron! Leroy) DD} 0055/2 st. :tosaievels Univ. of Wyoming, Laramie, Wyo.
TPAGGART! INVARGARET® Wey diac. Gisis.c ieee selec 805 W. Oregon St., Urbana, Ill.
Tuomas, ARTHUR H., ’99........ Twelfth and Walnut Sts., Philadelphia, Pa.
DINEMENS | GEORGE, OO eettetert ht eieior let ove rel 1410 E. Genesee St., Syracuse, N. Y.
Topp; JaseEs We ‘BAG MSDs are ctu Teac Seu sas eee ene Boulder, Colo.
TRENNER, SIMEON, ’I2..... 6328 Jefferson St., Germantown, Philadelphia, Pa.
AUER: PRO SAH MD) MEhD). T2545 c ie ssisce cae serine rion eee
RECN Ee eR oe ores University of Virginia, Charlottesville, Va.
\NADENTINE SEIERBERT Riese il 4 ule® ure ciecinate serene 141 Milk St., Boston, Mass.
VAN CrEAvE Hiantzy Jy 1b s) hon sbalted 617 S. Wright St., Champaign, III.
WiEEDER} ) MevAG SiMe er iS5 aren ise evoerate Broad and Queen Sts., Lyons, N. Y.
WiarreOPREepERTCK (G22 "PHFD LTO. 25 0% ch elora chovaenrs atbiona hte oo rometortle eee
Hae Medical Department, Western Reserve Univ., Cleveland, Ohio
Warkrr Erna OR) PhD e 07h. ace cs etr University of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
WiATACER Th ADDEUS MIMD mt 1. tercieleielerarets 33 East High St., Detroit, Mich.
WOALETNG SUVA COO) bi catocieuiccce cietoecia cee icleio oth crelstehe tctokavete totais Stanton, lowa
WIARTON SIREN Dele Niko hs) ecO5teircteetelctetaiels Kenyon Coll., Gambier, Ohio
WiaARnRICK J WiGH TOE Oe br ne areitiecauttes saeidletens 306 E. 43rd St., Chicago, Il.
Warp, Henry B., A.M.. Ph.D., ’87......... University of Illinois, Urbana, III.
WIASTENEYS) OEVARDOEPED #. OOmiie citicias ave cio ais Oe cloteroteie lotta ele ciara tet ROR eens
Se me knek ee Enoggera Reservoir, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia
Watson, Dri iGrypEsEMin, SI sinatets «cere eto sine as se cre Kingwood, W. Va.
WiEIGHTADAND GHAS) Hee SOs eieenc eae aries 5859 Michigan Ave., Chicago, Ill.
Wianrer) Grow © aM Sol estes sie ciel takcteloteteistete = Box 416, Fergus Falls, Minn.
Wier s PAU SearAL Minton .cesere Zoological Department U. of I., Urbana. IIL.
WELLMAN: (PROF E. |GRErGH TON.) MADE 706: 4. sear aioe cielo aie oiciels < loterete eters
AAA ts Era ate Med. Dept. Tulane University, New Orleans, La.
Wiikeren Ee 9:, PhD 2 WOO. o. tr. nes Gtarete's 79 Chapel St., Albany, N. Y.
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY 287
WHE LPLey, H. M., M.D., Ph.G., F.R.M.S., ’09..2342 Albion Pl., St. Louis, Mo
Wernrre. Cmasides MLD (O25 Jo sc, sipartarueta asta sorea ene Center Sandwich, N. H.
Wuittey, JAMEs M., M.D., F.R.M.S., ’85....504 S. Main St., Petersburg, IL.
Wrermney, Gro: ANSEL) BUMEES nie 2. son eect 235 Main St., Lewiston, Maine
WV APARD IVUARTEN Sih Oars a sieverteleetalnveielers 21 Walnut St., New Britain, Conn.
RDA MESONG War. FARSI, 707). cis sisi sidvere/e ceils Same ee ok ele Adlets obabate we
Se MN oes Eels seth Sens 9 Plewlands Terrace, Edinburgh, Scotland
Wotcott, Ropert Henry, A.M., M.D., ’98...Univ. of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb.
MOORE HTTP VW. Ofistasts sells c devetiierc. cisco (Westmount) Johnstown, Pa.
VO STERTE® SSD ABI op ae OAM 0 [oe a aE BR RETOUR At Mee Wate Alpine, Cal.
ZAPERE HE REDERICK ©. MIDS 705.06 cc. eeteie 3431 Lexington St., Chicago, III.
PriccmeARmnCcare Or oNinvon ONT) 25 cen ee aes Oates erate Jena, Germany
RIK e DAVID Mes. BIS! \OSicc ouicniace ieee cee ee 59 Clark St., Chicago, Il.
SUBSCRIBERS
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES............- Logan Square, Philadelphia, Pa.
IBABCOCKMSCIENTIRIG, LABRARV © sae. stosc8 ae cp eaa le nie cain rane Plainfield, N. J.
BIBLIOTHECA DE FACULTAD DE MEDICINA................ Montevideo, Uraguay
BOSTON M UBD TG METBRAR Vier 57 0's sispe's: alefee a ole ie a cialcleier oo TorerrereOene Boston, Mass.
Boston Society or NaturAL HistTory............ Berkeley St., Boston, Mass.
BrooKLyNn INSTITUTE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES..Lafayette Ave., Brooklyn, N. Y.
BURMAUPOB ES CUBNGCEY LABRARY sis srclerae ntctavcle ciel teudictbuaevase plaice tues Manila, P. I.
ERGHS SMV MIS Sih olan a) ske oieyors sa cree meres 126 Summer St., Boston, Mass.
GARMERAY ORY PAN S028 Sines css Casilla de Correo-69, Montevideo, Uraguay
(GAMINEGIED EH REE IOIBRAR Yn sare nistein sc iois fel cverone vince oo olabarcjeveravsieleicte Allegheny, Pa.
Cos uBan OYE TEE) DAR TYR Ge en has ARE Re RH A BOS Pittsburg, Pa.
HICACOR WINIVERSEDY! OIBRARY).2leiicte tis cteie. sore siete oo bleh o/b ew nie Chicago, III.
COVORADO! STATE, NORMAT,, ETBRARY <5. od oe cscs es ess aSewee clos Greeley, Colo.
CoLumBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARY..... 16th St. and Amsterdam Ave., N. Y. City
DAR TERS DROSS COM vei tac iis vice ce fected ss P. O. Box 174, Capetown, S. Africa
DECATUR TEACHERS’ PEDAGOGICAL LIBRARY........ Public Schools, Decatur, Il.
HD PURO UE UB el Che Ee UBRIARI Von et fin ciate ar aisieovessileier wis os eaoter anne onere oe ionetolate Detroit, Mich.
DTN 2 (GOS id ce ROD CRIA OR OR Oo 37 Soho Square, London, England
EEO COGUIMBIANTUNELISEUIM.. sc! + /ipclt nee csisree wiobeustalovels le eiereistele aloe Chicago, Ill.
DECOM Diy a ea 159 East 61st St., New York
LEN UiRIETE at Sl Os Sea ee eae Westboro Insane Hospital, Westboro, Mass.
BAZ ENE RWI AL. 0k code ces eels 4575 Forest Park Blvd., St. Louis, Mo.
I GUENIGe lA BORATORY4 cist cicisic ciota colors bleach het aoe nee Burlington, Vt.
Int1no1s StaTE LABORATORY OF NATURAL History Liprary........ Urbana, Iil.
NGWwAeSTATE COLLEGE. WIBRARY. ..).J22 esc cs sce reee eee Station A, Ames, Iowa
ameESE MaritKIN UNIVERSITY LImRARY. 00.2). f28 esc nc eles oe ee en Decatur, Ill.
_ TE Go I Nea i re EL cs OS es Ses Chicago, Ill.
Jouns Hopkins Univ. Liprary..... Berge boriromotsng Adon fe Baltimore, Md.
288 SUBSCRIBERS
LABORATORY. OF: HISTOLOGY: AND \EEMBRYOLOGY.)..)\5. sce ce <> cracce serene
PS 2 UN ad i re nr mn Ue University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn.
EecANe Seamrorn) Je. Wav. TepRaRy Pon be ew etic es Stanford, Cal.
L’Instituto OswaLpo Cruz (CHEZ Mr. A. SCHLACHTER)...........+..-.
A HARE ed CoP Re tatters or 20 Rue des grandes Augustius, Paris, France
MissouRrD BOTANICAL | GARDEN: 52)... ciel. cicien letcineinie oeielelets ole chalets re St. Louis, Mo.
Museum CoMPARATIVE ZooLoGy (HARVARD)............+-- Cambridge, Mass.
New Anmsmire Spare IETRRARY\.). 5) cite cise crepe reisiors chee eteler ele Concord, N. H.
New York AcADEMY OF MEDICINE..... 17 W. Forty-third St., New York City
INE WORT DUBLIG IETBRARY +) s5/er cle lclaice ersieriend 476 Fifth Ave., New York City
INE WomORK SDATEWISTBRARYS: oo ciiois stow e\screleietoteige Serial Section, Albany, N. Y.
OO) STATE HUNIVERSITY! IEIBRARY:.. «acon selec cleicse ciere rtoe ere Columbus, Ohio
@arkmaA VP UBLIC. IBRARY? oc: ce sis o0's oc eis ere ye erors tore aioe cieretoehe aoe Omaha, Neb.
SGIENTIEIG AULBRARV a ameminic ce a eae U. S. Patent Office, Washington, D. C.
SYRACUSE” PUBLIC, ILIBRARY. Were cistern sisters cise e ecole ererereererre ine Syracuse, N. Y.
U. S. MepicaL Museum AND Liprary..Surg. Gen.’s Office, Washington, D. C.
WINIVERSITY (OF) CATIFORNTA® IOTBRARY7. cls leicicisisleioteie sof slejeieveltelel sie eile Berkeley, Cal.
WNiversity OF MONTANA eTBRARY (5; o. ocsciess ecw ee sees ss Missoula, Mont.
WINIVERSITY OF “NEBRASKA IUIBRARY: ceiccccn cc ccs cciemelsiais eiteicee Lincoln, Neb.
UnIvERSITY OF TENNESSEE Liprary..College of Agriculture, Knoxville, Tenn.
INDEX
Abbott, J. F., Progress in Evolutionary
Thought, 17
Academy of Natural Sciences, Centen-
ary of, 46
Alga, a New Microscopic, for America,
49
Algae, Polymorphism in, 42
Amebae, Free Pure Cultures of Mam-
malian Parasites, 116
Ameboid Motions in Protoplasm, 269
Animal Tumors and “Crown Gall” in
Plants, 40
Anopheles, 120
Apparatus for Laboratory Photography,
199
Arranging and Mounting Scales of In-
sects and Diatoms, 133
Artificially Induced Segmentation in
Eggs of Toad, 41
Bacteria, Longevity of in Presence of
Lactic Acid, 44
Bacteria in River Water, 119
Bacterial Canker of Plum Twigs, by
I. M. Lewis, 145
Blood in Relation to Size, in Rabbits,
269
Binocular Microscopes, 277
Blight of the Mesquite, A, by F. D.
Heald and I. M. Lewis, 5
Bushman’s Poison for Arrowheads,
from Larvae, 120
Butterfly Scales, 133
Can Sperm Cells Develop Without the
Egg?, 211
Canker of Plum Twigs, by I. M. Lewis,
145
Cell, As a Complex of Organized Units,
The Modern Theory of, by E. W.
Roberts, 85
Cells in Vitro, Another Step in the
Study of, 41
Cells, Life, 205
Cell Size and Nuclear Size, 208
Cell Structure, General Discussion of,
88
Chromatic Reduction in Cell Develop-
ment, I17
Cinnamon Oil, for Examining Rough
Minerals for Inclusions, 133
Clearing Large Objects, 44
Clinical Studies of Epiphysis Cerebri,
* 236
Cockroach as an Agent of Contamina-
tion, 120
Condenser, The Leitz Concentric Re-
flecting, 47
Continuous Division in Paramecium,
Condition of, 119
Cort, W. W. North American Frog
Bladder Flukes, 151
Cox, Charles F, 51
Crossing in. Spirogyra, 44
Cytoplasmic and Nuclear Connections,
274
Dark-Field. Observation, A New Me-
dium for, 47
“Darwinism,” Some Latter-day Aspects
of, 17
Digests of Progress in Biology, 17, 231
Disintegration of Micro-organisms, 42
Drawing Apparatus, 134
Ductless Glands, in Toad, 42
Ecological Succession of Plants and
Animals, 117
Edgerton, C. W., The Melanconiales,
243
Effects of Darkness on Goldfish, 214.
Elrod, Morton J., The Lakes of Glacier
National Park, 11
Epiphysis Cerebri, Results of Recent
Studies of, 231
Eugenics, Heredity and, 271, 272
290
Euglena, A Red, 44
Evolutionary Thought, Progress in, 17
Examination of a Living Flea, 205
Experimental Studies of Epiphysis
Cerebri, 239
Fish, Adaptations to Temperature, 211
Fish, A Plea for, 271
Flukes, North American Frog Bladder,
by W. W. Cort, 151
Function of the Male Accessory Repro-
ductive Glands in Mammals, 213
Fungi Imperfecti, 243; order of, 245
Galloway, T. W., The Cleveland Meet-
ing, 267; Notes and Reviews, 35, I15,
199, 267
Gage, S. H., Recent Developments in
Drawing by the Aid of Projection
Apparatus, 177
Glacier National Park, The Lakes of,
by Morton J. Elrod, 11
Gonium, Structure and Development of
the Colony, 65
Hankinson, T. L., Report of Treasur-
er, 58
Harper, R. A., Structure and Develop-
ment of Colony in Gonium, 65
Hay Infusions, Protozoa in, 209
Heald, F. D., with I. M. Lewis, A Blight
of the Mesquite, 5
Heredity and Eugenics, 271, 272
Hetrochromosomes in Plants, 41
Histological Studies of Epiphysis Cere-
bri, 232
Honorary Degree to Mr. E. Leitz, Jr.,
216
House Fly: Disease Carrier, 123
Hybrids, Development of Sperm in, 213
Hydatina Senta, Sex Determination in,
210
Hydrachnida, 225
Indexing and Filing Methods for the
Microscopist, 127
Inheritance of Left Handedness, 214
Insects, Injurious, 126
INDEX
Internal Factors Influencing Sex in
Hydatina senta, 210
Internal Organs of the Cockroach, 203
Intestinal Parasite, How to Determine
the Presence of, 132
Intromittent Organ of the
Nature of, 201
Jordan, H. E., Results of Recent Stu-
dies of the Mammalian Epiphysis
Cerebri, 231
Kala Azar and Bedbugs, 208
Laboratory Diagnosis, 122
Lakes of Glacier National Park, The, by
Morton J. Elrod, 11
Lake Louise, I1
Latham, V. A., Suggestions for Ama-
teur Microscopists, 203
Lebertia, Some American, 225
Lewis, I. M., A Bacterial Canker of
Plum Twigs, 145; with F. D. Heald,
A Blight of the Mesquite, 5
Life-cell, 205
Longevity of Bacteria in the Presence
of Lactic Acid, 44
Mackerel, Feeding Habits of, 207
Magnus Pflaum, Report of Custodian,
55
Marr, Geo. H., An Improved Reagent
Stand, 38
Malarial Plasmodia, Culture of, 269
Marshall, Ruth, Some American Le-
bertia, 225
Melanconiales, 243; Collection of Ma-
terial, 243; Method of Examination of
Material, 244; Culture of, 245; Acer-
vulus, 246; Perfect Stages of, 248;
Genera of, 249; Literature of, 265.
Mesquite, A Blight of, by F. D. Heald
and I. M. Lewis, 5
Metallurgical Apparatus, 216
Method of Diagnosis in Syphilis, 116
Microbiology, 206
Microphallus opacus, Notes on the An-
atomy of, 167
Microtome, A New Rotary, 46
Odonata,
AMERICAN MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY
Minutes of the Washington Meeting, 53
Modern Microscopy, I21
Modern Theory of the Cell as a Com-
plex of Organized Units, 85; Intro-
duction and Definition, 85; General
Discussion of Cell Structure, 88;
Comparative Study of Cell, 89;
Theory of Vegetative Cell Structures
and their Relation to the Nucleus, 102
Motions in Protoplasm, Mimicking, 269
Mouth Parts of Insects, Mounting, 212
Myxomycetes, Observations on Plas-
modium of, 40
Needles, Non-Rusting, 205
Nodules on Roots, 270
North American Frog Bladder Flukes,
151
Notes, Reviews, Etc., 35, 115, 199, 267
Notes on the Anatomy of the Trema-
tode, Microphallus opacus, by Sewall
Wright, 167
Nuclear and Cytoplasmic Connections,
274
Officers of Society, List, 3, 63, 143
Ontogeny of Certain Interesting Insect
Structures, 35
Paramecium, Condition of Continuous
Division in, 119
Parasite of the Oyster, Pearl Produc-
ing, 43
Parasitism, A New Form of, 119
Parthenogenic Strains of Hydatina, Re-
invigoration of, 210
Pathological Studies of
Cerebri, 235
Pearl Producing Parasite of the Oyster,
The Adult of, 43
Pellagra As An American Problem, 124
Photo-Micrography, 45
Pineal Body in Mammals, 231
Pollen, Notes on, 270
Polymorphism in Algae, 42
Proceedings of the Society, 53
Protoplasm of Adjacent Protoplasts,
Relation of, 118
Epiphysis
291
Protozoa in Hay Infusions, 209
Rabbits, Blood in Relation to Size in, 269
Reagent Stand, An Improved, Geo. H.
Marr, 39
Recent Developments in Drawing by the
Aid of Projection Apparatus, Used on
the House Lighting System, by Simon
H. Gage, 177
Regeneration of
Dogs, 42
Relation of the Protoplasm of Adjacent
Protoplasts, 118
Report of the
Pflaum, 55
Report of T. L. Hankinson, Treasurer,
58
Report of the Treasurer, J. C. Smith, 56
Reserve of Food in Trees, 118
Roberts, E. W. On the Ontogeny of
Certain Interesting Insect Structures,
35; Modern Theory of the Cell as a
Complex of Organized Units, 85
Scleropycnium, 9
Sex Cells, Effect of X-Ray on, 44
Sexuality in Spores of Mosses, 43
Sexual Fusion in Yeast, 45
Sheppard, E., Thread Attachments be-
tween Nuclear and Cytoplasmic Bod-
ies, 274
Smith, J. C., Report of Treasurer, 56
Sperm, Development of, in Hybrids, 213
Blood Platelets in
Custodian, Magnus
Spirochaeta, Pure Cultures of, 270
Spirochaetes, The, 123
Spirogyra, Crossing in, 44
Spores of Mosses, Sexuality in, 43
Structure and Development of the Col-
ony in Gonium, by R. A. Harper, 65
Study of Variation in Insects, 204
Subscribers, List of, 287
Succession Among Pond Animals, Sea-
sonal, 49
Suggestions for Amateur Microscopists,
203
292
Summary of Account of the Society
During Incumbency of David L. Zook,
Treasurer, 57
Syphilis, A Method of Diagnosis in, 116
Tendrils, Effect of Contact and Tension
on, 211
Terpineol, A New Clearing Agent, 212
Testis Extract, Effect of, on Females, 43
Tolles, R. B., An Early Letter of, 46
Trematode, Microphallus opacus, An-
atomy of, 167
Treponema pallidum in Monkeys, 116
Trypanosome Infection and Comparative
Effectiveness of Primate Serum, I15
Tubercle Bacilli, Examination of Spu-
tum for, 132
INDEX
Typhoid Bacillus in Water, Detection of,
133
Ultra Condenser for Viewing Ultra
Microscopic Particles, 214
Using Newly Hatched Specimens of In-
sects, 204
Water Mites, 225
White Corpuscles and Ductless Glands
in Toad, 42
Whole Mounts of Small Insects, 203
Wright, Sewall, Notes on the Anatomy
of the Trematode, Microphallus
opacus, 167
X-Ray, Effects of on Sex Cells, 44
Yeast, Sexual Fusion in, 45
Zook, David L., Report of Treasurer,
57
i
ea)
Nth
rab.
Wats
Aho
ia
Rae
y
{
oa a a
rn
5
j
wil
QH American Microscopical
| 201 Society
A3 Transactions
230-3: ay
| ea Cialt-s 2)
Biological :
& Medica]
Serials
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY